GE Fanuc Automation

PowerMotion™ Products

Power Mate D and F Motion Controllers

Connection Manual

GFZ-62833EN/01 October 1996

 GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication

Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.

Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.

This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.

©Copyright 1996 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
B–62833EN/01 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING

Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a damage of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION

Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.

NOTE

The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.

Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

s–1
B–62833EN/01 Table of Contents
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1

I HARDWARE
1. PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2. CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

3. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS OF CNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.2 POWER CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.3 DESIGN AND INSTALLATION CONDITIONS OF THE TOOL MAGNETIC CABINET . . . . . . 9
3.4 THERMAL DESIGN OF THE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.4.1 Temperature Rise within the Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.4.2 Cooling by Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.4.3 Heat Loss of Each Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.5 INSTALLING THE HEAT EXCHANGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.5.1 Cooling Fin A/B/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.5.2 Heat Exchanger for CRT/MDI Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.5.3 The Heat Pipe Type Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.5.3.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.6 ACTION AGAINST NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.6.1 Separating Signal Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.6.2 Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.6.3 Connecting the Frame Ground (FG) of the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.6.4 Noise Suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.6.5 Cable Clamp and Shield Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.7 CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.7.1 Installation of the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.7.2 Battery for Memory Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.8 CABLE LEAD–IN DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.9 CONNECTOR LAYOUT OF UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

4. TOTAL CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.1 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR 1–PATH POWER MATE–D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4.1.1 Servo Interface Type A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4.1.2 Servo Interface Type B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.2 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR 2–PATH POWER MATE–D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4.2.1 Servo Interface Type A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4.2.2 Servo Interface Type B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR POWER MATE–F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.3.1 Servo Interface Type A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.3.2 Servo Interface Type B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

5. CONNECTION OF INPUT POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

5.1 POWER SUPPLY CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
5.2 POWER CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
5.3 POWER TURN–ON SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
5.4 POWER TURN–OFF SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

c–1
 Table of Contents B–62833EN/01

5.5 MOMENTARY POWER FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO MACHINE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

6.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
6.2 CONNECTION OF THE FANUC I/O LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
6.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
6.2.2 Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Electric Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
6.2.3 Connection of FANUC I/O Link Optical Fiber Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
6.3 CONNECTION OF THE FANUC I/O UNIT–MODEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
6.3.1 Structure of FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
6.3.2 Outer Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
6.3.3 Mounting and Dismounting Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
6.3.4 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
6.3.5 Connecting Input Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
6.3.6 Grouding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
6.3.7 Connecting Signal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
6.3.8 Connecting with I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
6.3.9 Digital Input/Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
6.3.10 Correspondence Between I/O Signals and Addresses in a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.3.11 Number of Points for I/O Unit–MODEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
6.4 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
6.4.1 Input Signal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
6.4.2 Output Signal Specifications (Source Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
6.4.3 Specifications of the Output Signals (Sink Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
6.5 CONNECTION OF I/O CARD D/E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
6.5.1 Connector Layout for I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
6.5.2 Details of DI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
6.5.3 Details of DO Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
6.5.4 Dimensions of I/O Card D, E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
6.6 CONNECTION OF I/O CARD A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
6.6.1 Connector Layout for I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6.6.2 Details of DI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
6.6.3 Details of DO Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
6.6.4 Dimensions of I/O Card A, B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
6.7 CONNECTION OF BUIL–IN I/O CARD C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
6.7.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
6.7.2 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
6.7.3 Machine Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
6.7.4 Details of DI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
6.7.5 Details of DO Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
6.8 CONNECTION OF BUIL–IN I/O CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
6.8.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
6.8.2 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
6.8.3 Machine Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
6.8.4 Details of DI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
6.8.5 Details of DO Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
6.9 CONNECTION OF BUIL–IN I/O CARD D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
6.9.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
6.9.2 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
6.9.3 Machine Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
6.9.4 Details of DI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
6.9.5 Details of DO Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
6.10 CONNECTION OF BUIL–IN I/O CARD A, B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

c–2
B–62833EN/01 Table of Contents

6.10.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

6.10.2 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
6.10.3 Machine Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
6.10.4 Details of DI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
6.10.5 Details of DO Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
6.11 MACHINE INTERFACE CONNECTION EXAMPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
6.11.1 When the One–path Power Mate–D is Being Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
6.11.2 When the Two–path Mate–D Unit is Being Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
6.11.3 When the Power Mate–F is Being Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
6.12 STANDARD LADDER PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
6.12.1 When the Power Mate–D is Being Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
6.12.2 When the Power Mate–F is Being Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
6.13 CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O LINK–II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

7.1 CRT/MDI UNIT INTERFACE (SIMULTANEOUS BLOCK START INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
7.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
7.1.2 CRT Interface (with Simultaneous Block Start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
7.1.3 CRT Interface (without Simultaneous Block Start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
7.1.4 Interface Between Multiple Power Mates (with Simultaneous Block Start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
7.1.5 Interface Between Multiple Power Mate (without Simultaneous Block Start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
7.1.6 Device Selection Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
7.1.7 Power Supply Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
7.1.8 Detachable CRT/MDI Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
7.1.9 CRT Terminating Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
7.2 SEPARATE CRT AND SEPARATE MDI INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
7.2.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
7.2.2 Video and Power Supply Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
7.3 SEPARATE PDP AND SEPARATE MDI INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
7.3.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
7.3.2 Video and Power Supply Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
7.3.3 Adjusting the Separate PDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
7.4 SEPARATE LCD AND SEPARATE MDI INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
7.4.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
7.4.2 Video and Power Supply Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
7.4.3 Device Selection Switch Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
7.4.4 Adjusting the Separate LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
7.5 CONNECTION TO A DETACHABLE LCD/MDI UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
7.5.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
7.5.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
7.5.3 Detachable LCD/MDI Unit Connected to One Power Mate–D Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
7.5.4 When One Detachable LCD/MDI Unit is Shared by Multiple Power Mate–D Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
7.5.4.1 When the simultaneous block start function is not used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
7.5.4.2 When the simultaneous block start function is used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
7.5.5 Example of Connecting a Detachable LCD/MDI Unit to the Two–path Power Mate–D . . . . . . . . . . . 244
7.6 CONNECTION WITH THE DPL/MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
7.7 CONNECTING A POSITION DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
7.8 I/O DEVICE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
7.8.1 RS–232–C Interface Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
7.8.2 RS–232–C Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
7.8.3 Fanuc Floppy Cassette and Handy File Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
7.8.4 When External Power Supply is Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
7.9 MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

c–3
 Table of Contents B–62833EN/01

7.9.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

7.9.2 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
7.9.3 Cable Connection for the Manual Pulse Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
7.9.4 Signal Specifications for Manual Pulse Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
7.9.5 Connecting a Manual Pulse Coder to Multiple Power Mates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
7.9.6 Sharing of a Manual Pulse Generator by the Two–path Power Mate–D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
7.10 SPINDLE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
7.10.1
Series Spindle Amplifier Interface (Serial Spindle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
7.10.2 Analog Spindle Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
7.10.3 Position Coder Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
7.11 SERVO INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
7.11.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
7.11.2 Servo Amplifier Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
7.11.3 Serial Pulse Coder Interface (Type A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
7.11.4 Separate Type Pulse Coder Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
7.11.5 APC Battery Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
7.11.6 Sharing a Servo Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
7.12 CONNECTION TO THE HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
7.12.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
7.12.2 Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
7.12.3 Connection Allowing the Handy Operator’s Panel to be Detached . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
7.12.4 Keeping the Handy Operator’s Panel Connected at All Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
7.12.5 Power Mate–D Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
7.13 FANUC I/O LINK CONNECT UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
7.14 CONNECTING A TOUCH PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
7.14.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
7.14.2 Supported Touch Panels (Digital Corporation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
7.14.3 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
7.14.4 Power–on Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
7.14.5 Power Mate–D Data that Can be Read from the Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
7.14.6 Details of Cable J123 and the Terminating Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
7.15 HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
7.15.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
7.15.2 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
7.15.3 Supplement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

II PMC INTERFACE
1. ADDRESS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
1.1 POWER MATE–D FOR 1–PATH CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
1.2 POWER MATE–D FOR 2–PATH CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
1.3 POWER MATE–F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

2. SIGNAL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

2.1 I/O SIGNAL LIST (ORDER OF GROUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
2.2 I/O SIGNAL LIST (ORDER OF SYMBOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

3. READY SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

3.1 CNC READY SIGNAL (OUTPUT) MA<F001#7> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
3.2 SERVO READY SIGNAL (OUTPUT) SA <F000#6> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

c–4
B–62833EN/01 Table of Contents

4. RESET & EMERGENCY STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

4.1 EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL (INPUT) *ESP<X000#4, X1000#4, G008#4> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
4.2 EXTERNAL RESET SIGNAL (INPUT) ERS <G008#7> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
4.3 RESET & REWIND SIGNAL (INPUT) RRW <G008#6> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

5. STATUS SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

5.1 ALARM SIGNAL (OUTPUT) AL <F001#0> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
5.2 BATTERY ALARM SIGNAL (OUTPUT) BAL <F001#2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
5.3 RESET SIGNAL (OUTPUT) RST <F001#1> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
5.4 REWINDING SIGNAL (OUTPUT) RWD <F000#0> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
5.5 MOVING DIRECTION SIGNALS MVDN <F106#0, #1> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
5.6 IN-POSITION SIGNALS INPN <F104#0, #1> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
5.7 ALARM CLASSIFICATION SIGNAL (OUTPUT)
ALPS1 TO ALPS3, ALPS, ALOT, ALOH, ALSV <F250#0 TO #6> <F251#0 TO #2> . . . . . . . . . . 369
5.8 APC ALARM TYPE SIGNALS (OUTPUT)
APCMN, APOVN, APFEN, APPEN, APPSN, APBZN, APBVN, APBLN <F252, F253> . . . . . . . . 371
5.9 DISPLAY OF ALARMS FROM PMC (INPUT) PAL0 TO PAL6, PALM <G219> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
5.10 AXIS STATUS SIGNAL (OUTPUT) INPN<F104#0, #1>, SUPN <F208#1, #5>,
IPLN <F208#2, #0> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
5.11 TAPPING SIGNAL (OUTPUT) TAP <F001#5> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

6. MODE SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

6.1 MODE SELECT SIGNAL (INPUT) MD1, MD2, MD4 <G043#0 TO #2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
6.2 OPERATION BY TAPE READER DNCI (INPUT) <G043#5> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
6.3 OPERATION MODE CONFIRMATION SIGNALS (OUTPUT) <F003, F004> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

7. JOG FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

7.1 FEED AXIS DIRECTION SELECT SIGNAL (INPUT) +JN, –JN, <G100#0, #1, G102#0, #1> . . . 380
7.2 MANUAL FEEDRATE OVERRIDE (INPUT) *JV0 TO *JV15 <G010,G011> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
7.3 MANUAL RAPID TRAVERSE SELECT SIGNAL (INPUT) RT<G019#7> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
7.4 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE SIGNAL (INPUT) ROV1, ROV2 <G014#0, #1> . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
7.5 MANUAL ABSOLUTE SIGNAL (INPUT) *ABSM <G006#2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
7.6 RETURN SIGNAL (INPUT) RTN11, RTN21, RTN31 <G212#0 TO #2> RTN12, RTN22,
RTN32 <G213#0 TO #2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

8. INTERLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
8.1 INTERLOCK SIGNAL (INPUT) *IT<G008#0>,
*RILK<X000#6, X1000#6, X001#6, X1001#6> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
8.2 AXIS INTERLOCK SIGNAL (INPUT) *ITN <G130#0, #1> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
8.3 INTERLOCK SIGNAL FOR EACH AXIS AND DIRECTION (INPUT)
+MITN, –MITN, <G132#0, #1, G134#0, #1> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

9. MANUAL HANDLE FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

9.1 MANUAL HANDLE FEED AXIS SELECT SIGNAL (INPUT)
HS1A, HS1B, HS2A, HS2B <G018 #0, #1, #4, #5> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
9.2 INCREMENTAL FEED SIGNAL (INPUT) MP1, MP2 <G019#4,#5> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

c–5
 Table of Contents B–62833EN/01

10.REFERENCE POSITION RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

10.1 1ST REFERENCE POSITION RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
10.2 2ND, 3RD REFERENCE POSITION RETURN SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
10.3 REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT SIGNAL (OUTPUT) ZRFN <F120#0, #1> . . . . . . . 398
10.4 DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION RETURN FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
10.5 REFERENCE POSITION EXTERNAL SETTING SIGNAL ZPEXTN (INPUT)
<G206#6, G207#6, G208#6, G209#, G210#6, G211#6> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
10.6 SIGNAL FOR BUTT–TYPE REFERENCE POSITION SETTING (OUTPUT)
CLRCHN <F180#0, #1> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

11.MEMORY PROTECTION KEY (INPUT) KEY1 TO KEY4 <G046#3-#6> . . . . . . . 411

12.AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

12.1 CYCLE START SIGNAL (INPUT) ST <G007#2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
12.2 FEED HOLD SIGNAL (INPUT) *SP <G008#5> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
12.3 CYCLE START LAMP SIGNAL (OUTPUT) STL <F000#5> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
12.4 FEED HOLD LAMP SIGNAL (OUTPUT) SPL <F000#4> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
12.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION SIGNAL (OUTPUT) OP <F000#7> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
12.6 WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH SIGNAL (INPUT) PN0 TO PN7 <G009> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
12.7 MACHINE LOCK SIGNAL (INPUT) MLK <G044#1> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
12.8 SINGLE BLOCK SIGNAL (INPUT) SBK <G046#1> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
12.9 DRY RUN SIGNAL (INPUT) DRN <G046#7 > . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
12.10 FEED RATE OVERRIDE SIGNAL (INPUT) *FV0 TO *FV7 <G012> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
12.11 OVERRIDE CANCEL SIGNAL (INPUT) OVC <G006#4> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
12.12 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP SIGNAL (INPUT) BDT1, BDT2-BDT9 <G044#0,G045> . . . . . . . . . . 424
12.13 MIRROR IMAGE SIGNAL (INPUT) MIN <G106#0, #1> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

13.AXIS SELECT SIGNAL FOR HANDLE INTERRUPT (INPUT)

HS1IA, HS1IB, HS2IA, AND HS2IB<G041#0, #1, #4, #5> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

14.SIGNALS IN CUTTING MODE (OUTPUT) CUT <F002#6> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

15.SCREEN STATE SIGNALS (OUTPUT) DPL0, DPL1, DPL2 <F254 #0 TO #2> . 429

16.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

16.1 M FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
16.2 DISTRIBUTION END SIGNAL (OUTPUT) DEN <F001#3> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
16.3 M DECODE SIGNALS (OUTPUT) DM00, DM01, DM02, DM30 <F009#7, #6, #5, #4> . . . . . . . . 437
16.4 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK SIGNAL (INPUT) AFL <G005#6> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
16.5 WAITING FUNCTION (OUTPUT) WAT1 TO WAT4 <F209#0 TO #3>, (INPUT)
WFN1 TO WFN4 <G214#0 TO #3> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
16.6 SIMULTANEOUS BLOCK START M821 TO M827 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

c–6
B–62833EN/01 Table of Contents

17.HIGH-SPEED M/S/T INTERFACE SIGNAL (INPUT)

MFIN, SFIN, TFIN <G005#0, #2, #3> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

18.PMC KEY DATA REFERENCE FUNCTION (OUTPUT) <F210 TO F218> . . . . . 448

19.SPINDLE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

19.1 S FUNCTION SIGNAL (OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
19.2 SPEED ARRIVAL SIGNAL (INPUT) SAR <G029#4> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
19.3 SPINDLE STOP SIGNAL (INPUT) *SSTP <G029#6> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
19.4 SPINDLE ORIENTATION SIGNAL (INPUT) SOR <G029#5> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
19.5 SPINDLE OVERRIDE SIGNAL (INPUT) SOV0 TO SOV7 <G030> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
19.6 SERIAL SPINDLE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
19.7 CONSTANT SPEED SIGNAL (OUTPUT) CSS <F002#2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
19.7.1 Overview of Constant Surface Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
19.7.2 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
19.7.3 Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
19.7.4 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
19.7.5 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

20.SPINDLE ANALOG VOLTAGE CONTROL SIGNAL USING PMC (INPUT)

SIND<G033#7>, SSIN<G033#6>, SGN<G033#5>,
R01I TO R12I<G032,G033>, R01O TO R12O<F036, F037> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

21.T FUNCTION SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

22.SOFTWARE LIMIT EXTERNAL SETTING (INPUT)

+LMN <G110>, –LMN <G112>, RLSOT <G007#7> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

23.SKIP SIGNALS (INPUT) SKIP, SKP2, SKP3, SKIP4

<X000#7, #0, #1, #2> <X1000#7, #0, #1, #2> SKIPP <G212#7> . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

24.MECHANICAL HANDLE FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

24.1 SERVO OFF SIGNAL (INPUT) SVFN <G126#0, #1> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
24.2 FOLLOW-UP SIGNAL (INPUT) *FLWU <G007#5> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
24.3 SERVO POSITION DEVIATION MONITOR SIGNAL (OUTPUT) SVERN, <F208#3, F208#7> . 475

25.I/O DEVICE EXTERNAL CONTROL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

26.EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

26.1 EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT INTERFACE SELECTION SIGNAL (INPUT) EPCON <G066#6> . 483

27.FANUC I/O LINK SLAVE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

28.SOFTWARE OPERATOR’S PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492

28.1 SOFTWARE OPERATOR’S PANEL SIGNALS (OUTPUT) <F073 TO F081> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
28.2 SOFTWARE OPERATOR’S PANEL GENERAL-PURPOSE SWITCH SIGNALS (OUTPUT)
OUT0 TO OUT7 <F072> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

c–7
 Table of Contents B–62833EN/01

29.CUSTOM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

29.1 CUSTOM MACRO SIGNAL (INPUT) UI0 TO UI15 <G054, G055>, (OUTPUT)
UO0 TO UO131 <F054 TO F059> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
29.2 INTERRUPT SIGNAL FOR CUSTOM MACROS (INPUT) UINT <G053#3> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

30.RIGID TAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498

30.1 RIGID TAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
30.1.1 Connection Among Spindle, Spindle Motor, and Position Coder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
30.1.2 Interface with PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
30.1.3 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
30.1.4 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
30.1.5 Address Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
30.1.6 Signal Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
30.2 DIFFERENTIAL RIGID TAP (INPUT) DEFMOD <G072#3> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
30.3 TAP RETURN FUNCTION (INPUT) RTNT <G214#7> , (OUTPUT) RTPT <F209#5> . . . . . . . . . 521
30.4 RIGID TAPPING USING A CHASER TOOL CTCHK (G214 #5) CTOPN (F209 #7) . . . . . . . . . . . 523

31.TEMPORARY INTERRUPT DETECTION SIGNAL ACT <G213#7> . . . . . . . . . . . 524

32.AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

33.TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539

33.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
33.2 TORQUE CONTROL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
33.3 TORQUE CONTROL FUNCTION BASED ON PARAMETER INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
33.4 TORQUE CONTROL FUNCTION BASED ON DI SIGNAL INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
33.5 TORQUE CONTROL FUNCTION BASED ON INPUT FROM THE PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543

34.ANALOG INPUT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

34.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
34.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
34.3 ANALOG INPUT FUNCTION SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
34.4 CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
34.5 PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
34.6 OUTPUT SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
34.7 DIAGNOSTIC DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
34.8 ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

35.POSITION SWITCH SIGNAL PSW01 TO PSW10 <F070#0-F071#1> . . . . . . . . . 553

36.SPEED CONTROL SERVO ALARM IGNORE SIGNAL (INPUT)

IGNVRY <G066#0> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

37.DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556

37.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
37.2 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558

c–8
B–62833EN/01 Table of Contents

38.CONTROLLED AXES DETACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

38.1 CONTROLLED AXIS DETACH SIGNALS DTCHN<G124#0, #1> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
38.2 CONTROLLED AXIS DETACH STATUS SIGNALS MDTCHN <F110#0, #1> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562

39.FEEDRATE SWITCH SIGNAL EXF1 <X000#0, X1000#0>,

EXF2 <X000#1, X1001#1>, EXF3 <X000#2, X1001#2>,
EXF4 <X011#4>, EXF5 <X011#5> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

40.V–READY WAITING SIGNAL (OUTPUT) WVRDY;<F209#4> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565

41.HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL <F168 TO F175, G204 TO G205> . . . . . . . . . . . . 566

41.1 KEY INPUT ON THE PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
41.2 LED ON/OFF INFORMATION OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
41.3 KEY INPUT ON PANEL OF FANUC STANDARD UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
41.3.1 Alphanumeric Key Type (A02B–0211–C020#R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
41.3.2 Symbolic Key Type (A02B–0211–C020#S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
41.4 FANUC STANDARD UNIT LED ON/OFF INFORMATION OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
41.4.1 Alphanumeric Key Type (A02B–0211–C020#R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
41.4.2 Symbolic Key Type (A02B–0211–C020#S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
41.5 SUPPLEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
41.5.1 Necessary Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
41.5.2 Setting Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
41.5.3 Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574

42.POSITION DISPLAY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576

42.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
42.2 DISPLAY BY THE POSITION DISPLAY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
42.3 SWITCHING OF DISPLAY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579

43.SIGNALS FOR PATH CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580

43.1 PATH SELECTION SIGNAL (INPUT) PATHS <G215#0> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
43.2 PATH DISPLAY CONFIRMATION SIGNAL (OUTPUT) PATHO <F254#7> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582

44.RUN TIME AND PART COUNT DISPLAY FUNCTION (OUTPUT)

PRTSF <F062#7> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

APPENDIX
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615

C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632

D. INTERFACE CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642

E. DISPLAYING AND SETTING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647

c–9
 Table of Contents B–62833EN/01

F. INPUTTING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651

G. OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653

H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655

H.1 PARAMETERS OF SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
H.2 PARAMETER OF READER/PUNCH INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
H.3 PARAMETERS OF AXIS CONTROL/INCREMENT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
H.4 PARAMETERS OF COORDINATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
H.5 PARAMETERS OF STROKE LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
H.6 PARAMETERS OF FEEDRATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
H.7 PARAMETERS OF ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
H.8 PARAMETERS OF SERVO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
H.9 PARAMETERS OF DI/DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
H.10 PARAMETERS OF CRT/MDI, DISPLAY, AND EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
H.11 PARAMETERS OF PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
H.12 PARAMETERS OF PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
H.13 PARAMETERS OF SPINDLE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
H.14 PARAMETERS OF TOOL COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
H.15 PARAMETERS OF CANNED CYCLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
H.16 PARAMETERS OF RIGID TAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
H.17 PARAMETERS OF POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
H.18 PARAMETERS OF CUSTOM MACROS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
H.19 PARAMETERS OF PATTERN DATA INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
H.20 PARAMETERS OF SKIP FUNCTION, PICTURE DISPLAY, AND ITP SYNCHRONOUS . . . . . . 739
H.21 PARAMETERS OF DISPLAYING OPERATION TIME AND NUMBER OF PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . 740
H.22 PARAMETERS OF POSITION SWITCH FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
H.23 PARAMETERS OF MANUAL HANDLE FEED/MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION . . . . . . . 745
H.24 PARAMETERS OF BUTT–TYPE REFERENCE POSITION SETTING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . 746
H.25 PARAMETERS OF SOFTWARE OPERATOR’S PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
H.26 PARAMETERS OF EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
H.27 PARAMETERS OF AXIS CONTROL BY PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
H.28 PARAMETERS OF STANDARD LADDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
H.29 PARAMETERS OF ANALOG INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762

c–10
I HARDWARE
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 1. PREFACE

1 


This manual describes the electrical and structural specifications required

for connecting the power motion controller FANUC Power
Mate–MODEL D or FANUC Power Mate–MODEL F to a machine. The
manual outlines the components commonly used for FANUC CNC
control units, power motion controller as shown in the configuration
diagram in Chapter 2, and supplies additional information on using these
components with the Power Mate. Refer to individual manuals for the
detailed specifications of each model.
The devices should be connected and installed according to this
connection manual.

The model covered by this manual, and this abbreviation is :

Product Name Abbreviations
FANUC Power Mate–MODEL D Power Mate–D
Power Mate
FANUC Power Mate–MODEL F Power Mate–F

Related manuals The table below lists manuals related to the Power Mate–D/F.
In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk(*).

Table 1 Manuals related to the Power Mate

Specification
Manual name
Number
FANUC Power Mate–MODEL D/F B–62092E
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC Power Mate–MODEL D/F B–62833EN
*
CONNECTION MANUAL
FANUC Power Mate–MODEL D/F B–62094E
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FANUC Power Mate–MODEL D/F B–62835EN
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FANUC Power Mate–MODEL D/F B–62097EN
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE HANDBOOK
FANUC Power Mate–MODEL D/F B–62093E–1
PROGRAMMING MANUAL
(Macro Compiler/Macro executor)

3
2. CONFIGURATION HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

2 CONFIGURATION

The following figure shows the configuration of the electrical system of

the machine tool with which the Power Mate is used.
This manual describes how to connect the units illustrated in this diagram.
The machine tool body, machine operator’s panel, power magnetic
circuit, and sensor/actuator are specific to the machine tool and are the
builder’s responsibility. This manual does not cover the internal
connection of these units to the machine tool. The numbers in parentheses
shown in the diagram are section references for this manual.

4
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 2. CONFIGURATION

Machine tool magnetic cabinet

Power
Heat
supply Distribution
exchanger
24V DC board
(3.6)
(5.2)

CRT/MDI unit (7.1)

to (7.5)

Power Mate DPL/MDI unit (7.6)

(7.8) I/O device

Relay
connector
Computer
(7.10)

Servo amplifier Servo motor or

or spindle spindle motor
Built–in I/O amplifier (Note3)
card (Note 2)
(7.9)
(6.7–6.10) Manual pulse
generator

Machine
operator’s
I/O unit panel
(Note1) (6.3)
or

Power
magnetic Sensor/actuator
I/O card circuit
(6.5–6.6)

: Only with Power Mate–D

NOTE
1 Refer to the ”FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A Connection and Maintenance Manual (B-61813E)”.
2 Refer to the ”FANUC CONTROL MOTOR AMPLIFIER DESCRIPTIONS (B-65162E)”.
3 Refer to the ”FANUC SERVO MOTOR α series DESCRIPTIONS (B-65142E)”.

5
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

3 INSTALLATION

6
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION

3.1 The peripheral units, such as the control unit and CRT/MDI, have been
designed on the assumption that they are housed in closed cabinets. In
ENVIRONMENTAL this manual ”cabinet” refers to the following:
REQUIREMENTS OF D Cabinet manufactured by the machine tool builder for housing
CNC the control unit or peripheral units;
D Cabinet for housing the flexible turnkey system provided by
FANUC ;
D Operation pendant, manufactured by the machine tool builder,
for housing the CRT/MDI unit or operator’s panel.
D Equivalent to the above.
The environmental conditions when installing these cabinets shall
conform to the following table. Section 3.3 describes the installation and
design conditions of a cabinet satisfying these conditions.
Outer of cabinet :
0_C to 45_C
Temperat re
Temperature In operation
o eration
Inter of cabinet :
0_C to 55_C
Room temperature In store or transportation –20_C to +60_C
Change in
1.1°C/minute max.
temperature
30% to 95%
Relative humidity
(no condensation)
Vibration In operation: 0.5G or less
Outer of cabinets: If the cabinet is to be placed in an
environment where there are relatively large amounts
of pollutants (such as dust, coolant, organic solvents,
acid, corrosive gas, and salt), special care should be
taken.
Environment Inter of units: Each unit should be placed in a cabinet
to keep it from pollutants such as those described
above.
Heat sink of outer of cabinet: The heat sinks should
be protected from direct exposure to coolant, lubri-
cant, and metal chips.

Radiation If a unit is to be used in an environment where it is

likely to be exposed to radiations (such as microwave,
(ionizing or nonion-
ultraviolet rays, laser beams, and X–rays), a shielding
izing)
provision should be available for it.
Height above sea
Up to 1,000 m
level

7
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

3.2 The units listed below require an external regulated supply voltage of 24
VDC
10% (including an instantaneous value).
POWER CAPACITY
Table 3.2 Power supply capacity
Power Power
Unit Power supply capacity
Mate–D Mate–F
Power Mate–D control unit 1.8 A (Another 1A required f –
for the FANUC RS–232–C
device is used) (*)

Power Mate–F control unit 1.6 A (Another 1A required – f

for the FANUC RS–232–C
device is used) (*)

CRT/MDI unit 1.0 A f –

Picture display CRT/MDI
unit

Separate type CRT unit 0.8 A f –

Separate type MDI unit 0.2 A f –

Picture display separate
type MDI unit

Separate type PDP unit 2.0 A f –

Separate type LCD unit 0.8 A f –

Detachable LCD/MDI unit 1.0 A f –

Handy operator’s panel 0.2 A f –

External I/O card 500 + 7.3 x n (mA) where n f –

is the number of input points
that are turned on simulta-
neously (*)

I/O Unit-A The required current varies f –

depending on the number of
modules. Refer to the I/O
Unit–MODEL A Connection
and Maintenance Manual
(B–61813E).

I/O Link connection unit 0.2 A f –

DPL/MDI Switching unit 0.2 A f f

NOTE
(*) When an I/O card having source type DOs is used with the
Power Mate, an additional 24–V power supply is required
for the DOs. See descriptions about the output signal in
Chapter 6 for details.

8
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION

3.3 When a cabinet is designed, it must satisfy the environmental conditions

described in Section 3.1. In addition, the magnetic interference on the
DESIGN AND CRT screen, noise resistance, and maintenance requirements must be
INSTALLATION considered. The cabinet design must meet the following conditions :
CONDITIONS OF THE D The cabinet must be fully closed.
TOOL MAGNETIC The cabinet must be designed to prevent the entry of airborne
CABINET dust,coolant,and organic solvent.
Cabinets that let in air may be designed for the servo amplifier and
servo transformer provided that they :
- Use an air filter on the air inlet ;
- Place the ventilating fan so that it does not blow air directly toward
the unit;
- Control the air flow so that no dust or coolant enters the air outlet
D The cabinet must be designed to maintain a difference in temperature
of 10°C or less between the air in the cabinet and the outside air when
the temperature in the cabinet increases.
See Section 3.4 for the details on thermal design of the cabinet.
D A closed cabinet must be equipped with a fan to circulate the air
within.
The fan must be adjusted so that the air moves at 0.5 m/sec along the
surface of each installed unit.
CAUTION : If the air blows directly from the fan to the unit, dust
easily adheres to the unit. This may cause the unit to fail.
D For the air to move easily, a clearance of 100 mm is required between
each unit and the wall of the cabinet.
D Packing materials must be used for the cable port and the door in order
to seal the cabinet.
Because the CRT unit uses a voltage of approximately 11 kV, airborne
dust gathers easily. If the cabinet is insufficiently sealed, dust passes
through the gap and adheres to the unit. This may cause the insulation
of the unit to deteriorate.
Acceptable packing materials :
- Epton sealer No. 686, NITTO INDUSTRY CO., LTD.
- Polyurethane foam (ester) covered with vinyl chloride, FUJI
RUBBER CO., LTD.
D The CRT/MDI unit must be installed in a location where coolant
cannot be poured directly on it. The unit does have a dust–proof front
panel.
D Noise must be minimized.
As the machine and the power motion controller are reduced in size,
the parts that generate noise may be placed near noise–sensitive parts
in the magnetics cabinet.
The power motion controller is built to protect it from external noise.
Cabinet design to minimize noise generation and to prevent it from
being transmitted to the power motion controller is necessary. See
section 3.6 for details of noise elimination/management.
D The units must be installed or arranged in the cabinet so that they are
easy to inspect and maintain.
Allow a space the control unit in order to make it easy to remove
built–in I/O card cables and DPL/MDI cable.

9
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

D The CRT screen can be distorted by magnetic interference.

Arranging magnetic sources must be done with care.
If magnetic sources (such as transformers, fan motors,
electromagnetic contactors, solenoids, and relays) are located near the
CRT display, they frequently distort the display screen. To prevent
this, the CRT display and the magnetic sources generally must be kept
300 mm apart. If the CRT display and the magnetic sources are not
300 mm apart, the screen distortion may be suppressed by changing
the direction in which the magnetic sources are installed.
The magnetic intensity is not constant, and it is often increased by
magnetic interference from multiple magnetic sources interacting
with each other. As a result, simply keeping the CRT and the magnetic
sources 300 mm apart may not be enough to prevent the distortion.
If they cannot be kept apart, or if the CRT screen remains distorted
despite the distance, cover the screen with a magnetic shield.
D The installation conditions of the I/O unit must be satisfied.
To obtain good ventilation in the module, the I/O unit must be installed
in the direction shown in the following figure. Clearances of 100 mm
or more both above and below the I/O unit are required for wiring and
ventilation.
Equipment radiating too much heat must not be put below the I/O unit.

Top
I/O base unit
(No screws or protrusions shall
extend from the bottom of this
unit.)

Bottom

D To ensure conformity to the EMC command, refer to ”Conforming to

the EMC Command (A–72937).”

10
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION

3.4 The purpose of the thermal design of the cabinet is to limit the difference
in temperature between the air in the cabinet and the outside air to 10°C
THERMAL DESIGN or less when the temperature in the cabinet increases.
OF THE CABINET The internal air temperature of the cabinet increases when the units and
parts installed in the cabinet generate heat. Since the generated heat is
radiated from the surface of the cabinet, the temperature of the air in the
cabinet and the outside air balance at certain heat levels. If the amount
of heat generated is constant, the larger the surface area of the cabinet, the
less the internal temperature rises. The thermal design of the cabinet
refers to calculating the heat generated in the cabinet, evaluating the
surface area of the cabinet, and enlarging that surface area by installing
heat exchangers in the cabinet, if necessary. Such a design method is
described in the following subsections.

3.4.1 The cooling capacity of a cabinet made of sheet metal is generally 6 W/°C
Temperature Rise per 1m2 surface area, that is, when the 6W heat source is contained in a
cabinet having a surface area of 1 m2, the temperature of the air in the
within the Cabinet cabinet rises by 1°C. In this case the surface area of the cabinet refers to
the area useful in cooling , that is, the area obtained by subtracting the area
of the cabinet touching the floor from the total surface area of the cabinet.
There are two preconditions : The air in the cabinet must be circuited by
the fun, and the temperature of the air in the cabinet must be almost
constant.The following expression must then be satisfied to limit the
difference in temperature between the air in the cabinet and the outside air
to 10°C or less when the temperature in the cabinet rises:
Internal heat loss P [W] x
6[W/m2⋅°C] × surface area S[m2]×10[°C] of rise in temperature
For example, a cabinet having a surface area of 4m2 has a cooling capacity
of 24W/°C. To limit the internal temperature increase to 10°C under these
conditions, the internal heat must not exceed 240W. If the actual internal
heat is 320W, however, the temperature in the cabinet rises by 13°C or
more. When this happens, the cooling capacity of the cabinet must be
improved using the heat exchanger described next.

3.4.2 If the temperature rise cannot be limited to 10°C by the cooling capacity
Cooling by Heat of the cabinet, a heat exchanger must be added. The heat exchanger
forcibly applies the air from both the inside and outside of the cabinet to
Exchanger the cooling fin to obtain effective cooling. The heat exchanger enlarges
the surface area. Section 3.5 explains five heat exchangers supplied by
FANUC. Select one of these according to the application.
If cooling fin A is used for the cabinet, the total cooling capacity of a
cabinet having a surface area of 4 m2 in the example above is improved
as follows :
6W/m2⋅°C × 4m2 + 9.1W/°C= 33.1W/°C
The calculated value verifies that even if the internal heat is 320 W, the
temperature rise can be limited to less than 10°C.
See Section 3.5 for installing the heat exchanger.

11
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

3.4.3
Heat Loss of Each Unit Name Heat loss
Power Power
Mate–D Mate–F
Power Mate–D control unit 40W f –
Power Mate–F control unit 35W – f
CRT/MDI unit 18W f –
Picture display CRT/MDI unit
Separate type CRT unit 14W f –
Separate type MDI unit 4W f –
Picture display separate
type MDI unit
Separate type PDP unit 20W f –
Separate type LCD unit 10W f –
5W + 0.175W number of f –
External I/O card
Input ON points
I/O Unit AIF01A, AIF01B 1.2W f –
AID32A, AID32B 1.2W + 0.23W number of f –
input ON points
AID16C, AID16D 0.1W + 0.21W number of f –
input ON points
AID32E, AID32F 0.1W + 0.23W number of f –
input ON points
DPL/MDI switching circuit 4W f f
I/O Link connection unit 4W f –

See FANUC SERVO MOTOR
series DESCRIPTIONS (B–65142E)

for heat loss of servo amplifier.

12
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION

3.5 Table 3.5 lists the heat exchangers.Cooling fins A, B and C are not
provided with a fan. Note that a fan motor is required for any of these
INSTALLING THE cooling fins when it is used as a heat exchanger.
HEAT EXCHANGER
Table 3.5 List of Heat Exchangers

Ordering Cooling
Name Size
specification capacity

Cooling fin A A02B–0053–K303 9.1W/°C 196 90 1000mm

Cooling fin B A02B–0053–K304 10.1W/°C 444 90 650mm

Cooling fin C A02B–0053–K305 25.2W/°C 560 90 970mm

Heat pipe type

A02B–0094–C901 9.0W/°C 226 132 415mm
heat exchanger

Heat exchanger for

A02B–0060–K401 5.0W/°C 590 86 480mm
CRT/MDI unit

3.5.1 The cooling fin is shown in Fig. 3.5.1 (a).

Cooling Fin A/B/C

Viewed from cabinet mounting side

Fig.3.5.1(a) External view of cooling fin

13
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

It is installed in a cabinet made by the machine tool builder.

Cabinet
Cooling fin

Inside air flow

Outside
air flow

Fig.3.5.1(b) Internal view of cooling fin

The cooling fin can be installed in two ways, as shown in Fig.3.5.1(b).

The following lists the general precautions to be observed when using the
cooling fins :
D The fans are not included with the cooling fin. They should be
provided by the machine tool builder.
D Bring in the outside air from the bottom and exhaust the hot air from
the top.
D The inside air may flow from top to bottom or bottom to top. However,
generally decide the direction as follows :
- Bring in the air near high heat loss components.
- Exhaust the air toward the most important components to be
cooled.
D For the cooling fin to display the specified cooling capacity, the air
inside the cooling fins must flow at a velocity of 2.5 m/sec or greater.

(velocity of air flow measurement)

Set the slit to the intake side and

measure the velocity at the slit.

D Generally, install the cooling fins to the door. But be sure that the door
does not bend when installing the cooling fin. The cooling fins are
equipped with packing.

14
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION

External dimensions

196 183
90 Fan mounting
100 plate Mounting metal for
136 cooling fins (sheet met-
Terminal block for al about 3mm thick).
fan motor G–04
70

1000
570
(Attached to the
cooling fins. Its Cooling fins
4–M4
685

mounting 10260 height is 20mm)

Mounting metal
screw for Fan motor
220

for cooling fins

cooling fins
70

136 24.7
5 150
45

24.7 Door
4–M4 5 Mounting plate
mounting screw 168 40 for fan motor
180
188

for fan mounting C15

plate
Mounting diagram (example)
570

770
260

PANEL CUT DRAWING NOTE1 Fan motor, mounting plate for fan motor and mounting
metal for cooling fins are not attached to the cooling
70

fins.
So, prepare them at the machine tool builder.
45

164
NOTE2 Use two fan motors with about 50W power.
NOTE3 Weight : 6.5kg

Fig.3.5.1(c) External dimension and mounting method of cooling fin A (02B–0053–K303)

15
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

External dimensions Mounting stud for cooling fins

(2 studs are attached for the top and the bottom)
444 90 Mounting plate

72

25
for fan motor

60

300
435
Cooling fins

300
650

Fan motor

124
14 116

25
72
6–6 dia
Mounting
10
350 10 432 6 Mounting hole
hole for 24 Mounting plate
fan motor 370 6 for fan motor
10 418
4–M4 24 Terminal block for fan motor G–04 
(Attached to the cooling fins.
4–M4 370 Its height is 20mm)
350 Mounting diagram (example)
(Mounting hole for
124
116

fan motor) Hole External shape

of cooling fins
300
358

400
30
135 60

Hole
25 300

6–6 dia. hole or

M5 stud bolt 432

Stud hole 5 dia

(Make a hole 5 dia. for
fan motor) NOTE1 Fan motor and mounting plate are not attached to the
cooling fins. So, prepare them, at the machine tool builder.

    NOTE2 Use four fan motors with about 20W power.
NOTE3 Weight : 7.5kg

Fig.3.5.1(d) External dimension and mounting method of cooling fin B (A02B–0053–K304)

16
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION

Mounting stud for cooling fins

External dimensions
(Attached to the cooling fins)
560 90 Mounting plate

23
for fan motor

115

335
60
695
266

315
266 Cooling fins
970

Terminal block

210
for fan motor

287
Fan motor
60
G–04
6–M4 (Attached to the
10 8–6 dia.

10
Mounting 37
35

233 cooling fins. Its mounting hole

hole for fan 213 548 6
520 6 height is 20mm)
motor 37
6  

6 548  
5M–4 440  
(Mounting hole for Door 40
fan motor)
170

155
335

430 External shape of  


  
cooling fins
5 DIA
315

(This hole
775

combines
6–6 dia. hole or M5 mounting hole
stud bolt
287

and stud hole.)

60

NOTE1 Fan motor and mounting plate for fan motor are
not attached to the cooling fins. Prepare them at the
10

514
25

machine tool builder.

NOTE2 Use two fan motors with about 40W power.
Panel cut drawing NOTE3 Weight : 13.5kg

Fig.3.5.1(e) External dimension and mounting method of cooling fin C (A02B–0053–K305)

17
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

3.5.2
Heat Exchanger for
CRT/MDI Unit
External dimensions of External dimensions of
finger guard external cooling fun

Weight : 0.65kg

Air inlet

Packing
Power terminal
M4 screw
200VAC 50Hz
200/220VAC
60Hz
48W
Air outlet

Connector for Cooling fin : About 6kg

external cooling fan (Excluding attached parts)

NOTE) External cooling fan and finger guard are attached beside cooling fin.

Fig.3.5.2(a) External dimensions of external cooling fan and cooling unit for CRT/MDI
(A02B–0060–K401)

18
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION

Heat exchanger

Outside Inside
Air outlet

Air outlet

Main body of
(4) heat exchanger

(3)
Air inlet

(1) Prepare
External cooling fan
mounting
(attached)
screws and
Finger guard
mounting panel
(1) (attached)

(1) Use M5 screws to mount the heat exchanger.

(2) Be careful with air flow when securing the external cooling fan.
(3) Prepare a mounting panel for external cooling fan and install the panel where it can be exchanged externally.
(4) Drill mounting holes for external cooling fan and air outlet on heat exchanger mounting panel.

Fig.3.5.2(b) Mounting methods of heat exchanger for CRT/MDI

19
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

3.5.3
The Heat Pipe Type
Heat Exchanger

3.5.3.1 The heat pipe type heat exchanger is used for cooling the airtight cabinet
Installation of small sized electronic devices. It is a compact, lightweight, and
heat–efficient unit. Because the fan is built–in, it is used simply by
installing it, performing the ”panel cut’ operation.
Specifications Installation format Installation type in board
Fan Cooling ability (W/°C) 9 (50Hz when operating)
specifications
Voltage (V) 200VAC
Frequency (Hz) 50 60
Rating current (A) 0.28 0.24
Rating input (W) 28 26
Weight (kg) 4
Color Munsell signal N1.5

Order specifications Heat exchanger A02B–0094–C901

Remarks
D A filter is installed on the outside air inhalation side.
D The installation board thickness is the standard 1.6 t.
D When a fan motor and filter are necessary for maintenance, prepare
them separately.
Fan motor specifications
A90L–0001–0219#A
Filter specifications
A250–0689–X004
D If the heat exchanger is installed near the CRT, screen distortion may
occur due to magnetic flux leakage from the fan motor.

20
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION

External dimensions

17.5
Power
source AIR
terminal M4 FLOW

6–6 dia.

190
Earth
terminal
M4
External

415
fan unit

Internal
fan unit
190

AIR
FLOW
17.5

6 216 6 22.4 85
22.4
226
1.6

(Installation board thickness)

3

85

199

21
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Panel cut dimensions

180

2.5
187.5
190
HOLE

6
175
190
3–5 dia.

6–6 dia. or stud welder (M4)

214

22
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION

Installation method Please install the heat exchanger by the following sequence:
1 Take out the external fan unit from the heat exchanger main unit. (Fig.
1)
Detach the external fan unit installation screws A (2 pieces), take out
the unit from the main unit by sliding it down, and detach the earth
cable and the power cable to the fan. Also detach the installation screw
B (1 piece).
2 Install the heat exchanger main unit in the installation section which
has been panel cut. (Fig. 2)
When fastening down the heat exchanger main unit with the screws,
first, temporarily secure the panel and the heat exchanger main unit
with the installation screw B, which was taken out in 1). After that,
secure the main unit by the installation screws. In this case, the
external fan unit installation screw holes should be aligned with the
main unit screw holes. (Please provide the installation screws for the
heat exchanger main unit.)
Because this product is composed of plastic, set the value shown
below for the screw tightening torque.
Heat exchanger main unit (M4 screw) : 11 kgf.cm
External fan unit (M3 screw) : 5 kgf.cm
3 Connect the power cable and the earth cable to the external fan unit (the
unit detached in 1), and secure the installation screw A to the main unit
from the outside.
The installation is now complete.

Heat exchanger
main unit

Fan power cable

(detach the connector)
External fan unit

Installation screw B (1) Installation screws A (2)

Earth cable (if the installation screw on the
fan side is detached, it can be taken out.) Installation
screw Installation screw B (1)
Installation panel
Fig. 1 Take out the external fan unit from the Fig. 2 Install the heat exchanger main unit and
heat exchanger main unit the external fan unit

23
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

3.6 The motion controller has been steadily reduced in size using
surface–mount and custom LSI technologies for electronic components.
ACTION AGAINST The motion controller also is designed to be protected from external noise.
NOISE However, it is difficult to measure the level and frequency of noise
quantitatively, and noise has many uncertain factors. It is important to
prevent both noise from being generated and generated noise from being
introduced into the motion controller. This precaution improves the
stability of the motion controller machine tool system.
The motion controller component units are often installed close to the
parts generating noise in the power magnetics cabinet. Possible noise
sources into the motion controller are capacitive coupling,
electromagnetic induction, and ground loops.
When designing the power magnetics cabinet, guard against noise in the
machine as described in the following section.

3.6.1 The cables used for the machine are classified as listed in the following table:
Separating Signal Process the cables in each group as described in the action column.
Lines
Group Signal line Action
Primary AC power line Bind the cables in group A separate-
ly (Note 1) from groups B and CC, or
Secondary AC power line
co e group
cover g ou A witht a
an e
electromag-
ect o ag
AC/DC power lines netic shield (Note 2).
A
(containing the power lines for the servo motors and spindle motors) See Section 3.6.4 and connect
AC/DC solenoid spark killers or diodes with the sole-
noid and relay
relay.
AC/DC relay
DC solenoid (24VDC) Connect diodes with DC solenoid
and relay.
y
DC relay (24VDC) Bind the cables in group B separate-
ly from group
grou A,
A or cover group
grou B
B DC power line with an electromagnetic shield.
Separate group B as far from Group
DI/DO cable between the motion controller and power magnetics cabinet C as possible.
DI/DO cable between the motion controller and machine It is more desirable to cover group B
with the shield.
Cable between the motion controller and servo amplifier Bind the cables in group C sepa-
rately from group A
A, or cover group
Cable for position and velocity feedback
t an
C with a electromagnetic
e ect o ag et c shield.
s ed
Cable between the motion controller and spindle amplifier Separate g
group C as far from Group
Cable for position coder B as possible.
C Cable for manual pulse generator B sure tto perform
Be f hi ld proces-
shield
sing in Subsec. 3.6.5.
Cable between the motion controller and the CRT/MDI
RS–232–C interface cable
Batery cable
Other cables to be covered with the shield

24
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION

NOTE
1 The groups must be 100mm or more apart from one another
when binding the cables in each group.
2 The electromagnetic shield refers to shielding between
groups with grounded steel plates.

Cabinet

Servo Spindle Control

amp. amp. unit
Cable of group B, C

Duct
To operator’s
panel,
motor, etc.

Cable of group A Section

Group A Group B, C

Cover

25
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

3.6.2 The following ground systems are provided for the CNC machine tool:
Ground D Signal ground system (SG)
The signal ground (SG) supplies the reference voltage (0V) of the
electrical signal system.
D Frame ground system (FG)
The frame ground system (FG) is used for safety, and suppressing
external and internal noises. In the frame ground system, the frames,
cases of the units, panels, and shields for the interface cables between
the units are connected.
D System ground system
The system ground system is used to connect the frame ground
systems connected between devices or units with the ground.

Cabinet Unit
Signal ground system
Frame ground system
Power Servo CNC System ground system
magnet- amplifier control
ics unit
unit Operator’s
Cable panel
Machine
tool

Power
magnetics
cabinet

PC board

Distribution board

Notes on connecting the D Connect the signal ground with the frame ground (FG) at only one
ground systems place in the power motion controller control unit. (See Subsec. 3.6.3)
D The grounding resistance of the system ground shall be 100 ohms or
less (class 3 grounding).
D The system ground cable must have enough cross–sectional area to
safely carry the accidental current flow into the system ground when
an accident such as a short circuit occurs.
(Generally, it must have the cross–sectional area of the AC power cable
or more.)
D Use the cable containing the AC power wire and the system ground
wire so that power is supplied with the ground wire connected.

26
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION

3.6.3 Connect the 0 V line of the electronic circuit in the control unit with the
Connecting the Frame ground plate of the cabinet via the frame ground (FG) terminal.
The SG terminal is located on the printed circuit board at the rear of the
Ground (FG) of the control unit.
Control Unit

Cabinet Air goes out.

Air comes in.

FG terminals
(Faston terminals at
the controller)
To the other grounded plates
See the note below. Distribution
switchboard
in the cabinet

Grounded plate for Grounded plate for

clamping cables clamping cables
To the cabinet

External distribution
switchboard

Class 3 grounding or
more strict grounding

MOST IMPORTANCE
Use the Faston terminals (A65L–0001–0148/2) for the frame ground. Also use 100 to 300 mm
stranded wire with a cross–section of 2 mm2 or more. Be sure to connect the frame ground of
the Power Mate to the grounded plates in the cabinet as shown above.
Otherwise, the CNC will be susceptible to noise.

27
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

3.6.4 The AC/DC solenoid and relay are used in the power magnetics cabinet.
Noise Suppressor A high pulse voltage is caused by coil inductance when these devices are
turned on or off.
This pulse voltage induced through the cable causes the electronic circuits
to be disturbed. In general, to reduce this pulse voltage, a spark killer is
used in AC circuits, while a diode is used in DC circuits.
Spark killer D Use a spark killer consisting of a resistor and capacitor in series. This
type of spark killer is called a CR spark killer.(Use it under AC)
(A varistor is useful in clamping the peak voltage of the pulse voltage,
but cannot suppress the sudden rise of the pulse voltage. FANUC
therefore recommends a CR spark killer.)
D The reference capacitance and resistance of the spark killer shall
conform to the following based on the current (I (A)) and DC
resistance of the stationary coil:
1) Resistance (R) : Equivalent DC resistance of the coil
I2 I2
2) Capacitance (C) : X (µF)
10 20

I : Current at stationary state of the coil

R C
Equivalent circuit of the spark killer

AC Spark killer
relay

Motor

Spark killer

Mount the noise eliminator near a motor or a relay coil.

NOTE Use a CR–type noise eliminator. Varistor–type noise eliminators

clamp the peak pulse voltage but cannot suppress a sharp
rising edge.

Diode
Diode (used for direct–current circuits)

– +
Diode
Use a diode which can withstand a
voltage up to two times the applied
DC relay voltage and a current up to two times
the applied current.

28
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION

3.6.5 The power motion controller cables that require shielding should be
Cable Clamp and clamped by the method shown below. This cable clamp treatment is for
both cable support and proper grounding of the shield. To insure stable
Shield Processing CNC system operation, follow this cable clamp method.
Partially peel out the sheath and expose the shield. Push and clamp by
the plate metal fittings for clamp at the part. The ground plate must be
made by the machine tool builder, and set as follows :

Ground plate

Cable

Metal fittings
for clamp

40mm ∼80mm

Fig.3.6.5(a) Cable clamp (1)

29
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

ÇÇ
Machine side
installation

ÇÇ board

ÇÇ
Control unit

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Ground plate

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Metal fittings
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
for clamp
Shield cover

Fig.3.6.5(b) Cable clamp (2)

Prepare ground plate like the following figure.

Ground terminal
(grounded)

Hole for securing metal fitting clamp

Mount screw hole

Fig.3.6.5(c) Ground plate

For the ground plate, use a metal plate of 2 mm or thicker, which surface
is plated with nickel.

30
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION

Ground
8mm plate

12mm

20mm

Fig.3.6.5(d) Ground plate holes

(Reference) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp.

Max. 55mm

28mm

6mm

17mm

Fig.3.6.5(e) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp

Ordering specification for metal fittings for clamp

A02B–0124–K001 (8 pieces)

31
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

3.7
CONTROL UNIT
3.7.1 Space between control units to be installed
Installation of the At least 5 mm is required between the units.
Control Unit
70.0 or longer

10
360
10

65

32
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION

The control unit consists of a plastic box, fan motors and a PCB. Since
the control unit is provided with built-in fan motors, it does not require
the external air flow conditions described in Section 3.5. The air comes
into the control unit from the bottom and goes out through the fan motor,
which is located on the top of the control unit. Space as shown in Fig.
3.7.1 must be reserved not to disturb the air flow (
,)
Additionally, keep the space (approx. 100mm) as wider as possible to pull
or to out the built–in I/O card cable at maintenance and DPL/MDI cable.

AIR FLOW

50mm

100mm

 

33
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

3.7.2 Part programs, offset data, system parameters, and ladder are stored in
Battery for Memory CMOS memory in the control unit. The power to the CMOS memory is
backed up by a lithium battery mounted on the front panel of the control
Backup unit. The above data is not lost even when the main battery goes dead.
The backup battery is mounted on the control unit at shipping. This
battery can maintain the contents of memory for about a year.
When the voltage of the battery becomes low, alarm message ”BAT”
blinks on the CRT or MDI display and the battery alarm signal BAL <
F001#2> is output to the PMC. When this alarm is displayed, replace the
battery as soon as possible. In general, the battery can be replaced within
one or two weeks, however, this depends on the system configuration.
If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, memory can no longer
be backed up. Turning on the power to the control unit in this state causes
system alarm 910 (RAM parity alarm) to occur because the contents of
memory are lost. Clear the entire memory and reenter data after replacing
the battery. To clear and reenter, it is required to save data in the memory
card or floppy.
The power to the control unit must be turned on when the battery is
replaced. If the battery is disconnected when the power is turned off, the
contents of memory are lost.
Observe the following precautions for lithium batteries:

WARNING
If an unspecified battery is used, it may explode.
Replace the battery only with the specified battery
(A02B–0118–K111).

Dispose of used batteries as follows:

D Small quantities
Discharge the batteries and dispose of them as ordinary nonflammable
garbage.
D Large quantities
Consult FANUC.

34
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION

Replacing the Battery

Procedure for replacing the battery

1 Prepare lithium battery (A02B-0118-K111).

2 Turn the power ON.
3 Remove the battery in the battery holder at behind front panel of
control unit.

Â
Control unit

Battery
Â
(A02B–0118–K111)

Fig.6.5.1 (a) Replacing the battery (1)

4 Remove the connector of the battery.

BATTERY

Connector
in side of cable

Connector
in side of
P.C.B

Battery

Fig.6.5.1 (b) Replacing the battery (2)

5 Replace the battery, and connect the connector carefully not to

connect inversely.
6 Attache the battery holder.
7 Turn power of Power Mate OFF.

35
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

3.8
CABLE LEAD–IN
DIAGRAM (1) Power Mate–D

Air out

Air in
Weight : 2.2Kg

Fig.3.8(a) Cable lead–in diagram for Power Mate–D

36
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION

(2) Power Mate–F

Air out

Air in

Weight : 2.2Kg

Fig.3.8(b) Cable lead–in diagram for Power Mate–F

37
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

3.9
CONNECTOR
(a) Power Mate–D for 1–path (servo interface type A)
LAYOUT OF UNIT

Front Bottom face

Fuse (5.0A)
Left side M4 DPL/MDI
CB 128/CM29
Memory card Built–in I/O

+24VDC input Right side

CB 129/CM30
Built–in I/O
TEST Servo check
LED display
Rotary switch
JD15 CRT/MDI common
use from latter
Servo amplifier (1st axis) CRT/MDI
Terminal resistant
Pulse coder (1st axis) unit
Separate type pulse coder JD14 CRT/MDI
CRT/MDI common
(1st axis) use from former
Servo amplifier (2nd axis) CRT/MDI
Pulse coder (2nd axis) FAS1 Frame graound
Separate type pulse coder (FG terminal)
(2nd axis)
APC battery

Spindle
Position coder

Manual pulse generator

RS–232–C

I/O Link (master)

I/O Link (slave) from former I/O unit

I/O Link (slave) to latter I/O unit

38
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION

(b)       

    

Front Bottom face

Fuse (5.0A)
Left side
M4 DPL/MDI
CB 128/CM29
Memory card Built–in I/O

+24VDC input Right side

CB 129/CM30
Built–in I/O
TEST Servo check
LED display
Rotary switch
JD15 CRT/MDI common
use from latter
Servo amplifier (1st axis) CRT/MDI
Terminal resistant
unit
Separate type pulse coder JD14 CRT/MDI
(1st axis) CRT/MDI common
use from former
Servo amplifier (2nd axis) CRT/MDI
FAS1 Frame graound
(FG terminal)
Separate type pulse coder
(2nd axis)
APC battery

Spindle
Position coder

Manual pulse generator

RS–232–C
I/O Link (master)

I/O Link (slave) from former I/O unit

I/O Link (slave) to latter I/O unit

39
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

(c)  
  
  
  

Front Bottom face

Fuse (5.0A)
Left side
CB 128/CM29 M4 DPL/MDI
Built–in I/O
Memory card
Right side
+24VDC input
CB 129/CM30
Built–in I/O
TEST Servo check
LED display
Rotary switch JD15 CRT/MDI common
use from latter
Servo amplifier (1st path) CRT/MDI
Terminal resistant
Pulse coder (1st path) unit
Separate type pulse coder JD14 CRT/MDI
(1st path) CRT/MDI common
use from former
Servo amplifier (2nd path) CRT/MDI
Pulse coder (2nd path) FAS1 Frame graound
(FG terminal)
Separate type pulse coder
(2nd paht)
APC battery

Spindle
Position coder

Manual pulse generator

RS–232–C
I/O Link (master)

I/O Link (slave) from former I/O unit

I/O Link (slave) to latter I/O unit

40
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION

(d)  
  
  
  

Front Bottom face

Fuse (5.0A)
Left side M4 DPL/MDI
CB 128/CM29
Memory card Built–in I/O
+24VDC input Right side
CB 129/CM30
Built–in I/O
TEST Servo check
LED display
Rotary switch
JD15 CRT/MDI common
use from latter
Servo amplifier (1st path) CRT/MDI
Terminal resistant
unit
Separate type pulse coder JD14 CRT/MDI
(1st path) CRT/MDI common
use from former
Servo amplifier (2nd path) CRT/MDI
FAS1 Frame graound
Separate type pulse coder (FG terminal)
(2nd paht)
APC battery

Spindle

Position coder
Manual pulse generator

RS–232–C
I/O Link (master)
I/O Link (slave) from former I/O unit

I/O Link (slave) to latter I/O unit

41
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

(e)  
   
  

Front Bottom face

Fuse (5.0A)

Left side
Memory card CB130/CM43
Built–in I/O
+24VDC input

Right side
CB131/CM44 TEST Servo check
LED display Built–in I/O
Rotary switch

Servo amplifier (1st axis)

FAS1 Frame graound
Pulse coder (1st axis) (FG terminal)
Separate type pulse
coder (1st axis)
Spindle
Position coder

Manual pulse generator

APC battery

RS–232–C
I/O Link (slave) from former I/O unit

I/O Link (slave) to latter I/O unit

DPL/MDI

42
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION

(f)  
   
  

Front Bottom face

Fuse (5.0A)

Left side
Memory card CB130/CM43
Built–in I/O
+24VDC input

Right side
CB131/CM44 TEST Servo check
LED display Built–in I/O
Rotary switch

Servo amplifier (1st axis)

FAS1 Frame graound
(FG terminal)
Separate type pulse coder
(1st axis)
Spindle
Position coder

Manual pulse generator

APC battery

RS–232–C
I/O Link (slave) from former I/O unit

I/O Link (slave) to latter I/O unit

DPL/MDI

43
4. TOTAL CONNECTION HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

4 TOTAL CONNECTION

44
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 4. TOTAL CONNECTION

4.1
TOTAL CONNECTION
DIAGRAM FOR
1–PATH Power
Mate–D

4.1.1
Servo Interface
Type A

45
4. TOTAL CONNECTION HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

4.1.2
Servo Interface
Type B

46
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 4. TOTAL CONNECTION

4.2
TOTAL CONNECTION
DIAGRAM FOR
2–PATH Power
Mate–D

4.2.1
Servo Interface
Type A

47
4. TOTAL CONNECTION HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

4.2.2
Servo Interface
Type B

48
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 4. TOTAL CONNECTION

4.3
TOTAL CONNECTION
DIAGRAM FOR Power
Mate–F

4.3.1
Servo Interface
Type A

49
4. TOTAL CONNECTION HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

4.3.2
Servo Interface
Type B

50
 5. CONNECTION OF INPUT
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE POWER SUPPLY

5 CONNECTION OF INPUT POWER SUPPLY

51
5. CONNECTION OF INPUT
POWER SUPPLY HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

5.1
POWER SUPPLY
CAPACITY

24 VDC capacity
J30 Power Mate
Power Mate –D → 2.0 A

CP1
External power supply controller
24 VDC "10% Power Mate –F → 1.6 A
(for main unit) (Another 1A required for the
Built–in I/O card FANUC RS–232–C device is used.)

(When source type DO is used)

CPD1 Power Mate–D

External power supply J30 S CRT/MDI CRT/MDI→1.0 A
24 VDC "10% S PDP, MDI
(for display unit) S LCD, MDI PDP, MDI→2.2 A

LCD, MDI→1.0 A

I/O card B, E→1.0 A

J24 I/O card
CP61

External power supply

I/O card A, D→0.7 A
24 VDC "10%
(for I/O)
CMB3, CMB4

(When source type DO is used)

J24
CP32

I/O unit

NOTE
The above power supply capacity values only serve as
guidelines. They do not include the capacity required for
DOs.

52
 5. CONNECTION OF INPUT
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE POWER SUPPLY

Details of 24 VDC 24 VDC
10% (including an instantaneous value)

1) Main unit power supply
The main unit requires a sum of the following currents.
D Control power supply
Power Mate–D : 2.0 A
Power Mate–F : 1.6 A
D RS–232–C (if it draws power from the Power Mate): 1.0 A,
additionally
D DOs of the built–in I/O card with source type DO (is used)
Power Mate–D : 2.1 A (maximum), additionally
Power Mate–F : 3.5 A (maximum), additionally

NOTE
Detailed power requirement of the DOs of the built–in I/O
card: Total maximum load current for the DOs (including an
instantaneous value) plus 10 mA

2) Power supply for the CRT, PDP and LCD

(CRT/MDI, separate CRT, separate PDP, separate LCD, and separate
MDI)
One of the following values applies.
D CRT/MDI : 1.0 A
D Separate CRT + separate MDI : 1.0 A
D Separate PDP + separate MDI : 2.2 A
D Separate LCD + separate MDI : 1.0 A
D Detachabe LCD/MDI : 1.0 A
3) Power supply for the IO
D I/O card D (DI = 48; DO = 32): About 0.7 A + current for the
DOs to be used
D I/O card A (DI = 48; DO = 32): About 0.7 A
D I/O card E (DI = 96; DO = 64): About 1.0 A + current for the
DOs to be used
D I/O card B (DI = 96; DO = 64): About 1.0 A
D I/O unit: Depends on the type of module.

NOTE
The detailed power requirement of the IO card is a sum of
the following values.
D Control circuit: 500 mA
D DI: 7.3 x n mA (where n is the number of input points
turned on simultaneously)
D DO (souce type) : Total maximum load current for the
DOs (including an instantaneous value) + 10 mA
provided that the maximum is 4 A (for IO card D) or 6 A
(for IO card E).

53
5. CONNECTION OF INPUT
POWER SUPPLY HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

5.2 1) Power connection with the controller

POWER
CONNECTIONS Power Mate

External power source

CP1 (AMP)

1 +24V
J30

Â
2 0V +24VDC stabilized power source
3

24VDC
10%

 FG

 (Note 1)
AMP Japan
1–178288–3 (Housing)
1–175218–5 (Contact)
Class 3 grounding
Standard
A02B–0120–K324

Cable connection (J30)

CP1

1 24VDC
10%
+24V Momentary case
is included
0V 2 0V

NOTE
1 Be sure to connect the frame ground.
2 When a momentary power failure occurs, the system is
restored to the same state as the state at power–on. To
determine whether a momentary power failure occurred,
see the description of the momentary power failure decision
signal ACT (II 2.5).

54
 5. CONNECTION OF INPUT
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE POWER SUPPLY

2) Connection to the frame ground of controller

Cabinet Air goes out.

Air comes in.

FG terminals
(Faston terminals at
the controller)
To the other grounded plates
See the note below. Distribution
switchboard
in the cabinet

Grounded plate for Grounded plate for

clamping cables clamping cables
To the cabinet

External distribution
switchboard

Class 3 grounding or
more strict grounding

Most important item

Use the Faston terminals (A65L–0001–0148/2) for the frame ground. Also use 100 to 300 mm
stranded wire with a cross–section of 2 mm2 or more. Otherwise, the CNC will be susceptible
to noise. Always connect FG of the Power Mate to the cabinet (grounded plate).

3) Power connection with the CRT

For detailed information about cable J30 and the frame ground, see
Subsec. 7.1.7 Power supply interface.
4) Power connection with the I/O card (I/O unit)
For detailed information about cable J24 and the frame ground, see
Sec. 6.5 Connection of I/O card D/E.

55
5. CONNECTION OF INPUT
POWER SUPPLY HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

5.3
POWER TURN–ON 1) Servo amplifier and main unit power supplies
SEQUENCE

200 VAC power

for servo amplifier

24 VDC power 0 ms
for main unit or more

Turn on the 200 VAC servo amplifier power supply before the 24
VDC main unit power supply. Otherwise, a servo alarm numbered
anywhere between 400 and 499 may be issued.
2) 24 VDC power supply
D Main unit, CRT, PDP, and LCD power supplies
Normally turn on the power for the CRT/MDI unit before or, at
latest,simultaneously when the power for Power Mate–C control unit
is turned on.

Power source for CRT/MDI unit

ÂÂ
Â
Power source for Power Mate body

t t t 0.2 sec

If the power for the CRT/MDI unit is turned on after the power for
Power Mate body is turned on, it becomes impossible to execute
special operations while the power for Power Mate is on such as
memory all clear.
D Main unit and I/O power supplies

24 VDC power supply

for main unit

24 VDC power supply

for I/O 500 ms
or less

Turn on the 24 VDC I/O power supply before the 24 VDC main unit
power supply. (The maximum allowable time lag is 500 ms.)

56
 5. CONNECTION OF INPUT
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE POWER SUPPLY

D Power supply of Power Mate is I/O Link slave.

I/O Link master

I/O Link slave

500 ms
or less

Turn on the 24 VDC I/O Link slave power supply before the 24 VDC
I/O Link master power supply. (The maximum allowable time lag is
500 ms.)
Do not disconnect the battery for memory backup (3 VDC) or the
battery for the absolute pulse coders (6 VDC) regardless of whether
the power to the control unit is on or off. If batteries are disconnected
when the power to the control unit is turned off, current data stored
in the control unit for the pulse coders, parameters, programs etc, are
lost.
Make sure that the power to the control unit is on when replacing
batteries.
See Subsec. 3.7.2 for how to replace the batteries for memory backup.

57
5. CONNECTION OF INPUT
POWER SUPPLY HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

5.4 Reverse the power turn–on sequence.

POWER TURN–OFF Motors cannot be controlled when the power is turned off or momentarily
interrupted. Take appropriate action on the machine side when necessary.
SEQUENCE For example, when the tool is moved along a vertical axis, apply brakes
to prevent the axis from falling. Apply a brake that clamps the motor when
the servo is not operating or the motor is not rotating. Release the clamp
only when the motor is rotating. When the servo axis cannot be controlled
when the power is turned off or momentarily interrupted, clamp the servo
motor. In this case, the axis may fall before the relay for clamping starts
operating. The designer should make sure if the distance results in trouble.

5.5 The Power Mate controller has a circuit for protection against momentary
power failures.
MOMENTARY
When a momentary power failure is detected, the Power Mate controller
POWER FAILURE turns off the output signals to the servo system and machine. Upon
recovery from the momentary power failure, the system is automatically
reset to turn on the output signals to the servo system and machine. Then
the Power Mate waits for automatic operation to be restarted. (The
operator restarts operation after checking the status.)
The signal ACT on the PMC is available to check if a momentary power
failure has occurred (See II 31).

58
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6 CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO MACHINE INTERFACE

59
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

6.1 The Power Mate can be combined with the units shown in the table below
as I/O units for the machine interface.
GENERAL The I/O units can be classified into two types: the I/O units tailored to the
FANUC I/O Link, and the built-in I/O unit. The I/O units for the FANUC
I/O Link are installed separately from the control unit, and connected with
the control unit using the dedicated serial FANUC I/O Link.
As shown in the figure below, two or more units can be installed
separately.
The FANUC I/O Unit-MODEL A is a modular-type I/O unit. It selects
necessary modules from various I/O modules provided by FANUC
according to the application and uses them as one external unit. The
FANUC I/O Link transfers data between the control unit and such an
external unit at a high speed. The states of the input signals from the
machine are transferred to the control unit at regular intervals. The states
of the output signals from the control unit are transferred to external units
at regular intervals.
The built–in I/O unit is an I/O card installed in the control unit.
The Power Mate–D supports the simultaneous use of the built–in I/O unit
and I/O units tailored to the FANUC I/O Link.
I/O units tailored to the FANUC I/O Link cannot be used with the Power
Mate–F.

Table 6.1 Machine interface I/O

Power Power
Type Name DI/DO points
Mate–D Mate–F
FANUC I/O FANUC I/O Unit– Max. 256/256
Link MODEL A per group
compatible
com atible Max 1024/1024
Max.
I/O I/O card A, D in total
f –
(DI:48 DO:32)

I/O card B, E
(DI:96 DO:64)

Built–in I/O f – Built-in I/O Card C 32/24

– f Built–in I/O Card A, D1 32/24

– f Built–in I/O Card B, D2 48/32

CAUTION
To turn off the power to the motor, input the emergency stop
signal to both the CNC control unit and servo system
simultaneously. For details of applying the emergency stop
signal to the servo system, refer to FANUC CONTROL
MOTOR AMPLIFIER
Series (B–65162E).

60
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.2
CONNECTION OF
THE FANUC I/O Link
6.2.1 In FANUC I/O Link (omit as I/O Link) there are the master station and
General its slave stations. The master is the Controller of the Power Mate–D or
others, and the slaves are the I/O unit and I/O card. Power Mate can be
used as slave. The slaves are divided into groups, and up to 16 groups can
be connected to one I/O Link. A maximum of two base I/O units can be
connected as a group. I/O card is counted as one group.
The two connectors of the I/O link are named JD1A and JD1B, and are
common to all units (that have I/O Link function). A cable is always
connected from JD1A of a unit to JD1B of the next unit. Although JD1B
of the last unit is not used and left open, it need not be connected with a
terminator. Power Mate uses JD1A1 to connect I/O card etc... as a master,
and uses JD1A and JD1B to be slave controller of other CNC controller.
The pin assignments of connectors JD1A and JD1B are common to all
units on the I/O Link, and are illustrated on the next page. Use the figures
when connecting the I/O Link irrespective of the type of unit.

NOTE
The Power Mate–F is not used as the master of the FANUC
I/O Link.

Power Mate–D FANUC I/O Link

JD1A1 I/O=256/256 or less per group

I/O=1024/1024 or less in total I/O Link

FANUC I/O Unit - MODEL A 2 max

Base unit 1 Base unit 2

JD1B
JD1A Magnetic
circuit

JD1B
JD1A

JD1B
JD1A

Max. 16
group
JD1B
Operator’s panel Machine
JD1A operator’s
Group panel
#3 I/O card

Fig.6.2.1 I/O Link connection diagram

61
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

6.2.2
Connection of FANUC
I/O Link by Electric Control unit or preceding
slave unit
Cable
JD1A, JD1A1 JD1B
(PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–E20LMD) JD1A
(PCR–E20LMD)
1 SIN 11 0V JD1B 1 SIN 11 0V
2 *SIN 12 0V 2 *SIN 12 0V
3 SOUT 13 0V 3 SOUT 13 0V Next
4 14 0V 4 14 0V
*SOUT *SOUT slave
5 15 5 15
6 16 J22 16
unit
6
7 17 7 17
8 18 (+5V) 8 18 (+5V)
9 (+5V) 19 9 (+5V) 19
10 20 (+5V) 10 20 (+5V)

+5 V terminals are for an optical I/O link adapter. They are not necessary
when connecting with a metal cable.

CAUTION
Do not connect the +5V terminal when the Optical I/O Link
Adapter is not used.
Otherwise, the +5V terminal will be short–circuited, thus
damaging the unit.

Cable wiring (J22)

1 3
SIN SOUT
2 4
*SIN *SOUT
3 1
SOUT SIN
4 2
*SOUT *SIN
11 11
0V 0V
12 12
0V 0V
13 13
0V 0V
14 14
0V 0V

Shield

Recommended Cable Material

A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWG×10pair)

62
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.2.3 The FANUC I/O Link can be extended to the maximum length of 200 m
Connection of FANUC with optical fiber cables using an optical I/O link adapter.
I/O Link Optical Fiber NOTE
Cable In the following cases, use an optical fiber cable.
D When the cable length is 10m.
D When the cable runs between different cabinets and it is
impossible to connect the cabinets with a grounding wire
of 5.5 mm2 or thicker.
D When there is concern that the cable is influenced by
strong noise; for example :
When there is a strong electromagnetic noise source
beside the cable such as a welding machine.
When a noise generating cable such as a power cable
runs fora long distance in parallel with the cable.

External dimension of
optical I/O link adapter
66.0
connector for unit
connecting JD1 40.0 4–M3

Optical connector
COP1
45.0

FANUC

7.0

18.0
Weight of optical I/O link Main body : Approx. 100 g.
adapter

Connection
D Connection diagram

Unit Unit
JD1 JD1

JD1A JD1B
COP1
Connecting COP1 Optical Connecting
cable between cable cable between
unit Optical I/O Optical I/O unit
link adapter link adapter

63
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

D Interunit connecting
cables

01 SIN 11  Unit side Adapter side

JD1A,JD1B JD1
02 *SIN 12 
03 SOUT 13  SIN(01) (03)SOUT
04 *SOUT 14  *SIN(02) (04)*SOUT
05 15  SOUT(03) (01)SIN
06 16  *SOUT(04) (02)*SIN
07 17 +5V(09) (09)+5V
08 18
 +5V(18) (18)+5V
09 +5V 19 +5V(20) (20)+5V
10 20
 0V(11) (11)0V
0V(12) (12)0V
0V(13) (13)0V
0V(14) (14)0V
0V(15) (15)0V
0V(16) (16)0V

D Recommended connector for cable side :

PCR–E20FS (made by HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.)
D Recommended cable (wire material) : A66L–0001–0284#10P
D Cable length : Max. 2 m (when the recommended cable is used)

NOTE
Cross the cables for pins 1 and 2 as well as those for pins
3 and 4.

D Optical cable D Specification : A66L – 6001 – 0009

(Make sure to use one with this specification)
D Cable length: Max. 200 m
Power source D Power voltage : 4.75V to 5.25V (at the receiving end)
D Consumption current : 200mA

Installation conditions D The optical I/O link adapter enclosure is not fully sealed ; install it
with the Power Mate control unit in the fully enclosed cabinet.
D Ground the case using the case fixing screw of the optical I/O link
adapter.
D The optical I/O link adapter is light, and it may not be necessary to
mount it with screws. However, keep it from coming in contact
with other circuits to prevent possible short–circuits. When
mounting the optical I/O link adapter in a cabinet, attach it with an
L–type fitting using the case fixing screws (M3) of the optical I/O
link adapter.

L fitting

64
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Required parts For making up an I/O link using the optical link adapter, the following
parts are necessary:
D Optical I/O link adapter 2
D Interunit connecting cable 2
D Optical cable 1

65
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

6.3 The FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A (”I/O Unit”) is a modular–type I/O

unit. It interfaces the Power Mate with the machine when connected to
CONNECTION OF the Power Mate–D control unit via the I/O Link. One I/O unit can be
THE FANUC I/O configured by mounting the I/O modules required for either the 5– or
UNIT–MODEL A 10–slot base unit. A variety of I/O modules are provided so appropriate
modules can be selected according to the use, points, voltage level,
current capacity, and signal specifications. See Section 6.3.9 for further
information.

NOTE
With the Power Mate–F, the I/O Unit cannot be used.

6.3.1
Structure of FANUC Base Unit ABU05A(5 slots) or ABU10A(10 slots)
I/O Unit–MODEL A
I/F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Various I/O modules (Up to 10 modules)

Interface module AIF01A or AIF01B

AIF01A is used for connection to FANUC I/O Link

AIF01B expands I/O Units in the same group.

66
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.3.2
Outer Dimensions
A (80) 142

130
90
B

20
ø5 (mounting hole)

A B
For 5–slot base unit (ABU05A) 253 238
For 10–slot base unit (ABU10A) 430 415

6.3.3 Interface modules and various types of I/O modules can be mounted to
Mounting and and dismounted from the base unit easily as shown below.
Dismounting Modules
Mounting

1 Hang the hook at the top of the module on the groove in the upper side
of the base unit.
2 Make the connector of the module engage with that of the base unit.
3 Push the module in the lower groove of the base unit till the stopper
in the lower side of the module stops.

Dismounting

1 Release the stopper by pushing the lever at the bottom of the module.
2 Push the module upwards.

67
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

6.3.4
Connection Diagram

Power Mate–D

control unit

JD1A1
Terminator TX

K1X I/O Unit–A I/O Unit–A

AIF01A AIF01B

JD1B
JD1A JD3
JD2 JD2
CP32 PC32

24VDC 24VDC
K2X
K1X
AIF01A AIF01B

JD1B
JD1A JD3
JD2 JD2

Max. CP32 PC32

16 ·
·
group · 24VDC 24VDC
K2X
K1X AIF01A AIF01B

JD1B
JD1A JD3
JD2 JD2
CP32 PC32

24VDC 24VDC
K2X

NOTE
1 Number of I/O Units and connecting method are
restricted depending on the allocation of the I/O points.
See Sec. 6.2 ”Connection of FANUC I/O Link” and
Subsec. 6.3.11 ”Number of I/O points for the I/O Unit–A”.
2 Cable K1X can be an optical fiber cable by using the
optical I/O link adapter.
Refer to Subsec. 6.2.3.

68
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.3.5 Connect the following power source to the connector CP32 of the
Connecting Input interface module (AIF01A or AIF01B).
Power Source D Voltage : 24VDC±10%
D Current : Determine from Table 6.3.6.

BURNDY JAPAN, LTD. tripolar connector (Brown)

Housing : SMS3PNS–5
Contact : RC16M–SCT3
FANUC specification : A02B–0072–K893

AIF01A/AIF01B
CP32
1 +24V
2 GND 24VDC
3

NOTE
Turn ON the power for the I/O unit just before or when the
power for the CNC is turned ON. When the CNC power is
turned OFF, make sure to turn the power to the I/O unit OFF
as well.

ON
Power for the
CNC device OFF

Power for the ON

I/O unit
OFF

t : more than –500ms

(Turn ON of the power for I/O unit can be late 500ms or less.)

69
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

6.3.6 D Ground the base unit (ABU05A, ABU10A) by its grounding terminal
Grounding
Base unit (ABU05A, ABU10A)

M4 Screw
terminal

D When the cable K1X (see connection diagram in Subsec. 6.3.4) runs
between different cabinets, make sure to connect the cabinets with a
grounding wire more than 5.5 mm2.
Table 6.3.6 Required current of each module
Required current (mA) of +24V
Mod le name
Module
A B
AIF01A 50
AIF01B 50
AID32A 20+0.5×n 30+7.5×n
AID32B 20+0.5×n 30+7.5×n
AID16C 5
AID16D 5
AID32E 5
AID32F 5
AIA16G 5+1.5×n
AOD08C 5+2×n
AOD08D 5+2×n
AOD16C 5+2×n
AOD16D 5+2×n
AOD32C 5+0.5×n
AOD32D 5+0.5×n
AOA05E 5+5.5×n
AOA08E 5+5.5×n
AOA12F 5+4.5×n
AOR08G 5 10×n
AOR16G 5 10×n
AAD04A 5 130
n : Number of the input and output points (for each module) which turn
ON simultaneously
D Calculate the total capacity of the modules to be used, for each of
columns A and B. The required power supply capacity (mA) is the
sum of both totals.
D Select the modules such that the total for column A does not exceed
500 and the total for column B does not exceed 1500.

70
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.3.7 Details of the cables K1X, K2X and the terminator shown in the general
Connecting Signal connection diagram are as follows.
Cables
Cable K1X

Connector HONDA TSUSHIN

KOGYO CO., LTD.
PCR–E20FS
or
Power Mate or AIF01A PCR–E20FA AIF01A
Case : PCR–V20LA
JD1A, JD1A1 JD1B
1 SIN 11 0V 1 SIN 11 0V
2 *SIN 12 0V 2 *SIN 12 0V
3 SOUT 13 0V 3 SOUT 13 0V
4 *SOUT 14 0V 4 *SOUT 14 0V
5 15 5 15
6 16 6 16
7 17 7 17
8 18 8 18
9 19 9 19
10 20 10 20

Cable connection

JD1A JD1B
JD1A1
SIN (1) (3) SOUT

SIN (2) (4) *SOUT
SOUT (3) (1) SIN

SOUT (4) (2) *SIN
0V (11) (11) 0V
0V (12) (12) 0V
0V (13) (13) 0V
0V (14) (14) 0V

D Use twisted pair wires for signal SIN and *SIN, and signals SOUT
and *SOUT.
D Recommended cable material : A66L–0001–0284#10P
(twisted pair/shielded)
D Shielding wires should be connected with the grounding plate of the
cabinet at the JD1A side using a cable clamp.
D Maximum cable length: 10 m
D Do not make any wire connections to the connector spare pins.
(See Subsec. 6.2.2.)
D Use an optical I/O link adapter and an optical fiber cable, [in the
following cases] :
- When the cable is more than 10 meters long.
- When the cable runs between different cabinets and there is no
appropriate ground wire between the cabinets.
- When there is concern that the cable is influenced by strong noise.

71
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Cable K2X

Connector HONDA TSUSHIN

KOGYO CO., LTD.
PCR–E20FS
or
AIF01A or PCR–E20FA AIF01B
AIF01B Case : PCR–V20LA
JD2 JD3
1 S1 11 S5 1 S1 11 S5
2 *S1 12 *S5 2 *S1 12 *S5
3 S2 13 S6 3 S2 13 S6
4 *S2 14 *S6 4 *S2 14 *S6
5 S3 15 0V 5 S3 15 0V
6 *S3 16 0V 6 *S3 16 0V
7 S4 17 ID2 7 S4 17 ID2
8 *S4 18 ID3 8 *S4 18 ID3
9 ID1 19 9 ID1 19
10 20 10 20

Cable connection

JD2 JD3
S1(1) (1)S1
*S1(2) (2)*S1
S2(3) (3)S2
*S2(4) (4)*S2
S3(5) (5)S3
*S3(6) (6)*S3
S4(7) (7)S4
*S4(8) (8)*S4
S5(11) (11)S5
*S5(12) (12)*S5
S6(13) (13)S6
*S6(14) (14)*S6
ID1(9) (9)ID1
ID2(17) (17)ID2
ID3(18) (18)ID3
0V(15) (15)0V
0V(16) (16)0V

D Connect the signals with the same name.

D Make sure to use twisted pair wires for the following signals:
S1 and *S1, S2 and *S2, S3 and *S3
S4 and *S4, S5 and *S5, S6 and *S6
D Do not connect the pins No. 10, No. 19 and No. 20, as they are used
internally.
D Recommended cable material : A66L – 0001 – 0284#10P
(twisted pair/shielded)
D Maximum cable length : 2 m

72
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Terminator TX

AIF01B
Connector
JD2 HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.
PCR–E20FS
1 11 Case : PCR–V20LA
2 12 TRM2
3 13
4 TRM1 14 TRM3
5 15
(a) Terminate the connector
6 16
7 17 JD2 of the last AIF01B in
8 18 a single group with the terminator.
9 19 TRM2
(b) Short–circuit the TRM1 signals
10 TRM1 20 TRM3
as shown. Repeat the shorting
procedure for signals TRM2
and TRM3.

Cable connection

JD2

Shorting jumper
TRM1 (4)
TRM1 (10)
Shorting jumper

 

  
Shorting jumper

 

 

73
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

6.3.8 For an external connecting method, there are two types of I/O modules :
Connecting with I/O one with a terminal block, and one with a connector.
The terminal block is a removable type.
Modules

Terminal block type Connector type

Input/Output
display LED
A0 . . .7
B0 . . .7 Terminal
block cover

Connector
HONDA
TSUSHIN
KOGYO
CO., LTD.
MR–50RMA

M3.5 screw terminal (20 terminal)

Mounting the terminal

block
1 Insert the protruding portion at the bottom of the terminal block in the
groove of the module side.
2 Push the terminal block using the engaging point of the protruding
portion and the groove as an axis and mount it in the module firmly.
3 Open the cover of the terminal block and check to make sure the latch
at the top of the terminal block is firmly set.

Dismounting the
terminal block

1 Open the cover of the terminal block.

2 Push up the latch at the top of the terminal block.
3 Drag out the tab at the top of the terminal block and pull it out.
The terminal block will be removed from the module.

74
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Cautionary points when D Wiring material : AWG22 – 18 (0.3 – 0.75mm2)

wiring terminal block A wire as thin as possible is recommended.
type D Crimp style terminal : M3.5
Crimp style terminal with no insulation
sleeve and a short distance ”A”, as illustrated
in the drawing below, is recommended.

A : Approx. 4.5mm

DAIDO SOLDERLESS TERMINAL MFG. CO., LTD 1.25–S3.5

NICHIFU EUROPE B.V 1.25–3.5S, etc.

NICHIFU AMERICA, INC.

D Mark tube : As short a mark tube as possible ; cover crimped part

with the mark tube.

6.3.9
Digital Input/Output
Module
Digital input modules
Input Module Rated Rated Response External LED
Polarity Points
type name voltage current time connection display
Maximum
AID32A 24VDC 7.5mA Both 32 Connector not provided
Non–insulation 20ms
DC input Maximum
AID32B 24VDC 7.5mA Both 32 Connector not provided
2ms
Maximum
AID16C 24VDC 7.5mA NEG 16 Terminal block provided
20ms
Maximum
AID16D 24VDC 7.5mA POS 16 Terminal block provided
Insulation type
y 20ms
DC input Maximum
AID32E 24VDC 7.5mA Both 32 Connector not provided
20ms
Maximum
AID32F 24VDC 7.5mA Both 32 Connector not provided
2ms
10.5mA ON Max 35ms
AC input AIA16G 100–120VAC 16 Terminal block provided
(120VAC) OFF Max 45ms

NOTE
1 Polarity
Negative : 0 V common (current source type)
– The input is defined as ON when at a low level
Positive : 24 V common (current sink type)
– The input is defined as ON when at a high level
2 For the details of the specifications for each module, refer
to FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A Connection⋅Maintenance
Manual (B–61813E).

75
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Digital output modules

Points
Output Module Rated Rated PolarĆ External LED
Points /comĆ Fuse
type name voltage current ity connection display
mon

AOD08C 12–24VDC 2A NEG 8 8 Terminal block provided provided

AOD08D 2A POS 8 8 Terminal block provided provided
Insulation AOD16C 0.5A NEG 16 8 Terminal block provided not provided
ty e DC
type
output AOD16D 0.5A POS 16 8 Terminal block provided not provided
AOD32C 0.3A NEG 32 8 Connector not provided not provided
AOD32D 0.3A POS 32 8 Connector not provided not provided
AOA05E 100– 2A – 5 1 Terminal block provided provided
240VAC
AOA08E 1A – 8 4 Terminal block provided provided
AC
C output
u u
100–
AOA12F 0.5A – 12 6 Terminal block provided provided
120VAC
AOR08G Maximum 4A – 8 1 Terminal block provided not provided
Relay 250VAC/
output AOR16G 30VDC 2A – 16 4 Terminal block provided not provided

NOTE
1 Polarity
Negative : 0 V common (current sink type)
– Output is at low level when ON.
Positive : 24 V common (current source type)
– Output is at high level when ON.
2 For the details of the specifications for each module, refer
to FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A Connection⋅Maintenance
Manual (B–61813E).

76
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.3.10
Correspondence
Bit
Between I/O Signals
Address in the
and Addresses in a module
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Module Module of 8
0 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 points

Module of 16
points
1 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0

2 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
Module of
32 points

3 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

Addresses in a module are defined relatively, with the beginning address

as 0. Real addresses viewed by the sequence program of the PMC are set
by the programmer.
For input modules, an input signal becomes ”1” when the contact point
connected with the input is turned ON. For output modules, an output
contact point (or transistor) is turned ON when the output signal is ”1”.

77
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

6.3.11 Determine the number of I/O points for the I/O Unit –MODEL A using
Number of Points for the following.
I/O Unit–MODEL A
D Output points
Sum of the actual output Occupied output points
points in a group
0 to 32 → 32 points
40 to 64 → 64 points
72 to 128 → 128 points
136 to 256 → 256 points
(Note) Count AOA05E as 8 points and AOA12F as 16 points.
D Input points
Sum of the actual input Occupied input points
points in a group
0 to 32 → 32 points
40 to 64 → 64 points
72 to 128 → 128 points
136 to 256 → 256 points
As a result of the calculation above, when the number of input points is
smaller than that of the output points in a single group, the number of
input points is assumed to be equal to that of the output points.
Example 1:
When the following modules are used in the group No. 0
AOD32C 3
AOA12F 2
AID32A 5
AIA16G 3
[Input points]
32×5+16×3 = 208 → 256 points
[Output points]
32×3+16×2 = 128 → 128 points
Example 2:
When the following modules are used in the group No. 2.
AOD16C 7
AOA05F 9
AID16A 4
AIA16G 3
[Input points]
16×4+16×3 = 112 → 128 points
[Output points]
16×7+8×9 = 184 → 256 points
In this case, as the number of input points is smaller than that of the
output points, the number of input points is assumedl to be equal to
that of the output points, in other words, 256 points.

78
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.4
INPUT/OUTPUT
SIGNAL
SPECIFICATIONS

6.4.1
Input Signal 1) DC input signal A
DC input signal A is a category of signals sent from machine
Specifications components (such as pushbutton, limit switch, relay contact) to the
Power Mate.
2) DC input signal B
DC input signal B is a category of signals sent from the machine to
the Power Mate for high–speed operation.
This category uses a noninsulated interface in which the signals can
be switched between a sink type (0 V common) and a source type (24
V common). However, the emergency stop input is fixed to a sink
type (0 V common). In addition, safety standards require the sink
type be used.
Both DC input signals A and B should satisfy the following
conditions for contacts on the machine side

Contact capacity:
30 VDC, 16 mA or greater
Open–circuit contact–to–contact leakage:
1 mA or less (for 26.4 V)
Closed–circuit contact–to–contact voltage drop:
2 V or less (for 8.5 mA, including a voltage drop across
the cable)

DC input signal width and delay

Logical 1
DC input ON (contact closed)
signal
Logical 0
OFF (contact opened)

Receiver
output signal

DC input signal A 5 to 22 ms 5 to 22 ms
DC input signal B 0.2 to 3 ms 0.2 to 3 ms

79
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate

Filter and level

conversion circuit
Contact
Input signal

3.3KW
DIC
Open: Logical 0
Closed: Logical 1
+24V
+24V

0V

Sink–type input connection, in compliance with safety standards

Power Mate

Filter and level

Contact conversion circuit
Input signal

3.3KW
DIC
Open: Logical 1
Closed: Logical 0
+24V
+24V

0V

Source–type input connection

WARNING
When a 0V common (source) interface is used, a ground
fault in an input signal has the same effect as closing the
contacts. From the viewpoint of safety, therefore, FANUC
does not recommend the use of such an interface for input
signals.

80
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.4.2 The Power Mate can use source–type output signals that comply with
Output Signal safety standards.
Specifications (Source The output signals are rated as follows:
Type)
Maximum load current with the driver turned on:
200 mA (including an instantaneous value)
Saturation voltage with the driver turned on:
1.0 V (maximum)
Dielectric strength:
24 V +20% (including an instantaneous value)
Leakage current with the driver turned off:
100 µA (maximum)

The output signals require an external power supply rated as follows:

Supply voltage:
+24 V +10% (including an instantaneous value)
Supply current:
At least the total maximum load current (including an
instantaneous value) + 100 mA
Turn–on timing:
Before the Power Mate power supply is turned on (with a
maximum allowable time lag of 500 ms)
Turn–off timing: Same time or after the Power Mate power
supply is turned off

Connect the power supply that meets the above requirements to the output
signal power supply pins (DOC and 0V) of each DI/DO connector. Note
that the total load current varies with the type of a DI/DO card used. It
is necessary to connect 24 VDC to all DOC pins.
I/O card D: Maximum load current of 4.0 A
(Honda connector (2.0 A)
2)
I/O card E: Maximum load current of 6.0 A
(Honda connector (2.0 A)
3)
Built–in I/O card C : Maximum load current of 2.1 A
(Yamaichi connector (0.7 A)
3)
Built–in I/O card D1 : Maximum load current of 2.1 A
(Yamaichi connector (0.7 A)
3)
Built–in I/O card D2 : Maximum load current of 3.5 A
(Yamaichi connector (0.7 A)
5)

NOTE
Use 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) or heavier wire as the power cable.

81
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Output signal driver The output signal driver can output up to eight signals.
The driver element monitors the current of each output signal. If an
overcurrent is detected, the output of that signal is turned off. Once a
signal has been turned off, the overcurrent will no longer exist, such that
the driver turns the signal on again. Therefore, in the case of a ground fault
or overload, the output of a signal will be repeatedly turned on and off.
This also occurs when a load which causes a high surge current is
connected.
The driver element contains an overheat detector, which turns off all eight
output signals if the temperature in the device exceeds the set value as a
result of an overcurrent caused by a ground fault or some other failure.
This off state is held. To restore signal output, logically turn the output
off then back on again, for each signal, after the temperature falls below
the set value. Signal output can also be restored by turning the system
power off then back on again.
If the output of a signal cannot be turned on even though the CNC
diagnostic indicates that the signal is on, that signal or another signal
being handled by the same element may be overloaded, thus causing the
eight output signals to be turned off. In such a case, turn the system power
off and eliminate the cause of the overload.

D Driver element block

diagram

DOC
OHD

CONTROL
IN#0 LOGIC
OUT#0
OCD

CONTROL
IN#1 LOGIC
OUT#1
OCD

CONTROL
IN#7 LOGIC
OUT#7
OCD

OHD: Overheat detection circuit

OCD: Overcurrent detection circuit
The power for operating this driver element is supplied from
DOC (24 VDC).

82
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

The following restriction applies to the connection of the output signals.

The following parallel connection of output pins shall not be used.

Power Mate

Source–type
driver circuit
Regulated
DOC power supply
|
+24V 0V

0V

Parallel connection inhibited

When using a dark–light resistance, connect a leakage prevention diode

to it.

Power Mate

DOC Regulated
power supply
+24V 0V
Source–type
driver circuit
Dim–light
resistance
Lamp

Leakage prevention
diode
0V

When a dim–light resistance is used

83
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

6.4.3 The output signals of the (sink type DO) drive lamps, LEDs, and relays.
Specifications of the The signals are output directly from NPN transistors which form a
non-isolated interface.
Output Signals To drive an additional external unit, a power supply of 24 VDC needs to
(Sink Type) be supplied by the user. In this case, connect the 0-V terminal to 0V (0-V
terminal in the output connector).
Specifications of the output signals
Maximum load current when output is on :
200 mA or less including momentary current
Saturation voltage when output is on :
1.6 V maximum and 1.0 V average when the load current is 200 mA
Dielectric strength when output is off :
24 V within +20% including surge voltage
Leakage current when output is off : 100µA or less

Connector Indicator
I/O card Transistor output

LED
R

Relay
+
24V
stabilized
power
0V –

Fig.6.4.3 I/O card (sink type) output signal regulation

NOTE
When a sink output interface is used, a ground fault in an
output signal causes the output signal to remain on. From
the viewpoint of safety, therefore, FANUC does not
recommend the use of such an interface for output signals.

When connecting an inductive load such as a relay to the machine, a spark

killer must be installed. Insert the spark killer as near to the load as
possible (no more than 20 cm). Whenever a capacitive load is connected
to the machine, connect a resistor in series to limit the current. The rated
current and voltage must be maintained. Even a momentary current or
voltage deviation from the ratings is not permitted.
When the lamp is turned on directly by the transistor output, a surge
current may flow, possibly damaging the transistor. To prevent this,
provide a protection circuit, like that shown above, to maintain the rated
voltage and current and to prevent even momentary deviation from the
ratings.

84
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.5 The I/O card (D, E) is connected to the Power Mate–D through the
FANUC I/O Link and is used for interfacing with the machine. The DO
CONNECTION OF is of source type conforming to the safety requirements.
I/O CARD D/E
NOTE
The I/O card cannot be used with the Power Mate–F.

There are two cards available depending on the number of I/O points.
Maximum load
I/O Card Specification Input Output
current of DO
I/O Card E A16B-2202–0732 96 points 64 points 6A
I/O Card D A16B-2202–0733 48 points 32 points 4A

I/O card connection unit

Power Mate–D
control unit
J22 J22
JD1B JD1A To next device
JD1A1
If there is no equipment
beyond this I/O card,
JD1A can remain open.

24V DC power J24 CP61 CM51

J25

CM52 J26
BURNDY JAPAN, LTD.
3P CONNECTOR J27
(Brown) CMB3
Housing : SMS3PNS-5 J28 Machine
Contact : RC16M-SCT3 CMB4

1 +24V
2 GND Cable side
3 Female connector

Power supply input specification

Voltage : 24 VDC"10%
Capacity : 500 + 7.3 n mA
n : number of inputs ON simultaneously

D For power cable J24, use a wire of at least 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2).
D For information about the connection between the control unit and
I/O card, see Subsec. 6.2.2.
D To connect with the machine, use a multi–core shielded cable.
Recommended cables:
A66L–0001–0041 (70/0.18, 20 conductors)
A66L–0001–0042 (70/0.18, 50 conductors)
D Clamp the cable with the cable clamp on the grounding plate of the
cabinet on the I/O card side.
D For details of the signal specifications, see Section 6.4.

85
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

D CM51, CM52, CMB3

50–pin female connector manufactured by Honda Tsushin
Solder type: A02B–0029–K891 (MR–50LFH)
Crimp type: A02B–0029–K893 (MRP–50F01, MR–50L,
MRP–F112, 50 pins)
D CMB4
20–pin female connector manufactured by Honda Tsushin
Solder type: A02B–0029–K899 (MR–20LFH)
Crimp type: A02B–0029–K901 (MRP–20F01, MR–20L,
MRP–F112, 20 pins)

86
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.5.1
Connector Layout for
I/O Card

CM51

1 DI00 33 DIC1
2 DI03 34 DI02 Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
19 DI01
3 DI06 35 DI05
20 DI04 Xn DI07 DI06 DI05 DI04 DI03 DI02 DI01 DI00
4 DI11 36 DI10
21 DI07
5 DI14 37 DI13 DI17 DI16 DI15 DI14 DI13 DI12 DI11 DI10
22 DI12 Xn+1
6 DI17 38 DI16
23 DI15
7 DI22 39 DI21 Xn+2 DI27 DI26 DI25 DI24 DI23 DI22 DI21 DI20
24 DI20
8 DI25 40 DI24
25 DI23 DI37 DI36 DI35 DI34 DI33 DI32 DI31 DI30
9 DI27 41 DI26 Xn+3
26 DI30
10 DI32 42 DI31
27 DI33 Xn+4 DI47 DI46 DI45 DI44 DI43 DI42 DI41 DI40
11 DI35 43 DI34
28 DI36
12 DI40 44 DI37 DI57 DI56 DI55 DI54 DI53 DI52 DI51 DI50
29 DI41 Xn+5
13 DI43 45 DI42
30 DI44
14 DI46 46 DI45
31 DI47
15 DI51 47 DI50
32 DI52
16 DI54 48 DI53 Switchable–common DC input signal B;
17 DI56 49 DI55 12 points switched by DIC1
18 +24E 50 DI57
Switchable–common DC input signal A, 8
points switched by DIC2

CM52 DC input signal A

1 DI60 33 0V
2 DI63 34 DI62 Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
19 DI61
3 DI66 35 DI65
20 DI64 Xn+6 DI67 DI66 DI65 DI64 DI63 DI62 DI61 DI60
4 DI71 36 DI70
21 DI67
5 DI74 37 DI73 DI77 DI76 DI75 DI74 DI73 DI72 DI71 DI70
22 DI72 Xn+7
6 DI77 38 DI76
23 DI75
7 DI82 39 DI81 Xn+8 DI87 DI86 DI85 DI84 DI83 DI82 DI81 DI80
24 DI80
8 DI85 40 DI84
25 DI83 DI97 DI96 DI95 DI94 DI93 DI92 DI91 DI90
9 DI87 41 DI86 Xn+9
26 DI90
10 DI92 42 DI91
27 DI93 Xn+10 DIA7 DIA6 DIA5 DIA4 DIA3 DIA2 DIA1 DIA0
11 DI95 43 DI94
28 DI96
12 DIA0 44 DI97 DIB7 DIB6 DIB5 DIB4 DIB3 DIB2 DIB1 DIB0
29 DIA1 Xn+11
13 DIA3 45 DIA2
30 DIA4
14 DIA6 46 DIA5
31 DIA7
15 DIB1 47 DIB0
32 DIB2
16 DIB4 48 DIB3
17 DIB6 49 DIB5
18 +24E 50 DIB7

NOTE
Addresses can be 0 to 127.
48 points (DI00 to DI57) can be used for the A16B–2202–0733. Without connector CM52.

87
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

CMB3

1 DO00 33 0V
2 DO03 34 DO02 Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
19 DO01
3 DO06 35 DO05
20 DO04 Yn DO07 DO06 DO05 DO04 DO03 DO02 DO01 DO00
4 DO11 36 DO10
21 DO07
5 DO14 37 DO13
22 DO12 Yn+1 DO17 DO16 DO15 DO14 DO13 DO12 DO11 DO10
6 DO17 38 DO16
23 DO15
7 DO22 39 DO21 Yn+2 DO27 DO26 DO25 DO24 DO23 DO22 DO21 DO20
24 DO20
8 DO25 40 DO24
25 DO23
9 DO27 41 DO26 Yn+3 DO37 DO36 DO35 DO34 DO33 DO32 DO31 DO30
26 DO30
10 DO32 42 DO31
27 DO33 Yn+4 DO47 DO46 DO45 DO44 DO43 DO42 DO41 DO40
11 DO35 43 DO34
28 DO36
12 DO40 44 DO37
29 DO41 Yn+5 DO57 DO56 DO55 DO54 DO53 DO52 DO51 DO50
13 DO43 45 DO42
30 DO44
14 DO46 46 DO45
31 DO47
15 DO51 47 DO50
32 DO52
16 DO54 48 DO53
17 DOC 9 DO55
18 DIC2 50 DOC

CMB4

1 DO61 14 DO60
8 DO62
2 DO64 15 DO63 Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
9 DO65
3 DO67 16 DO66
10 DO70 Yn+6 DO67 DO66 DO65 DO64 DO63 DO62 DO61 DO60
4 DO72 17 DO71
11 DO73
5 DO75 18 DO74 Yn+7 DO77 DO76 DO75 DO74 DO73 DO72 DO71 DO70
12 DO76
6 DO56 19 DO77
13 DO57
7 0V 20 DOC

NOTE
Addresses can be 0 to 127.
32 points (DO00 to DO37) can be used for the A16B–2202–0733. Without connector CMB4.

DIC1 and DIC2:

Pins for switching the DI common voltage. Usually, it should be
connected to 0 V. (Input)
+24E:
24 VDC output pin. Its use should be restricted to DI signal common
connection.
DOC:
24 VDC power supply input pin for the DO driver. All DOC pins are
internally connected.

88
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.5.2
Details of DI
Connection
Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM51(18) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DI00 CM51(01) Xn . 0

DI01 CM51(19) Xn . 1

DI02 CM51(34) Xn . 2

DI03 CM51(02) Xn . 3

DI04 CM51(20) Xn . 4

DI05 CM51(35) Xn . 5

DI06 CM51(03) Xn . 6

DI07 CM51(21) Xn . 7

DIC1 CM51(33)

0V CM52(33), CMB3(33), CMB4(07)

Fig.6.5.2 (a) I/O card machine interface (1)

Xn is DC input signal B (for high–speed signal input).

Xn.0 to Xn.2 and Xn.7 are switchable–common signals; shown above are
examples of sink–type inputs.
DIC1 serves as a common input for Xn+1.0 to Xn+1.2, Xn+1.7, and
Xn+11.4 to Xn11.7.

89
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM51(18) Bit number

Address number

Filter and level

conversion circuit
DI10 CM51(36) Xn+1. 0

DI11 CM51(04) Xn+1. 1

DI12 CM51(22) Xn+1. 2

DI13 CM51(37) Xn+1. 3

DI14 CM51(05) Xn+1. 4

DI15 CM51(23) Xn+1. 5

DI16 CM51(38) Xn+1. 6

DI17 CM51(06) Xn+1. 7

DIC1 CM51(33)

0V CM52(33), CMB3(33), CMB4(07)

Fig.6.5.2 (b) I/O card machine interface (2)

Xn+1 is DC input signal B (for high–speed signal input). Shown above

are examples of sink–type inputs.
Xn+1.0 to Xn+1.2 and Xn+1.7 are switchable–common signals.
DIC1 serves as a common input for Xn.0 to Xn.2, Xn+0.7, and Xn+11.4
to Xn11.7.

90
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM51(18) Bit number

Address number

Filter and level

conversion circuit
DI20 CM51(24) Xn+2. 0

DI21 CM51(39) Xn+2. 1

DI22 CM51(07) Xn+2. 2

DI23 CM51(25) Xn+2. 3

DI24 CM51(40) Xn+2. 4

DI25 CM51(08) Xn+2. 5

DI26 CM51(41) Xn+2. 6

DI27 CM51(09) Xn+2. 7

Fig.6.5.2 (c) I/O card machine interface (3)

Xn+2 is DC input signal A.

91
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM51(18) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DI30 CM51(26) Xn+3. 0

DI31 CM51(42) Xn+3. 1

DI32 CM51(10) Xn+3. 2

DI33 CM51(27) Xn+3. 3

DI34 CM51(43) Xn+3. 4

DI35 CM51(11) Xn+3. 5

DI36 CM51(28) Xn+3. 6

DI37 CM51(44) Xn+3. 7

Fig.6.5.2 (d) I/O card machine interface (4)

Xn+3 is DC input signal A.

92
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM51(18) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DI40 CM51(12) Xn+4. 0

DI41 CM51(29) Xn+4. 1

DI42 CM51(45) Xn+4. 2

DI43 CM51(13) Xn+4. 3

DI44 CM51(30) Xn+4. 4

DI45 CM51(46) Xn+4. 5

DI46 CM51(14) Xn+4. 6

DI47 CM51(31) Xn+4. 7

DIC2 CMB3(18)

0V CM52(33), CMB3(33), CMB4(07)

Fig.6.5.2 (e) I/O card machine interface (5)

Xn+4 is DC input signal A.

93
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM51(18) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DI50 CM51(47) Xn+5. 0

DI51 CM51(15) Xn+5. 1

DI52 CM51(32) Xn+5. 2

DI53 CM51(48) Xn+5. 3

DI54 CM51(16) Xn+5. 4

DI55 CM51(49) Xn+5. 5

DI56 CM51(17) Xn+5. 6

DI57 CM51(50) Xn+5. 7

Fig.6.5.2 (f) I/O card machine interface (6)

Xn+5 is DC input signal A.

94
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM52(18) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DI60 CM52(01) Xn+6. 0

DI61 CM52(19) Xn+6. 1

DI62 CM52(34) Xn+6. 2

DI63 CM52(02) Xn+6. 3

DI64 CM52(20) Xn+6. 4

DI65 CM52(35) Xn+6. 5

DI66 CM52(03) Xn+6. 6

DI67 CM52(21) Xn+6. 7

Fig.6.5.2 (g) I/O card machine interface (7)

Xn+6 is DC input signal A.

NOTE
This connection cannot be used for I/O card D
(A16B–2202–0733).

95
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM52(18) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DI70 CM52(36) Xn+7. 0

DI71 CM52(04) Xn+7. 1

DI72 CM52(22) Xn+7. 2

DI73 CM52(37) Xn+7. 3

DI74 CM52(05) Xn+7. 4

DI75 CM52(23) Xn+7. 5

DI76 CM52(38) Xn+7. 6

DI77 CM52(06) Xn+7. 7

Fig.6.5.2 (h) I/O card machine interface (8)

Xn+7 is DC input signal A.

NOTE
This connection cannot be used for I/O card D
(A16B–2202–0733).

96
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM52(18) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DI80 CM52(24) Xn+8. 0

DI81 CM52(39) Xn+8. 1

DI82 CM52(07) Xn+8. 2

DI83 CM52(25) Xn+8. 3

DI84 CM52(40) Xn+8. 4

DI85 CM52(08) Xn+8. 5

DI86 CM52(41) Xn+8. 6

DI87 CM52(09) Xn+8. 7

Fig.6.5.2 (i) I/O card machine interface (9)

Xn+8 is DC input signal A.

NOTE
This connection cannot be used for I/O card D
(A16B–2202–0733).

97
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM52(18) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DI90 CM52(26) Xn+9. 0

DI91 CM52(42) Xn+9. 1

DI92 CM52(10) Xn+9. 2

DI93 CM52(27) Xn+9. 3

DI94 CM52(43) Xn+9. 4

DI95 CM52(11) Xn+9. 5

DI96 CM52(28) Xn+9. 6

DI97 CM52(44) Xn+9. 7

Fig.6.5.2 (j) I/O card machine interface (10)

Xn+9 is DC input signal A.

NOTE
This connection cannot be used for I/O card D
(A16B–2202–0733).

98
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM52(18) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DIA0 CM52(12) Xn+10. 0

DIA1 CM52(29) Xn+10. 1

DIA2 CM52(45) Xn+10. 2

DIA3 CM52(13) Xn+10. 3

DIA4 CM52(30) Xn+10. 4

DIA5 CM52(46) Xn+10. 5

DIA6 CM52(14) Xn+10. 6

DIA7 CM52(31) Xn+10. 7

Fig.6.5.2 (k) I/O card machine interface (11)

Xn+10 is DC input signal A.

NOTE
This connection cannot be used for I/O card D
(A16B–2202–0733).

99
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM52(18) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DIB0 CM52(47) Xn+11. 0

DIB1 CM52(15) Xn+11. 1

DIB2 CM52(32) Xn+11. 2

DIB3 CM52(48) Xn+11. 3

DIB4 CM52(16) Xn+11. 4

DIB5 CM52(49) Xn+11. 5

DIB6 CM52(17) Xn+11. 6

DIB7 CM52(50) Xn+11. 7

DIC1 CM51(33)

0V CM52(33), CMB3(33), CMB4(07)

Fig.6.5.2 (l) I/O card machine interface (12)

Xn+11.4 to Xn+11.7 are DC input signal B (for high–speed signal input).

Xn+11.4 to Xn+11.7 are switchable–common signals; shown above are
examples of sink–type inputs.
Xn+11.0 to Xn+11.3 are DC input signal A.
DIC1 serves as a common input for Xn.0 to Xn.2, Xn.7, Xn+1.0 to
Xn+1.2, and Xn+1.7.

NOTE
This connection cannot be used for I/O card D
(A16B–2202–0733).

100
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.5.3
Details of DO
Connection

Power Mate

Pin number Example of

connection
Source–type
Bit number driver CMB3(17, 50)
Address number CMB4(20) DOC Regulated
power supply
+24V 0V

Yn .0
CMB3(01) DO00

Yn .1 CMB3(19) DO01

Yn .2 CMB3(34) DO02

Yn .3 CMB3(02) DO03

Yn .4 CMB3(20) DO04

Yn .5 CMB3(35) DO05

Yn .6 CMB3(03) DO06

Yn .7 CMB3(21) DO07

CM52(33), CMB3(33), CMB4(07) 0V

Fig.6.5.3 (a) I/O card machine interface (13)

Yn.0 to Yn.7 correspond to one driver device.

If an error occurs in the device, the DAL1 LED on the PC board lights.

101
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate

Pin number Example of

connection
Source–type
Bit number driver CMB3(17, 50)
Address number CMB4(20) DOC Regulated
power supply
+24V 0V

Yn+1. 0
CMB3(36) DO10

Yn+1. 1 CMB3(04) DO11

Yn+1. 2 CMB3(22) DO12

Yn+1. 3 CMB3(37) DO13

Yn+1. 4 CMB3(05) DO14

Yn+1. 5 CMB3(23) DO15

Yn+1. 6 CMB3(38) DO16

Yn+1. 7 CMB3(06) DO17

CM52(33), CMB3(33), CMB4(07) 0V

Fig.6.5.3 (b) I/O card machine interface (14)

Yn+1.0 to Yn+1.7 correspond to one driver device.

If an error occurs in the device, the DAL2 LED on the PC board lights.

102
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate

Pin number Example of

connection
Source–type
Bit number driver CMB3(17, 50)
Address number CMB4(20) DOC Regulated
power supply
+24V 0V

Yn+2. 0
CMB3(24) DO20

Yn+2. 1 CMB3(39) DO21

Yn+2. 2 CMB3(07) DO22

Yn+2. 3 CMB3(25) DO23

Yn+2. 4 CMB3(40) DO24

Yn+2. 5 CMB3(08) DO25

Yn+2. 6 CMB3(41) DO26

Yn+2. 7 CMB3(09) DO27

CM52(33), CMB3(33), CMB4(07) 0V

Fig.6.5.3 (c) I/O card machine interface (15)

Yn+2.0 to Yn+2.7 correspond to one driver device.

If an error occurs in the device, the DAL3 LED on the PC board lights.

103
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate

Pin number Example of

connection
Source–type
Bit number driver CMB3(17, 50)
Address number CMB4(20) DOC Regulated
power supply
+24V 0V

Yn+3. 0
CMB3(26) DO30

Yn+3. 1 CMB3(42) DO31

Yn+3. 2 CMB3(10) DO32

Yn+3. 3 CMB3(27) DO33

Yn+3. 4 CMB3(43) DO34

Yn+3. 5 CMB3(11) DO35

Yn+3. 6 CMB3(28) DO36

Yn+3. 7 CMB3(44) DO37

CM52(33), CMB3(33), CMB4(07) 0V

Fig.6.5.3 (d) I/O card machine interface (16)

Yn+3.0 to Yn+3.7 correspond to one driver device.

If an error occurs in the device, the DAL4 LED on the PC board lights.

104
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate

Pin number Example of

connection
Source–type
Bit number driver CMB3(17, 50)
Address number CMB4(20) DOC Regulated
power supply
+24V 0V

Yn+4. 0
CMB3(12) DO40

Yn+4. 1 CMB3(29) DO41

Yn+4. 2 CMB3(45) DO42

Yn+4. 3 CMB3(13) DO43

Yn+4. 4 CMB3(30) DO44

Yn+4. 5 CMB3(46) DO45

Yn+4. 6 CMB3(14) DO46

Yn+4. 7 CMB3(31) DO47

CM52(33), CMB3(33), CMB4(07) 0V

Fig.6.5.3 (e) I/O card machine interface (17)

Yn+4.0 to Yn+4.7 correspond to one driver device.

If an error occurs in the device, the DAL5 LED on the PC board lights.

NOTE
This connection cannot be used for I/O card D
(A16B–2202–0733).

105
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate

Pin number Example of

connection
Source–type
Bit number driver CMB3(17, 50)
Address number CMB4(20) DOC Regulated
power supply
+24V 0V

Yn+5. 0
CMB3(47) DO50

Yn+5. 1 CMB3(15) DO51

Yn+5. 2 CMB3(32) DO52

Yn+5. 3 CMB3(48) DO53

Yn+5. 4 CMB3(16) DO54

Yn+5. 5 CMB3(49) DO55

Yn+5. 6 CMB3(06) DO56

Yn+5. 7 CMB3(13) DO57

CM52(33), CMB3(33), CMB4(07) 0V

Fig.6.5.3 (f) I/O card machine interface (18)

Yn+5.0 to Yn+5.7 correspond to one driver device.

If an error occurs in the device, the DAL6 LED on the PC board lights.

NOTE
This connection cannot be used for I/O card D
(A16B–2202–0733).

106
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate

Pin number Example of

connection
Source–type
Bit number driver CMB3(17, 50)
Address number CMB4(20) DOC Regulated
power supply
+24V 0V

Yn+6. 0
CMB4(14) DO60

Yn+6. 1 CMB4(01) DO61

Yn+6. 2 CMB4(08) DO62

Yn+6. 3 CMB4(15) DO63

Yn+6. 4 CMB4(02) DO64

Yn+6. 5 CMB4(09) DO65

Yn+6. 6 CMB4(16) DO66

Yn+6. 7 CMB4(03) DO67

CM52(33), CMB3(33), CMB4(07) 0V

Fig.6.5.3 (g) I/O card machine interface (19)

Yn+6.0 to Yn+6.7 correspond to one driver device.

If an error occurs in the device, the DAL7 LED on the PC board lights.

NOTE
This connection cannot be used for I/O card D
(A16B–2202–0733).

107
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate

Pin number Example of

connection
Source–type
Bit number driver CMB3(17, 50)
Address number CMB4(20) DOC Regulated
power supply
+24V 0V

Yn+7. 0
CMB4(10) DO70

Yn+7. 1 CMB4(17) DO71

Yn+7. 2 CMB4(04) DO72

Yn+7. 3 CMB4(11) DO73

Yn+7. 4 CMB4(18) DO74

Yn+7. 5 CMB4(05) DO75

Yn+7. 6 CMB4(12) DO76

Yn+7. 7 CMB4(19) DO77

CM52(33), CMB3(33), CMB4(07) 0V

Fig.6.5.3 (h) I/O card machine interface (20)

Yn+7.0 to Yn+7.7 correspond to one driver device.

If an error occurs in the device, the DAL8 LED on the PC board lights.

NOTE
This connection cannot be used for I/O card D
(A16B–2202–0733).

108
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.5.4
Dimensions of I/O Card
D, E

Approx.100mm

The following LEDs, fuses, variable resistors, and setting pins are
mounted on the PCB:
[LEDs]
DB2 (green, pilot) : Lights while the power to the PCB is on.
DB1 (red, alarm) : Lights if an error occurs in the PCB or CNC.
DAL1 to DAL8 : Do driver at overheat

[Fuses]
FU1 (3.2 A) : Used for external 24–V input.
(Order number : A02B–0120–K104)
FU2 (5.0 A) : Used for +5 V on the PCB.
: (Order number : A02B–0200–K103)

[Variable resistors]
VR1 and VR2 : Factory–set by FANUC. The machine tool builder
need not adjust these resistors.

[Setting pin]
CP1 : Used to specify whether the CNC will be notified of
a DO signal error as a system alarm.

109
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

6.6 The I/O card (A, B) is connected to the Power Mate–D through the
FANUC I/O Link and is used for interfacing with the machine. The DO
CONNECTION OF is of sink type not conforming to the safety requirements.
I/O CARD A/B
NOTE
1 The I/O card cannot be used with the Power Mate–F.
2 When a sink output interface is used, a ground fault in an
output signal causes the output signal to remain on. From
the viewpoint of safety, therefore, FANUC does not
recommend the use of such an interface for output signals.

There are two cards available depending on the number of I/O points.
I/O Card Specification Input Output
I/O Card B A16B-2201–0070 96 points 64 points
I/O Card A A16B-2201–0071 48 points 32 points

I/O card connection unit

Power Mate–D
control unit
J22 J22
JD1B JD1A To next device
JD1A1
If there is no equipment
beyond this I/O card,
JD1A can remain open.

24V DC power J24 CP61 CM21

J25

CM22 J26
BURNDY JAPAN, LTD.
3P CONNECTOR J27
(Brown) CM23
Housing : SMS3PNS-5 J28 Machine
Contact : RC16M-SCT3 CM24

1 +24V
2 GND Cable side
3 Female connector

Power supply input specification

Voltage : 24 VDC"10%
Capacity : 500 + 7.3 n (mA)
n : number of inputs ON simultaneously

D For power cable J24, use a wire of at least 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2).
D For information about the connection between the control unit and
I/O card, see Subsec. 6.2.2.
D To connect with the machine, use a multi–core shielded cable.
Recommended cables:
A66L–0001–0041 (70/0.18, 20 conductors)
A66L–0001–0042 (70/0.18, 50 conductors)

110
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

D Clamp the cable with the cable clamp on the grounding plate of the
cabinet on the I/O card side.
D For details of the signal specifications, see Section 6.4.
D CM51, CM52, CMB3
50–pin female connector manufactured by Honda Tsushin
Solder type: A02B–0029–K891 (MR–50LFH)
Crimp type: A02B–0029–K893 (MRP–50F01, MR–50L,
MRP–F112, 50 pins)
D CMB4
20–pin female connector manufactured by Honda Tsushin
Solder type: A02B–0029–K899 (MR–20LFH)
Crimp type: A02B–0029–K901 (MRP–20F01, MR–20L,
MRP–F112, 20 pins)

111
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

6.6.1
Connector Layout for
I/O Card

CM21

1 DI00 33 DIC
2 DI03 34 DI02 Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
19 DI01
3 DI06 35 DI05
20 DI04 Xn DI07 DI06 DI05 DI04 DI03 DI02 DI01 DI00
4 DI11 36 DI10
21 DI07
5 DI14 37 DI13 DI17 DI16 DI15 DI14 DI13 DI12 DI11 DI10
22 DI12 Xn+1
6 DI17 38 DI16
23 DI15
7 DI22 39 DI21 Xn+2 DI27 DI26 DI25 DI24 DI23 DI22 DI21 DI20
24 DI20
8 DI25 40 DI24
25 DI23 DI37 DI36 DI35 DI34 DI33 DI32 DI31 DI30
9 DI27 41 DI26 Xn+3
26 DI30
10 DI32 42 DI31
27 DI33 Xn+4 DI47 DI46 DI45 DI44 DI43 DI42 DI41 DI40
11 DI35 43 DI34
28 DI36
12 DI40 44 DI37 DI57 DI56 DI55 DI54 DI53 DI52 DI51 DI50
29 DI41 Xn+5
13 DI43 45 DI42
30 DI44
14 DI46 46 DI45
31 DI47
15 DI51 47 DI50
32 DI52
16 DI54 48 DI53 Switchable–common DC input signal B;
17 DI56 49 DI55 8 points switched by DIC1
18 +24E 50 DI57
DC input signal A

CM22

1 DI60 33 0V
2 DI63 34 DI62 Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
19 DI61
3 DI66 35 DI65
20 DI64 Xn+6 DI67 DI66 DI65 DI64 DI63 DI62 DI61 DI60
4 DI71 36 DI70
21 DI67
5 DI74 37 DI73 DI77 DI76 DI75 DI74 DI73 DI72 DI71 DI70
22 DI72 Xn+7
6 DI77 38 DI76
23 DI75
7 DI82 39 DI81 Xn+8 DI87 DI86 DI85 DI84 DI83 DI82 DI81 DI80
24 DI80
8 DI85 40 DI84
25 DI83 DI97 DI96 DI95 DI94 DI93 DI92 DI91 DI90
9 DI87 41 DI86 Xn+9
26 DI90
10 DI92 42 DI91
27 DI93 Xn+10 DIA7 DIA6 DIA5 DIA4 DIA3 DIA2 DIA1 DIA0
11 DI95 43 DI94
28 DI96
12 DIA0 44 DI97 DIB7 DIB6 DIB5 DIB4 DIB3 DIB2 DIB1 DIB0
29 DIA1 Xn+11
13 DIA3 45 DIA2
30 DIA4
14 DIA6 46 DIA5
31 DIA7
15 DIB1 47 DIB0
32 DIB2
16 DIB4 48 DIB3
17 DIB6 49 DIB5
18 +24E 50 DIB7

NOTE
Addresses can be 0 to 127.
48 points (DI00 to DI57) can be used for the A16B–2201–0071. Without connector CM22.

112
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

CM23

1 DO00 33 DIC
2 DO03 34 DO02 Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
19 DO01
3 DO06 35 DO05
20 DO04 Yn DO07 DO06 DO05 DO04 DO03 DO02 DO01 DO00
4 DO11 36 DO10
21 DO07
5 DO14 37 DO13
22 DO12 Yn+1 DO17 DO16 DO15 DO14 DO13 DO12 DO11 DO10
6 DO17 38 DO16
23 DO15
7 DO22 39 DO21 Yn+2 DO27 DO26 DO25 DO24 DO23 DO22 DO21 DO20
24 DO20
8 DO25 40 DO24
25 DO23
9 DO27 41 DO26 Yn+3 DO37 DO36 DO35 DO34 DO33 DO32 DO31 DO30
26 DO30
10 DO32 42 DO31
27 DO33 Yn+4 DO47 DO46 DO45 DO44 DO43 DO42 DO41 DO40
11 DO35 43 DO34
28 DO36
12 DO40 44 DO37
29 DO41 Yn+5 DO57 DO56 DO55 DO54 DO53 DO52 DO51 DO50
13 DO43 45 DO42
30 DO44
14 DO46 46 DO45
31 DO47
15 DO51 47 DO50
32 DO52
16 DO54 48 DO53
17 DO56 9 DO55
18 0V 50 DO57

CM24

1 DO61 14 DO60
8 DO62
2 DO64 15 DO63 Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
9 DO65
3 DO67 16 DO66
10 DO70 Yn+6 DO67 DO66 DO65 DO64 DO63 DO62 DO61 DO60
4 DO72 17 DO71
11 DO73
5 DO75 18 DO74 Yn+7 DO77 DO76 DO75 DO74 DO73 DO72 DO71 DO70
12 DO76
6 19 DO77
13
7 0V 20

NOTE
Addresses can be 0 to 127.
32 points (DO00 to DO37) can be used for the A16B–2201–0071. Without connector CM24.

DIC:
Pins for switching the DI common voltage. Usually, it should be
connected to 0 V. (Input)
CM21 (33) and CM23 (33) are connected internally.
+24E:
24 VDC output pin. Its use should be restricted to DI signal common
connection.

113
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

6.6.2
Details of DI
Connection
Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM21(18) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DI00 CM21(01) Xn . 0

DI01 CM21(19) Xn . 1

DI02 CM21(34) Xn . 2

DI03 CM21(02) Xn . 3

DI04 CM21(20) Xn . 4

DI05 CM21(35) Xn . 5

DI06 CM21(03) Xn . 6

DI07 CM21(21) Xn . 7

DIC CM21(33)

0V CM22(33), CM23(18), CM24(07)

Fig.6.6.2 (a) I/O card machine interface (1)

Xn is DC input signal B (for high–speed signal input).

Xn.0, Xn.1, Xn.6, and Xn.7 are switchable–common signals; shown
above are examples of sink–type inputs.
DIC serves as a common input for Xn+1.7, and Xn+11.4 to Xn11.7.

114
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM21(18) Bit number

Address number

Filter and level

conversion circuit
DI10 CM21(36) Xn+1. 0

DI11 CM21(04) Xn+1. 1

DI12 CM21(22) Xn+1. 2

DI13 CM21(37) Xn+1. 3

DI14 CM21(05) Xn+1. 4

DI15 CM21(23) Xn+1. 5

DI16 CM21(38) Xn+1. 6

DI17 CM21(06) Xn+1. 7

Fig.6.6.2 (b) I/O card machine interface (2)

Xn+1 is DC input signal B (for high–speed signal input). Shown above

are examples of sink–type inputs.

115
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM21(18) Bit number

Address number

Filter and level

conversion circuit
DI20 CM21(24) Xn+2. 0

DI21 CM21(39) Xn+2. 1

DI22 CM21(07) Xn+2. 2

DI23 CM21(25) Xn+2. 3

DI24 CM21(40) Xn+2. 4

DI25 CM21(08) Xn+2. 5

DI26 CM21(41) Xn+2. 6

DI27 CM21(09) Xn+2. 7

Fig.6.6.2 (c) I/O card machine interface (3)

Xn+2 is DC input signal A.

116
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM21(18) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DI30 CM21(26) Xn+3. 0

DI31 CM21(42) Xn+3. 1

DI32 CM21(10) Xn+3. 2

DI33 CM21(27) Xn+3. 3

DI34 CM21(43) Xn+3. 4

DI35 CM21(11) Xn+3. 5

DI36 CM21(28) Xn+3. 6

DI37 CM21(44) Xn+3. 7

Fig.6.6.2 (d) I/O card machine interface (4)

Xn+3 is DC input signal A.

117
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM21(18) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DI40 CM21(12) Xn+4. 0

DI41 CM21(29) Xn+4. 1

DI42 CM21(45) Xn+4. 2

DI43 CM21(13) Xn+4. 3

DI44 CM21(30) Xn+4. 4

DI45 CM21(46) Xn+4. 5

DI46 CM21(14) Xn+4. 6

DI47 CM21(31) Xn+4. 7

Fig.6.6.2 (e) I/O card machine interface (5)

Xn+4 is switchable–common DC input signal A.

118
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM21(18) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DI50 CM21(47) Xn+5. 0

DI51 CM21(15) Xn+5. 1

DI52 CM21(32) Xn+5. 2

DI53 CM21(48) Xn+5. 3

DI54 CM21(16) Xn+5. 4

DI55 CM21(49) Xn+5. 5

DI56 CM21(17) Xn+5. 6

DI57 CM21(50) Xn+5. 7

Fig.6.6.2 (f) I/O card machine interface (6)

Xn+5 is DC input signal A.

119
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM22(18) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DI60 CM22(01) Xn+6. 0

DI61 CM22(19) Xn+6. 1

DI62 CM22(34) Xn+6. 2

DI63 CM22(02) Xn+6. 3

DI64 CM22(20) Xn+6. 4

DI65 CM22(35) Xn+6. 5

DI66 CM22(03) Xn+6. 6

DI67 CM22(21) Xn+6. 7

Fig.6.6.2 (g) I/O card machine interface (7)

Xn+6 is DC input signal A.

NOTE
This connection cannot be used for I/O card A
(A16B–2201–0071).

120
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM22(18) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DI70 CM22(36) Xn+7. 0

DI71 CM22(04) Xn+7. 1

DI72 CM22(22) Xn+7. 2

DI73 CM22(37) Xn+7. 3

DI74 CM22(05) Xn+7. 4

DI75 CM22(23) Xn+7. 5

DI76 CM22(38) Xn+7. 6

DI77 CM22(06) Xn+7. 7

Fig.6.6.2 (h) I/O card machine interface (8)

Xn+7 is DC input signal A.

NOTE
This connection cannot be used for I/O card A
(A16B–2201–0071).

121
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM22(18) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DI80 CM22(24) Xn+8. 0

DI81 CM22(39) Xn+8. 1

DI82 CM22(07) Xn+8. 2

DI83 CM22(25) Xn+8. 3

DI84 CM22(40) Xn+8. 4

DI85 CM22(08) Xn+8. 5

DI86 CM22(41) Xn+8. 6

DI87 CM22(09) Xn+8. 7

Fig.6.6.2 (i) I/O card machine interface (9)

Xn+8 is DC input signal A.

NOTE
This connection cannot be used for I/O card A
(A16B–2201–0071).

122
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM22(18) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DI90 CM22(26) Xn+9. 0

DI91 CM22(42) Xn+9. 1

DI92 CM22(10) Xn+9. 2

DI93 CM22(27) Xn+9. 3

DI94 CM22(43) Xn+9. 4

DI95 CM22(11) Xn+9. 5

DI96 CM22(28) Xn+9. 6

DI97 CM22(44) Xn+9. 7

Fig.6.6.2 (j) I/O card machine interface (10)

Xn+9 is DC input signal A.

NOTE
This connection cannot be used for I/O card A
(A16B–2201–0071).

123
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM22(18) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DIA0 CM22(12) Xn+10. 0

DIA1 CM22(29) Xn+10. 1

DIA2 CM22(45) Xn+10. 2

DIA3 CM22(13) Xn+10. 3

DIA4 CM22(30) Xn+10. 4

DIA5 CM22(46) Xn+10. 5

DIA6 CM22(14) Xn+10. 6

DIA7 CM22(31) Xn+10. 7

Fig.6.6.2 (k) I/O card machine interface (11)

Xn+10 is DC input signal A.

NOTE
This connection cannot be used for I/O card A
(A16B–2201–0071).

124
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM22(18) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DIB0 CM22(47) Xn+11. 0

DIB1 CM22(15) Xn+11. 1

DIB2 CM22(32) Xn+11. 2

DIB3 CM22(48) Xn+11. 3

DIB4 CM22(16) Xn+11. 4

DIB5 CM22(49) Xn+11. 5

DIB6 CM22(17) Xn+11. 6

DIB7 CM22(50) Xn+11. 7

DIC CM21(33)

0V CM22(33), CM23(18), CM24(07)

Fig.6.6.2 (l) I/O card machine interface (12)

Xn+11.4 to Xn+11.7 are DC input signal B (for high–speed signal input).

Xn+11.4 to Xn+11.7 are switchable–common signals; shown above are
examples of sink–type inputs.
Xn+11.0 to Xn+11.3 are DC input signal A.
DIC1 serves as a common input for Xn.0, Xn.1, Xn.6, and Xn.7

NOTE
Xn+11 cannot be used for I/O card A (A16B–2201–0071).

125
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

6.6.3
Details of DO
Connection

Power Mate

Pin number
Example of
connection
CM22(33)
Bit number CM23(18)
Address number Sink–type CM24(07) 0V Regulated
driver power supply
0V +24V

Yn .0
CM23(01) DO00

Yn .1 CM23(19) DO01

Yn .2 CM23(34) DO02

Yn .3 CM23(02) DO03

Yn .4 CM23(20) DO04

Yn .5 CM23(35) DO05

Yn .6 CM23(03) DO06

Yn .7 CM23(21) DO07

Fig.6.6.3 (a) I/O card machine interface (13)

126
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate

Pin number
Example of
connection
CM22(33)
Bit number CM23(18)
Address number Sink–type CM24(07) 0V Regulated
driver power supply
0V +24V

Yn+1. 0
CM23(36) DO10

Yn+1. 1 CM23(04) DO11

Yn+1. 2 CM23(22) DO12

Yn+1. 3 CM23(37) DO13

Yn+1. 4 CM23(05) DO14

Yn+1. 5 CM23(23) DO15

Yn+1. 6 CM23(38) DO16

Yn+1. 7 CM23(06) DO17

Fig.6.6.3 (b) I/O card machine interface (14)

127
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate

Pin number
Example of
connection
CM22(33)
Bit number CM23(18)
Address number Sink–type CM24(07) 0V Regulated
driver power supply
0V +24V

Yn+2. 0
CM23(24) DO20

Yn+2. 1 CM23(39) DO21

Yn+2. 2 CM23(07) DO22

Yn+2. 3 CM23(25) DO23

Yn+2. 4 CM23(40) DO24

Yn+2. 5 CM23(08) DO25

Yn+2. 6 CM23(41) DO26

Yn+2. 7 CM23(09) DO27

Fig.6.6.3 (c) I/O card machine interface (15)

128
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate

Pin number
Example of
connection
CM22(33)
Bit number CM23(18)
Address number Sink–type CM24(07) 0V Regulated
driver power supply
0V +24V

Yn+3. 0
CM23(26) DO30

Yn+3. 1 CM23(42) DO31

Yn+3. 2 CM23(10) DO32

Yn+3. 3 CM23(27) DO33

Yn+3. 4 CM23(43) DO34

Yn+3. 5 CM23(11) DO35

Yn+3. 6 CM23(28) DO36

Yn+3. 7 CM23(44) DO37

Fig.6.6.3 (d) I/O card machine interface (16)

129
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate

Pin number
Example of
connection
CM22(33)
Bit number CM23(18)
Address number Sink–type CM24(07) 0V Regulated
driver power supply
0V +24V

Yn+4. 0
CM23(12) DO40

Yn+4. 1 CM23(29) DO41

Yn+4. 2 CM23(45) DO42

Yn+4. 3 CM23(13) DO43

Yn+4. 4 CM23(30) DO44

Yn+4. 5 CM23(46) DO45

Yn+4. 6 CM23(14) DO46

Yn+4. 7 CM23(31) DO47

Fig.6.6.3 (e) I/O card machine interface (17)

NOTE
This connection cannot be used for I/O card A
(A16B–2201–0071).

130
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate

Pin number
Example of
connection
CM22(33)
Bit number CM23(18)
Address number Sink–type CM24(07) 0V Regulated
driver power supply
0V +24V

Yn+5. 0
CM23(47) DO50

Yn+5. 1 CM23(15) DO51

Yn+5. 2 CM23(32) DO52

Yn+5. 3 CM23(48) DO53

Yn+5. 4 CM23(16) DO54

Yn+5. 5 CM23(49) DO55

Yn+5. 6 CM23(17) DO56

Yn+5. 7 CM23(50) DO57

Fig.6.6.3 (f) I/O card machine interface (18)

NOTE
This connection cannot be used for I/O card A
(A16B–2201–0071).

131
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate

Pin number
Example of
connection
CM22(33)
Bit number CM23(18)
Address number Sink–type CM24(07) 0V Regulated
driver power supply
0V +24V

Yn+6. 0
CM24(14) DO60

Yn+6. 1 CM24(01) DO61

Yn+6. 2 CM24(08) DO62

Yn+6. 3 CM24(15) DO63

Yn+6. 4 CM24(02) DO64

Yn+6. 5 CM24(09) DO65

Yn+6. 6 CM24(16) DO66

Yn+6. 7 CM24(03) DO67

Fig.6.6.3 (g) I/O card machine interface (19)

NOTE
This connection cannot be used for I/O card A
(A16B–2201–0071).

132
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate

Pin number
Example of
connection
CM22(33)
Bit number CM23(18)
Address number Sink–type CM24(07) 0V Regulated
driver power supply
0V +24V

Yn+7. 0
CM24(10) DO70

Yn+7. 1 CM24(17) DO71

Yn+7. 2 CM24(04) DO72

Yn+7. 3 CM24(11) DO73

Yn+7. 4 CM24(18) DO74

Yn+7. 5 CM24(05) DO75

Yn+7. 6 CM24(12) DO76

Yn+7. 7 CM24(19) DO77

Fig.6.6.3 (h) I/O card machine interface (20)

NOTE
This connection cannot be used for I/O card A
(A16B–2201–0071).

133
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

6.6.4
Dimensions of I/O Card
A, B



CP6130

CM24
CM23 CM22 CM21

Approx.100mm

The following LEDs, fuses, and variable resistors are mounted on the
PCB:
[LEDs]
DB2 (green, pilot) : Lights while the power to the PCB is on.
DB1 (red, alarm) : Lights if an error occurs in the PCB or CNC.

[Fuses]
FU1 (3.2 A) : Used for external 24–V input.
(Order number : A02B–0120–K104)
FU2 (5.0 A) : Used for +5 V on the PCB.
: (Order number : A02B–0200–K103)

[Variable resistors]
VR1 and VR2 : Factory–set by FANUC. The machine tool builder
need not adjust these resistors.

134
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.7
CONNECTION OF
BUILT–IN I/O CARD C

6.7.1
Outline

FANUC Power Mate–MODEL D 34–pin ribbon

cable connector Machine
operator’s
panel
Built–in
I/O card–C J49, J50
Mother board

DI 32 pins
DO 24 pins

This is built–in I/O card C built in Power Mate–D unit.

The DO signals are of source type and conform to the safety requirements.
Each I/O card is designed such that a connector panel is used to relay the
signals between the I/O card and terminal block or another connector. In
particular, to facilitate connection to a connector panel, MIL–standard
ribbon–cable connectors are employed as the interface connectors.
(1) DI 32 pins and DO 24 pins are available.
(2) Common switches:
1 set of 8 common signals, plus twenty four 24V common signals
(3) Maximum DO load current: 2.1 A
(4) Connector specification:
Connector conforming to MIL–C–83503 standard, equipped with
center key for protection against reverse insertion
Use the cable connector conforming to the equivalent standard.
Recommended connector
A02B–0124–K300
(HIROSE HIF3BB–34D–2.54R)
(5) A standard cabinet is used for this unit. The ribbon cable goes out
from the bottom of the cabinet.
(6) The built–in I/O card can be used together with an external I/O card
or I/O unit.
(7) Built–in I/O card C cannot be used simultaneously with any other
built–in I/O cards.
(8) When the built–in I/O card is used, signals that are input without
PMC intervention, such as the emergency stop signal, must be input
via the built–in I/O card.

135
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

(9) Pin No. of connector

To P.C.B.

Prevent key
Upper
side Pin mark

The near side to prevent key is an

A A side.
B The opposite side is a B side.
17 (From cable side) 321 The near pin to pin mark is No. A1.

(10)For the cable use a bundled sealed cable

34 pin cable with shild (soldering type)
OKI DENSEN CO., LTD. SFX–S 34–7/0.127 3030–SV
(20266) K
FANUC SPECIFICATION A66L–0001–0308#S34S
Clamp the cable shield with the cable clamp on the grounding plate
of the cabinet on the built–in I/O card side.
(11) For details of the signal specifications, see Section 6.4.
(12)Provide sufficient space under the unit to allow the cable to be
connected to and detached from the built–in I/O card.
(13)Ensure that the cable is securely plugged into the unit. Otherwise,
problems such as DI/DO signal transfer errors may occur.

136
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.7.2
Signals (1) DI signals
PMC
ADDRESS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1000

128–B05 128–A06 128–B04 128–A04 128–B03 128–A03 128–B02 128–A02

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1001

128–B10 128–A10 128–B09 128–A09 128–B08 128–A08 128–B07 128–A07

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1002

129–B05 129–A05 129–B04 129–A04 129–B03 129–A03 129–B02 129–A02

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1003

129–B10 129–A10 129–B09 129–A09 129–B08 129–A08 129–B07 129–A07

DC input signal A DC input signal B

Switchable–common DC input signal B (8 pcs)

(2) DO signals
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1000

128–B14 128–A14 128–B13 128–A13 128–B12 128–A12 128–B11 128–A11

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1001

129–B16 129–A16 129–B15 129–A15 128–B16 128–A16 128–B15 128–A15

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1002

129–B14 129–A14 129–B13 129–A13 129–B12 129–A12 129–B11 129–A11

137
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

6.7.3
Machine Interface

Built–in I/O card C

CB128 CB129
34–pin flat cable connector

A B A B
01 +24E +24E 01 +24E +24E
02 X1000.0 X1000.1 02 X1002.0 X1002.1
03 X1000.2 X1000.3 03 X1002.2 X1002.3
04 X1000.4 X1000.5 04 X1002.4 X1002.5
05 DIC X1000.7 05 X1002.6 X1002.7
06 X1000.6 DOC 06 DOC DOC
07 X1001.0 X1001.1 07 X1003.0 X1003.1
08 X1001.2 X1001.3 08 X1003.2 X1003.3
09 X1001.4 X1001.5 09 X1003.4 X1003.5
10 X1001.6 X1001.7 10 X1003.6 X1003.7
11 Y1000.0 Y1000.1 11 Y1002.0 Y1002.1
12 Y1000.2 Y1000.3 12 Y1002.2 Y1002.3
13 Y1000.4 Y1000.5 13 Y1002.4 Y1002.5
14 Y1000.6 Y1000.7 14 Y1002.6 Y1002.7
15 Y1001.0 Y1001.1 15 Y1001.4 Y1001.5
16 Y1001.2 Y1001.3 16 Y1001.6 Y1001.7
17 0V 0V 17 0V 0V

CB128 Male CB129 Male

Female Female

J49 J50

Power magnetics cabinet and machine operator’s

panel

NOTE
1 +24E (output)
A voltage of 24 VDC supplied to the Power Mate main unit
is connected through a fuse and used for DI signals. Do not
connect an external 24 VDC output to this pin. Do not
connect it to DOC either.
2 DOC (external 24 VDC input)
An external voltage of 24 VDC should be supplied for DO
signals.
3 The X1000.6 position for built–in I/O card C differs from that
for the built–in I/O card described in Section 6.8.

138
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.7.4
Details of DI
Connection

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CB128(A01, B01) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
CB128(A02) X1000. 0

CB128(B02) X1000. 1

CB128(A03) X1000. 2

CB128(B03) X1000. 3

CB128(A04) X1000. 4

CB128(B04) X1000. 5

CB128(A06) X1000. 6

CB128(B05) X1000. 7

DIC CB128(A05)

0V CB128(A17, B17)

Fig.6.7.4 (a) Built–in I/O card C machine interface (1)

X1000 is DC input signal B (for high–speed signal input).

X1000.0 to X1000.2 and X1000.7 are switchable–common signals;
shown above are examples of sink–type inputs.
DIC serves as a common input for X1001.0 to X1001.2, and X1001.7.

139
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CB128(A01, B01) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
CB128(A07) X1001. 0

CB128(B07) X1001. 1

CB128(A08) X1001. 2

CB128(B08) X1001. 3

CB128(A09) X1001. 4

CB128(B09) X1001. 5

CB128(A10) X1001. 6

CB128(B10) X1001. 7

DIC CB128(A05)

0V CB128(A17, B17)

Fig.6.7.4 (b) Built–in I/O card C machine interface (2)

X1001 is DC input signal B (for high–speed signal input).

X1001.0 to X1001.2 and X1001.7 are switchable–common signals;
shown above are examples of sink–type inputs.
DIC serves as a common input for X1000.0 to X1000.2, and X1000.7.

140
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CB129(A01, B01) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
CB129(A02) X1002. 0

CB129(B02) X1002. 1

CB129(A03) X1002. 2

CB129(B03) X1002. 3

CB129(A04) X1002. 4

CB129(B04) X1002. 5

CB129(A05) X1002. 6

CB129(B05) X1002. 7

Fig.6.7.4 (c) Built–in I/O card C machine interface (3)

X1002 is DC input signal A.

141
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CB129(A01, B01) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
CB129(A07) X1003. 0

CB129(B07) X1003. 1

CB129(A08) X1003. 2

CB129(B08) X1003. 3

CB129(A09) X1003. 4

CB129(B09) X1003. 5

CB129(A10) X1003. 6

CB129(B10) X1003. 7

Fig.6.7.4 (d) Built–in I/O card C machine interface (4)

X1003 is DC input signal A.

142
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.7.5
Details of DO
Connection

Power Mate

Pin number Example of

connection
Source–type
Bit number driver CB128(B06)
Address number CB129(A06, B06) DOC Regulated
power supply
+24V 0V

Y1000. 0
CB128(A11)

Y1000. 1 CB128(B11)

Y1000. 2 CB128(A12)

Y1000. 3 CB128(B12)

Y1000. 4 CB128(A13)

Y1000. 5 CB128(B13)

Y1000. 6 CB128(A14)

Y1000. 7 CB128(B14)

CB128(A17, B17)
CB129(A17, B17) 0V

Fig.6.7.5 (a) Built–in I/O card C machine interface (5)

143
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate

Pin number Example of

connection
Source–type
Bit number driver CB128(B06)
Address number CB129(A06, B06) DOC Regulated
power supply
+24V 0V

Y1001. 0
CB128(A15)

Y1001. 1 CB128(B15)

Y1001. 2 CB128(A16)

Y1001. 3 CB128(B16)

Y1001. 4 CB129(A15)

Y1001. 5 CB129(B15)

Y1001. 6 CB129(A16)

Y1001. 7 CB129(B16)

CB128(A17, B17)
CB129(A17, B17) 0V

Fig.6.7.5 (b) Built–in I/O card C machine interface (6)

144
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate

Pin number Example of

connection
Source–type
Bit number driver CB128(B06)
Address number CB129(A06, B06) DOC Regulated
power supply
+24V 0V

Y1002. 0
CB129(A11)

Y1002. 1 CB129(B11)

Y1002. 2 CB129(A12)

Y1002. 3 CB129(B12)

Y1002. 4 CB129(A13)

Y1002. 5 CB129(B13)

Y1002. 6 CB129(A14)

Y1002. 7 CB129(B14)

CB128(A17, B17)
CB129(A17, B17) 0V

Fig.6.7.5 (c) Built–in I/O card C machine interface (7)

145
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

6.8
CONNECTION OF
BUILT–IN I/O CARD

6.8.1
Outline

FANUC Power Mate–MODEL D 34–pin ribbon

cable connector Machine
operator’s
panel
Built–in
I/O card J49, J50
Mother board

DI 32 pins
DO 24 pins

This is built–in I/O card built in Power Mate–D unit.

The DO signals are of sink type and do not conform to the safety
requirements.

NOTE
When a sink output interface is used, a ground fault in an
output signal causes the output signal to remain on. From
the viewpoint of safety, therefore, FANUC does not
recommend the use of such an interface for output signals.

Each I/O card is designed such that a connector panel is used to relay the
signals between the I/O card and terminal block or another connector. In
particular, to facilitate connection to a connector panel, MIL–standard
ribbon–cable connectors are employed as the interface connectors.
(1) DI 32 pins and DO 24 pins are available.
(2) Common switches:
3 set of 8 common signals, plus eight 24V common signals
(3) Connector specification:
Connector conforming to MIL–C–83503 standard, equipped with
center key for protection against reverse insertion
Use the cable connector conforming to the equivalent standard.
Recommended connector
A02B–0124–K300
(HIROSE HIF3BB–34D–2.54R)
(4) A standard cabinet is used for this unit. The ribbon cable goes out
from the bottom of the cabinet.
(5) The built–in I/O card can be used together with an external I/O card
or I/O unit.
(6) Built–in I/O card cannot be used simultaneously with any other
built–in I/O cards.

146
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

(7) When the built–in I/O card is used, signals that are input without
PMC intervention, such as the emergency stop signal, must be input
via the built–in I/O card.
(8) Pin No. of connector

To P.C.B.

Prevent key
Upper
side Pin mark

The near side to prevent key is an

A A side.
B The opposite side is a B side.
17 (From cable side) 321 The near pin to pin mark is No. A1.

(9) For the cable use a bundled sealed cable

34 pin cable with shild (soldering type)
OKI DENSEN CO., LTD. SFX–S 34–7/0.127 3030–SV
(20266) K
FANUC SPECIFICATION A66L–0001–0308#S34S
Clamp the cable shield with the cable clamp on the grounding plate
of the cabinet on the built–in I/O card side.
(10)For details of the signal specifications, see Section 6.4.
(11) Provide sufficient space under the unit to allow the cable to be
connected to and detached from the built–in I/O card.
(12)Ensure that the cable is securely plugged into the unit. Otherwise,
problems such as DI/DO signal transfer errors may occur.

147
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

6.8.2
Signals (1) DI signals
PMC
ADDRESS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1000

29–B05 29–A05 29–B04 29–A04 29–B03 29–A03 29–B02 29–A02

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1001

29–B10 29–A10 29–B09 29–A09 29–B08 29–A08 29–B07 29–A07

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1002

30–B05 30–A05 30–B04 30–A04 30–B03 30–A03 30–B02 30–A02

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1003

30–B10 30–A10 30–B09 30–A09 30–B08 30–A08 30–B07 30–A07

Switchable–common DC input signal A DC input signal B

Switchable–common DC input signal B (8 pcs)

(2) DO signals
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1000

29–B14 29–A14 29–B13 29–A13 29–B12 29–A12 29–B11 29–A11

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1001

30–B16 30–A16 30–B15 30–A15 29–B16 29–A16 29–B15 29–A15

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1002

30–B14 30–A14 30–B13 30–A13 30–B12 30–A12 30–B11 30–A11

148
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.8.3
Machine Interface

Built–in I/O card

CM29 CM30
34–pin flat cable connector

A B A B
01 +24E +24E 01 +24E +24E
02 X1000.0 X1000.1 02 X1002.0 X1002.1
03 X1000.2 X1000.3 03 X1002.2 X1002.3
04 X1000.4 X1000.5 04 X1002.4 X1002.5
05 X1000.6 X1000.7 05 X1002.6 X1002.7
06 COM1 06 COM2 COM3
07 X1001.0 X1001.1 07 X1003.0 X1003.1
08 X1001.2 X1001.3 08 X1003.2 X1003.3
09 X1001.4 X1001.5 09 X1003.4 X1003.5
10 X1001.6 X1001.7 10 X1003.6 X1003.7
11 Y1000.0 Y1000.1 11 Y1002.0 Y1002.1
12 Y1000.2 Y1000.3 12 Y1002.2 Y1002.3
13 Y1000.4 Y1000.5 13 Y1002.4 Y1002.5
14 Y1000.6 Y1000.7 14 Y1002.6 Y1002.7
15 Y1001.0 Y1001.1 15 Y1001.4 Y1001.5
16 Y1001.2 Y1001.3 16 Y1001.6 Y1001.7
17 0V 0V 17 0V 0V

CM29 Male CM30 Male

Female Female

J49 J50

Power magnetics cabinet and machine operator’s

panel

NOTE
1 +24E (output)
A voltage of 24 VDC supplied to the Power Mate main unit
is connected through a fuse and used for DI signals. Do not
connect an external 24 VDC output to this pin. Do not
connect it to DOC either.
2 The X1000.6 position differs from that for built–in I/O card
C. (See Section 6.7.)

149
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

6.8.4
Details of DI
Connection

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM29(A01, B01) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
CM29(A02) X1000. 0

CM29(B02) X1000. 1

CM29(A03) X1000. 2

CM29(B03) X1000. 3

CM29(A04) X1000. 4

CM29(B04) X1000. 5

CM29(A05) X1000. 6

CM29(B05) X1000. 7

Fig.6.8.4 (a) Built–in I/O card machine interface (1)

X1000 is DC input signal B (for high–speed signal input).

150
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM29(A01, B01) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
CM29(A07) X1001. 0

CM29(B07) X1001. 1

CM29(A08) X1001. 2

CM29(B08) X1001. 3

CM29(A09) X1001. 4

CM29(B09) X1001. 5

CM29(A10) X1001. 6

CM29(B10) X1001. 7

COM1 CM29(B06)

0V CM29(A17, B17)

Fig.6.8.4 (b) Built–in I/O card machine interface (2)

X1001 is DC input signal B (for high–speed signal input).

151
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM30(A01, B01) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
CM30(A02) X1002. 0

CM30(B02) X1002. 1

CM30(A03) X1002. 2

CM30(B03) X1002. 3

CM30(A04) X1002. 4

CM30(B04) X1002. 5

CM30(A05) X1002. 6

CM30(B05) X1002. 7

COM2 CM30(A06)

0V CM30(A17, B17)

Fig.6.8.4 (c) Built–in I/O card machine interface (3)

X1002 is DC input signal A.

152
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM30(A01, B01) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
CM30(A07) X1003. 0

CM30(B07) X1003. 1

CM30(A08) X1003. 2

CM30(B08) X1003. 3

CM30(A09) X1003. 4

CM30(B09) X1003. 5

CM30(A10) X1003. 6

CM30(B10) X1003. 7

COM3 CM30(B06)

0V CM30(A17, B17)

Fig.6.8.4 (d) Built–in I/O card machine interface (4)

X1003 is DC input signal A.

153
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

6.8.5
Details of DO
Connection

Power Mate

Pin number Example of

connection

Bit number CM29(A17, B17)

Address number CM30(A17, B17) 0V Regulated
power supply
Sink driver 0V +24V

Y1000. 0
CM29(A11)

Y1000. 1 CM29(B11)

Y1000. 2 CM29(A12)

Y1000. 3 CM29(B12)

Y1000. 4 CM29(A13)

Y1000. 5 CM29(B13)

Y1000. 6 CM29(A14)

Y1000. 7 CM29(B14)

Fig.6.8.5 (a) Built–in I/O card machine interface (5)

154
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate

Pin number Example of

connection

Bit number CM29(A17, B17)

Address number CM30(A17, B17) 0V Regulated
power supply
Sink driver 0V +24V

Y1001. 0
CM29(A15)

Y1001. 1 CM29(B15)

Y1001. 2 CM29(A16)

Y1001. 3 CM29(B16)

Y1001. 4 CM30(A15)

Y1001. 5 CM30(B15)

Y1001. 6 CM30(A16)

Y1001. 7 CM30(B16)

Fig.6.8.5 (b) Built–in I/O card machine interface (6)

155
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate

Pin number Example of

connection

Bit number CM29(A17, B17)

Address number CM30(A17, B17) 0V Regulated
power supply
Sink driver 0V +24V

Y1002. 0
CM30(A11)

Y1002. 1 CM30(B11)

Y1002. 2 CM30(A12)

Y1002. 3 CM30(B12)

Y1002. 4 CM30(A13)

Y1002. 5 CM30(B13)

Y1002. 6 CM30(A14)

Y1002. 7 CM30(B14)

Fig.6.8.5 (c) Built–in I/O card machine interface (7)

156
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.9
CONNECTION OF
BUILT–IN I/O CARD D

6.9.1
Outline

FANUC Power Mate–MODEL F 50–pin ribbon

cable connector Machine
operator’s
Built–in panel
I/O card J80, J81
Mother board

DI 32 pins
DO 24 pins
or
DI 48 points
DO 32 points

This is built–in I/O card D1, D2 built in Power Mate–F unit.

The DO signals are of source type and conform to the safety requirements.
Each I/O card is designed such that a connector panel is used to relay the
signals between the I/O card and terminal block or another connector. In
particular, to facilitate connection to a connector panel, MIL–standard
ribbon–cable connectors are employed as the interface connectors.
(1) Either a built–in I/O card with 32 DI pins and 24 DO pins, or a built–in
I/O card with 48 DI pins and 32 DO pins, can be selected.
Built–in I/O card D1 (32 DI pins, 24 DO pins), maximum DO load
current: 2.1 A
Built–in I/O card D2 (48 DI pins, 32 DO pins), maximum DO load
current: 3.5 A
(2) Common switches:
1 set of 8 common signals, plus fourty 24V common signals (D2)
1 set of 8 common signals, plus twenty four 24V common signals (D1)
(3) Connector specification:
Connector conforming to MIL–C–83503 standard, equipped with
center key for protection against reverse insertion
Use the cable connector conforming to the equivalent standard.
Recommended connector
A02B–0124–K342
(HIROSE HIF3BB–50D–2.54R)
(4) A standard cabinet is used for this unit. The ribbon cable goes out
from the bottom of the cabinet.
(5) The built–in I/O card D can not be used together with an external I/O
card or I/O unit.
(6) Built–in I/O card D cannot be used simultaneously with any other
built–in I/O cards.

157
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

(7) Pin No. of connector

To P.C.B.

Prevent key
Upper
side Pin mark

The near side to prevent key is an

A A side.
B The opposite side is a B side.
25 (From cable side) 321 The near pin to pin mark is No. A1.

(8) For the cable use a bundled sealed cable

50 pin cable with shild (soldering type)
OKI DENSEN CO., LTD. SFX–S 50–7/0.127 3030–SV
(20266) K
FANUC SPECIFICATION A66L–0001–0308#S50S
Clamp the cable shield with the cable clamp on the grounding plate
of the cabinet on the built–in I/O card side.
(9) For details of the signal specifications, see Section 6.4.
(10)Provide sufficient space under the unit to allow the cable to be
connected to and detached from the built–in I/O card.
(11) Ensure that the cable is securely plugged into the unit. Otherwise,
problems such as DI/DO signal transfer errors may occur.

158
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.9.2
Signals (1) DI signals
PMC
ADDRESS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1000

130–B13 130–A14 130–B12 130–A12 130–B11 130–A11 130–B10 130–A10

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1001

130–B18 130–A18 130–B17 130–A17 130–B16 130–A16 130–B15 130–A15

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1002

131–B13 131–A13 131–B12 131–A12 131–B11 131–A11 131–B10 131–A10

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1003

131–B18 131–A18 131–B17 131–A17 131–B16 131–A16 131–B15 131–A15

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1004

130–B05 130–A05 130–B04 130–A04 130–B03 130–A03 130–B02 130–A02

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1005

131–B05 131–A05 131–B04 131–A04 131–B03 131–A03 131–B02 131–A02

DC input signal A DC input signal B

Switchable–common DC input signal B (8 pcs)

NOTE
For built–in I/O card D1, X1004 and X1005 cannot be used.

(2) DO signals
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1000

130–B22 130–A22 130–B21 130–A21 130–B20 130–A20 130–B19 130–A19

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1001

131–B24 131–A24 131–B23 131–A23 130–B24 130–A24 130–B23 130–A23

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1002

131–B22 131–A22 131–B21 131–A21 131–B20 131–A20 131–B19 131–A19

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1003

131–B07 131–A07 131–B06 131–A06 130–B07 130–A07 130–B06 130–A06

NOTE
For built–in I/O card D1, Y1003 cannot be used.

159
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

6.9.3
Machine Interface

Built–in I/O card D

CB130 CB131
34–pin flat cable connector

A B A B
01 0V 0V 01 0V 0V
02 X1004.0 X1004.1 02 X1005.0 X1005.1
03 X1004.2 X1004.3 03 X1005.2 X1005.3
04 X1004.4 X1004.5 04 X1005.4 X1005.5
05 X1004.6 X1004.7 05 X1005.6 X1005.7
06 Y1003.0 Y1003.1 06 Y1003.4 Y1003.5
07 Y1003.2 Y1003.3 07 Y1003.6 Y1003.7
08 DOC 08 DOC
09 +24E +24E 09 +24E +24E
10 X1000.0 X1000.1 10 X1002.0 X1002.1
11 X1000.2 X1000.3 11 X1002.2 X1002.3
12 X1000.4 X1000.5 12 X1002.4 X1002.5
13 DIC X1000.7 13 X1002.6 X1002.7
14 X1000.6 DOC 14 DOC DOC
15 X1001.0 X1001.1 15 X1003.0 X1003.1
16 X1001.2 X1001.3 16 X1003.2 X1003.3
17 X1001.4 X1001.5 17 X1003.4 X1003.5
18 X1001.6 X1001.7 18 X1003.6 X1003.7
19 Y1000.0 Y1000.1 19 Y1002.0 Y1002.1
20 Y1000.2 Y1000.3 20 Y1002.2 Y1002.3
21 Y1000.4 Y1000.5 21 Y1002.4 Y1002.5
22 Y1000.6 Y1000.7 22 Y1002.6 Y1002.7
23 Y1001.0 Y1001.1 23 Y1001.4 Y1001.5
24 Y1001.2 Y1001.3 24 Y1001.6 Y1001.7
25 0V 0V 25 0V 0V

CB130 Male CB131 Male

Female Female
J80 J81

Power magnetics cabinet and machine operator’s

panel

NOTE
1 +24E (output)
A voltage of 24 VDC supplied to the Power Mate main unit
is connected through a fuse and used for DI signals. Do not
connect an external 24 VDC output to this pin. Do not
connect it to DOC either.
2 DOC (external 24 VDC input)
An external voltage of 24 VDC should be supplied for DO
signals.
3 For built–in I/O card D1, A01 to A08 and B01 to B08 of
CB130 and CB131 cannot be used.

160
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.9.4
Details of DI
Connection

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CB130(A09, B09) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
CB130(A10) X1000. 0

CB130(B10) X1000. 1

CB130(A11) X1000. 2

CB130(B11) X1000. 3

CB130(A12) X1000. 4

CB130(B12) X1000. 5

CB130(A14) X1000. 6

CB130(B13) X1000. 7

DIC CB130(A13)

0V CB130(A25, B25)

Fig.6.9.4 (a) Built–in I/O card D machine interface (1)

X1000 is DC input signal B (for high–speed signal input).

X1000.0 to X1000.2 and X1000.7 are switchable–common signals;
shown above are examples of sink–type inputs.
DIC serves as a common input for X1001.0 to X1001.2, and X1001.7.

161
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CB130(A09, B09) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
CB130(A15) X1001. 0

CB130(B15) X1001. 1

CB130(A16) X1001. 2

CB130(B16) X1001. 3

CB130(A17) X1001. 4

CB130(B17) X1001. 5

CB130(A18) X1001. 6

CB130(B18) X1001. 7

DIC CB130(A13)

0V CB130(A25, B25)

Fig.6.9.4 (b) Built–in I/O card D machine interface (2)

X1001 is DC input signal B (for high–speed signal input).

X1001.0 to X1001.2 and X1001.7 are switchable–common signals;
shown above are examples of sink–type inputs.
DIC serves as a common input for X1000.0 to X1000.2, and X1000.7.

162
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CB131(A09, B09) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
CB131(A10) X1002. 0

CB131(B10) X1002. 1

CB131(A11) X1002. 2

CB131(B11) X1002. 3

CB131(A12) X1002. 4

CB131(B12) X1002. 5

CB131(A13) X1002. 6

CB131(B13) X1002. 7

Fig.6.9.4 (c) Built–in I/O card D machine interface (3)

X1002 is DC input signal A.

163
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CB131(A09, B09) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
CB131(A15) X1003. 0

CB131(B15) X1003. 1

CB131(A16) X1003. 2

CB131(B16) X1003. 3

CB131(A17) X1003. 4

CB131(B17) X1003. 5

CB131(A18) X1003. 6

CB131(B18) X1003. 7

Fig.6.9.4 (d) Built–in I/O card D machine interface (4)

X1003 is DC input signal A.

164
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CB130(A09, B09) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
CB130(A02) X1004. 0

CB130(B02) X1004. 1

CB130(A03) X1004. 2

CB130(B03) X1004. 3

CB130(A04) X1004. 4

CB130(B04) X1004. 5

CB130(A05) X1004. 6

CB130(B05) X1004. 7

Fig.6.9.4 (e) Built–in I/O card D machine interface (5)

X1004 is DC input signal A.

NOTE
This interface is not applicable to built–in I/O card D1.

165
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CB131(A09, B09) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
CB131(A02) X1005. 0

CB131(B02) X1005. 1

CB131(A03) X1005. 2

CB131(B03) X1005. 3

CB131(A04) X1005. 4

CB131(B04) X1005. 5

CB131(A05) X1005. 6

CB131(B05) X1005. 7

Fig.6.9.4 (f) Built–in I/O card D machine interface (6)

X1005 is DC input signal A.

NOTE
This interface is not applicable to built–in I/O card D1.

166
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.9.5
Details of DO
Connection

Power Mate

Pin number Example of

connection
Source–type
Bit number driver CB130(B14)
Address number CB131(A14, B14) DOC Regulated
power supply
+24V 0V

Y1000. 0
CB130(A19)

Y1000. 1 CB130(B19)

Y1000. 2 CB130(A20)

Y1000. 3 CB130(B20)

Y1000. 4 CB130(A21)

Y1000. 5 CB130(B21)

Y1000. 6 CB130(A22)

Y1000. 7 CB130(B22)

CB128(A25, B25)
CB131(A25, B25) 0V

Fig.6.9.5 (a) Built–in I/O card D machine interface (7)

NOTE
For built–in I/O card D2, CB130 (B08) and CB131 (B08) are
also DOC. Connect a 24–V power supply.

167
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate

Pin number Example of

connection
Source–type
Bit number driver CB130(A14)
Address number CB131(A14, B14) DOC Regulated
power supply
+24V 0V

Y1001. 0
CB130(A23)

Y1001. 1 CB130(B23)

Y1001. 2 CB130(A24)

Y1001. 3 CB130(B24)

Y1001. 4 CB131(A23)

Y1001. 5 CB131(B23)

Y1001. 6 CB131(A24)

Y1001. 7 CB131(B24)

CB130(A25, B25)
CB131(A25, B25) 0V

Fig.6.9.5 (b) Built–in I/O card D machine interface (8)

NOTE
For built–in I/O card D2, CB130 (B08) and CB131 (B08) are
also DOC. Connect a 24–V power supply.

168
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate

Pin number Example of

connection
Source–type
Bit number driver CB130(A14)
Address number CB131(A14, B14) DOC Regulated
power supply
+24V 0V

Y1002. 0
CB131(A19)

Y1002. 1 CB131(B19)

Y1002. 2 CB131(A20)

Y1002. 3 CB131(B20)

Y1002. 4 CB131(A21)

Y1002. 5 CB131(B21)

Y1002. 6 CB131(A22)

Y1002. 7 CB131(B22)

CB130(A25, B25)
CB131(A25, B25) 0V

Fig.6.9.5 (c) Built–in I/O card D machine interface (9)

NOTE
For built–in I/O card D2, CB130 (B08) and CB131 (B08) are
also DOC. Connect a 24–V power supply.

169
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate

Pin number Example of

connection
Source–type
Bit number driver CB130(A14, B08)
Address number CB131(B08, A14, B14) DOC Regulated
power supply
+24V 0V

Y1003. 0
CB130(A06)

Y1003. 1 CB130(B06)

Y1003. 2 CB130(A07)

Y1003. 3 CB130(B07)

Y1003. 4 CB131(A06)

Y1003. 5 CB131(B06)

Y1003. 6 CB131(A07)

Y1003. 7 CB131(B07)

CB130(A25, B25)
CB131(A25, B25) 0V

Fig.6.9.5 (d) Built–in I/O card D machine interface (10)

NOTE
This interface is not applicable to built–in I/O card D1.

170
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.10
CONNECTION OF
BUILT–IN
I/O CARD A, B

6.10.1
Outline

FANUC Power Mate–MODEL F 50–pin ribbon

cable connector Machine
operator’s
Built–in panel
I/O card A,B J80, J81
Mother board

DI 32 pins
DO 24 pins
or
DI 48 points
DO 32 points

This is built–in I/O card A, B built in Power Mate–F unit.

The DO signals are of sink type and do not conform to the safety
requirements.

NOTE
When a sink output interface is used, a ground fault in an
output signal causes the output signal to remain on. From
the viewpoint of safety, therefore, FANUC does not
recommend the use of such an interface for output signals.

Each I/O card is designed such that a connector panel is used to relay the
signals between the I/O card and terminal block or another connector. In
particular, to facilitate connection to a connector panel, MIL–standard
ribbon–cable connectors are employed as the interface connectors.
(1) Either a built–in I/O card with 32 DI pins and 24 DO pins, or a built–in
I/O card with 48 DI pins and 32 DO pins, can be selected.
Built–in I/O card A (32 DI pins, 24 DO pins), maximum DO load
current: 2.1 A
Built–in I/O card B (48 DI pins, 32 DO pins), maximum DO load
current: 3.5 A
(2) Common switches:
1 set of 4 common signals, 3 sets of 8 common signals, plus four 24V
common signals (A), 1 set of 4 common signals, 5 sets of 8 common
signals, plus four 24V common signals (B)
(3) Connector specification:
Connector conforming to MIL–C–83503 standard, equipped with
center key for protection against reverse insertion
Use the cable connector conforming to the equivalent standard.
Recommended connector

171
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

A02B–0124–K342
(HIROSE HIF3BB–34D–2.54R)
(4) A standard cabinet is used for this unit. The ribbon cable goes out
from the bottom of the cabinet.
(5) The built–in I/O card A, B can not be used together with an external
I/O card or I/O unit.
(6) Built–in I/O card A, B cannot be used simultaneously with any other
built–in I/O cards.
(7) Pin No. of connector

To P.C.B.

Prevent key
Upper
side Pin mark

The near side to prevent key is an

A A side.
B The opposite side is a B side.
25 (From cable side) 321 The near pin to pin mark is No. A1.

(8) For the cable use a bundled sealed cable

50 pin cable with shild (soldering type)
OKI DENSEN CO., LTD. SFX–S 50–7/0.127 3030–SV
(20266) K
FANUC SPECIFICATION A66L–0001–0308#S50S
Clamp the cable shield with the cable clamp on the grounding plate
of the cabinet on the built–in I/O card side.
(9) For details of the signal specifications, see Section 6.4.
(10)Provide sufficient space under the unit to allow the cable to be
connected to and detached from the built–in I/O card.
(11) Ensure that the cable is securely plugged into the unit. Otherwise,
problems such as DI/DO signal transfer errors may occur.

172
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.10.2
Signals (1) DI signals
PMC
ADDRESS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1000

43–B05 43–A05 43–B04 43–A04 43–B03 43–A03 43–B02 43–A02

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1001

43–B10 43–A10 43–B09 43–A09 43–B08 43–A08 43–B07 43–A07

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1002

43–B14 43–A14 43–B13 43–A13 43–B12 43–A12 43–B11 43–A11

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1003

44–B05 44–A05 44–B04 44–A04 44–B03 44–A03 44–B02 44–A02

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1004

44–B10 44–A10 44–B09 44–A09 44–B08 44–A08 44–B07 44–A07

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1005

44–B14 44–A14 44–B13 44–A13 44–B12 44–A12 44–B11 44–A11

DC input signal A DC input signal B

Switchable–common DC input signal B (8 pcs)

NOTE
For built–in I/O card A, X1004 and X1005 cannot be used.

(2) DO signals
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1000

43–B19 43–A19 43–B18 43–A18 43–B17 43–A17 43–B16 43–A16

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1001

43–B23 43–A23 43–B22 43–A22 43–B21 43–A21 43–B20 43–A20

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1002

44–B19 44–A19 44–B18 44–A18 44–B17 44–A17 44–B16 44–A16

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1003

44–B23 44–A23 44–B22 44–A22 44–B21 44–A21 44–B20 44–A20

NOTE
For built–in I/O card A, Y1003 cannot be used.

173
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

6.10.3
Machine Interface

Built–in I/O card A, B

CM43 CM44
34–pin flat cable connector

A B A B
01 +24E +24E 01 +24E +24E
02 X1000.0 X1000.1 02 X1003.0 X1003.1
03 X1000.2 X1000.3 03 X1003.2 X1003.3
04 X1000.4 X1000.5 04 X1003.4 X1003.5
05 X1000.6 X1000.7 05 X1003.6 X1003.7
06 COM0 COM1 06 COM3 COM4
07 X1001.0 X1001.1 07 X1004.0 X1004.1
08 X1001.2 X1001.3 08 X1004.2 X1004.3
09 X1001.4 X1001.5 09 X1004.4 X1004.5
10 X1001.6 X1001.7 10 X1004.6 X1004.7
11 X1002.0 X1002.1 11 X1005.0 X1005.1
12 X1002.2 X1002.3 12 X1005.2 X1005.3
13 X1002.4 X1002.5 13 X1005.4 X1005.5
14 X1002.6 X1002.7 14 X1005.6 X1005.7
15 COM2 15 COM5
16 Y1000.0 Y1000.1 16 Y1002.0 Y1002.1
17 Y1000.2 Y1000.3 17 Y1002.2 Y1002.3
18 Y1000.4 Y1000.5 18 Y1002.4 Y1002.5
19 Y1000.6 Y1000.7 19 Y1002.6 Y1002.7
20 Y1001.0 Y1001.1 20 Y1003.0 Y1003.1
21 Y1001.2 Y1001.3 21 Y1003.2 Y1003.3
22 Y1001.4 Y1001.5 22 Y1003.4 Y1003.5
23 Y1001.6 Y1001.7 23 Y1003.6 Y1003.7
24 0V 0V 24 0V 0V
25 0V 0V 25 0V 0V

CB43 Male CB44 Male

Female Female

J86 J87

Power magnetics cabinet and machine operator’s

panel

NOTE
1 +24E (output)
A voltage of 24 VDC supplied to the Power Mate main unit
is connected through a fuse and used for DI signals. Do not
connect an external 24 VDC output to this pin. Do not
connect it to DOC either.
2 For built–in I/O card A, the positions indicated by shading in
the above figure cannot be used.

174
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.10.4
Details of DI
Connection

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM43(A01, B01) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
CM43(A02) X1000. 0

CM43(B02) X1000. 1

CM43(A03) X1000. 2

CM43(B03) X1000. 3

CM43(A04) X1000. 4

CM43(B04) X1000. 5

CM43(A05) X1000. 6

CM43(B05) X1000. 7

COM0 CM43(A06)

0V CM43(A24, B24, A25, B25)

Fig.6.10.4 (a) Built–in I/O card A, B machine interface (1)

X1000 is DC input signal B (for high–speed signal input).

X1000.0, X1000.1, X1000.6 and X1000.7 are switchable–common
signals; shown above are examples of sink–type inputs.
DIC serves as a common input for X1001.0 to X1001.2, and X1001.7.

175
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM43(A01, B01) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
CM43(A07) X1001. 0

CM43(B07) X1001. 1

CM43(A08) X1001. 2

CM43(B08) X1001. 3

CM43(A09) X1001. 4

CM43(B09) X1001. 5

CM43(A10) X1001. 6

CM43(B10) X1001. 7

COM1 CM43(B06)

0V CM43(A24, B24, A25, B25)

Fig.6.10.4 (b) Built–in I/O card A, B machine interface (2)

X1001 is DC input signal B (for high–speed signal input).

176
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM43(A01, B01) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
CM43(A11) X1002. 0

CM43(B11) X1002. 1

CM43(A12) X1002. 2

CM43(B12) X1002. 3

CM43(A13) X1002. 4

CM43(B13) X1002. 5

CM43(A14) X1002. 6

CM43(B14) X1002. 7

COM2 CM43(A15)

0V CM43(A24, B24, A25, B25)

Fig.6.10.4 (c) Built–in I/O card A, B machine interface (3)

X1002 is DC input signal A.

177
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM44(A01, B01) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
CM44(A02) X1003. 0

CM44(B02) X1003. 1

CM44(A03) X1003. 2

CM44(B03) X1003. 3

CM44(A04) X1003. 4

CM44(B04) X1003. 5

CM44(A05) X1003. 6

CM44(B05) X1003. 7

COM3 CM44(A06)

0V CM44(A24, B24, A25, B25)

Fig.6.10.4 (d) Built–in I/O card A, B machine interface (4)

X1003 is DC input signal A.

178
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM44(A01, B01) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
CM44(A07) X1004. 0

CM44(B07) X1004. 1

CM44(A08) X1004. 2

CM44(B08) X1004. 3

CM44(A09) X1004. 4

CM44(B09) X1004. 5

CM44(A10) X1004. 6

CM44(B10) X1004. 7

COM4 CM44(B06)

0V CM44(A24, B24, A25, B25)

Fig.6.10.4 (e) Built–in I/O card A, B machine interface (5)

NOTE
This interface is not applicable to built–in I/O card A.

X1004 is DC input signal A.

179
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E

CM44(A01, B01) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
CM44(A11) X1005. 0

CM44(B11) X1005. 1

CM44(A12) X1005. 2

CM44(B12) X1005. 3

CM44(A13) X1005. 4

CM44(B13) X1005. 5

CM44(A14) X1005. 6

CM44(B14) X1005. 7

COM5 CM44(A15)

0V CM44(A24, B24, A25, B25)

Fig.6.10.4 (f) Built–in I/O card A, B machine interface (6)

NOTE
This interface is not applicable to built–in I/O card A.

X1005 is DC input signal A.

180
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.10.5
Details of DO
Connection

Power Mate

Pin number Example of

connection

Bit number CM43(A24, B24,

Address number A25, B25) 0V Regulated
power supply
Sink driver 0V +24V

Y1000. 0
CM43(A16)

Y1000. 1 CM43(B16)

Y1000. 2 CM43(A17)

Y1000. 3 CM43(B17)

Y1000. 4 CM43(A18)

Y1000. 5 CM43(B18)

Y1000. 6 CM43(A19)

Y1000. 7 CM43(B19)

Fig.6.10.5 (a) Built–in I/O card A, B machine interface (7)

181
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate

Pin number Example of

connection

Bit number CM43(A24, B24,

Address number A25, B25) 0V Regulated
power supply
Sink driver 0V +24V

Y1001. 0
CM43(A20)

Y1001. 1 CM43(B20)

Y1001. 2 CM43(A21)

Y1001. 3 CM43(B21)

Y1001. 4 CM43(A22)

Y1001. 5 CM43(B22)

Y1001. 6 CM43(A23)

Y1001. 7 CM43(B23)

Fig.6.10.5 (b) Built–in I/O card A, B machine interface (8)

182
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate

Pin number Example of

connection

Bit number CM43(A24, B24,

Address number A25, B25) 0V Regulated
power supply
Sink driver 0V +24V

Y1002. 0
CM44(A16)

Y1002. 1 CM44(B16)

Y1002. 2 CM44(A17)

Y1002. 3 CM44(B17)

Y1002. 4 CM44(A18)

Y1002. 5 CM44(B18)

Y1002. 6 CM44(A19)

Y1002. 7 CM44(B19)

Fig.6.10.5 (c) Built–in I/O card A, B machine interface (9)

183
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Power Mate

Pin number Example of

connection

Bit number CM44(A24, B24,

Address number A25, B25) 0V Regulated
power supply
Sink driver 0V +24V

Y1003. 0
CM44(A20)

Y1003. 1 CM44(B20)

Y1003. 2 CM44(A21)

Y1003. 3 CM44(B21)

Y1003. 4 CM44(A22)

Y1003. 5 CM44(B22)

Y1003. 6 CM44(A23)

Y1003. 7 CM44(B23)

Fig.6.10.5 (d) Built–in I/O card A, B machine interface (10)

NOTE
This interface is not applicable to built–in I/O card A.

184
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.11 This section provides examples of connecting the emergency stop signal
input, skip signal, reference position return deceleration signal input, and
MACHINE high–speed interlock signal, all of which are processed without PMC
INTERFACE intervention.
CONNECTION
EXAMPLES
NOTE
The emergency stop signal input is used to stop the
machine in the event of an emergency. This signal must
always be connected to the machine, therefore.

185
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

6.11.1
When the One–path
Power Mate–D is Being
Used
Power Mate–D

+24E
Bit number
+24E Address number

Filter and level

Skip 2
conversion circuit
signal SKIP2 X1000. 0
(X 000. 0)

Skip 3
X1000. 1
signal SKIP3 (X 000. 1)

Skip 4 X1000. 2
signal SKIP4 (X 000. 2)

X1000. 3
(X 000. 3)

Emergency
stop signal X1000. 4
input *ESP (X 000. 4)

Reference position
return deceleration X1000. 5
signal input (1st axis) *DEC1 (X 000. 5)

High–speed
interlock X1000. 6
signal *RILK (X 000. 6)

Skip X1000. 7
signal SKIP (X 000. 7)

DIC

0V

Fig.6.11.1 (a) One–path Power Mate–D machine interface (1)

When a built–in I/O card is being used, the input address is X1000.
When only an external I/O unit is being used, the input address is X000.
When both a built–in I/O card and external I/O unit are being used, the
input address is X1000.
The connector number varies with the type of I/O card being used. The
common switching method also varies. For details, see the description
of the corresponding I/O card.

186
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate–D

+24E
Bit number
Address number

Filter and level

conversion circuit
X1001. 0
(X 001. 0)

X1001. 1
(X 001. 1)

X1001. 2
(X 001. 2)

X1001. 3
(X 001. 3)

X1001. 4
(X 001. 4)

Reference position
return deceleration X1001. 5
signal input (2nd axis) *DEC2 (X 001. 5)

X1001. 6
(X 001. 6)

X1001. 7
(X 001. 7)

DIC

0V

Fig.6.11.1 (b) One–path Power Mate–D machine interface (2)

When a built–in I/O card is being used, the input address is X1001.
When only an external I/O unit is being used, the input address is X001.
When both a built–in I/O card and an external I/O unit are being used, the
input address is X1001.
The connector number varies with the type of I/O card being used. The
common switching method also varies. For details, see the description
of the corresponding I/O card.

187
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

6.11.2
When the Two–path
Mate–D Unit is Being
Used
Power Mate–D
Signals for the first path

+24E
Bit number
+24E Address number

Filter and level

Skip 2
conversion circuit
signal SKIP2#1 X1000. 0
(X 000. 0)

Skip 3
X1000. 1
signal SKIP3#1 (X 000. 1)

Skip 4 X1000. 2
signal SKIP4#1 (X 000. 2)

X1000. 3
(X 000. 3)

Emergency
stop signal X1000. 4
input *ESP#1 (X 000. 4)

Reference position
return deceleration X1000. 5
signal input *DEC1#1 (X 000. 5)

High–speed
interlock X1000. 6
signal *RILK#1 (X 000. 6)

Skip X1000. 7
signal SKIP#1 (X 000. 7)

DIC

0V

Fig.6.11.2 (a) Two–path Power Mate–D machine interface (1)

When a built–in I/O card is being used, the input address is X1000.
When only an external I/O unit is being used, the input address is X000.
When both a built–in I/O card and external I/O unit are being used, the
input address is X1000.
The connector number varies with the type of I/O card being used. The
common switching method also varies. For details, see the description
of the corresponding I/O card.

188
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

Power Mate–D
Signals for the second path

+24E
Bit number
+24E Address number

Filter and level

Skip 2
conversion circuit
signal SKIP2#2 X1001. 0
(X 001. 0)

Skip 3
X1001. 1
signal SKIP3#2 (X 001. 1)

Skip 4 X1001. 2
signal SKIP4#2 (X 001. 2)

X1001. 3
(X 001. 3)

Emergency
stop signal X1001. 4
input *ESP#2 (X 001. 4)

Reference position
return deceleration X1001. 5
signal input *DEC#2 (X 001. 5)

High–speed
interlock X1001. 6
signal *RILK#2 (X 001. 6)

Skip X1001. 7
signal SKIP#2 (X 001. 7)

DIC

0V

Fig.6.11.2 (b) Two–path Power Mate–D machine interface (2)

When a built–in I/O card is being used, the input address is X1001.
When only an external I/O unit is being used, the input address is X001.
When both a built–in I/O card and external I/O unit are being used, the
input address is X1001.
The connector number varies with the type of I/O card being used. The
common switching method also varies. For details, see the description
of the corresponding I/O card.

189
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

6.11.3
When the Power
Mate–F is Being Used
Power Mate–F

+24E

+24E Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
Skip 2
conversion circuit
signal SKIP2
X1000. 0

Skip 3
signal SKIP3 X1000. 1

Skip 4
signal SKIP4 X1000. 2

X1000. 3

Emergency
stop signal
input *ESP X1000. 4

Reference position
return deceleration
signal input *DEC X1000. 5

High–speed
interlock
signal *RILK X1000. 6

Skip
signal SKIP X1000. 7

DIC

0V

Fig.6.11.3 Power Mate–F machine interface

The Power Mate–F supports the use of the built–in I/O card alone.
The connector number varies with the type of I/O card being used. The
common switching method also varies. For details, see the description
of the corresponding I/O card.

190
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.12
STANDARD LADDER
PROGRAM

6.12.1 The interface required to use the standard ladder program included in the
When the Power Power Mate–D is explained below. This interface is used to control one
axis and one spindle. There is no standard ladder program for the
Mate–D is Being Used two–path Power Mate–D.
For an explanation of the signals, see ”PMC Interface.”
1) I/O card A
Specify I/O card A as a slave of the FANUC I/O Link.
For an explanation of the connection, see Section 6.6.
(1) DI signals
PMC DGN
ADDRESS NO. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X000 000 SKIP *RILK *DEC1 *ESP –J1 +J1 SBK ST
CM21–21 CM21–03 CM21–35 CM21–20 CM21–02 CM21–34 CM21–19 CM21–01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X001 001 ERS *SP MLK RT *OV8 *OV4 *OV2 *OV1
CM21–06 CM21–38 CM21–23 CM21–05 CM21–37 CM21–22 CM21–04 CM21–36
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X002 002 ZRN HS1A FIN SAR *SSTP DRN MP2 MP1
CM21–09 CM21–41 CM21–08 CM21–40 CM21–25 CM21–07 CM21–39 CM21–24
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X003 003 PN3 PN2 PN1 PN0 KEY MD4 MD2 MD1
CM21–44 CM21–28 CM21–11 CM21–43 CM21–27 CM21–10 CM21–42 CM21–26
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X004 004 ROV2 ROV1 SOR RGTAP BDT RTN3 RTN2 RTN1
CM21–31 CM21–14 CM21–46 CM21–30 CM21–13 CM21–45 CM21–29 CM21–12
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X005 005 UI7 UI6 UI5 UI4 UI3 UI2 UI1 UI0
CM21–50 CM21–17 CM21–49 CM21–16 CM21–48 CM21–32 CM21–15 CM21–47
: DI signal of DC input signal B (for high–speed processing signal).
Switchable–common DC input signal B must be a sink type input.

(2) DO signals
PMC DGN
ADDRESS NO. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y000 000 OP SA STL SPL MA ZP31 ZP21 ZP1
CM23–21 CM23–03 CM23–35 CM23–20 CM23–02 CM23–34 CM23–19 CM23–01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y001 001 DEN BAL RST AL ENB GR2 GR1 MF
CM23–06 CM23–38 CM23–23 CM23–05 CM23–37 CM23–22 CM23–04 CM23–36
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y002 002 M28 M24 M22 M21 M18 M14 M12 M11
CM23–09 CM23–41 CM23–08 CM23–40 CM23–25 CM23–07 CM23–39 CM23–24
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y003 003 UO7 UO6 UO5 UO4 UO3 UO2 UO1 UO0
CM23–44 CM23–28 CM23–11 CM23–43 CM23–27 CM23–10 CM23–42 CM23–26

191
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

(3) Signal connection to the power magnetics cabinet

I/O card A (DI/DO = 48/32)

CM21 (MR50RMD)
01 ST 33 DIC
02 –J1 34 +J1
19 SBK Connect DIC (33) to 0 V.
03 *RILK 35 *DEC1
20 *ESP
04 *OV2 36 *OV1
21 SKIP
05 RT 37 *OV8
22 *OV4
06 ERS 38 *SP
23 MLK
07 DRN 39 MP2
24 MP1
08 FIN 40 SAR
25 *SSTP 41
09 ZRN HS1A
26 MD1
10 MD4 42 MD2
27 KEY
11 PN1 43 PN0
28 PN2
12 RTN1 44 PN3
29 RTN2
13 BDT 45 RTN3
30 RGTAP 46
14 ROV1 SOR
31 ROV2 47
15 UI1 UI0
32 UI2
16 UI4 48 UI3
17 UI6 49 UI5
18 +24E 50 UI7

CM23 (MR50RMD)
01 ZP1 33
02 MA 34 ZP31
19 ZP21
03 SA 35 STL
20 SPL
04 GR1 36 MF
21 OP
05 AL 37 ENB
22 GR2
06 DEN 38 BAL
23 RST
07 M14 39 M12
24 M11
08 M22 40 M21
25 M18
09 M28 41 M24
26 UO0
10 UO2 42 UO1
27 UO3
11 UO5 43 UO4 J25
28 UO6 CM21
12 44 UO7 Power mag-
29
13 45 netics cabinet
30 and machine
14 46
31
15 47 J27 operator’s
32 CM23 panel
16 48
17 49
18 0V 50
Note)
The cable is fitted with a female connector.
Note)
For cables J25 and J27, use multi–conductor shielded cable.
Recommended cables: A66L–0001–0041 (7/0.18, 20 conductors)
A66L–0001–0042 (7/0.18, 50 conductors)

192
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

2) I/O card D
Specify I/O card D as a slave of the FANUC I/O Link.
For an explanation of the connection, see Section 6.5.
(1) DI signals
PMC DGN
ADDRESS NO. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X000 000 SKIP *RILK *DEC1 *ESP –J1 +J1 SBK ST
CM51–21 CM51–03 CM51–35 CM51–20 CM51–02 CM51–34 CM51–19 CM51–01

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X001 001 ERS *SP MLK RT *OV8 *OV4 *OV2 *OV1
CM51–06 CM51–38 CM51–23 CM51–05 CM51–37 CM51–22 CM51–04 CM51–36

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X002 002 ZRN HS1A FIN SAR *SSTP DRN MP2 MP1
CM51–09 CM51–41 CM51–08 CM51–40 CM51–25 CM51–07 CM51–39 CM51–24

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X003 003 PN3 PN2 PN1 PN0 KEY MD4 MD2 MD1
CM51–44 CM51–28 CM51–11 CM51–43 CM51–27 CM51–10 CM51–42 CM51–26

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X004 004 ROV2 ROV1 SOR RGTAP BDT RTN3 RTN2 RTN1
CM51–31 CM51–14 CM51–46 CM51–30 CM51–13 CM51–45 CM51–29 CM51–12

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X005 005 UI7 UI6 UI5 UI4 UI3 UI2 UI1 UI0
CM51–50 CM51–17 CM51–49 CM51–16 CM51–48 CM51–32 CM51–15 CM51–47

: DI signal of DC input signal B (for high–speed processing signal).

Switchable–common DC input signal B must be a sink type input.

(2) DO signals
PMC DGN
ADDRESS NO. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y000 000 OP SA STL SPL MA ZP31 ZP21 ZP1
CMB3–21 CMB3–03 CMB3–35 CMB3–20 CMB3–02 CMB3–34 CMB3–19 CMB3–01

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y001 001 DEN BAL RST AL ENB GR2 GR1 MF
CMB3–06 CMB3–38 CMB3–23 CMB3–05 CMB3–37 CMB3–22 CMB3–04 CMB3–36

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y002 002 M28 M24 M22 M21 M18 M14 M12 M11
CMB3–09 CMB3–41 CMB3–08 CMB3–40 CMB3–25 CMB3–07 CMB3–39 CMB3–24

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y003 003 UO7 UO6 UO5 UO4 UO3 UO2 UO1 UO0
CMB3–44 CMB3–28 CMB3–11 CMB3–43 CMB3–27 CMB3–10 CMB3–42 CMB3–26

193
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

(3) Signal connection to the power magnetics cabinet

I/O card A (DI/DO = 48/32)

CM51 (MR50RMD)
01 ST 33 DIC1
02 –J1 34 +J1
19 SBK
03 *RILK 35 *DEC1 Connect DIC1 (33) to 0 V.
20 *ESP
04 *OV2 36 *OV1
21 SKIP
05 RT 37 *OV8
22 *OV4
06 ERS 38 *SP
23 MLK
07 DRN 39 MP2
24 MP1
08 FIN 40 SAR
25 *SSTP 41
09 ZRN HS1A
26 MD1
10 MD4 42 MD2
27 KEY
11 PN1 43 PN0
28 PN2
12 RTN1 44 PN3
29 RTN2
13 BDT 45 RTN3
30 RGTAP 46
14 ROV1 SOR
31 ROV2 47
15 UI1 UI0
32 UI2
16 UI4 48 UI3
17 UI6 49 UI5
18 +24E 50 UI7

CMB3 (MR50RMD)
01 ZP1 33 0V Connect DIC2 (18) to 0 V.
02 MA 34 ZP31 Connect DOC (17, 50) to
19 ZP21
03 SA 35 STL a 24–V power supply.
20 SPL
04 GR1 36 MF
21 OP
05 AL 37 ENB
22 GR2
06 DEN 38 BAL
23 RST
07 M14 39 M12
24 M11
08 M22 40 M21
25 M18
09 M28 41 M24
26 UO0
10 UO2 42 UO1
27 UO3
11 UO5 43 UO4 J25
28 UO6 CM51
12 44 UO7 Power mag-
29
13 45 netics cabinet
30 and machine
14 46
31
15 47 J27 operator’s
32 CMB3 panel
16 48
17 DOC 49
18 DIC2 50 DOC
Note)
The cable is fitted with a female connector.
Note)
For cables J25 and J27, use multi–conductor shielded cable.
Recommended cables: A66L–0001–0041 (7/0.18, 20 conductors)
A66L–0001–0042 (7/0.18, 50 conductors)

194
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

3) Built–in I/O card

For an explanation of the connection, see Section 6.8.
(1) DI signals
PMC DGN
ADDRESS NO. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1000 1000 SKIP *RILK *DEC1 *ESP –J1 +J1 SBK ST
29–B05 29–A05 29–B04 29–A04 29–B03 29–A03 29–B02 29–A02

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1001 1001 ERS *SP MLK RT *OV8 *OV4 *OV2 *OV1
29–B10 29–A10 29–B09 29–A09 29–B08 29–A08 29–B07 29–A07

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1002 1002 ZRN HS1A FIN SAR *SSTP DRN MP2 MP1
30–B05 30–A05 30–B04 30–A04 30–B03 30–A03 30–B02 30–A02

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1003 1003 PN3 PN2 PN1 PN0 KEY MD4 MD2 MD1
30–B10 30–A10 30–B09 30–A09 30–B08 30–A08 30–B07 30–A07

: DI signal of DC input signal B (for high–speed processing signal).

Switchable–common DC input signal B must be a sink type input.

(2) DO signals
PMC DGN
ADDRESS NO. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1000 1000 OP SA STL SPL MA ZP31 ZP21 ZP1
29–B14 29–A14 29–B13 29–A13 29–B12 29–A12 29–B11 29–A11

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1001 1001 DEN BAL RST AL ENB GR2 GR1 MF
30–B16 30–A16 30–B15 30–A15 29–B16 29–A16 29–B15 29–A15

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1002 1002 M28 M24 M22 M21 M18 M14 M12 M11
30–B14 30–A14 30–B13 30–A13 30–B12 30–A12 30–B11 30–A11

195
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

(3) Signal connection to the power magnetics cabinet

Built–in I/O card

CM29 CM30

34–pin flat cable connector

A B A B
01 +24E +24E 01 +24E +24E
02 ST SBK 02 MP1 MP2
03 +J1 –J1 03 DRN *SSTP
04 *ESP *DEC1 04 SAR FIN
05 *RILK SKIP 05 HS1A ZRN
06 COM1 06 COM2 COM3
07 *OV1 *OV2 07 MD1 MD2
08 *OV4 *OV8 08 MD4 KEY
09 RT MLK 09 PN0 PN1
10 *SP ERS 10 PN2 PN3
11 ZP1 ZP21 11 M11 M12
12 ZP31 MA 12 M14 M18
13 SPL STL 13 M21 M22
14 SA OP 14 M24 M28
15 MF GR1 15 AL RST
16 GR2 ENB 16 BAL DEN
17 0V 0V 17 0V 0V

CM29 Male CM30 Male

Female Female

J49 J50

Power magnetics cabinet and machine operator’s

panel

Connect COM1 (29–B06), COM2 (30–A06), and COM3 (30–B06) to 0 V.

196
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

4) Built–in I/O card C

For an explanation of the connection, see Section 6.7.
(1) DI signals
PMC DGN
ADDRESS NO. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1000 1000 SKIP *RILK *DEC1 *ESP –J1 +J1 SBK ST
128–B05 128–A06 128–B04 128–A04 128–B03 128–A03 128–B02 128–A02

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1001 1001 ERS *SP MLK RT *OV8 *OV4 *OV2 *OV1
128–B10 128–A10 128–B09 128–A09 128–B08 128–A08 128–B07 128–A07

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1002 1002 ZRN HS1A FIN SAR *SSTP DRN MP2 MP1
129–B05 129–A05 129–B04 129–A04 129–B03 129–A03 129–B02 129–A02

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1003 1003 PN3 PN2 PN1 PN0 KEY MD4 MD2 MD1
129–B10 129–A10 129–B09 129–A09 129–B08 129–A08 129–B07 129–A07

: DI signal of DC input signal B (for high–speed processing signal).

Switchable–common DC input signal B must be a sink type input.

(2) DO signals
PMC DGN
ADDRESS NO. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1000 1000 OP SA STL SPL MA ZP31 ZP21 ZP1
128–B14 128–A14 128–B13 128–A13 128–B12 128–A12 128–B11 128–A11

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1001 1001 DEN BAL RST AL ENB GR2 GR1 MF
129–B16 129–A16 129–B15 129–A15 128–B16 128–A16 128–B15 128–A15

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1002 1002 M28 M24 M22 M21 M18 M14 M12 M11
129–B14 129–A14 129–B13 129–A13 129–B12 129–A12 129–B11 129–A11

197
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

(3) Signal connection to the power magnetics cabinet

Built–in I/O card C

CB128 CB129

34–pin flat cable connector

A B A B
01 +24E +24E 01 +24E +24E
02 ST SBK 02 MP1 MP2
03 +J1 –J1 03 DRN *SSTP
04 *ESP *DEC1 04 SAR FIN
05 DIC SKIP 05 HS1A ZRN
06 *RILK DOC 06 DOC DOC
07 *OV1 *OV2 07 MD1 MD2
08 *OV4 *OV8 08 MD4 KEY
09 RT MLK 09 PN0 PN1
10 *SP ERS 10 PN2 PN3
11 ZP1 ZP21 11 M11 M12
12 ZP31 MA 12 M14 M18
13 SPL STL 13 M21 M22
14 SA OP 14 M24 M28
15 MF GR1 15 AL RST
16 GR2 ENB 16 BAL DEN
17 0V 0V 17 0V 0V

CB128 Male CB129 Male

Female Female

J86 J87

Power magnetics cabinet and machine operator’s

panel

Connect DIC (CB128–A05) to 0 V.

Connect DOC (DB128–B06, CB129–A06, B06) to a 24–V power supply.

198
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.12.2 The interface required to enable the use of the standard ladder program
When the Power provided with the Power Mate–F is explained below. This interface is
used to control one axis and one spindle.
Mate–F is Being Used
For an explanation of the signals, see ”PMC Interface.”
1) When built–in I/O card A or B is being used
For an explanation of the connection, see Section 6.10.
(1) DI signals
PMC DGN
ADDRESS NO. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1000 1000 SKIP *RILK *DEC *ESP –J1 +J1 SBK ST
43–B05 43–A05 43–B04 43–A04 43–B03 43–A03 43–B02 43–A02

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1001 1001 ERS *SP MLK RT *OV8 *OV4 *OV2 *OV1
43–B10 43–A10 43–B09 43–A09 43–B08 43–A08 43–B07 43–A07

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1002 1002 ZRN HS1A FIN SAR *SSTP DRN MP2 MP1
43–B14 43–A14 43–B13 43–A13 43–B12 43–A12 43–B11 43–A11

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1003 1003 PN3 PN2 PN1 PN0 KEY MD4 MD2 MD1
44–B05 44–A05 44–B04 44–A04 44–B03 44–A03 44–B02 44–A02

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1004 1004 ROV2 ROV1 SOR RGTAP BDT RTN3 RTN2 RTN1
44–B10 44–A10 44–B09 44–A09 44–B08 44–A08 44–B07 44–A07

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1005 1005 UI7 UI6 UI5 UI4 UI3 UI2 UI1 UI0
44–B14 44–A14 44–B13 44–A13 44–B12 44–A12 44–B11 44–A11

: DI signal of DC input signal B (for high–speed processing signal).

Switchable–common DC input signal B must be a sink type input.

For built–in I/O card A (32 DI pins), X1004 and X1005 cannot be used.
(2) DO signals
PMC DGN
ADDRESS NO. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1000 1000 OP SA STL SPL MA ZP31 ZP21 ZP1
43–B19 43–A19 43–B18 43–A18 43–B17 43–A17 43–B16 43–A16

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1001 1001 DEN BAL RST AL ENB GR2 GR1 MF
43–B23 43–A23 43–B22 43–A22 43–B21 43–A21 43–B20 43–A20

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1002 1002 M28 M24 M22 M21 M18 M14 M12 M11
44–B19 44–A19 44–B18 44–A18 44–B17 44–A17 44–B16 44–A16

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1003 1003 UO7 UO6 UO5 UO4 UO3 UO2 UO1 UO0
44–B23 44–A23 44–B22 44–A22 44–B21 44–A21 44–B20 44–A20

For built–in I/O card A (24 DO pins), Y1003 cannot be used.

199
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

(3) Signal connection to the power magnetics cabinet

Built–in I/O card A or B

CM43 CM44

50–pin flat cable connector

A B A B
01 +24E +24E 01 +24E +24E
02 ST SBK 02 MD1 MD2
03 +J1 –J1 03 MD4 KEY
04 *ESP *DEC 04 PN0 PN1
05 *RILK SKIP 05 PN2 PN3
06 COM0 COM1 06 COM3 COM4
07 *OV1 *OV2 07 RTN1 RTN2
08 *OV4 *OV8 08 RTN3 BDT
09 RT MLK 09 RGTAP SOR
10 *SP ERS 10 ROV1 ROV2
11 MP1 MP2 11 UI0 UI1
12 DRN *SSTP 12 UI2 UI3
13 SAR FIN 13 UI4 UI5
14 HS1A ZRN 14 UI6 UI7
15 COM2 15 COM5
16 ZP1 ZP21 16 M11 M12
17 ZP31 MA 17 M14 M18
18 SPL STL 18 M21 M22
19 SA OP 19 M24 M28
20 MF GR1 20 UO0 UO1
21 GR2 ENB 21 UO2 UO3
22 AL RST 22 UO4 UO5
23 BAL DEN 23 UO6 UO7
24 0V 0V 24 0V 0V
25 0V 0V 25 0V 0V

CM43 Male CM44 Male

Female Female

J80 J81

Power magnetics cabinet and machine operator’s

panel

For built–in I/O card A (32 DI pins and 24 DO pins), the pins indi-
cated by shading cannot be used.

Connect COM0 (CM43–A06), COM1 (CM43–B06),

COM2 (CM43–A15), COM3 (CM44–A06),
COM4 (CM43–B06), and COM5 (CM43–A15) to 0 V.

200
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

2) When built–in I/O card D is being used

(1) DI signals
PMC DGN
ADDRESS NO. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1000 1000 SKIP *RILK *DEC *ESP –J1 +J1 SBK ST
130–B13 130–A14 130–B12 130–A12 130–B11 130–A11 130–B10 130–A10

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1001 1001 ERS *SP MLK RT *OV8 *OV4 *OV2 *OV1
130–B18 130–A18 130–B17 130–A17 130–B16 130–A16 130–B15 130–A15

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1002 1002 ZRN HS1A FIN SAR *SSTP DRN MP2 MP1
131–B13 131–A13 131–B12 131–A12 131–B11 131–A11 131–B10 131–A10

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1003 1003 PN3 PN2 PN1 PN0 KEY MD4 MD2 MD1
131–B18 131–A18 131–B17 131–A17 131–B16 131–A16 131–B15 131–A15

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1004 1004 ROV2 ROV1 SOR RGTAP BDT RTN3 RTN2 RTN1
130–B05 130–A05 130–B04 130–A04 130–B03 130–A03 130–B02 130–A02

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1005 1005 UI7 UI6 UI5 UI4 UI3 UI2 UI1 UI0
131–B05 131–A05 131–B04 131–A04 131–B03 131–A03 131–B02 131–A02

: DI signal of DC input signal B (for high–speed processing signal).

Switchable–common DC input signal B must be a sink type input.

For built–in I/O card D1 (32 DI pins), X1004 and X1005 cannot be used.
(2) DO signals
PMC DGN
ADDRESS NO. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1000 1000 OP SA STL SPL MA ZP31 ZP21 ZP1
130–B22 130–A22 130–B21 130–A21 130–B20 130–A20 130–B19 130–A19

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1001 1001 DEN BAL RST AL ENB GR2 GR1 MF
131–B24 131–A24 131–B23 131–A23 130–B24 130–A24 130–B23 130–A23

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1002 1002 M28 M24 M22 M21 M18 M14 M12 M11
131–B22 131–A22 131–B21 131–A21 131–B20 131–A20 131–B19 131–A19

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1003 1003 UO7 UO6 UO5 UO4 UO3 UO2 UO1 UO0
131–B07 131–A07 131–B06 131–A06 130–B07 130–A07 130–B06 130–A06

For built–in I/O card D1 (24 DO pins), Y1003 cannot be used.

201
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

(3) Signal connection to the power magnetics cabinet

Built–in I/O card D

CB130 CB131

50–pin flat cable connector

A B A B
01 0V 0V 01 0V 0V
02 RTN1 RTN2 02 UI0 UI1
03 RTN3 BDT 03 UI2 UI3
04 RGTAP SOR 04 UI4 UI5
05 ROV1 ROV2 05 UI6 UI7
06 UO0 UO1 06 UO4 UO5
07 UO2 UO3 07 UO6 UO7
08 DOC 08 DOC
09 +24E +24E 09 +24E +24E
10 ST SBK 10 MP1 MP2
11 +J1 –J1 11 DRN *SSTP
12 *ESP *DEC 12 SAR FIN
13 DIC SKIP 13 HS1A ZRN
14 *RILK DOC 14 DOC DOC
15 *OV1 *OV2 15 MD1 MD2
16 *OV4 *OV8 16 MD4 KEY
17 RT MLK 17 PN0 PN1
18 *SP ERS 18 PN2 PN3
19 ZP1 ZP21 19 M11 M12
20 ZP31 MA 20 M14 M18
21 SPL STL 21 M21 M22
22 SA OP 22 M24 M28
23 MF GR1 23 AL RST
24 GR2 ENB 24 BAL DEN
25 0V 0V 25 0V 0V

CB130 Male CB131 Male

Female Female

J80 J81

Power magnetics cabinet and machine operator’s

panel

For built–in I/O card A (32 DI pins and 24 DO pins), the pins indi-
cated by shading cannot be used.

Connect DIC (CB130–A13) to 0 V.

Connect DOC (CB130–A14, CB131–A14, B14) to a 24–V power supply.

202
 6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE

6.13 Refer to FANUC I/O Link–II CONNECTION MANUAL

(B–62714EN/01).
CONNECTION TO
FANUC I/O LINK–II

203
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7 CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

204
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.1
CRT/MDI UNIT
INTERFACE
(SIMULTANEOUS
BLOCK START
INTERFACE)
7.1.1 The Power Mate–D supports the use of the CRT/MDI unit and picture
General display CRT/MDI unit. These units cannot be used with the Power
Mate–F, however.
a) The CRT interface for Power Mate–D has the following features:
1 One CRT can be used simultaneously by multiple number of
Power Mate–D units. (Max. 16 Power Mate units)
2 Only one connecting cable is needed between NC and CRT.
3 Maximum displayed axes on the common use screen are 18 axes.
4 The simultaneous block start function is enabled for up to four
groups (four units per group) (applicable only to one–path Power
Mate–D units).
b) Device numbers for each Power Mate–D are set using the rotary switch
RSW on the front face of the control unit.
c) Maximum total length of the communication cable (i.e. total sum of
the cable lengths between)
(1) Power Mate and CRT, and (2) two Power Mate units is 50m.
When the cable length is 50m to 100m, consult FANUC.
d) Normally turn on the power for the CRT/MDI unit before or, at latest,
simultaneously when the power for Power Mate–D control unit is
turned on.

Power source for CRT/MDI unit

ÂÂ
Power source for Power Mate–D body

t t t 0.2 sec

If the power for the CRT/MDI unit is turned on after the power for Power
Mate–D body is turned on, it becomes impossible to execute special
operations while the power for Power Mate–D is on such as memory all
clear. (Refer to Subsec. 7.1.8)
e) To enable the use of a CRT/MDI unit, a CRT control module must be
installed in the Power Mate–D.
f) The two–path Power Mate–D and Power Mate–F are not provided
with the simultaneous block start function.

WARNING
To have the CRT/MDI approved for the CE marking, it is
necessary to provide a shock hazard prevention cover
(A02B–0200–K820). Attaching the cover to the CRT is the
machine tool builder’s responsibility.

205
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

(1) When there is only one unit of Power Mate–D

Power Mate–D CRT/MDI unit

J45 J30
JD14 JD13 CPD1

#0 JN1 FG DC+24V
(NOTE1) Terminal unit power source
JD15
"10%1.0A
(Stabilized power
(NOTE2) source)

(NOTE 1) Device number 0 is set using the rotary switch RSW.

Refer to the section of 3.9 CONNECTOR LAYOUT OF UNIT
for place of rotary switch.
(NOTE 2) Mount a terminal unit (A02B–0124–D001)

(2) When two to four Power Mate–D units share a single CRT/MDI

Power Mate–D CRT/MDI unit

J45,J43 J30
JD14 JD13 CPD1
#0
(NOTE1) JN1 FG
JD15
+24V DC power
source "10%,
J46,J44
J47 1.0A
Power Mate–D Machine operator’s
JD14 panel selection
switch
#1 #1...
(NOTE1) #0 #15
JD15

J46,J44
Common
Power Mate–D
JD14 (NOTE 1) Device numbers are set using the
#2 rotary switch RSW. If the same device
(NOTE1) number is used for two or more units,
JD15 the information is not correctly shown
on the CRT/MDI unit.
J46,J44
(NOTE 2) Attach a terminal unit
Power Mate–D (A02B–0124–D001) to the last Power
Mate.
JD14
(NOTE 3) When two or more Power Mates share
#3 (NOTE2) one CRT/MDI unit, specify the number
(NOTE1) Terminal unit of Power Mates connected to the unit
JD15 in parameter No. 3170 Maximum axes
displayed on the common use screen
are 18 axes.
(NOTE 4) To identify each Power Mate, a name
can be given to it. See parameters
No. 3171 to No. 3176.
(NOTE 5) To use the simultaneous block start func-
tion, set #0 as the ITP synchronization
master, and set #1 to #3 as ITP synchro-
nization slaves (using SYNC and MATR
of parameter No. 6650).
When a Power Mate is started by press-
ing ”M” and ”.” at power–on, it functions
as a master. When started by pressing
”S” and ”.” at power–on, the Power Mate
functions as a slave.

206
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

(3) When five or more Power Mate–D units are used (when the
simultaneous block start function is used): Up to 16 Power Mate–D
units

Power Mate–D CRT/MDI unit

J43 J30
JD14 JD13 CPD1
#0
JN1
(NOTE1) JD15
+24 VDC
power source
J44 J47
10%, 1.0 A
Power Mate–D Machine operator’s
JD14 panel selection
switch
#1 #1...
#0 #15
(NOTE1) JD15

J44
Common
Power Mate–D
JD14
#3
J44
(NOTE1) JD15 JD14
Inter- (NOTE 1) Device numbers are set using the
mediate rotary switch. Note that if the same
unit device number is set for more than
Power Mate–D one unit, information cannot be dis-
J44 JD15 played correctly.
JD14
#4 (NOTE 2) Insert an intermediate unit (A02B
(NOTE2) –0124–D002) every four Power
(NOTE1) JD15 Mate–D units (between #3 and #4,
#7 and #8, and #11 and #12).
J44 (NOTE 3) Attach a terminating unit (A02B
–0124–D001) to the last Power
Power Mate–D Mate–D.
JD14 (NOTE 4) When multiple Power Mate–D
#7 units share a single CRT/MDI unit,
J44 specify the number of Power
(NOTE1) JD15 JD14 Mate–D units connected to the
Inter- CRT/MDI unit in parameter No.
mediate 3170.
unit (NOTE 5) To identify each Power Mate–D,
Power Mate–D
J44 JD15 names can be assigned to the
JD14 units. For details, see the descrip-
#8 tion of parameter Nos. 3171 to
(NOTE2) 3176.
(NOTE1) JD15
(NOTE 6) Set #0 as the ITP synchronization
master, and set the other units as
J44 ITP synchronization slaves (using
SYNC and MATR of parameter No.
Power Mate–D 6650).
JD14 When a Power Mate is started by
pressing ”M” and ”.” at power–on,
#15
(NOTE3) it functions as a master. When
(NOTE1) JD15 Terminal unit started by pressing ”S” and ”.” at
power–on, the Power Mate func-
tions as a slave.

207
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

(4) When five or more Power Mate–D units are being used (without the
simultaneous block start function): Up to 16 Power Mate–D units

Power Mate–D CRT/MDI unit

J45 J30
JD14 JD13 CPD1
#0
JN1
(NOTE1) JD15
+24 VDC
power source
J46 J47
10%, 1.0 A
Power Mate–D Machine operator’s
JD14 panel selection
switch
#1 #1...
#0 #15
(NOTE1) JD15

J46
Common
Power Mate–D
JD14
#3
(NOTE1) JD15

J46

Power Mate–D
JD14
#4
(NOTE1) JD15

J46

Power Mate–D
JD14
#7
(NOTE1) JD15
(NOTE 1) Device numbers are set using the
rotary switch. Note that if the same
J46
device number is set for more than
Power Mate–D one unit, information cannot be dis-
played correctly.
JD14
(NOTE 2) Attach a terminating unit (A02B
#8 –0124–D001) to the last Power
(NOTE1) JD15 Mate–D.
(NOTE 3) When multiple Power Mate–D
J46 units share a single CRT/MDI unit,
specify the number of Power
Power Mate–D Mate–D units connected to the
CRT/MDI unit in parameter No.
JD14 3170.
#15 (NOTE2) (NOTE 4) To identify each Power Mate–D,
(NOTE1) JD15 Terminal unit names can be assigned to the
units. For details, see the descrip-
tion of parameter Nos. 3171 to
3176.

208
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.1.2
CRT Interface (with
Simultaneous Block
Separate type MDI unit
Start) Power Mate–D CRT/MDI unit

JD14 JD13
(PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–EV20MDT)
1 RXD 11 0V 1 TXD 11 0V
2 *RXD 12 0V 2 *TXD 12 0V
J43
3 TXD 13 SI1 3 RXD 13 SI1
4 *TXD 14 *SI1 4 *RXD 14 *SI1
5 ITPGA 15 SI2 5 ITPGA 15 SI2
6 *ITPGA 16 *SI2 6 *ITPGA 16 *SI2
7 ITPGB 17 SI3 7 ITPGB 17 SI3
8 *ITPGB 18 *SI3 8 *ITPGB 18 *SI3
9 SI0 19 9 SI0 19
10 20 *SI0 10 20 *SI0

Cable connection (J43)

JD14 JD13
1 1
RXD TXD
2 2
*RXD *TXD
3 3
TXD RXD
4 4
*TXD *RXD
5 5
ITPGA ITPGA
6 6
*ITPGA *ITPGA
7 7
ITPGB ITPGB
8 8
*ITPGB *ITPGB
9 9
SI0 SI0
20 20
*SI0 *SI0
13 13
SI1 SI1
14 14
*SI1 *SI1
15 15
SI2 SI2
16 16
*SI2 *SI2
17 17
SI3 SI3
18 18
*SI3 *SI3
11 11
0V 0V
12 12
0V 0V
Shield

(NOTE) Cables J43 and J44 have the same specification.

Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG10 ten pairs)
Recommended connector (JD13, JD14)
PCR–E20FS or PCR–E20FA
Housing PCR–V20LA

209
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.1.3
CRT Interface (without
Separate type MDI unit
Simultaneous Block Power Mate–D CRT/MDI unit
Start)
JD14 JD13
(PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–EV20MDT)
1 RXD 11 0V 1 TXD 11 0V
2 *RXD 12 0V 2 *TXD 12 0V
J45
3 TXD 13 (SI1) 3 RXD 13 (SI1)
4 *TXD 14 (*SI1) 4 *RXD 14 (*SI1)
5 (ITPGA) 15 (SI2) 5 (ITPGA) 15 (SI2)
6 (*ITPGA) 16 (*SI2) 6 (*ITPGA) 16 (*SI2)
7 (ITPGB) 17 (SI3) 7 (ITPGB) 17 (SI3)
8 (*ITPGB) 18 (*SI3) 8 (*ITPGB) 18 (*SI3)
9 (SI0) 19 9 (SI0) 19
10 20 (*SI0) 10 20 (*SI0)

Cable connection (J45)

JD14 JD13
1 1
RXD TXD
2 2
*RXD *TXD
3 3
TXD RXD
4 4
*TXD *RXD
11 11
0V 0V
12 12
0V 0V
Shield

(NOTE) Cables J45 and J46 have the same specification.

Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG10 ten pairs)
Recommended connector
PCR–E20FS or PCR–E20FA
Housing PCR–V20LA

210
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.1.4
Interface Between
Multiple Power Mates
(with Simultaneous Power Mate–D 2nd Power Mate–D
Block Start) JD15 JD14
(PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–EV20MDT)
1 RXD 11 0V 1 RXD 11 0V
2 *RXD 12 0V 2 *RXD 12 0V
J44
3 TXD 13 SI1 3 TXD 13 SI1
4 *TXD 14 *SI1 4 *TXD 14 *SI1
5 ITPGA 15 SI2 5 ITPGA 15 SI2
6 *ITPGA 16 *SI2 6 *ITPGA 16 *SI2
7 ITPGB 17 SI3 7 ITPGB 17 SI3
8 *ITPGB 18 *SI3 8 *ITPGB 18 *SI3
9 SI0 19 9 SO0 19
10 20 *SI0 10 20 *SO0

Cable connection (J45)

JD15 JD14
1 1
RXD RXD
2 2
*RXD *RXD
3 3
TXD TXD
4 4
*TXD *TXD
5 5
ITPGA ITPGA
6 6
*ITPGA *ITPGA
7 7
ITPGB ITPGB
8 8
*ITPGB *ITPGB
9 9
SI0 SO0
20 20
*SI0 *SO0
13 13
SI1 SI1
14 14
*SI1 *SI1
15 15
SI2 SI2
16 16
*SI2 *SI2
17 17
SI3 SI3
18 18
*SI3 *SI3
11 11
0V 0V
12 12
0V 0V
Shield

(NOTE) Cables J43 and J44 have the same specification.

Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG10 ten pairs)
Recommended connector
PCR–E20FS or PCR–E20FA
Housing PCR–V20LA

211
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.1.5
Interface Between
Multiple Power Mate Power Mate–D Next Power Mate–D
(without Simultaneous JD15 JD14
Block Start) (PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–EV20MDT)
1 RXD 11 0V 1 RXD 11 0V
2 *RXD 12 0V 2 *RXD 12 0V
J46
3 TXD 13 (SI1) 3 TXD 13 (SI1)
4 *TXD 14 (*SI1) 4 *TXD 14 (*SI1)
5 (ITPGA) 15 (SI2) 5 (ITPGA) 15 (SI2)
6 (*ITPGA) 16 (*SI2) 6 (*ITPGA) 16 (*SI2)
7 (ITPGB) 17 (SI3) 7 (ITPGB) 17 (SI3)
8 (*ITPGB) 18 (*SI3) 8 (*ITPGB) 18 (*SI3)
9 (SI0) 19 9 (SO0) 19
10 20 (*SI0) 10 20 (*SO0)

Cable connection (J46)

JD15 JD14
1 1
RXD RXD
2 2
*RXD *RXD
3 3
TXD TXD
4 4
*TXD *TXD
11 11
0V 0V
12 12
0V 0V
Shield

(NOTE) Cables J45 and J46 have the same specification.

Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG10 ten pairs)
Recommended connector
PCR–E20FS or PCR–E20FA
Housing PCR–V20LA

212
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.1.6
Device Selection
Switch Separate type MDI unit
CRT/MDI unit

JN1
(PCR–EV20MDT)
Machine operator’s panel
1 *SEL0 11 *SEL4
2 0V 12 0V
J47
3 *SEL1 13 *SEL5 Device No. selection switch
4 0V 14 0V
5 *SEL2 15 *SEL6
6 0V 16 0V
7 *SEL3 17 *SEL7
8 0V 18 0V
9 19
10 20

Cable connection (J47) Device No. selection switches

JN1
#0
1 #1
*SEL0 #2
3 #3
*SEL1 #4
5 #5
*SEL2 #6
7 #7
*SEL3 #8
11 #9
*SEL4 #10
13 #11
*SEL5 #12
15 #13
*SEL6 #14
17 #15
*SEL7 common

2,4,6,8,12,14,16,18
0V

213
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Relationship between selection

switches and device numbers

Device No. *SEL7 *SEL4 *SEL3 *SEL2 *SEL1 *SEL0

#0
#1 Ę
#2 Ę
#3 Ę
#4 Ę
#5 Ę Ę
#6 Ę Ę
#7 Ę Ę
#8 Ę
#9 Ę Ę
#10 Ę Ę
#11 Ę Ę
#12 Ę Ę
#13 Ę Ę Ę
#14 Ę Ę Ę
#15 Ę Ę Ę : Switch open
Common Ę : Switch closed
display Ę * * * * * * : Either will do

Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG10 ten pairs)
Recommended connector
PCR–E20FS or PCR–E20FA
Housing PCR–V20LA

214
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.1.7
Power Supply Interface
CRT/MDI unit (Separate type MDI unit)

CPD1
(AMP)
External power source
1 +24V
2 0V
J30
3 +24VDC power source
(Stabilized power source)

+24VDC
10% 1.0A

FG

AMP Japan
1–178288–3 (Housing)
1–175218–5 (Contact)

Cable connection (J30)

CPD1
1
+24V +24VDC
10% 1.0A
2
0V 0V

The CRT/MDI unit and separate MDI unit have a frame grounding stud
at the back. The frame should be grounded by connecting this stud using
a 100 to 300 mm stranded wire having a cross–sectional area of 2mm2 or
larger.

7.1.8
Detachable CRT/MDI
Unit
1) The Power Mate–D can be operated without connecting a CRT/MDI
unit.
2) To attach or detach a CRT/MDI unit while the Power Mate–D is
turned on, 0V of the Power Mate–D must be connected to 0V of the
CRT/MDI unit before any other lines.
The shell of connector JD14 on the Power Mate–D controller side is
connected to 0V of the Power Mate–D controller. The shell of
connector JD13 on the CRT/MDI unit side is connected to 0V of the
CRT/MDI unit. Connect the connector shells at both ends of the cable
to each other, using the free wires of cables J43 and J45. By means
of this arrangement, when the cable is connected to the Power
Mate–D controller, the shell of connector JD14 on the controller first
makes contact with the connector shell of the cable. Thus, the state
described above can be achieved.
3) When a CRT/MDI unit is connected after the Power Mate–D has been
turned on, maintenance operations such as memory all–clear cannot
be performed. (See 7.1.1 (d).) To perform maintenance operations,
turn the Power Mate–D off then on again, after connecting the
CRT/MDI.

215
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.1.9
CRT Terminating Unit 1) The CRT terminating unit (A02B–0124–D001) is designed to enable
adjustment of the waveform of a CRT link (RS485). The CRT/MDI
unit may operate normally without a CRT terminating unit, provided
the CRT link is short, or if the operating environment is free of noise.
For qualitative evaluation, however, always install a CRT terminating
unit prior to shipment. If the CRT terminating unit is not mounted,
the CRT screen may not be updated, and the keys may fail to operate.
2) A CRT link is terminated at both ends. Usually, a CRT terminating
unit is attached to the Power Mate–D installed at the far end. The
CRT/MDI unit has a built–in terminating resistor.

CRT/MDI Power Power Power

unit Mate–D Mate–D Mate–D

JD15

Terminating Terminating
resistor unit
CRT link

3) The CRT link includes the signals (RS485) for the simultaneous
block start function, and these signals are also terminated. When the
simultaneous block start function is not used, the signals need not be
terminated.
4) The CRT/MDI unit terminates the following signals with 200 ohms,
1/4 W:
RXD (JD15-1) *RXD (JD15-2)
CRT signals
TXD (JD15-3) *TXD (JD15-4)

ITPGA (JD15-5) *ITPGA(JD15-6)

ITPGB (JD15-7) *ITPGB(JD15-8)
SI0 (JD15-9) *SI0 (JD15-20) Simultaneous
SI1 (JD15-13) *SI1 (JD15-14) block start func-
tion signals
SI2 (JD15-15) *SI2 (JD15-16)
SI3 (JD15-17) *SI3 (JD15-18)

216
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Resistor

Insulating heat–
shrinkable tube

217
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.2
SEPARATE CRT AND
SEPARATE MDI
INTERFACE
7.2.1 The Power Mate–D can be used in conjunction with a separate CRT unit
Outline and a separate MDI unit and a picuture display separate MDI unit.
This does not apply to the Power Mate–F.

Separate CRT unit

J56
CN2 (CRT power
supply)
CN1 (video input)

Video cable
J53
Power Mate–D Separate MDI unit Soft key
cable

JA1 CK2
J45
JD14 JD13 CPD2

JN1 CPD1
JD15 Terminating
unit FG
J47
J30

Power supply of
+24VDC
10%
Mode selection switch 1.0A

1 Up to 16 Power Mates–D can be connected to one CRT and one MDI

unit. Connection is the same as for the CRT/MDI.
2 Connection of the terminating unit is the same as for the CRT/MDI.
3 The separate CRT unit is supplied with a soft key cable. Connect this
cable to the separate MDI unit. Keep in mind that the length of this
cable is 500 mm when positioning these units. See appendix A for the
connector position of the soft key cable in separate CRT unit.
4 The screen can be shared in the same way as for the CRT/MDI.
5 For details concerning cable J45 used to connect a Power Mate–D and
the separate MDI unit, see Subsection 7.1.3.
6 For details concerning cable J48 used to connect the power supply to
the separate MDI unit, see Subsection 7.1.7. Be sure to connect frame
ground.
7 For details concerning cable J47 used to connect the separate MDI unit
to the mode selection switch, see Subsection 7.1.6.
8 Video cable J53 and separate CRT power cable J56 are not supplied
with the unit.
9 Always connect the protective ground plates of the separate CRT unit
and separate MDI unit to ground.
10 To use a separate MDI unit and separate CRT unit, a CRT control
module must be installed in the Power Mate–D.
11 All interfaces not described here are the same as those of the CRT/MDI
unit.

218
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

WARNING
To have the separate CRT approved for the CE marking, it
is necessary to provide a shock hazard prevention cover
(A02B–0200–K820). Attaching the cover to the CRT is the
machine tool builder’s responsibility.

7.2.2
Video and Power
Supply Interface Separate MDI unit Separate CRT unit

JA1 CN1
(PCR–EV20MDT) (MR–20RM)
Video cable
1 VDR 11 J53 1 VDR 14
8 0V
2 0V 12 VSYNC 2 HSYNC 15
9 0V
3 VDG 13 3 VSYNC 16
10 0V
4 0V 14 0V 4 VDG 17
11 0V
5 VDB 15 5 VDB 18
12 0V
6 0V 16 0V 6 19
13
7 17 Burndy JAPAN 7 20
8 (DTC) 18 HSYNC SMS6PN–5
(housing)
9 19 (+24V) RC16M–SCT3
(contact)
10 (+24V) 20

( ): Unused signals
CPD2(AMP) Power cable
J56 1
1 +24V 2
CN2
2 0V 3 (SMS6RN–4)
JAPAN AMP 4 0V Burndy JAPAN
3
1–178288–3
(housing) 5 +24V
1–175218–5
(contact) 6

Connection of video cable J53

Cable connector for CN1
 Covered connector
MR–20LFH (made by
Honda Tsushin)
Cable connector for
JA1 1 1
 Connector VDR VDR
FI40B–20S 2 8
(15–pin soldered 0V 0V
3 4
type) VDG
 Case FI–20–CV5
VDG
4 11
Above parts made 0V 0V
by Hirose Electric 5 5
Co., Ltd. VDB VDB
6 12
0V 0V
18 2
HSYNC HSYNC
16 9
0V 0V
12 3
VSYNC VSYNC
14 10
0V 0V
shield

Recommended cables
A66L–0001–0371 : 5–core coaxial cable

219
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.3
SEPARATE PDP AND
SEPARATE MDI
INTERFACE
7.3.1 The Power Mate–D is used in conjunction with a separate PDP unit, a
Outline separate MDI unit, and a picture display type separate MDI unit.
This does not apply to the Power Mate–F.

Separate PDP unit

J114
CN2 (PDP power
supply)
A02B–0200–C100
CN1 (video input)

Video cable
J53
Power Mate–D Separate MDI unit Soft key
cable

JA1 CK2
J45
JD14 JD13 CPD2

JN1 CPD1
JD15 Terminating
unit FG
J47
J30

Power supply of
+24VDC
10%
Mode selection switch 1.2A

1 Up to 16 Power Mates–D can be connected to one PDP and one MDI

unit. Connection is the same as for the CRT/MDI.
2 Connection of the terminating unit is the same as for the CRT/MDI.
3 The separate PDP unit is supplied with a soft key cable. Connect this
cable to the separate MDI unit. Keep in mind that the length of this
cable is 450 mm when positioning these units. See appendix A for the
comector position of the soft key cable in separate CRT unit.
4 The screen can be shared in the same way as for the CRT/MDI.
5 For details concerning cable J45 used to connect a Power Mate–D and
the separate MDI unit, see Subsection 7.1.3.
6 For details concerning cable J48 used to connect the power supply to
the separate MDI unit, see Subsection 7.1.7. Be sure to connect frame
ground.
7 For details concerning cable J47 used to connect the separate MDI unit
to the mode selection switch, see Subsection 7.1.6.
8 Video cable J53 and separate PDP power cable J114 are not supplied
with the unit.
9 Always connect the protective ground plates of the separate PDP unit
and separate MDI unit to ground.
10 To use a separate MDI unit and separate PDP unit, a CRT control
module must be installed in the Power Mate–D.
11 All interfaces not described here are the same as those of the CRT/MDI
unit.

220
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.3.2
Video and Power
Supply Interface Separate MDI unit Separate PDP unit

JA1 CN1
(PCR–EV20MDT) (MR–20RM)
Video cable
1 VDR 11 J53 1 VDR 14
8 0V
2 0V 12 VSYNC 2 HSYNC 15
9 0V
3 VDG 13 3 VSYNC 16
10 0V 0V
4 0V 14 0V 4 VDG 17
11 0V 0V
5 VDB 15 5 VDB 18
12 0V
6 0V 16 0V 6 19
13
7 17 7 20
8 (DTC) 18 HSYNC
JAPAN AMP
9 19 1–178288–3
(housing)
10 20 1–175218–5
(contact)
( ): Unused signals Power cable
CPD2(AMP) J114 CN2
1 +24V
(BP2–VH)
1 +24V 2 0V JAPAN Crimp contact
2 0V JAPAN Crimp
3 contact
VHR–2V
(housing)
SVH–21T–1.1
(contact)

Connection of video cable J53

Cable connector for CN1
 Covered connector
MR–20LFH (made by
Honda Tsushin)
Cable connector for
JA1 1 1
 Connector VDR VDR
FI40B–20S 2 8
(15–pin soldered 0V 0V
3 4
type) VDG
 Case FI–20–CV5
VDG
4 11
Above parts made 0V 0V
by Hirose Electric 5 5
Co., Ltd. VDB VDB
6 12
0V 0V
18 2
HSYNC HSYNC
16 9
0V 0V
12 3
VSYNC VSYNC
14 10
0V 0V
shield

Recommended cables
A66L–0001–0371 : 5–core coaxial cable

221
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.3.3 Fine adjustment of the video signal is supported to enable its use with
Adjusting the Separate separate PDP. This adjustment is necessary to compensate for errors
resulting from the combination of NC devices and cables.
PDP Adjustment of the video signal is necessary if you have replaced the
display unit, cable, or a hardware component of the display circuit in the
NC, either as part of regular field maintenance or to correct a failure.

Locations of switches
and jumper pins

SW2 SW1
Power
supply

Plasma display (rear view)

Adjustment
D Eliminating flicker D Separate PDP : Switch SW1
1 Change the jumper pin or switch setting such that flicker is eliminated.
2 If you find that flicker is eliminated by two or more different settings,
select the setting approximating to the midpoint of those settings.
Example : If flicker is eliminated by all of settings 2 to 6, select 4.
D Adjusting the horizontal D Separate PDP : Switch SW2
position 1 The screen can be shifted horizontally in units of dots.
2 Adjust the horizontal position such that the entire screen is visible.
Only one setting can successfully realize this positioning.

CAUTION
Do not attempt to change any controls or settings other than
those described above.

222
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.4
SEPARATE LCD AND
SEPARATE MDI
INTERFACE
7.4.1 The Power Mate–D can be used in conjunction with a separate LCD unit
Outline and a separate MDI unit and a picture display separate MDI unit.
This does not apply to the Power Mate–F.

Separate LCD unit

J137

CP5 (LCD power

supply)
JA1 (video input)

Video cable
J136 Soft key
Power Mate–D cable
Separate MDI unit

JA1 CK2
J45
JD14 JD13 CPD2

JN1 CPD1
JD15 Terminating
unit FG
J138
J30

Power supply of
+24VDC
10%
Mode selection switch 1.0A

1 Up to 16 Power Mates–D can be connected to one LCD and one MDI

unit. Connection is the same as for the CRT/MDI.
2 Connection of the terminating unit is the same as for the CRT/MDI.
3 The separate LCD unit is supplied with a soft key cable. Connect this
cable to the separate MDI unit. Keep in mind that the length of this
cable is 500 mm when positioning these units. See appendix A for the
connector position of the soft key cable in separate LCD unit.
4 The screen can be shared in the same way as for the CRT/MDI.
5 For details concerning cable J45 used to connect a Power Mate–D and
the separate MDI unit, see Subsection 7.1.3.
6 For details concerning cable J48 used to connect the power supply to
the separate MDI unit, see Subsection 7.1.7. Be sure to connect frame
ground.
7 Video cable J136 and separate LCD power cable J137 are not supplied
with the unit.
8 Always connect the protective ground plates of the separate LCD unit
and separate MDI unit to ground.
9 To use a separate MDI unit and separate LCD unit, a CRT control
module must be installed in the Power Mate–D.
10 All interfaces not described here are the same as those of the CRT/MDI
unit.

223
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

NOTE
Even if only one Power Mate unit is connected, connection
must be made through the mode selection switch interface.

7.4.2
Video and Power
Supply Interface
Separate MDI unit Separate LCD unit

JA1 JA1
(PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–EV20MDT)
1 VDR 11 1 VDR 11
Video cable
2 0V 12 VSYNC J136 2 0V 12 VSYNC
3 VDG 13 3 VDG 13
4 0V 14 0V 4 0V 14 0V
5 VDB 15 5 VDB 15
6 0V 16 0V 6 0V 16 0V
7 17 7 17
8 (DTC) 18 HSYNC 8 18 HSYNC
9 19 (+24V) AMP JAPAN, LTD. 9 19
2–178288–3 (Housing)
10 (+24V) 20 2–175218–5 (Contact) 10 20

( ): Unused signals
CPD2(AMP) Power cable
J137 CP5
1 +24V 1 +24V
2 0V 2 0V
3 3
JAPAN AMP
1–178288–3 (housing)
1–175218–5 (contact)

Connection of video cable J53

Cable connector for CN1

 Same as JA1
Cable connector for
JA1 1 1
 Connector VDR VDR
FI40B–20S 2 2
(15–pin soldered 0V 0V
3 3
type) VDG
 Case FI–20–CV5
VDG
4 4
Above parts made 0V 0V
by Hirose Electric 5 5
Co., Ltd. VDB VDB
6 6
0V 0V
18 18
HSYNC HSYNC
16 16
0V 0V
12 12
VSYNC VSYNC
14 14
0V 0V
shield

Recommended cables
A66L–0001–0371 : 5–core coaxial cable

224
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.4.3 When a separate LCD unit is used, connection must be made through the
Device Selection device selection switch interface even if only one Power Mate unit is
connected.
Switch Interface
When using a separate LCD unit, connect JN1 (15) and JN1 (16).
Otherwise, the screen will shift up when displayed.

Separate MDI unit

CRT/MDI unit

JN1
(PCR–EV20MDT)
Machine operator’s panel
1 *SEL0 11 *SEL4
2 0V 12 0V
J138
3 *SEL1 13 *SEL5 Device No. selection switch
4 0V 14 0V
5 *SEL2 15 *SEL6
6 0V 16 0V Short circuit
7 *SEL3 17 *SEL7
8 0V 18 0V
9 19
10 20

Cable connection (J138) Device No. selection switches

JN1
#0
1 #1
*SEL0 #2
3 #3
*SEL1 #4
5 #5
*SEL2 #6
7 #7
*SEL3 #8
11 #9
*SEL4 #10
13 #11
*SEL5 #12
15 #13
*SEL6 #14
17 #15
*SEL7 common
16
0V
2,4,6,8,12,14,16,18
0V

225
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Relationship between selection

switches and device numbers

Device No. *SEL7 *SEL4 *SEL3 *SEL2 *SEL1 *SEL0

#0
#1 Ę
#2 Ę
#3 Ę
#4 Ę
#5 Ę Ę
#6 Ę Ę
#7 Ę Ę
#8 Ę
#9 Ę Ę
#10 Ę Ę
#11 Ę Ę
#12 Ę Ę
#13 Ę Ę Ę
#14 Ę Ę Ę
#15 Ę Ę Ę : Switch open
Common Ę : Switch closed
display Ę * * * * *
* : Either will do

Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG10 ten pairs)
Recommended connector
PCR–E20FS or PCR–E20FA
Housing PCR–V20LA

7.4.4 The separate LCD is provided with the following adjustment switch and
Adjusting the Separate potentiometers, the factory settings of which must not be changed.
(Adjustment is necessary only when the unit has been disassembled to
LCD replace the adapter or LCD panel.)
VR1 : Flicker adjustment potentiometer
VRP1 : Contrast adjustment potentiometer
SW1 : Horizontal position adjustment switch

226
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.5
CONNECTION TO A
DETACHABLE
LCD/MDI UNIT
7.5.1 The Power Mate-D supports the use of a detachable LCD/MDI unit, which
consists of a 7.2" LCD/MDI unit housed in a portable dustproof case.
Outline
This does not apply to the Power Mate–F.

Detachable LCD/MDI unit

Cabinet

Power Mate–D

CRT/MDI
interface
Connection
panel

Connector
panel

External power Device No. selection switches

supply 24 VDC

(1) No cable is provided with the detachable 7.2” LCD/MDI unit.

(2) The customer is responsible for preparing the connector panel,
external power supply, connection panel, and device No. selection
switches.
(3) The customer is responsible for preparing all inter–unit connection
cables.
(4) For the Power Mate–D, a CRT control module is required.

227
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.5.2
Specifications Indicator 7.2” LCD, 40 characters by 16 lines

Power supply 24 VDC
10%, 1.0 A

External dimensions 410 (W) x 235 (H) x 235 (D) mm

(including the cable winding section)

Weight 7.0 kg (excluding connection cables)

Drawing number A02B–0166–C271#R (English keys)

A02B–0166–C271#S (Symbolic keys)

NOTE
This LCD/MDI unit does not support the picture display
function.

7.5.3
Detachable LCD/MDI 1) Inter–unit connection diagram
Unit Connected to One
Power Mate–D Unit

Cabinet

Connector 24 VDC
J132
panel power
supply

Detach- Connection
able LCD/ panel Power
MDI unit Mate–D
J127 J128 J126
CA50 JD14

(See item (4))

24VDC
10% Terminating
unit JD15
1.0A

(1) The total length of the cables (J127, J128, and J126) between the
detachable LCD/MDI unit and Power Mate–D must not exceed 50 m.
(2) Cables J127, J128, and J132 also serve as a 24 VDC power supply line
for the detachable LCD/MDI unit. The 24 VDC power is subject to
a voltage drop corresponding to the total resistance of the 24V line
and 0V line. Taking this voltage drop into consideration, determine
the cable length so that 24 VDC
10% is available at connector
CA50 of the detachable LCD/MDI unit.
(3) Attach a terminating unit (A02B–0124–D001) to connector JD15 of
the Power Mate–D.
(4) While the power is on, cables can be attached/detached to/from those
connectors on the connection panel that are shaded ( ) in the above
figure. For the other connectors (such as CA50 and JD14), cables can
neither be attached nor detached while the power is on.

228
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Cabinet
Detachable
LCD/MDI unit
CA50 (01) RXD Connection Connector RXD JD14 (01) Power
panel Mate
CA50 (02) *RXD panel *RXD JD14 (02)

CA50 (03) TXD TXD JD14 (03)

CA50 (04) *TXD *TXD JD14 (04)

CA50 (15) ATCH1 (NOTE1) 0V JD14 (11, 12)

CA50 (16) ATCH2 to DI
ATCH

+24V (NOTE2)
CA50 (09, 10) +24V
+24V External power supply
CA50 (19, 20) 0V
0V 24 VDC
CA50 (05) FG
(Cabinet) Shield
CA50 (06) *SEL0
Device No. selec-
CA50 (07) *SEL1 tion switches on
CA50 (08) *SEL2 the machine oper-
ator’s panel
CA50 (14) *SEL3
CA50 (17) *SEL4
CA50 (18) *SEL7

NOTE
1 ATCH1 and ATCH2 can be used as DI signals for detecting whether a detachable LCD/MDI unit
is attached to the connection panel. ATCH1 and ATCH2, when unused, need not be
connected.
2 To attach or detach a detachable LCD/MDI unit while the Power Mate–D is turned on, 0V of the
Power Mate–D must be connected to 0V of the detachable LCD/MDI unit before any other line.

229
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

2) Details of cable J127

Detachable LCD/MDI unit

CA50
04 03 02 01 Connection
panel
J127
*TXD TXD *RXD RXD

10 09 08 07 06 05
Hirose Electric. Co., Ltd.
+24V +24V FG (1)Soldering type
HR22–12TPD–20S
16 15 14 13 12 11 (2)Crimp type
 Housing
ATCH2 ATCH1 HR22–12TPD–20SC
 Contact
20 19 18 17 HR22–SC–122
 Manual crimping tool
0V 0V HR22–TA2428HC

Detachable LCD/MDI unit Connection panel

CA50
01
RXD RXD
02
*RXD *RXD
#24AWG pair
03
TXD TXD
04
*TXD *TXD
09
+24V +24V
10
+24V +24V

(NOTE 1) ATCH1 15 ATCH1

16 #24AWG
(NOTE 1) ATCH2 ATCH2
19
0V 0V
20
0V 0V
05 Drain wire
FG FG
Shield
NOTE 2)
Recommended cable
A66L–0001–0298: Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
(#24AWG pair x 2, #24AWG x 10, drain wire, external cable diameter: 8.5 mm)

NOTE
1 ATCH1, ATCH2
ATCH1 and ATCH2 can be used as DI signals for detecting whether a detachable LCD/MDI unit
is attached to the connection panel. ATCH1 and ATCH2, when unused, need not be
connected.
2 FG
Using a drain wire, connect CA50 (05) to the FG terminal of the connection panel.
Connect the FG terminal of the connection panel to the frame ground by using a twisted–pair
cable that is 100 to 300 mm long with a cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2.
3 The external diameter of the cable used with connector CA50 is 8.5 mm. If the external
diameter of the cable is less than 8.5 mm, increase the diameter to 8.5 mm by using
heat–shrinkable tube or taping at the connector joint to ensure a dustproof connection.

230
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

3) Details of cable J126

Connector panel Power Mate–D

JD14 (PCR–EV20MDT)

01 RXD 11 0V

02 *RXD 12 0V
J126
03 TXD 13

04 *TXD 14

HONDA TSUSHIN 05 15
KOGYO CO., LTD.
PCR–E20F 06 16

FANUC specifications 07 17
 Soldering type (with
case) 08 18
A02B–0120–K301
09 19
 Crimp type (with case)
A02B–0120–K302
10 20

Cable connection (J126)

Connector panel
Power Mate
JD14
01
RXD RXD
02
*RXD *RXD
03
TXD TXD
04
*TXD *TXD
11
0V 0V
12
0V 0V

Shield

Cable clamp
Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs): Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.,
Hitachi Cable, Ltd.

231
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

4) Details of cable J128

Connection panel Connector panel

RXTP RXTP
Pair
*RXTP *RXTP

TXTP TXTP
Pair
*TXTP *TXTP

+24V +24V

+24V +24V

(NOTE 1) ATCH1 ATCH1

(NOTE 1) ATCH2 ATCH2

0V 0V

0V 0V
 
FG (NOTE 3)

Shield

Cable:
cable A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs): Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd., Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
cable Twisted–pair cable with cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2 (FG)

NOTE
1 ATCH1 and ATCH2, when unused, need not be connected.
2 FG on the connection panel:
Connect the FG terminal on the connection panel to the frame ground. For this connection,
use a twisted–pair cable, 100 to 300 mm long, with a cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2.
Use this FG terminal to connect the shield of cable J127 to ground.
3 FG on the connector panel:
On the connector panel, connect the shield of cable J128 to the frame ground. For this
connection, use a twisted–pair cable, 100 to 300 mm long and with a cross–sectional area of
at least 2 mm2.

232
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

5) Details of cable J132

Connector panel

External power supply

J132
24VDC

Cable connection (J132)

External power supply Connector panel

24VDC +24V

0V 0V

233
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.5.4
When One Detachable
LCD/MDI Unit is Shared
by Multiple Power
Mate–D Units
7.5.4.1
When the 1) Inter–unit connection diagram
simultaneous block
start function is not
used
Cabinet

Con- J132 24 VDC

nector power
Connection panel supply
panel
Detachable
LCD/MDI unit
Power
Mate–D
J129 J130 J126 #0
CA50 JD14

24VDC10% JD15
1.0A

J46
Power
Device No. selection Mate–D
switches #1
JD14

JD15
J46

(1) When using the CRT sharing function, mount the device No.
selection switches on the cabinet.
(2) The total length of the cables (J129, J130, J126, J46 x n) between the
detachable LCD/MDI unit and Power Mate–D units must not exceed
50 m.
(3) Cables J129, J130, and J132 also serve as a 24 VDC power supply line
for the detachable LCD/MDI unit. The 24 VDC power is subject to
a voltage drop corresponding to the total resistance of the 24V and 0V
lines. Taking this voltage drop into consideration, determine the
cable length so that 24 VDC
10% is available at connector CA50
of the detachable LCD/MDI unit.
(4) Attach a terminating unit (A02B–0124–D001) to connector JD15 of
the last Power Mate–D unit.
(5) The connections from Power Mate–D #0 to Power Mate–D #15 are
the same as those for the CRT/MDI unit.
(6) While the power is on, cables can be attached/detached to/from those
connectors on the connector panel that are shaded ( ) in the above
figure. For the other connectors (such as CA50 and JD14), cables can
neither be attached nor detached while the power is on.

234
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Cabinet
Detachable LCD/MDI unit
CA50 (01) RXD Connection Connector RXD JD14 (01) Power
Mate
CA50 (02) *RXD panel panel JD14 (02)
*RXD

CA50 (03) TXD TXD JD14 (03)

CA50 (04) *TXD *TXD JD14 (04)

CA50 (15) ATCH1 (NOTE 1) 0V JD14 (11, 12)

CA50 (16) ATCH2 to DI
ATCH

(NOTE 2)
+24V CA50 (09, 10) +24V
+24V External power supply
CA50 (19, 20) 0V
0V 24 VDC
CA50 (05) FG
(Cabinet) Shield

NOTE
1 ATCH1 and ATCH2 can be used as DI signals for detecting whether a detachable LCD/MDI unit
is attached to the connection panel. ATCH1 and ATCH2, when unused, need not be
connected.
2 To attach or detach a detachable LCD/MDI unit while the Power Mate–D is turned on, 0V of the
Power Mate–D must be connected to 0V of the detachable LCD/MDI unit before any other line.

2) Details of cable J129

Detachable LCD/MDI unit

CA50
Connection panel
04 03 02 01

*TXD TXD *RXD RXD J129

10 09 08 07 06 05
Hirose Electric. Co., Ltd.
+24V +24V *SEL2 *SEL1 *SEL0 FG
(1)Soldering type
HR22–12TPD–20S
16 15 14 13 12 11
(2)Crimp type
 Housing
ATCH2 ATCH1 *SEL3 HR22–12TPD–20SC
 Contact
20 19 18 17 HR22–SC–122
 Manual crimping tool
0V 0V *SEL7 *SEL4 HR22–TA2428HC

235
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Cable connection (J129)

Detachable
LCD/MDI unit Connection panel
CA50
01
RXD RXD
02
*RXD *RXD
#24AWG pair
or
03 #28AWG pair
TXD TXD
04
*TXD *TXD
09
+24V +24V
10
+24V +24V

(NOTE 1) ATCH1 15
ATCH1

(NOTE 1) ATCH2 16
ATCH2

*SEL0 06
*SEL0

*SEL1 07
*SEL1 #24AWG
08 or
*SEL2 *SEL2 #28AWG

*SEL3 14
*SEL3
17
*SEL4 *SEL4

*SEL7 18
*SEL7
19
0V 0V
20
0V 0V
Drain
FG 05 wire FG
Shield (NOTE 3)

Recommended cables:
A66L–0001–0298: Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. (#24AWG pair x 2, #24AWG x 10, drain wire, external cable diameter: 8.5 mm), or
A66L–0001–0284#10P: Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd., Hitachi Cable, Ltd. (#28AWG pair, external cable diameter: 6.2 mm)

NOTE
1 ATCH1, ATCH2, *SELn
ATCH1 and ATCH2 can be used as DI signals for detecting whether a detachable LCD/MDI unit
is attached to the connection panel. ATCH1 and ATCH2, when unused, need not be
connected.
Connect only necessary signals out of *SEL0 to *SEL7 according to the number of devices.
The A66L–0001–0298 cable cannot be used if seven or more signals are being input from
ATCH1, ATCH2, and *SEL0 to *SEL7. In such a case, use cable A66L–0001–0284#10P.
2 The external diameter of the cable used with connector CA50 is 8.5 mm. If the external
diameter of the cable is less than 8.5 mm, increase the diameter to 8.5 mm by using
heat–shrinkable tube or taping at the connector joint to ensure a dustproof connection.
3 FG
Using a drain wire, connect CA50 (05) to the FG terminal of the connection panel.
Connect the FG terminal of the connector panel to the frame ground by using a twisted–pair
cable, 100 to 300 mm long and with a cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2.

236
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

3) Details of cable J130

Connection panel Connector panel

RXTP RXTP
Pair
*RXTP *RXTP

TXTP TXTP


*TXTP *TXTP

+24V 24V

+24V 24V

(NOTE 1) ATCH1 ATCH1

(NOTE 1) ATCH2 ATCH2

0V 0V

0V 0V

*SEL0

*SEL1

*SEL2

*SEL3

*SEL4

*SEL7
(NOTE 2)
FG
(NOTE 3)
Shield

Device No. selec-

tion switches

(NOTE 4)

Cable:
cable A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs): Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd., Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
cable #28AWG
6
cable Twisted–pair cable with a cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2 (FG)

237
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

NOTE
1 ATCH1 and ATCH2, when unused, need not be connected.
2 FG on the connection panel
Connect the FG terminal on the connection panel to the
frame ground. For this connection, use a twisted–pair
cable, 100 to 300 mm long and with a cross–sectional area
of at least 2 mm2.
At this FG terminal, connect the shield of cable J129 to
ground.
3 FG on the connector panel
On the connector panel, connect the shield of cable J130 to
the frame ground. For this connection, use a twisted–pair
cable, 100 to 300 mm long and with a cross–sectional area
of at least 2 mm2.
4 Device No. selection switch connection
For details of device No. selection switch connection, see
Section 7.1.6.

4) Details of cable J126

See item 3) in Subsec. 7.5.3.
5) Details of cable J132
See item 5) in Subsec. 7.5.3.

238
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.5.4.2
When the 1) Inter–unit connection diagram
simultaneous block
start function is used
Cabinet

Con- J132 24 VDC

nector power
panel supply
Connection
Detachable panel
LCD/MDI unit
Power
Mate–D
J129 J130 J131 #0
CA50 JD14

24VDC10% JD15
1.0A

J44
Power
Device No. selection Mate–D
switches #1
JD14

JD15
J44

(1) When using the CRT sharing function, mount the device No.
selection switches on the cabinet.
(2) The total length of the cables (J129, J130, J131, J44 x n) linking the
detachable LCD/MDI unit to the Power Mate–D units must not
exceed 50 m.
(3) Cables J129, J130, and J132 also serve as a 24 VDC power supply line
for the detachable LCD/MDI unit. The 24 VDC power is subject to
a voltage drop corresponding to the total resistance of the 24V line
and 0V line. Taking this voltage drop into consideration, determine
the cable length so that 24 VDC
10% is available at connector
CA50 of the detachable LCD/MDI unit.
(4) Attach a terminating unit (A02B–0124–D001) to connector JD15 of
the last Power Mate–D unit.
(5) The connections from Power Mate #0 to any additional Power
Mate–D units are the same as those for the CRT/MDI unit.
(6) While the power is on, cables can be attached/detached to/from those
connectors on the connector panel that are shaded ( ) in the above
figure. For the other connectors (such as CA50 and JD14), cables can
neither be attached nor detached while the power is on.

239
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Cabinet
Detachable LCD/MDI unit
Power Mate
CA50 (01) RXD Connection Connector panel RXD JD14 (01)
CA50 (02) *RXD panel *RXD JD14 (02)
TXD JD14 (03)
CA50 (03) TXD
*TXD JD14 (04)
CA50 (04) *TXD
0V JD14 (11, 12)
CA50 (15) ATCH1 (NOTE 1) to DI
ATCH
CA50 (16) ATCH2 ITPGA JD14 (05)

(NOTE 2) *ITPGA JD14 (06)

+24V CA50 (09, 10) +24V
ITPGB JD14 (07)
CA50 (19, 20) 0V *ITPGB JD14 (08)
CA50 (05) FG SI0 JD14 (09)
(Cabinet) Shield *SI0 JD14 (20)
CA50 (06) *SEL0 SI1 JD14 (13)
Device No.
CA50 (07) *SEL1 *SI1 JD14 (14)
selection
CA50 (08) *SEL2 switches on SI2 JD14 (15)
the machine
CA50 (14) *SEL3 operator’s 0V +24V *SI2 JD14 (16)
CA50 (17) *SEL4 panel External JD14 (17)
SI3
power
CA50 (18) *SEL7 *SI3 JD14 (18)
supply

NOTE
1 ATCH1 and ATCH2 can be used as DI signals for detecting whether a detachable LCD/MDI unit
is attached to the connection panel. ATCH1 and ATCH2, when unused, need not be
connected.
2 To attach or detach a detachable LCD/MDI unit while the Power Mate–D is turned on, 0V of the
Power Mate–D must be connected to 0V of the detachable LCD/MDI unit before any other line.

240
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

2) Details of cable J129

See item 2) in Subsec. 7.5.4.1.
3) Details of cable J130
See item 3) in Subsec. 7.5.4.1.
4) Details of cable J132
See item 5) in Subsec. 7.5.3.
5) Details of cable J131

Connector panel Power Mate–D

JD14 (PCR– EV20MDT)

01 RXD 11 0V

02 *RXD 12 0V
J131
03 TXD 13 SI1

04 *TXD 14 *SI1

HONDA TSUSHIN KO- 05 ITPGA 15 SI2

GYO CO., LTD.
PCR–E20F 06 *ITPGA 16 *SI2

FANUC specifications 07 ITPGB 17 SI3

 Soldering type (with
case) 08 *ITPGB 18 *SI3
A02B–0120–K301
09 SI0 19
 Crimp type (with case)
A02B–0120–K302
10 20 *SI0

241
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Cable connection (J131)


 JD14 Power Mate–D
01
RXD RXD
02
*RXD *RXD
03
TXD TXD
04
*TXD *TXD
05
ITPGA ITPGA
06
*ITPGA *ITPGA
07
ITPGB ITPGB
08
*ITPGB *ITPGB
09
SI0 SI0
20
*SI0 *SI0
13
SI1 SI1
14
*SI1 *SI1
15
SI2 SI2
16
*SI2 *SI2
17
SI3 SI3
18
*SI3 *SI3
11
0V 0V
12
0V 0V

Shield

Cable
clamp
Recommended cable
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs): Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd., Hitachi Cable, Ltd.

242
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

6) Details of connector panel

RXD RXD

*RXD *RXD

TXD TXD

To connection *TXD *TXD

panel
ATCH ITPGA
R1
+24V *ITPGA

0V ITPGB
R2
*ITPGB

SI0 To connector JD14 on

R3 Power Mate–D
*SI0

SI1
R4
*SI1

SI2
R5
*SI2

SI3
R6
*SI3

0V

ATCH To DI on Power Mate–D

+24V
To external power
0V supply

R1 to R6 : 200W 1 / 4W

243
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.5.5 When the two–path Power Mate–D is provided with two detachable
Example of Connecting LCD/MDI unit attachment positions, the CRT link (RS–485) will have
a T branch. Minimize the length of this branch. No more than one
a Detachable LCD/MDI detachable LCD/MDI unit can be connected to a CRT link at any one time.
Unit to the Two–path Further details are given in Subsec. 7.5.3.
Power Mate–D The ATCH signal shown in the figure in Subsec. 7.5.3 can be used to
automatically change the path to be displayed according to the attachment
position. The displayed path can be selected by the PMC. When a
detachable LCD/MDI unit is attached to each attachment position, the
displayed path can be changed automatically by using the ATCH signal
to turn on the corresponding DI signal.

ÅÅÅ
2–path
Power
Mate–D
ÅÅÅ Attachment position

Terminating
unit

ÅÅ ÅÅ
Detachable
CRT/MDI unit
ÅÅ LEFT
ÅÅ
RIGHT

Terminating
resistor
T branch

244
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.6 The following three types of DPL/MDI units are available:

CONNECTION WITH
THE DPL/MDI
CE Maximum
Relaying Cable
marking line length

DPL/MDI unit Not compatible 2m Not Provided with the unit (2m).
allowed

Long–distance Not compatible 40m Allowed To be prepared by the ma-

DPL/MDI unit chine tool builder.
A cable (2m/7m/14m)
manufactured by FANUC
can be used for the DPL/
MDI side cable.

Dustproof Compatible 40m Allowed Only a cable (2m/7m/14m)

DPL/MDI unit manufactured by FANUC
must be used for the DPL/
MDI side cable.

(1) Connection using no junction cable

Power Mate DPL/MDI

D15.M J6 D15.M
M4 CNPR

(2) Connection using junction cable J13

Power Mate Panel DPL/MDI

D15.M D15.F J6
M4 CNPR
J13 D15.M D15.M

Junction cable

(3) Precautions on connection

Be sure to turn off the power to the Power Mate before pulling out or
plugging in the connector on the DPL/MDI. Other connectors of the
contacts for the Power Mate and junction connector can be pulled out
and plugged in at any time.

245
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

(4) Details of cable J6

Power DPL/MDI
Mate
M4, CNPR
panel
(01) 0V 0V (01)
(04) *ATCHPGM *ATCHPGM (04)
(09) *ATCHOPP *ATCHOPP (09)
(10) RXD TXD (12)
(11) *RXD *TXD (13)
(12) TXD RXD (10)
(13) *TXD *RXD (11)
(05) +5V +5V (05)
(07) 0V 0V (07)
(06) RTS CTS (15)
(14) *RTS *CTS (08)
(15) CTS RTS (06)
(08) *CTS *RTS (14)
Shell Shell
Shield

Male Always connect the shell of each connector to 0V. Female

The following three types of cables (with connectors) can be

purchased from FANUC.
The DPL/MDI unit is delivered together with a 2–m cable. For the
dustproof DPL/MDI unit, select one of the cables listed in the table
below.
Cable length Order drawing No. Cable resistance
2m type A02B–0118–K820 0.37W
7m type A02B–0118–K821 1.295W
14m type A02B–0118–K822 2.59W

The following connectors are used on both the Power Mate and the
DPL/MDI.
D–SUB 15–pin male connector of the M3 screw–lock type ( 2)
Ordr the following drawing No. when purchasing the above FANUC
connector. Note that this connector cannot hold cables with a
diameter of 8 mm or more. Select proper wires for cabling.
Drawing No.: A02B–0118–K900
(17JE–23150–02 (D8B) of Daiichi Denshi Kogyo
Co., Ltd)
As shown in the figure above, pair off the following cables into
twisted pairs: RXD and *RXD, TXD and *TXD, RTS and *RTS, and
CTS and *CTS. If any of these cables are incorrectly paired,
problems caused by noise may result.
Determine the length of the cable by referring to (6) below.

246
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

(5) Details of cable J13

Power Junction
Mate connector
M4

(01) 0V 0V (01)
(04) *ATCHPGM *ATCHPGM (04)
(09) *ATCHOPP *ATCHOPP (09)
(10) RXD RXD (10)
(11) *RXD *RXD (11)
(12) TXD TXD (12)
(13) *TXD *TXD (13)
(05) +5V +5V (05)
(07) 0V 0V (07)
(06) RTS RTS (06)
(14) *RTS *RTS (14)
(15) CTS CTS (15)
(08) *CTS *CTS (08)
Shell Shell

Shield
Male Female
Always connect the shell of each connector to 0V.

Relaying is allowed for the long–distance and dustproof DPL/MDI

units.
Cables need to be prepared by the machine tool builder.
Power Mate side connector is following.
D–SUB 15–pin male connector of the M3 screw–lock type ( 1)
Order the following drawing No. when purchasing the above FANUC
connector. Note that this connector cannot hold cables with a
diameter of 8 mm or more. Select proper wires for cabling.
Drawing No.: A02B–0118–K900
(17JE–23150–02 (D8B) of Daiichi Denshi Kogyo
Co., Ltd)
Use the following junction connector on the DPL/MDI:
D–SUB 15–pin female connector of the M3 jack–socket type
( 1)
Order the following drawing Nos. when purchasing this connector:
Drawing No.: A02B–0118–K901
 17JE–13150–02 (D1) connector ( 1) of
Daiichi Denshi Kogyo
 17L–003B jack socket ( 1) of
Daiichi Denshi Kogyo

247
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

The following figure is an example of the mounting holes on the panel

when the above connector is used. Mount the connector from behind
the panel, and fasten the connector to the panel by sandwiching the
panel between the jack socket (fitting fixture) and a nut for the M3
screw. The nut for the M3 screw must be prepared by the machine tool
builder. The maximum thickness of the panel is 1.3 mm.

B"0.1 Panel
Nut
E or more 2–φ3.2"0.1 Connector

11.4 or more Male

connector
10° Jack socket
4–R3.4 Inside Outside
surface surface
B=33.32, E=28.8 (Unit : mm)

As shown in the figure above, pair off the following cables into
twisted pairs: RXD and *RXD, TXD and *TXD, RTS and *RTS, and
CTS and *CTS. If any of these cables are incorrectly paired,
problems caused by noise may result. Determine the length of the
cable by referring to (6) below.
(6) Selection of the cable
Select cables by applying the formula shown below so that the total
resistance of the wires for the power system (0 V and +5 V) is 3.8
ohms or less. Note, however, that a cable of 40 m or longer must not
be used even if it satisfies the formula.
ȏ R A t 3.8
1000
ȏ : Cable length [m]
R : Resistance of the wire for the power system [ohms/km]
A+ 1 ) 1
Number of wires for ) 5V Number of wires for 0V
Example:When two wires are used for each of 0 V and +5 V, and the
resistance of the wire is 220 ohms/km
A=1/2+1/2=1
220
ȏ 1000
1 t 3.8

∴ ȏ < 17.2727 ...

Therefore, a cable of up to 17 m can be used.

248
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

(7) The DPL/MDI unit and Power Mate can be connected only on a
one–to–one basis. Even in the case of the two–path Power Mate–D,
the following connection is not allowed:

ÅÅ
Power
Mate-D
ÅÅ Attachment position

ÅÅÅ ÅÅ
ÅÅÅ ÅÅ
DPL/MDI
unit

LEFT RIGHT

249
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.7 A position display can be connected to the Power Mate–F. It cannot be

connected to the Power Mate–D.
CONNECTING A
POSITION DISPLAY

One–axis position display

PWR CN1 CN2

FG
B3.F D15.M D15.M

J24 J6 J6

D15.M D15.M

0 V/24 V
External 24–VDC power M4
supply Power Mate DPL/MDI
(Rating: 1 A or more)

NOTE
1 Cable connector symbols
B3.F : Three–pin female connector, manufactured by
Burndy Japan
D15.M : D–sub 15–pin male connector
2 The customer is responsible for providing cables and a
24–VDC power supply as described in the cable connection
details.
3 Turn on the external 24–VDC power supply, then turn on the
power to the Power Mate.

Power supply to Power Mate

External 24–VDC power

0 or more

4 The product is not approved for CE marking.

250
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Front

Eight–digit 7–segment LED (with decimal point)

Sign indication [ ] or [–]

Axis label

(The above labels are supplied with the display. The customer is responsi-
ble for attaching the desired axis name to the left side of the acrylic plate.)

Rear

Dustproof top cover

Control PC board

Display PC board

DPL/MDI connector: D–sub 15–pin connector

Power Mate connector: D–sub 15–pin connector

Power connector: Burndy 3–pin connector

251
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Details of cable J6

Power Position
Mate display
M4 CN1
(01) 0V 0V (01)
(04) *ATCHPGM *ATCHPGM (04)
(09) *ATCHOPP *ATCHOPP (09)
(10) *RXD *TXD (12)
(11) RXD TXD (13)
(12) *TXD *RXD (10)
(13) TXD RXD (11)
(05) *ATCHPMA *ATCHPMA (05)
(07) 0V 0V (07)
(06) RTS CTS (15)
(14) *RTS *CTS (08)
(15) CTS RTS (06)
(08) *CTS *RTS (14)
Shell Shell

Male Male

The customer must prepare the cable.

Cable connector (M4, CN1):
17JE–23150–02 (D8B) manufactured by Daiichi Denshi Kogyo Co.,
Ltd. (D–sub 15–pin male connector, M3 screw–lock type)
Wires used :
Vinyl wire for 0 V: 12/0.18, two wires in total
Other wires: 7/0.18, 11 wires in total
As shown in the above figure, pair off the lines other than the 0 V,
*ATCHPGM, *ATCHOPP, and *ATCHPMA lines into twisted pairs.
Note that if the lines are incorrectly paired, noise may be generated.
Cable length : 40 m maximum
Specify the following drawing No. when purchasing the connector from
FANUC:
A02B–0118–K900
(17JE–23150–02 (D8B) (Daiichi Denshi Kogyo Co., Ltd.))
Specify the following drawing No. when purchasing the connector cable
from FANUC:
2–m type : A02B–0118–K820
7–m type : A02B–0118–K821
14–m type : A02B–0118–K822

252
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Details of cable J24

24–VDC Position display

power supply PWR
A +24V +24V20% 0.6A (1)
B 0V 0V (2)
FG (3)

FG

1) The machine tool builder is responsible for preparing a 24–VDC

power supply and cables.
2) PWR connector (cable side)
Housing: SMS3PNS–5
Contact (x3): RC16M–23T3 (Burndy Japan Ltd.)
Specify the following drawing No. when purchasing the above
connector from FANUC : A02B–0072–K893
3) Cable used
Cable : Vinyl cable 30/0.18
4) When measured on the PWR side (across 24–V check pin CHK3 and
0–V check pin CHK2), the voltage of the 24–VDC power supply
must be +24 V
20%.
5) Connect FG to the metal frame of the cabinet.

253
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.8
I/O DEVICE
INTERFACE

7.8.1
RS–232–C Interface
Specification NOTE
The Power Mate–D/F has a single–channel RS–232C
interface. When the two–path Power Mate–D is used, this
interface cannot be used for both paths at the same time.

(1) RS–232–C interface signal names

Generally, the RS–232–C interface uses the following signals:

Output
SD (Send data)
Input
RD (Receive data)
RS (Request to send) When CS is not used,
CS (Ready for sending) connect CS to RS.

ER (Equipment ready) When DR is not used,

connect DR to ER.
DR (Data set ready)
CD (Signal quality detect) Be sure to connect ER
SG (Signal ground) with CD.

FG (Frame ground)

Fig.7.8.1(a) RS–232–C interface

254
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

(2) RS–232–C interface signals

RS–232–C
Signal name Input/output Description
circuit number
SD 103 Output Send data Start bit Stop bit

ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RD 104 Input Receive data OFF
(The ISO code for 0 is sent)

RS 105 Output Request to send

This signal is turned on when data output from the NC machine is started; it
is turned off when data output from the NC machine is terminated.
CS 106 Input Ready for sending
When this signal and the DR signal are on, data can be output from the NC
machine. If the I/O device is not ready in time, for example, for punch–out
operation, this signal, when turned off, causes the NC machine to stop data
transmission after sending a maximum of two characters including charac-
ters currently being transmitted. When this signal is not used, be sure to con-
nect this signal to the RS signal on the NC.
DR 107 Input Data set ready
When this signal is no, the I/O device is ready. Generally, this signal is con-
nected with a signal for indicating the power–on state(*1) of the I/O device
(ER signal on the I/O device side). The NC sends data when this signal is
on. If this signal is turned off during data transmission, alarm No.086 occurs.
When this signal is not used, be sure to connect this signal to the ER signal
on the NC.
ER 108.2 Output NC equipment ready
When this signal is on, the NC machine is ready for operation. An I/O device
regards the SD signal sent while the ER signal is on, as valid information.
CD 109 Input Signal quality detect
This signal is not used for connection with an I/O device. Be sure to connect
this signal with the ER signal on the NC in the cable.
SG 102 Signal ground
FG 101 Frame ground

NOTE
The signal is turned on and off as follows:
–3V or lower +3V or higher
Function OFF ON
Signal Condition Marking Spacing

(3) RS–232–C interface transmission system

(a) Start–stop system
In general, two systems can be used for serial interface
transmission: the start–stop system and synchronous system.
With Power Mate the start–stop system is used.
Start–stop system: Information bits are transmitted preceded by
a start signal and followed by a stop signal.

255
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

1 character in the start–stop system

b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8

Start bit Information bits Stop bits

(8 bits including a parity bit) (2 bits)

(For bit correspondence information, see the description of the SD and

RD signals in ltem 2).

(b) Codes
The following codes are used:
i) EIA code + control codes DC1 to DC4
ii) ISO code + control codes DC1 to DC4
An I/O device must be able to identify the following control
codes output from the NC system:
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DC1 Start tape reader Ę ° Ę
DC2 Specify tape punch Ę ° Ę
DC3 Stop tape reader Ę Ę ° Ę Ę
DC4 Release tape Ę ° Ę
punch

NOTE
The control codes above are commonly used regardless of
whether the EIA code or ISO code is used.

With this interface, control codes DC1 to DC4 are used. Note the
following:
(a) The NC machine can control an I/O device by sending DC1
to DC4.
(b) An I/O device can perform the operations below if it is not
ready to receive data from the NC machine.
(i) The I/O device can temporarily stop data transmission
from the NC machine by using the CS signal on the NC.
The CS signal, when turned off and sent to the NC
machine, causes the NC machine to stop data
transmission after sending a maximum of two characters
including characters currently being transmitted. When
the CS signal is turned on again, data transmission
resumes.
(ii) When control code DC3 is sent to the NC machine, the
NC machine stops data transmission after sending 10 or
less characters. Then, when control code DC1 is sent to
the NC machine, the NC machine resumes data
transmission. When an I/O device containing an
ISO/EIA converter is used, the device needs to satisfy the
specifications of Table 7.8.1.

256
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Table 7.8.1
ISO code EIA code
Meaning
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0 f f ° 0 f ° Numeral 0
1 f f f ° f 1 ° f Numeral 1
2 f f f ° f 2 ° f Numeral 2
3 f f ° f f 3 f ° f f Numeral 3
4 f f f ° f 4 ° f Numeral 4
5 f f ° f f 5 f ° f f Numeral 5
6 f f ° f f 6 f ° f f Numeral 6
7 f f f ° f f f 7 ° f f f Numeral 7
8 f f f f ° 8 f ° Numeral 8
9 f f f ° f 9 f f ° f Numeral 9
A f ° f a f f ° f Address A
B f ° f b f f ° f Address B
C f f ° f f c f f f ° f f Address C
D f ° f d f f ° f Address D
E f f ° f f e f f f ° f f Address E
F f f ° f f f f f f ° f f Address F
G f ° f f f g f f ° f f f Address G
H f f ° h f f f ° Address H
I f f f ° f i f f f f ° f Address I
J f f f ° f j f f ° f f Address J
K f f ° f f k f f ° f Address K
L f f f ° f l f ° f f Address L
M f f ° f f m f f ° f Address M
N f f ° f f n f ° f f Address N
O f f f ° f f f o f ° f f Not used at significant information section
in ISO code.
Assumed as program No. in EIA code.
P f f ° p f f ° f f f Address P
Q f f f ° f q f f f ° Address Q
R f f f ° f r f f ° f Address R
S f f ° f f s f f ° f Address S
T f f f ° f t f ° f f Address T
U f f ° f f u f f ° f Address U
V f f ° f f v f ° f f Address V
W f f f ° f f f w f ° f f Address W
X f f f f ° x f f ° f f f Address X
Y f f f ° f y f f f ° Address Y
Z f f f ° f z f f ° f Address Z
DEL f f f f f ° f f f Del f f f f ° f f f Delete (cancel an error punch).
Not punched. Can not be used in signifi-
NUL ° Blank °
cant section in EIA code.
BS f f ° BS f f ° f Back space
HT f ° f Tab f f f ° f f Tabulator
LF or NL f ° f CR or EOB f ° End of block
CR f f ° f f Carriage return
SP f f ° SP f ° Space
% f f ° f f ER f ° f f Absolute rewind stop
( f f ° ( 2–4–5 ) f f ° f Control out (a comment is started)
) f f f f ( 2–4–7 ) f f f Control in (the end of a comment)
+ f f ° f f + f f f ° Positive sign
– f f ° f f – f ° Negative sign
: f f f ° f Colon
/ f f f ° f f f / f f ° f Optional block skip
. f f ° f f . f f f ° f f Period (A decimal point)
# f f ° f f Sharp
$ f ° f Dollar sign
& f f ° f f & f ° f f Ampersand
’ f ° f f f Apostrophe
* f f f ° f Asterisk
, f f f ° f , f f f f f Comma
; f f f f ° f f Semicolon
< f f f ° f Left angle bracket
= f f f f ° f f Equal
> f f f f ° f f Right angle bracket
? f f f ° f f f Question mark
@ f f ° Commercial at mark
” f f Quotation

257
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

NOTE
When an I/O device containing an ISO/EIA converter is
used, pay special attention to the following in Table 7.8.1.

Control–out (start of a comment)

Control–in (end of a comment)

EIA code ( ............... ) CR O ...............

Condition 1 Condition 1 Condition 3 Condition 2

ISO code ( ............... ) LF : ...............

Condition 1 In the EIA code, a card punched at bits 2, 4, and 5

corresponds to the ISO code for the left parenthesis
“(.” A card punched at bits 2, 4, and 7 corresponds
to the ISO code for the right parenthesis “).”
Condition 2 The EIA code for O is converted to the ISO code
for the colon (:).
Condition 3 The EIA code for CR is converted to the ISO code
for LF .

NOTE
Control codes DC1 to DC4 are transmission codes output
from the NC machine, and need not be fed as paper tape
information.

(iii) Transmission rate (baud rate)

The transmission rate (baud rate) indicates the number
of bits sent per second. One of the following baud rates
can be selected by parameter setting:
600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
Example: When 4800 baud is used
Assuming that 1 start bit and 2 stop bits are used
(11 bits/character).
Then,
Number of transmission characters per second=
4800/11 characters per second (maximum)
(iv) Cable length
The cable length varies from one I/O device to another.
For the required cable length, consult with each I/O
device supplier.

258
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

When the NC receives (1) The NC machine sends a DC1 code.

data (for reading into (2) Upon receipt of the DC1 code, the I/O device starts data transmission
memory) to the NC machine.
(3) While the NC machine is processing, it sends a DC3 code.
(4) Upon receipt of the DC3 code, the I/O device stops data transmission
to the NC machine.
When the DC3 code is sent, the I/O device is to stop data transmission
after sending 10 or less characters. If more than 10 characters are sent,
alarm no.087 occurs.
(5) The NC machine sends another DC1 code when its processing is
completed.
(6) Upon receipt of the DC1 code, the I/O device resumes data
transmission to the NC machine in order to send the remaining data.
(7) Upon completion of data read operation, the NC machine sends
another DC3 code.
(8) The I/O device stops data transmission.

10ms or more 100ms or more

ER (output)

RS (output)
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅ ÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅ ÅÅ
DC1 DC3 DC1 DC3

ÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅÅ
SD (output)
ER code

RD (input)

DR (input)
ÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅÅ
CS (input)

1ms or more 10 or less characters

Fig.7.8.1(b)

259
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

When the NC sends data (1) The NC machine sends a DC2 code.
(punch–out) (2) The NC machine sends punch–out information.
(3) While the I/O device is processing data:
(a) The CS signal on the NC can be turned off to cause the NC
machine to stop data transmission after sending a maximum of
two characters including characters currently being transmitted.
When the CS signal is turned on again, data transmission
resumes. (See Fig. 7.8.1 (c).)
(b) When a DC3 control code is sent to the NC machine, the NC
machine stops data transmission after sending 10 or less
characters, which are counted starting at the time of DC3 code
transmission. Then, when a DC1 control code is sent to the NC,
the NC machine resumes data transmission. (See Fig. 7.8.1 (d).)
(4) Upon completion of data transmission, the NC machine sends a DC4
code.

10ms or more 100ms or more

ER (output)

RS (output)
ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅ
DC2 DC4

SD (output)

DR (input)

CS (input)

1ms or more 2 or less characters

Fig.7.8.1(c)

10ms or more 100ms or more

ER (output)

ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅ
RS (output)
DC2 DC4

SD (output)
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅ Å
DC3 DC1

RD (input)

10 or less characters

DR (input)

CS (input)

1ms or more

Fig.7.8.1(d)

260
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

(5) Connecting the RS–232–C interface with an I/O device

NC I/O device
SD SD
RD RD
RS RS
CS CS
ER ER
DR DR
CD CD
SG SG
FG FG

261
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.8.2
RS–232–C Serial Port
Power Mate Relay connector
(DBM–25S)
1 FG
(PCR-EV20MDT) 14
2 SD
1 RD 11 SD 15
3 RD
2 0V 12 0V 16
J42 4 RS
3 DR 13 ER 17
5 CS
4 0V 14 0V 18
6 DR
5 CS 15 RS 19
Connector 7 SG
6 0V 16 0V PCR–E20FA 20 ER
8 CD
7 CD 17 or 21
9
8 0V 18 PCR–E20FS 22
Case: PCR– 10
9 19 +24V 23
V20CA 11
10 +24V 20 24
12
25 +24V
13

Cable wiring J42

Power Mate Relay connector

1 3
RD RD
2
0V
3 6
DR DR
4
0V
5 5
CS CS
6
0V
7 8
CD CD
8
0V
9
10
+24V
11 2
SD SD
12
0V
13 20
ER ER
14
0V
15 4
RS RS
16 7
0V SG
17
18
19 25
24V +24V
20 1
* FG
Shield

Recommended cable material

A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG 10–pair) (line length: 15m or less)

262
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.8.3
Fanuc Floppy Cassette
Relaying connector signal layout
and Handy File
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Connection
FG SD RD RS CS DR SG CD
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
ER +24

Cable side connector

Connector : DBM-25P
(JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONIC INDUSTRY., LTD.)
Lock metal : DDB–C2–J9
(JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONIC INDUSTRY., LTD.)

Relaying connector
Connector : DBM-25S
(JAPAN AVIATION
ELECTRONIC
INDUSTRY., LTD.)
Power Mate Lock metal : D20418-J2
(JAPAN AVIATION
JD5 ELECTRONIC
Relaying
(PCR-EV20MDT) INDUSTRY., LTD.)
cable
1 RD 11 SD
2 0V 12 0V FANUC
FLOPPY
3 DR 13 ER
CASSETTE/
4 0V 14 0V FG HANDY
5 CS 15 RS FILE
6 0V 16 0V +24V10%
Connector Appendant 1.0A
7 CD 17 PCR-E20FA
8 0V 18 or
9 19 +24V PCR-E20FS
10 +24V 20
Case: PCR-
V20CA

NOTE
1 Machine tool builder shall furnish relay connector and relay
cable.
2 Use a totally shielded cable for the signal cable.
Recommended cable specification : A66L-0001-0284#10P
(Line length : 15m or less)
3 Open all terminals other than illustrated.
4 Set a parameter to be able to use reader puncher interface
when connecting FANUC cassette/Handy file.
The baud rate is 4800 baud.
5 The Power Mate can be used to route 24 VDC power to the
FANUC Floppy Cassette/Handy File. In this case,
additional 24 VDC (1.0 A) power needs to be fed to the
Power Mate.

263
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.8.4
When External Power
Relaying connector signal layout
Supply is Used
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
FG SD RD RS CS DR SG CD
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
ER +24

Cable side connector

Connector : DBM-25P
(JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONIC INDUSTRY., LTD.)
Lock metal : DDB–C2–J9
(JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONIC INDUSTRY., LTD.)

Relaying connector
Connector : DBM-25S
(JAPAN AVIATION
ELECTRONIC
INDUSTRY., LTD.)
Power Mate Lock metal : D20418-J2
(JAPAN AVIATION
JD5 ELECTRONIC
Relaying
(PCR-EV20MDT) INDUSTRY., LTD.)
cable
1 RD 11 SD
2 0V 12 0V FANUC
FLOPPY
3 DR 13 ER
CASSETTE/
4 0V 14 0V FG HANDY
5 CS 15 RS FILE
6 0V 16 0V +24VDC
24 VDC Appendant 10%
7 CD 17
10A 1.0A
8 0V 18
9 19 (+24V) 0V is conĆ
10 (+24V) 20
nected to
SG.

NOTE
1 Machine tool builder shall furnish relay connector, relay
cable and 24VDC.
2 Use a totally shielded cable for the signal cable.
Recommended cable specification : A66L-0001-0284#10P
(Line length : 15m or less)
3 Open all terminals other than illustrated.
4 Set a parameter to be able to use reader puncher interface
when connecting FANUC cassette/Handy file.
The baud rate is 4800 baud.
5 If 24 VDC power is supplied to the FANUC Floppy
Cassette/Handy File from another power supply, 24 VDC
(1.0 A) power for FANUC I/O devices need not be fed to the
Power Mate.

264
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.9
MANUAL PULSE
GENERATOR
INTERFACE

7.9.1
Overview 1) One–path Power Mate–D
In basic mode, a manual pulse generator interface for one axis is
provided. Whether this manual pulse generator interface is used for
the first or second axis can be selected by the PMC.
An optional manual pulse generator interface for another axis can be
added.
This manual pulse generator interface can be used for either the first
or second axis, this being selected by the PMC.
 ! !        



 ! !       

 

2) Two–path Power Mate–D

In basic mode, a manual pulse generator interface for one axis is
provided for each path.
One manual pulse generator is connected to each path. The
connecting positions are fixed. The use of the manual pulse generator
interface can be specified separately for each path by the PMC.
! !  
          

! !  
         


3) Power Mate–F
In basic mode, a manual pulse generator interface for one axis is
provided. The use of this manual pulse generator interface is specified
by the PMC.
! !        


265
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.9.2
Interface CNC MPG

JA13
(PCR-EV20MDT) MPG unit #1
(M3 screw terminal)
1 HA1 11
J41 1 2 3 4
2 HB1 12 0V
3 HA2 13 +5V 0V HA1 HB1

4 HB2 14 0V
MPG unit #2
5 15
(M3 screw terminal)
6 16 0V
7 17 1 2 3 4

8 18 +5V +5V 0V HA2 HB2

9 +5V 19
10 20 +5V

Connector FI40–20I5S
Case FI–20–CV

Cable wiring J41

1 1
HA1 HA1 #24
2 2 AWG
HB1 HB1
9 3
+5V +5V #20
12 4 AWG
0V 0V

3 1
HA2 HA2 #24
4 2 AWG
HB2 HB2
8 3
+5V +5V #20
14 4 AWG
0V 0V

Shield

Recommended cable material

A66L-0001-0286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3–pair) for Lx20m

266
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.9.3 The manual pulse generator cable can be up to 50 m in length.

Cable Connection for The power supply to the manual pulse generator is 5 VDC, same as for
the pulse coder. It is therefore necessary to prevent cable resistance from
the Manual Pulse causing the supply voltage to drop more than 0.2 V (total for both the 0
Generator V and 5 V lines).
This is written as:
0.2 y 0.1 R
m
2L

0.1 : 0.1 A power supply current of the manual pulse generator

R : Resistance per unit length of the wire (Ω/m)
m : Number of wires connected in each 0 V and 5 V line
L : Wire length (m)
This can be converted to the following equation:
Lxm
R

When A66L-0001-0286 cable is used:

This cable, consists of three pairs of signal wires and six power line wires
(20/0.18, 0.0394 Ω/m). When three wires of this cable are used for 0 V
and another three for 5 V, the allowable cable length is calculated as
follows:
Lx 3 + 76.75[m]
0.0394
This means that a power supply with a cable length of 50 m is still within
specifications.

267
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.9.4
Signal Specifications
for Manual Pulse
Generator

D Electrical characteristics

Parameter Symbol Standard Units Test conditions

Min. Max.

Output V OH V CC –0.2 V RL = R W
voltage
4.4 V RL = 4 kW

V OL 0.3 V RL = 200 W

Timing conditions Recommended circuit

T1 T2 T3 T4 VCC

300 W

HA1
to CNC

HA2

T1, T2, T3, T4 > 82.5ms

Period > 300 ms 0V

D Signal logics

[Forward movement command] [Backward movement command]

HA1 HA1

HB1 HB1

[The following two cases are not assumed as command pulses.]

HA1 HA1

HB1 HB1

268
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.9.5 One manual pulse coder can be connected to up to six Power Mates, such
Connecting a Manual that each Power Mate can control the manual pulse coder.
Pulse Coder to Multiple
Power Mates Power Mate axis Manual pulse coder
select signal

#1X #1Y #2X

J41A J41A J41A J41A J41A
J41
Power Power Power Power Power Power
Connected to manual hand
Mate Mate Mate Mate Mate Mate
feed enable signal HSnA or
#1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6
HSnB (n = 1, 2) (Power
Mate–D) or HS1A (Power
Mate–F) of each Power Mate.

(1) Manual pulse control

For each Power Mate, manual pulse mode is enabled when the
following condition is satisfied:

Manual pulse
mode signal

Manual handle feed

enable signal
Valid period
HSnA or HSnB (n = 1, 2)

NOTE
Any manual pulse signal that is applied outside the valid
period, shown above, is ignored. (At the start of the valid
period for the manual pulse mode, a manual pulse signal
being applied at that time is discarded.)

(2) Details of J41A connection

n–1 n n+1

JA13 JA13 JA13

1 HA1 1 HA1 1 HA1

2 HB1 2 HB1 2 HB1
3 HA2 3 HA2 3 HA2
4 HB2 4 HB2 4 HB2
12 0V 12 0V 12 0V
14 0V 14 0V 14 0V
16 0V 16 0V 16 0V

NOTE
Do not connect any pins other than those shown above.

269
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.9.6 Generally, one manual pulse generator is required for each path. However,
Sharing of a Manual a single manual pulse generator can be shared by two paths. The PMC
selects the path that will use the manual pulse generator.
Pulse Generator by the
Two–path Power          

Mate–D      


When sharing a manual pulse generator, connect the signals of the manual
pulse generator to both interfaces. In this case, the signals are connected
in the same way as when two Power Mates are connected to a single
manual pulse generator, as explained in Subsec. 7.9.5.

Power Mate Manual pulse generator

1 1
HA1 HA1
2 2
HB1 HB1
3
HA2
4
HB2
9 3
5V 5V
12 4
0V 0V

270
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.10 The following two configurations of the spindle interface are available.
SPINDLE INTERFACE The Power Mate supports the selection of either a serial or analog spindle.
A spindle module is required.

α Series Spindle
Amplifier
(Serial spindle) Position coder
Power Mate
J39
JA11 JA7B JY2
JA7A SPM
TB2

Metal cable Spindle motor

Position coder

JA7A JY2
SPM
TB2

Spindle motor

Analog spindle
Power Mate
Position coder return signal (A/B/Z phase) J40 

JA12

J38 Analog spindle

JA11 Analog signal amplifier
Spindle motor

NOTE
For the second path of the two–path Power Mate–D, analog
signal output is enabled, but the position coder feedback
signal cannot be input.

271
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.10.1
α Series Spindle CNC α series Spindle Amplifier Module
Amplifier Interface JA11 JA7B
(Serial Spindle) (PCR-EV20MDT) (PCR–EV20MDT)
1 SIN 11 0V 1 SIN 11 0V
2 *SIN 12 0V J39 2 *SIN 12 0V
3 SOUT 13 0V 3 SOUT 13 0V
4 *SOUT 14 0V 4 *SOUT 14 0V
5 (ES2) 15 0V 5 15 0V
6 (SVC2) 16 0V 6 16 0V
7 (SVC1) 17 7 17
8 (ES1) 18 (+5V) 8 18 (+5V)
9 (+5V) 19 9 (+5V) 19
10 20 (+5V) 10 20 (+5V)

Connector PCR–E20FA or PCR–E20FS

Case PCR–V20LA

Cable connection J39

Cable connectionl CNC α series Spindle Amplifier Module

JA11 JA7B
3 1
SOUT SIN
4 2
*SOUT *SIN
1 3
SIN SOUT
2 4
*SIN *SOUT
11 11
0V 0V
12 12
0V 0V
13 13
0V 0V
14 14
0V 0V
15 15
0V 0V
16 16 0V
0V
Shield

272
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

NOTE
1 Recommended cable specification:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG x 10 pairs)
2 When this cable is routed near other cables, such as power
cables, connect the shield line to the grounding plate. This
connection is not, however, necessary when the CNC and
spindle amplifier module are mounted in close proximity.
3 This cable can be used to connect the CNC and spindle
amplifier module electrically, when the CNC and spindle
amplifier module are mounted in the same power magnetics
cabinet or in power magnetics cabinets which have been
connected by welding or other means. When mounted in
separate power magnetics cabinets, the CNC and spindle
amplifier module must be connected by an optical cable, via
an optical I/O link adapter.
4 The +5V terminal is used for optical link transmission via an
optical I/O link adapter. When using this cable or other
metallic cables, leave the +5V terminal open. If +5 V is
supplied to this terminal when a metallic cable is used, +5
V for the NC unit and that for the spindle module are
short–circuited.
5 Leave ES1, ES2, SVC1, and SVC2 unconnected; they are
used for the analog spindle.

273
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

In the case of connecting to the spindle amplifier, using optical fiber cable
equipped with an optical I/O link adaptor.
Spindle
CNC Optical I/O Link adapter amplifier

JA11 JD1
(PCR-EV20MDT) (PCR-EV20MDT)
1 SIN 11 0V 1 *SIN 11 0V
2 *SIN 12 0V J39 2 SIN 12 0V
COP1
3 SOUT 13 0V 3 *SOUT 13 0V
4 *SOUT 14 0V Up 4 SOUT 14 0V
CN11A
5 (ES2) 15 0V to 5 15 0V
2m
6 (SVC2) 16 0V 6 16 0V
7 (SVC1) 17 7 17
8 (ES1) 18 +5V 8 18 +5V
9 +5V 19 9 +5V 19
10 20 +5V 10 20 +5V

Optical fiber cable

See Subsec. 6.2.3 in Part I for adaptor specifications.

Cable wiring

JA7A JD1
1 4
SIN SOUT
*SIN 2 3 *SOUT
3 2
SOUT SIN
*SOUT 4 1 *SIN
9 9
+5V +5V
+5V 18 18 +5V
20 20
+5V +5V
11 11
0V 0V
0V 12 12
0V
13 13
0V 0V
0V 14 14
0V
15 15
0V 0V
0V 16 16
0V

Shield
Grounding plate

Recommended cable material

A66L-0001-0284#10P (#28AWG 10–pair)

274
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.10.2
Analog Spindle
CNC
Interface
JA11 Signal name Description
SVC1, ESC1, Spindle command voltage and
SVC2, ES2 common line
1 (SIN) 11 (0V)
2 (*SIN) 12 (0V)
3 (SOUT) 13 (0V)
4 (*SOUT) 14 (0V)
5 ES2 15 (0V)
6 SVC2 16 (0V)
7 SVC1 17
8 ES1 18 (+5V)
9 (+5V) 19
10 20 (+5V) Connector PCR–E20FA or PCR–E20FS
Case PCR–V20LA

Cable wiring J38

FANUC SPINDLE
SERVO UNIT

7
SVC1 DA2
8
ES1 E
Shield

FANUC SPINDLE
SERVO UNIT

6
SVC2 DA2
5
ES2 E
Shield

NOTE
1 Recommended cable specification : A66L–0001–0284#10P
(#28 AWG x 10 pairs)
2 SVC2 and ES2 are used only for the second path of the
two–path Power Mate–D.
3 Leave SIN, *SIN, SOUT, and *SOUT unconnected; they are
used for the serial spindle.

275
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.10.3
Position Coder
Interface CNC

JA12 Name Description

SC, *SC Position coder C–phase
signal
1 SC 11
2 *SC 12 0V PA, *PA Position coder A–phase
signal
3 13
4 14 0V PB, *PB Position coder B–phase
PA signal
5 15
6 *PA 16 0V
7 PB 17
8 *PB 18 +5V
9 +5V 19
10 20 +5V Connector FI40–20I5S
Case FI–20–CV

Cable wiring J40

POSITION CODER
CNC
5
PA A(PA)
6
*PA N(*PA)
7 #24
PB C(PB) AWG
8
*PB R(*PB)
1
SC B(PZ)
2
*SC P(*PZ)
9,18,20 #20
+5V H
12,14,16 AWG
0V K
3 3Pairs
SOUT SHIELD
4
*SOUT

Recommended cable material

A66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG+6×#24AWG×3 pairs) MAX LENGTH 20m.

NOTE
The two–path Power Mate–D is not provided with a position
coder interface for the second path.

276
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.11
SERVO INTERFACE
7.11.1 The servo interface has these features.
Outline D Digital control AC servo motor
D Motor feedback : Serial pulse coder
D Scale feedback : A/B/Z signal interface
D There are two servo interfaces: type A and type B. They are provided
as separate basic units.
D One–path Power Mate–D
A servo interface for one axis is provided.
An optional servo interface for another axis can also be used.
(Up to two axes can also be controlled.)
First servo interface
1) Type A : JV1, JF1, JF21
2) Type B : JS1, JF21
Second servo interface (option)
1) Type A : JV2, JF2, JF22
2) Type B : JS2, JF22
D Two–path Power Mate–D
A servo interface for one axis is provided for each path.
Servo interface for the first path
1) Type A : JV1, JF1, JF21
2) Type B : JS1, JF21
Servo interface for the second path
1) Type A : JV2, JF2, JF22
2) Type B : JS2, JF22
D Power Mate–F
A single–axis servo interface is provided.
1) Type A : JV1, JF1, JF21
2) Type B : JS1, JF21

277
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

1)    

Power Mate

J31 α series servo

J34 amplifier
JVn JVnB

J32
J35
JFn
*

J37 +6V battery unit

JA14 for absolute pulse
coder

Separate type pulse coder

JF2n
J33
J36

n=Axis number

* Connection on the α series servo amplifier side

For details, refer to the ”FANUC Control Motor Amplifier α Series
Descriptions” (B–65162E).

278
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

2)    

Power Mate

α series or β
J93 series servo
J94 amplifier
JSn JSnB

JFn

+6V battery unit

for absolute pulse
coder

Separate type pulse coder

JF2n
J33
J36

n=Axis number

* Connection on the α series servo amplifier side

For details, refer to the ”FANUC Control Motor Amplifier α Series
Descriptions” (B–65162E).

279
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.11.2
Servo Amplifier
Interface

Series Servo CNC Servo amplifier
Amplifier Type A
JVn JVnB
(PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–EV20MDT)
1 IRn 11 ISn 1 IRn 11 ISn
J31
2 GDRn 12 GDSn 2 GDRn 12 GDSn
J34
3 *PWMAn 13 *PWMDn 3 *PWMAn 13 *PWMDn
4 0V 14 0V 4 0V 14 0V
Connector
5 *PWMBn 15 *PWMEn 5 *PWMBn 15 *PWMEn
PCR–E20FA
6 0V 16 0V or 6 0V 16 0V
7 *PWMCn 17 *PWMFn PCR–E20FS 7 *PWMCn 17 *PWMFn
Case
8 0V 18 0V 8 0V 18 0V
PCR–V20LA
9 19 9 19
10 *MCONn 20 *DRDYn 10 *MCONn 20 *DRDYn

n : Axis number

Cable wiring J31, J34

1 1
IRn IRn
2 2
GDRn GDRn
3 3
*PWMAn *PWMAn
4 4
0V 0V
5 5
*PWMBn *PWMBn
6 6
0V 0V
7 7
*PWMCn *PWMCn
8 8
0V 0V
9 9

10 10
*MCONn *MCONn
11 11
ISn ISn
12 12
GDSn GDSn
13 13
*PWMDn *PWMDn
14 14
0V 0V
15 15
*PWMEn *PWMEn
16 16
0V 0V
17 17
*PWMFn *PWMFn
18 18
0V 0V
19 19

20 20
0V 0V

Shield

Recommended cable material

A66L-0001-0284#10P (#28AWG 10–pair)
Since IRn and ISn are likely to be reflected by noise,
use pair line at inside

280
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Series Servo CNC Servo amplifier

Amplifier Type B, β JSnB
JSn
Series Servo Amplifier (PCR-EV20MDT) (PCR–EV20MDT)

1 IRn 11 ISn 1 IRn 11 ISn

2 GDRn 12 GDSn J93 2 GDRn 12 GDSn
3 *PWMAn 13 *ENBLn
J94 3 *PWMAn 13 *ENBLn
4 0V 14 0V 4 0V 14 0V
5 *PWMCn 15 PD1 Connector 5 *PWMCn 15 PD1
PCR–E20FA
6 0V 16 *PD1 6 0V 16 *PD1
or
7 *PWMEn 17 PRQ1 PCR–E20FS 7 *PWMEn 17 PRQ1
8 0V 18 *PRQ1 Case 8 0V 18 *PRQ1
9 *DRDYn 19
PCR–V20LA 9
0V *DRDYn 19 0V
10 *MCONn 20 0V 10 *MCONn 20 0V

n : Axis number

Cable wiring J93, J94

1 1
IRn IRn
2 2
GDRn GDRn
3 3
*PWMAn *PWMAn
4 4
0V 0V
5 5
*PWMCn *PWMCn
6 6
0V 0V
7 7
*PWMEn *PWMEn
8 8
0V 0V
9 9
*DRDYn *DRDYn
10 10
*MCONn *MCONn
11 11
ISn ISn
12 12
GDSn GDSn
13 13
*ENBLn *ENBLn
14 14
0V 0V
15 15
PDn PDn
16 16
*PDn *PDn
17 17
PRQn PRQn
18 18
*PRQn *PRQn
19 19
0V 0V
20 20
0V 0V

Shield

Recommended cable material

A66L-0001-0284#10P (#28AWG 10–pair)
Since IRn and ISn are likely to be reflected by noise,
use pair line at inside

281
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.11.3
Serial Pulse Coder
Interface (Type A)
Serial α pulse coder
Interface
CNC Servo motor
a1/3000
a2/2000 JF1, JF2
Pulse coder
a2/3000 (PCR-EV20MDT)
1 SD 11
1 0V
2 *SD 12 0V 9
2 0V
3 13 10
J32 3 0V
4 14 0V 11
J35 4 SHLD
5 REQ 15 12 SD
5 REQ
6 *REQ 16 0V 13 *SD
6 *REQ
7 +6VA 17 14 +6VA
Connector 7
8 18 +5V 15 +5V
9 +5V 19
FI40–20I5S 8 +5V
Case
10 20 +5V FI–20–CV

Cable wiring J32, J35

JFn Pulse coder
1 12
SD SD
2 13
*SD *SD
5 5
REQ REQ #24
6 6 AWG
*REQ *REQ
7 14
+6VA +6VA

9
+5V
18 8
+5V +5V
20 15
+5V +5V
12 1
0V 0V #20
14 2 AWG
0V 0V
16 3
0V 0V
4
SHLD
Shield (Shield)

NOTE
1 +6A need not be connected when incremnetal pulse coder
is used.
2 Recommended cable material : A66L–0001–0286
(#20AWG x 6 pairs + #24AWG x 3 pairs)
3 For the SD and *SD pair, use a twisted pair as close to the
cable center as possible. When using cable A66L–0001
–0286, use conductors 8 (red) and 8 (black) for SD and *SD.
See Appendix C.

282
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Serial α pulse coder

Interface
α3/3000 to α40/2000,
Servo motor
αC3/2000 to αC22/1500
CNC

JF1, JF2 Pulse coder

(PCR-EV20MDT)
1 SD 11
A SD B C D *SD
2 *SD 12 0V
E F REQ G *REQ H SHLD
3 13
J32 J +5V K +5V L M
4 14 0V J35 N 0V P R +6VA S
5 REQ 15
T 0V
6 *REQ 16 0V
7 +6VA 17
8 18 +5V
9 +5V 19
10 20 +5V Connector FI40–20I5S
Case FI–20–CV

Cable connection J32, J35

JFn Pulse coder

1 A
SD SD
2 D
*SD *SD
5 F
REQ REQ #24
6 G AWG
*REQ *REQ
7 R
+6VA +6VA

9
+5V
18 J
+5V +5V
20 K
+5V +5V
12 #20
0V
14 N AWG
0V 0V
16 T
0V 0V
H
SHLD
Shield (Shield)

NOTE
1 +6VA need not be connected when incremnetal pulse coder
is used.
2 Recommended cable material: A66L–0001–0286
(#20AWG x 6 pairs + #24AWG x 3 pairs)
3 For the SD and *SD pair, use a twisted pair as close to the
cable center as possible. When using cable A66L–0001
–0286, use conductors 8 (red) and 8 (black) for SD and *SD.
See Appendix C.

283
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Cable connection for the The pulse coder cable can be up to 50 m in length. Note, however, that the
pulse coder serial pulse coder uses a 5–VDC power supply. Therefore, it is necessary
to suppress any drop in the power supply voltage due to the cable
resistance. So, the two–way cable resistance (for both the 0 V and 5 V
lines) must not total more than 0.5 ohms.

When A66L–0001–0286 This cable consists of three pairs of signal wires and six power line wires
cable is used (20/0.18, 0.0394 Ω/m).
When three 0 V lines and three 5 V lines are used in this cable, the cable
can be up to 19 m long.

When A66L–0001–0157 This cable, consists of five pairs of signal wires and six power line wires
cable is used (50/0.18, 0.016 Ω/m).
When three 0 V lines and three 5 V lines are used in this cable, the cable
can be up to 46 m long. Because this cable has an outside diameter of 11
mm, it does not fit securely into the cable clamp of connector case
FI–20–CV.
It is therefore necessary to use a larger size connector at a terminal block
or peel off the insulation sheath at the end of the cable to reduce the
diameter so that it fits into the connector.

For example, MR connector manufactured by

Example 1) Honda Communications
Pulse coder
A66L-0001-0157
NC

A66L-0001-0286 Terminal
Example2) block
Pulse coder
A66L-0001-0157
NC

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Enlarged figure

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Peel off the insulation sheath and cover with a heat shrinkable tube

284
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.11.4
Separate Type Pulse
Coder Interface
For absolute detector
CNC
JF21, JF22 Separate type detector
(PCR–EV20MDT)
Pulse coder
1 PCA 11
(MS3102A–22–14P)
2 *PCA 12 0V
3 PCB 13 J33 A PCA B *PCA C PCB D *PCB
4 *PCB 14 0V J36 E PCZ F *PCZ G H
5 PCZ 15 J K L +5V M 0V
6 *PCZ 16 0V N SHLD P R S REQ
7 +6V 17 T +6VA U 0VA V
8 REQ 18 +5V
9 +5V 19
Connector FI40–20I5S
10 20 +5V
Case FI–20–CV

Cable wiring J33, J36

1 A
PCA PCA
2 B
*PCA *PCA
3 C
PCB PCB #24
4 D AWG
*PCB *PCB
5 E
PCZ PCZ
6 F
*PCZ *PCZ
7 T
+6V +6VA
8 S
REQ REQ
9
+5V #20
18 AWG
+5V
20 L
+5V +5V
12 M
0V 0V
14
0V
16 U
0V 0VA
N
SHLD
Shield (Shield)

Recommended cable material

A66L-0001-0286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3–pair)

285
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

For incremental detector

CNC Separate type detector
JF21, JF22 Pulse coder
(PCR–EV20MDT) (MS3102A–20–29P)
1 PCA 11
2 *PCA 12 0V
J33
3 PCB 13 J36 A PCA B PCB C +5V D *PCA
4 *PCB 14 0V E *PCB F PCZ G *PCZ H SHLD
5 PCZ 15 J +5V K +5V L M
6 *PCZ 16 0V N 0V P 0V R S
7 (+6V) 17 T 0V
8 (REQ) 18 +5V
9 +5V 19 Connector FI40–20I5S
10 20 +5V Case FI–20–CV

Cable wiring J33, J36

1 A
PCA PCA
2 D
*PCA *PCA
3 B #24
PCB PCB AWG
4 E
*PCB *PCB
5 F
PCZ PCZ
6 G
*PCZ *PCZ

9 C
+5V +5V
18 J
+5V +5V
20 K #24
+5V +5V AWG
12 N
0V 0V
14 P
0V 0V
16 T
0V 0V
H
SHLD
(Shield)
Shield

Recommended cable material

A66L-0001-0286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3–pair)

286
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Input signal The standard of the feedback signal from the separate type detector is as
requirements shown below.
(1) A and B phase signal input
This is a method to input position information by the mutual 90 degree
phase slip of A and B phase signals.
Detection of the position is performed with the state in which the B phase
is leading taken as a shift in the plus direction, and the state in which the
A phase is leading as a shift in the minus direction.

A phase signal
Shift in plus direction
B phase signal

A phase signal
Shift in minus direction
B phase signal

(2) Phase difference and minimum repeat frequency

A
PCA/*PCA
0.5V
*PCA/PCA
B
PCB/*PCB
0.5V
*PCB/PCB

Td Td Td Td
Tp

(3) Z phase signal input

For the Z phase signal (1 rotation signal), a signal width of more than 1
frequency of the A phase or B phase signals is necessary.

Z phase signal
Tw

Twy 1 frequency of A phase or B phase

287
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Time requirements Requirements for the signals at the input pins of input connectors JF21
and JF22
The signals for these connectors are differential input signals with A and
B phases. An important factor is time Td from point A, when the potential
difference between PCA and *PCA exceeds 0.5V, to point B, when the
potential difference between PCB and *PCB becomes lower than 0.5V.
The minimum value of Td is 0.24 µs. The period and pulse width of the
signals must be long enough to satisfy the above requirements.

Receiver circuit
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS, INC.: SN75115
PCA The same circuit is used
A–phase for B–phase signals
signal 110Ω
(PCB and *PCB) and
*PCA one–rotation signals
(PCZ and *PCZ).
560Ω

5V

288
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.11.5
APC Battery Interface
CNC Battery box
JA14 (M3 terminal)
(PCR-EV20MDT)
J37
+ –
1 11
+6V 0V
2 12
3 0V 13
4 14 Connector
5 15 PCR–E20FA or PCR–E20FS
Case
6 16 PCR–V20LA
7 +6V 17
8 18
9 19
10 20

Cable wiring J37

JA14 Battery case

7 +
+6V +6V
3 –
0V 0V

Shield

Recommended cable material y 0.2mm2 (7/0.18) with shield

NOTE
1 This battery can provide backup for four absolute pulse
coders for one year.
Specifications : A06B–6050–K060 (case)
A06B–6050–K061 (battery)
2 Do not connect lines to any pins other than pins 3 and 7.
3 For type B, the battery is connected to the amplifier.

289
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.11.6 When a single servo amplifier is shared by multiple Power Mates, servo
Sharing a Servo alarm 401 (servo amplifier ready signal OFF) may occur in the cases
explained below.
Amplifier
The servo alarm can be suppressed by setting bit 2 (NOFVY) of parameter
No. 1803 to 1. With this setting, if the system waits for VRDY to be set
to on, ”WAIT” appears on the CRT or DPL unit. In addition, VRDY wait
signal [F209#4] is output.
1) When multiple Power Mates share a single amplifier

Power Mate Power Mate

Servo amplifier

The servo amplifier does not turn on the servo amplifier ready signal until
all the Power Mates have started.
When one Power Mate enters one of the following states, the servo
amplifier turns off the ready signal, causing servo alarm 401 to occur in
the other Power Mates:
D The power is turned off.
D A servo alarm occurs.
D The system enters the emergency stop state.
D The controlled axis detach signal is turned on.
If power–up for one Power Mate is delayed when the Power Mates are
turned on, or if a follow–up operation, performed after power–up,
requires too much time when an absolute pulse coder is being used, servo
alarm 401 also occurs in the other Power Mates.

290
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

2) When a single amplifier is used by a two–path Power Mate–D

2–path Servo amplifier

Power Mate–D

The servo amplifier does not turn on the servo amplifier ready signal until
both paths of the two–path Power Mate–D have been started.
If one path of the Power Mate–D enters one of the following states, the
two–axis servo amplifier turns off the ready signal, causing servo alarm
401 to occur in the other path.
D A servo alarm occurs for one path.
D One path enters the emergency stop state.
D The controlled axis detach signal is turned on for one path.
If a follow–up operation, performed after power–up, requires too much
time when an absolute pulse coder is being used, servo alarm 401 also
occurs in the other path.

291
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.12
CONNECTION TO
THE HANDY
OPERATOR’S PANEL

7.12.1 The handy operator’s panel has machine operator’s panel functions for
Outline teaching operations, as well as DPL/MDI functions for displaying and
setting the Power Mate–D parameters and programs.
The handy operator’s panel can be used with the Power Mate–D. It cannot
be used with the Power Mate–F.

Cabinet Machine Handy operator’s panel

operator’s
panel

Emer-
gency
 
 stop
contact

CRT/MDI
interface

Connection
panel

Connector
Safety relay
panel

Handy operator’s
panel enable
switch
Servo External pow-
amplifier er supply
24 VDC

(1) The machine operator’s panel functions are implemented by Power

Mate–D ladder programs.
(2) The key sheet can be modified to suit the specific needs of the
machine tool builder. So, a dedicated machine operator’s panel can
be produced easily.
(3) No cables are provided with the handy operator’s panel.
(4) The customer is responsible for preparing a connector panel, external
power supply, safety relay, emergency stop contact, and connection
panel.
(5) The customer is responsible for preparing all inter–unit connection
cables.
(6) The CE standard does not allow the handy operator’s panel to be made
detachable by installing a connection panel in the cabinet. (This is
because the CE standard does not allow emergency stop operation to
be bypassed.) In this case, keep the handy operator’s panel connected
at all times.

292
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.12.2 The handy operator’s panel has an emergency stop button and deadman’s
Emergency Stop switches (right side and left side). In any of the following cases, the
emergency stop state is assumed, and the Power Mate–D and servo
amplifier are so notified:
1) When the emergency stop button is pressed
2) When the deadman’s switch enable switch is on, and both of the
deadman’s switches are released
3) When a handy operator’s panel error occurs, disabling normal
communications, while the handy operator’s panel is being used

Notifying the Power The Power Mate–D is notified of an emergency stop by means of
Mate–D of an emergency communication from the handy operator’s panel when the emergency
stop stop state is set with the handy operator’s panel.
When the handy operator’s panel is connected as shown in the figure
below, pressing the DOOR OPEN LIMIT switch or the emergency stop
switch on the machine operator’s panel also places the handy operator’s
panel in the emergency stop state.

Notifying the servo To notify the servo amplifier of an emergency stop, the emergency stop
amplifier of an contact of the handy operator’s panel is connected in series with a separate
emergency stop emergency stop contact such as that of the machine operator’s panel or the
door open limit switch. If any of these contacts is closed, the relay for
emergency stop input to the servo amplifier is activated.

Machine op- Door open limit Handy operator’s

erator’s panel switch, etc. panel

24V
Servo amplifier

Safety Emergency
relay stop input

293
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.12.3 The CE standard does not allow the handy operator’s panel to be made
Connection Allowing detachable by installing a connection panel in the cabinet. This is because
the CE standard does not allow emergency stop operation to be bypassed.
the Handy Operator’s In this case, keep the handy operator’s panel connected at all times.
Panel to be Detached
1) Inter–unit connection

Cabinet
Connection
panel

Connector Power
Handy panel Mate–D
operator’s J118
panel J122 J120
JD14
CRS10
Terminating
24VDC10% Handy operator’s JD15
unit
0.2A panel enable
switch

J135 24 VDC
power
supply

Emergency
J121 J119
stop on ma-
chine opera-
tor’s panel,
etc.
Safety (NOTE 1)
relay

NOTE
1 Safety relay:
This safety relay acts as a contact for emergency stop input to the servo amplifier, and a contact
for the MCC contactor. For details, refer to the ”FANUC Control Motor Amplifier Series Safe
Circuit Conditions and Sample Configurations (A–71429–S13J).”
2 The total length of the cables (J118, J122, and J120) between the handy operator’s panel and
the Power Mate–D must not exceed 50 m.
3 Cables J118, J122, and J135 also serve as a 24 VDC power supply line for the handy operator’s
panel. The 24 VDC power is subject to a voltage drop corresponding to the total resistance of
the 0V and 24V lines. Taking this voltage drop into consideration, determine the cable length
so that 24 VDC +10% is available at connector CRS10 of the handy operator’s panel.
4 Attach a terminating unit (A02B–0166–D003) to connector JD15 of the Power Mate–D. The
CRT terminating unit (A02B–0124–D001) cannot be used.

294
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

The CE standard is not satisfied by this method.

Cabinet
Handy operator’s panel Connection Connector
CRS10 (01) RXD panel panel RXD JD14 (01) Power
Mate–D
CRS10 (02) *RXD *RXD JD14 (02)

CRS10 (03) TXD TXD JD14 (03)

CRS10 (04) *TXD *TXD JD14 (04)

+5V CRS10 (15) ATCH1 ATCH1 JD14 (09)

CRS10 (16) ATCH2 ATCH2 JD14 (20)

0V JD14 (11, 12)

Emergency
stop CRS10 (11) EMGTP *ESP to DI
Deadman’s
switch enable (Separate emergency
switch EMGEN (NOTE2) Emergency Operator’s
CRS10 (13) stop contact such as panel +24V
door open limit switch) stop SB1
Deadman’s switch (right)
SQ1
Deadman’s
switch (left) CRS10 (12) EMGDM (NOTE1)
+24V External power supply
+24V 0V 24VDC
CRS10 (09, 10) +24V SR1 (NOTE 3)
KT1
CRS10 (19, 20) 0V Safety
relay +24V
CRS10 (05) FG Servo amplifier
(Plastic case Shield
with conductive ESP
coating)

NOTE
1 While the switch is off, the handy operator’s panel emergency stop operation is bypassed.
While the switch is on, power is fed to the handy operator’s panel, such that emergency stop
operation is enabled.
2 When the deadman’s switch enable switch is not being used, never make this connection.
Thus, the deadman’s switches are enabled at all times.
3 A separate safety relay is required to act as a contact for emergency stop input to the servo
amplifier, and also as a contact for the MCC contactor. For details, refer to the ”FANUC Control
Motor Amplifier α Series Safe Circuit Conditions and Sample Configurations
(A–71429–S13J).”
4 To attach or detach a handy operator’s panel while the Power Mate–D is turned on, 0V of the
Power Mate–D must be connected to 0V of the handy operator’s panel before any other line.
5 Unless +24 V is supplied to EMGTP (CRS10–11), the handy operator’s panel is placed in the
emergency stop state.

295
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

2) Connection panel
The connection panel can be used to make the handy operator’s panel
detachable from the cabinet.
On the connection panel, install a connector to which the handy
operator’s panel cable can be attached, and also install a switch to
enable/disable the handy operator’s panel.

Handy operator’s panel enable switch

A switch with contact A and contact B is required. contact A is used Example of switch
to feed 24 VDC to the handy operator’s panel, while contact B is CONNECT
used for bypassing handy operator’s panel emergency stop while the
switch is set to DISCONNECT.
DIS–
CONNECT
The CE standard does not allow emergency stop opera-
tion to be bypassed.

Handy operator’s Handy operator’s panel Connector panel

panel enable switch
24V
24 VDC input SR1

Emergency stop

To connector
Connection panel panel relay

(1) While the enable switch is set to DISCONNECT (while the switch is
off)
D The handy operator’s panel does not receive 24 VDC, hence cannot
be used.
D Emergency stop cannot be performed from the handy operator’s
panel.
(2) While the enable switch is set to CONNECT (while the switch is on)
D The handy operator’s panel receives 24 VDC, hence can be used.
D Emergency stop can be performed from the handy operator’s panel.
The emergency stop described above occurs when the emergency stop
button on the handy operator’s panel is pressed, or when the deadman’s
switch enable switch is on and both of the deadman’s switches are
released.

296
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

3) Details of cable J118

Handy operator’s
panel
CRS10

04 03 02 01 Connection panel
(connector panel)
*TXD TXD *RXD RXD J118

10 09 08 07 06 05
Hirose Electric. Co., Ltd.
+24V +24V FG
(1)Soldering type
16 15 14 13 12 11 HR22–12TPD–20S
(housing and
ATCH2 ATCH1 EMGEN EMGDM EMGTP
contact)

20 19 18 17 (2)Crimp type
S Housing
0V 0V HR22–12TPD–20SC
S Contact
HR22–SC–122
S Manual crimping tool
HR22–TA2428HC

FANUC specification
A02B–0211–K381

The following are included:

S HR22–12TPD–20SC x1
S HR22–SC–122 x20

297
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

Handy operator’s panel Connection panel

CRS10 (connector panel)

01
RXD RXD
02
*RXD *RXD
Shielded
#24AWG pair
03
TXD TXD
04
*TXD *TXD
09
+24V +24V
10
+24V +24V
11
EMGTP EMGTP
12
EMGDM EMGDM
13 #24AWG
EMGEN EMGEN
15
ATCH1 ATCH1
16
ATCH2 ATCH2
19
0V 0V
20
0V 0V
05 Drain
FG wire FG
Shield (NOTE 1)

Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0298: Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
(Shielded #24AWG pair x 2, #24AWG x 10, drain wire, external cable diameter: 8.5 mm)

NOTE
1 FG
S Using a drain wire, connect CRS10(05) to the FG terminal of the connector panel.
S Connect the FG terminal on the connector panel to the frame ground. For this connection,
use a twisted–pair cable, 100 to 300 mm long and a cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2.
2 The external diameter of the cable used with connector CRS10 is 8.5 mm. If the external
diameter of the cable is less than 8.5 mm, increase the diameter to 8.5 mm by using
heat–shrinkable tube or taping at the connector joint to ensure a dustproof connection.

298
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

4) Details of cable J120

Connector panel Power Mate–D

JD14 (PCR–EV20MDT)

01 RXD 11 0V

02 *RXD 12 0V
J120
03 TXD 13

04 *TXD 14

HONDA TSUSHIN 05 15
KOGYO CO., LTD.
PCR–E20F 06 16
FANUC specifications 07 17
SSoldering type (with
case) 08 18
A02B–0120–K301
SCrimp type (with case)
09 ATCH1 19
A02B–0120–K302

10 20 ATCH2

Cable connection (J120)

Connector JD14 Power Mate–D
panel 01
RXD RXD
02
*RXD *RXD
Shielded
03
#28AWG pair
TXD TXD
04
*TXD *TXD
09
ATCH1 ATCH1
20
ATCH2 ATCH2
11 #28AWG
0V 0V
12
0V 0V

Shield

Cable clamp
Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs):
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.

299
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

5) Details of cables J119 and J121

Emergency stop on
the machine opera-
tor’s panel To Power Mate–D *ESP input
24V

Connector
J121 panel

(Separate emergen-
cy stop contact such
as the door open
limit switch)

Handy operator’s panel J118

Emergency stop CRS10 (11) EMGTP

Deadman’s switch The deadman’s switches can be en-

enable switch EMGEN abled at all times by not making this
CRS10 (13)
connection.
Deadman’s
switch (right)

Deadman’s
switch (left) CRS10 (12) EMGDM J119

Safety
relay
(NOTE)

NOTE
Safety relay:
This safety relay acts both as a contact for emergency stop input to the servo amplifier, and as
a contact for the MCC contactor. For details, refer to the ”FANUC Control Motor Amplifier α
Series Safe Circuit Conditions and Sample Configurations (A–71429–S13J).”
Enable the safety relay on the handy operator’s panel by connecting the emergency stop
contact of the handy operator’s panel in series with a separate emergency stop contact such
as the emergency stop contact of the machine operator’s panel or the door open limit switch.
With the connection shown above, the safety relay is switched off when:
1) The emergency stop button is pressed, or
2) The deadman’s switch enable switch is on (with the contact open), and both of the
deadman’s switches are released.
So, the contact for emergency stop input to the servo amplifier and the MCC contact are opened
to turn off the power.

300
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

6) Details of cable J122

Connection Connector
panel panel

RXTP RXTP Shielded

#24AWG pair
*RXTP *RXTP

TXTP TXTP Shielded

#24AWG pair
*TXTP *TXTP

#24AWG +24V +24V

#24AWG +24V +24V

EMGEN EMGEN

EMGDM EMGDM
#24AWG

EMGTP EMGTP #24AWG

#24AWG

ATCH1 ATCH1

ATCH2 ATCH2

0V 0V

0V 0V
(NOTE 1) Drain
FG wire (NOTE 2)

Handy operator’s Shield

panel enable switch

EMGTP

EMGDM

+24V

+24V

Recommended cables:
cable A66L–0001–0298 (#24AWG pair x 2, #24AWG x 10), Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
cable #24AWG 5
cable Twisted–pair cable with a cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2 (FG)

NOTE
1 FG on the connection panel:
Connect the FG terminal on the connection panel to the frame ground. For this connection,
use a twisted–pair cable, 100 to 300 mm long and with a cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2.
At this FG terminal, connect the shield of cable J118 to ground.
2 FG on the connector panel:
On the connector panel, connect this FG terminal to the frame ground. For this connection, use
twisted–pair cable, 100 to 300 mm long and with a cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2.
At this FG terminal, connect the shield of cable J122 to ground.

301
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7) Details of cable J135

Connector panel

External power
supply J135

24VDC

Cable connection (J135)

External power Connector panel

supply
24VDC +24V

0V 0V

Power Mate–D
Terminating unit JD15

01
RD B
R 02 Direct resistor connection
RD A

Terminating resistor (Power Mate side) R

For R in the terminating unit, use a 100–ohm 1/2W resistor.

302
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.12.4
Keeping the Handy 1) Inter–unit connection diagram
Operator’s Panel
Connected at All Times

Cabinet

Connector Power
Handy panel
operator’s Mate–D
panel J118 J120
JD14
CRS10

24VDC
10% Terminating JD15

0. 2A unit

J135 24 VDC
power
supply

Emergency stop
on machine op- J121 J119
erator’s panel,
etc.
Safety
relay (NOTE 1)

NOTE
1 The safety relay acts both as a contact for emergency stop input to the servo amplifier, and as
a contact for the MCC contactor. For details, refer to ”FANUC Control Motor Amplifier α Series
Safe Circuit Conditions and Sample Configurations (A–71429–S13J).”
2 The total length of the cables (J118 and J120) between the handy operator’s panel and the
Power Mate–D must not exceed 50 m.
3 Cables J118 and J135 also serve as a 24 VDC power supply line to the handy operator’s panel.
The 24 VDC power is subject to a voltage drop corresponding to the total resistance of the 0V
and 24V lines. Taking this voltage drop into consideration, determine the cable length so that
24 VDC
10% is available at connector CRS10 of the handy operator’s panel.
4 Attach a terminating unit (A02B–0166–D003) to connector JD15 of the Power Mate–D. The
CRT terminating unit (A02B–0124–D001) cannot be used.
5 For details of connecting cables J118 to J121 and J135, see Subsec. 7.10.3.

303
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01


Handy operator’s panel
CRS10 (01) RXD Connector panel RXD JD14 (01) Power
Mate–D
CRS10 (02) *RXD *RXD JD14 (02)

CRS10 (03) TXD TXD JD14 (03)

CRS10 (04) *TXD *TXD JD14 (04)

+5V CRS10 (15) ATCH1 ATCH1 JD14 (09)

CRS10 (16) ATCH2 ATCH2 JD14 (20)

0V JD14 (11, 12)

Emergency
stop CRS10 (11) EMGTP *ESP to DI
Deadman’s
switch en- (Separate emergency
able switch Operator’s panel
CRS10 (13) EMGEN (NOTE 1) stop contact such as the Emergen-SB1 +24V
door open limit switch) cy stop
Deadman’s
switch (right)
SQ1
Deadman’s
switch (left) CRS10 (12) EMGDM
+24V External power supply
+24V
CRS10 (09, 10) +24V 0V 24VDC
(NOTE 2)
CRS10 (19, 20) 0V KT1
Safety
relay +24V
CRS10 (05) FG Servo amplifier
(Plastic case with Shield ESP
conductive coating)

NOTE
1 When the deadman’s switch enable switch is not used, do not make this connection. Thus, the
deadman’s switches are enabled at all times.
2 A separate safety relay is required to act as a contact for emergency stop input to the servo
amplifier, and as a contact for the MCC contactor. For details, refer to ”FANUC Control Motor
Amplifier α Series Safe Circuit Conditions and Sample Configurations (A–71429–S13J).”
3 Unless +24 V is supplied to EMGTP (CRS10–11), the handy operator’s panel is placed in the
emergency stop state.

7.12.5 When using the handy operator’s panel, set the Power Mate–D rotary
Power Mate–D Setting switches as follows:
1) Set RSW to 0.
2) Set MTSW to 3.

304
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.13 The connection unit is used to connect the master units of different
FANUC I/O Link systems, such as the CNC and F–D Mate, with the I/O
FANUC I/O Link Link and transfer the DI/DO signals between the master units.
CONNECT UNIT This does not apply to the Power Mate–F.

System A System B

CNC or Power Power CNC or

F–D Mate supply supply F–D Mate
of +24V of +24V

I/O Link I/O Link

Slave Slave

FANUC I/O Link
connection unit
DI DO

DO DI

I/O Link Master : F–D Mate, Series16, Series15, Power Mate–D/H

I/O Link Slave : I/O unit, Power Mate–D/E/F/H
: FANUC I/O Link

Fig.7.13 System Using the FANUC I/O Link Connection Unit

The I/O data can be sent between the master units of two independent
FANUC I/O Link systems. While a FANUC I/O Link system is turned off,
or stopped for adjustment or maintenance, another FANUC I/O Link
system on the same line can be operated. All the DI data sent from the
stopped system is automatically processed as 0. If normal communication
between two systems is interrupted by a sudden stop of one system, it
takes from several tens to several hundreds of milliseconds to start that
function. During this period, the most recent data before the system stop
is transferred. Take this into account when designing the systems.

305
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

(1) Specifications
Item Description

Function of the I/O Link The I/O Link has two I/O Link interfaces in the slave
mode and transfers the DI/DO data between the in-
terfaces.
[Interfaces]
Electric/optical
Electric/electric Select a desired interface.
Optical/optical

Maximum number of DI/DO DI: 256, DO: 256

signals (The actual number of signals to be used depends
on the signal assignment by the host unit.)

Outside dimensions 180 × 150 × approx. 50mm

W H D
See Appendix A.

Installation method The connection unit is a separate unit. It is installed

in the power magnetics cabinet.
For the installation dimensions, see Appendix A.

Operating environment Temperature : 0°C to 60°C

Relative humidity : 5% to 75% (No condensation is
allowed.)
Vibration : 0.5 G or less

Power supply 24VDC10% 0.2A

Ordering code

Interface Code

Electric/optical interface A20B–2000–0410

Electric/electric interface A20B–2000–0411

Optical/optical interface A20B–2000–0412

306
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

(2) Connection
(a) Example of a connection diagram

AC power input AC power input

External power External power

Master unit supply of +24 V supply of +24 V Master unit
of the I/O of the I/O
Link Link
(1) (1)
JD1A (3) (3) JD1A

Optical I/O
JD1A1 for Link adapter
CP* CP*
Power Mate
Electric Optical
interface interface (2)
JD1B* COPB*

JD1A* COPA*
(2)
(1)
FANUC I/O Link * : 1 or 2 (channel number)
connection unit
(electric/optical interface)
 : Signal cable (electric)
The frame of the FANUC I/O Link connection
(2) : Signal cable (optical)
unit must be connected to a proper ground.
(3) : Power cable

[Connectors of the I/O Link connection unit]

Electric/ Electric/ Optical/

optical interface electric interface optical interface

Connectors of the Connectors of the Connectors of the

I/O Link interface I/O Link interface I/O Link interface

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2

JD1A1 COPA2 JD1A1 JD1A2 COPA1 COPA2

JD1B1 COPB2 JD1B1 JD1B2 COPB1 COPB2

CP1 CP2 CP1 CP2 CP1 CP2

307
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

(b) Signal cable (electric)

JD1A1/JD1A2 JD1B1/JD1B2
11 0V 1 RXB 11 0V 1 RXA
12 0V 2 RXB 12 0V 2 RXA
13 0V 3 TXB 13 0V 3 TXA
14 0V 4 TXB 14 0V 4 TXA
15 0V 5 15 0V 5
16 0V 6 16 0V 6
17 7 17 7
18 8 18 8
19 9 19 9
20 10 20 10

Connect unit JD1A1/JD1A2 Another unit JD1B

or
Another unit JD1A Connect unit JD1B1/JD1B2

RXB (01) (03) TXA

RXB (02) (04) TXA Twisted–pair cable
TXB (03) (01) RXA
TXB (04) (02) RXA
(09) (09)
* (18) (18) * Since the electric interface
(20) (20) of the connection unit does
0V (11) (11) 0V not have +5 V pins, the opti-
0V (12) (12) 0V cal I/O Link adapter cannot
be connected.
0V (13) (13) 0V
To use the optical interface,
0V (14) (14) 0V use a unit equipped with the
0V (15) (15) 0V optical interface.
0V (16) (16) 0V These connections can be
omitted.
Shield
Frame ground (Ground the cable at either end.)
· Connecter on the cable : PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin)
· Cable : A66L–0001–0284#10P or equivalent
· Cable length : Up to 10m

(c) Signal cable (optical)

Code:A66L–6001–0009#XXXX
XXXX indicates a specified cable length. The cable length can
be specified as follows:
1 m: L1R003
10 m: L10R03
100 m: L100R3
Cable length: Up to 200 m
(d) Power cable

CP1/CP2 connector

1 2 3 Connector for Y

Y + 24V 0V (Input)

X + 24V 0V (Output)

308
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

+24 VDC is supplied through the connector for Y. The power can
be supplied from X to the next unit if the power capacity is not
exceeded.
Power must be supplied to both CP1 and CP2.
Connector on the cable
Connector for Y : A63L–0001–0460#3LKY
(AMP(Japan), Ltd.)
Connector for X : A63L–0001–0460#3LKX
(AMP(Japan), Ltd.)
Contact : A63L–0001–0456#BS
(AMP(Japan), Ltd.)
Wire : Vinyl, electric wire, AWG20–16
Wire length : Determine the wire length required to provide the
rated supply voltage at the receiving, taking into
account the voltage drop due to the resistance of
the wire and power fluctuation.
(e) Connecting the frame ground
Connect the frame of this unit to a frame ground (class 3 or
higher), using a wire with a cross–sectional area of 5.5 mm2 or
greater.
An M4 terminal for frame ground is provided.

309
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.14
CONNECTING A
TOUCH PANEL

7.14.1 Touch panels manufactured by Digital Corporation can be connected to

Outline the Power Mate–D.
A touch panel program can read Power Mate–D information such as input
relay, output relay, internal relay, keep relay, data table, timer, and counter
information. Also, a touch panel screen can be created by using the read
information.

7.14.2 The following touch panels, manufactured by Digital Corporation, can be

Supported Touch connected to the Power Mate–D :
Panels (Digital D GP–450E
Corporation) D GP–550T
D GP–550S

7.14.3
Connection

DPL/MDI

Touch panels Power Mate–D

manufactured by
Digital Corporation
SGP–450E
SGP–550T J123 JD14
SIO
SGP–550S (CRT/MDI
interface)

JD15
Terminating unit M4

(1) A touch panel connection module must be installed in the Power

Mate–D. The CRT control module and HSSB connection module
cannot be used together with a touch panel connection module. This
means that, with the Power Mate–D controller for touch panels, the
CRT/MDI unit, separate CRT, PDP, and LCD units, separate MDI
unit, and HSSB cannot be used.
(2) In a system that uses a touch panel, a DPL/MDI unit is also required
for maintenance.
(3) The customer is responsible for preparing cable J123.
(4) The customer is responsible for preparing a terminating unit. The
specification number of the appropriate FANUC unit is
A02B–0166–D003. The CRT terminating unit (A02B–0124–D001)
cannot be used.

310
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.14.4
Power–on Sequence
Power Mate–D power–on

Touch panel power–on

t: Within 254 (in seconds)

Set (t+1) in the touch panel system setting item ”start time.”
No problem arises if the Power Mate–D is turned on earlier than the touch
panel.

7.14.5 The following Power Mate–D address data can be read from the touch
Power Mate–D Data panel:
that Can be Read from D Input address: X0000 to X0127
X1000 to X1063
the Touch Panel D Output address: Y0000 to Y0127
Y1000 to Y1063
D Internal relay: R0000 to R0999
D Keep relay: K0000 to K0019
D Data table: D0000 to D1859
D Timer: T0000 to T0079
D Counter: C0000 to C0079

311
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.14.6
Details of Cable J123
and the Terminating
Unit

Touch panel Power Mate–D

SIO (D–SUB 25–pin: Female) JD14 (PCR–EV20MDT)

Connector:DBM–25P
(male)
01 Lock metal: DB– C2– J9 01 RD B 11 0V
14 (Japan Aviation
02 Electronics Indus 02 RD A 12
15 SD B try, Ltd.)
03 03 SD B 13
16 RD B
04 04 SD A 14
17 J123
05 05 15
18 CS B
06 06 16
19 ER B PCR–E20F
07 SG (HONDA TSUSHIN 07 17
20 KOGYO CO., LTD.)
08 08 18
21 CS A
09 TRMX 09 19
22 ER A
10 RD A 10 20
23
11 SD A
24 JD15 (PCR–EV20MDT)
12
25 01 RD B 11
13
PCR–E20F
(HONDA TSUSHIN 02 RD A 12
KOGYO CO., LTD.)
03 13

04 14
Terminating 05 15
unit
06 16

07 17

08 18

09 19

10 20

312
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Cable J123 Power Mate–D

JD14
Touch panel
SIO
15 01
SD B RD B
11 02
SD A RD A
16 03 #28AWG
RD B SD B twisted pair
10 04
RD A SD A
07 11
SG 0V #28AWG
09 Shield
TRMX
18
CS B
19
#28AWG ER B
21
CS A
22
ER A

Power Mate–D
Terminating unit JD15

01
RD B
R 02 Direct resistor connection
RD A

1) Recommended cable:
KA66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG x 10 pairs, shielded): Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
#28AWG
2) Terminating resistor (Power Mate side) R
For R in the terminating unit, use a 100–ohm 1/2W resistor.

313
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62833EN/01

7.15
HIGH–SPEED SERIAL
BUS INTERFACE

7.15.1 The Power Mate–D can be connected, via the FANUC high–speed serial
Outline bus (referred to as the HSSB), to a FANUC intelligent terminal or
commercially available personal computer.

1) Connection to a FANUC intelligent terminal

Power Mate–D FANUC

intelligent terminal

HSSB (optical fiber cable)

HSSB
adaptor

2) Connection to a commercially available personal computer

Commercially available
personal computer
Power Mate–D
High–speed serial
bus interface
board

HSSB (optical fiber cable)

HSSB
adaptor

(1) Install an HSSB adaptor at the bottom of the Power Mate–D.

(2) The optical fiber cable must be separately purchased from FANUC.
(3) For details of the FANUC intelligent terminal, the commercially
available personal computer connected via the HSSB, and the
high–speed serial bus interface board installed in the personal
computer, refer to the relevant manuals.

314
B–62833EN/01 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.15.2
Connection

Power Mate–D

M4
Optical fiber cable

M4A FANUC intelligent

HSSB terminal or com-
COP7 COP7 mercially available
adaptor
personal computer
M4

DPL/MDI

(1) An HSSB adaptor is to be directly connected to connector M4 at the

bottom of the Power Mate–D unit.
(2) An optical fiber cable is to be connected to optical connector COP7
on the HSSB adaptor. Optical fiber cables of the following lengths
are available from FANUC:
5m : A66L–6001–0021#L5R003
20m: A66L–6001–0021#L20R03
50m: A66L–6001–0022#L50R03
(3) A DPL/MDI unit can be connected to connector M4B of the HSSB
adaptor.

7.15.3
Supplement (1) An HSSB module must be installed in the Power Mate–D.
(2) An HSSB adaptor must be attached to the Power Mate–D. After
connecting an HSSB adaptor, tighten the screw locks. Sufficient
space for installing the HSSB adaptor, as well as for maintenance,
must be provided.
(3) When an HSSB module is used, the CRT control module and touch
panel connection module cannot be used. This means that the CRT,
PDP, and LCD units, detachable LCD unit, touch panel
(manufactured by Digital Corporation), and handy operator’s panel
cannot be used.
(4) The version of the base printed circuit board of the Power Mate–D
must be 04C or later.
(5) For details of the version of the basic functions of the Power Mate–D
that are compatible with the HSSB, contact FANUC.

315
II PMC INTERFACE
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 1. ADDRESS LIST

1 ADDRESS LIST

Address of interface signals between Power Mate and PLC.

G000 or X000 or
later later
Power Mate PMC MT

F000 or Y000 or
later later

319
1. ADDRESS LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

1.1
Power Mate–D FOR
1–PATH CONTROL

MT ³ PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X000 SKIP *RILK *DEC1 *ESP SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2

X001 *DEC2

These addresses are applicable when an external input/output card and the
MODEL–A input/output are used. Ehen a built–in input/output card is
used., addresses X1000 to X1001 are used. When the built–in
input/output card, external input/output card, and the MODEL A
input/output unit are all being used, data is entered via the built–in
input/output card.

320
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 1. ADDRESS LIST

PMC ³ CNC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G004 FIN

G005 AFL TFIN SFIN MFIN

G006 OVC *ABSM

G007 RLSOT *FLWU ST

G008 ERS RRW *SP *ESP *IT

G009 PN7 PN6 PN5 PN4 PN3 PN2 PN1 PN0

G010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0

G011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8

G012 *FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0

G014 ROV2 ROV1

G018 HS2B HS2A HS1B HS1A

G019 RT MP2 MP1

G029 *SSTP SOR SAR

G030 SOV7 SOV6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV0

G032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I

G033 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I

G041 HS2IB HS2IA HS1IB HS1IA

G043 ZRN DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1

G044 MLK BDT1

G045 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2

G046 DRN KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 SBK

G053 UNIT

G054 UI7 UI6 UI5 UI4 UI3 UI2 UI1 UI0

G055 UI15 UI14 UI13 UI12 UI11 UI10 UI9 UI8

G058 EXWT EXSTP EXRD

321
1. ADDRESS LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

PMC ³ CNC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G061 RGTAP

G066 EPCON IGNVRY

G070 MRDY ORCM SFR SRV CTH1 CTH2 TLMH TLML

G071 RCH RSL SOCN *ESPS ARST

G072 DEFMOD NRRO ROTA INDX

G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00

G079 SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08

G100 +J2 +J1

G102 –J2 –J1

G106 MI2 MI1

G110 +LM2 +LM1

G112 –LM2 –LM1

G124 DTCH2 DTCH1

G126 SVF2 SVF1

G130 *IT2 *IT1

G132 +MIT2 +MIT1

G134 –MIT2 –MIT1

G136 EAX2 EAX1

G142 EBUFA ECLRA ESTPA ESOFA ESBKA EFINA

G143 EMSBKA EC6A EC5A EC4A EC3A EC2A EC1A EC0A

G144 EIF7A EIF6A EIF5A EIF4A EIF3A EIF2A EIF1A EIF0A

G145 EIF15A EIF14A EIF13A EIF12A EIF11A EIF10A EIF9A EIF8A

G146 EID7A EID6A EID5A EID4A EID3A EID2A EID1A EID0A

G147 EID15A EID14A EID13A EID12A EID11A EID10A EID9A EID8A

G148 EID23A EID22A EID21A EID20A EID19A EID18A EID17A EID16A

G149 EID31A EID30A EID29A EID28A EID27A EID26A EID25A EID24A

322
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 1. ADDRESS LIST

PMC ³ CNC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G150 DRNE RTE OVCE ROV2E ROV1E

G151 *FV7E *FV6E *FV5E *FV4E *FV3E *FV2E *FV1E *FV0E

G154 EBUFB ECLRB ESTPB ESOFB ESBKB EFINB

G155 EMSBKB EC6B EC5B EC4B EC3B EC2B EC1B EC0B

G156 EIF7B EIF6B EIF5B EIF4B EIF3B EIF2B EIF1B EIF0B

G157 EIF15B EIF14B EIF13B EIF12B EIF11B EIF10B EIF9B EIF8B

G158 EID7B EID6B EID5B EID4B EID3B EID2B EID1B EID0B

G159 EID15B EID14B EID13B EID12B EID11B EID10B EID9B EID8B

G160 EID23B EID22B EID21B EID20B EID19B EID18B EID17B EID16B

G161 EID31B EID30B EID29B EID28B EID27B EID26B EID25B EID24B

G204 LED08 LED07 LED06 LED05 LED04 LED03 LED02 LED01

G205 LED09

G212 SKIPP ZPEXT1 GST ZR1 RTN31 RTN21 RTN11

G213 ACT ZPEXT2 ZR2 RTN32 RTN22 RTN12

G214 RTNT CTCHK WFN4 WFN3 WFN2 WFN1

G216 TRQ2E TRQ1E

G217 TRQ17 TRQ16 TRQ15 TRQ14 TRQ13 TRQ12 TRQ11 TRQ10

G218 TRQ27 TRQ26 TRQ25 TRQ24 TRQ23 TRQ22 TRQ21 TRQ20

G219 PALM PAL6 PAL5 PAL4 PAL3 PAL2 PAL1 PAL0

G251 EDGN EPARM EVAR EPRG IOLNK

G252 EDG07 EDG06 EDG05 EDG04 EDG03 EDG02 EDG01 EDG00

G253 EDG15 EDG14 EDG13 EDG12 EDG11 EDG10 EDG09 EDG08

G254 EDN07 EDN06 EDN05 EDN04 EDN03 EDN02 EDN01 EDN00

G255 EDN15 EDN14 EDN13 EDN12 EDN11 EDN10 EDN09 EDN08

323
1. ADDRESS LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

CNC ³ PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F000 OP SA STL SPL RWD

F001 MA TAP ENB DEN BAL RST AL

F002 CUT CSS

F003 MTCHIN MEDT MAUT MRMT MMDI MJ MH

F004 MZRN

F007 TF SF MF

F009 DM00 DM01 DM02 DM30

F010 M07 M06 M05 M04 M03 M02 M01 M00

F011 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08

F012 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16

F013 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24

F022 S07 S06 S05 S04 S03 S02 S01 S00

F023 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S09 S08

F024 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16

F025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24

F026 T07 T06 T05 T04 T03 T02 T01 T00

F027 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T09 T08

F028 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16

F029 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24

F034 GR3O GR2O GR1O

F036 R08O R07O R06O R05O R04O R03O R02O R01O

F037 R12O R11O R10O R09O

F045 ORAR TLM LDT2 LDT1 SARS SDT SST ALMS

F046 RCFN RCHP

F053 BGEACT RPALM RPBSY

324
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 1. ADDRESS LIST

CNC ³ PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F054 UO7 UO6 UO5 UO4 UO3 UO2 UO1 UO0

F055 UO15 UO14 UO13 UO12 UO11 UO10 UO9 UO8

F056 UO107 UO106 UO105 UO104 UO103 UO102 UO101 UO100

F057 UO115 UO114 UO113 UO112 UO111 UO110 UO109 UO108

F058 UO123 UO122 UO121 UO120 UO119 UO118 UO117 UO116

F059 UO131 UO130 UO129 UO128 UO127 UO126 UO125 UO124

F065 RGSPM RGSPP

F070 PSW08 PSW07 PSW06 PSW05 PSW04 PSW03 PSW02 PSW01

F071 PSW10 PSW09

F072 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0

F073 ZRNO MD4O MD2O MD1O

F075 *SPO KEYO DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO

F076 ROV2O ROV1O MP2O MP1O

F077 RTO HS1BO HS1AO

F078 *FV7O *FV6O *FV5O *FV4O *FV3O *FV2O *FV1O *FV0O

F079 *JV7O *JV6O *JV5O *JV4O *JV3O *JV2O *JV1O *JV0O

F080 *JV15O *JV14O *JV13O *JV12O *JV11O *JV10O *JV9O *JV8O

F081 –J2O +J2O –J1O +J1O

F094 ZP2 ZP1

F096 ZP22 ZP21

F098 ZP32 ZP31

F104 INP2 INP1

F106 MVD2 MVD1

F110 MDTCH2 MDTCH1

F120 ZRF2 ZRF1

F129 *EAXSL EOV0

325
1. ADDRESS LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

CNC ³ PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F130 EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EDENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA

F131 EMFA

F132 EM28A EM24A EM22A EM21A EM18A EM14A EM12A EM11A

F133 EBSYB EOTNB EOTPB EGENB EDENB EIALB ECKZB EINPB

F134 EMFB

F135 EM28B EM24B EM22B EM21B EM18B EM14B EM12B EM11B

F168 SW8 SW7 SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1

F169 SW16 SW15 M–OPE SW13 SW12 SW11 SW10 SW 9

F170 SW24 SW23 SW22 SW21 SW20 SW19 SW18 SW17

F171 SW32 SW31 SW30 SW29 SW28 SW27 SW26 SW25

F172 SW40 SW39 SW38 SW37 SW36 SW35 SW34 SW33

F173 SW48 SW47 SW46 SW45 SW44 SW43 SW42 SW41

F174 SW56 SW55 SW54 SW53 SW52 SW51 SW50 SW49

F175 SW61 SW60 SW59 SW58 SW57

F180 CLRCH1 CLRCH0

F206 AD07 AD06

F207 AD15 AD14 AD13 AD12 AD11 AD10 AD09 AD08

F208 SVER2 IPL2 SUP2 SVER1 IPL1 SUP1

F209 CTOPN RTPT WVRDY WAT4 WAT3 WAT2 WAT1

F210 K7 K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1 K0

F211 KCAN KEOB KSLH KNO KPRD KMNS K9 K8

F212 KRED KWRT KINP KDLT KINS KALT

F213 KALM KPRM KVAR KPRG KPOS

F214 KH KQ KP KUP KDWN

F217 KX KR KG KN KO

F218 KSHRP KT KS KM KF

326
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 1. ADDRESS LIST

CNC ³ PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F250 ALSV ALOH ALOT ALPS ALPS3 ALPS2 ALPS1

F251 ALPS4 ALSPD ALAPC

F252 APBL1 APBV1 APBZ1 APPS1 APPE1 APFE1 APOV1 APCM1

F253 APBL2 APBV2 APBZ2 APPS2 APPE2 APFE2 APOV2 APCM2

F254 DPL2 DPL1 DPL0

327
1. ADDRESS LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

1.2
Power Mate–D FOR
2–PATH CONTROL

MT ³ PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X000 SKIP#1 *RILK#1 *DEC#1 *ESP#1 SKIP4#1 SKIP3#1 SKIP2#1

X001 SKIP#2 *RILK#2 *DEC#2 *ESP#2 SKIP4#2 SKIP3#2 SKIP2#2

THese addresses are applicable when an external input/output card and

the MODEL A input/output unit are used. When a built–in input/output
card is used, addresses X1000 to X1001 are used. When the built–in
input/output card, external input/output card, and the MODEL A
input/output unit are all being used, data is entered via the built–in
input/output card.
The G/F address or path 2 is obtained by adding 1000 to the addresses of
path 1.
(Example) ST#1 G007#2 ST#2 G1007#2

328
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 1. ADDRESS LIST

PMC ³ CNC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G004 FIN

G005 AFL TFIN SFIN MFIN

G006 OVC *ABSM

G007 RLSOT *FLWU ST

G008 ERS RRW *SP *ESP *IT

G009 PN7 PN6 PN5 PN4 PN3 PN2 PN1 PN0

G010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0

G011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8

G012 *FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0

G014 ROV2 ROV1

G018 HS1A

G019 RT MP2 MP1

G029 *SSTP SOR SAR

G030 SOV7 SOV6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV0

G032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I

G033 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I

G043 ZRN MD4 MD2 MD1

G044 MLK BDT1

G045 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2

G046 DRN KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 SBK

G053 UNIT

G054 UI7 UI6 UI5 UI4 UI3 UI2 UI1 UI0

G055 UI15 UI14 UI13 UI12 UI11 UI10 UI9 UI8

G058 EXWT EXSTP EXRD

329
1. ADDRESS LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

PMC ³ CNC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G061 RGTAP

G066 EPCON IGNVRY

G070 MRDY ORCM SFR SRV CTH1 CTH2 TLMH TLML

G071 RCH RSL SOCN *ESPS ARST

G072 DEFMOD NRRO ROTA INDX

G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00

G079 SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08

G100 +J1

G102 –J1

G106 MI1

G110 +LM1

G112 –LM1

G124 DTCH1

G126 SVF1

G130 *IT1

G132 +MIT1

G134 –MIT1

G204 LED08 LED07 LED06 LED05 LED04 LED03 LED02 LED01

G205 LED09

G212 SKIPP ZPEXT1 GST ZR1 RTN31 RTN21 RTN11

G213 ACT

G214 RTNT CTCHK

G215 PATHS

G216 TRQ1E

G217 TRQ17 TRQ16 TRQ15 TRQ14 TRQ13 TRQ12 TRQ11 TRQ10

G219 PALM PAL6 PAL5 PAL4 PAL3 PAL2 PAL1 PAL0

330
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 1. ADDRESS LIST

PMC ³ CNC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G251 EDGN EPARM EVAR EPRG IOLNK

G252 EDG07 EDG06 EDG05 EDG04 EDG03 EDG02 EDG01 EDG00

G253 EDG15 EDG14 EDG13 EDG12 EDG11 EDG10 EDG09 EDG08

G254 EDN07 EDN06 EDN05 EDN04 EDN03 EDN02 EDN01 EDN00

G255 EDN15 EDN14 EDN13 EDN12 EDN11 EDN10 EDN09 EDN08

331
1. ADDRESS LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

CNC ³ PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F000 OP SA STL SPL RWD

F001 MA TAP ENB DEN BAL RST AL

F002 CUT CSS

F003 MTCHIN MEDT MAUT MMDI MJ MH

F004 MZRN

F007 TF SF MF

F009 DM00 DM01 DM02 DM30

F010 M07 M06 M05 M04 M03 M02 M01 M00

F011 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08

F012 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16

F013 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24

F022 S07 S06 S05 S04 S03 S02 S01 S00

F023 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S09 S08

F024 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16

F025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24

F026 T07 T06 T05 T04 T03 T02 T01 T00

F027 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T09 T08

F028 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16

F029 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24

F034 GR3O GR2O GR1O

F036 R08O R07O R06O R05O R04O R03O R02O R01O

F037 R12O R11O R10O R09O

F045 ORAR TLM LDT2 LDT1 SARS SDT SST ALMS

F046 RCFN RCHP

F053 BGEACT RPALM RPBSY

332
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 1. ADDRESS LIST

CNC ³ PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F054 UO7 UO6 UO5 UO4 UO3 UO2 UO1 UO0

F055 UO15 UO14 UO13 UO12 UO11 UO10 UO09 UO08

F056 UO107 UO106 UO105 UO104 UO103 UO102 UO101 UO100

F057 UO115 UO114 UO113 UO112 UO111 UO110 UO109 UO108

F058 UO123 UO122 UO121 UO120 UO119 UO118 UO117 UO116

F059 UO131 UO130 UO129 UO128 UO127 UO126 UO125 UO124

F065 RGSPM RGSPP

F072 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0

F073 ZRNO MD4O MD2O MD1O

F075 *SPO KEYO DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO

F076 ROV2O ROV1O MP2O MP1O

F077 RTO HS1AO

F078 *FV7O *FV6O *FV5O *FV4O *FV3O *FV2O *FV1O *FV0O

F079 *JV7O *JV6O *JV5O *JV4O *JV3O *JV2O *JV1O *JV0O

F080 *JV15O *JV14O *JV13O *JV12O *JV11O *JV10O *JV9O *JV8O

F081 –J1O +J1O

F094 ZP1

F096 ZP21

F098 ZP31

F104 INP1

F106 MVD1

F110 MDTCH1

F120 ZRF1

F168 SW8 SW7 SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1

F169 SW16 SW15 M–OPE SW13 SW12 SW11 SW10 SW 9

F170 SW24 SW23 SW22 SW21 SW20 SW19 SW18 SW17

333
1. ADDRESS LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

CNC ³ PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F171 SW32 SW31 SW30 SW29 SW28 SW27 SW26 SW25

F172 SW40 SW39 SW38 SW37 SW36 SW35 SW34 SW33

F173 SW48 SW47 SW46 SW45 SW44 SW43 SW42 SW41

F174 SW56 SW55 SW54 SW53 SW52 SW51 SW50 SW49

F175 SW61 SW60 SW59 SW58 SW57

F180 CLRCH0

F208 SVER1 IPL1 SUP1

F209 CTOPN RTPT WVRDY

F210 K7 K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1 K0

F211 KCAN KEOB KSLH KNO KPRD KMNS K9 K8

F212 KRED KWRT KINP KDLT KINS KALT

F213 KALM KPRM KVAR KPRG KPOS

F214 KH KQ KP KUP KDWN

F217 KX KR KG KN KO

F218 KSHRP KT KS KM KF

F250 ALSV ALOH ALOT ALPS ALPS3 ALPS2 ALPS1

F251 ALPS4 ALSPD ALAPC

F252 APBL1 APBV1 APBZ1 APPS1 APPE1 APFE1 APOV1 APCM1

F254 PATHO DPL2 DPL1 DPL0

334
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 1. ADDRESS LIST

1.3
Power Mate–F
MT ³ PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1000 SKIP *RILK *DEC *ESP SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2

335
1. ADDRESS LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

PMC ³ CNC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G004 FIN

G005 AFL TFIN SFIN MFIN

G006 OVC *ABSM

G007 RLSOT *FLWU ST

G008 ERS RRW *SP *ESP *IT

G009 PN7 PN6 PN5 PN4 PPN3 PN2 PN1 PN0

G010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0

G011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8

G012 *FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0

G014 ROV2 ROV1

G018 HS1A

G019 RT MP2 MP1

G029 *SSTP SOR SAR

G030 SOV7 SOV6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV0

G032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I

G033 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I

G041 HS1IA

G043 ZRN DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1

G044 MLK BDT1

G045 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2

G046 DRN KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 SBK

G053

G054 UI7 UI6 UI5 UI4 UI3 UI2 UI1 UI0

G055 UI15 UI14 UI13 UI12 UI11 UI10 UI9 UI8

G058 EXWT EXSTP EXRD

336
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 1. ADDRESS LIST

PMC ³ CNC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G061 RGTAP

G066 EPCON IGNVRY

G070 MRDY ORCM SFR SRV CTH1 CTH2 TLMH TLML

G071 RCH RSL SOCN *ESPS ARST

G072 DEFMOD NRRO ROTA INDX

G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00

G079 SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08

G100 +J1

G102 –J1

G106 MI1

G110 +LM1

G112 –LM1

G124 DTCH1

G126 SVF1

G130 *IT1

G132 *MIT1

G134 –MIT1

G136 EAX1

G142 EBUFA ECLRA ESTPA ESOFA ESBKA EFINA

G143 EMSBKA EC6A EC5A EC4A EC3A EC2A EC1A EC0A

G144 EIF7A EIF6A EIF5A EIF4A EIF3A EIF2A EIF1A EIF0A

G145 EIF15A EIF14A EIF13A EIF12A EIF11A EIF10A EIF9A EIF8A

G146 EID7A EID6A EID5A EID4A EID3A EID2A EID1A EID0A

G147 EID15A EID14A EID13A EID12A EID11A EID10A EID9A EID8A

G148 EID23A EID22A EID21A EID20A EID19A EID18A EID17A EID16A

G149 EID31A EID30A EID29A EID28A EID27A EID26A EID25A EID24A

337
1. ADDRESS LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

PMC ³ CNC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G150 DRNE RTE OVCE ROV2E ROV1E

G151 *FV7E *FV6E *FV5E *FV4E *FV3E *FV2E *FV1E *FV0E

G212 SKIPP ZPEXT1 GST ZR1 RTN31 RTN21 RTN11

G213 ACT

G214 RTNT CTCHK WFN4 WFN3 WFN2 WFN1

G216 TRQ1E

G217 TRQ17 TRQ16 TRQ15 TRQ14 TRQ13 TRQ12 TRQ11 TRQ10

G219 PALM PAL6 PAL5 PAL4 PAL3 PAL2 PAL1 PAL0

G250 DPOSV DPOSM

G251 EDGN EPARM EVAR EPRG IOLNK

G252 EDG07 EDG06 EDG05 EDG04 EDG03 EDG02 EDG01 EDG00

G253 EDG15 EDG14 EDG13 EDG12 EDG11 EDG10 EDG09 EDG08

G254 EDN07 EDN06 EDN05 EDN04 EDN03 EDN02 EDN01 EDN00

G255 EDN15 EDN14 EDN13 EDN12 EDN11 EDN10 EDN09 EDN08

338
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 1. ADDRESS LIST

CNC ³ PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F000 OP SA STL SPL RWD

F001 MA TAP ENB DEN BAL RST AL

F002 CUT

F003 MTCHIN MEDT MAUT MRMT MMDI MJ MH

F004 MZRN

F007 TF SF MF

F009 DM00 DM01 DM02 DM30

F010 M07 M06 M05 M04 M03 M02 M01 M00

F011 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08

F012 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16

F013 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24

F022 S07 S06 S05 S04 S03 S02 S01 S00

F023 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S09 S08

F024 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16

F025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24

F026 T07 T06 T05 T04 T03 T02 T01 T00

F027 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T09 T08

F028 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16

F029 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24

F034 GR3O GR2O GR1O

F036 R08O R07O R06O R05O R04O R03O R02O R01O

F037 R12O R11O R10O R09O

F045 ORAR TLM LDT2 LDT1 SARS SDT SST ALMS

F046 RCFN RCHP

F053 BGEACT RPALM RPBSY

339
1. ADDRESS LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

CNC ³ PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F054 UO7 UO6 UO5 UO4 UO3 UO2 UO1 UO0

F055 UO15 UO14 UO13 UO12 UO11 UO10 UO9 UO8

F056 UO107 UO106 UO105 UO104 UO103 UO102 UO101 UO100

F057 UO115 UO114 UO113 UO112 UO111 UO110 UO109 UO108

F058 UO123 UO122 UO121 UO120 UO119 UO118 UO117 UO116

F059 UO131 UO130 UO129 UO128 UO127 UO126 UO125 UO124

F065 RGSPM RGSPP

F070 PSW08 PSW07 PSW06 PSW05 PSW04 PSW03 PSW02 PSW01

F071 PSW10 PSW09

F094 ZP1

F096 ZP21

F098 ZP31

F104 INP1

F106 MVD1

F110 MDTCH1

F120 ZRF1

F129 *EAXSL EOV0

F130 EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EDENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA

F131 EMFA

F132 EM28A EM24A EM22A EM21A EM18A EM14A EM12A EM11A

F180 CLRCH0

F208 SVER1 IPL1 SUP1

F209 CTOPN RTPT WVRDY WAT4 WAT3 WAT2 WAT1

F210 K7 K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1 K0

F211 KCAN KEOB KSLH KNO KPRD KMNS K9 K8

F212 KRED KWRT KINP KDLT KINS KALT

340
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 1. ADDRESS LIST

CNC ³ PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F213 KALM KPRM KVAR KPRG KPOS

F214 KH KQ KP KUP KDWN

F217 KX KR KG KN KO

F218 KSHRP KT KS KM KF

F250 ALSV ALOH ALOT ALPS ALPS3 ALPS2 ALPS1

F251 ALPS4 ALSPD ALAPC

F252 APBL1 APBV1 APBZ1 APPS1 APPE1 APFE1 APOV1 APCM1

F254 DPL2 DPL1 DPL0

341
2. SIGNAL LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

2 SIGNAL LIST

342
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 2. SIGNAL LIST

2.1
I/O SIGNAL LIST
(ORDER OF GROUP)
NOTE
The following symbols indicate whether each function in the
following table is usable with the 1–path Power Mate–D,
2–path Power Mate–D, and Power Mate–F.
f : The function can be used.
l : The function can be used with an axis of each path of
the Power Mate–D, and with the first axis of the Power
Mate–F.

: The function cannot be used.

Signal
direction
1–path 2–path Refer
Group Signal name Symbol (address) CNC CNC PM–F
PM–D PM–D ence
↓ ↑
PMC PMC
:1 CNC ready signal MA (F001#7) f f f f 3.1
Servo ready signal SA (F000#6) f f f f 3.2
:2 Emergency stop signal :ESP (G008#4, X000#4, f f f f 4.1
X1000#4)
External reset signal ERS (G008#7) f f f f 4.2
Reset & rewind signal RRW (G008#6) f f f f 4.3
:3 Alarm signal AL (F001#0) f f f f 5.1
Battery alarm signal BAL (F001#2) f f f f 5.2
Reset signal RST (F001#1) f f f f 5.3
Rewinding signal RWD (F000#0) f f f f 5.4
Moving direction signals MVD1 (F106#0), MVD2 f f l l 5.5
(F106#1)
In–position signals INP1 (F104#0), INP2 f f l l 5.6
(F104#1)
Alarm classification signals ALPS1 to ALPS3, ALPS , f f f f 5.7
ALOT, ALOH, ALSV, ALAPC,
ALSPD, ALPS4 (F250#0 to
#6, F251#0 to #2)
APC alarm type signals APCM1, APOV1, APFE1, f f l l 5.8
APPE1, APPS1, APBZ1,
APBV1, APBL1APCM2,
APOV2, APFE2, APPE2,
APPS2, APBZ2, APBV2,
APBL2 (F252, F253)
Dispaly of alarms from PMC PALM, PAL0 to PAL6 f f f f 5.9
(G219)
Axis status signals SUP1, IPL1, SUP2, IPL2 f f l l 5.10
(F208#1, #2, #5, #6)
Tapping signal TAP (F001#5) f f f f 5.11

343
2. SIGNAL LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

Signal
direction
1–path 2–path Refer
Group Signal name Symbol (address) CNC CNC PM–F
PM–D PM–D ence
↓ ↑
PMC PMC
:4 Mode select signal MD1 (G043#0), MD2 f f f f 6.1
(G043#1), MD4 (G043#2)
DNC operation signal DNCI (G043#5) f f × f 6.2
Manual data input (MDI) MMDI (F003#3) f f f f 6.3
check signal
Automatic operation (AUTO) M
(F003#5) f f f f 6.3
check signal
Tape command (RMT) MRMT (F003#4) f f × f 6.3
check signal
Memory edit (EDIT) check MEDT (F003#6) f f f f 6.3
signal
Manual handle step feed MH (F003#1) f f f f 6.3
(HANDLE/STEP) check sig-
nal
Jog feed (JOG) check signal MJ (F003#2) f f f f 6.3
Manual reference position M  (F004#) f f f f 6.3
return check signal
TEACH IN JOG STEP MTCHIN (F003#7), MJ f f f f 6.3
check signal (F003#2)
TEACH IN  check MTCHIN (F003#7), MH f f f f 6.3
signal (F003#1)
:5 Feed axis direction select +J1, +J2 (G100#0, #1), –J1, f f l l 7.1
signal –J2 (G102#0, #1)
Manual feedrate override :JV0  :JV15 (G010 f f f f 7.2
signal ,G011)
Manual rapid traverse select RT (G019#7) f f f f 7.3
signal
Rapid traverse override sig- ROV1 (G014#0), ROV2 f f f f 7.4
nal (G014#1)
Manual absolute signal :ABSM (G006#2) f f f f 7.5
Return signal RTN11, RTN21, RTN31 f f l l 7.6
(G212#0  #2) , RTN12,
RTN22, RTN32 (G213#0 
#2)
:6 Interlock signal :IT(G008#0), :RILK f f f f 8.1
(X000#6, x1000#6)
Each axis interlock signal :IT1,  :IT2 (G130#0, #1) f f l l 8.2
Interlock signal for each axis +MIT1, +MIT2 (G132#0, f f l l 8.3
and direction #1), –MIT1, –MIT2 (G134#0,
#1)
:7 Manual handle feed axis se- HS1A, HS1B, HS2A, HS2B f f l l 9.1
lect signal (G018#0, #1, #4, #5)
Incremental feed signal MP1, MP2 (G019#4, #5) f f f f 9.2

344
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 2. SIGNAL LIST

Signal
direction
1–path 2–path Refer
Group Signal name Symbol (address) CNC CNC PM–F
PM–D PM–D ence
↓ ↑
PMC PMC
:8 Manual reference position ZRN (G043#7) f f f f 10.1
return selection signal
Reference position return :DEC1, :DEC2 (X000#5, f l l 10.1
deceleration signal X001#5)
Reference position return ZP1, ZP2 (F094#0, #1) f f l l 10.1
end signal
2nd reference position re- ZP21, ZP22 (F096#0, #1) f f l l 10.2
turn end signa
3rd reference position return ZP31, ZP32 (F098#0, #1) f f l l 10.2
end signal
Reference position estab- ZRF1, ZRF2 (F120#0, #1) f f l l 10.3
lishment signal
Dogless reference position ZR1 (G212#4), ZR2 f f l l 10.4
setting signal (G213#4)
ZP1, ZP2 (F094#0, #1) f

External reference position ZPEXT1, 2 (G212#6, f f l l 10.5

setting signal G213#6)
Current limit arrival signal CLRCH0, 1 (F180#, #1) f f l l 10.6
:9 Memory protection key KEY1, KEY2, KEY3, KEY4 f f f f 11
(G046#3  #6)
:10 Cycle start signal ST (G007#2) f f f f 12.1
Feed hold signal :SP (G008#5) f f f f 12.2
Cycle start lamp signal STL (F000#5) f f f f 12.3
Feed hold lamp signal SPL (F000#4) f f f f 12.4
Automatic operation signal OP (F000#7) f f f f 12.5
Workpiece number search PN0  PN7 (G009) f f f f 12.6
signal
Machine lock signal MLK (G044#1) f f f f 12.7
Single block signal SBK (G046#1) f f f f 12.8
Dry run signal DRN (G046#7) f f f f 12.9
Feedrate override signal :FV0  :FV7 (G012) f f f f 12.10
Override cancel signal OVC (G006#4) f f f f 12.11
Optional block skip signal BDT1 (G044#0) , BDT2  f f f f 12.12
BDT9 (G045)
Mirror image signal MI1, M12 (G106#0, #1) f f l l 12.13
:11 Axis select signal for handle HS1IA, HS1IB, HS2IA, f f × l 13
interrupt HS2IB (G041#0, #1, #4, #5)
:12 Signal under cutting CUT (F02#6) f f f f 14
:13 Screen status signal DPL0, DPL1, DPL2 (F254#0 f f f f 15
 #2)

345
2. SIGNAL LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

Signal
direction
1–path 2–path Refer
Group Signal name Symbol (address) CNC CNC PM–F
PM–D PM–D ence
↓ ↑
PMC PMC
:14 M code output end signal MF (F007#0) f f f f 16.1
M function code signal M00 to M31 (F010 to F013), f f f f f 16.1
MF (F007#0), FIN (G004#3)
Distribution end signal DEN (F001#3) f f f f 16.2
M decode signals DM00, DM01, DM02, DM30 f f f f 16.3
(F009#4 to #7)
Auxiliary function lock signal AFL (G005#6) f f f f 16.4
Waiting complete signal WFN1 to WFN4 (F214#0 to f f × f 16.5
(waiting function) #3)
WAT1 to WAT4 (G209#0 to f f × f 16.5
#3)
Simultaneous block start M821 to M827 f × × 16.6
:15 High-speed M/S/T interface MFIN (G005#0), SFIN f f f f 17
signal (G005#2), TFIN (G005#3)
:16 Key data reference function K0, K1, K2, K3, K4, K5, K6, f f f f 18
by PMC K7, K8, K9, KMNS, KPRD,
KNO, KSLH, KEOB, KCAN,
KALT, KINS, KDLT, KINP,
KWRT, KRED, KPOS,
KPRG, KVAR, KPRM,
KALM, KDWN, KUP, KP,
KQ, KH, KO, KN, KG, KR,
KX, KF, KM, KS, KT,
KSHRP (F210 to F218)
:17 Spindle function code signal S00 to S31 (F022 to F025) f f f f 19.1
Spindle function strobe sig- SF (F007#2) f f f f 19.1
nal
Gear selection signal GR3O, GR2O, GR1O f f f f 19.1
(F034#0 to #2)
Spindle enable signal ENB (F001#4) f f f f 19.1
Spindle gear shift signal GST (G212#5) f f f f 19.1
Spindle speed arrival signal SAR (G029#4) f f f f 19.2
Spindle stop signal :SSTP (G029#6) f f f f 19.3
Spindle orientation signal SOR (G029#5) f f f f 19.4
Spindle speed override sig- SOV0 to SOV7 (G030#0 to f f f f 19.5
nal #7)

346
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 2. SIGNAL LIST

Signal
direction
1–path 2–path Refer
Group Signal name Symbol (address) CNC CNC PM–F
PM–D PM–D ence
↓ ↑
PMC PMC
:17 Serial spindle control :SSTP (G029#5), MRDY f f f f 19.6
(G070#7), ORCM (G070#6),
SFR (G070#5), SRV
(G070#4), CTH1 (G070#3),
CTH2 (G070#2), TLMH
(G070#1), TLML (G070#0),
RCH (G071#7), RSL
(G071#6), SOCN (G071#4),
:ESPS (G071#1), ARST

(G071#0), NRRO (G072#2),

ROTA (G072#1), INDX
(G072#0), SHA00-SHA11
(G078, 79)
Serial spindle control ORAR (F045#7), TLM f f f f 19.6
(F045#6), LDT2 (F045#5),
LDT1 (F045#4), SARS
(F045#3), SDT (F045#2),
SST (F045#1), ALMS
(F045#0), RCFN (F046#3),
RCHP (F046#2)
Constant speed signal CSS (F002#2) f f f × 19.7
:18 Control of spindle speed SIND (G033#7), SSIN f f f f 20
command by PMC (G033#6), SGN (G033#5),
R01I to R12I (G032, G033),
R01O to R12O (F036,
F037)
:19 Tool function code signal T00 to T31 (F026 to F029) f f f f 21
Tool function strobe signal TF (F007#3) f f f f 21
:20 Software limit external set- +LM1, +LM2 (G110#0, #1), f f l l 22
ting signal –LM1, –LM2 (G112#0, #1),
RLSOT (G007#7)
:21 Skip signal SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3, SKIP4 f f f f 23
(X000#0, #1, #2, #7), SKIPP
(G212#7)
:22 Servo off signal SVF1, SVF2 (G126#0, #1) f f l l 24.1
Follow–up signal :FLWU (G007#5) f f f f 24.2
Servo position deviation SVER1, SVER2 (F208#3, f f l l 24.3
monitor signal #7)
:23 I/O device external control EXRD (G058#1), EXSTP f f f f 25
function (G058#2), EXWT (G058#3),
EPRG (G251#4), EVAR
(G251#5), EPARM
(G251#6), EDGN (G251#7),
EDG0 to EDG15 (G252,
G253), EDN0 to EDN15
(G254, G255)
RPBSY (F053#2), RPALM f
(F053#3), BGEACT
(F053#4)

347
2. SIGNAL LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

Signal
direction
1–path 2–path Refer
Group Signal name Symbol (address) CNC CNC PM–F
PM–D PM–D ence
↓ ↑
PMC PMC
:24 External pulse input/output EPCON (G066#6), f f × f 26
signal
:25 FANUC I/O Link function SDI00 to SDI63 (X1020 to ), f f f f 27
Data translation function IOLNK (G251#0)
SDO00 to SDO63 (Y1020 to)
:26 Software operator’s panel MD1O, MD2O, MD4O f f f × 28
signal (F073#0 to #2), 2RNO
(F073#4), BDTO(F075#2),
SBKO (F075#3),
MLKO(F075#4), DRNO
(F075#5), KEYO(F075#6),
:SPO (F075#7), MPIO

(F076#0), MP2O (F076#1),

ROV1O (F076#4), ROV2O
(F076#5), HSIAO (F077#0),
HSIBO (F077#1), RTO
(F077#6), :FV0O to :FV7O
(F078), :JV0O to :JV15O
(F079, 80), +JnO, -JnO
(F081)
Software operator’s panel OUT0 to OUT7 (F072#0 to f f f × 28
general purpose switch sig- #7)
nal
:27 Custom macro input signal UI0 to UI15 (G054, G055), f f f f 29.1
UO0 to UO131 (F054 to f
F059)
Custom macro interrupt sig- UINT (G053#3) f f f f 29.2
nal
:28 Rigid tapping signal RGTAP (G061#0), S00 to f f f f 30.1
S31 (F022 to F025), ENB f
(F001#4), GR1O to GR3O
(F034#0 to #2), RGSPP
(F065#0), RGSPM (F065#1)
Differential rigid tap signal DEFMOD (G072#3) f f f f 30.2
Rigid tapping return signal RTNT (G214#7) f f f f 30.3
RTPT (F209#5) f

Rigid tapping conrrespond- CTCHK (G214#5), CTOPN f f f f 30.4

ing to chaser tool (F209#7) f

:29 Temporary interrupt detec- ACT (G213#7) f f f f 31

tion signal
:30 Axis control command sig- EC0A to EC6A (G143#0 to f f × f 32
nal #6), EC0B to EC6B
(G155#0 to #6)
Axis control command com- EBUFA (G142#7), EBUFB f
pleted signal (G154#7)

348
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 2. SIGNAL LIST

Signal
direction
1–path 2–path Refer
Group Signal name Symbol (address) CNC CNC PM–F
PM–D PM–D ence
↓ ↑
PMC PMC
:30 Axis control command read EBSYA (F130#7), EBSYB f f × f 32
signal (F133#7)
Reset signal ECLRA (G142#6), ECLRB f
(G154#6)
Axis control stop signal ESTPA (G142#5), ESTPB f
(G154#5)
Servo off signal ESOFA (G142#4), ESOFB f
(G154#4)
Block stop signal ESBKA (G142#3), ESBKB f
(G154#3)
Block stop inhibit signal EMSBKA (G143#7), f
EMSBKB (G155#7)
Miscellaneous BCD code EM11A  EM28A (F132), f
EM11B  EM28B (F135)
Miscellaneous function read EMFA (F131#0), EMFB f
signal (F134#0)
Miscellaneous function com- EFINA (G142#0), EFINB f
plete signal (G154#0)
Feedrate EIF0A  EIF15A (G144, f
G145), EIF0B  EIF15B
(G156, G157)
Axis move distance, Dwell EID0A  EID31A (G146  f
time , Auxiliary function G149), EID0B  EID31B
code (G158  G161)
In–positioning signal EINPA (F130#0), EINPB f
(F133#0)
Error zero checking signal ECKZA (F130#1), ECKZB f
(F133#1)
Alarm signal EIALA (F130#2), EIALB f
(F133#2)
Axis moving signal EGENA (F130#4), EGENB f
(F133#4)
Miscellaneous function EDENA (F130#3), EDENB f
executing signal (F133#3)
Overtravel in negative direc- EOTNA (F130#6), EOTNB f
tion signal (F133#6)
Overtravel in positive direc- EOTPA (F130#5), EOTPB f
tion signal (F133#5)
Controlled axis selection EAX1 (G136#0), EAX2 f
signal (G136#1)
Controled axis select state :EAXSL (F129#7) f
signal
Override signal :FV0E  :FV7E(G151) f

Override cancel signal VCE(G150#5) f

349
2. SIGNAL LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

Signal
direction
1–path 2–path Refer
Group Signal name Symbol (address) CNC CNC PM–F
PM–D PM–D ence
↓ ↑
PMC PMC
:30 Rapid traverse override sig- ROV1E, ROV2E (G150#0, f f × f 32
nal #1)
Dry run signal DRNE (G150#7) f

Manual rapid traverse signal RTE (G150#6) f

Override 0 signal EOV0 (F129#5) f

:31 Torque limit enable signal TRQ1E, TRQ2E (G216#0, f f l l 33.4

#1)
Torque limit signal TRQ10 to TRQ17, TRQ20 f f l l 33.4
to TRQ27 (G217, G218)
:32 Analog input signal AD06 to AD15(F206#6 to f f × × 34
F207)
:33 Position switch signal PSW01 to PSW10 (F070#0 f f × f 35
to F071#1)
:34 Speed control servo alarm IGNVRY (G66.0) f f f f 36
ignored signal
:35 Dual position feedback f f f 37
:36 Controlled axis detach sig- DTCH1, DTCH2 (G124#0 to f f l l 38
nal G124#1)
Controlled axis detaching MDTCH1, MDTCH2 f f l l 38
signal (F110#0 to F110#1)
:37 Speed change signal EXFn (X000#0, #1, #2, f f f 39
X011#4, #5) (X1000#0, #1,
#2)
:38 V–READY waiting signal WVRDY (F209#4) f f f f 40
:39 Handy operator’s panel sig- SW1 to SW13, MODE, f f f × 41
nal SW15 to SW61 (F168 to
175)
LED01 to LED09 (G204 to f
205)
:40 Position display unit select DPOSM (G250#6), DPOSV f × × f 42
signal (G250#7)
:41 Path switch signal PATHS (G215#0) f × f × 43.1
Displaying path check sig- PATHO (F254#7) f × f × 43.2
nal

350
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 2. SIGNAL LIST

2.2
I/O SIGNAL LIST
(ORDER OF
SYMBOL)
Symbol Signal name PMC address

:ABSM Manual absolute signal G006#2

ACT Temporary interrupt detection signal G213#7

AD06 to AD15 Analog input signal F206 to F207

AFL Auxiliary function lock signal G005#6

AL CNC alarm signal F001#0

ALAPC APC alarm signal (alarm classification signal) F251#0

ALOH Overheat alarm signal (alarm classification signal) F250#5

ALOT Over travel alarm signal (alarm classification signal) F250#4

ALPS P/S alarm signal (alarm classification signal) F250#3

ALPS1 P/S alarm 100 signal (alarm classification signal) F250#0

ALPS2 P/S alarm 000 signal (alarm classification signal) F250#1

ALPS3 P/S alarm 101 signal (alarm classification signal) F250#2

ALPS4 PS alarm 5000–5999 signal (alarm classification signal) F251#2

ALSPD Spindle alarm signal (alarm classification signal) F251#1

ALSV Servo alarm signal (alarm classification signal) F250#6

APBL1, APBL2 APC battery LOW alarm 2 signal (APC alarm type signal) F252#7, F253#7

APBV1, APBV2 APC battery LOW alarm 1 signal (APC alarm type signal) F252#6, F253#6

APBZ1, APBZ2 APC battery zero alarm signal (APC alarm type signal) F252#5, F253#5

APCM1, APCM2 APC communication error signal (APC alarm type signal) F252#0, F253#0

APFE1, APFE2 APC framing error signal (APC alarm type signal) F252#2, F253#2

APOV1, APOV2 APC over time error signal (APC alarm type signal) F252#1, F253#1

APPE1, APPE2 APC parity error signal (APC alarm type signal) F252#3, F253#3

APPS1, APPS2 APC pulse miss error signal (APC alarm type signal) F252#4, F253#4

ARST Alarm reset signal G071#0

BAL Battery alarm signal F001#2

BDT1, BDT2 to BDT9 Optional block skip signal G044#0, G045

BDTO Optional block skip (software operator’s panel) F075#2

BGEACT Background editing signal F053#4

CLRCH1, CLRCH2 Current limit arrival signal F180#0, #1

351
2. SIGNAL LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

Symbol Signal name PMC address

CSS Constant speed signal F002#2

CTCHK Chaser status check signal G214#5

CTH1,CTH2 Gear select signal(serial spindle) G070#3, #2

CTOPN Chaser open signal F209#7

CUT Signal under cutting F002#6

:DEC1, :DEC2 Reference position return deceleration signal X000#5, X001#5

DEFMOD Differential rigid tap signal G072#3

DEN Distribution end signal F001#3

DM00, DM01, DM02, M decode signals F009#4 to #7

DM30

DNCI DNC operation signal G043#5

DPL0 to DPL2 Screen status signal F254#0 to #2

DPOSV, DPOSM Position display unit select signal G250#6, #7

DRN Dry run signal G046#7

DRNE Dry run signal (Axis control by PMC) G150#7

DRNO Dry run signal (software operator’s panel) F075#5

DTCH1,2 Controlled axis detach signal G124#0, #1

EAX1, EAX2 Controlled axis selection signal (Axis control by PMC) G136#0, #1
:EAXSL Controled axis select state signal F129#7

EBSYA, EBSYB Axis control command read signal (Axis control by PMC) F130#7, F133#7

EBUFA, EBUFB Axis control command completed signal (Axis control by PMC) G142#7, G154#7

EC0A to EC6A, Axis control command signal (Axis control by PMC) G143#0 to #6,
EC0B to EC6B G155#0 to #6

ECKZA, ECKZB Error zero checking signal (Axis control by PMC) F130#1, F133#1

ECLRA, ECLRB Reset signal (Axis control by PMC) G142#6,G154#6

EDENA, EDENB Miscellaneous function executing signal (Axis control by PMC) F130#3, F133#3

EDG00 to EDG15 External punch start number signal (I/O device external control func- G252, G253
tion)

EDGN Diagnose selection signal (I/O device external control function) G251#7

EDN00 to EDN15 Signal of external punch total number (I/O device external control G254, G255
function)

EFINA, EFINB Miscellaneous function complete signal (Axis control by PMC) G142#0, G154#0

EGENA, EGENB Axis moving signal (Axis control by PMC) F130#4, F133#4

352
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 2. SIGNAL LIST

Symbol Signal name PMC address

EIALA, EIALB Alarm signal (Axis control by PMC) F130#2, F133#2

EID0A to EID31A, Axis move distance, Dwell time , Auxiliary function code (Axis control G146 to G149, G158 to
EID0B to EID31B by PMC) G161

EIF0A to EIF15A, Feedrate (Axis control by PMC) G144, G145,G156,

EIF0B to EIF15B G157

EINPA, EINPB In–positioning signal (Axis control by PMC) F130#0, F133#0

EM11A to EM28A, Miscellaneous BCD code (Axis control by PMC) F132, F135
EM11B to EM28B

EMFA, EMFB Miscellaneous function read signal (Axis control by PMC) F131#0, F134#0

EMSBKA, EMSBKB Block stop inhibit signal (Axis control by PMC) G143#7, G155#7

ENB Spindle enable signal F001#4

EOTNA, EOTNB Overtravel in negative direction signal (Axis control by PMC) F130#6, F133#6

EOTPA, EOTPB Overtravel in positive direction signal (Axis control by PMC) F130#5, F133#5

EOV0 Override 0 signal (Axis control by PMC) F129#5

EPARM Parameter selection signal (I/O device external control function) G251#6

EPCON External pulse input/output signal G066#6

ERS External reset signal G008#7

ESBKA, ESBKB Block stop signal (Axis control by PMC) G142#3, G154#3

ESOFA, ESOFB Servo off signal (Axis control by PMC) G142#4, G154#4
:ESP Emergency stop signal G008#4, X000#4
:ESPS Emergency stop signal (serial spindle) G071#1

ESTPA, ESTPB Axis control stop signal (Axis control by PMC) G142#5, G154#5

EVAR Variable selection signal (I/O device external control function) G251#5

EXF1 to 5 Speed change signal X000#0, #1, #2,

X011#4,
#5,
X1000#0, #1, #2

EXPRG Program selection signal (I/O device external control function) G251#4

EXRD External read start signal G058#1

EXSTP External read/punch stop signal G058#2

EXWT External punch start signal G058#3

FIN End signal G004#3

:FLWU Follow–up signal G007#5

:FV0 to :FV7 Feedrate override signal G012

353
2. SIGNAL LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

Symbol Signal name PMC address

:FV0E to :FV7E Override signal (Axis control by PMC) G151

:FV0O to :FV7O Feedrate override signal (software operator’s panel) F078

GR1O, GR2O, GR3O Gear selection signal F034#0 to #2

GST Spindle gear shift signal G212#5

HS1A, HS1B, HS2A, Manual handle feed axis select signal G018#0, #1, #4, #5
HS2B

HS1AO, HS1BO Manual handle feed axis select signal (software operator’s panel) F077#0, #1

HS1IA, HS1IB, HS2IA, Axis select signal for handle interrupt G041#0, #1, #4, #5
HS2IB

IGNVRY Speed control servo alarm ignored signal G066#0

INDX Orientation stop position change command (serial spindle control) G072#0

INP1, INP2 In–position signal F104#0, #1

IOLNK FANUC I/O LINK signal G251#0

IPL1, IPL2 Distribution signal (axis status signal) F208#2, #6

:IT Interlock signal G008#0
:IT1, :IT2 Each axis interlock signal G130#0, #1

+J1, +J2, –J1, –J2 Feed axis direction select signal G100#0, #1,
G102#0, #1

+J1O, –J1O, +J2O, Manual feed F081#0 to #3

–J2O
:JV0 to :JV15 Manual feedrate override signal G010, G011
:JV0O to :JV15O Jog feedrate setting signal F079, F080

K0 to K9, KMNS, Key data reference function by PMC F210 to F218

KPRD, KNO, KSLH,
KEOB, KCAN, KALT,
KINS, KDLT, KINP,
KWRT, KRED, KPOS,
KPRG, KVAR, KPRM,
KALM, KDWN, KUP,
KP, KQ, KH, KO, KN,
KG, KR, KX, KF, KM,
KS, KT, KSHRP

KEY1, KEY2, KEY3, Memory protection key G046#3 to #6

KEY4

KEYO Program protect signal (software operator’s panel) F075#6

354
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 2. SIGNAL LIST

Symbol Signal name PMC address

LDT1 Load detection signal 1 F045#4

LDT2 Load detection signal 2 F045#5

LED01 to 09 Handy operator’s panel signal G204 to G205

+ LM1, +LM2, Software limit external setting signal G110#0, #1, G112#0,
–LM1, –LM2 #1

M00 to M31 M function code signal F010 to F013

M2RN Manual reference position return check F004#5

MA Ready signal F001#7

MAUT Automatic operation (AUTO) check signal F003#5

MD1 ,MD2, MD4 Mode select signal G043#0 to #2

MD1O ,MD2O, MD4O Software operator’s panel signal F073#0, F073#1,

F073#2

MDTCH0, 1 Controlled axis detaching signal F110#0, #1

MEDT Memory edit (EDIT) check signal F003#6

MF M code output end signal F007#0

MFIN M function end signal G005#0

MH Manual handle step feed (HANDLE/STEP) check signal F004#1

MI1, MI2 Mirror image signal G106#0, #1

+MIT1, +MIT2, Interlock signal for each axis and direction G132#0, #1, G134#0,
–MIT1, –MIT2 #1

MJ Jog feed (JOG) check signal F003#2

MLK Machine lock signal G044#1

MLKO Machine lock signal (software operator’s panel) F075#4

MMDI Manual data input (MDI) check signal F003#3

MP1, MP2 Incremental feed signal G019#4, #5

MP1O, MP2O Incremental feed signal (software operator’s panel) F076#0, #1

MRDY Ready signal (serial spindle) G070#7

MRMT Tape command (RMT) check signal F004#4

MTCHIN TEACH IN JOG STEP check signal F003#7

MVD1, MVD2 Moving direction signals F106#0, #1

NRRO Short path control command at change of orientation stop position G072#2
(serial spindle control)

OP Automatic operation signal F000#7

355
2. SIGNAL LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

Symbol Signal name PMC address

ORAR Spindle orientation completion signal F045#7

ORCM Orientation command signal G070#6

OUT0 to OUT7 Software operator’s panel general purpose switch signal F072

OVC Override cancel signal G006#4

OVCE Override cancel signal (Axis control by PMC) G150#5

PAL0 to PAL6 Alarm number specification signal (Display of alarms from PMC) G219#0 to #6

PALM PMC alarm generation selection signal (Display of alarms from PMC) G219#7

PATHO Displaying path check signal F254#7

PATHS Path switch signal G215#0

PN0 to PN7 Workpiece number search signal G009

PSW01 to 10 Position switch signal F070 to 71

R01I to R12I Spindle speed binary signal input G032, G033#0 to #3

R01O to R12O Spindle speed binary signal output F036, F037#0 to #3

RCFN Exit switch completion signal F046#3

RCH Power line state confirmation signal (serieal) G071#7

RCHP Exit switch signal F046#2

RGSPM Spindle rotationdirection signal (minus) F065#1

RGSPP Spindle rotationdirection signal (plus) F065#0

RGTAP Rigid tapping signal G061#0

:RILK High–speed interlock signal X000#6

RLSOT Software limit external setting signal G007#7

ROTA Rotation direction command at change of orientation stop position G072#1

(serial spindle control)

ROV1, ROV2 Rapid traverse override signal G014#0, #1

ROV1E, ROV2E Rapid traverse override signal (axis control by PMC) G150#0, #1

ROV1O, ROV2O Rapid traverse override signal (software operator’s panel) F076#4, #5

RPALM Read/punch alarm signal F053#3

RPBSY Reading/punching signal F053#2

RRW Reset & rewind signal G008#6

RSL Output change request signal (serial) G071#6

RST CNC reset signal F001#1

RT Manual rapid traverse select signal G019#7

RTE Manual rapid traverse signal (axis control by PMC) G150#6

356
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 2. SIGNAL LIST

Symbol Signal name PMC address

RTN11 to RTN31 Return signal G212#0 to #2

RTN12 to RTN32 Return signal G213#0 to #2

RTNT Rigid tapping return signal G214#7

RTO Manual rapid traverse signal (software operator’s panel) F077#6

RTPT Rigid tapping return signal F209#5

RWD Rewinding signal F000#0

S00 to S31 Spindle function code signal F022 to F025

SA Servo ready signal F000#6

SAR Spindle speed arrival signal G029#4

SARS Speed arrival signal F045#3

SBK Single block signal G046#1

SBKO Single block signal (software operator’s panel) F075#3

SDT Speed detection signal F045#2

SF Spindle function strobe signal F007#2

SFIN S function end signal G005#2

SFR Spindle CW command signal G070#5

SGN Spindle polarity select signal G033#5

SHA00 to 11 Spindle orientation external stop position command signal G078#0 to G079#3

SIND Spindle analog voltage control signal G033#7

SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3, Skip signal X000#7, #0, #1, #2

SKIP4

SKIPP Skip signal from PMC G212#7

SOCN Soft start/stop cancel signal (serial) G071#4

SOR Spindle orientation signal G029#5

SOV0 to SOV7 Spindle speed override signal G030

:SP Feed hold signal G008#5
:SPO Feed hold signal (software operator’s panel) F075#7

SPL Feed hold lamp signal F000#4

SRV Spindle CCW command signal G070#4

SSIN Spindle polarity control select signal G033#6

SST Speed detection 0 signal F045#1

:SSTP Spindle stop signal G029#6

ST Cycle start signal G007#2

357
2. SIGNAL LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

Symbol Signal name PMC address

STL Cycle start lamp signal F000#5

SUP1, SUP2 Acceleration/deceleration signal (axis motion status signal) F208#1, #5

SVER1, SVER2 Servo position deviation monitor signal F208#3, #7

SVF1, SVF2 Servo off signal G126#0, #1

SW1 to 61 Handy operator’s panel signal F168 to F175

T00 to T31 Tool function code signal F026 to F029

TAP Tapping signal F001#5

TF Tool function strobe signal F007#3

TFIN T function end signal G005#3

TLM Torque limiting signal F045#6

TLMH High–speed torque limit signal G070#1

TLML Low–speed torque limit signal G070#0

TRQ10 to TRQ17 Torque limit signal G217#0 to #7

TRQ1E, TRQ2E Torque limit enable signal G216#0, #1

TRQ20 to TRQ27 Torque limit signal G218#0 to #7

UI0 to UI15 Custom macro input signal G054, G055

UINT Custom macro interrupt signal G053#3

UO0 to UO15 Custom macro output signal F054, F055, F056 to

UO100 to UO131 F059

WAT1 to WAT4 Waiting signal (waiting function) F209#0 to #3

WFN1 to WFN4 Waiting complete signal (waiting function) G214#0 to #3

WVRDY V–READY waiting signal F209#4

ZP1, ZP2 Reference position return end signal F094#0, #1

ZP21, ZP22 2nd reference position return end signal F096#0, #1

ZP31, ZP32 3rd reference position return end signal F098#0, #1

ZPEXT1, 2 External reference position setting signal G212#6, G213#6

ZR1, ZR2 Dogless reference position setting signal G212#4, G213#4

ZRF1, ZRF2 Reference position establishment signal F120#0, #1

ZRN Manual reference position return selection signal G043#7

ZRNO Reference position return signal (software operator’s panel) F073#4

358
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 3. READY SIGNALS

3 READY SIGNALS

359
3. READY SIGNALS PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

3.1 When power is applied to the Power Mate, this signal MA turns to “1”.
CNC READY SIGNAL
(OUTPUT)
MA<F001#7>

3.2 When the servo system becomes operative, the servo ready signal SA
turns to “1”. For axes that must be braked on the machine side, the brake
SERVO READY should not be released until this signal is sent.
SIGNAL (OUTPUT) Fig. 3.2 shows the time chart of this signal.
SA <F000#6>

Power on Power off

CNC ready MA
signal MA 60 - 100msec
SA
Servo ready
signal

Brake ON
Servo alarm Servo alarm

(Overload)
Reset
Reset Emergency stop
1 - 2 sec Approx. 1 sec

Fig.3.2 Servo Ready Signal Time Chart

360
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 4. RESET & EMERGENCY STOP

4 RESET & EMERGENCY STOP

361
4. RESET & EMERGENCY STOP PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

4.1 When the emergency stop signal *ESP turns to “0”, the emergency stop
is applied to the machine and the Power Mate is reset. This signal is
EMERGENCY STOP controlled by the B contacts of a pushbutton switch. The emergency stop
SIGNAL (INPUT) *ESP signal turns the servo ready signal (SA[3.2]) to “0”.
<X000#4, X1000#4, Overtravel detection by this Power Mate is handled by the software limit
G008#4> function, and a limit switch for normal overtravel detection is not needed.
To prevent the machine from moving beyond the software limit through
servo feedback error, always install a stroke end limit switch (shown in
Fig. 4.1 below).
When the 2–path Power Mate–D is being used, X001#4, X1001#4, and
G1008#4 are used for emergency stop signal input for the second path.

Power Mate
Emergency stop limit switch
Emergency stop
+n –X +X
24V
24V

Emergency stop temporary release

*ESP
*ESP

Fig.4.1 Connection of Emergency Stop Circuit

Refer to AC Servo Motor DESCRIPTIONS for the distance

Reference
AC SERVO MOTOR series DESCRIPTIONS B–65002E
AC SERVO MOTOR α series DESCRIPTIONS B–65142E

362
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 4. RESET & EMERGENCY STOP

WARNING
Software limit setting point and operating point of limit switch
for emergency stop
This means that the rapid traverse rate set with parameter
No. 1420 can cause the point at which motion actually stops
to exceed the software limit setting by up to R/7,500 (mm).
R (mm)
7,500
R : Rapid traverse rate (mm/min)
The actual stopping point may exceed the position set by a
parameter(No.1420) by as much as R/7500 (mm). Set the
limit switch for emergency stop including the allowance for
the above value.

Software limit setting point

Stroke end direction

ÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄ
R
7,500

The machine stops

ÄÄÄÄÄ
Set the limit switch for emergency
in this range. stop in this range.

NOTE
If an emergency stop is performed for only one path of the
2–path Power Mate–D, the VREADY off alarm is issued for
the other path. Setting bit 2 (NOFVY) of parameter No. 1803
can prevent this problem from occurring.

363
4. RESET & EMERGENCY STOP PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

4.2 The Power Mate can be reset by turning the external reset signal ERS to
“1”. The reset signal RST[5.3] turns to “1” at the same time. When an
EXTERNAL RESET M[16.1], S[19.1], or T[21] function is being executed, MF[16.1],
SIGNAL (INPUT) ERS SF[19.1], or TF[21] signal is reset within 100 msec after the external reset
<G008#7> signal is input.

4.3
RESET & REWIND Function Resets the Power Mate and rewinds the input device being used
for the selected automatic operation.
SIGNAL (INPUT) RRW
Operation
<G008#6>
The Power Mate operates as follows when signal RRW turns to
“1”.
i) The moving control axis decelerates to a stop.
ii) After stopping, the CNC is reset and the reset signal RST
[5.3] turns to “1”.
iii) While the reset operation takes place, the selected main
program is rewound the rewind signal turns to “1” and
rewinding begins. (Only at AUTO mode).
iv) Neither automatic nor manual operaitons are conducted
while the RRW signal is set to “1”.
Usage Normaly, Power Mate is reset by M30 (End of tape). To rewind
the program at the same time, set this signal to l with using M30
decode signal.

364
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 5. STATUS SIGNALS

5 STATUS SIGNALS

365
5. STATUS SIGNALS PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

5.1 When an alarm is triggered in the Power Mate, an alarm message is

displayed on the CRT/PDP/LCD/DPL and the alarm signal AL turns to
ALARM SIGNAL “1”. When the cause of the alarm is corrected and the Power Mate is reset,
(OUTPUT) AL the alarm state of Power Mate is cleared and the AL signal turns to “0”.
<F001#0> The followings are alarm states:
(a) TH alarm
(b) TV alarm
(c) P/S alarm
(d) Overtravel alarm
(e) Overheat alarm
(f) Servo alarm

5.2 If the battery voltage to hold a program in memory during power

interruption is lower than the specified value, this signal turns to “1”. The
BATTERY ALARM Power Mate informs the PMC of the battery alarm (BAL = 1). Generally,
SIGNAL (OUTPUT) a lamp is used to indicate the alarm in order to alert the operator. (When
BAL <F001#2> using a unit that has no indicator, such as a CRT or DPL, a lamp must be
provided to act as an indicator.)

5.3 The CNC reset signal RST turns to “1” for any of the following reasons:
RESET SIGNAL (1) While RESET button on the CRT/MDI panel or separate MDI panel
is being pressed.
(OUTPUT) RST
(2) While the external reset signal ERS[4.2] turns to “1”.
<F001#1>
(3) While the emergency stop signal *ESP[4.1] turns to “0”.
(4) While reset & rewind signal RRW [4.3] turns to “1”.
The machine tool operator can activate this signal to allow it to reset on
the ladder.
The RST signal output time is extended to prevent the PMC from failing
to read a signal. The extention time can be set in units of 16 msec using
parameter No. 3017. The RST signal output time is obtained by:
(Reset processing time)+(parameter value) 16 msec.

Reset ON

Reset
Processing

RST signal

Reset PRSTCT 16m sec

( PRSTCT : Parameter No.3017 )

NOTE
Reset processing time requires at least 16 msec. This time
will be longer on optional configurations.

366
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 5. STATUS SIGNALS

5.4 Function Indicates that the Power Mate is executing the rewinding
operation.
REWINDING SIGNAL
Output conditions
(OUTPUT) RWD
The signal turns to “1” when the reset & rewind signal
<F000#0> RRW[4.3] has turned to “1”.
However, if can be modified by setting parameter RWM (No.
3001#2) to “0” so that this signal is not output.
The signal turns to “0” when more than 100 msec has passed
after the signal has turned to “1” in reset & rewind signal
RRW[4.3].

NOTE
The rewinding time required for a main program in memory
is nearly zero. Rewinding of the main program has ended
when the rewinding signal has turned to “0”.

5.5 Function These signals indicate the movement direction of control axis.
They are provided for each control axis, and the number in the
MOVING DIRECTION signal name corresponds to the control axis number.
SIGNALS MVDn MVD n The moving direction of the nth axis is minus.
<F106#0, #1> (n : 1 or 2)
Output conditions
“1” indicates the corresponding axes are moving in the minus
direction, and “0” indicates they are moving in the plus
direction.

NOTE
1 These signals are output in both automatic and manual
operations.
2 These signals maintain their existing condition during a
stop, indicating the direction of the axes’ movement before
being stopped.

367
5. STATUS SIGNALS PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

5.6 Function These signals indicate that the control axes are set to the
in-position condition.
IN-POSITION They are provided for each control axis, and the number in the
SIGNALS INPn signal name corresponds to the control axis number.
<F104#0, #1> INP n The actual machine position of the n–th axis is placed
in the in–position condition.
(n : 1 or 2)
Output conditions
These signals turn to “1” in the following case :
D The acceleration/deceleration delay of the corresponding
control axis is zero and the servo error is within the specified
allowance.
These signals turn to “0” in the following cases :
D The acceleration/deceleration delay of the corresponding
control axis is not zero.
D The servo error of the corresponding control axis exceeds the
specified allowance.

NOTE
The in-position signals may turn to “1” even during the
movement if the axis is fed at very low speed.

Relative parameter
No.1801, 1826, 1827

368
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 5. STATUS SIGNALS

5.7 This outputs to PMC the classification of alarms occurring in Power

Mate.
ALARM
CLASSIFICATION [Signal] ALPS1 <F250#0>
[Function] P/S alarm 100 signal.....Parameter PWE was on.
SIGNAL (OUTPUT) 1: P/S alarm 100 has occurred.
ALPS1 TO ALPS3, 0: P/S alarm 100 has not occurred.
ALPS, ALOT, ALOH, [Signal] ALPS2 <F250#1>
ALSV <F250#0 TO [Function] P/S alarm 000 signal.....A parameter was set for which the
#6> <F251#0 TO #2> power must be turned off then on
again.
1: P/S alarm 000 has occurred.
0: P/S alarm 000 has not occurred.
[Signal] ALPS3 <F250#2>
[Function] P/S alarm 101 signal.....Power went off while memory was
being written.
1: P/S alarm 101 has occurred.
0: P/S alarm 101 has not occurred.
[Signal] ALPS <F250#3>
[Function] P/S alarm signal
1: A P/S alarm, a custom macro alarm, or an alarm from
PMC has occurred.
0: A P/S alarm, a custom macro alarm, or an alarm from
PMC has not occurred.
[Signal] ALOT <F250#4>
[Function] Overtravel alarm signal
1: An overtravel alarm or an alarm from PMC has
occurred.
0: An overtravel alarm or an alarm from PMC has not
occurred.
[Signal] ALOH <F250#5>
[Function] Overheat alarm signal
1: An overheat alarm has occurred.
0: An overheat alarm has not occurred.
[Signal] ALSV <F250#6>
[Function] Servo alarm signal
1: A servo alarm has occurred.
0: A servo alarm has not occurred.

369
5. STATUS SIGNALS PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

[Signal] ALAPC <F251#0>

[Function] APC alarm signal
1: An alarm in APC has occurred.
0: An alarm in APC has not occurred.
[Signal] ALSPD <F251#0>
[Function] Spindle alarm signal
1: A spindle alarm is issued.
0: A spindle alarm is not issued.
[Signal] ALPS4 <F251#2>
[Function] P/S alarm (No.5000 or later) siganl
1: P/S alarm (No.5000 or later) has occurred.
0: P/S alarm (No.5000 or later) has not occurred.

370
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 5. STATUS SIGNALS

5.8 The Absolute Pulse Coder (APC) alarm type is output to the PMC.
APC ALARM TYPE [Signal] APCMn (n : 1 or 2)
SIGNALS (OUTPUT) [Function] APC communication error. Data transfer error (alarm 301)
APCMn, APOVn, [Signal] APOVn (n : 1 or 2)
APFEn, APPEn, [Function] APC overtime error. Data transfer error (alarm 302)
APPSn, APBZn, [Signal] APFEn (n : 1 or 2)
[Function] APC framing error. Data transfer error (alarm 303)
APBVn, APBLn
<F252, F253> [Signal] APPEn (n : 1 or 2)
[Function] APC parity error. Data transfer error (alarm 304)
[Signal] APPSn (n : 1 or 2)
[Function] APC pulse error. APC alarm (alarm 305)
[Signal] APBZn (n : 1 or 2)
[Function] The APC battery voltage has ever dropped to a level too
low to hold data. APC alarm (alarm 306)
[Signal] APBVn (n : 1 or 2)
[Function] The APC battery voltage has dropped to a level necessitat-
ing the battery to be changed. APC alarm (alarm 307)
[Signal] APBLn (n : 1 or 2)
[Function] The APC battery voltage has ever dropped (including pow-
er OFF) to a level necessitating the battery to be changed.
APC alarm (alarm 308)

5.9 Alarms in the 3000 bracket can be generated from PMC to Power Mate.
DISPLAY OF [Signal] PAL0-PAL6 <G219#0 to #6>
ALARMS FROM PMC [Function] Alarm number specification signal
Values in excess of 3000 among binary numbers displayed
(INPUT) PAL0 TO
by PAL0 to PAL6 become alarm numbers.
PAL6, PALM <G219>
NOTE
When an alarm has been generated from PMC the 2 bits of
the alarm classification signals ALPS and ALOT [5.8]
become 1.

[Signal] PALM <G219#7>

[Function] PMC alarm generation selection signal
1: Alarms in the 3000 bracket are generated from PMC.
0: Alarms in the 3000 bracket are not generated from
PMC.

371
5. STATUS SIGNALS PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

5.10 Status of the axis under Power Mate control is output by INPn, SUPn and
IPLn signals.
AXIS STATUS Timing is shown in Fig. 5.10.
SIGNAL (OUTPUT)
INPn : (n : 1 or 2) Turns “1” at the in-position state.
INPn<F104#0, #1>, SUPn : (n : 1 or 2) Is “1” while command pulses are in the acceleration/
SUPn <F208#1, #5>, deceleration control section.
IPLn <F208#2, #0> IPLn : (n : 1 or 2) Is “1” while command pulses are in the interpolater.

Axis move command ĘĘĘ

(1) Division pulse

(2) Staying pulse of

acceleration/
deceleration
control section

INPn

IPLn

SUPn

Fig.5.10 Output Timing of Axis Status Signal

5.11 The TAP signal is sent from Power Mate to PMC to show that tapping is
in progress. The TAP signal turns to ”1” during the tapping portion (G74,
TAPPING SIGNAL G84) of the canned cycle.
(OUTPUT) TAP
<F001#5>

372
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 6. MODE SELECT

6 MODE SELECT

373
6. MODE SELECT PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

6.1 The mode select signal is a code signal consisting three bits MD1, MD2,
and MD4. The seven modes memory edit (EDIT), automatic operation
MODE SELECT (AUTO), step feed (HANDLE/STEP), manual continuous feed (JOG),
SIGNAL (INPUT) MD1, TEACH IN JOG/HANDLE, TEACH IN STEP/HANDLE, manual data
MD2, MD4 <G043#0 input (MDI) mode can be selected by combining these bits.
TO #2> Contact at the machine
Mode side
MD1 MD2 MD4
1 Memory edit (EDIT) Ę Ę
2 Automatic operation (AUTO) Ę
3 Manual handle/step feed (HANDLE/STEP) Ę
4 Manual continuous feed (JOG) Ę Ę
5 TEACH IN STEP/HANDLE Ę Ę Ę
6 TEACH IN JOG/HANDLE Ę Ę
7 Manual data input (MDI)

Ę: Turns to “1”
: Turns to “0”
Cautions about Modes and Mode switching
(1) Switch the mode while the operation is stopped or halt(*SP). (See
Chapter 12.)
(2) The mode cannot be switched during an emergency stop.
(3) In the manual/step feed mode, only step feed is enabled when manual
feed enable signals are 0. Manual feed or step feed is enabled when
the manual feed enable signal is 1.
(4) Manual Operation at TEACH IN JOG/ HANDLE and TEACH IN
STEP/HANDLE
D TEACH IN JOG/HANDLE
Manual feed and jog feed can be performed when the manual
feed enable signal is 1. Only jog feed can be performed when
the signal is 0.
D TEACH IN STEP/HANDLE
Manual feed and step feed can be performed when the manual
feed enable signal is 1. Only step feed can be performed when
the signal is 0.
In the TEACH IN JOG/HANDLE and TEACH IN STEP/HANDLE
modes, program edit is possible in addition to the operations above.
(5) If the manual handle/step feed mode or the TEACH IN
STEP/HANDLE mode is selected during operation in the automatic
operation mode, the operation stops and the signal STL [12.3] turns
OFF as well as the signal SPL [12.4] turns ON to assume the manual
handle/step feed mode or the TEACH IN STEP/HANDLE mode.
Manual handle feed by the manual pulse generator or step feed by the
feed axis direction select signal +J1, –J1, +J2, –J2 [7.1] is possible in
this condition. It is also possible to select the automatic operation
mode again and to restart the operation by the automatic operation
start signal in this condition since the command in the automatic
operation mode is held. It is impossible to restart unless the same
mode as before the interruption is selected, however, if the operation
was interrupted by switching to the manual handle/step feed mode
during operation in the automatic operation mode. (Fig. 6.1(a))

374
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 6. MODE SELECT

Mode select signal state

Automatic operation

Step feed or
TEACH IN STEP

Operation in automatic
operation mode
Step feed enable

STL

SPL

ST
Start signal

Fig.6.1 (a)

(6) If the manual continuous feed mode or the TEACH IN

JOG/HANDLE mode is selected during operation in the automatic
operation mode, the operation is interrupted and the signal STL [12.3]
turns OFF as well as the signal SPL [12.4] turns ON to assume the
manual continuous feed mode or the TEACH IN JOG HANDLE
mode. Manual continuous feed by the feed axis direction select signal
is possible in this condition.
It is also possible to restart in this condition by returning to the
original condition just as in the aforementioned manual handle/step
feed and TEACH IN STEP/HANDLE. Also the manual handle
command, step feed command is ignored and the manual continuous
feed mode is selected if the mode is switched to the manual
continuous feed mode or the TEACH IN JOG/HANDLE mode
during operation by manual handle or step feed. Any feed axis
direction select signal which happens to be close before the manual
continuous feed mode or the TEACH IN JOG/HANDLE mode is
selected is ignored, however. Turn all the feed axis direction select
signals +J1, –J1, +J2, –J2 [7.1] open once and then turn the required
feed axis direction select signal close, and that feed axis direction
select signal will be selected. (Figs. 6.1 (b), (c))

375
6. MODE SELECT PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

Mode select signal state

Automatic
operation
Manual continuous
feed or TEACH IN
JOG/HANDLE

Operation in automatic
operation mode
Manual
STL continuous
feed enable
SPL

ST
Start signal

Fig.6.1 (b)

Mode select signal state

100msec min
Automatic
operation/manual
handle/step feed
Manual
continuous feed
or TEACH IN
JOG/HANDLE
Feed axis
direction
select signal

Manual Manual
continuous continuous
feed disable feed enable

Fig.6.1 (c)

376
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 6. MODE SELECT

6.2 It is possible to perform the machining operation while reading the

program through the reader/puncher interface by connecting the tape
OPERATION BY TAPE reader. If DNC1 turns to ”1” under MEM mode, this function is validated.
READER DNCI When using this function, set the parameter concerned with
(INPUT) <G043#5> reader/puncher interface in advance.

NOTE
This function cannot be used with the 2–path Power
Mate–D.

377
6. MODE SELECT PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

6.3 These signals indicate the current operational mode. The relationship
between input and output signals is:
OPERATION MODE
CONFIRMATION
SIGNALS (OUTPUT)
<F003, F004>

Table 6.2 Relationship between Input and Output Signals

Input signal
Mode O tp t signal
Output
MD1 MD2 MD4 ZRN DNCI
Manaul data input 0 0 0 0 0 MMDI<F003#3>
(MDI)
Auto operation (AUTO) 1 0 0 0 0 MAUT<F003#5>
Tape command (RMT) 1 0 0 0 1 MAUT<F003#4>
Memory edit (EDIT) 1 1 0 0 0 MEDT<F003#6>
Manual handle/step 0 0 1 0 0 MH<F003#1>
feed (HANDLE/STEP)
Jogging (JOG) 1 0 1 0 0 MJ<F003#2>
Manual reference 1 0 1 1 1 MZRH<F004#5>
position return
TEACH IN JOG 0 1 1 0 0 MTCHIN<F003#7>
, MJ<F003#2>
TEACH IN HANDLE 1 1 1 0 0 MTCHIN<F003#7>
, MH<F003#1>

NOTE
MRMT is not supported by the 2–path Power Mate–D.

378
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 7. JOG FEED

7 JOG FEED

379
7. JOG FEED PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

7.1 These signals are enabled when INC, JOG, TEACH IN HANDLE or
TEACH IN JOG mode is selected. They indicate the feed axis and its feed
FEED AXIS direction.
DIRECTION SELECT +/– of signal name indicates the feed direction, the number following “J”
SIGNAL (INPUT) corresponds to the number of the controlled axis (see Fig.7.1):
+Jn, –Jn, <G100#0,
#1, G102#0, #1> + J n

n.....Feed nst axis. (n : 1 or 2)

+.....Feed in the + direction.

–.....Feed in the – direction.

Fig.7.1

(1) Incremental feed

When the feed axis direction select signal of the axis (+Jn, –Jn) to be
moved turns from “0” to “1”, that axis moves one step in the pertinent
direction.

Table 7.1 Feed Amount per Step

Increment system Feed amount per step
Metric sytem 0.001 mm
Inch system 0.0001 inch

The above feed amount per step can be multiplied by 10, 100 or 1000 by
the incremental feed signal MP1, MP2 [9.2].
(2) Jog Feed
When the feed axis direction select signal (+Jn, –Jn) of the axis to be
moved turns from “0” to “1” after the JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode
has been selected, that axis moves in the pertinent direction at the feed
rate determined by the override signal or manual rapid traverse select
signal. When the feed axis direction select signal turns to “1” and the
JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode is subsequently selected, or the feed
axis direction select signal remains “1” and the RESET button or
EMERGENCY STOP button is pressed, the axis does not move until
the signal first turns to “0”, then back to “1”.
Simultaneous 2 axes are controled in jog feed (Power Mate–D).

380
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 7. JOG FEED

7.2 (Function)
MANUAL FEEDRATE A feedrate in jog feed or incremental feed can be overridden.
These sixteen binary code signals correspond to the override
OVERRIDE (INPUT) values as follows:
*JV0 TO *JV15
ȍ |2
15

<G010,G011> Override value (%) = 0.01 i

Vi|
i+0

where Vi=0 when *JVi is “1”

Vi=1 when *JVi is “0”
If *JV0 to *JV15 all are “1” or “0”, the override values are regarded as
0. The feed stops. It is possible to select a manual feedrate in 0.01% steps
over a range of 0 to 655.34%.
Table 7.2 shows an example.

Table 7.2 Relationship between *JV0 to *JV15 and

Override Value
*JV0 to *JV15 Override
*JV15 *JV12 *JV11 *JV8 *JV7 *JV4 *JV3 *JV0 value (%)
( )

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0.01
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0.10
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1.00
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 10.00
1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 100.00
0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 400.00
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 655.34
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

(Operation)
If rapid traverse selection signal RT[7.3] is “0” during jog feed
or incremental feed, the actual feedrate is obtained by
multiplying a jog feedrate set by a parameter (No.1423) by an
override value selected by these signals.

381
7. JOG FEED PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

7.3 If the jog feed or TEACH IN JOG mode is selected, setting the RT signal
to “1” switches tool movement from a jog feedrate to a rapid traverse rate.
MANUAL RAPID
Under the condition mentioned above, setting the feed axis direction
TRAVERSE SELECT selection signal (7.1) to ”1” moves the tool in the specified direction at
SIGNAL (INPUT) the rapid traverse rate. If the jog feed or TEACH IN JOG mode is selected,
RT<G019#7> the feed axis direction selection signal is ”1,” and the override signal is
in effect, setting the RT signal to ”1” causes the tool to move at the rapid
traverse rate. Resetting the RT signal to ”0” resumes the original feedrate.
(See Fig. 7.3.)

jog feed mode or

TEACH IN JOG
Feed axis direction
100ms or select signal +Jn, –Jn
greater
Manual rapid traverse
select signal RT
RT

Axis movement
Rapid traverse

Feedrate by override signal Feedrate by override signal

Fig.7.3 RT Signal and Feedrate

7.4 These signals override the rapid traverse rate, and correspond to:
RAPID TRAVERSE Table 7.4 Signals ROV1, 2 and Override
OVERRIDE SIGNAL
Rapid traverse override
(INPUT) ROV1, ROV2 Override value
val e
ROV2 ROV1
<G014#0, #1> 0 0 100 %
0 1 50 %
1 0 25 %
1 1 Fo % (NOTE)

NOTE
For Fo value, an absolute value is set by parameter
No.1421 within a range of 0 to rapid traverse rate (for each
axis).
Actual feed rate is obtained by multiplying the rapid traverse
rate preset by parameter No.1420 by the override value
determined by this signal, whether in automatic or manual
operation (including manual reference position return).

382
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 7. JOG FEED

7.5 This signal determines whether or not the move amount is counted to the
present position on the workpiece coordinate system when the machine
MANUAL ABSOLUTE tool is moved by the manual operation, whether jog or incremental feed.
SIGNAL (INPUT) (a) *ABSM = 0 ... (manual absolute on)
*ABSM <G006#2> When manual operation is interrupted under this condition during
automatic operation:
(i) At the end of the block where manual operation was
interrupted, the tool position moves in parallel by the manual
move amount, whether the command is incremental or
absolute.
(ii) In subsequent blocks, the parallel-moved tool position
remains unchanged until an absolute command block
appears. Therefore, if all blocks are programmed by
incremental commands, the tool keeps the parallel-moved
position until machining ends (Fig. 7.5 (a)).

In case of incremental commands

Manual
intervention

End point

Programmed tool path

The tool returns to the programmed tool path when an
absolute command block is encountered.

Fig.7.5 (a) Manual Absolute ON

NOTE
If the machining end position has shifted by the manual
move amount because all blocks are programmed by
incremental commands only, the present value is displayed
shifted by the manual move amount.

(b) *ABSM = 1 (Manual absolute off)

The manual move amount is not counted to the present position on
the workpiece coordinate system. The present value display on the
CRT does not include the manual move amount. The display is reset
to the initial value (before manual operation) when the control is reset,
or when operation in the MEM mode is started after the manual
operation.
During automatic operation, if manual intervention of a block is
interrupted, the tool position moves in parallel by the manual move
amount, regardless of the absolute or incremental command at the end
point of that block, as well as at the end point of subsequent blocks
(Fig. 7.5 (b)).

383
7. JOG FEED PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

Actual tool path The actual end

(The tool moves along this path, regardless of point always
absolute command or incremental command) moves in parallel

Manual
intervention

End point

Programmed tool path

Fig.7.5 (b) Manual Absolute OFF

The present value display at the finish of the operation shows an end point
value on the program as if manual intervention had not been executed.
However, the tool position moves in parallel.

384
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 7. JOG FEED

7.6 When a return signal (RTN11 to RTN32) is turned 1 in the jog feed mode
JOG[6.1], the axis moves up to a reference position corresponding to the
RETURN SIGNAL selected return signal.
(INPUT) RTN11, If the return signal is turned 0 during movement, the axis decelerates to
RTN21, RTN31 a stop.
<G212#0 TO #2> When the axis has reached a reference position, the axis stops and the
RTN12, RTN22, corresponding reference position return end signal (ZP1, ZP21, ZP31,
ZP2, ZP22, ZP32) is turned on to terminate the movement.
RTN32 <G213#0 TO
The reference position must be set before this function is used by
#2> performing the reference position return operation.

Table 7.6 Return Signal and Related Matters)

Reference point
Return signal Return position Parameter return end output
signal
RTN11 Reference position No. 1240 ZP1
RTN21 2nd reference position No. 1241 ZP21
RTN31 3rd reference position No. 1242 ZP31
RTN12 Reference position No. 1240 ZP2
RTN22 2nd reference position No. 1241 ZP22
RTN32 3rd reference position No. 1242 ZP32

NOTE
Set the 2nd and 3rd reference points as the distances from
the 1st reference point in parameters No. 1241 and 1242
respectively.

385
8. INTERLOCK PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

8 INTERLOCK

386
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 8. INTERLOCK

8.1 There are two types of interlock functions. Set the parameter HITL
(No.3003#1) to use high-speed interlock *RILK.
INTERLOCK SIGNAL This signal is used to inhibit the machine from moving, and is effective
(INPUT) *IT<G008#0>, regardless of the selected mode. When the *IT or *RILK signal is “0”, the
*RILK<X000#6, axis movement is decelerated and stopped.
X1000#6, X001#6, In automatic operation (cycle start lamp signal STL is “1”, feed hold lamp
signal SPL is “0”), blocks containing M, command is executed
X1001#6> consecutively until a block containing an axis move command is
encountered; the system then stops and is placed into the automatic
operation mode. When the *IT or *RILK signal turns to “1”, operation
resumes (Figs. 8.1 (a), (b)).

Command read

Axis move

*IT

Fig.8.1 (a) Block Containing Only Axis Move Command

Command read

MF

FIN

*IT

Fig.8.1 (b) Block Containing Auxiliary Functions Only

(Automatic)

NOTE
The overtravel amount of the motor after turning *IT or
*RILK to “1” is represented by the following formula.
TC T
Qmax + F m. 1 ( ) S ) A )
60 1000 1000 1000
Where
Qmax : Overtravel quantity (mm or inch)
Fm : Feedrate (mm/min or inch/min)
Tc : Cutting time constant (msec)
Ts : Servo time constant (Ts = 33msec normally)
A : Processing time of Power Mate
A =30ms with standard interlock signal *IT
A =12ms with high speed interlock signal *RILK

387
8. INTERLOCK PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

8.2 The specified axis movement can be prevented independently by signal

(*ITn).
AXIS INTERLOCK
Parameter(No.3003#2) selects whether interlock is effective for all axes
SIGNAL (INPUT) *ITn or each axis. Set the parameter to be effective for each axis.
<G130#0, #1> (a) In manual operation
The movement of an interlocked axis is inhibited, but the other axes
are movable. If an axis is interlocked during movement, it stops after
being decelerated, and it starts moving again when it is released from
interlock.
(b) In automatic operation (AUTO mode)
If an axis is interlocked while its movement is being commanded (the
move amount is not 0, inclusive of the tool length compensation), all
axes movements are prevented.
If a moving axis is interlocked, all axes stop moving after being
decelerated, and they start moving again when it is released from
being interlocked.
*ITn Interlock signal for the nth axis. (n : 1 or 2)
0 : Make it be interlock
1 : Not malce it be interlock
This function is effective during dry run.

8.3 Function
INTERLOCK SIGNAL This function allows a directional interlock for each axis.
Together with the high-speed interlock, it is possible to release
FOR EACH AXIS AND the interlock of an axis only in the direction in which no
DIRECTION (INPUT) axis/directional interlock is applied.
+MITn, –MITn, Operation
<G132#0, #1, G134#0, When the interlock signal for each axis and direction becomes
#1> “1”, Power Mate applies interlock only in the corresponding
axial direction. However, during automatic operation, all axes
will stop.

388
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 9. MANUAL HANDLE FEED

9 MANUAL HANDLE FEED

389
9. MANUAL HANDLE FEED PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

9.1 These signals select the axes to be fed by manual handle. They provide
for every set of signals for the manual pulse generators (maximum 2 units)
MANUAL HANDLE ; each set consists of two code signals (A,B). The numerical characters in
FEED AXIS SELECT the signal names indicate the relevant manual pulse generator.
SIGNAL (INPUT)
HS1A
HS1A, HS1B, HS2A,
1 ..... Selection of the axis fed by the 1st manual pulse generator
HS2B <G018 #0, #1,
2 ..... Selection of the axis fed by the 2nd manual pulse generator
#4, #5>
Code signals A, B correspond to axes as shown in table 9.1 .

Table 9.1

Manual handle feed axis selection

Feed axis
HSnB HSnA
0 0 No selection (No axis is fed)
0 1 1st axis
1 0 2nd axis

NOTE
With the 2–path Power Mate–D and Power Mate–F, only the
first manual pulse generator can be used. This means that
only HS1A is valid.

390
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 9. MANUAL HANDLE FEED

9.2 Movement amount per step of manual handle feed and step feed is
signalled as shown in table 9.2.
INCREMENTAL FEED
SIGNAL (INPUT) MP1, Table 9.2
MP2 <G019#4,#5> Status of
Movement amount per step
signals
Metric input Inch input
MP2 MP1 Incremental Incremental
Handle feed Handle feed
feed feed
0 0 0.001 mm 0.001 mm 0.0001 inch 0.0001 inch
0 1 0.01 mm 0.01 mm 0.001 inch 0.001 inch
1 0 0.1 mm 0.001 M mm 0.01 inch 0.0001 M inch
1 1 1 mm 0.001 N mm 0.1 inch 0.0001 N inch

NOTE
Magnification M and N are set by parameters
(No.7113,No.7114).

391
10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

10 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN

392
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN

10.1 (1) Manual reference position return selection signal (input)

ZRN<G043#7>
1ST REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN (2) Reference position return deceleration signal (input)
*DECn <X000#5, X001#5, X1000#5, X1001#5> (n : 1 or 2)
(3) Reference position return end signal (output)
ZPn <F094> (n : 1 or 2)
This function manually or automatically returns the moving parts of the
machine to the reference position in the direction specified for each axis.
The reference position return for this CNC is a grid system. The reference
position is determined by the electrical grid position shown by the one
revolution signal of the position detector.
(a) Reference position return operation (grid system)
When the JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode is selected, the ZRN
signal is turned to “1” and feed is applied in the reference position
direction by pressing the manual feed button; the moving parts
of the machine move at the rapid traverse. When the reference
position return deceleration signals (*DECn) turn to “0”, the
deceleration limit switch operates, the feedrate decelerates, and
the machine continues to move at a constant low speed. When
the deceleration limit switch is subsequently released and the
electrical grid position is reached after the reference position
return deceleration signal turns to “1“ again, feed stops and the
reference position return end signals (ZPn) become “1”. The
reference position return direction can be set for each axis .
Once reference position return is complete, JOG feed of the axis
at which the signal (ZPn) is turned to “1” is ignored until signal
ZRN turns to “0”.
The time chart in Fig.10.1 (a) shows the above operation.

393
10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

Jog feed
JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode lock state

ZRN

+J1 +J1

Rapid
traverse

*DEC1 *DEC1

Grid
(1 revolution ZP1
signal)
Detector 1 revolution signal (X-axis return
direction +)

Fig.10.1 (a) Reference Position Return (Grid System)

When the reference position return operation is done in the reverse

direction from the preset return direction, the operation changes direction
after passing through the reference position and the axis reaches the
reference position. Fig. 10.1 (b) shows the time chart.

JOG /TEACH IN JOG mode

ZRN

+J1

+V Rapid
traverse

Rapid
traverse
–V

*DEC1 *DEC1 *DEC1

Grid

ZP1
(X-axis return direction –)

Fig.10.1 (b) Reference Position Return (from Reverse Direction)

394
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN

In the above case, the relationship among the reference position,

deceleration signals and feedrate is as follows (Fig. 10.1 (c)):

Reference position

+V

–V

Minus direction Plus direction

*DEC1

Fig.10.1 (c) Position and Feedrate

(in the Case of Reverse Direction Return)

When a mode other than JOG and TEACH IN JOG mode is selected or
the feed axis direction select signals (+J1, –J1, +J2, –J2) are all turned off
during reference position return, the machine decelerates and stops.
Reference position return must always feed toward the reference position
from a point outside the deceleration region. “Deceleration region”
means:

Point at which
*DEC1 turns to
“0” Reference position
Deceleration
region

Fig.10.1 (d)

The low constant speed after deceleration is set for all axes by parameter
No.1425.
Automatic reference position return to zero point return direction by G28
is performed by the same sequence as manual reference position return
only if manual/ automatic reference position return has never been
performed after turning power on, after emergency stop or after releasing
servo alarm. Once the reference position return is performed by the above
sequence, automatic reference position return is performed the same as
positioning to the reference position at rapid traverse and does not follow
the sequence described here, and the starting position of G28 command
is not limited.

395
10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

(b) Deceleration limit switch installation conditions

Installation of the deceleration limit switch for reference position
return must meet the following conditions (Fig. 10.1 (e))

Feedrate
Return direction
VR

VL

Reference position
Deceleration limit Deceleration limit
switch operation point switch released point

L DW L DA

Fig.10.1 (e)

(1) LDW : Deceleration dog width (mm or inch)

TR
V R( ) 30 ) T S) ) 4V L.T S
L DW u 2
6000
VR :Rapid traverse (mm/min or inch/min)
TR :Rapid traverse time constant (msec)
TS :Servo time constant (msec)
VL :Speed after deceleration (mm/min or inch/min)
(2) LDA :Distance between deceleration limit switch
released point and reference position
LDA : Move amount of 1/2 revolution of motor
Since the above conditions do not include the limit switch
operation variations, this point must also be considered at
installation.
(c) Reference
For the reference position return described above, it is necessary
to move the machine at a feedrate with the servo position
deviation value more than 128 before the first return is done after
turning power on or releasing the emergency stop or servo alarm
state. Here, the servo position deviation value is calculated by the
feedrate and the servo loop gain as follows :
E+F 1
G U
E : Servo position deviation value(µm)
F : Feedrate(µm/sec)
U: Detection unit (µm)
G: Servo loop gain
Generally, the detection unit is 1µm.
For example, if the machine is moved at a feedrate of 6
m/min and servo loop gain is 30 at the time, servo position
deviation is

396
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN

6,000 1,000 1
60 1
E+ + 3, 333
30
Conversely, when detection unit is 1µm and servo loop gain is 30, the
feedrate with the servo position deviation of 128 is
F = 128 30 60 (mm) = 230,400 (µm/min) = 230 (mm/min)
By the above result, the machine should be moved toward the reference
position at a feedrate of more than 230 mm/min before the first reference
position return is performed.
The servo position error that occurs during actual feeding can be detected
using diagnose 300.

NOTE
When the built–in I/O card is used, the *DEC signal must be
entered from the built–in I/O card. To enable this, set bit 1
(BDEC) of parameter No. 3005.

397
10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

10.2
2ND, 3RD (1) 2nd reference point return end signals (output)
REFERENCE ZP2n <F096#0, #1>
POSITION RETURN (2) 3rd reference point return end signals (output)
SIGNALS ZP3n <F098#0, #1>
(a) Function
These signals indicate that the control axes are positioned at the
2nd or 3rd reference position. The signals are provided
independently for each axis; the number after ZP shows the
reference position number, while the second digit indicates the
control axis.
ZP 2 n

n ..... nth axis reference position return end signal

(n :1 or 2)

2 ..... End of return to the 2nd reference position

3 ..... End of return to the 3rd reference position
(b) Output conditions
These signals turn to “1” when:
(i) The 2nd or 3rd reference position return (G30) has been
completed and axes are in position.
These signals turn to “0” when:
(i) An axis has moved from the reference position;
(ii) Emergency stop is activated; or
(iii) A servo alarm occurs.

10.3 (a) Function

REFERENCE This signal indicates that the Power Mate has established the
reference position by the reference position return. For the machine
POSITION whose reference position is established by the absolute pulse coder,
ESTABLISHMENT this signal turns to “1” at the time of power on.
(b) Output condition
SIGNAL (OUTPUT)
This signal turns to “1” when the Power Mate has established the
ZRFn <F120#0, #1> reference position by the reference position return operation. It
remains “1” until the Power Mate releases the reference position.

398
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN

10.4 (input) ZR1 <G212#4>

(input) ZR2 <G213#4>
DOGLESS (output) ZP1 <F094#0>
REFERENCE (output) ZP1 <F094#1>
POSITION RETURN This function moves the moving part of the machine by manual
continuous feed in the direction specified for each axis, then returns it to
FUNCTION
the reference position without using the deceleration signal for reference
position return.
(a) Setting the reference position
(i) Position the axis near the reference position using manual
continuous feed.
(ii) In the reference position return mode, enter the signal[7.1]
specifying the feed axis direction, (+Jn) or (–Jn), for the axis.
(iii) The axis is positioned at the grid closest to the current position,
and the position becomes the reference position.

(Example) When the reference position for the 1st axis is set

ZRN mode

+J1 or –J1
(PMC³NC)

1st axis
V

1st axis grid

°
Stop point Reference position

(b) Reference position resetting operation

It is possible to keep resetting a new grid point as a reference position,
with the above mentioned method, when the set reference position is
different from the true reference position. After setting the reference
position using the method given in (a), when the ZRn signal is turned
ON, it moves at a constant low speed to the next grid point and that
point is set as the new reference position. This operation can be
repeated over again allowing the true reference position to be set
while changing it 1 grid at a time.

399
10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

JOG mode
MD4, MD2, MD1

ZRN

(Note2)
+Jn/–Jn or ZRn +X
+Jn/–Jn or ZRn ZRn (Note3) ZRn (Note3)

FL FL FL
Feedrate

Position
detector grid
1st reference position
setting by method 1.

ZPX
1st reference position Next reference position True reference position

Fig.10.4 Dog–less Reference position Setting Sequence

NOTE
1 The 1st reference position setting can use any signal from
+Jn, –Jn, ZRn.
2 The axis is momery moved by one grid even if ZRn signal
is ON for a ling time.

(c) Return to the reference position

When the signal[7.1] specifying the feed axis direction (+Jn or –Jn)
is entered for the axis after the reference position is established, the
axis moves by the high-speed reference position return regardless of
the feed axis direction selection signal.
(d) Maintenance of reference position
Using an absolute pulse coder, any reference position that has been
set up can be maintained after the power is turned off.

NOTE
1 If command G28 is issued before returning to the reference
position is performed, P/S alarm 90 is issued.
2 When positioning the axis near the reference position, it is
necessary to move the axis in the reference position return
direction at a speed such that the positional deviation of the
servo exceeds 128.
3 The positioning direction from the point closest to the
reference position to the grid conforms to that set by
parameter ZMIx(No.1006 #5) regardless of the sign (+ or
–) of the signal specifying the feed axis direction.

400
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN

Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1002 DLZ

DLZ = 0 : Dogless reference position return function is invalid.

1 : Dogless reference position return function is valid.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1005 DLZx

Data type : Bit axis

DLZx Function for setting the reference position without dogs
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

NOTE
When DLZ of parameter 1002 is 0, parameter 1005 is
enabled. When DLZ of parameter 1002 is 1, parameter
1005 is disabled, and the function for setting the reference
position without dogs is enabled for all axes.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ZMIx

ZMIx Reference position return direction and backlash initial

direction at power on are :
0 : plus
1 : minus

401
10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

10.5 (a) Function

REFERENCE This function sets the absolute pulse coder to the origin by moving
the machine to the reference position by manual continuous feed,
POSITION MDI operation, or automatic operation, then setting the reference
EXTERNAL SETTING position external setting signal to “1.”
SIGNAL ZPEXTN (b) Operation
(INPUT) <G206#6, 1) Set parameter ZEXx (No. 1009#0) to “1” (to enable this
function).
G207#6, G208#6,
2) Move the machine to the reference position by manual
G209#, G210#6, continuous feed, MDI operation, or automatic operation.
G211#6> 3) Select the manual continuous feed mode (JOG) and set the ZRN
(G043#7) signal to “1.”
4) Set to “1” the reference position external setting signal
(ZPEXTn) for the axis for which the reference position is to be
set up.
5) The current position is memorized as the reference position for
the target axis.
(c) Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1009 ZEXx

Data type : Bit axis type

ZEXx : 0 : Disables the reference position external setting
function.
1 : Enables the reference position external setting
function.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1815 APCX APZx

Data type : Bit axis type

APCx : 0 : The position detector is not an absolute type.
1 : The position detector is an absolute type (absolute
pulse coder).

CAUTION
When the absolute pulse coder is to be set to the origin
using this function, the APCx bit must be set to “1.”

APZx : 0 : When the position detector used is an absolute type,

the machine position has not been associated with
the position of the absolute position detector.
1 : When the position detector used is an absolute type,
the machine position has been associated with the
position of the absolute position detector.

NOTE
Setting the reference position external setting signal to “1”
causes this parameter to be set to “1.”

402
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN

(d) Alarm
No. Description
093 Reference position Because the reference position external setting
external setting signal was set to “1” under one of the following
failed. conditions, reference position external setting
failed.
1) The manual continuous feed mode (JOG)
has not been selected.
2) The manual continuous feed mode (JOG)
has been selected, but the ZRN signal is
“0.”
3) The emergency stop signal (*ESP) is “0.”
4) APCx (bit 5 of parameter No. 1815) is “0.”

NOTE
1 The reference position external setting signal is effective,
when the manual continuous feed mode (JOG) has been
selected, and the ZRN signal is “1.”
2 When this function is used to set the absolute pulse coder
to the origin, be sure to set the emergency stop signal
(*ESP) to “1.”
3 After the reference position has been set up for the absolute
pulse coder using this function, turn the power off and on
again.
4 This function is intended to set up the origin for the absolute
pulse coder. It cannot be used for the incremental pulse
coder.

403
10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

10.6 (a) Overview

SIGNAL FOR This function is intended to minimize trouble in fine adjustment
required after reference position setting and to eliminate differences
BUTT–TYPE in adjustments among operators. This is achieved by automating a
REFERENCE method in which reference position setting involves pressing the axis
against the machine stopper.
POSITION SETTING
The operator simply selects the axis for which the reference position
(OUTPUT) CLRCHn is to be set up and starts the required cycle. When the cycle is started,
<F180#0, #1> the following operations are performed automatically.
1) During reference position setting, the speed at which the axis is
bumped against the machine stopper varies depending on the start
position. To make this speed constant, the following cycle is first
executed:
The selected axis is pushed against the machine stopper with the
torque (force) applied to the axis decreased, and then, the axis is
moved back to a constant position specified in a parameter.
2) The operation at step 1) is repeated.
3) The reference position is finally set to the position to which the
axis moves back for the second time.

NOTE
This function is effective for the absolute pulse coder.

(b) Operating procedure

The butt–type reference position setting is performed by the
following procedure.
1) Previously set the parameters necessary for this function.
[Parameter No.] [Data type] [Description]
No.1006#5 Bit axis type Direction in which the refer-
ence position is to be set up
No.1815#5 Bit axis type Setting the absolute pulse
coder
No1815#4 Bit axis type Limit to the torque for setting
up the absolute pulse coder
reference position
No.7186 Byte axis type Torque limit
No.7183 Word axis type Butt speed 1
No.7184 Word axis type Butt speed 2
No.7185 Word axis type Speed for reference position
setting
No.7181 Doubleword First–time return distance
axis type from the stopper
No.7182 Doubleword Reference position setting
axis type distance
2) Select the reference position return mode.
[MD1 (G043#0) = 1, MD2 (G043#1) = 0, MD4 (G043#2) = 1,
ZRN (G043#7) = 1]
3) Select the axis for which reference position setting is to be
performed by specifying the return axis selection signal as listed
below.

404
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN

Return axis HS1B HS1A

No axis selected 0 0
First axis 0 1
Second axis 1 0

NOTE
HS1A (G018#0) and HS1B (G018#1) function as the
external pulse input axis selection signal.

4) Start the cycle. ST (G007#2)

The above procedure enables the cycle operation in item (c) below,
thus achieving reference position setting.
5) The automatic operation start signal OP (F000#7) is kept to be 1
during the cycle operation.
(c) Cycle operation
1) Before the reference position is set up
When the reference position has not been set up (parameter No.
1815#4 APZx = 0), steps (i) to (v) are performed automatically to
set up the reference position.

ÃÃÃÃ
Machine stopper
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
Current position

(i) The specified axis is bumped against the machine stopper by

a torque limit operation.
Until the axis bumps into the machine stopper, it moves:
In the direction specified in parameter No. 1006
At the speed specified in parameter No. 7183
With the torque specified in parameter No. 7186

ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
Machine stopper

ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ The direction, speed, and torque for axis
movement are specified in parameters.

405
10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

(ii) When the axis bumps into the machine stopper end, it moves
through the distance specified in a parameter in the direction
away from the machine stopper.
The axis moves back:
In the direction opposite to the one specified in parameter No.
1006
At the speed specified in parameter No. 7181
With the torque specified in parameter No. 7185

Machine stopper
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
The direction, speed, and torque for axis
movement are specified in parameters.

(iii) Steps (iv) and (v) are repeated from the position the axis was
moved back to, in order to maintain a constant speed for axis
movement in which the axis is pushed toward the stopper.
(iv) The specified axis is pushed toward the machine stopper with
a limited–torque operation.
Until the axis bumps into the machine stopper, it moves:
In the direction specified in parameter No. 1006
At the speed specified in parameter No. 7184
With the torque specified in parameter No. 7186

ÃÃÃÃ
Machine stopper
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ The direction, speed, and torque for axis
movement are specified in parameters.

(v) When the axis bumps into the machine stopper end, it moves
through the distance specified in a parameter in the direction
away from the machine stopper.
The axis moves back:
In the direction opposite to the one specified in parameter No.
1006
Through the distance specified in parameter No. 7182
At the speed specified in parameter No. 7185

406
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN

ÃÃÃÃ
Reference position

Machine stopper
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
The direction, speed, distance, and torque for
axis movement are specified in parameters.

Parameter No. 7184 (speed at which the axis bumps into the
machine stopper during a limited–torque operation) should
be set with a value that matches the accuracy of the machine.
When the axis bumps into the machine stopper and is moved
back to a certain point through the distance specified in
parameter No. 7182, this point is set as the reference position
of that axis, and the reference position return completion
signals ZPn (F094#0 or #1) are output.
When the reference position return is completed, a PS alarm
(000) will occur. Turn the power off and on again.
2) After the reference position is set up
When the reference position has been set up (APZx (bit 4 of
parameter No. 1815) = 1, starting the cycle causes the axis
immediately to return to the reference position at a rapid traverse
rate without performing item 1).
(d) Parameter
Torque limit used during execution of the butt–type reference position
7186 setting cycle

Data type : Byte axis

Unit of data : %
Range of valid data : 0 to 100
A current limit override value is specified for individual axes during
execution of the butt–type reference position setting cycle.

NOTE
If the parameter is 0, the override value is assumed to be
100%.

First–time butt speed used during execution of the butt–type reference

7183 position setting cycle

Data type : Word axis

Unit of data :
Range of valid data :
Range of valid data
Increment system Unit of data
IS–B IS–C
Metric machine 1 [mm/min] 30 to 65535 30 to 65535
Inch machine 0.1 [inch/min] 30 to 65535 30 to 48000
Rotary axis 1 [deg/min] 30 to 65535 30 to 65535

407
10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

Second–time butt speed used during execution of the butt–type

7184 reference position setting cycle

Data type : Word axis

Unit of data :
Range of valid data :
Range of valid data
Increment system Unit of data
IS–B IS–C
Metric machine 1 [mm/min] 30 to 65535 30 to 65535
Inch machine 0.1 [inch/min] 30 to 65535 30 to 48000
Rotary axis 1 [deg/min] 30 to 65535 30 to 65535

First–time return distance used during execution of the butt–type

7181 reference position setting cycle

Data type : 2–word axis

Unit of data :
Increment system IS–B IS–C
Metric machine 0.001 0.0001
Inch machine 0.0001 0.00001
Rotary axis 0.001 0.0001

Range of valid data: –99999999 to +99999999

Reference position distance used during execution of the butt–type

7182 reference position setting cycle

Data type : 2–word axis

Unit of data :
Increment system IS–B IS–C
Metric machine 0.001 0.0001
Inch machine 0.0001 0.00001
Rotary axis 0.001 0.0001

Range of valid data: –99999999 to +99999999

Axis movement speed for reference position setting used during execution
7185 of the butt–type reference position setting cycle

Data type: Word axis

Unit of data :
Range of valid data :
Range of valid data
Increment system Unit of data
IS–B IS–C
Metric machine 1 [mm/min] 30 to 65535 30 to 65535
Inch machine 0.1 [inch/min] 30 to 65535 30 to 48000
Rotary axis 1 [deg/min] 30 to 65535 30 to 65535

408
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ZMIx

Data type : Bit axis type

ZMIx : Specifies the reference position setting direction (from
the current axis position to the machine stopper) for the
reference position setting cycle operation as follows:
0 : Positive
1 : Negative

NOTE
When the reference position setting cycle operation is
started in the direction specified in ZMIx (bit 5 of parameter
No. 1006), the algebraic sign (direction of operation) of the
values specified in parameter Nos. 7181 and 7182 should
match the direction set in ZMIx (bit 5 of parameter No.
1006). If the directions do not match, the reference position
setting cycle operation cannot be activated even when a
start signal is entered.

(e) Signal
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F180 CLRCH2 CLRCH1

CLRCH1 : First–axis current limit reached signal

CLRCH2 : Second–axis current limit reached signal
If a current limit is in effect, this signal becomes “1” when the limit
is reached.

409
10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

(f) Timing chart

ZRN mode

Mode signal (input)

MD1, 2, 4, ZRN

Axis selection signal

(input) HS1A, HS1B

Automatic operation
start signal (input) ST

Cycle operation

Automatic operation
started signal (output) OP

Reference position
return completed signal
(output) ZPn N% (NOTE)
100% 100%
Torque limit

Butt direction
Axis speed
Return direction

Torque limit reached

signal (output) CLRCHn

NOTE
N%: Torque limit (%) specified in a parameter

410
 11. MEMORY PROTECTION KEY (INPUT)
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE KEY1 TO KEY4 <G046#3-#6>

MEMORY PROTECTION KEY (INPUT) KEY1 TO KEY4

11 <G046#3Ć#6>

(a) Function
Enables the changing of the memory contents from the MDI panel.
Four signals are provided. The operations that can be performed on
the contents of memory by each signal vary depending on the setting
of bit 7 (KEY) of parameter No. 3290.
When KEY = 0
@ KEY1: Enables the input of tool compensation values.
@ KEY2: Enables the input of setting data and macro variables.
@ KEY3: Enables program loading and editing.
@ KEY4: (Reserved)
When KEY = 1
@ KEY1: Enables program loading and editing, as well as the
input of PMC parameters.
@ KEY2 to KEY4: Not used
(b) Operation
When a signal is set to 0, the associated operations are disabled.
When a signal is set to 1, the associated operations are enabled.
(c) Signal address

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G046 KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1

(d) Parameter

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3290 KEY

KEY For memory protection keys:

0 : The KEY1, KEY2, KEY3, and KEY4 signals are used.
1 : Only the KEY1 signal is used.

NOTE
The functions of the signals depend on whether KEY = 0 or
KEY = 1.

411
12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

12 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

412
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

12.1 When the cycle start signal (ST) is turned to “1”, then turned to “0” when
automatic operation (MEM) is selected, the Power Mate enters automatic
CYCLE START operation state and operation starts. At the same time, the cycle start lamp
SIGNAL (INPUT) ST signal (STL[12.3]) turns to “1”.
<G007#2>
The cycle start signal (ST) is ignored when:
(1) AUTO mode is not selected;
(2) Feed hold signal (*SP) is “0”;
(3) Emergency stop signal (*ESP) is “0”;
(4) External reset signal (ERS) is “1”;
(5) During sequence number search;
(6) Alarm state is displayed on CRT/MDI or DPL/MDI;
(7) NOT READY is displayed on CRT/MDI or DPL/MDI;
(8) STL signal is output during automatic operation start ; or
(9) Axis movement commanded by the previous command is not ended.

When the following occurs during automatic operation, the machine stops
and the STL signal turns to “0”:
(1) *SP signal is “0”;
(2) *ESP signal is “0”;
(3) ERS signal is “1”;
(4) RESET button is pushed;
(5) Commands of one block are ended in single block state;
(6) Manual data input command execution is ended;
(7) End of record code is read during automatic operation;
(8) Axis movement stops by an alarm; or
(9) Mode is switched to manual handle/step feed or jog feed.
Generally, the cycle start signal is input by pushbutton.

Table 12.1 Status of Operation

Signal name Cycle start Feed hold Automatic

lamp lamp operation lamp
State of the CNC STL SPL OP
Cycle start state Ę Ę

Feed hold state Ę Ę

Automatic operation stop Ę

state
Reset state

Ę indicates the signal “1”

(1) Cycle start state
Indicates that the Power Mate is executing automatic operation
command.
(2) Feed hold state
Indicates that the Power Mate is not executing automatic operation
ommand. The command to be executed remain.

413
12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

(3) Automatic operation stop state

Indicates that automatic operation has been completed and stopped.
(4) Reset state
Indicates that the automatic operation has been forcibly terminated.

NOTE
If the sequence number search is performed through MDI
panel during automatic operation, the OP signal turns to “1”.

414
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

12.2 When the feed hold signal (*SP) is turned to “0” during automatic
operation or manual data input, the Power Mate enters the feed hold state
FEED HOLD SIGNAL and stops. At the same time, the cycle start lamp signal (STL[12.3]) turns
(INPUT) *SP to “0” and the feed hold lamp signal (SPL[12.4]) turns to “1”.
<G008#5> The CNC does not enter automatic operation again even if the *SP signal
is “1”. Operation can be restarted by turning the *SP signal to “1”
followed by turning the cycle start signal (ST[12.1]) to “1”, then turning
the ST signal to “0”.

This signal is invalid because the feed hold signal

(*SP) is opened.

ST ST ST

STL STL

SPL

*SP *SP

Fig.12.2 Time Chart for Automatic Operation

If the *SP signal is “0” during the execution of a block where only
M[16.1], S[19.1], or T[21], function code is programmed, the STL signal
turns to “0” immediately, the SPL signal turns to “1” and the automatic
operation is stopped (feed hold state). When the FIN signal is returned,
the corresponding operation is executed. The Power Mate operates until
the execution of the block is completed, then the SPL signal turns to “0”
(the STL signal remains “0”) and the Power Mate switches to the feed
hold state (the same state as the stop state after the execution of one block
in the single block mode).
See Section 12.1 for an explanation of the feed hold state.

415
12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

M03; (block containing only a miscellaneous function)

OP

STL

SPL

MF For high–speed M/S/T interface.

ST

*SP

MFIN

Reset state Automatic opera- Automatic opera- Automatic operation

tion in progress tion paused stopped

G00X100.M03; (block containing a move command and miscellaneous function)

(Feed hold before the completion of movement)

OP

STL

SPL

MF For high–speed M/S/T interface.

ST

*SP
Before the
completion of
movement
MFIN

Reset state Automatic opera- Automatic operation

tion in progress paused

416
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

G00X100.M03; (block containing a move command and miscellaneous function)

(Feed hold after the completion of movement)

OP

STL

SPL

MF For high–speed M/S/T interface.

ST

*SP

After the comple-

tion of movement
MFIN

Reset state Automatic opera- Automatic opera- Automatic operation

tion in progress tion paused stopped

12.3 This signal indicates that the system is operating automatically. Refer to
Section 12.1, cycle start signal ST, for a detailed description.
CYCLE START LAMP
SIGNAL (OUTPUT)
STL <F000#5>

12.4 This signal indicates that automatic operation is temporarily stopped.

Refer to Section 12.2, feed hold signal *SP, for a detailed description.
FEED HOLD LAMP
SIGNAL (OUTPUT)
SPL <F000#4>

417
12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

12.5 The following output signals indicate the status of the Power Mate:
AUTOMATIC (1) Cycle start lamp STL
OPERATION SIGNAL (2) Feed hold lamp SPL
(OUTPUT) OP (3) Automatic operation OP
<F000#7> The following table shows the relationship between the state of the Power
Mate and the signals.
See Section 12.1 for an explanation of the operation statuses.

418
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

12.6 When several part programs are stored in program storage memory
beforehand, a workpiece number can be searched with the workpiece
WORKPIECE number search signals PN0 to PN7 from the machine side.
NUMBER SEARCH First, a number from O001 to O255 is given to each part program as the
SIGNAL (INPUT) PN0 work piece number using address 0. Input the PN0 to PN7 signals from
the machine side in accordance with the table 12.6.
TO PN7 <G009>
Table 12.6
Workpiece No. PN7 PN6 PN5 PN4 PN3 PN2 PN1 PN0
Not searched
0001 Ę
0002 Ę
0003 Ę Ę
: : : : : : : : :
: : : : : : : : :
0254 Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
0255 Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę

Ę : Contacts closed
: Contacts opened
When the cycle start signal ST[12.1] is input in the reset state, a program
with program number specified with PN0 to PN7 is searched and the
program is executed from the beginning.

Power Mate

PN0

PN1

PN2
L L

PN7

+24V

419
12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

NOTE
1 This function can be used only at automatic operation.
2 Always select the program number from O001 to O255.
3 Program numbers from O001 to O255 can be used.
However, programs corresponding to all the program
numbers do not have to be stored in memory.
4 When a program corresponding to the set program number
is not stored in memory, an alarm (No. 59) is generated
when the start button is pressed.
5 Program search is performed only when the start button is
pressed in the reset state. When the control unit is in the
feed stop state (single block stop, etc.) or feed hold state,
program search is not performed even if the start button is
pressed and execution is started from the point specified by
the present execution pointer.
6 To restart program from halfway, press start button after
sequence number search in AUTO mode. The external
program number search is not performed and program
execution starts from the block which is searched by
sequence number search, because the OP signal outputs
by sequence number search in AUTO mode and the NC
reset state is released.
7 When the start button is pressed with all PN0 to PN7 open,
program search is not performed but execution is started
from the point specified by the present execution pointer.
To restart operation from a point within a program or from the
start of a program which cannot be searched by this
function, perform the usual sequence number search or
program number search operation (MDI panel operation),
the turn off (open) all the PN0 to PN7 and press the start
button.

420
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

12.7 When the machine lock signal MLK turns to “1”, operation is controlled
and the moving command does not output to the servo whatever in
MACHINE LOCK manual or automatic operation. The program continues to execute,
SIGNAL (INPUT) MLK performing all operations except the output of servo commands. The
<G044#1> modal G codes and the position display are updated. This function is used
to check the program, and is only performed for move commands. M, S,
or T function is executed normally, and the FIN signal is sent to the CNC.
When the MLK signal turns to “1”, then “0”, during pulse distribution,
it is enabled immediately. The machine axes’ movement are accelerated
(“1”) and decelerated (“0”) by the signal changes.
When the MLK signal turns to “1” and automatic reference position return
(G28) is commanded, positioning command value is displayed on the
CRT but reference position return distance is not shown. (Fig. 12.7)

Command
speed

MLK MLK
OFF ON
Machine
movement

Position
display

421
12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

12.8 This signal is enabled in the MEM mode.

SINGLE BLOCK When the single block signal SBK turns to “1” during automatic
operation, operation stops at the end of the executing block and the cycle
SIGNAL (INPUT) SBK start lamp signal STL [12.3] turns to “0”, but the feed hold lamp signal
<G046#1> SPL [12.4] does not turn to “1”. Each time the cycle start signal ST[12.1]
is input thereafter, the program for one block is read from memory and its
commands are executed. Operation can be switched to INC or JOG by
the mode select signal under single block stop state.
When the SBK signal turns to “0”, normal automatic operation is
performed.

Operation in thread When the SBK signal turns to ”1” during thread cutting, operation stops
cutting after execution of the first non-thread cutting block after the thread cutting
command.

SBK

Program read
Positioning to
Positioning Approach Drilling and retreat next position

ST ST ST ST

STL STL STL STL

SPL SPL SPL

SPL is not output.

Fig.12.8 Single Block in Cannot Cycle

422
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

12.9 (Function)
This signal selects the dry run to set the feedrate of automatic
DRY RUN SIGNAL operation to the dry run speed set by a parameter (No.1410)
(INPUT) DRN instead of a command value .
<G046#7 > (Operation)
When this signal turns to “1”:
(1) In a dry run of automatic operation, rather than using a cutting
feedrate specified by a program, the CNC uses the value obtained by
applying the manual feedrate override to the dry speed set by
parameter No. 1410. The acceleration/deceleration time constant
remains that for the cutting feed. If rapid traverse selection signal
RT[7.3] remains “1”, the tool is fed at the maximum cutting feedrate.
(2) The rapid traverse in automatic operation is also set to the dry run
speed by parameter RDR (No.1401#6). If rapid traverse selection
signal RT is also “1”, the axis is fed at rapid traverse as before.
When RT is low, the time constant for manual continuous feed is
employed as the acceleration/deceleration time constant during the
dry run The time constant for rapid traverse is used when RT is high.
(3) If this signal changed during the travel, the axis decelerates to a stop
before accelerating to the specified feed rate.

12.10 (Function)
These signals override the cutting feedrate. Eight binary code
FEED RATE signals correspond to override values as follows:
OVERRIDE SIGNAL 7
(INPUT) *FV0 TO *FV7 Override value + ȍ (2 i Vi)
<G012> i +0
Vi=0 when *FVi is “1” and Vi=1 when *FVi is “0”
These signals have the following weight.
*FV0 : 1%, *FV1 : 2%, *FV2 : 4%, *FV3 : 8%
*FV4 : 16%, *FV5 : 32%, *FV6 : 64%, *FV7 : 128 %
When all signals are “0”, they are regarded as overriding 0% in the same
way as when all signals are “1”.
Thus, the override is selectable in steps over a range of 0 to 254%.
(Operation)
Actual feedrate is obtained by multiplying the speed specified
in cutting feed in automatic operation mode by the override
value selected by this signal.
The override is regarded as 100%, regardless of this signal, in
the following cases:
D Override cancel signal OVC[12.11] is ”1”.
D Cutting is being performed as part of the canned tapping
cycle.

12.11 Feedrate override is fixed to 100% while this signal is “1” (Refer to
Sec.12.10). This signal does not effect rapid traverse override or spindle
OVERRIDE CANCEL override. The feedrate override is effective when this signal is “0”.
SIGNAL (INPUT) OVC
<G006#4>

423
12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

12.12 This signal is effective during automatic operation. Setting the BDT1 -
9 to “1” ignores information read after the appropriate code is sent, until
OPTIONAL BLOCK the end of block code (EOB code). The code for each signal is shown
SKIP SIGNAL (INPUT) below, and Figs 12.12 (a) - (d) show examples
BDT1, BDT2-BDT9 Input signal Heading code ignored
<G044#0,G045> BDT(BDT1) /a letter or /1 (Note 1)
BDT2 /2
BDT3 /3
BDT4 /4
BDT5 /5
BDT6 /6
BDT7 /7
BDT8 /8
BDT9 /9

NOTE
BDT1 includes a conventional BDT function. Setting BDT1
to “1” ignores the block to be read when the slash code is
followed by a letter.

EOB code Slash EOB code

F;/ N 1 2 3 X 5 6 FFFF , N 7 8 ; FF

Ignored

Fig.12.12 (a) An Optional Block Skip Signal and Ignored

Data

NOTE
Setting the BDT1 - 9 to “1” when a block including a slash
code is already being read does not ignore that block,
because the BDT signal only becomes “1” after the slash
code is read.

FF ; / 3 N 1 2 3 X 5 6 FF ; N 7 8 FF ; / 3 N 9 0 1 Z 1 2F ;

BDT3 ON

OFF Not ignored Ignored

Fig.12.12 (b) An Optional Block Skip Signal and Ignored Data

424
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

NOTE
Setting the BDT1 - 9 to “1” when a block including a slash
code is already being read does not ignore that block,
because the BDT signal only becomes “1” after the slash
code is read.

FF ; / 2 N 1 2 3 X 5 6 FF ; N 7 8 FF ; / 2 N 9 0 1 Z 1 2 FF ;

OFF
BDT2 ON

Ignored Not ignored

Fig.12.12 (c) An Optional Block Skip Signal and Ignored Data

NOTE
When a block includes more than one slash code, matching
even one corresponding BDTx ignores the entire block.

FF ; /2 / 3 / 4 / 5 N 1 2 3 X 5 6 F F F ; / 2 N 1 2 4 X 3 6FF ;

ON
BDT3
Ignored Not ignored

Fig.12.12 (d) An Optional Block Skip Signal and Ignored Data

425
12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

12.13 When the MIn (n:1 or 2) signal turns to “1”, the algebraical sign of the axis
command value in MEM mode is inverted. This function is not available
MIRROR IMAGE in JOG mode or for the movement between intermediate position and
SIGNAL (INPUT) MIn reference position given by the G28 automatic reference position return.
<G106#0, #1> The mirror image signal can be turned to “1” in the following cases:
(1) During offset cancel;
(2) When the CNC is in the automatic operation stop state and not in the
feed hold state (Refer to Sec.12.1).

X
B

A
B’
Z
0
When MI1 signal turned to “1” at point A

Fig.12.13 Mirror Image

426
 13. AXIS SELECT SIGNAL FOR HANDLE
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE INTERRUPT (INPUT)

AXIS SELECT SIGNAL FOR HANDLE INTERRUPT (INPUT)

13 HS1IA, HS1IB, HS2IA, AND HS2IB<G041#0, #1, #4, #5>

This signal is provided to select the interrupt axis using the (optional)
handle interrupt function . With this function employed, the movement
by the manual pulse generator can be overlapped with movement of an
axis by rotating the manual pulse generator during automatic operation
mode.
The method of axis selection is the same as that for manual handle feed.
Specifications
(1) Handle interruptible conditions
(a) The mode should be other than HANDLE or TEACH IN
HANDLE.
(b) The system is not machine-locked [12.7] or interlocked [8].
(c) The select signal (HS1A-HS2B) [9.1] of the axis to be interrupted
should be 1.
(2) Move amount by the handle interrupt
The move amount by the handle interrupt is determined by the manual
pulse generator scale and the handle feed magnification (
1,
10,

100). However, ¡ß100 is not selectable because the interrupt move
is neither accelerated nor decelerated. The move amount per division
at
1 is 0.001 mm (metric output) or 0.0001 inch (inch output).

NOTE
This signal cannot be used with the 2–path Power Mate–D.

427
14. SIGNALS IN CUTTING MODE (OUTPUT)
CUT <F002#6> PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

SIGNALS IN CUTTING MODE (OUTPUT)

14 CUT <F002#6>

Signal displayed during movement in cutting mode is output to PMC.

[Signal] CUT
[Function]
Signal in cutting mode
1 : Signal is output during movement in cutting mode.
0 : Signal is output when stopped, during movement in rapid
traverse mode, and during manual mode.

NOTE
If interlock *IT or *RILK is applied during movement in
cutting mode, the signal becomes 1.

428
 15. SCREEN STATE SIGNALS (OUTPUT)
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE DPL0, DPL1, DPL2 <F254 #0 to #2>

SCREEN STATE SIGNALS (OUTPUT) DPL0, DPL1, DPL2

15 <F254 #0 TO #2>

The DPL/MDI screen state is output to the PMC in a code signal

consisting of 3 bits.
DPL2 DPL1 DPL0 Screen State
0 0 0 Position display
0 0 1 Program
0 1 0 Offset/Macro variables/Setting
0 1 1 Parameter/Diagnose/Pitch error
1 0 0 Alarm/Message

429
16. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

16 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION

430
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 16. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION

16.1
M FUNCTION (1) Miscellaneous function code signal (output) M00-M31<F010-
F013>
Miscellaneous function strobe signal MF<F007#0>
Complete signal FIN<G004#3>
When address M followed by an 8-digit number is commanded in the
MEM mode, the 8-digit number is sent by binary code. When the time
set by parameter no.3010 (TMF .... standard setting 80 msec) has
elapsed after code signal output, the MF signal turns to ”1”. Read the
M code signal and perform the corresponding operation. After the
operation specified by the M function is finished, turn the finish
signal FIN to ”1”. When FIN turns to ”1”, and the time set by
parameter no.3011 (TFIN ..... standard setting 80 msec) has elapsed,
the MF signal turns to ”0”. The FIN signal turns to ”0” after MF turns
to ”0”, all the M code signals turn to ”0” and the CNC advances to the
next block. When there is a move command in the same block, the
CNC advances to the next block after the end of the move command.
When there is a move command and an M function command in the
same block, the M function command is sent concurrently with the
move operation. To perform an M function operation after a move
operation, gate the distribution end signal DEN [16.2] at the machine
side.

NOTE
1 M codes are buffered, except for M00, M01, M02, and M30.
2 M98 and M99 (subprogram call and end) are not sent to the
machine side.
3 For M00, M01, M02 and M30 only, M code and MF signals
are sent ; the control of these signals shall be designed on
the PMC side.
4 When the automatic operation is stopped by M02 or M30,
it is necessary to send the external reset signal from the
machine side to the CNC, instead of the FIN signal, When
the external reset signal is returned against the M02 or M30,
the control returns to the top of the program recently
executed and enters the reset state. When the FIN signal
is returned, the control returns to the beginning of the
program recently executed and executes it from the top..
5 M800 to M899 are reserved by the simultaneous block start
function.

431
16. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

The code signal, read signal, and finish signal timing is shown below:

M command read Next command read

M code signal
M00 to M31
MF
FIN
TMF
TFIN
DEN
TMF, TFIN are set by parameter.
TMF (no. 3010) : 16 to 32767msec (16msec steps)
TFIN (no. 3011) : 16 to 32767msec (16msec steps)

Fig.16.1 (a) When There Is No Move Command

M command read Next command read

M code signal
M00 to M31
MF
FIN
Move operation
DEN

TMF TFIN

Fig.16.1 (b) When There is a Move Command in the Same Block

(2) M codes in canned cycle ( for hole machining)

In this CNC, twelve kinds of canned cycles are available. However,
the M code output timing (such as M code, MF signals, etc.) is the
same as that when M code is specified independently. (See (a) above.)
Timing charts for canned cycle operations in hole machining are
shown in Fig. 16.1 (c) to (h).

432
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 16. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION

(Note) It is possible to not output M05

code by using parameter M5T (no. 5101#6).
X, Y

Z
Z
Z Z
Dwell Dwell

(Note) (Note)
M05 M03 M05 M04

MF MF MF MF Next block
(G98 mode)

FIN FIN FIN Next block

FIN
(G99 mode)

Fig.16.1 (c) G74 (Counter Tapping Cycle) Timing

X, Y X or Y

X
or Y
Z
Z

Z
Dwell

(Note)
M05 M19 M03 M03
Return to MF MF
MF MF initial level in
G98 mode
(Note) It is possible to not output

ÃÃ
M05 code by using parameter M5B FIN FIN
FIN FIN
(no.5101#7).

ÃÃ
Next block (G98 mode)
Next block (G99 mode)

Fig.16.1 (d) G76 (Fine Boring Cycle) Timing

433
16. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

X, Y

Z
Z
Z

Dwell Dwell

(Note) (Note)
M05 M04 M05 M03
MF MF MF MF

Next block
FIN FIN FIN FIN (G99 mode)

Next block
(G99 mode)

Fig.16.1 (e) G84 (Tapping Cycle) Timing

X, Y

Return to initial level in G98 mode

Z
Z

M05 M03 M03

MF MF MF

FIN FIN FIN Next block

(G99 mode)

Next block (G99 mode)

Fig.16.1 (f) G86 (Boring Cycle) Timing

434
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 16. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION

X or Y X or Y
X, Y
X or Y X or Y

Z Z
Dwell

(Note 1) (Note 2)
M05 M19
M03 M05 M19 M03
MF MF MF MF MF MF

FIN FIN FIN FIN FIN FIN

(Note 1) Back boring cycle is not used in G99 mode but in G98 mode.

(Note 2) It is possible to not output M05 code using parameter M5B (no. 5101#7).

Fig.16.1 (g) G87 (Back Boring Cycle) Timing

X, Y

Manual feed Cycle start

Z
Z

Dwell Z
Z

M05 M03
MF Return to initial level in G98 MF
mode or R point level in G99
mode.
FIN FIN

Fig.16.1 (h) G88 (Boring Cycle) Timing

435
16. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

16.2 When an M, S, or T function is commanded in the MEM or MDI mode,

and axial movement ends but the FIN signal for the M, S, or T command
DISTRIBUTION END is not issued, the distribution end signal DEN turns to “1”. The DEN turns
SIGNAL (OUTPUT) to “1” until the FIN signal for the M, S, or T command is issued even in
DEN <F001#3> the block in which no axial movement exists. When the operation ends
by arrival of the FIN signal for the M, S, or T function, the DEN signal
turns to “0”. Use this signal to discriminate between simultaneous
execution of an auxiliary (M, S, or T) function with the start of movement,
and execution after the end of movement when an auxiliary function and
move command are specified in the same block.
Fig. 16.2 shows the time chart of this signal.

Auxiliary function is not Auxiliary function is Auxiliary function is included

included included

Commad

MF

FIN

Feedrate

Axis
move

DEN
Not output because FIN
DEN is not output Output because FIN is not
already returned
yet returned at this point

Fig.16.2 Distribution End Signal and Other Signals

436
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 16. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION

16.3 Power Mate sends M decode signals DM00, DM01, DM02, DM30 to
PMC in parallel with code signals M00, M01, M02, and M30.
M DECODE SIGNALS
The in-position condition applies to these decode signals; they are sent
(OUTPUT) DM00, after the positioning has been completed when the move command is
DM01, DM02, DM30 specified in the same block. They are not sent if the FIN signal returns
<F009#7, #6, #5, #4> before the positioning ends.
The signal output timing is the same as in the binary code signal of normal
M function.
For details, refer to Sec. 16.1. Use DM02 or DM30 as a reset or reset &
rewind function. DM00 and DM01 are employable as the program stop
and optional stop, respectively.
The finish signal FIN of M00 and M01 shall turn to “1” when the operator
presses the cycle start button in this method.

Positioning in next block

X, Y X, Y

Output transistor
ON

ZPZ/EF

FIN
Machine side contact close
TFIN Machine side operation

Fig.16.3 Time Chart for External Operation Function Signal

16.4 If this signal is turned ”1”, binary code signals and M read command
signal is not output, even when executing M, S, or T function block.
AUXILIARY
FUNCTION LOCK NOTE
SIGNAL (INPUT) AFL 1 Internal processing of M98 and M99 is done, regardless of
<G005#6> the AFL signal.
2 M00, M01, M02, and M03 are output even if the AFL signal
is “1”.
3 An analog voltage for the spindle is output even when the
AFL signal is ”1.”

437
16. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

16.5 (1) OUTLINE

This function allows for easier waiting for other machines and
WAITING FUNCTION peripheral equipment through the specially prepared M code.
(OUTPUT) WAT1 TO
WAT4 <F209#0 TO NOTE
This signal cannot be used with the 2–path Power Mate–D.
#3>, (INPUT) WFN1
TO WFN4 <G214#0
TO #3> (2) SPECIFICATIONS
Waiting M code: M801 - M815
When the waiting M code is specified, a corresponding signal (WAT1
- WAT4) is output. Furthermore, that block waits for the
corresponding complete signal (WFN1 - WFN4) to be input before
starting operation.
Command mode

N__ M8ĘĘ G__X___F___ ;

M8ĘĘ: Waiting M code
(M801 - M815)

Table 16.5 Waiting M Code and Input and Output Signal

Complete input signal

Output signal
M code condition
WAT4 WAT3 WAT2 WAT1 WFN4 WFN3 WFN2 WFN1
M801 0 0 0 1 1
M802 0 0 1 0 1
M803 0 0 1 1 1 1
M804 0 1 0 0 1
M805 0 1 0 1 1 1
M806 0 1 1 0 1 1
M807 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
M808 1 0 0 0 1
M809 1 0 0 1 1 1
M810 1 0 1 0 1 1
M811 1 0 1 1 1 1 1
M812 1 1 0 0 1 1
M813 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
M814 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
M815 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

: either 0 or 1 is acceptable.

438
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 16. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION

Waiting M code Waiting M code Block Nn3

Nn1M8ĘĘ command Nn2M8ĘĘ command execution that
does not include
Nn1 axis movement Nn1 axis movement Nn2 axis movement waiting M code.
command execution wait command execution command execution
Block
execution
TWB (NOTE 2)

Output signal
(WAT1 - WAT4)

Complete input
signal (WFN1 - WFN4) (NOTE 1)

Fig.16.5 (a) Block Operation Including Waiting Signal M Code

NOTE
1 As shown in Table 2 when the waiting M code is specified,
the output signal (WAT1 - WAT4) is turned ”1” and when the
complete input signal condition is satisfied everything is
turned ”0”.
Note however that when the waiting M code is specified and
the corresponding complete input signal condition is
already satisfied, the access movement command is
executed without delay, just the same as if the waiting signal
M code command had not been issued. In this kind of case,
the output signal (WAT1 - WAT4) is never turned ”1”.
2 As shown in Fig. 16.5 (a), when the waiting M code
specification is carried out by continuous block, if the
complete input signal of the previous block cannot be turned
”0” between TWB it is possible that the it will be taken as the
complete input signal of the waiting M code specified by the
next block and therefore a combination of appropriate M
codes should be selected.
3 Example of waiting M code continuous command
Fig. 16.5 (b), (c) show examples of subsequent block axis
movement commands that are executed continuously and
the waiting condition when the waiting M code is specified
by continuous block.

439
16. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

M803 command block M801 command block

Waiting condition Execution Execution

Block execution

Output signal WAT1 Not output

WAT2

Complete input signal WFN1

WFN2

Fig.16.5 (b) An Example of a Subsequent Block Axis

Movement Command Being Continuously Executed

M801 command block M803 command block

Waiting condition Execution Waiting condition Execution

Block execution

Output signal WAT1

WAT2

Complete input signal WFN1

WFN2

Fig.16.5 (c) An Example of a Subsequent Block Axis Movement Command Not Being Continuously
Executed

(3) SIGNAL
(a) Address Map
1 DI signal
PMC ³ CNC
PMC
ADDRESS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G214 WFN4 WFN3 WFN2 WFN1

2 DO signal
CNC ³ PMC
PMC
ADDRESS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

F209 WAT4 WAT3 WAT2 WAT1

: This signal is unrelated to this function.

440
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 16. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION

16.6 This function can be used to simultaneously start blocks on up to four

Power Mates.
SIMULTANEOUS
BLOCK START M821 NOTE
TO M827 This signal can be used with neither the 2–path Power
Mate–D nor Power Mate–F.

Synchronous M codes : M821 to M827

When a synchronous M code is issued for the master unit, operation waits
until the corresponding M codes are issued for the slave units. The Power
Mate unit handles synchronous M codes. They do not need to be
processed in the PMC.

Instruction format
N__ M82X G__X__Y__F__ ;
M82X: Synchronous M code (M821 to M827)
Table.16.6 (a) Synchronous M Codes

Slave One unit

Two units
nits Three units
nits
Master #0 #1 #2 #3
#1, #2 #1, #3 #2, #3 #1, #2, #3
#0 M824 M822 M821
M826 M825 M823 M827
#0, #2 #0, #3 #2, #3 #0, #2, #3
#1 M821 M824 M822
M825 M823 M826 M827
#0, #1 #0, #3 #1, #3 #0, #1, #3
#2 M822 M821 M824
M823 M826 M825 M827
#0, #1 #0, #2 #1, #2 #0, #1, #2
#3 M824 M822 M821
M826 M825 M823 M827
Example 1)
When simultaneous block start is performed for units #0 and #1
Specify M824 for #0.
Specify M821 for #1.
Example 2)
When simultaneous block start is performed for units #0, #1, and #2
Specify M826 for #0.
Specify M825 for #1.
Specify M823 for #2.
Program example (simultaneous block start of units #0 and #1)
Program for unit #0 Program for unit #1
· · ·
· ·
· ·
M824 ·

G01 X __ Y__ F__ ; M821
· G01 A__ B__ F__ ;
· ·
· ·
·

441
16. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

M82X codes cause units to wait for each other before starting operation.
Blocks
and  will start simultaneously with the interpolation level.
In other words, if a feedrate F is set accurately, operation will be the same
as with simultaneous 4-axis interpolation. However, in this case, the
servo gain and time constants need to be the same.

NOTE
The axes used for simultaneous block start are fixed. They
are determined by the way cables are connected and by
specifications within the program. The axes used cannot be
changed partway through the program.

Examples

When simultaneous block start is performed for the first and second units,
it cannot later be performed for the first and third units.
If this is attempted, operation such as the following may occur.
#0 #1 #2
· · ·
· · ·
· · ·
· · ·

M824 X30. Y20. · ·
· M821 A40. B15. ·
· · M822 Z50.
· · ·
M822 X50 · ·
· · ·
·
Blocks
and  are started simultaneously and an attempt is made to
start blocks  and  simultaneously. However, in the case that block
 is already being executed before block
and , block  will be
started simultaneously with block
.
(1) Basic connection
Power Mates are connected with a CRT/MDI serial link. A CRT/MDI
does not necessarily need to be connected.

CRT/MDI unit

CRT/MDI serial link

Power Mate–D Power Mate–D Power Mate–D Power Mate–D

#0 #1 #2 #3

442
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 16. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION

(2) Groups
With one CRT link, simultaneous block start can be performed for up
to four Power Mates. Each combination of Power Mates for which
simultaneous block start is performed is called a group.
Simultaneous block start can be performed for up to four Power
Mates in any one group.

Group 1

CRT #0 #1 #2 #3 Intermediate unit

Group 2

#4 #5 #6 #7 Intermediate unit

Group 3

#8 #9 #10 #11 Intermediate unit

Group 4

#12 #13 #14 #15 Terminal unit

(3) Terminal unit

A terminal unit must be connected to the last Power Mate in CRT link.
When no CRT/MDI unit is connected, install a terminal unit in the
first Power Mate also.

Last of
CRT/MDI
Power Mate

(Built–in terminal Terminal unit

unit)

(4) Intermediate unit

An intermediate unit must be connected in between groups for which
simultaneous block start is performed.

CRT/MDI Group 1 Group 2

Intermediate unit Terminal unit

443
16. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

(5) Connection cable

When simultaneous block start is not performed, intermediate units
are not necessary. However, the cable connection is different.
1) When simultaneous block start is performed

J43 J44 J44 J44 J44 J44

CRT #0 #1 #2 #3 Intermediate unit

#4 J44 #5 J44 #6 J44 #7 Terminal unit

2) When simultaneous block start is not performed

J45 J46 J46 J46 J46 J46

CRT #0 #1 #2 #3

#4 J46 #5 J46 #6 J46 #7 Terminal unit

(6) Unit numbers

Unit numbers in groups are set as shown below.

Group 1: 0 to 3
Group 2: 4 to 7
Group 3: 8 to 11
Group 4: 12 to 15

Even if group 1 has less than four units, units in group 2 are still
numbered starting from 4. Power mate unit numbers are set with the
rotary switch on the front of the control section.
(7) Example of connection
Example 1)
When one CRT is used for simultaneous block of a group of three
Power Mate–D units and a group of two Power Mate–D units
When group 1 has three units and group 2 has two units, the unit
numbers are as shown below.

J43 J44 J44 J44 J44 J44

CRT #0 #1 #2 #3 Intermediate unit

#4 J44 #5 Terminal unit

444
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 16. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION

Example 2)
When one CRT is used with five independent Power Mate–D units
and for simultaneous block start of a group of two Power Mate–D
units
Connect group 1 to the CRT first, then five independent Power
Mate–D units in succession.

J43 J44 J44 J44

CRT #0 #1 Intermediate unit

#4 J46 #5 J46 #6 J46 #7 J46 #8 Terminal unit

Example 3)
When only independent Power Mate–D units are connected with one
CRT

J45 J46 J46 J46 J46 J46

CRT #0 #1 #2 #3 #4

J46 J46 J46 J46

#5 #6 #7 #8 #9 Terminal unit

When simultaneous block start is not performed, no intermediate

units are necessary between Power Mate–D units.
(8) Parameter
6650 MATR SYNC

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SYNC 1 : Synchronize interpolation reference signals.
(Set to 1 when performing simultaneous block start.)
0 : Do not synchronize interpolation reference signals.
MATR 1 : Make this the master unit during synchronization of
interpolation reference signals.
0 : Make this the slave unit during synchronization of
interpolation reference signals.
When simultaneous block start is performed, one unit in a
link is the master unit and the rest are slave units. Power Mate
whose unit number is #0 is made the master unit.

NOTE
The system will not startup if there is no master or there is
more than one.

In this case, the following operation can be performed to set

which unit is the master and which units are slaves.
Turn on the power while holding down the [.] and [M] key
to make a unit a master (SYNC = 1, MATR = 1).
Turn on the power while holding down the [.] and [S] key to
make a unit a slave (SYNC = 1, MATR = 0).

445
16. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

(9) Supplementary

Table.16.6 (b) Second Group of Synchronous M Codes

Slave One unit

nits
Two units nits
Three units
Master #4 #5 #6 #7
#5, #6 #5, #7 #6, #7 #5, #6, #7
#4 M824 M822 M821
M826 M825 M823 M827
#4, #6 #4, #7 #6, #7 #4, #6, #7
#5 M821 M824 M822
M825 M823 M826 M827
#4, #5 #4, #7 #5, #7 #4, #5, #7
#6 M822 M821 M824
M823 M826 M825 M827
#4, #5 #4, #6 #5, #6 #4, #5, #6
#7 M824 M822 M821
M826 M825 M823 M827

Table.16.6 (c) Thrid Group of Synchronous M Codes

Slave One unit

Two units
nits Three units
nits
Master #8 #9 #10 #11
#9, #10 #9, #11 #10, #11 #9, #10, #11
#8 M824 M822 M821
M826 M825 M823 M827
#8, #10 #8, #11 #10, #11 #8, #10, #11
#9 M821 M824 M822
M825 M823 M826 M827
#8, #9 #8, #11 #9, #11 #8, #10, #11
#10 M822 M821 M824
M823 M826 M825 M827
#8, #9 #8, #10 #9, #10 #8, #9, #10
#11 M824 M822 M821
M826 M825 M823 M827

Table.16.6 (d) Fourth Group of Synchronous M Codes

Slave One unit

Two units
nits Three units
nits
Master #12 #13 #14 #15
#13, #14 #13, #15 #14, #15 #13, #14, #15
#12 M824 M822 M821
M826 M825 M823 M827
#12, #14 #12, #15 #14, #15 #12, #14, #15
#13 M821 M824 M822
M825 M823 M826 M827
#12, #13 #12, #15 #13, #15 #12, #13, #15
#14 M822 M821 M824
M823 M826 M825 M827
#12, #13 #12, #14 #13, #14 #12, #13, #14
#15 M824 M822 M821
M826 M825 M823 M827

446
 17. HIGH-SPEED M/S/T INTERFACE
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE SIGNAL (INPUT)

HIGHĆSPEED M/S/T INTERFACE SIGNAL (INPUT)

17 MFIN, SFIN, TFIN <G005#0, #2, #3>

(a) Function
The PMC/CNC interface is controlled using this signal, allowing
high-speed processing of M/S/T functions.

(b) Control Contents

When MF and MFIN ststes are opposed, the CNC assumes that an M code
is being issued, and waits until the signal states are identical (the PMC
switches MFIN). When the same state is reached, the M function is
completed and the CNC shifts to the next block.

When the status of bits indicating M/S/T function end (e.g., MFIN) and
the code output end (e.g., MF) are different, the CNC is placed in the state
in which the M/S/T command is transmitted. The PMC then switches the
end signal sfter machine tool processing, so that the bit status indicates
M/S/T function end, and the CNC status indicates all M/S/T function
processes are complete.

For example, when a 2-block M command continues:

M command

M code

MF

MFIN

447
18. PMC KEY DATA REFERENCE
FUNCTION (OUTPUT) PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

PMC KEY DATA REFERENCE FUNCTION (OUTPUT)

18 <F210 TO F218>

448
 18. PMC KEY DATA REFERENCE
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE FUNCTION (OUTPUT)

The DPL/MDI key input status is output to the PMC.

NOTE
When three keys or more are pushed at the same time, the
key data cannot be connectly read.

Signal name Key Signal name Key Signal name Key Signal name Key

K0 ········ KPRD ··· F KPOS ··· KN ·······

<F210#0> 0 <F211#3> → <F213#0> POS <F217#1> N

K1 ········ KNO ····· &@ KPRG ··· KG ········ G

<F210#1> 1 <F211#4> No. <F213#1> PRGRM <F217#2> G

R
K2 ········ KSLH ··· / KVAR ··· MENU KR ········
2 K
<F210#2> <F211#5> AND <F213#2> VAR <F217#3>
D/R

AX1/AX2
K3 ········ KEOB ··· EOB KPRM ·· KX ········
DGNOS AXIS
<F210#3> 3 <F211#6> STK <F213#3> PARAM <F217#4>
X

K4 ········ KCAN ·· KALM ·· OPR KF ········ F

<F210#4> 4 <F211#7> CAN <F213#5> ALARM <F218#3> F

K5 ········ KALT ··· KDWN · KM ······· M

<F210#5> 5 <F212#0> ALTER <F214#0> ± <F218#4> RD

K6 ········ KINS ···· KUP ····· KS ········ S

<F210#6> 6 <F212#1> INSRT <F214#1> ° <F218#5> WRT

K7 ········ KDLT ··· KP ········ P KT ········ T

<F210#7> 7 <F212#2> DELET <F214#4> I <F218#6> NOT

#
K8 ········ KINP ···· KQ ········ Q KSHRP
<F211#0> 8 <F212#3> INPUT <F214#5> <F218#7>
OR
J

K9 ········ KWRT ·· KH ········ H

<F211#1> 9 <F212#4> WRITE <F214#6> SUB

KMNS ·· –/+ KRED ··· KO ········ O

READ
<F211#2> ² <F212#6> <F217#0> Y

[Function] 1 : The key is pressed.

0 : The key is not pressed.

449
19. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

19 SPINDLE FUNCTIONS

450
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 19. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS

19.1
S FUNCTION SIGNAL (1) Spindle function code signal S00 to S31 <F022-F025>
(OUTPUT) Spindle function strobe signal SF <F007#2>
End signal FIN <G004#3>
The value specified by the S command S0 to S99999 is sent in binary
code with automatic operation or manual data input. The S code read
command signal SF, which gives timing of the code reading on the
PMC side, turns to ”1” after the time set by parameter TMF no. 3010
has passed since the code signal was output. The S code signal is read
and the corresponding operation is completed by the CNC after the
SF signal turns to ”1”.
After the end of the S function operation, the FIN signal must turn to
”1”; the SF signal then turns to ”0”. When the FIN signal turns to ”1”
after the SF signal turns to ”0”, the CNC advances to the next block.
The method of handling these signals is the same as for M function.
However, the code signal is held until a new S code is commanded.
When another M or T code is commanded with an S code in one block
of the program, the FIN signal should turn to ”1” only after
completing all the operations.

S command read Next block read

S code output

SF
Held until new
FI TMF S code com-
TFIN manded

TMF, TFIN are set by parameter.

TMF (No. 3010) : 16 to 256msec (16msec steps)
TFIN (No. 3011) : 16 to 256msec (16msec steps)

Fig.19.1 (a) S Function Time Chart

(2) Gear select signal GR1O, GR2O, GR3O<F034#0-#2>, Spindle

enable signal ENB<F001#4>
By specifying from S0 to S99999 in automatic or MDI operation, the
CNC outputs an analog voltage command corresponding to the
spindle speed. There is a two-speed (GR1O and GR2O) or
three-speed range (GR1O, GR2O, GR3O), set by parameter Nos.
3741-3743, and the gear selection signal is output simultaneously.
When the gear selection signal is chagned, the SF signal is output at
the same time (parameter SFA No. 3705#6).
The meaning of the gear signals is shown below :
Gear 2-stage Gear 3-stage Remarks
GR1O Low Low Low : Low Gear
GR2O High Middle Middle : Middle Gear
GR3O High High : High Gear

451
19. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

(a) S analog output gear change method A (Fig. 19.1 (b))

Spindle motor speed command

(Analog voltage command)
for gear 2-stage
10V

Upper limit
of spindle
speed (Vc)
GR1O (GR3O)
GR2O
(GR1O) (GR2O)
C

Spindle speed
command
(S code input)

A B

Vmin Vmax Vmax Vmax ( ) for gear 3-stage

A
A
B
C

4095 4095 4095 4095

Fig.19.1 (b) S Code Input and Output Voltage

Set the following values as parameters:

D Constant Vmax: for upper limit of spindle speed (parameter
No. 3736)
Upper limit of spindle speed
Vmax = 4095
Spindle speed at command voltage 10V

D Constant Vmin; for lower limit of spindle speed (parameter

No. 3075)
Lower limit of spindle speed
Vmin = 4095
Spindle speed at command voltage 10V

D Spindle speed A (rpm) ; at command voltage 10V and low

gear (parameter No. 3741)
D Spindle speed B (rpm) ; at command voltage 10V and high
gear (or middle-high gear)
(parameter No. 3742)
D Spindle speed C (rpm) ; at command voltage 10V and high
gear (parameter No. 3743)

NOTE
Using the above settings, spindle speed command (0 to
10V) and gear select signal (GR3O, GR2O, GR1O) are
output according to the commanded S code.
However, in case of G84 (tapping cycle) or G74 (counter
tapping cycle) the gear shift speed is changed by parameter
SGT(No. 3705#3). In this case, gear shift is performed at
the speed set by parameter Nos. 3761 and 3762 (Fig.19.1
(c)).

452
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 19. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS

Spindle motor speed command Vc: Voltage for upper limit of spindle motor speed
(analog voltage output)

10V

Upper limit
of spindle
speed (Vc) GR1O

GR2O

Spindle speed
command
(S code input)

D A E B C
D : Gear shift point (parameter no. 3761) for low/high speed change (or low/medium speed change) (set
by parameter as rpm value) during tapping.
E : Gear shift point (parameter no. 3762) (3-stage gear) for medium/high speed change (set by parameter
as rpm value) during tapping.

Fig.19.1 (c) S code Input and Output Voltage (in Tapping)

(b) S analog output gear change method B

The speed (rpm) at which the low-speed and the high-speed gears
are changed over can be set as a parameter (Nos. 3751, 3752) by
setting parameter SGB No. 3705# 2. When a 3-step gear is used,
it is possible to set the speeds (rpm) for switching low-speed and
medium-speed gears, and medium-speed and high-speed gears,
using parameters Nos. 3751, 3752.

NOTE
This function is available only with S12 bit output and S
analog output.

453
19. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

10 V

VC
VH
GR3O
VL
GR1O GR2O

Spindle rotation
command

A B C (S code input)

Vmin Vmaxl Vmaxh Vmax

A
A
B
C

4095 4095 4095 4095

VC : Voltage corresponding to the upper limit of output value to spindle motor.

VH : Voltage corresponding to the upper limit of output value to spindle motor with high-speed gears (medium speed
gear for 3-step gear)
VL : Voltage corresponding to the upper limit of output value to spindle motor at low-speed gear

Fig.19.1 (d) S Analog Output Gear Change B

When using this function, set the following parameters:

D Constant Vmax (Parameter No.3736) related to the upper
limit of spindle motor speed (rpm)
Upper limit of spindle motor speed (rpm)
Vmax = 4095
Spindle motor speed (rpm) when the command
voltage is 10V

D Constant Vmin (Parameter No. 3735) related to the lower

limit of spindle motor speed (rpm)
Lower limit of spindle motor speed (rpm)
Vmin = 4095
Spindle motor speed (rpm) when the command
voltage is 10V

D Constant Vmaxl (Parameter No. 3751) related to the upper

limit of spindle motor speed (rpm) with low-speed gears
Upper limit of spindle motor speed (rpm) with
low-speed gears
Vmaxl = 4095
Spindle motor speed (rpm) when the command
voltage is 10V

D Constant Vmaxh (Parameter No. 3752) related to the upper

limit of spindle motor speed (rpm) with high-speed gears
(medium-speed gear for 3-step gear)
Upper limit of spindle motor speed (rpm) with
high-speed gears (medium-speed gear for 3-step gear)
Vmaxh = 4095
Spindle motor speed (rpm) when the command
voltage is 10V

D Spindle speed A (Parameter No.3741) (rpm) with low-speed

gears when the command voltage is 10V

454
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 19. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS

D Spindle speed B (Parameter No.3742) (rpm) with high-speed

gears when the command voltage is 10V (medium-speed
gear for 3-step)
D Spindle speed C (Parameter No.3743) (rpm) with high-speed
gears when the command voltage is 10V (3-step gear)
Spindle motor speed commands (0 to 10V) and gear selecting signals
(GR1O, GR2O, GR3O) are issued on each S code command as shown in
the following figure:

NOTE
1 In a tapping cycle when parameter SGT (No. 3705 #3 ) is
set, the gears are changed over at the gear changing point
for tapping.
2 For this function (parameter SGB (No. 3705#2)=1), when
only one-step gear is used, the voltage corresponding to the
upper limit value to the spindle motor is calculated using
Vmaxl, and when 2-step gear is used, it is calculated
according to Vmaxh. Therefore, when SGB is 1, set Vmaxl
when only one-step gear is used, Vmaxl and Vmaxh when
2-step gear is used.

The polarity of the output voltage is set by parameter CWM, TCW (No.
3706#6, #7) as follows.
Polarity
M03 M04
) )
) *
* )
* *

The polarity of the actual output voltage is determined by the parameter

setting and M03/M04 command. The analog voltage does not become 0V
but remains set even if an M05 command is given. When S0 is
commanded, the analog voltage becomes 0V.
An output voltage of other than 0V is first generated when an S code other
than S00 and M03 or M04 are commanded after turning power on. The
analog voltage that has been output becomes 0V when S0 is commanded,
or when the spindle stop signal turns to ”0” . The analog voltage does not
become 0V by emergency stop or reset. Beside the analog voltage output,
there is a spindle enable (ENB) signal (output). When the analog voltage
is not 0V, this signal turns to ”1”; when the analog voltage is 0V, the signal
turns to ”0”. The enable signal is available to forcibly stop the spindle
motor when the spindle motor is rotating at low speed, even when the
analog voltage is 0V, because the spindle amplifier has an offset voltage.

455
19. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

When S code is commanded, the I/O signal time chart is :

S code read

To next block

Analog voltage output

VH
VL
0V

Fig.19.1 (e) Time Chart When Gear Select Signal Does Not Change

In this case, the SF signal is not output and the CNC advances to the next
block automatically after the next analog voltage is output.

S code read
To next block

Gear select signal

TMF
GR3O/GR2O/GR1O

SF

FIN

TMF
TFIN

Analog voltage output

VH
VL

0V

Fig.19.1 (f) Time Chart When Gear Select Signal Changes

In this case, the gear select signal is output; after elapse of the time
constant set by parameter (TMF), the SF signal is output. After another
TMF elapse, the analog voltage signal is output. On the PMC side, the
gear is changed by this signal, and the FIN signal is returned after gear
change end. The time chart for SF and FIN signals is the same as in S code
output. TMF, set by parameter No. 3010, is common to M, S and T
functions.

456
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 19. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS

19.2 The speed arrival signal SAR informs the CNC that the spindle speed has
reached the commanded speed. The CNC uses this signal as the cutting
SPEED ARRIVAL start condition. The PMC side should turn this signal to ”1” when the
SIGNAL (INPUT) SAR actual speed reaches the commanded speed. When the SAR signal is not
<G029#4> used, parameter SAR No. 3708#0 should be set to 0.
The SAR is checked under the following conditions:
(1) Before starting distribution of the first feed (move command) block
after shifting from the rapid traverse to the cutting feed. This checking
is performed after the time set by parameter no. 3940 has elapsed after
the feed block is read.
(2) Before starting distribution of the first feed command block after an
S code is commanded. The wait time for checking is the same as in
item (1).
(3) When an S code and feed are programmed in the same block, the S
code (or analog voltage) is output, and the SAR signal is checked after
a fixed time elapses. If the SAR signal is set to ”1”, feed begins.

NOTE
According to the conditions of item (3) above, note that if the
circuit is so designed that SAR is turned to ”0”
simultaneously with the output of an S code and the change
of spindle speed is gated with DEN signal, the operation will
stop. That is, the spindle speed does not reach the
commanded speed because the CNC is waiting for the DEN
signal and distribution is not started because the CNC is
waiting for the SAR signal.

457
19. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

19.3 When the spindle stop signal turns to ”0”, the output voltage becomes 0V
and the spindle enable signal ENB[19.1] turns to ”0” (M05 is not output).
SPINDLE STOP When this signal turns to ”1”, the analog voltage returns to its original
SIGNAL (INPUT) value and the signal ENB turns to ”1”. The time chart shown in Fig.19.3
*SSTP <G029#6> is an example. The signal conforms with the time chart that satisfies the
spindle amplifier specifications.

S or S
M03 M05 M04 S0
Input command

Miscellaneous function
processing
ON
Spindle stop signal *SSTP OFF

Analog voltage 0V

Spindle enable signal ENB

Fig.19.3

NOTE
1 When this signal is not used, let the signal be ”1”.
2 M03, M04, M05 are not processed inside the CNC.

458
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 19. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS

19.4 When the spindle orientation signal turns to ”1” and the spindle stop
signal *SSTP[19.3] turns to ”0”, an analog voltage which lets the spindle
SPINDLE rotate at the constant speed set by parameter No. 3732 is output. The
ORIENTATION spindle enable signal ENB[19.1] also turns to ”1”. This signal is disabled
SIGNAL (INPUT) SOR when the spindle stop signal *SSTP[19.3] is ”1”.
<G029#5> When the spindle speed for orientation is set by parameter GST No.
3705#3 and the SOR signal is input, the CNC outputs the analog voltage
corresponding to the speed set to parameter GST, but the gear select signal
does not change. For example, if the SOR signal is turned to ”1” with high
gear selected, and the speed set to parameter No. 3732 is in the low gear
range, the gear select signal does not change and the analog voltage is
calculated and output to obtain the set speed at high gear.
When the spindle motor speed is set by parameter GST, the constant
voltage is output regardless of gear select signal. When the spindle motor
speed is set, it is used for gear shift (see Fig.19.4).

M19 M03
Input command

Miscellaneous function
processing
Stop command Orientation detection

Spindle stop signal *SSTP

Spindle orientation signal

SOR

Max. 70ms
Max. 70ms

Analog voltage 0V

Spindle enable signal

ENB

Spindle speed

0 rpm
RL : Constant speed set by parameter

Fig.19.4

459
19. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

19.5
SPINDLE OVERRIDE In spindle control, an override of 0 to 254%, in 1% units, is possible for
the S command using the SOV0 to SOV7 8th-bit signal. The serial spindle
SIGNAL (INPUT) control option is needed to use this function. The spindle override is
SOV0 TO SOV7 invalidated in the following cases :
<G030> During tapping cycle (G84,G74)
When all of SOV0 to SOV7 are ”1”, an override of 0% is set.

19.6
SERIAL SPINDLE D After the power is turned on, there will be a wait of about fourteen
seconds while the Power Mate exchanges data with the serial spindle.
CONTROL Do not turn off the power at this time.
D A software option is necessary to perform serial spindle orientation.
D A software option is necessary to switch serial spindle output.
(1) Signal Description

PMC ³ CMC
Bit No.
PC
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G029 *SSTP

G070 MRDY ORCM SFR SRV CTH1 CTH2 TLMH TLML

G071 RCH RSL SOCN *ESPS ARST

G072 DEFMOD NRRO ROTA INDX

Symbol Name Description

TLML Torque limit command Controls the output torque of the spindle motor.
LOW The limit value is set by spindle parameter.
TLML TLMH
0 0 : No torque limit
TLMH Torque limit command 0 1 : Limited to value set by parameter
HIGH
1 0 : Limited to approximately half of case for TLMHA
1 1 : Limited to approximately half of case for TLMHA
CTH1 Clutch/gear signal Set the following conditions in accordance with the clutch or gear status. Is used to
CTH2 select the spindle control parameter (position gain, gear ratio).
CTH1 CTH2
0 0 : HIGH GEAR
0 1 : MEDIUM HIGH GEAR
1 0 : MEDIUM LOW GEAR
1 1 : LOW GEAR
SRV Reverse rotation Sets the direction of rotation when the spindle motor is viewed from the shaft side.
command SRV SFR
0 0 : Stops
SFR Forward rotation 0 1 : Forward rotation (CCW: counterclockwise direction)
command 1 0 : Reverse rotation (CW: clockwise rotation)
1 1 : Stops
ORCM Spindle orientation Used when controlling spindle orientation
command 0 : Spindle orientation control is not conducted.
1 : Spindle orientation control is conducted.
MRDY Mechanical ready Is used for switching the electromagnetic contactor in the spindle servo unit ON/OFF.
signal 0 : Electromagnetic contactor is OFF
1 : Electromagnetic contactor is ON

460
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 19. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS

Symbol Name Description

ARST Alarm reset signal Is used to reset the spindle alarm
32 msec min

”1” When changed from ”1” to ”0” the alarm is reset.

”0”
*ESPS Emergency stop signal 0 : Emergency stop
1 : Normal operation
SOCN Software start/stop 0 : Software start/stop function canceled
cancel signal 1 : Software start/stop function valid
RSL Output selection 0 : High-speed output characteristics
request signal 1 : Low-speed output characteristics
RCH Power line status 0 : High-speed output characteristics
confirmation signal 1 : Low-speed output characteristics
INDX Orientation stop ”1” When ”1” is changed to ”0”, the new stop position
position change data is read, and movement stops after shifting to
command ”0” the new position.
ROTA Rotation direction 0 : CCW (counterclockwise)
command at change of 1 : CW (clockwise)
orientation stop
position
NRRO Short path control 0 : Direction of rotation is in accordance with the ”ROTA” (=B1T01) setting.
command at change of 1 : Short path control (within
180 deg)
orientation stop
position

461
19. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

CMC ³ PMC
Bit No.
PC
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F045 ORAR TLM LDT2 LDT1 SARS SDT SST ALMS

F046 RCFN RCHP

Symbol Name Description

ALMS Alarm signal Is output when a spindle alarm has occurred.
0 : Normal status
1 : Alarm status
SST Zero-speed detection Is output if the actual speed of rotation of the spindle motor equals or is less than the zero
signal speed detection level.
1 : Zero speed
SDT Speed detection Is output if the actual spindle motor speed is equal to or drops below the previously set
signal spindle motor speed.
1 : Set speed or below
SARS Speed arrival signal Is output when the actual spindle motor speed reaches the range that was previously set
in correspondence with the speed command.
1 : Speed arrival
LDT1 Load detection signal Is output when the load is detected to be equal to or higher than the set load detection
1 level. LDT1A and LDT2A can be set at different levels.
1 : Set load or more
LDT2 Load detection signal Is output when the load is detected to be equal to or higher than the set load detection
2 level.
1 : Set load or more
TLM Torque limiting signal 1 : Torque limiting
ORAR Orientation end signal Is output when the orientation command is input, and the spindle stops in the proximity of
the specified position.
1 : Orientation end
RCHP Output selection 0 : High-speed output characteristics
signal 1 : Low-speed output characteristics
RCFN Output selection end 0 : High-speed output characteristics
signal 1 : Low-speed output characteristics

(2) Other
(a) Rigid tap becomes the interface as in the past. However, when
rigid tap was conducted in the past, TLML (torque limit
command signal) was set ON in relation to the spindle amplifier,
but with the serial interface spindle amplifier, it is not necessary
for the TLML signal to be ON.
(b) As reference point return is conducted by one rotation signal of
the detector, deceleration torque is not required.

462
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 19. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS

19.7
CONSTANT SPEED
SIGNAL (OUTPUT)
CSS <F002#2>
19.7.1 If a surface speed (speed of the tool relative to the workpiece) is specified
Overview of Constant after address S in constant surface speed control mode (G96), the speed
of the spindle is calculated so that the specified surface speed is
Surface Speed Control maintained as the position of the tool changes. Thus, the voltage
corresponding to the calculated spindle speed is fed to the spindle control
section to rotate the spindle such that the correct surface speed is
maintained.

NOTE
This function is not supported by the Power Mate–F.

The units in which surface speed is specified are as follows:

Input unit Unit of surface speed
Metric m / min
Inch feet / min

The units in which surface speed is specified may vary with the machine
tool builder.

19.7.2
Specification
1) Specification method
Constant surface speed control is specified as follows:
G96Sfffff ;
°Surface speed (m/min or feet/min)
Constant surface speed control is cancelled as follows:
G97Sfffff ;
°Spindle speed (rpm)
For constant surface speed control, a workpiece coordinate system
must be set so that the rotation axis is a controlled axis, such as the
Z–axis (X = 0).

ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
Z (X=0)

463
19. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

The value of S (surface speed) in G96 mode is assumed to be 0 until M03

or M04 is specified. The specification of S becomes valid only after M03
(spindle start clockwise) or M04 (spindle start counterclockwise) is
specified.

Spindle speed (rpm)

As is obvious from this figure, the value of

the spindle speed (rpm) approximately
matches the value of the surface speed
(m/min) at 160 mm (radius).

is

Workpiece radius and spindle Radius (mm)

speed for each surface speed

(1) The value of S, specified in G96 mode, is preserved even in G97

mode, being restored when the system again enters G96 mode.

G96S50; (50 m/min or 50 feet/min)

G97S1000; (1000 rpm)
G96X3000; (50 m/min or 50 feet/min)

(2) Even if the machine does not move in the machine lock state
(Section 12.7), constant surface speed calculation is performed
as the X coordinate of the program changes.
(3) Constant surface speed control mode (G96) may be set in feed per
minute mode (G94).
(4) If S (rpm) is not specified in a G97 block when transition from
G96 mode to G97 mode occurs, the speed set last in G96 mode
is used as the value of S in G97 mode.

N111G97S800; (800rpm)
L
N222G96S100; (100 m/min or 100 feet/min)
L
N333G97; (Xrpm)

X represents the speed (rpm) in the block preceding N333. This

ensures that the spindle speed does not change when transition from
G96 mode to G97 mode occurs.
When transition from G97 mode to G96 mode occurs, the value of S
in G96 mode is used. If S is not specified, S = 0 m/min (feet/min) is
assumed.

464
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 19. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS

(5) In a block specifying rapid traverse with G00, constant surface

speed control is exercised not by constantly recalculating the
surface speed as the tool position changes, but by newly
calculating the surface speed for the end point of the block. This
approach assumes that no cutting is performed during rapid
traverse.
2) Constant surface speed control axis
An axis for which constant surface speed control is to be applied can
be specified by using either parameter No. 3770 or a program.
When a program is used to make this specification, use address P in
a G96 block to specify the axis to be subject to constant surface speed
control. When P is omitted, that axis specified by parameter No. 3770
is controlled. When P0 is specified, the first axis is assumed.

Command : G96P α;
P1 : First axis, P2 : Second axis

When a value of 3 or more is specified for
, P/S190 is issued.

NOTE
If P
(
= 0 to 2) has already been specified by programming
to apply constant surface speed control for the axis, do not
omit P when specifying another G96.

3) Clamping the spindle speed to a maximum value

After G92S, a maximum allowable spindle speed for constant surface
speed control can be specified, in rpm.

Command : G92S_ ;

In constant surface speed control mode, the spindle can be controlled

so that the spindle speed is clamped to a maximum allowable value
(programmed value) if a higher spindle speed is inadvertently set.
(1) When the power is first turned on, a maximum allowable spindle
speed, to which the spindle speed will be clamped, is not set.
(2) The spindle speed is clamped in G96 mode only. The spindle
speed is not clamped in G97 mode.
(3) G92S0; specifies that the spindle speed is clamped to 0 rpm.
(4) The spindle speed is not clamped when the spindle override
signal[19.5] is used.
(5) A maximum allowable spindle speed can also be set by using
parameter No. 3772. If two maximum allowable spindle speeds
are specified, with both a program and parameter No. 3772, the
spindle speed is clamped to the smaller of the specified values.

465
19. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

19.7.3
Signal
CNC ³ PMC
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F002 CSS

Constant speed signal (output) CSS

When the CSS signal is ”1,” the setting of the constant surface speed
control mode is posted.
This signal is set to ”1” in the following case:
D When constant surface speed control mode is set (G96)
This signal is set to ”0” in the following case:
D When constant surface speed control mode is cancelled (G97)

19.7.4
Parameters

ÃÃÃ
Address
3705
#7 #6 #5
NSF
#4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ESF

Data type : Bit

ESF S codes and SF are output according to:
0 : A specification
1 : B specification
Information relating to the A and B specifications
1) A specification
S codes and SF are not output when the S command is
specified as follows:
D The S command is specified in a command for clamping
the spindle speed to a maximum value (G92S...)
D The S command is specified for constant surface speed
control when bit 5 (NSF) of parameter No. 3705 is set to
”1”
2) B specification
S codes and SF are not output when the S command is
specified as follows:
D The S command is specified in constant surface speed
control mode (G96 mode)
D The S command is specified in a command for clamping
the spindle speed to a maximum value (G92S...)
D The S command is specified for constant surface speed
control when bit 5 (NSF) of parameter No. 3705 is set to
”1”
NSF When an S code is specified in constant surface speed control mode:
0 : SF is output.
1 : SF is not output.

466
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 19. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS

3770 Calculation reference axis for constant surface speed control

Data type : Byte

Valid data range : 0 to 2
This parameter sets the axis used as the reference for the calculation
performed as part of constant surface speed control.
Controlled axis Setting
First axis 1
Second axis 2

When 0 is set, the first axis is used as the reference for the calculation.

3771 Minimum spindle speed in constant surface speed control mode (G96)

Data type : Word

Unit of data : rpm
Valid data range : 0 to 32767
This parameter sets the minimum spindle speed in constant surface
speed control mode (G96).
When constant surface speed control is applied, the spindle speed is
clamped to the speed specified with this parameter if a lower spindle
speed is inadvertently set.
The spindle speed is not clamped when the spindle override signal is
being used.

3772 Maximum spindle speed

Data type: Word

Unit of data: rpm
Valid data range: 0 to 32767
This parameter sets a maximum spindle speed.
If a spindle speed exceeding the maximum allowable spindle speed
specified with this parameter is specified, or if the spindle override
function attempts to increase the spindle speed to a value exceeding
the maximum allowable spindle speed specified with this parameter,
the actual spindle speed is clamped to the maximum allowable
spindle speed specified with this parameter.
1) In either G96 mode or G97 mode, the spindle speed is
clamped to the specified maximum allowable spindle speed.
2) When 0 is set in this parameter, the spindle speed is not
clamped.
3) While PMC–based spindle speed control is applied, this
parameter is ignored; the spindle speed is not clamped.

19.7.5
Alarm
P/S Alarm
No. Message Description
190 Axis specification An invalid axis is specified for constant sur-
error face speed control (program error).

467
20. SPINDLE ANALOG VOLTAGE
CONTROL SIGNAL USING
PMC (INPUT) PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

SPINDLE ANALOG VOLTAGE CONTROL SIGNAL USING PMC

20 (INPUT) SIND<G033#7>, SSIN<G033#6>, SGN<G033#5>, R01I

TO R12I<G032,G033>, R01O TO R12O<F036, F037>

The spindle analog voltage can be controlled by these signals.

(1) SIND This signal determines whether the spindle analog voltage is
controlled by CNC or PMC.
0 : The spindle analog voltage is controlled by the CNC.
A voltage corresponding to the spindle speed specified
by an S 5-digit code is output.
1 : The spindle analog voltage is controlled by the PMC.
A 12-bit binary code signal (R01I - R12I) corresponding
to the spindle analog voltage is output from the PMC to
the CNC, and is output to the machine tool after being
converted into a voltage.
(2) R01I to R12I :
This signal controls the spindle analog voltage when SIND=1. This 12-bit
binary code signal is 0 V when all bits are ”0”, and 10 V when all bits are
”1”.

(Analog voltage)

10V

0V
Code signal
4095
0
(All ”1”)

Fig.20 (a) Relationship between Code Signal and Spindle Analog Voltage

(3) SSIN : This signal selects whether the polarity of the spindle analog
voltage is controlled by the CNC or PMC.
0 : The output voltage polarity is controlled by the CNC.
The output voltage polarity is determined by the value
preset by parameter no. 3706#6,#7 and the condition of
M03/M04.
1 : The output voltage polarity is controlled by the PMC.
The voltage polarity specified by the signal SGN is
output.
(4) SGN : This signal determines the polarity of the output voltage
when the signal SSIN is ”1”.
0 : A plus (+) voltage is output.
1 : A minus (*) voltage is output.

468
 20. SPINDLE ANALOG VOLTAGE
CONTROL SIGNAL USING
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE PMC (INPUT)

They are used to index the spindle by selecting the spindle control mode
on the machine tool side by means of the M functions, as shown in the
programming example in Fig.19 (c). (For the relationship between analog
voltage output and S codes in CNC machining programs, see Sections
19.1 (“S functions”) .

MXX; This M code set the spindle to be control

lable by the velocity control circuit on the
S PMC side. (The PMC sets SIND to ”0.”)

G00 X Z ;

G01 U ;
These S codes specify
: the spindle speed.

:
:
Mnn; This M code sets the spindle to the
indexing mode on the PMC side.
S ; (The PMC sets SIND to ”1.”)

G01 Z ;
These S codes specify
:
the indexing angle of
the spindle.
:
MXX;
Fig.20 (b) Programming Spindle Control Mode

469
21. T FUNCTION SIGNAL PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

21 T FUNCTION SIGNAL

(1) Tool function code signal (output) T00 to T31 <F026-F029>

(2) Tool function strobe signal (output) TF<F007#3>
When a T code is commanded in the automatic operation or in manual
data input, the binary code is sent as the tool select signal.

Tool selection (Max. 8 digits)

(Output as T code)

(3) Connection and T code reading time chart

T code read command signal TF controls the timing of the T code
reading on the PMC side. When the T code is sent, the TF signal turns
to ”1” after the time set by parameter TMF No. 3010 (standard setting
80 msec) has elapsed. After the TF signal turns, the T code signal is
read and the corresponding operation is performed.
At the end of the T function operation, the FIN signal turns to ”1”; the
TF signal then turns to ”0”. The FIN signal then returns to ”0” and the
CNC advances to the next block. These signals are handled in much
the same way as M functions (BCD output); the difference is that the
T code signal is held until a new T code is commanded. When an S,
T and/or M code is included in one block of the program, the FIN
signal will not turn to ”0” untill all the operations are completed.

T command
read Next block read

T code output
Held until a new T code is commanded
TF

FIN TFIN : parameter no. 3011

TMF
TFIN

Fig.21 Time Chart

470
 22. SOFTWARE LIMIT EXTERNAL
SETTING (INPUT)+LMn <G110>,
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE –LMn <G112> RLSOT<G007#7>

SOFTWARE LIMIT EXTERNAL SETTING (INPUT)

22 +LMn <G110>, –LMn <G112>, RLSOT <G007#7>

If the tool end is aligned with the end of limit area while replacing the tool,
pressing the setting button will rewrite parameter Nos. 1320 and 1321 and
supply the machine’s current position (coordinates) as the software limit.
These signals are prepared for each axis and direction. The software limit
release signal, which is common to all axes, cancels the original software
limit and institutes a new limit.
+LMn . . . . . : Soft limit setting signal to + direction of all axes
(n : 1 or 2)
–LMn . . . . . . : Soft limit setting signal to – direction of all axes
(n : 1 or 2)
RLSOT : Soft limit release signal

471
23. SKIP SIGNALS (INPUT) SKIP, SKP2, SKP3, SKIP4
<X000#7, #0, #1, #2> <x1000#7, #0, #1, #2>
SKIPP<G212#7> PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

SKIP SIGNALS (INPUT) SKIP, SKP2, SKP3, SKIP4

23 <X000#7, #0, #1, #2> <X1000#7, #0, #1, #2> SKIPP <G212#7>

If the skip signal SKIP is input from the machine side during move
command execution in G31 or if a skip signal (SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3,
SKIP4) which is effective for the number commanded by P is input from
the machine side during the execution of a block for which address P has
been commanded subsequently to G31, the coordinate values at the
moment of startup of that signal are stored in custom macro variables, the
block being executed ends at that moment and the next block is proceeded
to.
The coordinate values stored in the Power Mate are used as called by the
custom macro instruction. This function is used in the following cases.
(1) The moment of machining end is given by a signal from the machine
side instead of being programmed like in grinding.
(2) The work dimension is calculated by the custom macro instruction by
moving the machine in the G31 mode, measuring the coordinate
values at that moment by the signal from the detection sensor and
storing them in the Power Mate in order to measure the dimension of
a work, etc. configuration.
Skip signals SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3 and SKIP4 assume the skip state at
contact close. Skip signal SKIPP is the signal to skip in ladder program.

+24V

SKIP
SKIP
Skip signal
Power Mate SKP2
Skip signal 2
SKP3
3
Skip signal 2
SKP4
Skip signal 4

Fig.23 Connection of Signal SKIP

472
 23. SKIP SIGNALS (INPUT) SKIP, SKP2, SKP3, SKIP4
<X000#7, #0, #1, #2> <x1000#7, #0, #1, #2>
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE SKIPP <G212#7>

NOTE
1 The G31 block unconditionally assumes the G01 mode.
The feed rate becomes the value specified by the F code.
2 If measuring using signal SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3 and SKIP4,
the feed rate must be programmed to be constant.
Measuring errors become lange if the feed rate is different.
The measuring error when the feed rate is constant is
shown below.
ERRmax + Fm 1 4
60 1000

ERRmax : Measuring error [mm or inch]

Fm : Measuring feedrate [mm/min or inch/min]

3 The surpassing amount after signal SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3

and SKIP4 rises is shown below.
1 TC TS
Qmax + Fm ( 12 )
60 1000 1000 1000

Qmax : Surpassing amount [mm or inch]

Fm : Measuring rate [mm/min or inch/min]
Tc : Cutting time constant [msec]
Ts : Servo time constant, normally Ts=33 msec

4 The signal width of signal SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3 and SKIP4

must be a minimum of 10 msec.
5 SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3 and SKIP4 are read directly by the
Power Mate from the machine side.
6 If not using the skip function (G31), the signal terminal
corresponding to SKIP, SKP2, SKP3 is available in the PMC
as the general-purpose input signal.
7 SKIPP is the skip signal used in a ladder program. For
example, when a workpiece whose length is unknown is to
be drilled, this signal can be used in combination with the
torque limit signals [33].
8 When using the built–in I/O card together with the I/O card
and I/O unit, compatible with FANUC I/O Link, ensure that
SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3, and SKIP4 are entered via the built–in
I/O card.
9 When the signals are supplied from the built–in I/O card, bits
0 (BSKP), 4 (BSKP2), and 5 (BSKP3) of parameter No.
3005 must also be specified. Moreover, using SKIP4
requires bit 7 of parameter No. 3005 (SKIP4) to be set
regardless of whether the built–in I/O card, I/O card, or I/O
unit is used.

473
24. MECHANICAL HANDLE FEED PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

24 MECHANICAL HANDLE FEED

474
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 24. MECHANICAL HANDLE FEED

24.1 These signals prevent the servo motors from overload when the axes are
clamped under certain conditions.
SERVO OFF SIGNAL
When one of these signals turns to “1”, the servo motor is turned off. The
(INPUT) SVFn mechanical clamp is done by using the auxiliary function. Set the timing
<G126#0, #1> for the auxiliary function, mechanical clamp and servo off signals as
shown in the diagram below. The clamp command auxiliary function
should be executed only after the distribution end signal (DEN[16.2]) has
been sent.

Clamp command Unclamp command

MF

Machine
clamp
Servo off state

SVF1,…

MFIN

24.2 When the signals SVFn [24.1] is turned to “1”, the servo is turned off.
Since the positioning control does not function under this condition, an
FOLLOW-UP SIGNAL error is produced if the machine tool moves. To compensate for the
(INPUT) *FLWU erroneous movement, there are two remedies, depending upon the status
<G007#5> of the *FLWU signal.
(1) When *FLWU is “1”, the servo error amount is recorded on the error
counter. When the servo off signal is reset, the machine tool will
move to cancel the error.
(2) When *FLWU is “0”, the follow-up function is engaged. The present
position of the Power Mate is changed to reset the error counter to
zero. The machine tool remains in a deviated position.
The follow–up function is always executed upon the occurrence of an
emergency stop or servo alarm.

24.3 This outputs to PMC whether or not the checked amount of servo position
deviation exceeds the value set to parameter.
SERVO POSITION
[Signal] SVERn (n : 1 or 2)
DEVIATION MONITOR
[Function]
SIGNAL (OUTPUT)
Servo position deviation monitor signal
SVERn, <F208#3, 1 : The amount of servo position deviation exceeds the
F208#7> checked value.
0 : The amount of servo position deviation does not exceed
the checked value.
Combine with the torque limit [33] and come by the
specification.

475
25. I/O DEVICE EXTERNAL
CONTROL FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

25 I/O DEVICE EXTERNAL CONTROL FUNCTION

(1) General
The part program, parameter, variable, diagnose data
registering/outputting operation by the I/O device is possible using
external signals. This operation is processed in the background.

Machine
Power Servo motor
Mate

Foreground execution

EXRD RPBSY
EXWT RPALM
EXSTP BGEACT External input/output
machine

Background execution

Fig.25 (a) I/O Device External Control Function

(2) SPECIFICATIONS
(a) External Read Start Signal (input) EXRD <G058#1>
D This signal begins an operation whereby part programs are read
from input machines and stored on tape memories.
D If this signal is turned ON the Power Mate operates in the
following way.
1 It reads and loads part programs from input machines as a
background editing operation.
2 A choice can be made by parameter whether all input
program are loaded at once or just a single program.
(Parameter No.3201#1)
It is possible to specify by parameter whether unprotected
programs should be deleted before loading begins.
(Parameter No.3201#0)
3 The RPBSY signal switches ON while loading and
read/punch is in operation.
4 Operation is brought to a halt if there is a reset (ERS
<G008#7>) while the program is being read, or if the external
read/punch stop signal EXSTP is switched ON.
5 When the read/punch interface is already being used in the
foreground, the external read start signal EXRD is ignored.
(While being input into tape etc.)

476
 25. I/O DEVICE EXTERNAL
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE CONTROL FUNCTION

(b) External Punch Start Signal (input) EXWT <G058#3>

D This signal starts the outputting to the part program output
machine.
D If this signal is turned ON the Power Mate operates in the
following way.
1 It always outputs all programs into the output machine as a
background editing operation.
2 The RPBSY signal switches ON while program output and
read/punch is in operation.
3 Operation is brought to a halt if there is a reset while the
program is being output, or if the external read/punch stop
signal EXSTP is switched ON.
(c) External Read/Punch Stop Signal (input) EXSTP <G058#2>
D This signal forcefully stops loading and outputting of part
programs.
D If this signal is turned ON the Power Mate operates in the
following way.
1 It ends loading and outputting operations of part programs in
the background immediately.
(d) Signal During External Read/Punch (output) RPBSY <F053#2>
D It communicates the fact that part program is being loaded and
output in the background.
D This signal is switched ON when Power Mate is as follows.
1 Having received the external read signal or the external
punch signal and while part program is being loaded or
output.
D This signal is switched OFF when Power Mate is as follows.
1 When part program is being loaded by external read signal or
external punch signal or when outputting has finished. This
signal is turned OFF after normal ending, forced ending by
resetting or forced ending by external read/punch stop signal
EXSTP.
(e) External Read/Punch Alarm (output) RPALM <F053#3>
D It communicates the fact that an alarm has gone off while a part
program is being loaded or being output.
D This signal is switched ON when Power Mate is as follows.
1 Having received the external read signal or the external
punch signal and an alarm rings when a part program is being
loaded or during outputting.
D This signal is switched OFF when Power Mate is as follows.
1 When the reset or the external read/punch stop signal is input.
(f) Background Execution (output) BGEACT <F053#4>
D It communicates the fact that a part program is being loaded or
being output in the background.
D This signal is switched ON when Power Mate is as follows.
1 Having received the external read signal or the external
punch signal and while part program is being loaded or
output.
D This signal is switched OFF when Power Mate is as follows.
1 When part program is being loaded by external read signal or
external punch signal or when outputting has finished. This
signal is turned OFF after normal ending, forced ending by
resetting or forced ending by external read/punch stop signal
EXSTP.

477
25. I/O DEVICE EXTERNAL
CONTROL FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

(g) Program selection signal (input), EXPRG <G251#4>

D Function: Selects programs as I/O data.
D Inputting operation
1 Whether to enter a single program or all programs at a time from
the I/O device can be specified with bit 1 (RAL) of parameter No.
3201.
With bit 0 (RDL) of parameter No. 3201, the user can specify
whether to delete all programs that are not protected with bit 0
(NE8) or bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No. 3202, before starting
registration. Note, however, that the program currently being
executed and the program selected and displayed in the edit mode
on the program screen are not deleted.
Input condition:Set protection signal KEY1 to 1 (or set KEY3 to
1 when the bit 7 (KEY) of parameter No. 3290 is set to 1).
D Outputting operation
1 All programs not protected by parameter setting are output.

NOTE
Program input or output operation can be automatically
selected by executing EXRD or EXWT without selecting
EPRG, EVAR, EPARM, and EDGN.

(h) Macro variable selection signal (input), EVAR <G251#5>

D Function: Selects macro variables as I/O data.
D Inputting operation
1 Macro variable data is input from the I/O device.
Input condition:Set protection signal KEY2 to 1 (only when bit
7 (KEY) of parameter No. 3290 is set to 1).

NOTE
Macro variable data can be entered by background
processing using an external I/O device only in the data
output format specified with bit 2 (VFP) of parameter No.
6001 set to 1.

However, it is impossible to input or output an absolute value

exceeding 99999999. When VFP (bit 2 of parameter No.
6001) = 1, the required tape format is as follows:
P# macro variable number Q data ;
where
P# : A three–digit number that follows P# is a macro
variable number.
Q : A value that follows Q is data (a decimal point
can be included).
Space : Blank data
0 : Data 0 or overflow/ underflow data
Example)
%;
P#500 Q0;
P#501 Q1.000;
P#502 Q10000000.;
P#503 Q–0.0000001;
P#504 Q0;
P#505 Q;
...
%

478
 25. I/O DEVICE EXTERNAL
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE CONTROL FUNCTION

D Outputting operation
1 A specified number of data items are output to the I/O device,
starting with a specified number, in the order #100 to #199 and
#500 to #699.
Specify a macro variable output start number in EDG0 to EDG15,
and specify the number of output data items in EDN0 to END15.
Data output is not started if the start number specified in EDG0 to
EDG15 is out of the ranges 100 to 199 and 500 to 699, or the
number of data items specified in EDN0 to EDN15 is 0. If a set
value is out of a specifiable range, data output is stopped.

NOTE
When the total RAM size is 128KB, the size of the macro
variable area will vary between 100 and 149, and between
500 and 531.

(i) Parameter selection signal (input), EPARM <G251#6>

D Function: Selects parameters as I/O data.
D Inputting operation
1 Parameters are input from the I/O device.
Input condition: Set the setting parameter (PWE) to 1.
D Outputting operation
1 All parameters are output.
Parameter data
N parameter number A1 P data A2 P data ;
where
N : A value that follows N is a parameter No.
A : A value that follows A is an axis number (for axis
type parameter only).
A1 = first axis; A2 = second axis;
P : A number that follows P is data.
Example)
%;
N1020 A1 P88 A2 P89;
...
%
(j) Diagnose selection signal (input), EDGN <G251#7>
D Function: Selects diagnostic data as I/O data.
D Inputting operation
1 Diagnostic data is input from the I/O device.

NOTE
Diagnostic data can be loaded into the PMC nonvolatile
memory and internal memory areas, D0000 to D1859 and
R0000 to R0999 only.

D Outputting operation
1 A specified number of data items are output in ascending order of
data numbers to the I/O device, starting with a specified number.
Specify a diagnostic data output start number in EDG0 to EDG15,
and specify the number of output data items in EDN0 to END15.
Data output is not started if the start number specified in EDG0 to
EDG15 is out of the range of data numbers, or the number of data
items specified in EDN0 to EDN15 is 0. If a set value is out of the
specifiable range, data output is stopped.

479
25. I/O DEVICE EXTERNAL
CONTROL FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

N data number P data ;

where
N : A value that follows N is a sum of an address
number and a value determined for each address.
The data number can range from N20000 to
N49999.
data number = value determined for each address +
address number
P : A value that follows P is data. The data depends
on each data type when it is diagnose data. If the
data is PMC data, a value that follows P is an
eight–digit decimal number. If a specified data
number has not been defined, the data that
follows P will not be output.
For axis–type diagnose data:
N data number A1 P data A2 Pdata;
where
A : A value that follows A is output as an axis
number. This applies only to axis–type diagnose
data.
A1 = first–axis data; A2 = second–axis data
For diagnostic data
0000 to 0999 20000+(diagnose number)
For PMC address
G0000 to 0255 21000+(G address number)
F0000 to 0255 23000+(F address number)
Y0000 to 0127 25000+(Y address number)
Y1000 to 1063
X0000 to 0127 27000+(X address number)
X1000 to 1063
A0000 to 0024 29000+(A address number)
R0000 to 0999, 30000+(R address number)
R9000 to 9099
(For PMC–PA3)
T0000 to 0079 40000+(T address number)
K0000 to 0019 41000+(K address number)
C0000 to 0079 42000+(C address number)
D0000 to 1859 43000+(D address number)

NOTE
When diagnostic data is output, character data is not output
directly as ISO/EIA tape codes.

(k) Signals indicating the start number of data items to be output

(punched) (input), EDG0 to EDG15 <G252 to G253>
1 When diagnostic data or macro variable data is to be output,
specify a start data number in EDG0 to EDG15 by using a
16-bit binary code.
(l) Signals indicating the number of data items to be output
(punched) (input), EDN0 to EDN15 <G254 to G255>
1 When diagnostic data or macro variable data is to be output,
specify the number of output data items in EDN0 to EDN15
by using a 16-bit binary code.
Setting EDG0 to EDG15 0 to 65535
EDN0 to EDN15 1 to 65535

480
 25. I/O DEVICE EXTERNAL
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE CONTROL FUNCTION

EXRD

EXSTP

PRBSY

BGEACT
Read start Read end Read start Read interruption Read start

Fig.25 (b) Part Program Loading Operation

EXWT

EXSTP

PRBSY

BGEACT
Punch start Punch end Punch start Punch interruption Punch start

Fig.25 (c) Part Program Outputting Operation

EXRD or EXWT

RPALM

PRBSY

BGEACT
Read/punch start Read/punch interruption Read/punch start

Fig.25 (d) When an External Read/Punch Alarm Occurs

481
26. EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

26 EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT

482
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 26. EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT

26.1
EXTERNAL PULSE (a) Overview
This function is responsible for instigating motion along an arbitrary
INPUT INTERFACE axis in phase with an external pulse signal entered from the machine.
SELECTION SIGNAL Enter an external pulse signal via the position coder interface.
(INPUT) EPCON (b) Details
<G066#6>
Position coder

Machine *Weighting *CMR

factor
interface
*DMR

1) Enter an external pulse signal via the position coder interface.

For an input waveform, use the A–phase signal (PA, *PA) and
B–phase signal (PB, *PB) in the same way as with a waveform
output from the position coder. The C–phase signal is not
required.
2) The ratio of an amount of axis travel to an external pulse signal
can be set. The ratio is M/N (M = parameter magnification 1 from
1 to 255, N = parameter magnification 2 from 1 to 1000).
When 1 is set, the input of one waveform corresponds to a travel
amount of 4 m.
3) When the A–phase signal is 90 ahead of the B–phase signal,
motion will be in the positive direction. When the A–phase signal
lags behind the B–phase signal by 90 , motion will be in the
negative direction.
4) An axis for which motion is controlled according to the input of
an external pulse signal can be selected by specifying a parameter.
5) Whether motion based on external pulse signal input is valid
depends on the signal (G066#6 EPCON) output from the PMC.
When the signal output from the PMC is on, motion occurs,
regardless of the CNC mode.
6) An external pulse signal can be smoothed by using parameter No.
7701 (count = 1, 2, 4, 8, 16).
7) Note that when this function is used, the feed per rotation
command cannot be specified.
8) The machine lock, interlock, and overtravel functions can be used
with an axis for which motion is controlled according to an
external pulse signal.
9) Exponential acceleration/deceleration after interpolation can be
applied to motion controlled according to an external pulse
signal.
10)An absolute coordinate is normalized to 0 to 360 degrees.

483
26. EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

(c) Pulse input

The maximum allowable high frequency is 100 kHz. (Note, however,
that this frequency is multiplied by 4 in the Power Mate. This is
because a rising edge of each of the A–phase signal and B–phase
signal is regarded as consisting of one pulse, so that four pulses are
received during one cycle of the A–phase or B–phase signal.)

)direction movement command pulse  *direction movement command pulse

PA PA
*PA *PA

PB PB
*PB *PB

TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP

TCYC TCYC TP : 1.2 ms or more

TCYC : 10 ms or more

Fig.26 (a) Input Pulse Waveform

Position coder interface valid

EPCON

+ direction movement – direction movement

command pulse command pulse
External pulse signal input
PA

PB

Pulse count in the + pulse

Power Mate

– pulse

Fig.26 (b) Sequence

(d) Signal (EPCON: External pulse input signal)

ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
Address
G0066
#7
EPCON
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

EPCON 1 : The external pulse input command is used.

0 : The external pulse input command is not used.

484
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 26. EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT

(e) Parameter

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7701 SMP16 SMP2 SMP1

This parameter specifies the number of sampling times to be used in

smoothing input pulses, as listed below.
SMP16 SMP2 SMP1 Number of sampling times
0 0 0 4
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 8
1 0 0 16
1 0 1 4
1 1 0 4
1 1 1 4

7710 Axis number for an axis to be moved according to external pulses

Data type: Byte

Range of valid data: 1, 2

7682 External pulse–based axis movement amount ratio setting 1 (M)

Data type: Byte

Range of valid data: 1 to 255

7681 External pulse–based axis movement amount ratio setting 1 (N)

Data type: Word

Range of valid data: 1 to 1000

Time constant for external pulse axis acceleration/deceleration (exponential

7712
acceleration/deceleration)

Data type: Word

Valid data range: 0 to 4000
Unit of data: msec

7713 FL feedrate for external pulse axis acceleration/deceleration

Data type: Word

Valid data range: Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data: IS–B IS–C
deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000

485
27. FANUC I/O LINK SLAVE FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

27 FANUC I/O LINK SLAVE FUNCTION

(1) OUTLINE
The I/O Link is serial interface that transfers high speed I/O signals
(bit data) between CNC and cell controllers and I/O Unit-A, Power
Mate–D.
The Power Mate–F has one slave channel.
When an I/O card, or an I/O unit is to be used with Power Mate–D,
I/O allocation is required at the time of ladder creation.
(2) MAKE UP

Slave
Master I/O Unit I/O Unit I/O Unit I/O Unit
CNC Group
F-D Mate #0
Power
Mate–D

Power Group
Mate–D/E/F/H #1

Group All of the Power Mates (Power Mate-D, -E, -F

Power
#2 and -H) can be used as slaves.
Mate–D/E/F/H

Group
I/O card #3

Group
#15

(a) FANUC I/O Link is made up of 1 master and many slave units.
(b) A maximum of 16 groups of slaves can be connected to 1 I/O link.
The number of slave connections per 1 group are as follows.
I/O Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum 4 units (4 base)
Power Mate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 unit
I/O card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 unit
(c) Any slave can be connected to any group. Note however, that it
is not possible to mix different kinds of slave in 1 group.

486
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 27. FANUC I/O LINK SLAVE FUNCTION

(3) I/O DATA OPERATION

I/O Link has 1024 input and 1024 output I/O points seen from the
Master. There is a periodic transfer of I/O data between the master
and slaves by allotting these input and output points to each slave.

Master Slave #0
Output
1024 Input
output
points
Slave #1
Output
Input
1024
input
points

Each slave has a fixed number of I/O points and the maximum number of
slaves possible on 1 I/O Link is:
Input points: 1024, Output points: 1024.
The number of I/O points possessed and the actual number of I/O
points may differ.

Actual I/O points Dedicated I/O points

Slave
type Input Output Input points Output points Remarks
points points
I/O Number of Number of Actual I/O Dedicated I/O
Unit-A points for points for points points
each input each output
module module
A maximum of 256 input Less than 32 ³ 32 points
and 256 output points are Less than 64 ³ 64 points
possible per 1 group. Less than 128 ³ 128 points
Less than 256 ³ 256 points
Refer to “FANUC I/O
Unit-MODEL A Connecting-
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(B-61813E) for further details.
Power 32 32 32 32 It is
Mate
Mate– possible
D 64 64 64 64 to assigng
128 128 128 128 all I/O
oints.
points
256 256 256 256
I/O 48 32 64 32
card
A, D
I/O 96 64 128 64
card
B, E

487
27. FANUC I/O LINK SLAVE FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

(4) CONNECTIONS

Slave
Master I/O Unit I/O Unit I/O Unit I/O Unit
10m 2m 2m 2m
CNC Group
F-D Mate #0
Power
Mate–D
10m

Power Group
Mate–D/E/F/H #1
2m

Optical adapter

200m Optical fiber cable

Optical adapter

2m
Group
Power
#2
Mate–D/E/F/H

10m

Group
I/O card #3

Group
#15

(a) The maximum cable length between each unit and equipment is
10 m. Note however that the maximum length within any unified
group of I/O units is 2 m.
(b) A maximum length of 200 m is possible if an optical adapter is
used. Note however that an optical adapter cannot be used
between I/O units in the same group.

I/O card
Power Mate–D
I/O unit

488
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 27. FANUC I/O LINK SLAVE FUNCTION

When an I/O card, or an I/O unit is used with Power Mate–D, the
Power Mate–D functions as a master unit, and the I/O card, or the
I/O unit functions as a slave unit.
(5) SPECIFICATIONS LIST
Item Specifications Remarks
Equipment and Master: Series 16 The master
units that can be Series 15, Series 18 functions are not
connected F-D Mate supported by the
Power Mate-D/H Power Mate–F.

Slave: I/O Unit-A

I/O Card
Power Mate-D/E/F/H
Number of Master: 1 unit The number of
connections slave connections
Slave: maximum of 16 groups is limited by I/O
I/O Unit: 4 units/group points.
Others: 1 unit/group
Number of Master: maximum I/O = 1024/1024 Refer to “(3) I/O
operating I/O Data operation”
points Slaves: per group
maximum I/O = 256/256
Cable length Between each equipment and unit:
maximum 10m
Note however that between any
unified group of I/O units:
maximum 2m

A maximum length of 200m is

possible with an optical adapter.
Note however that this is not possible
with any unified I/O unit.
(6) SETTING
The slave type of the I/O Link is set by the master unit.
Setting for when the Power Mate is used as a slave is shown below.
(a) Setting the module name
Setting when the Power Mate is used as a slave
FS04A : When DI/DO = 32/32
FS08A : When DI/DO = 64/64
0C02I : When DI = 128
0C02O : When DO = 128
0C03I : When DI = 256
0C03O : When DO = 256
Setting when I/O card A, D (48/32) is used as a slave
DI side : /6 DI = 64 points is assumed.
DO side : /4 DO = 32 points
Setting when I/O card B, E (96/64) is used as a slave
DI side : CN01I DI = 128 points is assumed.
DO side : CN01O DO = 64 points
No setting is required when a built-in I/O card is used. (Buit–in
I/O card is not a I/O Link.)
(b) Setting the base slot
The settings below are common to the Power Mate, I/O card.
Base : 0
Slot : 1
The above items are set on the master unit.
(7) I/O Link master area
Among X000 to X127 and Y000 to Y127, up to 1024 input points and
up to 1024 output points can be used.

489
27. FANUC I/O LINK SLAVE FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

(8) I/O link slave area

HOST DO ³ Power Mate DI (serial communication DI)
Power Mate Bit No.
PMC
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1020 SDI07 SDI06 SDI05 SDI04 SDI03 SDI02 SDI01 SDI00

X1021 SDI15 SDI14 SDI13 SDI12 SDI11 SDI10 SDI09 SDI08

X1022 SDI23 SDI22 SDI21 SDI20 SDI19 SDI18 SDI17 SDI16

X1023 SDI31 SDI30 SDI29 SDI28 SDI27 SDI26 SDI25 SDI24

X1024 SDI39 SDI38 SDI37 SDI36 SDI35 SDI34 SDI33 SDI32

X1025 SDI47 SDI46 SDI45 SDI44 SDI43 SDI42 SDI41 SDI40

X1026 SDI55 SDI54 SDI53 SDI52 SDI51 SDI50 SDI49 SDI48

X1027 SDI63 SDI62 SDI61 SDI60 SDI59 SDI58 SDI57 SDI56

Power Mate DO ³ HOST DI (serial communication DO)

Power Mate Bit No.
PMC
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1020 SDO07 SDO06 SDO05 SDO04 SDO03 SDO02 SDO01 SDO00

Y1021 SDO15 SDO14 SDO13 SDO12 SDO11 SDO10 SDO09 SDO08

Y1022 SDO23 SDO22 SDO21 SDO20 SDO19 SDO18 SDO17 SDO16

Y1023 SDO31 SDO30 SDO29 SDO28 SDO27 SDO26 SDO25 SDO24

Y1024 SDO39 SDO38 SDO37 SDO36 SDO35 SDO34 SDO33 SDO32

Y1025 SDO47 SDO46 SDO45 SDO44 SDO43 SDO42 SDO41 SDO40

Y1026 SDO55 SDO54 SDO53 SDO52 SDO51 SDO50 SDO49 SDO48

Y1027 SDO63 SDO62 SDO61 SDO60 SDO59 SDO58 SDI57 SDO56

is only enabled when the number of FANUC I/O Link signal points
used is 64/64.

When the number of signal points is 128/128, X1020 to X1035 and

Y1020 to Y1035 are enabled.
When the number of signal points is 256/256, X1020 to X1051 and
Y1020 to Y1051 are enabled.

NOTE
The address on the host side of DI/DO is decided by the
PMC address assignment.

490
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 27. FANUC I/O LINK SLAVE FUNCTION

(9) Data I/O function using the FANUC I/O Link (input)
IOLNK<G251#0>
Part programs, parameters, macro variables, and PMC data can be
transferred via the FANUC I/O Link linking a master unit to the
Power Mate.
IOLNK<G251#0> is a signal for selecting either RS–232C or
FANUC I/O Link connection when part programs, parameters, macro
variables, and PMC data are transferred.
IOLNK set to 0: Uses RS–232C.
IOLNK set to 1: Uses the FANUC I/O Link.
1) The data I/O control method depends entirely on the function of
the FANUC I/O Link master. This function cannot be used when
a FANUC I/O Link master that does not support this function is
used. The Power Mate–D/E/F/H cannot act as a master with this
function.
2) This function can transfer all data that can be transferred via the
RS–232C interface.
3) For data output, ISO code or EIA code format is selected using
setting parameter ISO.
Setting parameter ISO set to 1: Outputs ISO code.
Setting parameter ISO set to 0: Outputs EIA code.
4) For data input, the ISO or EIA code is identified automatically.
5) The I/O data format of the RS–232C interface is used.
6) The I/O condition of the RS–232C interface is used. However,
the user need not set a baud rate or stop bit.

491
28. SOFTWARE OPERATOR’S PANEL PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

28 SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL

492
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 28. SOFTWARE OPERATOR’S PANEL

28.1 The software operator’s panel substitutes commands sent from the
CRT/MDI panel for some operation switches on the machine tool
SOFTWARE operator’s panel (See Operator’s Manual (B–62094E) for details). With
OPERATOR’S PANEL this option, output signals are sent from the software operator’s panel,
SIGNALS (OUTPUT) through the CNC, to the PMC, which converts them to input signals and
sends them back to the CNC, generating the desired action. The
<F073 TO F081>
correspondence between output and input signals is shown in Table 28.1.

NOTE
This function is not supported by the Power Mate–F.

Table 28.1 Correspondence between Input and Output Signals

Signal name CNC → PMC PMC → CNC

Program protect signal KEYO<F075#6> KEY
Rapid traverse override signal ROV1O<F076#4> ROV1
ROV2O<F076#5> ROV2
Manual handle feed axis select HS1AO<F077#0> HS1A
HS1BO<F077#1> HS1B
Dry run signal DRNO<F075#5> DRN
Reference position return signal ZRNO<F073#4> ZRN
Mode selection signal MD1O<F073#0> MD1
MD2O<F073#1> MD2
MD4O<F073#2> MD4
Incremental feed signal MP1O<F076#0> MP1
MP2O<F076#1> MP2
Jog feedrate setting signal *JV0O to *JV15O<F079,F080> *JV0 to *JV15
Cutting feedrate override signal *FV0O to *FV7O<F078> *FV0 to *FV7
Machine lock signal MLKO<F075#4> MLK
Single block signal SBKO<F075#3> SBK
Optional block skip signal BDTO<F075#2> BDT
Feed hold signal *SPO<F075#7> *SP
Jog rapid traverse signal RTO<F077#6> RT
Manual feed direction select signal +J1O, –J1O,+J2O, –J2O +J1, –J1, +J2, –J2
<F081#0, #1, #2, #3>

493
28. SOFTWARE OPERATOR’S PANEL PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

28.2 These signals work from the optional software operator’s panel in the
same way as the predefined signals. Machine tool builders may assign
SOFTWARE their own functions to the signals.
OPERATOR’S PANEL
GENERAL-PURPOSE
OUT0 Signal corresponds to the switch described on 1st line of CRT display
SWITCH SIGNALS OUT1 Signal corresponds to the switch described on 2nd line of CRT display
(OUTPUT) OUT0 TO L L L L
OUT7 <F072> OUT7 Signal corresponds to the switch described on 8th line of CRT display

The cursor position (ON/OFF) on the CRT display and corresponding

signal conditions are specified below :

Cursor position on the CRT display Corresponding signal condition

ON 1
OFF 0

NOTE
This function is not supported by the Power Mate–F.

494
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 29. CUSTOM MACRO

29   

495
29. CUSTOM MACRO PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

29.1 Custom macro signals are interface signals used for custom macro and
PMC programs. Input/output is controlled by system variables from the
CUSTOM MACRO custom macro side, by specifying both addresses and bits from the PMC
SIGNAL (just as for DI/DO signals). (See Fig. 29.1 (a).)
(INPUT) UI0 TO UI15
<G054, G055>,
(OUTPUT) UO0 TO
UO131 <F054 TO
F059>

Read by system variable UI0 Output by addresses G054

#1000 to #1015 to (0-7bit) and G055 (0-7bit)
UI15
Custom
macro PMC side
Power Mate
Output by system variable Ready by addresses
side UO0 to
#1100 to #1115 F054(0-7bit) through F059
UO15, (0-7bit)

Fig.29.1 (a)

The relationship among system variables, I/O signals, addresses, and bits
is shown in Tables 29.1 (a) and (b).
Table 29.1 (a) Custom Macro Input Signals Table 29.1 (b) Custom Macro Output Signals
System Interface input PMC address System Interface output PMC address
variable signal (bit) variable signal (bit)
#1000 UI0 G054 (0) #1100 UO0 F054(0)
#1001 UI1 G054 (1) #1101 UO1 F054 (1)
#1002 UI2 G054 (2) #1102 UO2 F054 (2)
#1003 UI3 G054 (3) #1103 UO3 F054 (3)
#1004 UI4 G054 (4) #1104 UO4 F054 (4)
#1005 UI5 G054 (5) #1105 UO5 F054 (5)
#1006 UI6 G054 (6) #1106 UO6 F054 (6)
#1007 UI7 G054 (7) #1107 UO7 F054 (7)
#1008 UI8 G055 (0) #1108 UO8 F055 (0)
#1009 UI9 G055 (1) #1109 UO9 F055 (1)
#1010 UI10 G055 (2) #1110 UO10 F055 (2)
#1011 UI11 G055 (3) #1111 UO11 F055 (3)
#1012 UI12 G055 (4) #1112 UO12 F055 (4)
#1013 UI13 G055 (5) #1113 UO13 F055 (5)
#1014 UI14 G055 (6) #1114 UO14 F055 (6)
#1015 UI15 G055 (7) #1115 UO15 F055 (7)
#1133 UO100 to UO131 F056 to F059

496
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 29. CUSTOM MACRO

29.2 This signal calls and executes a program in memory. While a program
called by this signal is being executed, the program that was previously
INTERRUPT SIGNAL being executed as part of automatic operation is tentatively stopped.
FOR CUSTOM This signal can be received only during automatic operation.
MACROS (INPUT) Refer to Sec. 12.1.
UINT <G053#3> For details, see Operator’s Manual (B–62094E).

497
30. RIGID TAPPING PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

30 RIGID TAPPING

498
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 30. RIGID TAPPING

30.1
RIGID TAPPING

30.1.1 As shown in the figure below a gear can be inserted between the spindle
Connection Among and spindle motor, and between the spindle and position coder.
Spindle, Spindle Motor,
and Position Coder

Spindle control
(calculation of spindle
speed and voltage)

Error counter Spindle amplifier Spindle motor

Gear ratio n : m

4 Position coder Gear ratio q : p Spindle

1024 p/rev
(The 512 pulses/rev position coder is incorporated into some spindle motors. When the serial
spindle is used, the system carries out conversion from 512 pulses/rev to 1024 pulses/rev.)

Fig.30.1.1

(1) Gear between spindle and spindle motor

Up to three gear stages can be provided between the spindle and the
spindle motor. The gear ratio is arbitrary. The spindle move distance
per spindle motor rotation is different, based on the gear ratio. The
speed command voltage of the spindle motor must be adjusted. See
(2), below, for additional information regarding a spindle motor
incorporating a position coder.
(2) Gear between spindle and position coder
The position coder is used to detect the position of the spindle.
The gear ratio for the spindle and position coder is specified in the
parameter sets No. 5221 to No. 5223 and No. 5231 to No. 5233, or
parameter set PG1 and PG2 (No. 3706 #0, #1). Which parameter set
to use is specified by parameter VGR no. 5200 #1.

No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5200 VGR

VGR 1 : In rigid tapping, an arbitrary gear ratio is used for the

spindle and position coder.
The gear ratio for the spindle and position coder is set
in parameter Nos. 5221 to 5223 and 5231 to 5233.
0 : In rigid tapping, an arbitrary gear ratio is not used for
the spindle and position coder.
The gear ratio for the spindle and position coder is set
in parameter No. 3706.

499
30. RIGID TAPPING PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

(a) Arbitrary gear ratio (VGR = 1)

This is used if the gear ratio for the spindle motor and position
coder (built-in or separate) is not 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, or 1:8. Set VGR
to 1 and set the gear ratio using parameters No.5221 to 5223.
The gear ratio for the spindle motor and position coder cannot be
changed by shifting the spindle motor and spindle gears.
Parameters No.5221 to 5223 must all specify the same value for
the teeth of the individual spindle gears. Parameters No.5231 to
5233 must all specify the same value for the teeth of individual
position coder gears.
The 1024 or 512 pulses/rev position coder is built into the spindle
motor. For the 512 pulses/rev version, specify double the number
of teeth on each gear for the position coder. (Double the number
of teeth need not be specified for the serial spindle.)
(Example)

Built-in position coder

Spindle
motor

1st gear set 30 : 70

2nd gear set 50 : 50
3rd gear set 70 : 30

Set value
Parame
Name 512p/rev 1024p/rev Meaning
ter No.
P.C P.C
Number of teeth of the 1st gear
GRPLW 5221 70
for the spindle side
Number of teeth of the 2nd
GRPMD 5222 50
gear for the spindle side
Number of teeth of the 3rd
GRPHI 5223 30
gear for the spindle side
Number of teeth of the 1st gear
GRQLW 5231 60 Note) 30
for the position coder side
Number of teeth of the 2nd
GRQMD 5232 100 Note) 50
gear for the position coder side
Number of teeth of the 3rd
GRQHI 5233 140 Note) 70
gear for the position coder side

NOTE
Double value setting is not required for serial spindle.

500
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 30. RIGID TAPPING

(b) Standard gear ratio (VGR = 0)

If the gear ratio is either 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, and 1:8, it is set using
parameters PG1 and PG2 (nos. 3706 #0, #1). This applies
whether the position coder is built into or separate from the
spindle motor.

Parameter
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3706 TCW CWM ORM PG2 PG1

Parameter Gear ratio

nit
Detection unit
PG2 PG1 Spindle Position coder
0 0 1 1 360/4096=0.08789 deg
0 1 1 2 360/4096 2=0.17578 deg
1 0 1 4 360/4096 4=0.35156 deg
1 1 1 8 360/4096 8=0.70313 deg

The 512 pulses/rev spindle motor with the built-in position coder uses the
values set forth in the following table. A serial spindle does not require
double-value setting; use the same values as for the 1024 pulses/rev
spindle motor containing the position coder.
Gear ratio Parameter Gear ratio of
Detection
Spindle spindle to
Built-in Spindle PG2 PG1 unit
motor position coder
osition
position
coder 1 1 0 1 1:2 0.17578 deg
512 /
512p/rev 2 1 1 0 1:4 0.35156 deg
4 1 1 0 1:8 0.70313 deg

(3) Rigid tapping and machines with multiple gears

(a) Power Mate determines whether gears need changing using the
S analog gear change specification. If the gears need to be
changed, the CNC generates the S function code read signal SF
<F007#2> and gear selection signals GR10, GR20, and GR30
<F034#0-#2> to notify the PMC. Change gesrs using the PMC,
based on these signals.
If the constant surface speed control option has been selected, the
CNC does not process gear changes. Input gear selection signals
GR1 and GR2 <G028#1,#2> for the selected gear, and notify the
CNC of them.
To perform rigid tapping with the serial spindle, enter the
clutch/gear selection signals CTH1A and CTH2A <G070#3,#2>
from the PMC. Notify the serial spindle control unit of these
signals via the CNC, whether or not the constant surface speed
control option is selected.
(b) Changing gears during rigid tapping requires a different process
from that for gear changes during normal machining. As
described above, changing gears conforms to the S analog gear
change specifications.
Regardless of the option’s selection, if the range in which the
spindle speed specified by the S function code does not
correspond to the currently selected gear, the gears are changed.
The following tables list the spindle speed ranges for each gear
during normal machining (assuming no machine restrictions) and
rigid tapping :

501
30. RIGID TAPPING PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

Spindle speed range (normal machining)

Gear
Lower limit Upper limit
Low-speed 1 revolution Maximum low-speed gear
gear
Basic spindle motor speed
L%
= Low-speed gear ratio
Medium Maximum low- Maximum medium-speed gear speed
speed gear speed gear
speed+1 Basic spindle motor speed
L%
revolution =
Medium speed gear ratio
High-speed Maximum medium- Maximum high-speed gear speed
gear speed
gear speed+1 Basic spindle motor speed
L%
=
revolution High-speed gear ratio

NOTE
This table shows an example of three gears. L% indicates
a spindle motor protection constant (up to 100). L can be
specified for each gear using method B for changing the S
analog output gear (parameter SGB (No. 3705 #2) = 1).

Spindle speed range (during rigid tapping)

Gear
Lower limit Upper limit
Low-speed 1 revolution Maximum low-speed gear
gear
Maximum spindle motor speed+α
= Low-speed gear ratio
Medium Maximum low- Maximum medium-speed gear speed
speed gear speed gear
speed+1 Maximum spindle motor speed+α
revolution =
Medium speed gear ratio
High-speed Maximum medium- Maximum high-speed gear speed
gear speed
gear speed+1 Maximum spindle motor speed+α
=
revolution High-speed gear ratio

NOTE
For the basic spindle motor speed, refer to the spindle motor
description manual. ”+ α” means that the spindle motor
speed may slightly exceed the basic spindle motor speed.

Use gear change method B (parameter SGT (No. 3705 #3) = 1) in the
tapping cycle to specify the following :
(i) The table above shows the maximum low-speed gear speed
during rigid tapping for low-/medium-speed gear change
position D (parameter No. 3761).
(ii) The table above shows the maximum medium-speed gear
speed during rigid tapping for medium-/high-speed gear
change position E (parameter No. 3762).
See Section 19.1, ”S Function” for details of the S analog
gear change specifications.

502
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 30. RIGID TAPPING

(c) The loop gain can be specified for each gear. Specify ”0” for
parameter No. 5280 and specify loop gains for each gear for
parameter Nos. 5281 to 5283. Unless ”0” is specified for
parameter No. 5280, the loop gains for each gear are disabled, and
the loop gain common to all gears, the value of parameter No.
5280, is enabled.
(d) Specify the time constant and the maximum spindle speed for
each gear.
Use parameters Nos. 5261 to 5263 to specify the time constant.
Use parameters Nos. 5241 to 5243 to specify the maximum
spindle speed.
(e) Setting parameter TDR (No. 5201 #2) to ”1” enables setting of the
extraction time constant for each gear set. Specify the extraction
time constant for each gear in parameter Nos. 5271 to 5273.
(f) If parameter VGR (No. 5200 #1) is set to ”1”, the gear ratio for
the spindle and position coder can be set to anywhere between
1:32767 and 32767:1 in one-increment units for three gear sets.
However 1:8 to 8:1 is the recommended value.

30.1.2 Notes on the interface with the PMC are given below.
Interface with PMC (a) Entering/exiting rigid tapping mode using spindle enable signal
(ENB[19.1])
To enter rigid tapping mode on the PMC, specify M29. To exit
from this mode, release it at the falling edge of the ENB signal
in either reset or rigid tapping mode; see (7) lather in this section
for further information. Do not reset the spindle stop signal
*SSTP[19.3] to ”0”. (However, *SSTP may be used for changing
the gear set in combination with the SOR[19.4] signal. In this
case, the PMC must be specified to not release rigid tapping mode
at the falling edge of the ENB signal when *SSTP is ”0”.)
(b) PMC control of spindle speed
When SIND is ”1”, the spindle speed is controlled by signals
from the PMC (SSIN, SGN, and R01I to R12I). In rigid tapping
mode, SIND must be set to ”0” and the PMC must not control the
spindle speed because it:
– May affect the ENB signal described above ; and
– May delay PMC processing, allowing the spindle to rotate
momentarily when rigid tapping mode is released by the G80
block.
(c) Gear-change timing
In most cases, S**** is specified in the M29 block. In rigid
tapping mode, however, it is output at the execution of the G84
block (G74 for left-handed tapping). That is, the gears are
changed at the execution of the G84 (G74) block.
(1) When the rigid tapping mode is set
The rigid tapping mode is set by M29 (rigid tapping prepare auxiliary
function) and S**** command.
When M29 is specified in the PMC, perform the following
operations :
(a) Stop the spindle if it is rotating.
(b) Verify that the spindle has stopped completely; turn the rigid
tapping mode DI signal RGTAP (G061 #0) to ”1”.
(c) Excite the spindle motor so it rotates in the forward direction
(counterclockwise, as seen from the shaft) by the positive speed
command voltage.

503
30. RIGID TAPPING PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

(d) Input FIN at least 250 ms after exciting the motor.

NOTE
FIN must be delayed at least 250 ms because there is no
way to check whether the spindle motor has been activated.
The time required for activation depends on the type of
spindle motor and amplifier, and 250 ms is the standard .

The S**** command is stored, but not executed, in the M29 block. It is
executed in the G84 (G74) block. The spindle output is equal to the
specified S0 output.
(2) Executing G84 (G74)
When M29S**** is specified, S**** is obtained, and the spindle output
is equal to the specified S0 output. The S**** is output by executing G84
(G74).
The machine has multiple gear sets between the spindle and spindle
motor, if S**** is out of the selected range, signals SF (F007#2) and
GR1O, GR2O, and G30 (F034#0-#2) are output and gear shift
processing is performed.
To execute rigid tapping using the serial spindle, input the clutch/gear
selection signals CTH1A and CTH2A (G073#3, #2) from the PMC
whenever the gear set is changed, and notify the serial spindle control
unit through the CNC.
The S code is output to the first G84 (G74) block (positioning for
drilling). The position loop of the spindle motor is closed in the
second G84 (G74) block (R point positioning). If the spindle speed
offset is not adjusted correctly in the time between the PMC exiting
the spindle motor using M29 and when the second G84 (G74) block
closes the position loop, the spindle motor may rotate slightly. (This
applies only to the analog spindle; the serial spindle does not require
adjustment of the offset value.)
In the rigid tapping mode, the same PMC processing applies to
specifying M29 before G84, M29 and G84 in the same block, and
G84 as a rigid tapping code. (In these cases, the M code of M29 is
output.)
(3) Signal
A GR1O, GR2O, or GR3O signal is output according to the spindle
gear shift specification. If SF is output, the PMC must shift gears
according to the gear signal.

Parameter
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F034 GR3O GR2O GR1O

Two gear sets Three gear sets

GR1O 1st gear set 1st gear set
GR2O 2nd gear set 2nd gear set
GR3O 3rd gear set

(4) Timing chart

The timing chart varies depending on the type of command, whether the
constant surface speed control option is specified, and whether the gear sets
can be switched. The table below shows which timing chart applies in
which case.

504
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 30. RIGID TAPPING

Timing chart classification table

Command type
Gear change M29 and G84 (G74) G84 (G74) is used as a G
M29 is specified prior
are specified in the code for rigid tapping according
to G84 (G74).
same block. to parameter setting.
Gear change is not provided. Fig. 30.1.2 (a) Fig. 30.1.2 (c) Fig. 30.1.2 (e)
Gear change is provided. Fig. 30.1.2 (b) Fig. 30.1.2 (d) Fig. 30.1.2 (f)

(a) When M29 is specified before G84 (G74).

(i) When gear-change is not performed

M29
First block Second block
G84 (G74)

ENB
To be masked to
the second block
Spindle
output

RGTAP
250 ms
or more

FIN

Rotation

Excitation SFR

Position
loop

Fig.30.1.2 (a) Rigid Tapping Time Chart 1

505
30. RIGID TAPPING PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

(ii) When gear-change is performed

M29

First block Second block

G84 (G74)

ENB
To be masked
to the second
block
Spindle
output

SF

GR1O

GR2O

GR3O

*SSTP

SOR

RGTAP
250 ms
or more

FIN

Rotation

Gear-change

Excitation SFR

Position
loop

Fig.30.1.2 (b) Rigid Tapping Time Chart 2

NOTE
This time chart shows an example where the gear has
shifted from low to middle gear. One of the gear select
signals (GR10, GR20, GR30) has turned from ON to OFF,
and one of the two remaining signals has turned from OFF
to ON. This changes the gear.

506
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 30. RIGID TAPPING

(b) Issuing M29 and G84 (G74) in the same block

(i) When gear-change is not performed

M29

First block Second block

G84 (G74)

ENB
To be masked to
the second block
Spindle
output

RGTAP
250 ms
or more

FIN

Rotation

Excitation SFR

Position
loop

Fig.30.1.2 (c) Rigid Tapping Time Chart 3

507
30. RIGID TAPPING PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

(ii) When gear-change is performed

M29

First block Second block

G84 (G74)

ENB
To be masked
to the second
block
Spindle
output

SF

GR1O

GR2O

GR3O

*SSTP

SOR

RGTAP
250 ms
or more

FIN

Rotation
Gear-change

Excitation SFR

Position
loop

Fig.30.1.2 (d) Rigid Tapping Time Chart 4

NOTE
This time chart shows an example where the gear has
shifted from low to middle gear. One of the gear select
signals (GR10, GR20, GR30) has turned from ON to OFF,
and one of the two remaining signals has turned from OFF
to ON. This changes the gear.

508
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 30. RIGID TAPPING

(c) Specifying G84 (G74) for rigid tapping by parameters

(i) When gear-change is not performed

M29

First block Second block

G84 (G74)
M29 is commanded intemally.

ENB To be masked to
the second block
Spindle
output

RGTAP
250 ms
or more

FIN

Rotation

Excitation SFR

Position
loop

Fig.30.1.2 (e) Rigid Tapping Time Chart 5

509
30. RIGID TAPPING PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

(ii) When gear-change is performed

M29

First block Second block

G84 (G74)
M29 is commanded
intemally.

ENB
To be masked
to the second
block
Spindle
output

SF

GR1O

GR2O

GR3O

*SSTP

SOR

RGTAP
250 ms
or more

FIN

Rotation

Gear-change

Excitation SFR

Position
loop

Fig.30.1.2 (f) Rigid Tapping Time Chart 6

NOTE
This time chart shows an example where the gear has
shifted from low to middle gear. One of the gear select
signals (GR10, GR20, GR30) has turned from ON to OFF,
and one of the two remaining signals has turned from OFF
to ON. This changes the gear.

510
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 30. RIGID TAPPING

(5) Timing to cancel rigid tapping mode

When rigid tapping is completed, the mode is canceled if a G code (such
as G80, canned cycle G code, or Group 01 G code) is issued.
The spindle output is produced in the same way as executing S0. Cancel the
PMC rigid tapping mode at the falling edge of the ENB signal by
de-energizing the spindle ; then turn off the rigid tapping mode DI signal.
The system goes to the next block after confirming that the DI signal is off.
When gear change is performed using *SSTP and SOR, the ENB signal can
be either ON or OFF. Do not cancel the PMC’s rigid tapping mode at the
falling edge of the ENB signal under these circumstances. The position
loop is also canceled.
When the CNC is reset, the PMC’s rigid tapping mode must be
canceled.
When CRG (parameter No. 5200#2) is ”1”, the system goes directly
to the next block without checking that the rigid tapping mode DI
signal is ”0”. Set CRG to ”1” for systems in which the DI signal is
always ”1”.

G80
(or G code of group 01)

1
CNC ENB 0

S-ANALOG

PMC RGTAP ON
OFF

Rotation

Spindle Excitation ON
motor OFF

Position Close
loop Open

NOTE
1 If rigid tapping mode is canceled by a Group 01 G code,
such as G00 or G01, the block containing the G code is
executed at the same time the ENB signal is turned to ”0”.
Therefore, if a block contains an M code for controlling the
spindle, an error may occur during processing in the PMC.
2 When CRG is 1, if the next block contains an M code for
controlling the spindle, an error may occur during
processing in the PMC, when :
- Rigid tapping mode is canceled by issuing G80
- Rigid tapping mode is canceled by issuing a Group 01 G
code , such as G00 or G01

511
30. RIGID TAPPING PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

30.1.3
Features (1) Feedrate
In rigid tapping mode, the tapping axis is fed at a rate specified by F;
the spindle speed is n (deg/min). Override is invalid for both of them.
An override of up to 200% can be applied to withdrawal operations
by setting parameter DOV (No. 5200#4) to ”1”, and setting an
appropriate override value in parameter RGOVR (No. 5211). The
time constant for withdrawal operations can be modified by
parameter TDR (No. 5201#1) ; when it is set to ”1”, the values in
parameter Nos. 5271 to 5273 are used as the time constant for
withdrawal.
(2) Acceleration and deceleration
Linear acceleration/deceleration is valid for rigid tapping.
(3) Override
Override is invalid for rigid tapping. Fixed override can be applied to
withdrawal operations by setting parameters DOV (No. 5200 #4) or
RGOVR (No. 5211).
(4) Dry run
Dry run is valid for G84 (G74). When the dry run is applied to the
tapping axis speed of G84 (G74), tapping is performed. The spindle
speed will match the dry run speed.
(5) Machine lock
Machine lock is valid for G84 (G74).
When G84 (G74) is executed with the machine locked, however the
tapping axis and the spindle do not move.
(6) Reset
When the reset operation is performed during rigid tapping, the mode
is reset. The spindle motor goes to the ordinary mode, but G84 (G74)
mode is not reset.
(7) Feed hold, interlock, and single block
The feed hold, interlock, and single block functions are effective for
G84 (G74).
The feed hold and single block functions in rigid tapping mode can
be nullified by setting parameter FHD (No. 5200 #6) to ”1”.
As with the machine lock signal, the feed hold, interlock, and single
block functions are also effective for the spindle indirectly, through
tapping axis operations.
(8) Operation mode
G84 (G74) can be executed only in the AUTO and MDI modes.
(9) Manual feed
Rigid tapping cannot be performed in the manual feed mode.
(10)Backlash compensation
In rigid tapping mode, the backlash compensates for the lost motion
at forward and reverse spindle rotations. Set it using parameter No.
5321. The backlash compensation is normally made for the tapping
axis.
(11) Displaying the difference between spindle and tapping axis errors
By displaying the difference between the spindle and tapping axis
errors, check that the spindle synchronizes with the tapping axis, then
modify parameters and adjust the machine as required.
The instantaneous value of the difference between the spindle error
and the tapping axis error is given in diagnosis No. 0452, and the

512
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 30. RIGID TAPPING

upper limit to that value is shown in diagnosis No. 0453.

Diagnosis No. 0452 clears to ”0” when rigid tapping mode is set or
canceled, and diagnosis No. 0453 clears to ”0” in the rigid tapping
positioning cycle.
The following figure shows the tapping axis as the Z axis.

Z-axis
error
Zc
Ze

Speed 1 1
Zc =


102 (Theoretical value)
60 Gain Detection unit

Ze = Z-axis error counts (measured value)

Spindle Sc
error
Se

Speed
360 1 1
Sc =


102 (Theoretical value)
60 Gain Detection unit

Se = Spindle error counts (measured value)

Speed : mm/min or inch/min

Gain : 0.01 s-1
Detection unit : mm, inch, or deg
Speed : rpm

Ze
∆ Z=
100 [%]
Zc The difference between the spindle error and
the Z axis error can be obtained by ∆ S – ∆ Z.
This value is sampled at intervals of 64 ms.
Se
∆ S=
100 [%]
Sc

(12)Spindle CW/CCW signal output

During rigid tapping, this signal tells the PMC whether the spindle
is rotating clockwise or counterclockwise.
This signal is output only when the spindle is operating during rigid
tapping. Even when the system is in rigid tapping mode, this signal
is not output when:
– The spindle is being positioned to a hole location;
– The spindle is in dwell mode at the bottom of a hole or point R;
– The machine is at a halt as requested by the feed hold; or
– The machine is at a halt as requested by the single block function.

513
30. RIGID TAPPING PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

When the machine is at a halt as requested by the interlock or machine lock

function, or when the Z axis is being ignored, this signal is output.

CNC ³ PMC
PMC address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F065 RGSPM RGSPP

RGSPP 1 : The spindle is rotating clockwise during rigid tapping.

0 : The spindle is not rotating clockwise during rigid
tapping.
RGSPM 1 : The spindle is rotating counterclockwise during rigid
tapping.
0 : The spindle is not rotating counterclockwise during
rigid tapping.
The spindle rotation direction signal is effective only in rigid tapping
mode, and not is output in a normal S analog mode, in which both
RGSPP and RGSPM are 0.
(13)Notes
(a) Drift compensation is not performed when an analog spindle is
used or during pitch compensation for a spindle in rigid mode.
(b) When an analog spindle is used, make sure to set the spindle
speed offset compensation value accurately in parameter No.
3731. In a standard system, this parameter is set within the range
from –8191 to +8191. However, when rigid tapping is performed,
the parameter must be set within the range from –1023 to +1023.
If the spindle speed offset compensation value is not accurately
specified, the spindle stops moving at the start of tapping because
it is not located in the effective area.
When the serial spindle is used in rigid tapping, it is not necessary
to adjust parameter No. 3731 for the spindle speed offset
compensation.
(14)Note concerning the spindle positioning function
(a) When used with the spindle orientation function
Spindle orientation is a function that positions the spindle in a
fixed position using sensors and the PMC, without receiving any
CNC control.
Because the CNC does not control this function, the orientation
function for the axis being used becomes effective.

30.1.4
Signals Subsec. to be
Name Symbol
referenced
(1) PMC rigid mode signal RGTAP (G061#0)
(2) Spindle rotation direction sig- RGSPP, RGSPM (F065#0,#1)
nal
(3) Spindle enable signal ENB (F001#4)
S code signal output (binary) S00 to S31 (F022 to F025)
(4) Spindle gear change signal GR1O, GR2O, GR3O
output (F034#0 to #2)

514
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 30. RIGID TAPPING

30.1.5
Address Map
(1) DI signal
PMC ³ CNC
PMC address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G028 GR2 GR1

G061 RGTAP

(2) DO signal
CNC ³ PMC
PMC address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F001 ENB

F022 S07 S06 S05 S04 S03 S02 S01 S00

F023 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S09 S08

F024 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16

F025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24

F034 GR3O GR2O GR1O

F065 RGSPM RGSPP

30.1.6
Signal Details
(1) PMC rigid tapping mode signal RGTAP <G061#0>
This signal is used to check if the PMC is set in the rigid tapping
mode. When the PMC receives the M29 command (rigid tapping
mode prepare auxiliary function), it sets the mode, turns this signal
to ”1”, and notifies the CNC. If this signal does not turn to ”1” when
M29 is sent, a P/S alarm occurs in the G84 (G74) block.
RGTAP=1 : PMC is set in rigid tapping mode
=0 : PMC is not set in rigid tapping mode
(2) Spindle rotation direction signal
See 30.1.3 (12) ”Spindle CW/CCW signal output.”
(3) Signals related to S code output
1) ENB signal <F001#4>
The ENB signal is used in a PMC sequence to release rigid
tapping. For details of the ENB signal, see 30.1.2 (5).
2) S code output signal (binary output)
When an S code is specified, the value for the S code is output to
F022 to F025 in binary format.

515
30. RIGID TAPPING PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

PMC address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F022 S07 S06 S05 S04 S03 S02 S01 S00

F023 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S09 S08

F024 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16

F025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24

NOTE
1 The S code output value (F022 to F025) varies depending
on the S code command. The SF signal that indicates
completion of S code output changes, depending on
parameter setting and the optional function specified.
1) If the S analog output option or the S serial output is not
specified, the signal SF <F007#2> output follows the S
code (F022 to F025) output whenever an S code
command is issued.
2) If either the analog or serial S output is specified, the SF
signal output changes as described below.
(parameter SFA No. 3705#6)
SFA=0 : When an S code is specified, the SF
signal is output only when the gear set is
changed.
SFA=1 : When an S code is specified, the SF
signal is output regardless of changing
gear set
Accordingly, to use the SF signal when the S code output
signal needs to be read by the PMC for gear switching or
output switching in rigid tapping, perform parameter setting
as required.

(4) Spindle gear switching signal output (GR1O, GR2O, and GR3O)
When the constant surface speed control option is not specified, the
PMC is given information on the gear set of the spindle whose speed
was specified by S**** at the execution of G84 (G74).
When necessary to the necessity to change the gear set, the state
GR1O, GR2O, and GR3O signals change simultaneously with the SF
signal.
Change the gear set on the PMC based on this signal.
The relationship between the output signal and the gear set is shown
below.
GR3O GR2O GR1O
First gear (low)

f
Second gear (middle)
f

Third gear (high) f

To use the serial spindle, the clutch/gear selection signal CTH1A,

CTH2A (G070#3, #2) must be input in accordance with the output
from GR1O, GR2O, and GR3O to the PMC. For details on the
clutch/gear selection signals, refer to 8.40.12 (parameters), 8.40.15
(signal details), and ”Descriptions (B-65042E)” of FANUC AC
Spindle Motor series, Serial Interface.

516
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 30. RIGID TAPPING

(5) Spindle gear signals (GR1 and GR2)

When the constant surface-speed control option is specified, the GR1
and GR2 signals give the CNC information on the spindle gear set
used.
The relationship between the input signal and the spindle gear set is
shown below
GR2 GR1
First gear (low)


Second gear (middle)
f
Third gear (high) f

To use the serial spindle, the clutch/gear selection signal CTH1A,

CTH2A (G070#3, #2) must be input in accordance with the output
from GR1O, GR2O, and GR3O to the PMC. For details on the
clutch/gear selection signals, refer to 8.40.12 (parameters), 8.40.15
(signal details), and ”Descriptions (B-65042E)” of FANUC AC
Spindle Motor series, Serial Interface.

517
30. RIGID TAPPING PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

30.2
DIFFERENTIAL RIGID
TAP (INPUT) (1) Outline
When another CNC controls spindle 1 and a Power Mate controls spindle
DEFMOD <G072#3> 2, the tool of the opposite spindle 2 can perform different-speed rigid
tapping while the workpiece attached to spindle 1 is being rotated.

NOTE
It is necessary at least to use FANUC serial spindle for the
spindle 2.

(2) Differential rigid tap control mode

(a) When spindle 1 is in a state of constant rotation, the command for
differential mode of spindle 2 is executed.
When this command for differential mode is executed, spindle 2 is
controlled by (speed command for spindle 2 + speed for spindle 1).
In this case, forward rotation (SFR:ON), 0rpm is commanded for
spindle 2.
As a result, spindle 2 is controlled to have the same speed as that
of spindle 1.
The direction of rotation by spindle 2 is set by the parameter for
differential direction.
(b) When the speed of spindle 2 reaches that of spindle 1, rigid tap
is conducted in line with the speed of spindle 1 by inputting the
regular rigid tap command to spindle 2.
(c) After the completion of rigid tap, the differential mode of spindle
2 is canceled.
(3) System configuration

Power
Spindle Amp 2 Spindle Amp 1 CNC
Mate

Input Circuit


CNC CNB

Power Power
CN11A CN13 CN3 CN11A

Command Feedback Command

Spindle 2 Spindle 1
Feedback Feedback

518
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 30. RIGID TAPPING

(4) Example of sequence

During differential rigid tap operation


Speed of spindle 2
Speed of spindle 3



0 rpm

Speed arrival signal

(SAR)

Differential mode
command

Speed command
(SFR) 

Rigid tap command

When spindle 2 is set to differential speed mode, spindle 2 is

accelerated to attain the speed of spindle 1. (In this case, the
spindle 2 speed command is 0 rpm.)
 Rigid tap begins when it is confirmed that the speed of spindle 2
has reached the speed of spindle 1.
 Differential rigid tap is executed.
 After the end of rigid tap, differential mode is canceled and
spindle 2 stops. (In this case, the speed of spindle 2 is set to 0
rpm.)
If any speed other than 0 rpm is commanded for spindle 2, spindle
2 will accelerate to attain the commanded speed.

519
30. RIGID TAPPING PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

M29S – ; G84X . . R . . ; G80 ;

M29
(→PMC)
ENB
(→PMC)

SFR
(CNC←)

SARS
(→PMC)
Speed arrival

DEFMOD
(CNC←)
Differential mode

RGTAP
(CNC←)

FIN
(CNC←)

Position
loop
Speed of main spindle

Spindle
speed

Example of Sequence of Differential Rigid Tap

520
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 30. RIGID TAPPING

30.3
TAP RETURN
FUNCTION (INPUT) (1) General
The tap return function executes the part equivalent to the withdrawal
RTNT <G214#7> , in tap upon the input of a DI signal.
(OUTPUT) RTPT This function stores the information of the tap executed last and
performs withdrawal by the length L to be essentially threaded
<F209#5> regardless of whether the power is broken or not.
Example of Executing Tap Return Function and Reference Position
Return Function as Combined

Reference Position No. 1,

No. 2 or No. 3

Initial point

ÃÃ
R point
L

ÃÃ
ÃÃ L Tap halt point (start
position of this function)

Hole bottom point

Halt Tap Cycle  Tap Return Function

(2) Start
The tap return function is executed according to the stored
information of tap as the JOG mode is selected and the tap return start
signal (RTNT) is turned from 0 to 1.
(3) End
When withdrawn by the distance equivalent to L, ended by turning
the tap return complete signal (RTPT) 1.

NOTE
The complete signal above turns 0 at axis move, emergency
stop and servo alarm.

(4) Halt
Withdrawal is halted as soon as the tap return start signal (RTNT) is
turned from 1 to 0 while executing this function. In that case, the tap
return complete signal (RTPT) remains 0.

521
30. RIGID TAPPING PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

(5) Override
In override, parameters concerning the rigid tap withdrawing
override are valid. When parameter DOV (No. 5200#4) is 1,
therefore, override is effected according to the override value set by
parameter No. 5211.
An override value of 100% is always used for tap return.
(6) Reference Position Return
It is possible to reset to each reference position by executing the
reference position No. 1, No. 2 or No. 3 return function by the RTN1,
RTN2 or RTN3 signal after executing the rigid tap return function.

522
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 30. RIGID TAPPING

30.4 The tapping cycle using a chaser tool begins with cutting from the point
R to the end point in rigid mode, then returning to the initial point in rapid
RIGID TAPPING traverse mode. At the same time, opening and closing of the chaser is
USING A CHASER performed.
TOOL CTCHK (G214
M29 S___;
#5) CTOPN (F209 #7)
G78
X x R r Q q F f ;
G79
G80;
G78 . . . Forward tapping cycle
G79 . . . Reverse tapping cycle
x...... Tapping end point position
r ...... Position of point R
q...... Specifies position to open chaser tool as a distance from
point X.
f . . . . . . Cutting feedrate (mm/min or inch/min)
(1) By specifying M29 S_ ; before the G78 or G79 block, rigid mode is
selected. At the same time, the chaser tool open signal (CTOPN) is
turned off and the chaser tool is closed.
(2) Operation of G78 and G79

G78/G79

Point X Point R
Q

 

Initial point

 

G78 Forward tapping cycle

G79 Reverse tapping cycle

Moves to point R using rapid traverse.

 Checks that the chaser tool is closed.
 Performs tapping up to point X. In order to open the chaser tool
for the length of Q (in front of X), the chaser tool open signal
(CTOPN) is turned on.
 After reaching point X, the chaser tool status check signal
(CTCHK) is used to confirm that the chaser tool is open.
 Returns to initial point using rapid traverse.
 The chaser open signal (CTOPN) is turned off and the chaser tool
closes.
(3) Rigid mode is turned off by G80.

523
31. TEMPORARY INTERRUPT DETECTION
SIGNAL ACT <G213#7> PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

TEMPORARY INTERRUPT DETECTION SIGNAL ACT

31 <G213#7>

Automatically set to 0 when the power is turned on. During automatic

operation or similar operation, set this signal to 1 in the ladder program.
If the Power Mate detects a temporary interrupt in the power supply, this
signal will be set to 0 causing the servo to stop. During automatic
operation, if the servo stops although the Power Mate is not displaying
an alarm, then check this signal. If it is 0, then a temporary power interrupt
occurred.

524
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 32. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC

32 AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC

(1) Outline
This function uses commands from the PMC to provide axis control
independent of the Power Mate.
It is possible to select any axis available for control and direct it by
using one of two DI/DO command groups. The axis parameter EDIO
(No. 8010) is used to define which of the two groups will be applied
to a given axis. It is possible to synchronize axis movement by
applying the same group of commands to two axes at the same time.
The axis controlled in this manner moves independently of any other
axis controlled by the Power Mate or PMC.

NOTE
This signal cannot be used with the 2–path Power Mate–D.

(2) Controlled axis

nth axis (n : 1 or 2) can be selected and controlled.
(3) Notes
(a) The controlled axis is not affected by the mode selection.
(b) Parameter OVE (No. 8001#2) selects the use of either the same
signal as the Power Mate or a PMC axis control signal idependent
of the Power Mate for control of rapid traverse override, cutting
feed override, and dry run functions.
(c) While the feed hold, single block, reset, and interlock functions
of the Power Mate axes are invalid for the PMC-controlled axis,
the same control is possible by operating the PMC signal.
(d) Machine lock and emergency stop are effective under axes of
Power Mate control. The machine lock can be invalidated using
parameter MLE (No. 8001#0).
(e) Control of a specific axis can be switched back and forth between
the Power Mate and PMC. When control is currently being
exercised by the PMC, parameter PCF (No. 3105#1) selects
whether or not the actual speed display adds the axis movement
during that control.
(4) The commands
The following table shows the range of operations which can be performed
using the PMC control command signals EC0α to EC6α (α : A, B)
<G143#0-#6> <G155#0 to #6>.

525
32. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

Equivalent
Axis control
Power Mate
command Operation
axes
signal
command
Rapid traverse–linear acceleration/
00H G00
deceleration
Cutting feed (feed/min.)–exponential
01H G94 G01
acceleration/deceleration
04H Dwell G04
Reference position return ; used after rapid Manual
traverse in the reference position return reference
05H
direction by means of parameter ZMIx no. position
1006#5 return
Continuous feed–exponential acceleration/ Controls a
06H deceleration. Causes continuous movement in spindle or
a specified direction along the controlled axis. rotary motion
Miscellaneous function ; Same operation as the
12H M function
miscellaneous function of Power Mate

(a) PMC axis control command method

Parameter EDIO No. 8010 is used to specify which of the two
DI/DO signal groups (A, B) is used for each individual axis.
A controlled axis is selected by setting the axis select signal
(EAXn (n : 1 or 2) <G136#0 or #1>) to “1”.
An axis select signal can be switched when the axis select status
signal *EAXSL <F129#7> is turned to “0”.
If the signal EAXx is switched to “1” while the signal *EAXSL
is “1”, P/S alarm No. 139 will be triggered.
After the axis control command signals (EC0α to EC6α
<G143#0-#6>, <G155#0-#6>) and the command data
(“command block”) have been set on the PMC side, if the axis
control command completed signal (EBUFα<G142#7>,
<G154#7>) is reversed (“1” to “0” or “0” to “1”), the Power Mate
side will fetch and execute that command block.

NOTE
Where synchronous operation of two axes is being carried
out by use of the same command set, the same conditions
should be set in the feedrate parameters for each axis (rapid
traverse rate, acceleration/deceleration time constant,
linear axis/rotary axis, etc.)

526
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 32. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC

Axis control
Operation command Command data
signal
Rapid traverse 00H Total travel amount : EID0α–EID31α <G146 to G149> <G158 to G161>
In cases where parameter RPD No. 8002#0 is used to specify a rapid traverse rate
independent of the CNC, the following command data must be set :
Feedrate : EIF0α–EIF15α <G144 to G145> <G156 to G157>
Cutting feed 01H Total travel amount : EID0α–EID31α <G146 to G149> <G158 to G161>
(feed/min) Feedrate : EIF0α–EIF15α <G144 to G145> <G156 to G157>
Dwell 04H Dwell time : EID0α–EID31α <G146 to G149> <G158 to G161>
Reference 05H
position return
Continuous feed 06H Feed direction : EID31α <G149#7> <G161#7>
Feedrate : EIF0α–EIF15α <G144 to G145> <G156 to G157>
Miscellaneous 12H Miscellaneous EID0α–EID7α <G146> <G158>
function function code

α : A, B
(b) Commanding two or more operations continuously
Using the PMC axis control function, the command blocks of two
or more operations are buffred by the Power Mate so that
commands are made continuously by PMC.
Even if one command is being executed, the Power Mate accepts
the next command as long as there is a vacancy in its buffer.

PMC command Buffer on Power Mate side

Block 1 ³ Command (1) ³ (4) ³ (3) Execution wait buffer 1

Block 2 ³ Command (2) ±

Block 3 ³ Command (3) (2) Execution wait buffer 2

Block 4 ³ Command (4) ±

Block 5 ³ Command (5) (1) Execution buffer

X X

Block n PMC command

When command (1) (block 1) has been executed, the following

transfers are made:
Command (2) ³ Execution buffer
Command (3) ³ Execution wait buffer 2
Command (4) ³ Execution wait buffer 1
After command (2) (block 2) starts to execute, command (5)
(block 5) can be sent to the Power Mate side.

527
32. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

(c) Buffer status

The “exclusive logical sum” (“xor”) format of the axis control
command completed signal (EBUFα<G142#7>, <G154#7>)
and the axis control command read signal (EBSYα <F130#7>,
<F133#7>) always allows the status of the Power Mate buffer to
be dEtermined.
EBUFα <G142#7> <G154#7> Exclusive
k logical Power Mate buffer status
EBSYα <F130#7> <F133#7> sum (xor)
0 1
Command can be fetched since
k k 0
the buffer status is “vacant”.
0 1
Command cannot be fetched
since the buffer status is “full”.
When the execution of a
0 1
command is completed and the
k k 1 buffer assumes the “vacant”
status, the next command is
1 0 fetched by reversing the status
of the axis control command
read signal.

(d) Time charts

The command operation time charts are shown in Fig. 32.

Command data (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

EBUFα <G142#7> <G154#7>

Command disabled

EBSYα <F130#7> <F133#7>

Execution
wait buffer 1

Execution
wait buffer 2
(1) (2)
Execution buffer

Start End Start

Fig.32 Command Operation Time Chart

528
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 32. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC

(5) Setting units (parameter No. 1004)

Least input increment Least command increment
0.001 mm 0.001 mm
0.0001 mm 0.0001 mm
0.0001 inch 0.0001 inch
0.00001 inch 0.00001 inch
0.001 deg 0.001 deg
0.0001 deg 0.0001 deg

(6) Feedrate
(a) Maximum rapid traverse
(i) Linear axis
Metric output Inch output
Standard 0.1m Standard 0.1m
100000 mm/min 24000 mm/min 4000 inch/min 960 inch/min

(ii) Rotation axis

Increment system
Standard 0.1m
100000 deg/min 24000 deg/min

(b) Feedrate range

(i) Linear axis

Increment Metric output Inch output

system Standard 0.1m Standard 0.1m
1–100000 1–12000 0.01–4000.00 0.01–480.00
Feed/minute
mm/min mm/min inch/min inch/min
Feed/revolution 0.0001–500.0000 m/rev 0.000001–9.999999 inch/rev

(ii) Rotation axis

Increment system
Standard 0.1m
1 - 100000 deg/min 1 - 12000 deg/min

(7) Signal list

The command group to which each signal belongs is indicated by an
appropriate suffix, illustrated below :
DI/DO signal group α: XXXα (α : A, B)

529
32. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

(8) Signal list

(α : A or B)
Item Signal name Symbol
(9)–(a) Axis control command signal EC0α to EC6α (G143#0 to #6) (G155#0 to #6)
Axis control command issued signal EBUFα (G142#7) (G154#7)
(9)–(b)
Axis control command read completion signal EBSYα (F130#7) (F133#7)
(9)–(c) Reset signal ECLRα (G142#6) (G154#6)
(9)–(d) Axis control temporary stop signal ESTPα (G142#5) (G154#5)
(9)–(e) Servo–off signal ESOFα (G142#4) (G154#4)
Block stop signal ESBKα (G142#3) (G154#3)
(9)–(f)
Block stop disable signal EMSBKα (G143#7) (G155#7)
Auxiliary function BCD code EM11α to EM28α (F132) (F135)
(9)–(g) Auxiliary function read signal EMFα (F131#0) (F134#0)
Auxiliary function completion signal EFINα (G142#0) (G154#0)
(9)–(h) Feed rate signal EIF0α to EIF15α (G144, G145) (G156, G157)
Axis movement amount, EID0α to EID31α (G146 to G149) (G158 to G161)
(9)–(i) dwell time,
auxiliary function code
(9)–(j) In–position signal EINPα (F130#0) (F133#0)
(9)–(k) Following zero checking signal ECKZα (F130#1) (F133#1)
(9)–(l) Alarm signal EIALα (F130#2) (F133#2)
(9)–(m) Axis moving signal EGENα (F130#4) (F133#4)
(9)–(n) Auxiliary function executing signal EDENα (F130#3) (F133#3)
Negative–direction overtravel signal EOTNα (F130#6) (F133#6)
(9)–(o)
Positive–direction overtravel signal EOTPα (F130#5) (F133#5)
(9)–(p) Control axis selection signal EAXn (G136#0 or #1) n : 1 or 2
(9)–(q) Control axis selection state signal *EAXSL (F129#7)
(9)–(r) Override signal *FV0E to *FV7E (G151)
(9)–(s) Override cancellation signal OVCE (G150#5)
(9)–(t) Rapid traverse override signal ROV1E, ROV2E (G150#0, #1)
Dry run signal DRNE (G150#7)
(9)–(u)
Manual rapid traverse signal RTE (G150#6)
(9)–(v) Override 0% signal EOV0 (F129#5)

(9) Signal details (α : A or B)

(a) Axis control command signals EC0α-EC6α
These signals command operations to the axis controlled by
PMC.
Each signal has its own hexadecimal code command signal (see
item (4)).
(b) Axis control command completed signal (input) EBUFα
axis control command read signal (output) EBSYα
When the axis control command completed signal (EBUFn) is
reversed (”1” to ”0” or ”0” to ”1”), the Power Mate fetches and
executes the next command block.

530
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 32. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC

(c) Reset signal ECLRα

This signal resets the axis controlled by PMC. When it is turned
to ”1”, it:
D decelerates and stops an axis currently being moved;
D stops a dwell execution ;
D stops an auxiliary function execution ;
D invalidates all commands in the buffer ;
D invalidates all commands and controls made while it is ”1” ;
(d) Axis control stop signal ESTPα
When this signal is turned to ”1”, it:
D decelerates and stops an axis currently being moved;
D stops a dwell execution ;
D Stops an auxiliary function execution ;
The next block is not executed; the stopped operation restarts
when this signal turns to ”0”.
(e) Servo off signal ESOFα
When this signal turns to ”1”, excitation of the PMC-controlled
axis is turned off and the servo off status occurs.
(f) Block stop signal ESBKα
Block stop inhibit signal EMSBKα
When the block stop signal ESBKn turns to ”1” while a command
from the PMC is being executed, the operation is halted when the
current block is completed. If the block stop inhibit signal
EMSBKn is ”1”, the operation does not stop. The command
operation time chart is shown below.

ESBK
[1] [2] [3] ² 8msec³ [4]
or more
Command data
(Input)

EBUF
(Input)

EBSY
(Output)

Execution wait
buffer 1

Execution wait
buffer 2
[1]

Execution
buffer °
Start

531
32. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

(g) Miscellaneous function BCD codes EM11α to EM28α,

miscellaneous function read signals EMFα.
miscellaneous function completion signals EFINα.
If the PMC requests a miscellaneous function, the Power Mate
sends miscellaneous function codes EID0n to EID7n to BCD
codes EM11n to EM28n, followed by the EMFn signal, then
waits for the completion signal EFINn. Once the Power Mate
receives the EFINn signal, it proceeds to the next command
block.
The timing for sending and receiving these codes is the same as
for the miscellaneous (M function) codes for Power Mate control.
See item (n) in this section.
(h) Feedrate control signals EIF0α to EIF15α.
(i) This signal sets the feedrate (feed/min)
Setting range
Metric input Input in inches
Standard 0.1m Standard 0.1m
1 to 100000 1 to 12000 0.01 to 4000.00 0.01 to 480.00
mm/min mm/min inch/min inch/min

NOTE
1 The feedrate setting can be increased by a factor of 10
using parameter F10 (No. 8002#3).
2 When the feedrate is set to ”0”, the command will remain
buffered and the required operation will not be executed.
The ECLR reset signal must be used to release this
condition.
3 The feedrate is never clamped.

(ii) Like cutting feed (feed/min), the feedrate can be changed

during jog feed.
When one of the feedrates EIF0n to EIF15n is selected, a new
jog rate is assumed if the logic level of the axis control
command signal EBUFn is inverted. Since this command is
not buffered, the axis control command read signal EBSYn
need not be checked.
(iii) For rapid traverse, the feedrate should be set with a binary
code when parameter RPD No. 8002#0 is ”1”.
Setting range
Metric input Input in inches
Standard 0.1m Standard 0.1m
30 to 24000 30 to 12000 3.00 to 4000.00 3.00 to 960.00
mm/min mm/min inch/min inch/min

NOTE
The set feedrate can be multiplied by ten using parameter
F10 (8002#3). However, this function cannot be used when
the data is in units of 0.1m .

532
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 32. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC

(i) Axis travel amount, dwell time and auxiliary function codes
EID0α to EID31α.
(i) For rapid traverse and cutting feed,this signal uses binary
code to set the distance to be travelled by the spindle from its
current axis position (incremental value).
Linear axis (Maximum metric input setting)
Metric output Output in inches
Standard 0.1m Standard 0.1m

99999.999
9999.9999
99999.999
9999.9999
mm mm mm mm

Linear axis (Maximum input setting in inches)

Metric output Output in inches
Standard 0.1m Standard 0.1m

9999.9999
393.70078
9999.9999
9999.9999
inch inch inch inch

Rotation axis
Unit
IS-B 0.1m

99999.999 deg
9999.9999 deg

(ii) For dwell, this signal uses binary code to set the dwell time.
Setting value 1 to 9999999 msec

(iii) For jog feed, signal EID31 is used to set the jog feed
direction.
0 : Positive feed direction
1 : Negative feed direction

NOTE
EID0n to EID30n are undefined.

(iv) The miscellaneous function codes to be sent to the PMC are

set in EID0n to EID7n.
(j) In-positioning signal EINPα
This signal is ”1” while the PMC-controlled axis is in the
in-position state.
(k) Error zero checking signal ECKZα
This signal is ”1” while the PMC-controlled axis is performing
an error zero or an in-position check.

533
32. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

(l) Alarm signal EIALα

This signal turns to ”1” when either the servo alarm, overtravel
alarm, or P/S alarm Nos. 130 or 139 is generated in the
PMC-controlled axis.
This signal turns to ”0” when the reset signal ECLRn turns to ”1”.
To reset the alarm :
D Remove the cause of the servo alarm and reset the Power
Mate.
D Move the tool within the stored stroke limit by a rapid
traverse or cutting feed command to clear an overtravel
alarm, then reset the Power Mate.
D Reset the Power Mate to clear P/S alarm Nos. 130 or 139.

NOTE
1 In the above ”reset Power Mate”, the reset signal ECLRn is
not available. The reset button, the external reset signal
ERS <G008#7> or the emergency stop signal *ESP
<G008#4> should be used.
2 For the details of P/S alarm Nos.130 and 139, see item (11).

(m) Axis moving signal EGENα

This signal turns to ”1” while the axis is being moved by a rapid
traverse, cutting feed or reference point return command from the
PMC.
(n) Miscellaneous function in-execution signals EDENα
If the CNC sends miscellaneous function codes EID0n to EID7n
to BCD codes EM11n to EM28n, but does not receive the EFINn
completion signal, the EDENn signal turns to ”1”. The following
shows a command operation timing chart :

Miscellaneous
function command
Next command

Miscellaneous function
code output
TMF
EMF

TFIN
EFIN

EDEN

TFIN and TMF are set by parameter Nos. 3011 and 3010

534
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 32. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC

(o) Overtravel in negative direction signal EOTNα

overtravel in positive direction signal EOTPα
When an overtravel alarm is detected, and the tool has exceeded
the stroke limit on the negative side, signal EOTNn turns to ”1”.
When the stroke limit has been exceeded on the positive side,
signal EOTPn turns to ”1”. The alarm signal EIALn turns to ”1”,
informing the PMC of the overtravel.
(For details, see item (1).)
(p) Controlled axis selection signal EAXn (n : 1 or 2)
When this signal is set to ”1”, it is possible to select an axis to be
controlled by the PMC.
In order to switch between axis selection signals, the axis
selection status signal *EAXSL must be set to ”0”. Switching
between axis selection signals while *EAXSL is ”1” causes P/S
alarm No. 139, and the alarm state signals EIALA, EIALB turn
to ”1”.
(q) Controlled axis selection status signal *EAXSL
The axis selection signals EAX1 and EAX2 can be switched
when this signal is set to ”0”. The axis selection signals are
disabled when it is set to ”1”, indicating one of the following
conditions :
D Travel command is active ;
D Command buffering is active ;
D Servo off signals ESOFA, ESOFB are set to ”1”; or
D Temporary stop signals ESTPA, ESTPB are set to ”1”.
The axis selection signal can be switched even if the ESTPn
signal is ”1” when there is no command in the wait buffer.
If *EAXSL and either the servo off or temporary off signal are ”1”
when the axis selection signal is switched, the resulting alarm
condition is not released by changing the reset signals ECLRA,
ECLRB to ”1”. To clear the alarm, either return the axis selection
signal to its original state, or set the servo off and temporary stop
signals to ”0”. The reset signal can then be set to ”1”.
(r) Override signals *FV0E to *FV7E
An override from 0% to 255% can be performed in 1% units,
independent of the Power Mate, using parameter OVE (No.
8001#2).
(s) Override cancel signal OVCE
Though a Power Mate-independent override has been set using
parameter OVE (No. 8001#2), turning this signal to ”1” fixes the
cutting feed override at 100%. Rapid traverse override is not
affected.
(t) Rapid traverse override signals ROV1E, ROV2E
A rapid traverse override independent of the Power Mate can be
set to one of four values using parameter OVE (No. 8001#2).

535
32. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

State of contacts in the machine

Override amo
amount
nt
ROV1E ROV2E
Ę Ę 100%
Ę 50%

Ę 25%

Fo

NOTE
Fo indicates the lowest feedrate set in parameter no.1421.

(u) Dry run signal DRNE; manual rapid traverse signal RTE
Dry run and manual rapid traverse can be performed
independently of the Power Mate by using parameter OVE No.
8001#2.

Rapid
p traverse Command from the PMC
button During rapid traverse During cutting feed
On Rapid traverse Maximum jog feedrate
Off Jog feedrate (Note) Jog feedrate

NOTE
Rapid traverse can be performed using parameter RDE
(No. 8001#3).

When the DRNE signal is ”1”, the specified rapid traverse and
cutting feedrates are ignored and the dry run speed set by
parameter No.1410 is used. Parameter RDE (No. 8001#3)
specifies if dry run is enabled or disabled for rapid traverse.
If RTE turns to ”1” during dry run, the workpiece is fed at the
rapid traverse rate (for rapid traverse) or at the maximum jog
feedrate (for cutting feed). If the RTE turns to ”0”, the workpiece
is fed at the jog feedrate.
(v) Override 0% signal EOV0
This signal turns to ”1” when the override amount is 0%.
(10)Parameters
The PMC and axis control of Power Mate functions use the same
parameters.
Bit. No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3105 PCF

PCF 1 : Movement along the PMC control axis is not added to the
actual speed display.
0 : Movement along the PMC control axis is added to the
actual speed display.

NOTE
This parameter is effective when control of the same axis is
switched between CNC and PMC.

536
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 32. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC

Bit. No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8001 RDE OVE MLE

MLE 1 : The machine lock (MLK) signal is invalid for the PMC
control axis.
0 : The machine lock (MLK) signal is valid for the PMC
control axis.
OVE 1 : The PMC uses signals specific to PMC axis control for dry
run, override, and other functions.
0 : CNC signals for axis control are used by the PMC.
RDE 1 : Dry run is valid for the rapid traverse command during
PMC axis control.
0 : Dry run is invalid for the rapid traverse command during
PMC axis control.

Bit. No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8002 F10 RPD

RPD 1 : A rapid traverse rate independent of the CNC can be set to

any desired value for use in PMC axis control.
0 : The rapid traverse rate for PMC axis control depends on the
CNC parameter.
F10 1 : A feedrate command to the PMC axis is multiplied by 10.
0 : A feedrate command to the PMC axis is not multiplied by
10.

Bit. No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8005 NODIC

NODICSpecifies the method of displaying the current position on

each axis specified as a PMC axis.
1 : The standard specification is followed. The decimal point
position determined by dividing the increment system by
10 is not used.
0 : The decimal point position determined by dividing the
increment system by 10 is followed.

Bit. No.
8010 EDIO

EDIOSpecifies which of DI/DO signal groups A or B is used by the

PMC axis control function. No other value can initiate PMC
axis control.
1 : Group A is used.
2 : Group B is used.
(11) P/S Alarm
The servo and overtravel alarms are detected in the same way,
whether the axis is controlled by the PMC or the CNC. When an
alarm occurs during PMC axis control, the alarm signal EIALn turns
to ”1” and warns the PMC, in addition to the normal alarm state
processing operations. The overtravel alarm also triggers an
overtravel signal (EOTNn for negative direction, EOTPn for
positive).
If a PMC-controlled axis receives a command from the PMC while
the CNC is controlling an automatic or manual operation in progress,
P/S alarm No. 130 occurs. If the axis is on feed hold or single block
suspension, the PMC command is valid; if the axis is in the act of

537
32. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

cutting feed, the override is set to 0%, cutting feed stops, and the PMC
command will create an alarm condition. If the PMC-controlled axis
is interrupted by a command from the CNC, P/S alarm No. 130 will
occur.
Number Description
130 An axis controlled by both the CNC and PMC received an
axis control command from one side while executing a
command from the other side.
139 Axis selection has been carried out while executing a
command under PMC axis control.

538
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 33. TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION

33 TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION

539
33. TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

33.1 Positioning can be performed by butting against a mechanical stop while

applying a torque limit to the servo motor.
OVERVIEW A torque limit can be set using three methods: parameter input, DI signal
input, and input from the PMC.
A torque limit set using any of these methods is valid in all modes (EDIT,
AUTO, JOG, and so forth).
33.2 (1) Selecting a torque control method
With the torque control function, a torque limit can be set using three
TORQUE CONTROL methods:
FUNCTION 1: Torque control based on parameter input
2: Torque control based on DI signal input
3: Torque control based on input from the PMC
See Table 33.2 for information about about which torque control
method is used.
A torque control method can be selected separately for the each axis.

Table 33.2 Torque Control Method Selection

Parameter Torque limit enable signal (TRQnE)

TRQLTn
(No.1855) ON OFF
When set to 0 Torque control method Torque control method
based on DI signal input based on input from the
PMC
When set to a value other Torque control method based on parameter input
than 0

n : 1 or 2
(2) Position and alarm check when a torque limit is applied
An excessive position error and stop/move error can be ignored by
setting parameter No. 1803 only when a torque limit is applied.
Number
1803 TAL TIP

TIP 1 : Makes a position check when a torque limit is applied.

0 : Does not make a position check when a torque limit is
applied.
TAL 1 : Checks for an excessive stop/move error when a torque
limit is applied.
0 : Does not check for an excessive stop/move error when a
torque limit is applied.

540
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 33. TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION

33.3 (1) Condition for activating this function

This function is activated when a value other than 0 is set in parameter
TORQUE CONTROL TRQLTn (No. 1855) (parameter for setting a torque limit).
FUNCTION BASED
NOTE
ON PARAMETER
When 0 is specified in parameter No. 1855, the torque
INPUT control function based on parameter input is disabled.

(2) Applicable modes

This function can be used in all modes (EDIT, AUTO, and so forth).
(3) Parameter TRQLTn (No. 1855): parameter for setting a torque limit
Parameter No. 1855 sets a torque limit used for torque control.
This parameter can be rewritten with a G10 code even when a part
program is being executed.
Number Data
1855 Axis-by-axis current limit override value (TLQLTn)

Data type : Byte axis

Valid data range : 0 to 255
A torque limit is applied to the servo motor based on the setting of this
parameter.
The expression below indicates the relationship between a setting
value and a torque limit.

Torque override value = (setting value/255)*100(%)

541
33. TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

33.4 Torque limit enable signal TRQnE <G216#0, #1>

Torque limit signal TRQn0 to n7 <G217, G218>
TORQUE CONTROL
FUNCTION BASED (1) Condition for activating this function
This function is activated by turning the torque limit enable signal
ON DI SIGNAL INPUT <TRQnE> on when the torque control function based on parameter
input is disabled.

NOTE
The torque control function based on DI signal input is
disabled when the torque control function based on
parameter input is enabled or the torque limit enable signal
is turned off.

(2) Applicable modes

This function can be used in all modes (EDIT, AUTO, and so forth).
(3) Torque limit signals <TRQn0 to TRQn7>
As indicated in Table 33.4(a), each of the torque limit signals (TRQn0
to TRQn7) can be handled as a byte data item to allow a torque limit
from 0 to 255 to be specified.
A torque limit is applied to the servo motor based on the value set
using the torque limit signal.
The expression below indicates the relationship between a setting and
a torque limit.
Torque override value = (value set using TRQn/255)*100(%)

Table 33.4 (a) Torque Limit Value and Signals TRQn0 to TRQn7

Input
p value by
y TRQn0 to TRQn7 signal
TRQn
Q 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0
1 Ę
2 Ę
· · · · · · · · ·

· · · · · · · · ·
254 Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
255 Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
Ę : Contact : Contact open

Table 33.4 (b) Torque Limit Enable Signal and Torque Limit
Signals

<Torque limit enable signal>

G216 TRQ2E TRQ1E

<Torque limit signal for the 1st axis>

G217 TRQ17 TRQ16 TRQ15 TRQ14 TRQ13 TRQ12 TRQ11 TRQ10

<Torque limit signal for the 2nd axis>

G218 TRQ27 TRQ26 TRQ25 TRQ24 TRQ23 TRQ22 TRQ21 TRQ20

542
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 33. TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION

33.5 (1) Condition for activating this function

This function is activated when both the torque control function based
TORQUE CONTROL on parameter input and the torque control function based on DI signal
FUNCTION BASED input are disabled.
ON INPUT FROM THE
NOTE
PMC The torque control function based on input from the PMC is
disabled when either the torque control function based on
parameter input or the torque control function based on DI
signal input is enabled.

(2) Applicable modes

This function can be used in all modes (EDIT, AUTO, and so forth).
(3) Function outline
A torque limit is applied to the servo motor based on the torque limit
sent from the PMC using the window function.
For details on how to input data from the PMC, refer to the ”FANUC
PMC Ladder Language Programming Manual (B–61863E).”

543
34. ANALOG INPUT FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

34 ANALOG INPUT FUNCTION

544
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 34. ANALOG INPUT FUNCTION

34.1 The one–path Power Mate–D is provided with one analog voltage input
channel.
OVERVIEW
NOTE
The analog input function is not supported by the 2–path
Power Mate–D or Power Mate–F.

The analog input function can be used together with the serial spindle
function, but not with the analog spindle function.
A module is required to enable the use of the analog input function.

545
34. ANALOG INPUT FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

34.2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Power Mate–D
controller
(one–path) Analog
voltage output

J
Module for
A
analog input
1
function
1

Serial
spindle
control circuit

546
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 34. ANALOG INPUT FUNCTION

34.3
ANALOG INPUT
Item Specification
FUNCTION
Number of input channels 1
SPECIFICATIONS
Analog input range –10 to +10VDC
Maximum input voltage
12VDC
Digital output Signed 8–bit binary data
Resolution 78 mV
Overall accuracy
0.5% (of the full scale)
Conversion time 8 ms or less(NOTE)
Insulation Non–insulated

NOTE
The conversion time represents the time required for
conversion in the Power Mate–D, until resultant data is
output to the F area of the PMC. The actual response speed
can be obtained by adding the PMC ladder scan time.

547
34. ANALOG INPUT FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

34.4 Analog input interface

CONNECTION

CNC

JA11 Signal name Description

(RCR-EV20MDT)
 Analog input
1 11

 Reference voltage
2 12
3 13
4 14 Cable connection
5 0V 15
7
6 16  Analog output
7 AOUT 17 5
0V 0V
8 18 Shield
9 19
10 20

548
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 34. ANALOG INPUT FUNCTION

34.5
PARAMETERS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8705 ADCV

ADCV 1 : The analog input module is used.

0 : The analog input module is not used.

8730 ADOFS

ADOFS Analog voltage offset correction value

Setting : 0 to
8191
Unit of data : 1.22 mV
Set a value such that, when an analog voltage of 0 V is
applied, the value of the diagnostic data (No. 833) is
between –9 and 9.

549
34. ANALOG INPUT FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

34.6
OUTPUT SIGNALS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F206 AD07 AD06

156mV 78mV
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F207 AD15 AD14 AD13 AD12 AD11 AD10 AD09 AD08

Sign Sign Sign 5V 2.5V 1.25V 625mV 313mV

AD13 (MSB) AD06 (LSB)

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 → –10 V
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 → 0 V
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 → 9.9 V

NOTE
A significant output signal consists of eight bits, AD06 to
AD13. AD13 acts as a sign bit. The sign extension of AD13
can be read from AD14 and 15. F206#0 to F206#5 cannot
be used as significant information.

550
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 34. ANALOG INPUT FUNCTION

34.7
DIAGNOSTIC DATA 833 ADVOLT

Voltage obtained by using the offset specified in parameter No. 8730

(ADOFS) to correct an input analog voltage
Unit of data : 10 mV

551
34. ANALOG INPUT FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

34.8 5120 A/D ALARM:NON A/D MODULE

ALARMS Cause: The parameter for enabling the module for the analog input
function has been set, but the actual module is not installed.
5121 A/D ALARM:A/D MODULE
Cause: A/D converter error. Replace the module for the analog input
function with a new one.

552
 35. POSITION SWITCH SIGNAL PSW01
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE TO PSW10 <F070#0-F071#1>

POSITION SWITCH SIGNAL

35 PSW01 TO PSW10 <F070#0ĆF071#1>

(a) Function
One of these ten signals is issued (turns to ”1”) when the machine
coordinate value of the axis specified by parameter Nos. 6910-6919
enters the range specified by parameter Nos. 6930-6939, 6950-6959.
Up to ten position switch signals can be output.
(b) Output condition
The position switch signals are set to 1 when the machine coordinates
are within the operating range set in parameter Nos. 6930 to 6939, and
6950 to 6959.

NOTE
This function is not supported by the 2–path Power Mate–D.

553
36. SPEED CONTROL SERVO ALARM
IGNORE SIGNAL (INPUT)
IGNVRY <G066#0> PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

SPEED CONTROL SERVO ALARM IGNORE SIGNAL

36 (INPUT) IGNVRY <G066#0>

If the speed control servo alarm is issued and this signal is high, the
control unit ignores the alarm, thus preventing the alarm state from being
set.
While this signal is “1”, the control unit ignores the speed control servo
alarm (alarm 401: VRDY OFF); consequently, the alarm state is not set.
The alarm state is set if an alarm other than the speed control servo alarm
is issued, however. If IGNVRY makes a “0” to “1” transition after the
speed control servo alarm has been issued, the alarm state is not canceled.
Only the speed control servo alarm issued while this signal is “1” is
ignored.
Application: Suppose an application exists which has a safety provision
to switch off the magnetic contactor (MCC) of the servo unit
when the limit switch on at the door of the splash guard is
activated when the splash guard is opened. This signal can
be used in such an application. When the MCC of the servo
unit is switched off, the speed control servo alarm is issued.
By making the IGNVRY signal “1” beforehand, however,
the alarm can be ignored.
When making IGNVRY “1”, be sure to make the feed hold
signal *SP [12.2] “0” at the same time to prevent automatic
operation from being activated.

IGNVRY

*SP

The MCC of
the servo unit
ON OFF
ON/OFF
t t

t : more than 100 ms

554
 36. SPEED CONTROL SERVO ALARM
IGNORE SIGNAL (INPUT)
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE IGNVRY <G066#0>

NOTE
1 While the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal is set to 1, and a
servo alarm other than alarm No. 401 occurs, the control
unit detects the alarm.
2 When the control enters NOT READY status due to
emergency stop or a servo alarm and then the control is
reset, reset processing is not terminated until the VRDY
OFF alarm ignore signal is set to 0.
3 When the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal is set to 1 and the
servo amplifier ready signal is set to off, the motor is freed
from the drive, but follow up is not performed. To perform
follow up, set the servo off signal to 1.

555
37. DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK
FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

37 DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK FUNCTION

556
 37. DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE FUNCTION

37.1 A machine with large backlash generally vibrates in the closed loop
system, although it operates stably in the semiclosed loop system.
GENERAL FANUC has added dual position feedback control as a function which
controls such a machine in the closed loop system as stably as in the
semi-closed loop system.

557
37. DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK
FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

37.2 The following is a block diagram of dual position feedback control.

SPECIFICATIONS
ER1 Motor
MCMD + + ER +
Kp Velocity
S control
– – –
SV AMP Machine

Ps

Conversion
coefficient

ER2
+ –
Primary delay
S time constant
– +
Pf

The error counter in the semi-closed loop system, ER1, and that in the
closed loop system, ER2, are provided as shown in the figure.
The primary delay time constant can be expressed as follows:
1
Primary delay time constant =
(1+tS)
Consider the actual error counter ER using the time constant.
(1) When time constant τ=0,
ER=ER1+(ER2–ER1)=ER2 (error counter in the closed loop system)
(2) When time constant τ=R,
Er=ER1 (error counter in the semi-closed loop system)
Then FANUC determined that the transient status can be controlled in the
semi-closed loop system and positioning can be controlled in the closed
loop system.
Using this principle, the machine can be made to move as stably as in the
semi-closed loop system.
(Parameters)
No. 2019#7 : Enable bit of dual position feedback
No. 2049 : Maximum amplitude of dual position feedback
No. 2078 : Conversion coefficient of dual position feedback
No. 2079 : Conversion coefficient of dual position feedback
No. 2080 : Primary delay time constant of dual position feedback (ms)
No. 2081 : Dead zone of dual position feedback

558
 37. DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE FUNCTION

(Setting procedure)

Number #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2019 DBFBCT

If you set this bit to 1, the dual position feedback is enable.

2049 Maximum amplitude of dual position feedback

Increment system : Least detection increment for the closed loop

system (mm/p)
64
Set value : Maximum amplitude (mm)/(least detection
increment for the closed loop system
64)

NOTE
When the set value is 0, clamping is not applied for
compensation. When this parameter is set to non-zero
value and the error of the machine position and motor
position becomes bigger than this setting, the
compensation of this function is clamped. So you will set it
to (Backlash value + pitch comp. value)*2. If you don’t know
this value clearly, you should set it to 0.

2078 Conversion coefficient of dual position feedback (numerator)

2079 Conversion coefficient of dual position feedback (denominator)

Set value : Obtain the value using the following expression:

No. 2078 number of position feedback pulses per rotation of the motor
=
No. 2079 1000000 (serial type A or B) or 40000 (serial type C)

559
37. DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK
FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

2080 Primary delay time constant of dual position feedback

Increments : 1 ms
Set value : 100 to 150 ms (typical)

NOTE
When the value is set to 32767 ms, the machine is
controlled only in the semi-closed loop system. If the system
makes unstable during accerelation and deccerelation, you
should set it to larger value.

2081 Dead zone of dual position feedback

Increment : Least detection increment for the closed loop system

(mm/p)
Set value : Dead zone (mm)/least detection increment for the
closed loop system

NOTE
Positioning is performed with the pulse width corresponding
to the value assigned to the parameter. At first, you will set
it to 0, and if the unstable occurrs at stopping, you should
set it to larger value.

560
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 38. CONTROLLED AXES DETACH

38 CONTROLLED AXES DETACH

561
38. CONTROLLED AXES DETACH PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

38.1 (Function)
CONTROLLED AXIS These signals detach the control axes from control.
DETACH SIGNALS These signals are provided for each control axis; the affixed
number of the signal name shows the control axis number.
DTCHn<G124#0 , #1>
DTCHn The n–th axis is detached. (n : 1 or 2)
(Operation)
When one of these signals is turned to “1”, the corresponding
axis is detached from control and the following conditions
apply:
1 Position control is not done.
2 Servo alarms related to this axis are ignored.
3 The interlock signal for the axis has automatically turned
to “0”.
4 Commands to the axis are accepted (in both automatic
and manual modes), but they are not executed, since the
interlock signal is “0”. Automatic operation cannot
proceed; it remains stopped in the block.
5 The axis continues to be shown on the CRT position
display.
6 The motor can be replaced with one of the same model.
7 No absolute pulse coder is used.
These signals can be changed from “0” to “1” or from “1” to “0”
regardless of whether power has been turned on. They should
never be turned on or off during axis movement.
(Use) When attachments are used (such as a detachable rotary table),
these signals are selected according to whether the attachments
are mounted.

NOTE
1 For these signals to be attached, parameter No. 1005#7
must be set, indicating the axes are detachable.
2 Setting parameter No. 0012#7 from the MDI panel detaches
the axes in the same way as these signals.

38.2 These signals indicate that the control axes are detached from the control.
When the control n–th axis is attached, the signals are “0”; when n–th axis
CONTROLLED AXIS is detached, the signals are “1”.
DETACH STATUS
SIGNALS MDTCHn
<F110#0, #1>

562
 39. FEEDRATE SWITCH SIGNAL EXF1 <X000#0, X1000#0>,
EXF2 <X000#1, X1001#1>, EXF3 <X000#2, X1001#2>,
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE EXF4 <X011#4>, EXF5 <X011#5>

FEEDRATE SWITCH SIGNAL EXF1 <X000#0,

X1000#0>, EXF2 <X000#1, X1001#1>, EXF3 <X000#2,

39 X1001#2>, EXF4 <X011#4>, EXF5 <X011#5>

(a) Function
External input signals can be used to switch the feedrate to a value
specified in a parameter.
When the built–in I/O card is used with the Power Mate–D, only
EXF1 to EXF3 are valid.
(b) Signal
EXF1 =1 : The feedrate is switched to a value specified in
parameter No. 1481 (EXFP1).
0 : The feedrate is not switched to a value specified in
parameter No. 1481 (EXFP1).
EXF2 =1 : The feedrate is switched to a value specified in
parameter No. 1482 (EXFP2).
0 : The feedrate is not switched to a value specified in
parameter No. 1482 (EXFP2).
EXF3 =1 : The feedrate is switched to a value specified in
parameter No. 1483 (EXFP3).
0 : The feedrate is not switched to a value specified in
parameter No. 1483 (EXFP3).
EXF4 =1 : The feedrate is switched to a value specified in
parameter No. 1484 (EXFP4).
0 : The feedrate is not switched to a value specified in
parameter No. 1484 (EXFP4).
EXF5 =1 : The feedrate is switched to a value specified in
parameter No. 1485 (EXFP5).
0 : The feedrate is not switched to a value specified in
parameter No. 1485 (EXFP5).
(c) Parameter
1481 EXFP1

1482 EXFP2

1483 EXFP3

1484 EXFP4

1485 EXFP5

563
39. FEEDRATE SWITCH SIGNAL EXF1 <X000#0, X1000#0>,
EXF2 <X000#1, X1001#1>, EXF3 <X000#2, X1001#2>,
EXF4 <X011#4>, EXF5 <X011#5> PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

EXFP1 to EXFP5
These feedrates correspond to the EXF1 to EXF5 signals,
respectively.
Range of valid data
Unit of data
IS–B IS–C
Metric input 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Inch input 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800
Rotary axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000

(d) Program example (metric input)

G31 X100.0 F20.0 ; EXFP1=16 (16.0 mm/min)
EXFP2=10 (10.0 mm/min)
EXFP3=6 (6.0 mm/min)

F mm/min
EXF1 on

20.0
EXF2 on

16.0 EXF3 on

Skipped if the SKIP signal is on

10.0

6.0

x mm
0 100.0

(e) Notes
1) Feedrate switching by the EXF1, EXF2, EXF3, EXF4, and EXF5
signals are effective for cutting feed by G31 and G01. They are
ineffective for rapid traverse.
2) The EXF4 and EXF5 signals are effective when I/O card B, E (DI =
96; DO = 64) is selected.
3) This function cannot be used together with the multi–skip function
(SKIP2, SKIP3, or SKIP4).
4) Even when this function is being used, the DI signal (*FV0 to *FV7
<G012>) can be used to override the feedrate with a rate specified in
a parameter.
5) When you are going to apply override, if this function is already being
used by the G31 skip, set parameter No. 6200#7 (SKF).

564
 40. V–READY WAITING SIGNAL
B–62833EN/01 II. PMC INTERFACE (OUTPUT) WVRDY;<F209#4>

V–READY WAITING SIGNAL (OUTPUT)

40 WVRDY;<F209#4>

This signal is used by the function which disables the servo alarm even
when MCC is turned off (parameter 1803#2). it is output until MCC is
turned on.

565
41. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL
<F168 TO F175, G204 TO G205> PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL <F168 TO F175, G204 TO

41 G205>

566
 41. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE <F168 TO F175, G204 TO G205>

41.1 When machine operation mode is selected with the <M–OPE/MDI> key,
handy operator’s panel key input information is output to the F area, as
KEY INPUT ON THE follows:
PANEL
NOTE
This function cannot be used with the Power Mate–F.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0168 SW8 SW7 SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1

F0169 SW16 SW15 M–OPE SW13 SW12 SW11 SW10 SW9

F0170 SW24 SW23 SW22 SW21 SW20 SW19 SW18 SW17

F0171 SW32 SW31 SW30 SW29 SW28 SW27 SW26 SW25

F0172 SW40 SW39 SW38 SW37 SW36 SW35 SW34 SW33

F0173 SW48 SW47 SW46 SW45 SW44 SW43 SW42 SW41

F0174 SW56 SW55 SW54 SW53 SW52 SW51 SW50 SW49

F0175 SW61 SW60 SW59 SW58 SW57

1) SWn (n = 1 to 61)
SWn = 0: The corresponding key is not pressed.
SWn = 1: The corresponding key is pressed.
D In MDI mode, SWn = 0 even when the corresponding key is pressed.
D If the cable connected to the Power Mate is disconnected, SWn = 0.
For details of the correspondence between SWn and keys, see the
next page.
2) M–OPE (F169#5)
M–OPE = 0: MDI mode is set.
M–OPE = 1: Machine operation mode is set.
This signal does not indicate whether a key is pressed.

567
41. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL
<F168 TO F175, G204 TO G205> PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

M–OPE/MDI (Alphanumeric key sheet)

M–OPE/CNC (Symbolic key sheet)

568
 41. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE <F168 TO F175, G204 TO G205>

41.2 The handy operator’s panel has eleven LED signal points; the nine upper
points can be turned on or off by a ladder program.
LED ON/OFF
INFORMATION NOTE
OUTPUT This function cannot be used with the Power Mate–F.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G204 LED08 LED07 LED06 LED05 LED04 LED03 LED02 LED01

G205 SW09

LED0n = 1: The corresponding LED is turned on.

LED0n = 0: The corresponding LED is turned off.

Alphanumeric LED key sheet Symbolic LED key sheet

NOTE
The two LEDs below indicate whether machine operation
mode is selected, and whether MDI mode is selected.
These LEDs cannot be turned on and off by a ladder
program.
M–OPE turned on: Machine operation mode is selected.
M–OPE turned off: Machine operation mode is not
selected.
MDI turned on: MDI mode is selected.
MDI turned off: MDI mode is not selected.

569
41. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL
<F168 TO F175, G204 TO G205> PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

41.3
KEY INPUT ON
PANEL OF FANUC
STANDARD UNIT

41.3.1
Alphanumeric Key
Type
(A02B–0211–C020#R)

1) Keys other than M–OPE (F169#5)

0: The corresponding key is not pressed.
1: The corresponding key is pressed.
In MDI mode, a signal is set to 0 even when the corresponding key
is pressed.
2) M–OPE (F169#5)
M–OPE = 0: MDI mode is set.
M–OPE = 1: Machine operation (M–OPE) mode is set.
(This signal does not indicate whether a key is pressed.)

570
 41. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE <F168 TO F175, G204 TO G205>

41.3.2
Symbolic Key Type
(A02B–0211–C020#S)

571
41. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL
<F168 TO F175, G204 TO G205> PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

1) Keys other than M–OPE (F169#5)

0: The corresponding key is not pressed.
1: The corresponding key is pressed.
In MDI mode, a signal is set to 0 even when the corresponding key
is pressed.
2) M–OPE (F169#5)
M–OPE = 0: MDI mode is set.
M–OPE = 1: Machine operation (M–OPE) mode is set.
(This signal does not indicate whether a key is pressed.)

572
 41. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE <F168 TO F175, G204 TO G205>

41.4
FANUC STANDARD
UNIT LED ON/OFF
INFORMATION
OUTPUT
41.4.1
Alphanumeric Key
Type
(A02B–0211–C020#R)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G204 (LED08) (LED07) (LED06) T–STEP T–JOG AUTO (LED02) ALARM

G205 (LED09)

1: The corresponding LED is turned on.

0: The corresponding LED is turned off.

41.4.2
Symbolic Key Type
(A02B–0211–C020#S) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G204 (LED08) (LED07) (LED06) (LED05) (LED04) (LED03) (LED02) (LED01)

G205 (LED09)

1: The corresponding LED is turned on.

0: The corresponding LED is turned off.

573
41. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL
<F168 TO F175, G204 TO G205> PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

41.5
SUPPLEMENT
41.5.1 To use the handy operator’s panel, the items listed below are required.
Necessary Items (1) CRT module
To enable the use of the handy operator’s panel, a CRT module must
be installed in the Power Mate.
(2) PMC module
To enable the use of the handy operator’s panel, a PMC–PA3 module
must be installed in the Power Mate.
(3) Version of the base printed circuit board
The version number of the base printed circuit board
(A20B–2100–0030) must be 03C or later.
(4) Version of the basic function
The version number of the basic function (A02B–0166–H511#8834,
#8837) must be 4 or later.

41.5.2 When using the handy operator’s panel, set the Power Mate rotary
Setting Items switches as follows:
1) Set RSW to 0.
2) Set MTSW to 3.

41.5.3 When the handy operator’s panel is being used, some restrictions are
Restrictions imposed on the Power Mate functions, as described below.
(1) For CRT display language selection, Japanese cannot be selected with
bit 0 (JPN) of parameter No. 3102. Other languages cannot be
selected either. Only an English–language display is supported.
(2) The help function cannot be used.
(3) The following PMC–related functions cannot be used:
D Dynamic ladder diagram display/editing
D Ladder title display/editing
D Detailed PMC alarm display
D PMC trace display
D Display/setting of PMC parameters such as timer, counter, and keep
relay information, as well as data
D Ladder I/O operations (such as load and save operations via the
RS–232C interface)
(4) The characters that can be used with the macro executor are limited.
With the macro executor, only the following characters can be used.
1. Standard characters
Alphabetic characters (uppercase and lowercase), numbers, kana
characters, blanks, plus sign, minus sign, decimal point, equal
sign, comma, ruled lines, etc.
The internal codes of the usable characters are 0020 to 00DF, and
2F61 to 2F6B.
2. Triple–size characters
Alphabetic characters, numbers, blanks, minus sign, decimal
point

574
 41. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE <F168 TO F175, G204 TO G205>

The internal codes of the usable characters are 0020, 002D, 002E,
0030 to 0039, and 0041 to 005A.
For details, refer to ”Power Mate–D Programming Language (Macro
Compiler/Macro Executor) (B–62093–1).”
(5) The simultaneous block start function cannot be used.
(6) The handy operator’s panel cannot be used together with the
CRT/MDI unit; the separate CRT unit cannot be used together with
the separate MDI unit; the separate PDP unit cannot be used together
with the separate MDI unit; the separate LCD unit cannot be used
together with the separate MDI unit. Switching using a switch unit
is not possible.
(7) When a DPL/MDI unit is connected to the Power Mate, the handy
operator’s panel displays the position display screen at all times; all
operations other than those using the emergency stop button,
deadman’s switches, and deadman’s switch enable switch are
disabled.

575
42. POSITION DISPLAY UNIT PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

42 POSITION DISPLAY UNIT

576
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 42. POSITION DISPLAY UNIT

42.1 By connecting a position display unit to the Power Mate–F, the absolute
coordinate and machine coordinate on an axis, as well as the value of
OVERVIEW common variable #599, can be displayed.

577
42. POSITION DISPLAY UNIT PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

42.2
DISPLAY BY THE (1) Series and edition
POSITION DISPLAY 8870 – 01

UNIT (2) System alarm

E – 998

(3) Coordinate
–10.000

Coordinates are displayed in the same way as those displayed on the

DPL. (Information such as the unit system and increment system can
be considered for display.)
(4) #599
00002.000

The value of common variable #599 is displayed in the same way as

that displayed on the DPL. If, however, common variable #599 is
undefined, the following is displayed:
––––––––

578
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 42. POSITION DISPLAY UNIT

42.3
SWITCHING OF (1) Selection of display information
DISPLAY
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
INFORMATION G250 DPOSV DPOSM

Signals for selecting information to be displayed on the position display unit

DPOSV DPOSM Information displayed
0 0 Workpiece coordinate
0 1 Machine coordinate
1 0 Contents of common variable #599

579
43. SIGNALS FOR PATH CONTROL PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

43 SIGNALS FOR PATH CONTROL

The signals are used only with the 2–path Power Mate–D.

NOTE
This function is not supported by the one–path Power
Mate–D or Power Mate–F.

580
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE 43. SIGNALS FOR PATH CONTROL

43.1 (Function)
PATH SELECTION Select whether CRT/MDI and DPL/MDI are used for the 1st path or the
2nd path.
SIGNAL (INPUT) In other words, this signal selects whether the operations those are
PATHS <G215#0> performed in each path such as data (tool offset, parameters or such)
display and setting, program command input in MDI mode, or editing a
program in program memory are performed in the 1st path or 2nd path.
(Operation)
When the signal is ”0”, operations by CRT/MDI or DPL/MDI are effected
to the 1st path ; when it is ”1”, the operations are effected to the 2nd path.

NOTE
The path selection can also be done by a key operations
from CRT/MDI or DPL/MDI. When <H> and <1> keys are
pressed at the same time, 1st path is selected and when
<H> and <2> keys are pressed at the same time, 2nd path
is selected. Use this key operation when PMC ladder is not
yet set up at the time setting up the machine.

581
43. SIGNALS FOR PATH CONTROL PMC INTERFACE B–62833EN/01

43.2 (Function)
PATH DISPLAY Informs that which screen, 1st path screen or 2nd path screen, is displayed
on the CRT/MDI or DPL/MDI.
CONFIRMATION
(Output Condition)
SIGNAL (OUTPUT)
This signal turns ”0”,
PATHO <F254#7> D when path 1 screen is displayed.
This signal turns ”1”,
D when path 2 screen is displayed.

582
 44. RUN TIME AND PART COUNT
DISPLAY FUNCTION (OUTPUT)
B–62833EN/01 PMC INTERFACE PRTSF <F062#7>

RUN TIME AND PART COUNT DISPLAY FUNCTION

44 (OUTPUT) PRTSF <F062#7>

This signal turns to ”1” when the quantity of parts machined reaches a
preset number for parts required. If the machine does not reach that
quantity, or if the system is reset, the signal turns to ”0”.
Outline
In addition to displaying the run hour and the number of parts machined
in the conventional position display, this function allows the setting and
display of the total number of parts machined and the quantity of parts
required in the setting parameter display. When the number of parts
produced reaches the present number of parts required, this function
outputs a signal to the PMC side.
Operation
a) Select the setting parameter screen and move the cursor to the item
to be set :
i. PART TOTAL (total number of parts machined) ––– When M02,
M30, or an M code specified by parameter no. 6710 is
commanded, the parts are counted singly. This setting is used
with parameter no. 6712.
ii. PART REQUIRED (number of parts required) ––– If this is set
to ”0”, it is regarded as an infinite number of parts. This setting
can be used with parameter no. 6713.
iii. PART COUNT (number of parts machined) ––– The parts are
counted up singly and show the total number of parts made.
iv. RUN TIME (operation time) ––– The run hours for all programs
run during automatic operation is displayed.
v. CYCLE TIME (cutting time) ––– The run hour during a single
automatic operation is displayed.

NOTE
1 For the M and S run hour settings, 0 to 59 is valid.
2 A negative value cannot be set ; if a negative value is set for
parameter no. 6712 for the total number of parts machined,
the display shows a positive value, though the parts count
is decremented by 1.

b) When an M02 or M30 command is executed, the total number of parts

machined and the number of parts machined in the current run are
counted up. Each time machining of one part is completed, the
number of parts machined can be counted automatically by including
M02 or M30 in the CNC command data. When an M code set to
parameter no. 6710 is executed, the parts are counted.
If the PMC parameter no. 6700#0 is set to ”1”, the parts are not
counted, even if an M02 or M30 code is executed.
When the quantity of parts machined reaches the preset parts
requirement, the PRTSF signal (F062#7) is output to the PMC side. The
signal cannot be output if the number of parts required is infinite (0).
The number of parts required and machined can be read and modified,
using the external data input function.

583
APPENDIX
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

A EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Number
Classification Name of
Figure
Control unit CONTROL UNIT Fig. 1

I/O I/O CARD A, B, D, E Fig. 2

Unit for display CRT/MDI UNIT, CRT/MDI UNIT WITH PICTURE DISPLAY Fig. 3
and data input
SEPARATE CRT UNIT Fig. 4
SEPARATE MDI UNIT, SEPARATE MDI UNIT WITH PICTURE DISPLAY Fig. 5
SEPARATE PDP UNIT Fig. 6
SEPARATE LCD UNIT Fig. 7
DETACHABLE LCD/MDI UNIT Fig. 8
HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL Fig. 9
DPL/MDI UNIT (TABLE MOUNT) Fig. 10
DUST PROTECTED TYPE DPL/MDI UNIT (TABLE MOUNT)
LONG DISTANCE TYPE DPL/MDI UNIT (TABLE MOUNT)
DPL/MDI UNIT (WALE MOUNT) Fig. 11
DUST PROTECTED TYPE DPL/MDI UNIT (WALE MOUNT)
LONG DISTANCE TYPE DPL/MDI UNIT (WALE MOUNT)

External device POSITION CODER Fig. 12

MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR Fig. 13
MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR (PENDANT TYPE) Fig. 14
BATTERY CASE FOR SEPARATE TYPE ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER Fig. 15
PUNCH PANEL (WIDE WIDTH TYPE) Cable J42 Fig. 16
PUNCH PANEL (NARROW WIDTH TYPE) Cable J42 Fig. 17
PUNCH PANEL (WITH 24V TERMINAL BOARD) Fig. 18
FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE Fig. 19
FANUC Handy File Fig. 20
CRT LINK TERMINAL UNIT, TOUCH PANEL TERMINAL Fig. 21
INTERMEDIATE UNIT OF CRT LINK Fig. 22
OPTICAL I/O LINK ADAPTOR Fig. 23
I/O Link CONNECTION UNIT Fig. 24
HSSB ADAPTOR Fig. 25

587
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Fig. 1 CONTROL UNIT

Specification : A02B–0166–B501 (Power Mate–D servo interface type A)

A02B–0198–B501 (Power Mate–F servo interface type A)
A02B–0166–B531 (Power Mate–D servo interface type B)
A02B–0198–B531 (Power Mate–F servo interface type B)

Air out

Air in

Weight : 2.2Kg

588
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

589
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Fig. 2 I/O CARD A, B, D, E

Specification : A16B–2201–0071 (I/O card A)

A16B–2201–0070 (I/O card B)
A16B–2202–0733 (I/O card D)
A16B–2202–0732 (I/O card E)

mm
50 mm 10

Approx. 100 mm
MR50RM
MR50RM
336 mm

322 mm
MR50RM
4–
5mm

MR20RM

11.72
17.78 mm mm

15 mm
7 mm

120 mm

154 mm

590
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 3 CRT/MDI UNIT, CRT/MDI UNIT WITH PICTURE DISPLAY

Specification : A02B–0166–C201#R (English key)

A02B–0166–C201#S (Symbolic key)
A02B–0166–C221#R (English key, with picture display for 32 screen)
A02B–0166–C221#S (Symbolic key, with picture display for 32 screen)
A02B–0166–C222#R (English key, with picture display for 64 screen)
A02B–0166–C222#S (Symbolic key, with picture display for 64 screen)

Panel cut drawing

Stud (M4) for grounding

Stud (M4) for grounding

Weight : 5.8kg

591
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Fig. 4 SEPARATE CRT UNIT

Specification : A02B–0120–C111

184
190
244
250
4–M3
Panel cut drawing
260 2
4–ø4 5 5
250 22 220
5
200
190
5

Stad (M4) for grounding

Weight : 3.5kg

Back side

Soft key connector

592
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 5 SEPARATE MDI UNIT, SEPARATE MDI UNIT WITH PICTURE DISPLAY

Specification : A02B–0166–C210#R (English key)

A02B–0166–C210#S (Symbolic key)
A02B–0166–C231#R (English key, with picture display for 32 screen)
A02B–0166–C231#S (Symbolic key, with picture display for 32 screen)
A02B–0166–C232#R (English key, with picture display for 64 screen)
A02B–0166–C232#S (Symbolic key, with picture display for 64 screen)

Stud (M4) for grounding Panel cut drawing

Stud (M4) for grounding

Weight : 1.3kg

593
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Fig. 6 SEPARATE PDP UNIT

Specification : A02B–0200–C100

2
22 95MAX
5

200 190

30

5 250 5
260
5

130 88

CN2 CN1

Screw (M4) for grounding

19.5
33

17.5
23
450 Connector for CRT video signal

Connector for soft key Weight : 2.1kg

Connector for power supply

594
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 7 SEPARATE LCD UNIT

Specification : A02B–0166–C251

Weight : 1.6 kg

595
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Fig. 8 DETACHABLE LCD/MDI UNIT

Specification : A02B–0166–C271#R (English key)

A02B–0166–C271#S (Symbolic key)

Weight : 7.0 kg

596
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 9 HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL

Specification : A02B–0211–C020#R (English key)

A02B–0211–C020#S (Symbolic key)

Display

LED key
sheet

Deadman’s switch enable switch Operator’s panel Emergency stop Deadman’s switch
key sheet button
Tolerance:
1 mm

Weight : 1.3 kg

597
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Fig. 10 DPL/MDI UNIT (TABLE MOUNT)

Specification : A02B–0168–K010, K012 (English key)

Dust protected type A02B–0118–C130#R, C132#R (English key)
A02B–0118–C130#S, C132#S (Symbolic key)
Long distance type A02B–0118–C130, C032 (English key)

Weight : 0.4kg

598
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 11 DPL/MDI UNIT (WALE MOUNT)

Specification : A02B–0168–K011, K013 (English key)

Dust protected type A02B–0118–C131#R, C133#R (English key)
A02B–0118–C131#S, C133#S (Symbolic key)
Long distance type A02B–0118–C131, C033 (English key)

Weight : 0.4kg

599
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Fig. 12 POSITION CODER

Specification : A86L–0027–0001#102 (Max. 4000rpm)

A86L–0027–0001#002 (Max. 6000rpm)

–0.11

14.3 +0




–0.006

15 –0.017
–0.009

50 –0.025


1.15 +0.14
–0

20

Connector 30
3




Note : Mechanical specifications of the position coder

are as follows :
(1) Input axis inertia
1.0×10–3kg⋅cm⋅sec2 or less
+0.012 (2) Input axis starting torque
 –0 1000g⋅cm or less
(3) Input axis permissible loads

Radial Thrust
 +0.05 Operation 1kg or less 1kg or less
–0
Idle 20kg or less 10kg or less

Attach a pulley directly to the position coder

shaft and drive the timing belt. Confirm that the
loads conform with the above allowable value.

(4) Weight : 1kg or less

j
j

600
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 13 MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR

Specification : A860–0202–T001

83.5

80.0

55.0
50.0
30.0

M4X8.0

60.0

3 holes equally spaced

on a 72 dia
11.0

PULSE GENERATOR
FANUC LTD
0V 5V 5V 0V A B

M3 screw terminal
120.0°

Weight : 0.35kg

601
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Fig. 14 MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR (PENDANT TYPE)

Specification : A860–0202–T004 to T015, T020

A860–0202–T004 to T009

90 38.0 M3 screw
terminal
25
140

100.0
39.0
M3 screw
terminal
Weight : 0.6kg

A860–0202–T010 to T015, T020

90 38.0 M3 screw
terminal
25
140

100.0
39.0

M3 screw
terminal
Weight : 0.6kg

602
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 15 BATTERY CASE FOR SEPARATE TYPE ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER

Specification : A06B–6050–K060 (Case)

A06B–6050–K061 (Battery)

103 Minus polarity indication

4–M4 counter sinking Plus polarity indication

Plus terminal with

3–M3 screw holes

Minus terminal with

103


3–M3 screw holes




4–ø4.3 Mounting holes
Arrow view A











 

603
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Fig. 16 PUNCH PANEL (WIDE WIDTH TYPE) Cable J42

Specification : A02B–0120–C181 (Cable length : 1m)

A02B–0120–C182 (Cable length : 2m)
A02B–0120–C183 (Cable length : 5m)

80
5
13
5
125

Panel cut drawing of this punch panel is shown in the following:










604
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 17 PUNCH PANEL (NARROW WIDTH TYPE) Cable J42

Specification : A02B–0120–C191 (Cable length : 1m)

A02B–0120–C192 (Cable length : 2m)
A02B–0120–C193 (Cable length : 5m)

40
20 13
5

Panel cut drawing

125

2 M3
5

100 115

20

605
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Fig. 18 PUNCH PANEL (WITH 24V TERMINAL BOARD)

Specification : A02B–0168–C051 (Cable length : 1m)

A02B–0168–C052 (Cable length : 2m)
A02B–0168–C053 (Cable length : 5m)

HONDA
Connector : PCR–E20FA
Cover : PCR–E20CA

JAPAN AVIATION ELEC-

TRONIC INDUSTRY.,LTD Length : 200mm
DBM–25S
For frame ground
For crimp terminal M4
Panel cut drawing

(Note) Provide a grounding terminal for the frame ground near the punch panel.

606
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 19 FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE

Specification : Adapter: A13B–0150–B001

: Floppy : A87L–0001–0039

Adaptor

Weight : Approx. 2kg

Floppy

607
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Fig. 20 FANUC Handy File

Specification : A13B–0159–B001 (English key)

A13B–0159–B002 (Japanese key)

Cable length : 3.0m

Weight : 1.4kg
Unit : mm

608
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 21 CRT LINK TERMINAL UNIT, TOUCH PANEL TERMINAL UNIT

Specification : A02B–0124–D001 (CRT link)

A02B–0166–D003 (Touch panel, handy operator’s panel)

9.5

21 11.4

HONDA
37

30
Weight : Approx. 30g

609
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Fig. 22 INTERMEDIATE UNIT OF CRT LINK

Specification : A02B–0124–D002

Weight : Approx. 100g

610
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 23 OPTICAL I/O LINK ADAPTOR

Specification : A13B–0154–B001

20–pin PCR connector

manufactured by HONDA
TSUSHIN KOGYO.

Optical connector

Weight : Approx. 100g

611
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Fig. 24 I/O Link CONNECTION UNIT

Specification : A20B–2000–0410 (electric – optical)

A20B–2000–0411 (electric – electric)
A20B–2000–0412 (optical – optical)

Unit : mm
180

10 160

30

90 Printed–circuit board 

Cable Cable
Components

Up to 50

Outside dimensions


4–M4



Installation dimensions

Weight : 600g

612
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 25 HSSB ADAPTOR

Specification : A02B–0211–C220

613
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Controller mounted on HSSB adaptor

614
 B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX EACH CONNECTOR

B EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR

Number
Name of
Figure
PCR CONNECTOR Fig. 1
FI40 CONNECTOR Fig. 2
CONNECTOR CASE (HONDA PCR TYPE) Fig. 3
CONNECTOR CASE (HIROSE FI TYPE) Fig. 4
CONNECTOR CASE (FUJITSU FCN TYPE) Fig. 5
AMP CONNECTOR (1) TYPE X Fig. 6
AMP CONNECTOR (2) TYPE Y Fig. 7
CONTACT FOR AMP CONNECTOR Fig. 8
HONDA CONNECTOR (CASE) Fig. 9
HONDA CONNECTOR (FEMALE) Fig. 10
HONDA CONNECTOR (MALE) Fig. 11
HONDA CONNECTOR (TERMINAL LAYOUT) Fig. 12
CONNECTOR MADE BY BURNDY (3 PINS, BROWN) Fig. 13
CONNECTOR MADE BY BURNDY (6 PINS, BROWN) Fig. 14
READER PUNCHER PANEL CONNECTOR Fig. 15
READER PUNCHER CONNECTOR METAL FITTING FOR LOCK Fig. 16
FASTON TERMINAL Fig. 17

615
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
EACH CONNECTOR APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Fig. 1 PCR CONNECTOR

Specification : A02B–0120–K301 (PCR–E20FS+PCR–V20LA)

A02B–0120–K302 (PCR–E20FA+PCR–V20LA)

TYPE : HONDA PCR–E20FS(SOLDERING TYPE)

PCR–E20FA(CRIMP TYPE)
USAGE : GENERAL INTERFACE
MATING : HONDA PCS–E20LA(METAL)
HOUSING : HONDA PCR–V20LA(PLASTIC)
HONDA PCR–V20LB(PLASTIC)
DIMENSION

A
n
2 1.27 1
7.3

n n)1
2

Display
HONDA
7
15.1

1.27
B

 


 21.65 11.43

616
 B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX EACH CONNECTOR

Fig. 2 FI40 CONNECTOR

Specification : A02B–0120–K303 (FI40–2015S+FI–20–CV)

TYPE : HIROSE FI40–2015S

USAGE : PULSE CODER INTERFACE
LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE
MPG INTERFACE
MATING/HOUSING : HIROSE FI–20–CV

DIMENSION

16.25 15°
11.43
1.27
NOTE
This connector does not
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
have contacts for positions
5.5
2.2

1.7
9.2 11,13,15,17, and 19.
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11

13.35
19.2

Tab for
shield
connection
7
4.3
3

5
8.5

1.8

A A
2.4 2.4
Section AA S 20 18 16 14 12
(Standard 1/10)
See from the back (soldering side)
10 8 6 4 2

9 7 5 3 1

617
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
EACH CONNECTOR APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Fig. 3 CONNECTOR CASE (HONDA PCR TYPE)

TYPE : HONDA PCR–V20LA (for 6 dia. cable)

PCR–V20LB (for 8 dia. cable)
USAGE : GENERAL INTERFACE

DIMENSION 9.5

21 11.4


HONDA
37

30

 

 Case
 Cable clamp
 Lock bracket
 Lock lever
 Set screw for cable clamp

618
 B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX EACH CONNECTOR

Fig. 4 CONNECTOR CASE (HIROSE FI TYPE)

TYPE : HIROSE FI–20–CV

USAGE : PULSE CODER INTERFACE
LNEAR SCALE INTERFACE
MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR INTERFACE
DIMENSION : FOR DIA. 8mm CABLE

 Case
 Cable clamp
 Lock bracket
 Lock lever
 Set screw for cable clamp

21±0.3
11.5±0.3
9.5±0.2



37±0.5

17.5±0.3

30±0.3


619
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
EACH CONNECTOR APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Fig. 5 CONNECTOR CASE (FUJITSU FCN TYPE)

TYPE : FUJITSU FCN–240C20–Y/S (FOR DIA. 5.8mm CABLE)

USAGE : GENERAL

9.5

21 11.4


F
C020–02
37

30


 






620
 B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX EACH CONNECTOR

Fig. 6 AMP CONNECTOR (1) TYPE X

Specification : A02B–0120–K324 (WITH CONTACT AMP1–175218–5)

TYPE : AMP2–178288–3 (HOUSING)

USAGE : CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY INPUT

CRT/MDI POWER SUPPLY INPUT
CP1 
DIMENSION
 0V
CPD1
+24E

(22.96) Circuit No.

3 2 1
AMP D–3

X 22.8
16.3

16.7
0.6

7.62
3.81

7.15
4.05

6.55
3.1

3 2 1

Circuit No.

621
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
EACH CONNECTOR APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Fig. 7 AMP CONNECTOR (2) TYPE Y

Specification : A02B–0120–K323 (WITH CONTACT AMP1–175218–5)

TYPE : AMP2–178288–3 (HOUSING)

USAGE : LCD POWER SUPPLY INPUT CP5

+24VPOWER SUPPLY INPUT

 0V
DIMENSION

+24V

(22.96) Circuit No.

3 2 1
AMP D–3

Y
22.8
16.3

16.7
0.6

7.62
3.81

7.15
4.05

6.55
3.1

3 2 1

Circuit No.

622
 B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX EACH CONNECTOR

Fig. 8 CONTACT FOR AMP CONNECTOR

SEPARATE : AMP1–175218–2 (GOLD COATED)

AMP1–175218–5 (TIN COATED)
REEL : AMP1–175196–2 (GOLD COATED)
AMP1–175196–5 (TIN COATED)
WIRE : AWG 16, 18, 20
In case of reel
(21.8) A-A
±0.4
2.9

±0.5
2.9
1
3
±0.5 B-B
17.8
±0.4
(9.3) (2.5) 4.2
B
2.9±0.2 A

±0.5
±0.2

5.5
3.4

–AMP
2.5±0.2

PLATING ID–MARK (φ2.6)

((1.7))
A B
PRESSER ID–MARK

623
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
EACH CONNECTOR APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Fig. 9 HONDA CONNECTOR (CASE)

A set of HONDA connectors and cases is available from FANUC. See the HONDA connector
(male/female) specifications.



C


A (D)
(B)

Symbol
Specification A (B) C (D)
For 20 pin 39.3 44.9 39.8 17
For 50 pin 67.9 73.5 44.8 18

Symbol Name
Outer diameter of the cable
1 Connector cover MR–20L dia.10mm max
2 Cable clamp MR–50L dia.16mm max
3 Stopper
4 Screw for cable clamp
Plug (MR–20, 50MH)
5
Jack (MR–20, 50FH)

624
 B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX EACH CONNECTOR

Fig. 10 HONDA CONNECTOR (FEMALE)

Specification : A02B–0029–K890 (20 pins, soldering type, with cover)

A02B–0029–K892 (20 pins, crimp type, with cover and contact)
A02B–0029–K891 (50 pins, soldering type, with cover)
A02B–0029–K893 (50 pins, crimp type, with cover and contact)

2–M2
13

A
B

2.4
18.1


6
8.5

14 15 16 17 18 19 20
HONDA

8 9 10 11 12 13

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

A B Symbol Name
1 Cable clamp
20 pins 32.8 27.8
2 Screw 2.6dia.×8
50 pins 61.4 56.4
3 Connector

625
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
EACH CONNECTOR APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Fig. 11 HONDA CONNECTOR (MALE)

Specification : A02B–0029–K898 (20 pins, soldering type, with cover)

A02B–0029–K900 (20 pins, crimp type, with cover and contact)
A02B–0029–K899 (50 pins, soldering type, with cover)
A02B–0029–K801 (50 pins, crimp type, with cover and contact)

2–M2
13

B
A

2.4
19.9

8.4
10.9




1 2 3 4 5 6 7
HONDA

8 9 10 11 12 13

14 15 16 17 18 19 20

A B Symbol Name
1 Cable clamp
20 pins 32.8 27.8
2 Screw 2.6dia.×8
50 pins 61.4 56.4
3 Connector

626
 B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX EACH CONNECTOR

Fig. 12 HONDA CONNECTOR (TERMINAL LAYOUT)

D MR–50FH, MRP–50M01(50–core, plug)

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
HONDA
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

D MR–50FH, MRP–50F01(50–core, plug)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
HONDA
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

D MR–20MH, MRP–20M01(20–core, plug)

14 15 16 17 18 19 20
HONDA
8 9 10 11 12 13

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

D MR–20MH, MRP–20F01(20–core, jack)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
HONDA
8 9 10 11 12 13

14 15 16 17 18 19 20

627
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
EACH CONNECTOR APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Fig. 13 CONNECTOR MADE BY BURNDY (3 PINS, BROWN)

Specification : A02B–0072–K893 (Housing, Soldering contact)

0.2
3

32 max.
19.06
5.08
2
1

6
0.2
7.7

30

Manufacturer : BURNDY JAPAN, LTD.

Specification
Name (Connector maker Remarks
number)

Connector housing for cable SMS3PK–5 Black

For details on tools
(Crimp type) RC16M–23T3
required for crimp
Contact terminals,contact the
(Solder type) RC16M–SCT3 manufacturer.

Cables : Cross sectional area : 0.75mm2(30/0.18)

Insulation diameter : 2.8mm max
Peeling length : 7.2mm

628
 B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX EACH CONNECTOR

Fig. 14 CONNECTOR MADE BY BURNDY (6 PINS, BROWN)

Specification : A02B–0081–K203 (Housing, Soldering contact)

5.08
5

38 max.

48 max.
4
3

1
2
1

7 max.

24.9

Manufacturer : BURNDY JAPAN, LTD.

Specification
Name (Connector maker Remarks
number)

Connector housing for cable SMS6PN–5 Brown

For details on tools
(Crimp type) RC16M–23T3
required for crimp
Contact terminals,contact the
(Solder type) RC16M–SCT3 manufacturer.

Cables : Cross sectional area : 1.27mm2(50/0.18)

Insulation diameter : 2.8mm max
Peeling length : 7.2mm

629
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
EACH CONNECTOR APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Fig. 15 READER PUNCHER PANEL CONNECTOR

Specification : A02B–0118–K895 (male, with cover)

A02B–0061–K201 (female. with metal fitting for lock)

H
J
A 53.0 D 7.8 G 10.7
B 38.3 E 12.6 H 1.2
C 47.0 F 41.3 J 0.8
A
C
A–A F
A B cross section 10
A
E G
D
6.1 10
2–3.05ö 10.8
10

Fig. 16 READER PUNCHER CONNECTOR METAL FITTING FOR LOCK

Small round
M2.6×P0.45 screw Interlock screw head screw
1.2 groove

6.1

12.7
1.2
6.2 Spring washer

630
 B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX EACH CONNECTOR

Fig. 17 FASTON TERMINAL

Specification : A05L–0001–0148#2

Model : Faston terminal

Purpose : For connecting to the frame ground
Applicable housing : 170604–1 manufactured by AMP (Japan), Ltd. or
FVDDF2–250, type I, blue manufactured by Japan
Crimp Terminal Corporation
DIMENSION

7.62
Applicable wire :
A cross–section of 1.25 to 2.27 mm2
7.75
21.59

631
C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS
AND CABLES APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

C 20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES

Connector for the PC Model: PCR–EV20MDT manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN.

board The connector for the PC board has been specially developed support
FANUC’s high–mounting density. PCR connectors made by HONDA
TSUSHIN are compatible with the mating part of the connector and can
be selected for the cable connection.

Cable connector The cable connector is separated into a body and a housing. The
connectors available are shown below. Models marked with (*) have
been customized for FANUC; those not so marked are mass produced as
standard products.

Cable General Connector HONDA PCR–E20FA

connector purpose body TSUSHIN (Separate–wire
press–mount type)
HONDA PCR–E20FS
TSUSHIN (Solder type)

Housing HONDA PCS–E20LA

TSUSHIN (Metal)

HONDA PCR–V20LA*
TSUSHIN PCR–V20LB*
(Plastic)
Pulse Connector HIROSE FI40–2015S*
coder and body ELECTRIC (Solder type with
coaxial 15 pins)
cable Housing HIROSE FI–20–CV*
ELECTRIC (Plastic)

Required tools for Separate–wire press–mount type

connection of cable Connector : PCR–E20FA (HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.)
connector 28–AWG wires are assembled at a time. Generally, it is much more cost
effective to assemble a cable this way than by using solder or press–mount
type connectors. The tools required are :
– Cassette for wire arrangement :
JGPS–015–1/1–20 (HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.)
– Base for cassette :
JGPS–014 (HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.)
– Press–mount locator :
PCS–K1 (HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.)
– Hand press : MFC–K1 (HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.)

632
 C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX AND CABLES

Solder type
Connector : PCR–E20FS (HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.) or
FI40–2015S (HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD.)
Wires of 20 AWG or smaller can be soldered to the connector. HONDA
TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD. However, soldering many of these wires
together lowers work efficiency because the pitch of the soldering portion
of the connector is too small to support it.

To increase work efficiency HIROSE ELECTRIC has developed a new

connector. By thinning out the number of pins, its soldering portion has
a pitch equal to that of the conventional HONDA TSUSHIN MF
connectors. The FI40–2015S can be used for interfacing pulse coders and
manual pulse generators which require wires up to as 20 AWG thick for
connection with a +5V power source.

Cable wires Cable wires generally need to be developed or ordered by the machine tool
builder for the Power Mate.
FANUC has developed wires that specifically suit the interface connector.
They are listed in the table below, for your convenience when ordering
from the manufacturer.
Cable FANUC
Use Structure Manufacturer Remarks
type specification No.

10–pair General purpose Ten 0.08mm2 pairs A66L–0001–0284 #10P HITACHI CABLE, LTD.
cable OKI ELECTRIC CABLE.,
LTD.

6–pair CRT interface Six 0.08mm2 pairs A66L–0001–0295 HITACHI CABLE, LTD. 20m
cable (for press–mount connector) maximum

6–core CRT interface Coaxial six cores A66L–0001–0296 HITACHI CABLE, LTD. 50m
coaxial (for long distances) maximum
cable

Composite Pulse coder, Six 0.5mm2 wires and A66L–0001–0286 HITACHI CABLE, LTD. 20m
12–core Linear scale, three 0.18mm2 pairs OKI ELECTRIC CABLE., maximum
cable Manual pulse generator LTD. (NOTE)
(NOTE)

NOTE
When using a pulse coder, scale, or manual pulse generator
that requires a +5 V power supply, a cable must be selected
by considering the drop in the power supply voltage due to
the resistance of the cable.
When using A66L–0001–0286, ensure that the cable length
does not exceed 20 m. When a cable longer than 20 m is
required, use a cable having a lower resistance (such as
A66L–0001–0157).

633
C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS
AND CABLES APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

For more information, contact : (January, 1994)

D HITACHI CABLE, LTD.
HITACHI CABLE SHOJI CO., LTD.
4TH SALES SECTION OF SALES DEPARTMENT
TEL 03–3255–5415
FAX 03–3255–5495
D OKI ELECTRIC CABLE CO., LTD.
OKI ELECTRIC CABLE CO., LTD.
SECOND ELECTRIC CABLE SALES SECTION OF ELECTRIC
CABLE SALES DEPARTMENT,
SALES HEADQUARTERS
TEL 044–754–4363
FAX 044–754–0012

634
 C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX AND CABLES

10–pair cable

D Specifications Item Unit Specifications

Product No. – A66L–0001–0284#10P
Manufacturer HITACHI CABLE, LTD.
OKI ELECTRIC CABLE., LTD.
Rating – 60°C30V:UL2789
80°C30V:UL80276
Material Conductor – Stranded wire of tinned annealed copper
(ASTM B–286)
Insulator – Cross–linked vinyl
Shield braid – Tinned annealed copper wire
Sheath – Heat–resistant oilproof vinyl
Number of pairs Pairs 10
Conductor Size AWG 28
Structure Conduc- 7/0.127
tors
/mm
Outside diameter mm 0.38
Insulator Thickness mm 0.1
Thinnest portion : 0.08 (3.1mm)
Outside diameter mm 0.58
(approx.)
Core style (rating) mm UL15157(80°C, 30V)
Twisted Outside diameter mm 1.16
pair (approx.)
Pitch mm 20 or less
Lay – Collect the required number of twisted pairs
into a cable, then wrap binding tape around
the cable. To make the cable round, apply a
cable separator as
required.
Lay diameter (approx.) mm 3.5
Drain wire Conduc- Hitachi Cable : Not available
Oki Electric Cable : Available,10/0.12
tors
/mm
Shield Element wire mm 0.12
braid diameter
Braid density % 85 or more
Sheath Color – Black
Thickness mm 1.0
Outside diameter mm 6.2
(approx.)
Standard length m 200
Packing method – Bundle
Electrical Electric resis- Ω/km 233 or less
perfor- tance(at 20C°)
mance
Insulation resis- MΩ–km 10 or less
tance (at 20C°)
Dielectric V/min. 300
strength (AC)
Flame resistance – Shall pass flame resistance test VW–1SC
of UL standards.

635
C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS
AND CABLES APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

D Cable structure The cable structure is shown below.

Wire identification table (HITACHI)

Insulator color
Wire No. First Second
wire wire
1
Twisted 1 Blue White
10 2 pair wire
2 Yellow White
5
Binding 3 Green White
9 3 tape
4 Red White
6 Shield
braid 5 Purple White
8 4
Sheath 6 Blue Brown
7
7 Yellow Brown
8 Green Brown
9 Red Brown
10 Purple Brown

The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the numbers in the table at right.

Fig.1 Cable Made by Hitachi Cable

Wire identification table (OKI)

Dot mark

Insulator color
color

(1 pitch)
Dot mark
Pair No.
Drain First Second
wire wire wire

1
Twisted
1 Orange
Red Black

10 2 –pair 2 Gray
Red Black

wire
6
Binding 3 White
Red Black
tape
9 3 4 Yellow
Red Black
Shield
7
braid
5 Pink
Red Black
8 4
Sheath
6 Orange

Red Black
5
7 Gray

Red Black
8 White

Red Black

9 Yellow

Red Black

10 Pink

Red Black

The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the numbers in the table at right.

Fig.2 Cable Made by Oki Electric Cable

636
 C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX AND CABLES

12–core cable
D Specifications

Item Unit Specifications

Product No. – A66L–0001–0286
Manufacturer – HITACHI CABLE, LTD.
OKI ELECTRIC CABLE., LTD.
Rating – 80°C, 30V
Material Conductor,braid–shielded wire,drain wire – Strand wire of tinned annealed copper (JIS C3152)
Insulator – Heat–resistant flame–retardant vinyl
Sheath – Oilproof, heat–resistant, flame–retardant vinyl
Number of wires (wire ons.) Cores 6 (1 to 6) 6 (three pairs)
(7 to 9)
Con- Size mm2 0.5 0.18
ductor
Structure Conduc- 20/0.18 7/0.18
tors
/mm
Outside diameter mm 0.94 0.54
Insula- Standard thickness (The minimum thick- mm 0.25 0.2
tor ness is at least 80% of the standard thick-
ness.)
Outside diameter mm 1.50 0.94
Twisted Outside diameter mm 1.88
pair
Direction of lay – Left
Pitch mm 20 or less
Lay – Twist the wires at an appropriate pitch so the outermost layer is right–
twisted, and wrap tape around the outermost layer.
Apply a cable separator as required.
Lay diameter mm 5.7
Drain Size mm2 0.3
wire
Structure Wires/ 12/0.18
mm
Outside diameter mm 0.72
Shield Element wire diameter mm 0.12
braid
Thickness mm 0.3
Braid density % 70
Outside diameter mm 6.3
Sheath Color – Black
Standard thickness (The minimum thick- mm 1.1
ness is at least 85% of the standard thick-
ness.)
Outside diameter mm 8.5Max. 9.0(1)
Standard length m 100
Packing method – Bundle
Electri- Electric resistance (at 20C°) (wire nos.) W/km 39.4(1 to 6) 113(7 to 9)
cal per-
per
for- Insulation resistance (at 20C°) MW–km 15
mance Dielectric strength (AC) V/min. 500
Flame resistance – Shall pass flame resistance test VW–1SC of UL standards,

NOTE
The maximum outside diameter applies to portions other
than the drain wire.

D Markings on cable D Name or symbol of the manufacturer

D Manufacturing year

637
C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS
AND CABLES APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

D Cable structure The cable structure is shown below.

Drain wire

Red
0.18–mm2 twisted pair wire
7
6 White 1
Red Black 0.5–mm2 insulated wire

Red Binding tape

5 2
Red
8 Black
Black Shield braid
4 3
Red Black Black Sheath
9
White

The colors in the figure indicate the colors of insulators.

638
 C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX AND CABLES

6–core coaxial cable

D Specifications Item Unit Description

Specification – A66L–0001–0296

Manufacture – HITACHI CABLE CO., LTD.

Manufacture’s specification – CO–IREFV(0)–CX–75

Number of Conductors Core 6

Inside Con- Size mm2 0.14

ductor
Components Conduc- 7/0.16
tors
(PCS)/m
m

Material – Tin–coated Soft Copper Wire

Diameter mm 0.48

Insulator Material (Color) – Polyethylene (White)

Thickness mm 0.17

Diameter mm 1.90

Outside Material – Tin–coated Soft Copper Wire (Rolled)

Conductor
Diameter of Com- mm 0.1
ponent–Wire

Density % 90 or more

Diameter mm 2.10

Jacket Material – Vinyl

Color – Black. White. Red. Green. Yellow. Blue

Thickness mm 0.15

Diameter mm 2.4

Twisted Assembly Diameter mm 7.2

Thickness of Paper Tape mm 0.05

Sheath Material, Color – Oil Tight Vinyl Black

Thickness mm 0.7

Finish Diameter mm 8.7(MAX:9.0)

Conductor Resistance (20C°) W/km 143

Withstand Voltage (A.C.) V/min. 1000

Insulation Resistance (20C°) MW–km 1000

Impedance (10MHz) W 75±5

Standard Capacitance (1MHz) nF/km 56

Standard Attention (10MHz) dB/km 53

Standard Length m 200

Package form – Bundle

639
C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS
AND CABLES APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

D Cable structure The cable structure is shown below.

Coaxial Core

White
Thread
Yellow Black

Blue Red
Tape
Green
Sheath

Inside Conductor

Insulator

Outside Conductor (Rolled)

Jacket

640
 C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX AND CABLES

Cable for DI/DO

Conductor Electric
characteristic
Sheath Total Desig-
Name thick- outer Conduc- nation
Com-
Outer ness dia. tor Allowable (Note)
posi-
dia. resis- current
tion
tance
A66L
Cable A
ø0.55mm 7/0.18 1.5mm ø10.0mm 110W/km 1.6A –0001
(10–pair)
–0041

A66L
Cable B
ø0.55mm 7/0.18 1.7mm ø12.5mm 106W/km 1.6A –0001
(50 core)
–0042

Cable C ø0.55mm 7/0.18 1.6A A66L

(5–pair
(5– air, 116W/km –0001
1 0mm
1.0mm ø11 0mm
ø11.0mm
6 core) ø1.5mm 50/0.18 16W/km 10A –0157

Total shield
Individual shield
(for tachogenerator
signal)

For power (50/0.18)

(+5V×3.0V×3)

Pair cable (7/0.18)

641
D. INTERFACE CABLE APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

D INTERFACE CABLE

Cables
Cable No. Name and connection Maximum length (m)
J6 DPL/MDI cable between the M4 and DPL/MDI unit 50
J13 DPL/MDI relay cable between M4 and relay panel Total of 40 for both J6 and J13
J22 I/O Link cable between the JD1A1 and an I/O card or I/O unit 10
J24 Power cable between the 24 V power supply and I/O card or the I/O unit
J25 DI/DO cable between the CM21/CM51 and power magnetics cabinet 50
J26 DI/DO cable between the CM22/CM52 and power magnetics cabinet 50
J27 DI/DO cable between the CM23/CMB3 and power magnetics cabinet 50
J28 DI/DO cable between the CM24/CMB4 and power magnetics cabinet 50
J30 Power cable between the 24 V power supply and Power Mate-D or CRT/MDI unit
J31 Electric current command cable for the first axis between the JV1 and servo amplifier 50
J32 Feedback cable for the first axis between the JF1 and pulse coder 50
J33 Feedback cable for a separate pulse coder for the first axis between the JF21 and 50
separate pulse coder
J34 Electric current command cable for the second axis between the JV2 and servo amplifier 50
J35 Feedback cable for the second axis between the JF2 and pulse coder 50
J36 Feedback cable for a separate pulse coder for the second axis between the JF22 and 50
separate pulse coder
J37 Absolute-pulse-codr cable between the JA14 and battery 50
J38 S-analog output cable between the JA11 and analog spindle 50
J39 Serial spindle cable between the JA11 and optical link adaptor 10
J39 Serial spindle cable between the JA11 and spindle amplifier 50
J40 Position coder cable between the JA12 and position coder 50
J41 Manual pulse cable between the JA13 and manual pulse generator 50
J42 Punch panel cable between the JD5 and an I/O unit relay connector 50
J43–J46 CRT/MDI cable between the JD14 and JD13 50
J47, J138 Mode selection cable between the JN1 and switch
J49, J50 Built–in I/O cable (34pins) between CM29, CM30, CB128, or CB129 and power mag- 50
netics cabinet
J80, J81 Built–in I/O cable (50pins) between CM43, CM44, CB130, CB131 and power mag- 50
netics cabinet
J93 1st axis servo cable (type B interface) between JS1 and servo amplifier 50
J94 2nd axis servo cable (type B interface) between JS2 and servo amplifier 50

NOTE
Each maximum allowable cable length relates to the use of the cable for an interface signal.
For some cables (such as that for a pulse coder) that contain a power cable, however, an
additional limit, based on a drop in the supply voltage, is imposed.

642
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX D. INTERFACE CABLE

The following interface cables are provided.

Name Application Specifications Code Length
Cable for DPL/MDI
A02B–
0118– 2m
DPL/MDI EMI–immune molded interface cable (by Oki Densen)
K820

A02B–
J6 0118– 7m
K821

D–SUB15 (male) A02B–

Power Mate 0118– 14m
K822

Signal cable for the A02B–

I/O card or I/O Link PCR–E20FA or F5
0124– 1m
K820

A03B–
J22 0807– 5m
K801

Cable in which ten twisted pairs are

shielded all together A03B–
A66L–0001–0284#10P 0807– 10m
K802

+24V power cable for

I/O cards or I/O units BURNDY JAPAN, LTD
SMS3PNS
Crimp terminal
T3–2

A02B–
J24 0124– 5m
K831

Vinyl wire

Magnetic cabinet
Operator’s panel
MR–50LMH MR–50LFH

J25 ø12.5 A02B–

J26 0029– 7m
J27 K801

Cabtyre cable 50 cores,

shole shielded (CableB)

Magnetic cabinet
Operator’s panel
MR–20LFH MR–50LMH

ø10
A02B–
J28 0029– 7m
K802

Cabtyre cable 20 cores, shole

shielded (Cable A)

643
D. INTERFACE CABLE APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Name Application Specifications Code Length

+24V power cable for
the CRT/MDI or the
CNC Crimp terminal
T3–2 AMP JAPAN, LTD
2–178288–3

A02B–
J30 0124– 5m
K830

Servo amplifier cable

PCR–E20F

J31
A02B–
J34
0120– 5m
J93
K800
J94

10–pair cable shielded with one sleeve

A66L–0001–0284#10P

Absolute-pulse-coder
battery cable PCR–E20F
Crimp
terminal A02B–
J37 T3–2 0124– 5m
K809

Serial spindle cable

(electrical – optical PCR–E20F
conversion)

A02B–
J39 0124– 1m
K822

10–pair cable shielded with one sleeve

A66L–0001–0284#10P

Serial spindle cable

(electrical – electrical) PCR–E20F

A02B–
J39 0166– 5m
K840

10–pair cable shielded with one sleeve

A66L–0001–0284#10P

644
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX D. INTERFACE CABLE

Name Application Specifications Code Length

Position coder cable F140–2015S

MS3106B20–29S

A02B–
J40 0124– 7m
K823

10-pair whole shielded cable

(cable A)

Manual pulse
generator M3 crimp style terminal A02B–
cable F140–2015S 0120–
K821
(for
1unit)
J41 A02B– 7m
0166–
K800
(for
2units)

CRT link cable A02B–

(when two or more 0124– 0.5m
PCR–E20F
blocks run K810
simultaneously)

A02B–
J43,
0124– 5m
J44
K811

10–pair cable shielded with one sleeve A02B–

A66L–0001–0284#10P 0124– 10m
K812

CRT link cable A02B–

(when only one block PCR–E20F 0124– 0.5m
runs) K813

A02B–
J45,
0124– 5m
J46
K814

10–pair cable shielded with one sleeve A02B–

A66L–0001–0284#10P 0124– 10
K815

645
D. INTERFACE CABLE APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Name Application Specifications Code Length

Built–in I/O cable A02B–
(Power Mate–D) 0124– 0.3m
HIROSE H2F3BB–34D–2.54R
K840

A02B–
J49,
0124– 0.5m
J50
K841

A02B–
To flat cable 0124– 1m
K841

Video cable MR–20FH

(for CRT, PDP) MR–20L
PCR–E20F HONDA
A02B–
J53 0124– 0.5m
K871

+24V power cable be-

tween separate type
MDI and separate AMP JAPAN, LTD
type CRT BURNDY JAPAN, LTD 1–178288–3
SMS6PN–5

A02B–
J56 0124– 0.5m
K861

Built–in I/O cable A02B–

(Power Mate–F) 0198– 0.3m
HIROSE HZF3BB–50D–2.54R
K840

A02B–
J80,
0198– 0.5m
J81
K841

A02B–
To flat cable 0198– 1m
K842

646
 E. DISPLAYING AND SETTING
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX PARAMETERS

E DISPLAYING AND SETTING PARAMETERS

647
E. DISPLAYING AND SETTING
PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Procedure for displaying and setting parameters

Procedure for CRT/MDI 1 Set 1 for PARAMETER WRITE to enable writing. See the procedure
for enabling/disabling parameter writing described below.

2 Press function key SYSTEM .

3 Press chapter selection soft key [PARAM] to display the parameter

screen.

PARAMETER (SETTING) O0010 N00002

0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0001
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0012 MIR
X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Y 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0020 I/O CHANNEL

>_
MDI **** *** ***
[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ PMC ][ SYSTEM ][ (OPRT) ]

4 Move the cursor to the parameter number to be set or displayed in

either of the following ways:
⋅ Enter the parameter number and press soft key [NO.SRH] .
⋅ Move the cursor to the parameter number using the page keys,
PAGE

PAGE
and , and cursor keys, , , , and .

5 To set the parameter, enter a new value with numeric keys and press
soft key [INPUT]. The parameter is set to the entered value and the
value is displayed.
6 Set 0 for PARAMETER WRITE to disable writing.
Procedure for DPL/MDI Press the <DGNOS/PARAM> key to toggle between the parameter
screen and diagnostic screen.

Parameter screen Diagnostic screen

>&0001 01010101 >@0800 0
&0002 01010101 @0801 0

Display of PMC data ã â Key operation

>D0000 00000000
D0001 00000000

648
 E. DISPLAYING AND SETTING
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX PARAMETERS

Procedure for enabling/displaying parameter writing

Procedure for CRT/MDI 1 Select the MDI mode or enter state emergency stop.

2 Press function key OFFSET

SETTING .

3 Press soft key [SETING] to display the setting screen.

SETTING (HANDY) O0001

N00000
PARAMETER WRITE = 1 (0:DISABLE 1:ENABLE)
TV CHECK = 0 (0:OFF 1:ON)
PUNCH CODE = 1 (0:EIA 1:ISO)
INPUT UNIT = 0 (0:MM 1:INCH)
I/O CHANNEL = 0 (0–1:CHANNEL NO.)
SEQUENCE NO. = 0 (0:OFF 1:ON)

>_
MDI **** *** *** ALM
[ OFFSET ][ SETING ][ ][ ][ (OPRT) ]

4 Move the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE using cursor keys.

5 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then press [1: ON] to enable parameter
writing.
At this time, the CNC enters the P/S alarm state (No. 100).
6 After setting parameters, return to the setting screen. Move the cursor
to PARAMETER WRITE and press soft key [(OPRT)] , then press
[0: OFF].

7 Depress the RESET key to release the alarm condition. If alarm No. 000
has occurred, however, turn off the power supply and then turn it on,
otherwise the alarm is not released.

649
E. DISPLAYING AND SETTING
PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Procedure for DPL/MDI 1 Press the <VAR> key to display the settings screen.
2 Use the cursor keys to position the cursor at PWE.
3 Press the <1> key and the <INPUT> key, in that order, to enable
parameters to be written. The CNC unit will generate P/S alarm 100.
4 Press the <DGNOS/PARAM> key to display the parameter screen.

>&0001 00000000
&0002 00000000

5 Move the cursor to the number of the parameter to change.

Method 1
Use the cursor keys. The cursor will continue to move while a cursor
key is being pressed.
Method 2
Press the following keys and enter data in the order shown:
<No.><(parameter No.)><INPUT>
6 Enter a parameter value with the data input keys.
7 Press the <INPUT> key. The parameter value is input and displayed.
8 After all parameters have been set and confirmed, return to the
settings screen and set PWE to 0.
9 Normally, in order to release the alarm state, press the <CAN> key.
However, in order to release alarm No. 000, the power needs to be
turned off and then on again.

Explanations
D Parameters that require Some parameters are not effective until the power is turned off and on
turning off the power again after they are set. Setting such parameters causes alarm 000. In this
case, turn off the power, then turn it on again.
D Setting data Some parameters can be set on the setting screen if the parameter list
indicates ”Setting entry is acceptable”. Setting 1 for PARAMETER
WRITE is not necessary when these parameters are set on the setting
screen.

650
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX F. INPUTTING PARAMETERS

F INPUTTING PARAMETERS

Parameters are loaded into the memory of the controller unit from a floppy
or Handy File. The input format is the same as the output format. When
a parameter is loaded which has the same data number as a parameter
already registered in the memory, the loaded parameter replaces the
existing parameter.

651
F. INPUTTING PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Inputting parameters

Procedure (CRT/MDI) 1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading.
2 When using a floppy, search for the required file according to the
procedure.
3 Press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine operator’s
panel.

4 Press function key OFFSET

SETTING .

5 Press the soft key[SETING]for chapter selection.

6 Enter 1 in response to the prompt for writing parameters (PWE).
Alarm P/S100 (indicating that parameters can be written) appears.

7 Press soft key SYSTEM .

8 Press chapter selection soft key[PARAM].

9 Press soft key[(OPRT)].
10 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key).
11 Press soft keys[READ]and[EXEC].
Parameters are read into memory. Upon completion of input, the
”INPUT” indicator at the lower–right corner of the screen disappears.

12 Press function key OFFSET

SETTING .

13 Press soft key[SETING] for chapter selection.

14 Enter 0 in response to the prompt for writing parameters.
15 Turn the power to the Power Mate back on.
16 Release the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine operator’s
panel.

Procedure (DPL/MDI) 1 Press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine side.
2 The parameter screen is selected by pressing the <PARAM> key.
3 Set PWE on the setting screen to 1. Alarm P/S100 is displayed at
this time.
4 Perform the same operation as for program input.
5 NC parameters are input to the memory by this operation. Normally,
alarm P/S000 will activate after completion of parameter reading.
Normally, P/S alarm 000 is generated after parameters have finished
being read in.
6 Set PWE on the setting parameter to 0.
7 Turn on the Power–Mate power again if PS alarm activates.
8 Release the emergency stop button of machine side.

652
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX G. OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS

G OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS

All parameters are output in the defined format from the memory of the
controller to a floppy or Handy file.

653
G. OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Outputting parameters

Procedure (CRT/MDI) 1 Make sure the output device is ready for output.
2 Specify the punch code system (ISO or EIA) using a parameter.
3 Select the EDIT mode.

4 Press function key SYSTEM .

5 Press chapter selection soft key[PARAM].

6 Press soft key[(OPRT)].
7 Press rightmost soft key (next–menu key).
8 Press soft keys[PUNCH]and[EXEC].
All parameters are output in the defined format.

Procedure (DPL/MDI) 1 Select the EDIT mode.

2 Select the parameter display screen by <PARAM> key.
3 Press the <WRITE> key.
4 Execute file heading when required.
Which file the parameter is output to, are same as outputting of
programs.
5 While parameter, is being output, the display appears as below.

>&0000
00000000
WRITE

6 In order to stop output of data from a tape before it has finished,

turn on external reset signal ERS (bit 7 of G008).
Once data output from a tape has been stopped, it cannot be
restarted.

Explanations
D Output format Output format is as follows:
N ... P .... ;
N ... A1P ..... A2P ... AnP ... ;
N ... P ... ;

N ... : Parameter No.

A ... : Axis No.(n is the number of control axis)
P ... : Parameter setting value .
D Output file name When the floppy disk directory display function is used, the name of the
output file is PARAMETER.

654
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

H DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

Parameters are classified by data type as follows:

Table H Data Types and Valid Data Ranges of Parameters

Data type Valid data range Remarks
Bit
0 or 1
Bit axis
Byte 0 to
127 In some parameters, signs
are ignored.
ignored
Byte axis 0 to
255
Word
0 to
32767
Word axis
2-word
0 to
99999999
2-word axis

NOTE
1 For the bit type and bit axis type parameters, a single data
number is assigned to 8 bits. Each bit has a different
meaning.
2 The axis type allows data to be set separately for each
control axis.
3 The valid data range for each data type indicates a general
range. The range varies according to the parameters. For
the valid data range of a specific parameter, see the
explanation of the parameter.

(1) Notation of bit type and bit axis type parameters

[Example]
0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data No. Data #0 to #7 are bit positions.

(2) Notation of parameters other than bit type and bit axis type
1023 Servo axis number of a specific axis

Data No. Data

655
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

D classification of Parameters of Power Mate-H are classified in order as follows.

parameters H.1 Parameters of setting (from data number 0000)
H.2 Parameter of reader/punch interface (from data number 0100)
H.3 Parameters of axis control/increment system (from data number
1000)
H.4 Parameters of coordinates (from data number 1200)
H.5 Parameters of stroke limit (from data number 1300)
H.6 Parameters of feedrate (from data number 1400)
H.7 Parameters of acceleration/deceleration control (from data number
1600)
H.8 Parameters of servo (from data number 1800)
H.9 Parameters of DI/DO (from data number 3000)
H.10 Parameters of CRT/MDI, display, and edit (from data number
3100)
H.11 Parameters of programs (from data number 3400)
H.12 Parameters of pitch error compensation (from data number 3600)
H.13 Parameters of spindle control (from data number 3700)
H.14 Parameters of tool compensation (from data number 5000)
H.15 Parameters of canned cycles (from data number 5100)
H.16 Parameters of rigid tapping (from data number 5200)
H.17 Parameters of polar coordinate interpolation (from data number
5400)
H.18 Parameters of custom macros (from data number 6000)
H.19 Parameters of pattern data input (from data number 6100)
H.20 Parameters of skip function, picture display, and ITP synchronous
(from data number 6200)
H.21 Parameters of displaying operation time and number of parts (from
data number 6700)
H.22 Parameters of position switch functions (from data number 6900)
H.23 Parameters of manual handle feed/manual handle interruption
(from data number 7100)
H.24 Parameters of butt–type reference position setting function (from
data number 7180)
H.25 Parameters of software operator’s panel (from data number 7200)
H.26 Parameters of external pulse input (from data number 7700)
H.27 Parameters of axis control by PMC (from data number 8000)
H.28 Parameters of standard ladder (data number 8703)
H.29 Parameters of analog input (from data number 8705)

WARNING
Parameters not described in this document may appear on
the Power Mate screen.
Such parameters are invalid. Do not set data for them, or
otherwise an unexpected operation may result.
This document covers all parameters related to the 1–path
Power Mate–D, 2–path Power Mate–D, and Power Mate–F.
The supported functions vary with the model, with the
parameters varying accordingly. To check the functions that
can be used with each model, refer to the specifications in
”FANUC Power Mate–D/F Descriptions (B–62092E).”

656
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

H.1
PARAMETERS OF 0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC

SETTING #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Setting entry is acceptable.

Data type: Bit
TVC TV check
0: Not performed
1: Performed
ISO Code used for data output
0: EIA code
1: ISO code
INI Unit of input
0: In mm
1: In inches
SEQ Automatic insertion of sequence numbers
0: Not performed
1: Performed

NOTE
When a program is prepared by using MDI keys in the part
program storage and edit mode, a sequence number can
automatically be assigned to each block in set increments.
Set the increment to parameter 3216.

0012 RMVx MIRx

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Setting entry is acceptable.

Data type: Bit axis
MIRx Mirror image about each axis
0: Mirror image is off.
1: Mirror image is on.
RMVx Specifies whether to perform controlled axis cancellation
foreach axis.
0: Controlled axis cancellation is not performed.
1: Controlled axis cancellation is performed.

NOTE
RMVx functions when the RMBx bit of parameter No. 1005
is set to 1.

657
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

0020 I/O CHANNEL: Selection of an input/output device

Setting entry is acceptable.

Data type: Byte
Valid data range: 0 to 1

I/O CHANNEL An input/output device used is selected.

0: The device on channel 1 is selected.
(Input/output device connected to JD5 on the
main body of Power Mate)
1: The device on channel 1 is selected.
(Input/output device connected to JD5 on the
main body of Power Mate)

Power Mate

Channel 1
JD5

RS-232-C

Reader/
puncher

I/O CHANNEL=0
or
I/O CHANNEL=1

Fig.H.1 I/O Unit Selection

NOTE
1 The input/output device used can be selected (parameter
0020) also on the setting screen. Using the setting screen
is a more common method for selecting the device.
2 The specified data, such as a baud rate and the number of
stop bits, of an input/output device connected to a specific
channel must be set in parameters for that channel in
advance. See Section H.2 “Parameters of Reader/Puncher
Interface.”
I/O CHANNEL=0 and I/O CHANNEL=1 both refer to
channel 1. For each, parameters to set the baud rate, the
number of stop bits, and other data are provided separately.
3 JD5 is number of connector on the printed circuit boards.

658
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

H.2 Two combinations of parameters to specify the input/output device data

are provided.
PARAMETER OF
The following shows the interrelation between the reader/punch interface
READER/PUNCH parameters for the channels.
INTERFACE

Input/output channel number (parameter 0020)

0101 Stop bit and other data

0020 I/O CHANNEL I/O CHANNEL=0

0102 Number specified for the input/output device
(channel 1)
Specify a channel for 0103 Baud rate
an input/output device.
I/O CHANNEL 0111 Stop bit and other data
=0 : Channel 1
=1 : Channel 1 I/O CHANNEL=1
0112 Number specified for the input/output device
(channel 1)

0113 Baud rate

Fig.H.2 I/O Channel Number Settings

(1) Parameters common to all channels

0100 ENS NCR CTV

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Setting entry is acceptable.

Data type: Bit
CTV Character counting for TV check in control-out state (or
comment part).
0: Performed
1: Not performed
NCR Output of the end of block (EOB) in ISO code
0: LF, CR, CR are output.
1: Only LF is output.
ENS Action taken when a NULL code is found during read of
EIAcode
0: An alarm is generated.
1: The NULL code is ignored.
(2) Parameters for channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=0)
0101 NFD ASI SB2

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Data type: Bit
SB2 The number of stop bits
0: 1
1: 2
ASI Code used at data input
0: EIA or ISO code (automatically distinguished)
1: ASCII code

659
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

NFD Feed before and after the data at data output

0: Output
1: Not output

NOTE
Set NFD to 1 at normal usually.

0102 Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0)

Data type: Byte

Set the number specified for the input/output device used when the
I/O CHANNEL is set to 0, with one of the set values listed in Table
H.2 (a).
Table H.2 (a) Set Value and Specified Number of
Input/Output Device
Set value Number specified for input/output device
0 RS232C (For other than the following for example connect to
personal computer etc. , set 0.)
1 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2)
2 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1)
3 FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC Handy File
FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
4 Not used
5 Portable tape reader
6 FANUC PPR
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H

0103 Baud rate (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0)

Data type: Byte

Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when the I/O
CHANNEL is set to 0, with a set value in Table H.2 (b).
Table H.2 (b) Baud Rate Settings
Set value Baud rate
7 600
8 1200
9 2400
10 4800
11 9600
12 19200

660
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

(3) Parameters for channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=1)

0111 NFD ASI SB2

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

These parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1. The
meanings of the bits are the same as for parameter 0101.

0112 Number specified for the input/output device (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1)

Data type: Byte

Set the number specified for the input/output device used when the
I/O CHANNEL is set to 1, with one of the set values listed in Table
H.2 (a).

0113 Baud rate (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1)

Data type: Byte

Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when I/O
CHANNEL is set to 1, with a value in Table H.2 (b).

661
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

H.3
PARAMETERS OF 1001 INM

AXIS CONTROL/ #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

INCREMENT SYSTEM
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.

Data type: Bit

INM Least command increment on the linear axis
0: In mm (millimeter machine)
1: In inches (inch machine)

1002 DLZ JAX

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

JAX Number of axes controlled simultaneously in manual
operation
0: 1 axis
1: 2 axes

NOTE
This parameter is valid only for the 1–path Power Mate–D
with two controlled axes.

DLZ Function setting the reference position without dog for all
axes
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

NOTE
Availability or disability of function setting the dogless
reference position can be specified for each axis by DLZx,
bit 1 of parameter 1005 , when DLZ set to 0.

1004 IPR ISC

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

ISC The least input increment and least command increment are
set.
ISC Least input and least command increments Symbol
0 0.001 mm, 0.001 deg or 0.0001 inch IS-B
1 0.0001 mm, 0.0001 deg or 0.00001 inch IS-C

662
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

IPR Whether the least input increment for each axis is set to a value
10 times as large as the least command increment is specified.
0: The least input increment is not set to a value 10 times as
large as the least command increment.
1: The least input increment is set to a value 10 times as large
as the least command increment.
If IPR is set to 1, the least input increment is set as follows:
Input increment Least input increment
IS-B 0.01 mm, 0.01 deg or 0.001 inch
IS-C 0.001 mm, 0.001 deg or 0.0001 inch

1005 RMBx DLZx ZRNx

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit axis

ZRNx When a command specifying the movement except for G28
is issued in automatic operation (AUTO or MDI) when a
return of axis to the reference position has not been performed
since the power was turned on
0: An alarm is generated. (PS224 : return to the reference
position)
1: An alarm is not generated.
DLZx Function for setting the reference position without dogs for
each axis.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

NOTE
When DLZ of parameter 1002 is 0, parameter 1005 is
enabled. When DLZ of parameter 1002 is 1, parameter
1005 is disabled, and the function for setting the reference
position without dogs is enabled for all axes.

RMBx Specifies whether controlled axis cancellation for each axis is

to be enabled or disabled.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

NOTE
When RMBx is 1 , the setting to cancel the axis is available
in parameter No. 0012#7 RMVx.

663
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

1006 ZMIx ROTx

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

NOTE
When this parameter is changed, turn off the power before
continuing operation.

Data type: Bit axis

ROTx Either the linear axis or rotation axis is set.
0: Linear axis
1: Rotation axis

NOTE
For the rotation axis, switching between inch and mm units
is not performed. When the rotation axis is set, the machine
coordinate system is normalized to the range 0 to 360
degrees. Automatic return to the reference position (G28
and G30) is performed in the direction executed by the
manual reference position return, and the amount of travel
is within one rotation. A normalized value can be changed
by setting a value for parameter No. 1260.

ZMIx The direction of reference position return and the direction of

initial backlash at power-on
0: Positive direction
1: Negative direction

1008 RRLx RABx ROAx

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit axis

ROAx The roll over function of a rotation axis is
0: Invalid
1: Valid

NOTE
ROAx specifies the function only for a rotation axis (for
which ROTx, #0 of parameter No. 1006, is set to 1)

RABx In the absolute commands, the axis rotates in the direction

0: In which the distance to the target is shorter.
1: Specified by the sign of command value.

NOTE
RABx is valid only when ROAx is 1.

664
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

RRLx Relative coordinates are

0: Not rounded by the amount of shift per rotation
1: Rounded by the amount of shift per rotation

NOTE
1 RRLx is valid only when ROAx is 1.
2 Assign the amount of the shift per one rotation in parameter
No. 1260.

1009 ZEXx

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit axis

ZEXx 0: Disables the reference position external setting function.
1: Enables the reference position external setting function.
This function moves the machine to the reference position by manual
continuous feed, and sets the reference position external setting signal
to ”1” during the reference position return mode, thereby enabling the
absolute pulse coder to be set to the reference position.Using this
function therefore requires that bit 5 (APCx) of parameter No. 1815
must be 1 so that the absolute pulse coder and the related functions
are enabled.
Reference position Reference position
setting signal setting finish signal
G212.6 ZPEXT1 First axis F120.0 ZRF1 First axis
G213.6 ZPEXT2 Second axis F120.1 ZRF2 First axis

1010 Number of CNC-controlled axes

Data type: Byte

Valid data range: 1 to 2 the number of controlled axes
Set the maximum number of axes that can be controlled by the CNC.
[Example] Suppose that from the first axis and second axis are
corresponded to X axis and B axis in order.
and that they are controlled as follows:
X axis : Controlled by the CNC and PMC
B axis : Controlled by the PMC
Then set this parameter to 1.

665
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

1020 Name of the axis used for programming for each axis

Data type: Byte axis

Set the name of the program axis for each control axis, with one of
the values listed in the following table:
Axis name Set value Axis name Set value Axis name Set value
X 88 U 85 A 65
Y 89 V 86 B 66
Z 90 W 87 C 67

NOTE
The same axis name cannot be assigned to more than one
axis.

1022 Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate system

Data type: Byte axis

To determine the following planes used for circular interpolation,
each control axis is set to one of the basic three axes X, Y, and Z, or
an axis parallel to the X, Y, or Z axis.
G17: Plane Xp-Yp
G18: Plane Zp-Xp
G19: Plane Yp-Zp
Only one axis can be set for each of the three basic axes X, Y, and Z,
but two or more parallel axes can be set.
Set value Meaning
0 Neither the basic three axes nor a parallel axis
1 X axis of the basic three axes
2 Y axis of the basic three axes
3 Z axis of the basic three axes
5 Axis parallel to the X axis
6 Axis parallel to the Y axis
7 Axis parallel to the Z axis

1023 Number of the servo axis for each axis

NOTE
When this parameter is set, power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

Data type: Byte axis

Valid data range: 1 to 2
Set the servo axis for each control axis.
Generally, the same number shall be assigned to the control axis and
the corresponding servo axis.

666
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

H.4
PARAMETERS OF 1201 ZPI ZPR

COORDINATES #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

ZPR Automatic setting of a coordinate system when manual return
to the reference position is performed
0: Not set automatically
1: Set automatically

NOTE
When an absolute pulse coder is used, set ”ZPR” to 1
without fail.

ZPI Coordinates at the reference position when a coordinate

system is set automatically
0: Value set in parameter 1250 is used.
1: For input in mm, the value set in parameter 1250 is used,
or for input in inches, the value set in parameter 1251 is
used.

Coordinate value of the first reference position on each axis in the machine
1240 coordinate system

Coordinate value of the second reference position on each axis in the

1241 machine coordinate system

Coordinate value of the third reference position on each axis in the machine
1242 coordinate system

Data type: 2-word axis

Unit of data
Increment system IS-B IS-C Unit
Milimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Rotation axis 0.001 0.0001 deg

Valid data range: 0 to
99999999

Set the coordinate values of the first to third reference positions in the
machine coordinate system.

Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordinate

1250 system setting is performed

Data type: 2-word axis

Unit of data
Increment system IS-B IS-C Unit
Linear axis (input in mm) 0.001 0.0001 mm
Linear axis (input in inches) 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Rotation axis 0.001 0.0001 deg

Valid data range: 0 to
99999999

667
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Set the coordinate value of the reference position on each axis to be

used for setting a coordinate system automatically.

Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis used for setting a
1251 coordinate system automatically when input is performed in inches

Data type: 2-word axis

Unit of data
Increment system IS-B IS-C Unit
Linear axis (input in inches) 0.0001 0.00001 inch

Valid data range: 0 to
99999999

Set the coordinate value of the reference position on each axis to be
used for setting a coordinate system automatically when input is
performed in inches.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when ZPI in parameter 1201 is set
to 1.

1260 Amount of a shift per one rotation of a rotation axis

NOTE
After setting the parameter, turn off the power once and turn
it on again to operate the machine.

Data type: 2-word axis

Unit of data
Increment system IS-B IS-C Unit
Unit of data 0.001 0.0001 deg
Standard value 360000 3600000

Valid data range: 1000 to 9999999

Set the amount of a shift for a rotation axis.
The coordinates of a rotary axis can be protected from overflow by
specifying an amount of movement per rotation of the rotary axis,
then setting bit 0 ROAx of parameter No. 1008 to 1 (to enable the
rotary axis rollover function)
If the command is incremental, the amount of axis movement is equal
to the value given in the command.
If the command is absolute, the end point of axis movement is
determined by coordinates rounded off to a movement amount per
rotation specified in a parameter. If a value larger than the end point
is specified, the axis moves the distance obtained by subtracting a set
movement amount per rotation from the specified value.
Setting bit 1 RABx of parameter No. 1008 to 1 enables selecting the
direction of movement in which the distance to the end point is shorter
(faster access to the end point).
Setting bit 2 RRLx of parameter No. 1008 to 1 enables rounding off
the relative coordinates to a movement amount per rotation.

668
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

H.5
PARAMETERS OF 1300 BFA LZR

STROKE LIMIT #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

BFA When a command that exceeds a stored stroke limit is issued
0: An alarm is generated after the stroke limit exceeded.
1: An alarm is generated before the stroke limit exceeded.
Software stroke limit alarms
Alarm 500: The positive stored stroke limit is
exceeded.
Alarm 501: The negative stored stroke limit is
exceeded.
LZR Checking of stored stroke limits during the time from
power-on to manual return to the reference position
0: The stroke limits are checked.
1: The stroke limits are not checked.

Coordinate value 1 of stored stroke limit 1 in the positive direction on

1320 each axis

Coordinate value 1 of stored stroke limit 1 in the negative direction on each

1321 axis

Data type: 2-word axis

Unit of data:
Increment system IS-B IS-C Unit
Milimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Rotation axis 0.001 0.0001 deg

Valid data range:*999999999 to +99999999

The coordinate values of stored stroke limits 1 in the positive and
negative directions are set for each axis in the machine coordinate
system. The outside area of the two limits set in the parameters is
inhibited.

NOTE
When the parameters are set as follows, the stroke
becomes infinite: parameter 1320 < parameter 1321
For movement along the axis for which infinite stroke is set,
only incremental commands are available. If an absolute
command is issued for this axis, the absolute register may
overflow, and normal movement will not result.

669
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

H.6
PARAMETERS OF 1401 RDR TDR RFO RPD

FEEDRATE #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

RPD Manual rapid traverse during the period from power-on time
to the completion of return to the reference position
0: Disabled (Manual continuous feed is performed.)
1: Enabled
RFO When cutting feedrate override is 0% during rapid traverse,
0: The machine tool does not stop moving.
1: The machine tool stops moving.
TDR Dry run during tapping (tapping cycle G74, G84, rigid
tapping)
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
RDR Dry run for rapid traverse command
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

1410 Dry run rate

Data type: Word

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
Increment system Unit of data
IS-B IS-C
Milimeter input 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Inch input 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000

Set the dry run rate when the jog feedrate is overridden by 100%.

1411 Cutting feedrate in the automatic mode at power–on

Setting entry is acceptable.

Data type: Word
Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
Increment system Unit of data
IS-B IS-C
Milimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800

When the machine requires little change in cutting feedrate during

cutting, a cutting feedrate can be specified in the parameter. This
eliminates the need to specify a cutting feedrate in the NC command
data.

670
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

1420 Rapid traverse rate for each axis

Data type: 2–word axis

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
Increment system Unit of data
IS-B IS-C
Milimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to 24000 30 to 100000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 9600 30 to 48000
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 30 to 24000 30 to 100000

Set the rapid traverse rate when the rapid traverse override is 100%
for each axis.

1421 F0 rate of rapid traverse override for each axis

Data type: Word axis

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
Increment system Unit of data
IS-B IS-C
Milimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000

Set the F0 rate of the rapid traverse override for each axis.
Rapid traverse override signal
Override value
val e
ROV2 ROV1
0 0 100 %
0 1 50 %
1 0 25 %
1 1 F0

F0:Parameter No.1421

1422 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis

Data type: 2–word

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
Increment system Unit of data
IS-B IS-C
Milimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 240000 6 to 100000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 96000 6 to 48000
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 6 to 240000 6 to 100000

Set the maximum cutting feedrate.

671
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

1423 Jog feedrate for each axis

Data type: Word axis

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
Increment system Unit of data
IS-B IS-C
Milimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000

Set the continuous manual feedrate when the override of the jog
feedrate is 100%.

1424 Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis

Data type: 2–word axis

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
Increment system Unit of data
IS-B IS-C
Milimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to 24000 30 to 100000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 9600 30 to 48000
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 30 to 24000 30 to 100000

Set the rate of manual rapid traverse when the rapid traverse override
is 100% for each axis.

NOTE
If 0 is set, the rate set in parameter 1420 is assumed.

1425 FL rate of return to the reference position for each axis

Data type: Word axis

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
Increment system Unit of data
IS-B IS-C
Milimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000

Set a feedrate (FL rate) after deceleration when return to the reference
position is performed for each axis.

672
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

1430 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis

Data type: 2–word axis

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
Increment system Unit of data
IS-B IS-C
Milimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 240000 6 to 100000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 96000 6 to 48000
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 6 to 240000 6 to 100000

Set a maximum allowable cutting feedrate for each axis.

In cutting feed, the feedrate along each axis is clamped to the
maximum allowable cutting feedrate for each axis.

NOTE
When 0 is set for all axes, the feedrate is clamped to the
maximum allowable cutting feedrate specified in parameter
No. 1422.

1481 EXFP 1

1482 EXFP 2

1483 EXFP 3

1484 EXFP 4

1485 EXFP 5

Data type: Word axis

Unit of data:
EXFP1 to EXFP5: Feedrates corresponding to feedrate switching
signals EXF1 to EXF5, respectively
Valid data range
Increment system Unit of data
IS-B IS-C
Milimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000

673
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

H.7
PARAMETERS OF 1601 NCI RTO OVL

ACCELERATION/ #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

DECELERATION Data type: Bit

CONTROL OVL Block overlap between cutting feed blocks
0: Not performed
1: Performed
RTO 0: Disables block overlap between rapid traverse blocks.
1: Enables block overlap between rapid traverse blocks.
NCI Imposition check at deceleration
0: Performed
1: Not performed (Exact stop check dose not performed too.)

1602 FWB

Standard #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
setting 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

Data type: Bit

FWB Selects the type of linear acceleration/deceleration used
before interpolation.
0: Type A is used
1: Type B is used
<<Type A>>
When a block specifies a change in feedrate, acceleration/deceleration
is started after entering the block where the feedrate change is
specified.
<<Type B>>
Deceleration: When a block specifies a change in feedrate,
deceleration is started in the previous block to
complete deceleration before entering the block where
the feedrate change is specified.
Acceleration: When a block specifies a change in feedrate,
acceleration is started after entering the block where
the feedrate change is specified.

674
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

<Example of deceleration> <Example of acceleration>

Feedrate Specified feedrate Feedrate Specified feedrate

Feedrate after acceleration/ Feedrate after acceleration/
Point 1 deceleration before interpolation deceleration before interpolation
F3 F3
Type A

F2 F2
Type B

F1 Time F1 Time
N1 N2 N1 N2

To decrease the feedrate from F3 to F2,

deceleration needs to be started at point 1.

1610 JGLx CTBx CTLx

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit axis

CTLx Acceleration/deceleration (in each axis) in cutting feed
including feed in dry run
0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied.
1: Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is
applied.

NOTE
To use bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation, set this parameter to 0, and select the
acceleration/deceleration using CTBx , bit 1 of parameter
No. 1610.

Parameter
Acceleration/deceleration
CTBx CTLx
0 0 Exponential acceleration/deceleration
0 1 Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
1 0 Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation

CTBx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed including feed in

dry run
0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied
(depending on the setting in CTLx , bit 0 of parameter No.
1610).
1: Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
is applied.

675
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

JGLx Acceleration/deceleration in manual continuous feed (jog

feed).
0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied.
1: The same acceleration/deceleration as used for cutting
feed is applied (depending on which is used in cutting
feed).

Time constant T(T1) used in linear acceleration/deceleration or bell-shaped

1620 acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis

Data type: Word axis

Unit of data: msec
Valid data range: 0 to 4000
Specify a time constant used in acceleration/deceleration in rapid
traverse. Set this parameter to time constant T1 used in bell–shaped
acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse , and set parameter
No.1621 to time constant T2.
When the value of parameter No. 1621 (time constant T2 for
bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration during rapid traverse) is 0,
linear acceleration/deceleration is used during rapid traverse. In such
a case, the value set in this parameter serves as a time constant for
linear acceleration/deceleration during rapid traverse.

<Linear acceleration/deceleration during rapid traverse> <Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse>
Feedrate
Feedrate Rapid
traverse rate
Rapid
traverse rate

0
Time Time
T T T2/2 T1 T2/2
T2
T: Time constant for linear acceleration/deceleration T1: Time constant under linear acceleration/deceleration
T2: Time for corner rounding

Total time=T1+T2
Time for linear part=T1–T2
Time for curved part=T2

Set the value when the rapid traverse rate is 100%.

If it is under 100%, the total time is reduced. (Constant acceleration
method)
The value of T1 is determined from the torque of motor. Usually set
the value of T2 to 24ms or 32ms.

676
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

Time constant for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration for each axis during

1621 rapid traverse T2

Data type: Word axis

Unit of data: msec
Valid data range: 0 to 512
Specify bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant T for 2

each axis in rapid-traverse.

NOTE
1 Set time constant T1 for bell-shaped acceleration /
deceleration during rapid traverse in parameter No. 1620,
and set time constant T2 in this parameter. For information
about time constants T1 and T2, see the description of
parameter No. 1620.
2 When this parameter is set to 0, linear acceleration/
deceleration is used during rapid traverse. (The time
constant specified in parameter No. 1620 is used for linear
acceleration/deceleration.)

Time constant for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration, exponential accel-

1622 eration/deceleration, or linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in
cutting feed for each axis.

Data type: Word axis

Unit of data: ms
Valid data range : 0 to 4000
(Cutting feed exponential acceleration/deceleration)
0 to 512
(Linear/bell–type acceleration/deceleration after
cutting feed interpolation)
Set the time constant used for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration
exponential function acceleration/deceleration, or linear
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed for each
axis. Except for special applications, the same time constant must be
set for all axes in this parameter. If the time constants set for the axes
differ from each other, proper straight lines or arcs cannot be obtained.

677
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation

Feedrate

Time
T
T: Total time. It is constant irrespective of feed rate.
(Time constant is constant).

The curve corresponds to that T1=T/2 and T2=T/2 set

in parameter no.1620 and 1621.

FL rate of exponential function acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for

1623 each axis

Data type: Word axis

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
Increment system Unit of data
IS-B IS-C
Milimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000

Set the lower limit (FL rate) of exponential function

acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for each axis. Except for
special applications, this parameter must be set to 0 for all axes. If
a value other than 0 is specified, proper straight lines or arcs cannot
be obtained.

Time constant of bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration, exponential func-

1624 tion acceleration/deceleration, or linear acceleration/deceleration after inter-
polation in jog feed for each axis.

Data type: Word axis

Unit of data: ms
Valid data range : 0 to 4000
(Jog feed exponential acceleration/deceleration)
0 to 512
(Linear/bell–type acceleration/deceleration after
jog feed compensation)
Set the time constant used for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration,
exponential function acceleration/deceleration, or linear
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in continuous manual
feed for each axis.

678
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

FL rate of exponential function acceleration/deceleration in manual continu-

1625 ous feed for each axis.

Data type: Word axis

Unit of data:
Valid data range:

Valid data range

Increment system Unit of data
IS-B IS-C
Milimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Set the lower limit (FL rate) of exponential function
acceleration/deceleration in continuous manual feed for each axis.

Parameter 1 for setting the acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration

1630 before interpolation (maximum cutting feedrate in linear acceleration/decel-
eration before interpolation)

Data type: 2–word

Unit of data:
Valid data range:

Parameter 1 for setting the acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration

1630 before interpolation (maximum cutting feedrate in linear acceleration/decel-
eration before interpolation)

Valid data range

Increment system Unit of data
IS-B IS-C
Milimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 240000 6 to 100000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 9600 6 to 48000
This parameter is used to specify the acceleration used for linear
acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation.
In this parameter, set a maximum cutting feedrate in linear
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. In parameter No. 1631,
set a time to be used until the maximum cutting feedrate is reached.
Feedrate

Parameter 1 Parameter 1 : Parameter No. 1630

Parameter 2 : Parameter No. 1631

Time
Parameter 2

NOTE
When either parameter No. 1630 or parameter No. 1631 is
set to 0, linear acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation is disabled.

679
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Parameter 2 for setting the acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration

1631 before interpolation (time it takes to reach the maximum cutting feedrate in
linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)

Data type: Word

Unit of data: 1 msec
Valid data range: 0 to 4000
This parameter is used to specify the acceleration used for linear
acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation.
In this parameter, set the time (time constant) it takes to reach the
feedrate specified in parameter No. 1630.
Example:

Feedrate [mm/min]

4000 (When a millimeter machine is used)

Parameter No. 1630=4000
Parameter No. 1631=80

Time [msec]
80

NOTE
1 When either parameter No. 1630 or parameter No. 1631 is
set to 0, linear acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation is disabled.
2 Set parameter Nos. 1630 and 1631 to satisfy: (Parameter
No. 1630)/(Parameter No. 1631) y 5

Rapid traverse rate deceleration ratio for overlap between rapid traverse
1722 blocks

Data type: Byte axis

Unit of data: %
Valid data range: 0 to 100
This parameter specifies a rapid traverse deceleration ratio for overlap
between rapid traverse blocks for an individual axis. This function
is enabled when bit 4 (RTO) of parameter No. 1601 is 1.

NOTE
1 This function is enabled when an in–position check is
disabled (NCI (bit 5 of parameter No. 1601) = 1). When an
in–position check is enabled, overlapping does not occur.
2 If two consecutive rapid traverse blocks (such as G00) direct
the same axis to move in opposite directions, overlapping
does not occur.

680
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

H.8
PARAMETERS OF 1800 CVR

SERVO #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

CVR When velocity control ready signal VRDY is set ON before
position control ready signal PRDY comes ON
0: A servo alarm is generated. (SV404)
1: A servo alarm is not generated.

1801 CNI CCI

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

CCI Specifies whether to use the effective area in cutting feed
specified by parameter No. 1826 or by bit 5 (CNI) of
parameter No. 1801.
0: The setting of parameter No. 1826 is used. (This also
applies to rapid traverse.)
1: The setting of bit 5 (CNI) of parameter No. 1801 is used.
CNI Specifies how the effective area in cutting feed is to be
determined when bit 4 (CCI) of parameter No. 1801 is set to
1.
0: When the next block also specifies cutting feed, the setting
of parameter No. 1827 is used. When the next block does
not specify cutting feed, the setting of parameter No. 1826
is used.
1: The setting of parameter No. 1827 is used, regardless of
how the next block specifies feed operation. (In rapid
traverse, the setting of parameter No. 1826 is used. In
cutting feed, the setting of parameter No. 1827 is used.)

1803 NOFUP HFUP NOFVY TAL TIP

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

TIP Specifies whether to perform an in-position check when
torque restriction is in effect.
0: Do not perform.
1: Perform.

681
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

TAL Specifies whether to perform an excessive error check

during movement or stopping when torque restriction is
in effect.
0: Do not perform
1: Perform.

NOTE
When torque restriction is not in effect, in-position checks
and checks during stopping and movement are performed,
regardless of the setting of this parameter.

NOFVY 0: Generate a servo alarm when VRDY goes off.

(SV401)
1: When VRDY goes off, do not generate a servo alarm,
but instead just wait until it goes on again. When a
Set this bit to 1 when one amplifier is shared by
multiple CNCs.
HFUP 0: Specifies a conventional follow–up type for the
absolute pulse coder.
1: Specifies a high–speed follow–up type for the
absolute pulse coder

NOTE
This parameter can be used only with the 1–path Power
Mate–D.

NOFUP 0: Do not perform follow-up once for APC after system

startup.
1: Perform follow-up once for APC after system startup.

1815 APCx APZx OPTx

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

Data type: Bit axis

OPTx Specifies whether to use a separate pulse coder as a position
transducer.
0: A separate pulse coder is not used.
1: A separate pulse coder is used.
APCx Position transducer
0: Other than absolute position transducer
1: Absolute position transducer (absolute pulse coder)

682
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

APZx Machine position and absolute position transducer when the

absolute position transducer is used
0: Not corresponding
1: Corresponding

NOTE
When an absolute position transducer is used, after primary
adjustment is performed or after the absolute position
transducer is replaced, this parameter must be set to 0,
power must be turned off and on, then manual reference
position return must be performed. This completes the
positional correspondence between the machine position
and the position on the absolute position transducer, and
sets this parameter to 1 automatically.

1816 DM3x DM2x DM1x

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

Data type: Bit axis

DM1x to DM3x Setting of detection multiply
Set value
Detection m
mulyiply
lyiply
DM3x DM2x DM1x
0 0 0 1/2
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 3/2
0 1 1 2
1 0 0 5/2
1 0 1 3
1 1 0 7/2
1 1 1 4

NOTE
When the flexibly feed gear is used, do not use these
parameters. Set the numerator and denominator of DMR
to an appropriate values in parameters 2084 and 2085
respectively.

1820 Command multiply for each axis (CMR)

NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

683
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Data type: Byte axis

Set a command multiply indicating the ratio of the least command
increment to the detection unit for each axis.
Least command increment = detection unit command multiply
Relationship between the increment system and the least command
increment
Increment system IS-B IS-C Unit
Milimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Rotation axis 0.001 0.0001 deg

Setting command multiply (CMR), detection multiply (DMR), and

the capacity of the reference counter

+
CMR Error counter DA To velocity control
Least command * converter
increment

Feedback pulse
Reference DMR Position
counter Detection detector
unit

Fig.H.8 CMR, DMR, and the Capacity of the Reference Counter

Set the magnification ratios of CMR and DMR so that the weight of
positive inputs to the error counter equals that of negative inputs.
Least command increment/CMR = detection unit = feedback pulse
increment/DMR
The feedback pulse unit varies according to the type of transducer.
Feedback pulse unit = the amount of travel per rotation of the pulse
coder/the number of pulses per rotation of the pulse coder
As the size of the reference counter, specify the grid interval for return
to the reference position in the grid method.
Size of the reference counter = Grid interval/detection unit
Grid interval = the amount of travel per rotation of the pulse coder
The value set in the parameter is obtained as follows:
(1) When command multiply is 1/2 to 1/27
Set value + 1 ) 100
(Command multiply)
Valid data range: 102 to 127
(2) When command multiply is 1 to 48
Set value = 2 command multiply
Valid data range: 2 to 96

NOTE
When command multiply is 1 to 48, the set value must be
determined so that an integer can be set for command
multiply.

684
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

1821 Reference counter size for each axis

Data type: 2-word axis

Unit of data: Setting unit
Valid data range: 0 to 99999999
Set the size of the reference counter.

NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

1825 Servo loop gain for each axis

Data type: Word axis

Unit of data: 0.01 sec–1
Valid data range: 1 to 9999
Set the loop gain for position control for each axis.
When the machine performs linear or circular interpolation, the same
value must be set for all axes. When the machine requires positioning
only, the values set for the axes may differ from one another. As the
loop gain increases, the response by position control is improved. A
too large loop gain, however, makes the servo system unstable.
The relationship between the positioning deviation (the number of
pulses counted by the error counter) and the feedrate is expressed as
follows:
Positioning deviation = feedrate/60 (loop gain)
Unit: Positioning deviation mm, inches, or deg
Feedrate mm/min, inches/min, or deg/min
Loop gain s-1

1826 Inposition width for each axis

Data type: Word axis

Unit of data: Detection unit
Valid data range: 0 to 32767
The inposition width is set for each axis.
When the deviation of the machine position from the specified
position (the absolute value of the positioning deviation) is smaller
than the inposition width, the machine is assumed to have reached the
specified position. (The machine is in the inposition state.)

1827 Effective area for each axis in cutting feed

Data type: Word axis

Unit of data: Detection unit
Valid data range: 0 to 32767
An effective area in cutting feed is set for each axis. This parameter
functions when bit 4 (CCI) of parameter No. 1801 is set to 1.

685
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

1828 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in movement

Data type: 2-word axis

Unit of data: Detection unit
Valid data range: 0 to 99999999
Set the positioning deviation limit in movement for each axis.
If the positioning deviation exceeds the positioning deviation limit
during movement, a servo alarm is generated, and operation is
stopped immediately (as in emergency stop).
Generally, set the positioning deviation for rapid traverse plus some
margin in this parameter.

1829 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in the stopped state

Data type: Word axis

Unit of data: Detection unit
Valid data range: 0 to 32767
Set the positioning deviation limit in the stopped state for each axis.
If, in the stopped state, the positioning deviation exceeds the
positioning deviation limit set for movement, a servo alarm is
generated, and operation is stopped immediately (as in emergency
stop).

1832 Feed stop positioning deviation for each axis

Data type: 2-word axis

Unit of data: Detection unit
Valid data range: 0 to 99999999
Set the feed stop positioning deviation for each axis.
If the positioning deviation exceeds the feed stop positioning
deviation during movement, pulse distribution and
acceleration/deceleration control are stopped temporarily. When the
positioning deviation drops to the feed stop positioning deviation or
below, pulse distribution and acceleration/deceleration control are
resumed.
The feed stop function is used to reduce overshoot in
acceleration/deceleration mainly by large servo motors.
Generally, set the middle value between the positioning deviation
limit during movement and the positioning deviation at rapid traverse
as the feed stop positioning deviation.

1850 Grid shift for each axis

Data type: 2-word axis

Unit of data: Detection unit
Valid data range: 0 to
99999999
A grid shift is set for each axis.
To shift the reference position, the grid can be shifted by the amount
set in this parameter. Up to the maximum value counted by the
reference counter can be specified as the grid shift.

NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

686
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

1851 Backlash compensating value for each axis

Data type: Word axis

Unit of data: Detection unit
Valid data range:*9999 to +9999
Set the backlash compensating value for each axis.
When the unit moves in the direction opposite to the reference
position return direction after the power is turned on, the first
backlash compensation is performed.

1855 Current restriction override value for each axis

Data type: Byte axis

Valid data range: 0 to 255
Specify the current restriction override value for each axis. The actual
override value is determined by the following equation:
Override value = (parameter No. 1855) * 100/255 (%)

(Special Note)
When this value is set to 0, torque restriction is not performed
by this parame-ter. (In this case, the torque value set by the DI
signals and PMC go into effect.)

1872 Value for checking the degree of position deviation of the servo

Data type: 2–word axis

Valid data range: 0 to 99999999
Value for checking the degree of position deviation of the servo.
When the actual position deviation exceeds this value, signals
SVER1 and SVER2 go on.

1880 Abnormal alarm detection alarm timer

Data type: Word

Range of valid data:0 to 32767
(If 0 is specified, 200 ms is assumed to be
specified.)
This parameter specifies the time lag from when an abnormal load is
detected to when a servo
alarm is issued. A fractional time below 8 ms is rounded up.

NOTE
This parameter can be used only with the 1–path Power
Mate–D.

687
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

The following parameters are not explained in this manual, therefore see
parameter manual of servo for details;

No. Data type Contents

2000 Bit axis PGEXPD DGPRM PLC01
2001 Bit axis AMR7 AMR6 AMR5 AMR4 AMR3 AMR2 AMR1 AMR0
2002 Bit axis
2003 Bit axis VOFST OVSCMP BLENBL IPSPRS PIENBL OBENBL TGALRM
2004 Bit axis DLY1 DLY0 TRW1 TRW0 TIB0 TIA0
2005 Bit axis BRKCTL FEEDFD
2006 Bit axis DCBEMF NODEL PKVER
ACCFB
2007 Bit axis
2008 Bit axis
2009 Bit axis BLSTP BLCUT ADBLSH SERDMY
2010 Bit axis BLTEN
2011 Bit axis PLCRST
2012 Bit axis VCMD2 VCMD1 MSFEN
2013 Bit axis (Reserve)
2014 Bit axis (Reserve)
2015 Bit axis TDOUT SSG1 PGTWN
2016 Bit axis ABNTDT
2017 Bit axis (Reserve)
2018 Bit axis (Reserve)
2019 Bit axis
2020 Word axis Motor type
2021 Word axis Load intertia ratio (LDINT)
2022 Word axis Direction of motor rotation (DIRCTL)
2023 Word axis Number of velocity detection feedback pulses (PULCO)
2024 Word axis Number of position detection feedback pulses (PPLS)
2025 Word axis
2026 Word axis
2027 Word axis
2028 Word axis Position gain change effective speed(TWNSP)
2029 Word axis Acceleration effective speed for integral function at low speed (INTSP1)
2030 Word axis Deceleration effective speed for integral function at low speed (INTSP2)
2031 Word axis (Reserve)
2032 Word axis (Reserve)
2033 Word axis (Reserve)
2034 Word axis (Reserve)
2035 Word axis (Reserve)
2036 Word axis (Reserve)
2037 Word axis (Reserve)
2038 Word axis (Reserve)
2039 Word axis (Reserve)

688
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

No. Data type Contents

2040 Word axis Current loop gain (PK1)
2041 Word axis Current loop gain (PK2)
2042 Word axis Current loop gain (PK3)
2043 Word axis Velocity loop gain (PK1V)
2044 Word axis Velocity loop gain (PK2V)
2045 Word axis Incomplete integral coefficient (PK3V)
2046 Word axis Velocity loop gain (PK4V)
2047 Word axis Velocity control observer parameter (POA1)
2048 Word axis Improvement of velocity control backlash compensation (BLCMP)
2049 Word axis Not used
2050 Word axis Velocity control observer parameter (POK1)
2051 Word axis Velocity control observer parameter (POK2)
2052 Word axis Not used
2053 Word axis Compensation for current non–operating area (PRMAX)
2054 Word axis Compensation for current non–operating area (PDDP)
2055 Word axis Compensation for current non–operating area (PHYST)
2056 Word axis Back electromotive force compensation (EMFCMP)
2057 Word axis Current phase control (PVPA)
2058 Word axis Current phase control (PALPH)
2059 Word axis Back electromotive force compensation (EMFBAS)
2060 Word axis Torque limit (TQLIM)
2061 Word axis Back electromotive force compensation (EMFLMT)
2062 Word axis Overload protection coefficient (OVC1)
2063 Word axis Overload protection coefficient (OVC2)
2064 Word axis TG alarm level (TGALMLV)
2065 Word axis Overload protection coefficient (OVCLMT)
2066 Word axis PK2VAUX
2067 Word axis Torque command filter (TCFIL)
2068 Word axis Feed–forward coefficient (FALPH)
2069 Word axis Feed–forward filter coefficient (VFFLT)
2070 Word axis Backlash compensation acceleration parameter (ERBLN)
2071 Word axis Backlash compensation acceleration parameter (PBLCT)
2072 Word axis
2073 Word axis
2074 Word axis Velocity–dependent current loop gain (AALPH)
2075 Word axis
2076 Word axis Acceleration feedback gain (WKAC)
2077 Word axis Overshoot preventive counter (OSCTP)
2078 Word axis
2079 Word axis
2080 Word axis
2081 Word axis
2082 Word axis Backlash acceleration end amount (BLEND)

689
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

No. Data type Contents

2083 Word axis Brake control hold time (MOFCT)
2084 Word axis Numerator of DMR when the flexibly feed gear is used
2085 Word axis Denominator of DMR when the flexibly feed gear is used
2086 Word axis Rated current parameter (RTCURR)
2087 Word axis Torque offset (TCPRLD)
2088 Word axis Mechanical speed feedback coefficient (MCNFB)
2089 Word axis Base pulse in backslash acceleration (BLBSL)
2090 Word axis
2091 Word axis Non–linear control input (ACCSPL)
2092 Word axis Look–ahead feed forward coefficient (ADFF1)
2093 Word axis
2094 Word axis
2095 Word axis
2096 Word axis
2097 Word axis
2098 Word axis Phase progress compensation coefficient in deceleration (DEPVPL)
2099 Word axis 1 pulse suppress level (ONEPSL)
2100 Word axis
2101 Word axis
2102 Word axis
2103 Word axis Restored amount in abnormal load detection (ABVOF)
2104 Word axis Threshold in the alarm of abnormal load detection (ABTSH)

690
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

H.9
PARAMETERS OF 3001 MHI RWM STON

DI/DO #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

STON 0: Activate automatic operation when the automatic
operation activation signal (ST) goes from 1 to 0.
1: Activate automatic operation when the automatic
operation activation signal (ST) goes from 0 to 1.
RWM Specifies how the rewind in-progress signal (RWD) is to be
output.
0: The RWD signal is output with the reset and rewind signal
(RRW) only when the tape reader is being rewound.
1: The RWD signal is output with the reset and rewind signal
(RRW) when the tape reader is being rewound or
programs in memory are being rewound.
MHI Exchange of strobe and completion signals for the M, S, and
T code.
0: Normal (FIN : G004.3 is used)
1: High-speed (MFIN : G005.0 is used, SFIN : G005.2 is
used, TFIN : G005.3 is used.)

3003 DEC DIT ITX HITL ITL

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

ITL Interlock signal
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
HITL High-speed interlock signal
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
ITX Interlock signals for the axes
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
DIT Interlock for each axis direction
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
DEC Deceleration signal (*DEC1 to *DEC2) for manual reference
position return
0: Deceleration is applied when the signal is 0.
1: Deceleration is applied when the signal is 1.

691
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

3005 BSKIP4 BSKP3 BSKP2 BDEC BSKP

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

BSKP 0: Do not use SKIP signal when using internal I/O.
1: Use SKIP signal when using internal I/O.
BDEC 0: Do not use *DEC signal when using internal I/O.
1: Use *DEC signal when using internal I/O.
BSKP2 0: Do not use SKIP2 signal when using internal I/O.
1: Use SKIP2 signal when using internal I/O.
BSKP3 0: Do not use SKIP3 signal when using internal I/O.
1: Use SKIP3 signal when using internal I/O.
BSKIP4 0: Do not use SKIP4 signal (neither internal nor external
I/O).
1: Use SKIP4 signal (both internal and external I/O).

NOTE
When above signals are set as unused , its are able to use
for others.

3010 Time lag in strobe signal MF, SF, TF

Data type: Word

Unit of data: 1 ms
Valid data range: 16 to 32767
The time required to change strobe signals MF, SF, or TF after the M,
S, or T code is sent, respectively.

M, S, T code

MF, SF, TF signal

Delay time

Fig.H.9 (a) Delay Time of the Strobe Signal

NOTE
The time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is not
a multiple of eight, it is raised to the next multiple of eight.
[Example] When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed.
When 32 is set, 32 ms is assumed.
When 100 is set, 104 ms is assumed.

692
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

3011 Acceptable width of M, S, or T function completion signal (FIN)

Data type: Word

Unit of data: 1 ms
Valid data range: 16 to 32767
Set the minimum signal width of the valid M, S, or T function
completion signal (FIN).

M, S, or T
code

MF, SF, or TF
signal

FIN signal

Ignored because shorter Valid because longer

than min. signal width than min. signal width

Fig.H.9 (b) Valid Width of the FIN (M, S, and T Function Completion) Signal

NOTE
The time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is not
a multiple of eight, it is raised to the next multiple of eight.
[Example] When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed.

3016 Clamped value for manual feedrate override

Data type: 2–word

Unit of data: 0.01%
Valid data range: 0 to 65534
This parameter specifies the clamped value for manual feedrate
override. When the entered manual feedrate override is greater than
the value specified by this parameter, it is clamped to this value.

NOTE
Manual feedrate override is input using the manual feedrate
override signal (*JV0 to *JV15).

693
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

3017 Output time of reset signal RST

Data type: Byte

Unit of data: 16 ms
Valid data range: 0 to 255
To extend the output time of reset signal RST, the time to be added
is specified in this parameter.
RST signal output time = time required for reset + parameter value
16 ms

3030 Allowable number of digits for the M code

3031 Allowable number of digits for the S code

3032 Allowable number of digits for the T code

Data type: Byte

Valid data range: 1 to 8
Set the allowable numbers of digits for the M, S, or T code.

NOTE
M800/M900-level codes are used in waiting function for
other codes or simultaneous block start function.

694
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

H.10
PARAMETERS OF 3102 SPN ITA FRN GRM JPN

CRT/MDI, DISPLAY, #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

AND EDIT Data type: Bit

NOTE
1 When this parameter is set, turn off the power once. Then
turn it on for machining.
2 German, French, Italian, or Spanish can be used only when
the corresponding option is specified.

The language used in the display on the CRT is selected.

#6 #4 #2 #1 #0 CRT display
SPN ITA FRN GRM JPN language
0 0 0 0 0 English
0 0 0 0 1 Japanese
0 0 0 1 0 German
0 0 1 0 0 French
0 1 0 0 0 Italian
1 0 0 0 0 Spanish

3104 DAL DRL PPD MCN

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

MCN Machine position
0: Not displayed according to the unit of input.
(Regardless of whether input is made in mm or inches, the
machine position is displayed in mm for millimeter
machines, or in inches for inch machines.)
1: Displayed according to the unit of input.
(When input is made in mm, the machine position is
displayed in mm, and when input is made in inches, the
machine position is displayed in inches accordingly.)
PPD Relative position display when a coordinate system is set
0: Not preset
1: Preset

NOTE
When PPD is set to 1 and the absolute position display is
preset by one of the following, the relative position display
is also preset to the same value as the absolute position
display:
1 Manual return to the reference position
2 Setting of a coordinate system by G92
This parameter cannot be used with the Power Mate–F.

695
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

DRL Relative position

0: The actual position displayed takes into account tool
length compensation.
1: The programmed position displayed does not take into
account tool length compensation.

NOTE
This parameter cannot be used with the Power Mate–F.

DAL Absolute position

0: The actual position displayed takes into account tool
length compensation.
1: The programmed position displayed does not take into
account tool length compensation.

3105 DPS PCF DPF

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

DPF Display of the actual speed on the current position display
screen and program check screen of CRT
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
PCF Addition of the movement of the PMC-controlled axes to the
actual speed display
0: Added
1: Not added
DPS Specifies whether the actual spindle speed and T code are
constantly displayed when a CRT is being used.
0: Not displayed constantly
1: Displayed constantly

3107 MDL SOR NAM

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

NAM Program list of CRT
0: Only program numbers are indicated.
1: Program numbers and program names are indicated.
SOR Display of the program directory of CRT
0: Programs are listed in the order of registration.
1: Programs are listed in the order of program number.
MDL Specifies whether the continuous state is to be displayed on
the program display screen of CRT.
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed (in the MDI mode only)

696
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

3108 CMD2 CMDS

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

CMDS In current position display
0: The axes for each path are displayed.
1: The axes for two paths are displayed.

NOTE
This parameter must be set for each path. This parameter
can be used only with the 2–path Power Mate–D.

CMD2
0: Switching to the second path is performed.
1: Switching to the second path is not performed.

NOTE
This parameter can be used only with the 2–path Power
Mate–D.

3109 PDM SFM

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

SFM Specifies which page of the pattern data input screen selection
soft key menu is to be displayed
0: Page 2 of the offset/setting screen, as usual
1: Page 1 of the offset/setting screen

NOTE
See Sec. H.19 for details of pattern date input screen.
Pattern data can be used only when a CRT, PDP, or LCD is
available.

PDM Specifies whether a position display unit is to be used.

0: A position display unit is not used.
1: A position display unit is used.

NOTE
This parameter can be used only with the 1–path Power
Mate–D.

697
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

3111 NPA MSC SVP SPS SVS

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

SVS Servo setting screen of CRT
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
SPS Specifies whether the spindle setting screen is displayed on
the CRT.
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
SVP Specifies how a synchronization error is displayed on the
spindle adjustment screen of the CRT.
0: A momentary value is displayed.
1: A peak hold value is displayed.
MSC Specifies whether a message displayed on the DPL/MDI
panel is to be cleared when the setting of the operator message
display request memory is changed from 1 to 0 with the
external message function that uses function command
DISPB.
0: Cleared
1: Not cleared

NOTE
When MSCL is set to 1, message data must end with
@03@.

NPA Action taken when an alarm is generated or when an operator

message is entered
0: The display shifts to the alarm or message screen.
1: The display does not shift to the alarm or message screen.

3131 Axis name subscript

Data type: Byte

Valid data range: 0 to 225
Set a subscript (one character) as the character code for the name of
each axis.
On the current position display screen, a subscript (one character)
specified using this parameter is displayed after an axis name to identify
the path to which a displayed coordinate along an axis belongs.

NOTE
1 This parameter must be set for each path.
2 For details of the character codes, see the character code
correspondence table.
3 When character code 0 is set, ”1” or ”2” is displayed.
4 This parameter can be used only with the 2–path Power
Mate–D.

698
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

3170 CRTMAX

Data type: Byte

Valid data range: 0 to 16
CRTMAX When a single CRT/MDI is used with multiple Power
Mate–D, the number of Power Mates connected is
specified in this parameter. Set the parameter only two
equipment No. 0. By setting this parameter to 0, two
Power Mates can be connected.

3171 EQUPA

L L
3176 EQUPF

Data type: Byte

EQUPA, B, C, D, E, F
This parameter specifies up to six characters of the equipment
name. When a CRT/MDI is used with multiple Power Mates,
the specified name appears on the screen.

NOTE
When the 2–path Power Mate–D is being used, a specified
character acts as a character code for a path name. A
parameter must be set for each path.

3201 NPE REP RAL RDL

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

RDL When a program is registered by input/output device external
control
0: The new program is registered following the programs
already registered.
1: All registered programs are deleted, then the new program
is registered. (Note that programs which are protected
from being edited are not deleted.)
RAL Program registration by the reader/puncher interface
0: All programs are registered.
1: Only one program is registered.
REP Action in response to an attempt to register a program whose
number is the same as that of an existing program
0: An alarm is generated.
1: The existing program is deleted, then the new program is
registered. Note that if the existing program is protected
from being edited, it is not deleted, and an alarm is
generated.
NPE M02, M30, and M99 at program registration
0: Completion of registration is assumed.
1: Completion of registration is not assumed.

699
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

3202 PSR NE9 NE8

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

NE8 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 8000 to 8999
0: Not inhibited
1: Inhibited
The following edit operations are disabled:
1 Program deletion (Even when deletion of all
programs is specified, programs with program
numbers 8000 to 8999 are not deleted.)
2 Program punching (Even when punching of all
programs is specified, programs with program
numbers 8000 to 8999 are not punched.)
3 Program number search
4 Program editing after registration
5 Program registration
6 Program collation
7 Displaying programs
NE9 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 9000 to 9999
0: Not inhibited
1: Inhibited
The following edit operations are disabled:
1 Program deletion (Even when deletion of all
programs is specified, programs with program
numbers 9000 to 9999 are not deleted.)
2 Program punching (Even when punching of all
programs is specified, programs with program
numbers 9000 to 9999 are not punched.)
3 Program number search
4 Program editing after registration
5 Program registration
6 Program collation
7 Displaying programs
PSR Search for the program number of a protected program
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

3203 MCL

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

MCL Specifies whether a program created in the MDI mode is to be
cleared upon system reset.
0: Not cleared
1: Cleared

700
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

3204 CEX

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

CEX Input character expansion function of CRT (”@”, ”(”, and ”)”
can be entered using soft keys.)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

3216 Increment in sequence numbers inserted automatically

Setting entry is acceptable.

Data type: Word
Valid data range: 0 to 9999
Set the increment for sequence numbers for automatic sequence
number insertion (when SEQ, #5 of parameter 0000, is set to 1.)

3290 KEY MCV

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

MCV Input of macro variables with MDI keys
0: Not inhibited
1: Inhibited
KEY 0: Signals KEY1 to KEY4 are used for memory protection.
1: KEY1 is used to protect a parts program. Note than when
this parameter is used, tool compensation values,
settings, and macro variables are no longer protected by
the memory protect key.

701
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

H.11
PARAMETERS OF 3401 ABS MAB DPI

PROGRAMS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

DPI When a decimal point is omitted in an address that can include
a decimal point
0: The least input increment is assumed.
1: The unit of mm, inches, or s is assumed. (Pocket
calculator type decimal point input)
MAB Specifies whether absolute/incremental command switching
is to be performed in MDI operation by G90/G91 or by the
setting of the ABS bit of parameter No. 3401.
0: By G90/G91
1: By the setting of the ABS bit of parameter No. 3401
ABS Specifies whether to regard a programmed command as an
incremental command or absolute command in MDI
operation.
0: Regarded as an incremental command
1: Regarded as an absolute command

NOTE
ABS functions when the MAB bit of parameter No. 3401 is
set to 1.

3402 CLR G91 G19 G18 G01

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

G01 Mode entered when the power is turned on or when the control
is cleared
0: G00 mode (positioning)
1: G01 mode (linear interpolation)
G18 and G19 Plane selected when power is turned on or when the
control is cleared
G19 G18 G17, G18, or G19 mode
0 0 G17 mode (plane XY)
0 1 G18 mode (plane ZX)
1 0 G19 mode (plane YZ)

G91 When the power is turned on or when the control is cleared

0: G90 mode (absolute command)
1: G91 mode (incremental command)
CLR Reset button on the CRT/MDI panel, external reset signal,
reset and rewind signal, and emergency stop
0: Cause reset state.
1: Cause clear state.

702
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

3404 EOR M02

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

M02 When M02 is specified in memory operation
0: M02 is sent to the machine, and the program is positioned
at its beginning automatically. As completion signal FIN
is returned without resetting or without resetting and
rewinding, the program is restarted from the beginning.
1: M02 is only sent to the machine. The program is
positioned at its beginning by the reset and rewind signal.
EOR 0: An alarm is issued (PS5010, program end) when an EOR
(%, or end of record) is read during program execution.
1: An alarm is not issued (automatic operation stops and a
reset occurs) when an EOR (%, or end of record) is read
during program execution.

3410 Tolerance of arc radius

Data type: 2-word

Unit of data:
Increment system IS-B IS-C Unit
Input in mm 0.001 0.0001 mm
Input in inches 0.0001 0.00001 inch

Valid data range: 1 to 99999999

When a circular interpolation command (G02, G03) is executed, the
tolerance for the radius between the start point and the end point is set.
If the difference of radii between the start point and the end point
exceeds the tolerance set here, an alarm is informed.

NOTE
When the set value is 0, the difference of radii is not
checked.
This parameter can be specified only when the 1–path
Power Mate–D with two controlled axes is being used.

3411 M code preventing buffering 1

3412 M code preventing buffering 2

3413 M code preventing buffering 3

L L
3420 M code preventing buffering 10

Data type: Byte

Valid data range: 0 to 255
Set M codes that prevent buffering the following blocks. If
processing directed by an M code must be performed by the machine
without buffering the following block, specify the M code.
M00, M01, M02, and M30 always prevent buffering even when they
are not specified in these parameters.

703
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

H.12
PARAMETERS OF 3620
Number of the pitch error compensation point for the reference position for
each axis
PITCH ERROR
COMPENSATION Data type: Word axis
Unit of data: Number
Valid data range: 0 to 1023
Set the number of the pitch error compensation position for the
reference position for each axis.

Pitch error compensation amount (absolute value)

2
Reference position

–1

–2

Compensation point number 31 32 33 34 35 36 37

Set compensating value +3 –1 –1 +1 +2 –1 –3

Fig.H.12 Pitch Error Compensation Point Number Corresponding To

Reference Point

In the above example, set 33 as the number of the pitch error

compensation point for the reference position.

Number of the pitch error compensation point at extremely negative posi-

3621
tion each axis

Data type: Word axis

Unit of data: Number
Valid data range: 0 to 1023
Set the the number of the pitch error compensation point at the
extremely negative position for each axis.

Number of the pitch error compensation point at extremely positive position

3622
each axis

Data type: Word axis

Unit of data: Number
Valid data range: 0 to 1023
Set the number of the pitch error compensation point at the extremely
positive position for each axis.

704
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

3623 Magnification for pitch error compensation for each axis

Data type: Byte axis

Unit of data: 1
Valid data range: 0 to 100
Set the magnification for pitch error compensation for each axis.
If the magnification is set to 1, the same unit as the detection unit is
used for the compensation data.

3624 Magnification for pitch error compensation for each axis

Data type: 2-word axis

Unit of data:

Increment system IS-B IS-C Unit

Input in mm 0.001 0.0001 mm
Input in inches 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Rotation axis 0.001 0.0001 deg

Valid data range: 0 to 99999999

The pitch error compensation points are arranged with equally
spaced. Set the space between two adjacent points for each axis.
The minimum interval between pitch error compensation points is
limited and obtained from the following equation:
Minimum interval of pitch error compensation points = maximum
feedrate (rapid traverse rate)/7500
Unit: mm, inches, deg, or mm/min, inches/min, deg/min
[Example]
When the maximum rapid traverse rate is 15000 mm/min, the
minimum interval between pitch error compensation points is 2 mm.
Examples of parameters
(Example 1) For linear axis
D Machine stroke: –400 mm to +800 mm
D Interval between the pitch error compensation points: 50 mm
D No. of the compensation point of the reference position: 40
If the above is specified, the No. of the farthest compensation point
in the negative direction is as follows:
No. of the compensation point of the reference position –
(Machine stroke length in the negative direction/Interval between
the compensation points) + 1
= 40 – 400/50 + 1
= 33
No. of the farthest compensation point in the positive direction is as
follows:
No. of the compensation point of the reference position +
(Machine stroke length in the positive direction/Interval between
the compensation points)
= 40 + 800/50
= 56

705
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

The correspondence between the machine coordinate and the

compensation point No. is as follows:

–400 –350 –100 –50 0 50 100 750 800

Machine
coordinate
(mm)

Compensa-
tion point
33 39 40 41 42 56

The compensation amount is output at the compensation point No.

corresponding to each section between the coordinates.
The following is an example of the compensation amounts.
No. 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
Compensation amount +2 +1 +1 –2 0 –1 0 –1 +2 +1 0 –1 –1 –2 0 +1 +2

Pitch error compensation amount (absolute value)

+4

+3

+2

Reference position +1

–400 –300 –200 –100 0 100 200 300 400 (mm)

–1
–2

–3

–4

(Example 2) For the rotating axis

D Amount of movement per rotation: 360_
D Interval between pitch error compensation points: 45_
D No. of the compensation point of the reference position: 60
If the above is specified, the No. of the farthest compensation point
in the negative direction for the rotating axis is always equal to the
compensation point No. of the reference position.
The No. of the farthest compensation point in the positive direction
is as follows:
No. of the compensation point of the reference position + (Move
amount per rotation/Interval between the compensation points)
= 60 + 360/45
= 68

706
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

The correspondence between the machine coordinate and the

compensation point No. is as follows:

Reference position 0.0 The compensation amount is output at the circled

position.

45.0 If the sum of the compensation amount from 61 to

315.0
(61) (68) 68 is not zero, the pitch error per rotation accumu-
(60) lates, resulting in a positional shift.
(62) (67) For compensation point 60, set the same com-
pensation amount as for 68.
90.0 270.0
+
(63) (66)

(64) (65)
135.0 225.0

180.0

The following is an example of compensation amounts.

No. of the compensation point 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
Compensation amount +1 –2 +1 +3 –1 –1 –3 +2 +1

Pitch error compensation amount

(absolute value)
+4

+3 Reference position

+2

+1

90 135 180 225 270 315 0 45 90 135 180 225 270 315 0 45 (deg)

–1

–2

–3

–4

707
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

H.13
PARAMETERS OF 3701 ISI

SPINDLE CONTROL #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

ISI: Specifies whether the serial spindle interface is used.
0: Used
1: Not used

NOTE
This parameter is enabled only when the serial spindle
interface module is provided. The parameter is used when
the NC is started after serial spindle interface control is
temporarily disabled during startup adjustment of the NC.
This bit is normally set to 0.

3702 OR1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

OR1: Whether the stop-position external-setting type orientation
function is used by the first spindle motor
0: Not used
1: Used

3705 SFA NSF SGT SGB GST ESF

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

ESF: When the spindle control function (S analog outpu or S serial
output) is used, and the constant surface speed control
function is used:
0 : S codes and SF are output for all S commands.
1 : S codes and SF are not output for an S command in
constant surface speed control mode (G96 mode).

NOTE
SF is not output in the following cases, regardless of the
setting of this parameter:
(1) For an S command used to specify maximum spindle
speed clamping (G92S–––;) in constant surface
speed control mode
(2) When bit 5 (NSF) of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1

GST: The SOR signal is used for:

0: Spindle orientation
1: Gear shift

708
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

SGB: Gear switching method

0: Method A (Parameters 3741 to 3743 for the maximum
spindle speed at each gear are used for gear selection.)
1: Method B (Parameters 3751 and 3752 for the spindle
speed at the gear switching point are used for gear
selection.)
SGT: Gear switching method during tapping cycle (G84 and G74)
0: Method A (Same as the normal gear switching method)
1: Method B (Gears are switched during tapping cycle
according to the spindle speed set in parameters 3761 and
3762.)
NSF: When an S code command is issued in constant surface speed
control,
0 : SF is output.
1 : SF is not output.
SFA: The SF signal is output:
0: When gears are switched
1: Irrespective of whether gears are switched

3706 TCW CWM ORM PG2 PG1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

PG2 and PG1: Gear ratio of spindle to position coder
Magnification PG2 PG1
1 0 0
2 0 1
4 1 0
8 1 1

Number of spindle revolutions

Magnification

Number of position coder revolutions
ORM: Voltage polarity during spindle orientation
0: Positive
1: Negative
TCW and CWM: Voltage polarity when the spindle speed voltage is
output
TCW CWM Voltage polarity
0 0 Both M03 and M04 positive
0 1 Both M03 and M04 negative
1 0 M03 positive, M04 negative
1 1 M03 negative, M04 positive

709
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

3708 SAR

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

SAR: The spindle speed arrival signal is:
0: Not checked
1: Checked

3730 Data used for adjusting the gain of the analog output of spindle speed

Data type: Word

Unit of data: 0.1 %
Valid data range: 700 to 1250
Set data used for adjusting the gain of the analog output of spindle
speed.
(Adjustment method)
(1) Assign standard value 1000 to the parameter.
(2) Specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the
spindle speed is the maximum voltage (10 V).
(3) Measure the output voltage.
(4) Assign the value obtained by the following equation to
parameter No. 3730.
10 (V)
Set value= 1000
Measured data (V)
(5) After setting the parameter, specify the spindle speed so that
the analog output of the spindle speed is the maximum
voltage. Confirm that the output voltage is 10 V

NOTE
This parameter needs not to be set for serial spindles.

Compensation value for the offset voltage of the analog output of the
3731
spindle speed

Data type: Word

Unit of data: Velo
Valid data range: –1024 to +1024
Set compesation value for the offset voltage of the analog output of
the spindle speed.
-8191 Offset voltage (V)
Set value=
12.5
(Adjustment method)
(1) Assign standard value 0 to the parameter.
(2) Specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the
spindle speed is 0.
(3) Measure the output voltage.
(4) Assign the value obtained by the following equation to
parameter No. 3731.
-8191 Offset voltage (V)
Set value=
12.5

710
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

(5) After setting the parameter, specify the spindle speed so that
the analog output of the spindle speed is 0. Confirm that the
output voltage is 0 V.

NOTE
This parameter need not to be set for serial spindles.

The number of spindle revolutions during spindle orientation or the spindle

3732
motor velocity during spindle gear shift

Data type: 2 words

Valid data range: 0 to 20000
Set the spindle speed during spindle orientation or the spindle motor
speed during gear shift.
When GST, #1 of parameter 3705, is set to 0, set the spindle speed
during spindle orientation in rpm.
When GST, #1 of parameter 3705, is set to 1, set the spindle motor
speed during spindle gear shift calculated from the following
formula.
For a serial spindle
Spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift
Set value= 16383
Maximum spindle motor speed
For an analog spindle
Spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift
Set value= 4095
Maximum spindle motor speed

3735 Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor

Data type: Word

Valid data range: 0 to 4095
Set the minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor.
Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor
Set value= 4095
Maximum spindle motor speed

3736 Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor

Data type: Word

Valid data range: 0 to 4095
Set the minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor.
Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor
Set value= 4095
Maximum spindle motor speed

711
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Spindle motor speed

Max. output
(4095, 10 V)
Spindle motor
max. clamp speed
(parameter No. 3736)

Spindle motor
min. clamp speed
Spindle speed
(parameter No. 3735)
command
(S command)

Fig.H.13 (a) Maximum Clamp Speed of Spindle Motor

3740 Time elapsed prior to checking the spindle speed arrival signal

Data type: Byte

Unit of data: ms
Valid data range: 0 to 255
Set the time elapsed from the execution of the S function up to the
checking of the spindle speed arrival signal.

3741 Maximum spindle speed for gear 1

3742 Maximum spindle speed for gear 2

3743 Maximum spindle speed for gear 3

Data type: Word

Unit of data: rpm
Valid data range: 0 to 32767
Set the maximum spindle speed corresponding to each gear.

Spindle motor speed

Max. output
(4095, 10 V)
Spindle motor
max. clamp speed
(parameter No. 3736)

Spindle motor
min. clamp speed
(parameter No. 3735)
Spindle speed command
Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3 (S command)
max. speed max. speed max. speed

Fig.H.13 (b) Maximum Spindle Speed Corresponding to Gear 1/2/3

712
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

3751 Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2

3752 Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 2 to gear 3

Data type: Word

Valid data range: 0 to 4095
For gear switching method B, set the spindle motor speed when the
gears are switched.
Spindle motor speed when the gears are switched
Set value= 4095
Maximum spindle motor speed

Spindle motor speed command

Max. output (4095, 10 V)

Spindle motor max. clamp speed Parameter No.3736

Speed at gear 2-3 change point Parameter No.3752

Speed at gear 1-2 change point Parameter No.3751

Spindle motor min. clamp speed Parameter No.3735

Spindle speed
Max. speed Max. speed Max. speed command
at gear 1 at gear 2 at gear 3 (S command)
parameter parameter parameter
No.3741 No.3742 No.3743

Gear 1-2 Gear 2–3

change point change point

Fig.H.13 (c) Spindle Motor Speed at Gear 1-2/2-3 Change Point

713
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

3761 Spindle speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2 during tapping

3762 Spindle speed when switching from gear 2 to gear 3 during tapping

Data type: Word

Unit of data: rpm
Valid data range: 0 to 32767
When method B is selected (SGT,#3 of parameter 3705, is set to 1)
for the tapping cycle gear switching method, set the spindle speed
when the gears are switched.

Spindle motor speed

Max. output (4095, 10 V)

Spindle motor max. clamp speed

(parameter No. 3736)

Spindle motor min. clamp speed

(parameter No. 3735)

Spindle speed
Max. speed Max. speed Max. speed command
at gear 1 at gear 2 at gear 3 (S command)
parameter parameter parameter
No.3741 No.3742 No.3743

Speed at gear 2-3 Speed at gear 1-2

change point change point
parameter parameter
No.3761 No.3762

Fig.H.13 (d) Spindle Speed at Gear 1-2/2-3 Change Point During Tapping

3770 Axis as the calculation reference in constant surface speed control

Data type: Byte

Valid data range: 0, 1, 2, 3, ..., number of control axes
Set the axis as the calculation reference in constant surface speed
control.

NOTE
When 0 is set, constant surface speed control is always
applied to the X–axis. In this case, specifying P in a G96
block has no effect on the constant surface speed control.

714
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

3771 Minimum spindle speed in constant surface speed control mode (G96)

Data type: Word

Unit of data: rpm
Valid data range: 0 to 32767
Set the minimum spindle speed in the constant surface speed control
mode (G96).
The spindle speed in constant surface speed control is clamped to the
speed given by parameter 3771.

3772 Maximum spindle speed

Data type: Word

Unit of data: rpm
Valid data range: 0 to 32767
This parameter sets the maximum spindle speed.
When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum speed
of the spindle is specified , or the speed of the spindle exceeds the
maximum speed because of the spindle speed override function, the
spindle speed is clamped at the maximum speed set in the parameter.

NOTE
1 This parameter is valid when the constant surface speed
control option is selected.
2 When the constant surface speed control option is
selected, the spindle speed is clamped at the maximum
speed, regardless of whether the G96 mode or G97 mode
is specified.
3 When 0 is set in this parameter, the speed of the spindle
is not clamped.
4 When spindle speed command control is applied using the
PMC, this parameter has no effect, and the spindle speed
is not clamped.

715
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Table H.13 (a) Parameters for Serial Interface S Series Spindle Amplifier (1/4)

No. Data type Description

4000 Bit Bit parameter
4001 Bit Bit parameter
4002 Bit Bit parameter
4003 Bit Bit parameter
4004 Bit Bit parameter
4005 Bit Bit parameter
4006 Bit Bit parameter
4007 Bit Bit parameter
4008 Bit Bit parameter
4009 Bit Bit parameter
4010 Bit Bit parameter
4011 Bit Bit parameter
4012 Bit Bit parameter
4013 Bit Bit parameter
4014 Bit Bit parameter
4015 Bit Bit parameter (Not specifiable by the user (See Note 1))
4016 Bit Bit parameter
4017 Bit Bit parameter
4018 Bit Bit parameter
4019 Bit Bit parameter (For automatic parameter setting (See Note 2))
4020 Word Maximum motor speed
4022 Word Speed arrival level
4023 Word Speed detection level
4024 Word Zero speed detection level
4025 Word Torque limit setting
4026 Word Load detection level 1
4027 Word Load detection level 2
4028 Word Output limit pattern setting
4029 Word Output limit
4030 Word Soft start/stop time
4031 Word Stop position in orientation by a position coder
4036 Word Feed-forward factor
4037 Word Feed-forward factor of the velocity loop
4038 Word Reserved
4039 Word Reserved
4040 Word Normal velocity loop proportional gain (HIGH)
4041 Word Normal velocity loop proportional gain (LOW)
4042 Word Velocity loop proportional gain during orientation (HIGH)
4043 Word Velocity loop proportional gain during orientation (LOW)
4044 Word Velocity loop proportional gain in servo mode/synchronous control (HIGH)
4045 Word Velocity loop proportional gain in servo mode/synchronous control (LOW)
4048 Word Normal velocity loop integral gain (HIGH)
4049 Word Normal velocity loop integral gain (LOW)

716
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

Table H.13 (a) Parameters for Serial Interface S Series Spindle Amplifier (2/4)

No. Data type Description

4050 Word Velocity loop integral gain during orientation (HIGH)
4051 Word Velocity loop integral gain during orientation (LOW)
4052 Word Velocity loop integral gain in servo mode/synchronous control (HIGH)
4053 Word Velocity loop integral gain in servo mode/synchronous control (LOW)
4056 Word Gear ratio (HIGH)
4057 Word Gear ratio (MEDIUM HIGH)
4058 Word Gear ratio (MEDIUM LOW)
4059 Word Gear ratio (LOW)
4060 Word Position gain during orientation (HIGH)
4061 Word Position gain during orientation (MEDIUM HIGH)
4062 Word Position gain during orientation (MEDIUM LOW)
4063 Word Position gain during orientation (LOW)
4064 Word Position gain change ratio when orientation is completed
4065 Word Position gain in servo mode/synchronous control (HIGH)
4066 Word Position gain in servo mode/synchronous control (MEDIUM HIGH)
4067 Word Position gain in servo mode/synchronous control (MEDIUM LOW)
4068 Word Position gain in servo mode/synchronous control (LOW)
4073 Word Grid shift amount in servo mode
4074 Word Reserved
4075 Word Orientation completion signal detection level
4076 Word Motor velocity limit value during orientation
4077 Word Orientation stop position shift amount
4078 Word MS signal constant = (L/2)/(2
π
H)
4096
4079 Word MS signal gain adjustment
4080 Word Regenerative power limit
4081 Word Delay time prior motor power shut-off
4082 Word Acceleration/deceleration time setting
4083 Word Motor voltage during normal rotation
4084 Word Motor voltage during orientation
4085 Word Motor voltage in servo mode/synchronous control
4087 Word Over-speed level
4088 Word Excessive velocity deviation detection level when the motor is constrained
4089 Word Excessive velocity deviation detection level when the motor is rotated
4090 Word Overload detection level
4091 Word Position gain change ratio when returning to the origin in the servo mode
4093 Word Estimated acceleration constant
4094 Word Disturbance torque compensation constant
4095 Word Speed meter output voltage adjustment value
4096 Word Load meter output voltage adjustment value
4097 Word Spindle velocity feedback gain
4098 Word Maximum speed at which one-rotation signal can be detected
4099 Word Delay time for energizing the motor

717
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Table H.13 (a) Parameters for Serial Interface S Series Spindle Amplifier (3/4)

No. Data type Description

4100 Word Base velocity of the motor output specification
4101 Word Limit value for the motor output specification
4102 Word Base speed
4103 Word Magnetic flux weakening start velocity
4104 Word Current loop proportional gain during normal operation
4106 Word Current loop integral gain during normal operation
4108 Word Zero point of current loop integral gain
4109 Word Current loop proportional gain velocity factor
4110 Word Current conversion constant
4111 Word Secondary current factor for exciting current
4112 Word Current expectation constant
4113 Word Slip constant
4114 Word High-speed rotation slip compensation constant
4115 Word Compensation constant of voltage applied to motor in the dead zone
4116 Word Electromotive force compensation constant
4117 Word Electromotive force phase compensation constant
4118 Word Electromotive force compensation velocity factor
4119 Word Reserved
4120 Word Dead zone compensation data
4121 Word Time constant for changing the torque
4122 Word Time constant for velocity detection filter
4123 Word Overload detection time setting
4124 Word Reserved
4125 Word Timer during automatic running
4126 Word Velocity command during automatic running
4127 Word Load meter displayed value for maximum output
4128 Word Maximum output zero point
4129 Word Secondary current factor during rigid tapping
4130 Word Constant for compensating for the phase of the electromotive force at deceleration
4132 Word Conversion constant of the phase-V current
4133 Word Motor model code
4134 2-Word Reserved
4136 Word Motor voltage during normal rotation
4137 Word Motor voltage in the servo mode/synchronous control mode
4138 Word Base speed of the motor output specifications
4139 Word Limit value for the motor output specifications
4140 Word Base speed
4141 Word Magnetic flux weakening start velocity
4142 Word Current loop proportional gain during normal operation
4143 Word Current loop integral gain during normal operation
4144 2-Word Zero point of the current loop integral gain
4145 2-Word Velocity factor of the current loop proportional gain

718
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

Table H.13 (a) Parameters for Serial Interface S Series Spindle Amplifier (4/4)

No. Data type Description

4146 Word Current conversion constant
4147 Word Secondary current factor for activating current
4148 Word Current expectation constant
4149 Word Slip constant
4150 Word High-speed rotation slip compensation constant
4151 Word Compensation constant for voltage applied to motor in the dead zone
4152 Word Electromotive force compensation constant
4153 Word Electromotive force phase compensation constant
4154 Word Velocity factor of the electromotive force compensation
4155 Word Reserved
4156 Word Reserved
4157 Word Time constant for changing the torque
4158 Word Maximum output zero point
4159 Word Secondary current factor during rigid tapping
4160 Word Hysteresis of the speed detection level
4161 Word Constant for compensating for the phase of the electromotive for at deceleration
4164 Word Conversion constant of phase-V current
4165 Word Reserved
4166 Word Reserved
4167 Word Reserved
4168 Word Reserved
4169 Word Reserved
4170 Word Reserved
4171 Word Reserved
4172 Word Reserved
4173 Word Reserved
4174 Word Reserved
4175 Word Reserved

719
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Notes on parameters of the spindle amplifier with the serial interface

NOTE
1 Among the parameters of the spindle amplifier with the
serial interface, parameters Nos. 4015 and 4191 cannot be
changed by the users.
These parameters require to assign optional software to the
CNC and are automatically set depending on the type of the
software.
2 To set the parameters of the spindle amplifier with the serial
interface automatically, set #7 of parameter No. 4019 (if the
sub spindle is set in the CNC with the spindle switching
function, use parameter No. 4195) to 1, assign the model
code of the motor to be used to parameter No. 4133 (if the
sub spindle is set in the CNC with the spindle switching
function, use parameter No. 4309), turn off the power of the
CNC and spindle control unit, and restart the CNC and
spindle control unit.
3 Parameters No. 4000 to No. 4351 are used in the
processing on the spindle control unit. See the materials
describing the spindle amplifier with the serial interface for
detail.
4 Parameters of the spindle amplifier with the serial interface
correspond to the above functions as follows:
1) Parameter No. 4000 to No. 4351 ”S1”: First spindle
control amplifier
2) Parameter No. 4000 to No. 4175 ”S1” : When the spindle
switching function is not provided, or for the main spindle
in the spindle control unit when the function is provided.
Parameter No. 4176 to No. 4351 ”S1”.
3) Parameters at low speed when the output switching
function is provided.
Parameters No. 4136 to No. 4175 ”S1”: When the spindle
switching function is not provided, or for the main spindle
when the function is provided.
5 The CNC stores the parameters of the spindle amplifier with
the serial interface. The CNC sends them to the spindle
control unit at the system power on and they are used in the
unit.
To set parameters automatically, upload parameters
corresponding to the motor model from the spindle control
unit to the CNC prior to the procedure specified above.
The parameters of the spindle amplifier with to serial
interface can be changed after the system starts. Changing
the parameters (No. 4000 to No. 4351 ”S1”) in the CNC
sends them to the spindle control unit at an appropriate time
and the parameters in the unit are updated. Be careful not
to change parameters incorrectly.

720
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

4800 ND1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

ND1: In controlling the spindle synchronization, the direction of the
first spindle motor rotation is:
0: The direction indicated by the command sign
1: The opposite direction to that indicated by the command
sign

721
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

H.14
PARAMETERS OF 5001 EVO TAL TLB TLC

TOOL #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

COMPENSATION Data type: Bit

TLC Tool length compensation
0: Tool length compensation A or B (Conforms to TLB in
parameter No. 5001)
1: Tool length compensation C
TLB Tool length compensation axis
0: Always Z axis irrespective of plane specification (Tool
length compensation A)
1: Axis perpendicular to plane specification (G17, G18, and
G19) (Tool length compensation B)

NOTE
Tool length compensation B can be used only when the
1–path Power Mate–D with two controlled axes is being
used.

TAL Tool length compensation C

0: Generates an alarm when two or more axes are offset
1: Not generate an alarm even if two or more axes are offset
EVO Specifies whether an offset is effective in the next block to be
buffered or the next block for which an H code is specified or
subsequent blocks when the offset is changed for tool length
compensation A or B.
0: Next block to be buffered or subsequent blocks
1: Next block for which an H code is specified or subsequent
blocks

5003 LVK

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type bit: Bit

LVK Tool length compensation vector
0: Cleared by reset
1: Not cleared, but held by reset

722
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

H.15
PARAMETERS OF 5101 M5B M5T RD2 RD1 FXY

CANNED CYCLES #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

FXY Drilling axis in drilling canned cycle
0: Always the first axis
1: Axis selected using program

NOTE
This parameter can be specified only when the 1–path
Power Mate–D with two controlled axes is being used.

RD2, RD1 Set the axis and direction in which the tool in drilling
canned cycle G76 or G87 is got free. RD2 and RD1 are
set as shown below by plane selection.
RD2 RD1 G17 G18 G19
0 0 +X +Z +Y
0 1 –X –Z –Y
1 0 + Y +X +Z
1 1 –X –X –Z

NOTE
This parameter can be specified only when the 1–path
Power Mate–D with two controlled axes is being used.

M5T When a spindle rotates from the forward to the reverse

direction and vice versa in tapping cycles G84 and G74 for M
series,
0: Not output M05 before M04 and M03 are output
1: Outputs M05 before M04 and M03 are output
M5B In drilling canned cycles G76 and G87,
0: Outputs M05 before an oriented spindle stops
1: Not output M05 before an oriented spindle stops

5114 Return of high-speed, peck drilling cycle G73

Data type: Word

Unit of data:
Increment system IS-B IS-C Unit
Input in mm 0.001 0.0001 mm
Input in inches 0.0001 0.00001 inch

Valid data range: 0 to 32767

This parameter sets the return value in high-speed peck drilling cycle
G73.

723
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

G73 (M series)

q : Depth of cut
d : Return value

R point

q
d

q
d

Z point

Fig.H.15 (a) High-Speed Peck Drilling Cycle G73

5115 Clearance of canned cycle G83

Data type: Word

Unit of data:
Increment system IS-B IS-C Unit
Input in mm 0.001 0.0001 mm
Input in inches 0.0001 0.00001 inch

Valid data range: 0 to 32767

This parameter sets the clearance of peck drilling cycle G83.

G83 (M series)
G73

q : Depth of cut
d : Return value

R point

q
d

q
d

Z point

Fig.H.15 (b) Peck Drilling Cycle G83

724
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

H.16
PARAMETERS OF 5200 FHD PCP DOV CRG VGR G84

RIGID TAPPING #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

G84 Method for specifying rigid tapping
0: An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is specified
prior to the issue of the G84 (or G74) command.
1: An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is not used.
(G84 cannot be used as a G code for the tapping cycle; G74
cannot be used for the reverse tapping cycle.)
VGR Any gear ratio between spindle and position coder in rigid
tapping
0: Not used (The gear ratio is set in parameter No. 3706.)
1: Used (The gear ratio is set by parameters No. 5221 to 5224
and 5231 to 5234.)
CRG Rigid mode when a rigid mode cancel command is specified
(A G80 and G01 group G code is reset.)
0: Not canceled before rigid mode signal RGTAP is set low
1: Canceled before rigid mode signal RGTAP is set low
DOV Override during extraction in rigid tapping
0: Invalidated
1: Validated (The override value is set in parameter No. 5211.)
PCP Rigid tapping
0: Used as a high-speed peck tapping cycle
1: Not used as a high-speed peck tapping cycle
FHD Feed hold and single block in rigid tapping
0: Invalidated
1: Validated

5201 TDR

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type bit: Bit

TDR Cutting time constant in rigid tapping
0: Uses a same parameter during cutting and extraction
(Parameter No. 5261 through 5364)
1: Not use a same parameter during cutting and extraction
Parameter Nos. 5261 to 5264: Time constant during cutting
Parameter Nos. 5271 to 5274: Time constant during
extraction

5210 Rigid tapping mode specification M code

Data type bit: Bit

Valid data range: 0 to 255
This parameter sets an M code that specifies the rigid tapping mode.

NOTE
The M code is judged to be 29 (M29) when ”0” is set.

725
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

5211 Override value during rigid tapping extraction

Data type: Byte

Unit of data: 1%
Valid data range: 0 to 200
The parameter sets the override value during rigid tapping extraction.

NOTE
The override value is valid when DOV in parameter No.
5200 is ”1”.

5213 Escape or cutting start point in peck tapping cycle

Data type: Word

Unit of data:
Increment system IS-B IS-C Unit
Input in mm 0.001 0.0001 mm
Input in inches 0.0001 0.00001 inch

Valid data range: 0 to 32767

This parameter sets the return or clearance in the peck tapping cycle.

Parameter No. 5200 PCP = 0 Parameter No. 5200 PCP = 1

(High speed peck drilling cycle) (Peck drilling cycle)

q : Depth of cut q : Depth of cut

d : Return value d : Clearance value
R point R point

q q
d d

q q
d d

q q

Z point Z point

Fig.H.16 (a) High-Speed Peck Drilling and Peck Drilling Cycles

726
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

5221 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (First gear)

5222 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (Second gear)

5223 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (Third gear)

Data type: Word

Valid data range: 1 to 32767
These parameters set the number of gear teeth on the spindle side for
every gear when any gear ratio is set in rigid tapping.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when VGR, #1 of parameter No.
5200, is ”1”.
Set the same value to parameter Nos. 5221 to 5224 when
the spindle has a position coder.

5231 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping (First gear)

Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping

5232
(Second gear)

5233 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping (Third gear)

Data type: Word

Valid data range: 1 to 32767
These parameters set the number of gear teeth on the position coder
side for every gear when any gear ratio is set in rigid tapping.

NOTE
This parameter is valid when VGR, #1 of parameter No.
5200, is ”1”.
Set the same value to parameter Nos. 5231 to 5234 when
the spindle has a position coder.
A spindle motor incorporating the position coder uses a
position coder with 2948 pulses per revolution.
In this case, set the value that is two times as many as the
actual number of gear teeth (because of conversion to 4096
pulse per revolution).

5241 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (First gear)

5242 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (Second gear)

5243 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (Third gear)

Data type: Word

Unit of data: rpm
Valid data range: Spindle and position coder gear ratio
1 : 1 0 to 7400
1 : 2 0 to 9999
1 : 4 0 to 9999
1 : 8 0 to 9999
These parameters set the maximum spindle speed for every gear in
rigid tapping.

727
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Acceleration/deceleration time constant for every gear in rigid tapping

5261
(First gear)

Acceleration/deceleration time constant for every gear in rigid tapping

5262
(Second gear)

Acceleration/deceleration time constant for every gear in rigid tapping

5263
(Third gear)

Data type: Word

Unit of data: ms
Valid data range: 0 to 4000
These parameters set the spindle and tapping axis’s time constant for
every gear during linear acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping.
Set the time required until a spindle speed reaches the number of
maximum speed (parameter Nos. 5241 and greater). The actual time
constant is a proportional value between the number of maximum
spindle speed and the specified S.

Acceleration/deceleration time constant for every gear in rigid tapping

5271
(First gear)

Acceleration/deceleration time constant for every gear in rigid tapping

5272
(Second gear)

Acceleration/deceleration time constant for every gear in rigid tapping

5273
(Third gear)

Data type: Word

Unit of data: ms
Valid data range: 0 to 4000
These parameters set the linear acceleration/deceleration time
constant of a spindle and tapping axis for every gear during extraction
in rigid tapping.

NOTE
The time constant is valid when TDR, #2 of parameter No.
5201, is ”1”.

Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping
5280
(Common in each gear)

Data type: Word

Unit of data: 0.01 per second
Valid data range: 1 to 9999
This parameter sets the position control loop gain of a spindle and
tapping axis in rigid tapping.
The loop gain setting significantly influences the screw precision.
Perform a cutting test to adjust the loop gain and its multiplier to the
optimum values.

NOTE
To change the loop gain for every gear, set this parameter
value to ”0” and set the loop gain for every gear to parameter
Nos. 5281 through 5284. If this parameter value is not ”0”, the
loop gain for every gear is invalidated. This parameter then
becomes a loop gain that is used in common for all gears.

728
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping
5281
(First gear)

Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping
5282
(Second gear)

Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping
5283
(Third gear)

Data type: Word

Unit of data: 0.01 per second
Valid data range: 1 to 9999
These parameters set the position control loop gain of a spindle and tapping
axis for every gear in rigid tapping.

NOTE
To set the loop gain for every gear, set parameter No. 5280
to ”0”.

5291 Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 1)

5292 Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 2)

5293 Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 3)

Data type: Word

Valid data range: 0 to 32767
Set the spindle loop gain multipliers for gears 1 to 4 in the rigid
tapping mode. The thread precision depends on the multipliers. Find
the most appropriate multipliers by conducting the cutting test and
assign them to the parameters.

NOTE
These parameters are used for analog spindles.

Loop gain nultiplier = 2048 E/L
1000

where; E: Voltage in the velocity command at 1000 rpm
L: Rotation angle of the spindle per one rotation of the
spindle motor

: Unit used for the detection

729
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

(Example)

SPINDLE When the spindle motor, spindle, and position coder are
MOTOR connected as shown left, let the variables be as follows:

Position
coder E = 1.667 [V] (A motor speed of 6000 rpm corre-
SPINDLE
sponds to 10 V.)
P.C
L = 360° (One rotation of the spindle corresponds to
one rotation of the spindle motor.)

= La/4096
= 720°/4096
= 0.17578°

La = 720° (=360°
2. One rotation of the position

coder corresponds to two rotations of the
spindle.)
1:1:2 4096= The number of detected pulses per on rotation of
the position coder

Fig.H.16 (b) Connection Among the Spindle Motor, Spindle, and Position Coder

Gear ratio between the spindle and the position coder

1 : 1 . . . . . . . . 0.08789 degrees
1 : 2 . . . . . . . . 0.17578 degrees
1 : 4 . . . . . . . . 0.35156 degrees
1 : 8 . . . . . . . . 0.70313 degrees
Thus, Loop gain multiplier = 2048 1.667/360 0.17578 1000 =
1667

NOTE
When the position coder which is built in a spindle motor
sends 512 pulses per rotation, the unit used for the
detection, a, is La/2048.

5300 In-position width of tapping axis in rigid tapping

Data type: Word

Unit of data: Detection unit
Valid data range: 1 to 32767
This parameter sets the in-position width of a tapping axis in rigid
tapping.

5301 In-position width of spindle in rigid tapping

Data type: Word

Unit of data: Detection unit
Valid data range: 0 to 32767
This parameter sets the in-position width of a spindle in rigid tapping.

NOTE
The broad in-position width deteriorates the screw
precision.

730
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

Limit value of tapping axis positioning deviation during movement in rigid

5310
tapping

Data type: Word

Unit of data: Detection unit
Valid data range: 1 to 32767
This parameter sets the limit value of a tapping axis positioning
deviation during movement in rigid tapping.

NOTE
The setting value is represented in a 10-times unit when a
high-resolution transducer is used.

5311 Limit value of spindle positioning deviation during movement in rigid tapping

Data type: Word

Unit of data: Detection unit
Valid data range: 1 to 32767
This parameter sets the limit value of a spindle positioning deviation
during movement in rigid tapping.
Limit value + S L 100 1.5
60 G

where S: Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping
(Setting value of parameter Nos. 5241 and greater)
G: Loop gain of rigid tapping axis
(Setting value of parameter Nos. 5280 and greater)

: Detection unit

(Calculation example)
S = 3600
SPINDLE G = 3000
MOTOR L = 360° (One spindle rotation per spindle motor
rotation)
Position
= La/4096
SPINDLE coder = 720°/4096
P.C = 0.17578°
La = 720° (One position coder rotation requires two
spindle rotations (=360° 2).)
4096= Detection pulse per position coder rotation

3600 360 100 1.5

Setting value= = 6144
60 3000 0.17578

1:1:2

Fig.H.16 (c) Connection Among Spindle Motor, Spindle and Position Coder

NOTE
the detection unit is
=La/2048 when the position coder
built-in spindle motor uses a position coder of 512 pulses
per revolution.

731
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

5312 Limit value of tapping axis positioning deviation during stop in rigid tapping

Data type: Word

Unit of data: Detection unit
Valid data range: 0 to 32767
This parameter sets the limit value of a tapping axis positioning
deviation during stop in rigid tapping.

5313 Limit value of spindle positioning deviation during stop in rigid tapping

Data type: Word

Unit of data: Detection unit
Valid data range: 1 to 32767
This parameter sets the limit value of a spindle positioning deviation
during in rigid tapping.

5321 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping

Data type: Byte

Unit of data: Detection unit
Valid data range: 0 to 127
These parameters set the spindle backlash in rigid tapping.

732
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

H.17
PARAMETERS OF 5460 Axis (linear axis) specification for polar coordinate interpolation

POLAR COORDINATE 5461 Axis (rotary axis) specification for polar coordinate interpolarion

INTERPOLATION
Data type: Byte
Valid data range: 1, 2
These parameters set control axis numbers of linear and rotary axes
to execute polar interpolation.

5462 Maximum cutting feedrate during polar coordinate interpolation

Data type: 2–word

Unit of data:
Valid data rande:
Valid data range
Increment system Unit of data
IS–B IS–C
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 0, 6 – 240000 0, 6 – 100000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 0, 6 – 96000 0, 6 – 48000
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 0, 6 – 240000 0, 6 – 100000

This parameter sets the upper limit of the cutting feedrate that is
effective during polar coordinate interpolation. If a feedrate greater
than the maximum feedrate is specified during polar coordinate
interpolation, it is clamped to the feedrate specified by the parameter.
When the setting is 0, the feedrate during polar coordinate
interpolation is clamped to the maximum cutting feedrate usually
specified with parameter No. 1422.

733
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

H.18
PARAMETERS OF 6000 SBM

CUSTOM MACROS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

SBM Custom macro statement
0: Not stop the single block
1: Stops the single block

6001 CLV CCV TCS CRO VFP PRT

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

PRT Reading zero when data is output using a DPRINT command
0: Outputs a space
1: Outputs no data
VFP Specifies the common variable tape output format.
0: Common variables are output in the custom macro
statement format.
1: Common variables are output in the same format as for the
Power Mate-A, Power Mate-B, and Power Mate-C.
CRO ISO code in the B/D PRINT mode
0: Outputs only LF after data is output
1: Outputs LF and CR after data is output
TCS Custom macro (subprogram)
0 : Not called using a T code
1 : Called using a T code
CCV Custom macroGs common variables Nos. 100 to 199
0: Cleared to <vacant> by reset
1: Not cleared by reset
CLV Custom macroGs local variables Nos. 1 to 33
0: Cleared to <vacant> by reset
1: Not cleared by reset

6003 MUS MCY MSB MPR TSE MIN MSK

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.

Data type: Bit

MSK Absolute coordinates at that time during custom macro
interrupt
0: Not set to the skip coordinates (system variables #5061
and later)
1: Set to the skip coordinates (system variables #5061 and
later)

734
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

MIN Custom macro interrupt

0: Performed by interrupting an in–execution block (Custom
macro interrupt type I)
1: Performed after an in–execution block is completed
(Custom macro interrupt type II)
TSE Custom macro interrupt signal UINT
0: Edge trigger method (Rising edge)
1: Status trigger method
MPR Custom macro interrupt valid/invalid M code
0: M96/M97
1: M code set using parameters (Nos. 6033 and 6034)
MSB Interrupt program
0: Uses a dedicated local variable (Macro–type interrupt)
1: Uses the same local variable as in the main program
(Subprogram– type interrupt)
MCY Custom macro interrupt
0: Not performed during cycle operation
1: Performed during cycle operation
MUS Interrupt–type custom macro
0: Not used
1: Used

6010 *7 *6 *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 *0

6011 =7 =6 =5 =4 =3 =2 =1 =0

6012 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

6013 [7 [6 [5 [4 [3 [2 [1 [0

6014 ]7 ]6 ]5 ]4 ]3 ]2 ]1 ]0

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

*0 to *7 : Set the pattern of an EIA code indicating *.
=0 to =7 : Set the pattern of an EIA code indicating =.
#0 to #7 : Set the pattern of an EIA code indicating #.
[ 0 to [ 7 : Set the pattern of an EIA code indicating [.
] 0 to ] 7 : Set the pattern of an EIA code indicating ].

NOTE
The numeral of a suffix indicates the bit position in a code.

6033 M code that validates a custom macro interrupt

6034 M code that invalidates a custom macro interrupt

Data type: Byte type

Valid data range: 0 to 255
These parameters set the custom macro interrupt valid/invalid M
codes.

735
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

NOTE
These parameters can be used when MPR, #4 of parameter
No. 6003, is 1. M96 is used as a valid M code and M97 is
used as an invalid M code when MPR is 0, irrespective of the
state of this parameter.

6050 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9010

6051 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9011

6052 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9012

6053 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9013

6054 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9014

6055 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9015

6056 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9016

6057 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9017

6058 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9018

6059 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9019

Data type: Byte

Valid data range: 1 to 255
These parameters set the G codes that call the custom macros of
program numbers 9010 through 9019.

NOTE
Setting value 0 is invalid. No custom macro can be called
by G00.

6071 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9001

6072 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9002

6073 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9003

Data type: Byte

Valid data range: 3 to 255
These parameters set the M codes that call the subprograms of
program numbers 9001 through 9003.

NOTE
Setting value 0 is invalid. No sub program can be called by
M00.

736
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

6080 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9020

6081 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9021

6082 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9022

6083 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9023

6084 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9024

6085 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9025

6086 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9026

6087 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9027

6088 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9028

6089 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9029

Data type: Byte

Valid data range: 6 to 255
These parameters set the M codes that call the custom macros of
program numbers 9020 through 9029.

NOTE
Setting value 0 is invalid. No custom macro can be called
by M00.

6090 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9004

6091 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9005

Data type: Byte

Valid data range: 65 (A:41H) to 90 (Z:5AH)
These parameters set the ASCII codes that call subprograms in
decimal.
Addresses that can be used are as follows:
A, B, D, F, H, I, J, K, L, M, P, Q, R, S, T, X, Y, Z

NOTE
Set 0 when no subprogram is called

737
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

H.19 When a conventional type display (SFM (bit 3 of parameter No. 3109) = 0)
is specified:
PARAMETERS OF
PATTERN DATA 1) Pressing the OFFSET
SETTING key causes page 1 of the soft key display to appear.
INPUT
OFFSET SETING (OPRT)

2) Pressing the key causes page 2 of the soft key display to appear.

MACRO MENU (OPRT)

3) At this point, pressing the [MENU] key causes the menu screen to
appear.
When bit 3 (SFM) of parameter No. 3109 is set to 1:
1) Pressing the OFFSET
SETTING key causes page 1 of the soft key display to appear.

OFFSET SETING (OPRT)

2) The menu key also appears on this screen.

6101 PDTOP1

6110 PDTOPA

Data type: Word

Range of valid data: 0, 100 to 199, and 500 to 699
PDTOP1, PDTOP2, PDTOP3, PDTOP4, PDTOP5, PDTOP6,
PDTOP7, PDTOP8, PDTOP9, and PDTOPA:
The first variable number to appear on the pattern data screen.
It is selected on the menu screen of the pattern data input
function (it appears at every multiple of 8 on the screen). If
”0” is specified, ”500” is assumed to be specified.
Example) When 508 is set in parameter No. 6101, and
pattern 1 is selected on the pattern data menu
screen, the display begins with macro variable
508.

738
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

H.20
PARAMETERS OF 6200 SKF

SKIP FUNCTION, #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

PICTURE DISPLAY, Data type: Bit

AND ITP SKF Dry run, override, and automatic acceleration/deceleration for
G31 skip command
SYNCHRONOUS 0: Disabled
1: Enabled

6206 DSK

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

DSK 0: The skip signal does not cause G04 (dwell) to be skipped.
1: The skip signal (SKIP) causes G04 (dwell) to be skipped.

6250 DSG

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

DSG 0: Soft keys for picture display of CRT is not displayed.
1: Soft keys for picture display of CRT is displayed.

6650 MATR SYNC

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

SYNC 0: Do not perform ITP synchronization.
1: Perform ITP synchronization.
(Set this parameter to ”1” when using simultaneous
block start.)
MATR 0: Use as a slave with ITP synchronization.
1: Use as a master with ITP synchronization.

NOTE
This parameter can be used only with the 1–path Power
Mate–D.

739
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

H.21
PARAMETERS OF 6700 PCM

DISPLAYING #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

OPERATION TIME Data type: Bit

AND NUMBER OF PCM M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the
PARTS number of machined parts
0: M code specified by M02, M30, and parameter No. 6710
1: Only M code specified by parameter No. 6710

M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number of
6710 machined parts

Data type: Byte

Valid data range: 0 to 255 except 98 and 99
The total number of machined parts and the number of machined
parts are counted (+1) when the M code set is executed.

NOTE
Set value 0 is invalid (the number of parts is not counted for
M00). Data 98 and 99 cannot be set.

6711 Number of machined parts

Setting entry is acceptable.

Data type: 2-word
Unit of data: One piece
Valid data range: 0 to 99999999
The number of machined parts is counted (+1) together with the total
number of machined parts when the M code specified by M02, M30,
or parameter No. 6710 is executed.

6712 Total number of machined parts

Setting entry is acceptable.

Data type: 2-word
Unit of data: One piece
Valid data range: 0 to 99999999
This parameter sets the total number of machined parts.
The total number of machined parts is counted (+1) when the M code
specified by M02, M30, or parameter No. 6710 is executed.

6713 Number of parts to be machined

Setting entry is acceptable.

Data type: Word
Unit of data: Parts
Valid data range: 0 to 9999
Set the number of parts to be machined.

740
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

When the number of machined parts reaches the specified number, the
PRTSF signal for posting notification that the required number of
parts has been reached is output to the PMC. When 0 has been set in
this parameter, however, the specification of an infinite number of
parts is assumed, such that PRTSF is not output.
Setting entry is acceptable.
Data type: 2–word
Unit of data: ms
Valid data range: 0 to 60000

6750 Integrated value of power-on period

Data type: 2-word

Unit of data: One minute
Valid data range: 0 to 99999999
This parameter displays the integrated value of power-on period.

6751 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation)

Setting entry is acceptable.

Data type: 2-word
Unit of data: One ms
Valid data range: 0 to 60000

6752 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation)

Setting entry is acceptable.

Data type: 2-word
Unit of data: One minute
Valid data range: 0 to 99999999
This parameter displays the integrated value of time during automatic
operation (neither stop nor hold time included).

6753 Integrated value of cutting time

Setting entry is acceptable.

Data type: 2-word
Unit of data: One ms
Valid data range: 1 to 60000

6754 Integrated value of cutting time

Setting entry is acceptable.

Data type: 2-word
Unit of data: One minute
Valid data range: 0 to 99999999
This parameter displays the integrated value of a cutting time that is
performed in cutting feed such as linear interpolation (G01) .

741
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

Integrated value of general-purpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON)

6755 ON time

Setting entry is acceptable.

Data type: 2-word
Unit of data: One ms
Valid data range: 0 to 60000

Integrated value of general-purpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON)

6756 ON time

Setting entry is acceptable.

Data type: 2-word
Unit of data: One minute
Valid data range: 0 to 99999999
This parameter displays the integrated value of a time while input
signal TMRON from PMC is on.

6757 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time)

Setting entry is acceptable.

Data type: 2-word
Unit of data: One ms
Valid data range: 0 to 60000

6758 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time)

Setting entry is acceptable.

Data type: 2-word
Unit of data: One minute
Valid data range: 0 to 99999999
This parameter displays the one automatic operation drive time
(neither stop nor hold state included). The operation time is
automatically preset to 0 during the power-on sequence and the cycle
start from the reset state.

742
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

H.22
PARAMETERS OF 6901 IGPSW

POSITION SWITCH #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

FUNCTIONS Data type: Bit

IGPSW Specifies whether the position switch function is enabled or
disabled during absolute pulse coder follow–up operation.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled

NOTE
The parameter can be used only with the 1–path Power
Mate–D.

6910 Axis corresponding to the first position switch

6911 Axis corresponding to the second position switch

6912 Axis corresponding to the third position switch

6913 Axis corresponding to the fourth position switch

6914 Axis corresponding to the fifth position switch

6915 Axis corresponding to the sixth position switch

6916 Axis corresponding to the seventh position switch

6917 Axis corresponding to the eighth position switch

6918 Axis corresponding to the ninth position switch

6919 Axis corresponding to the tenth position switch

Data type: Byte

Valid data range: 1, 2, control axis count
These parameters specify the control axes corresponding to the first
through tenth position switch functions. A corresponding position
switch signal is output to PMC when the machine coordinate value
of a corresponding axis is within the range that is set using a
parameter.

NOTE
Set value 0 indicates that the position switch function is not
used.

6930 Maximum operation range of the first position switch

6931 Maximum operation range of the second position switch

6932 Maximum operation range of the third position switch

6933 Maximum operation range of the fourth position switch

743
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

6934 Maximum operation range of the fifth position switch

6935 Maximum operation range of the sixth position switch

6936 Maximum operation range of the seventh position switch

6937 Maximum operation range of the eighth position switch

6938 Maximum operation range of the ninth position switch

6939 Maximum operation range of the tenth position switch

Data type: 2-word

Unit of data:
Increment system IS-B IS-C Unit
Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Rotation axis 0.001 0.0001 deg

Valid data range: 0 to
99999999

These parameters set the maximum operation range of the first
through tenth position switches.

6950 Minimum operation range of the first position switch

6951 Minimum operation range of the second position switch

6952 Minimum operation range of the third position switch

6953 Minimum operation range of the fourth position switch

6954 Minimum operation range of the fifth position switch

6955 Minimum operation range of the sixth position switch

6956 Minimum operation range of the seventh position switch

6957 Minimum operation range of the eighth position switch

6958 Minimum operation range of the ninth position switch

6959 Minimum operation range of the tenth position switch

Data type: 2-word

Unit of data:
Increment system IS-B IS-C Unit
Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Rotation axis 0.001 0.0001 deg

Valid data range: 0 to
99999999

These parameters set the minimum operation range of the first
through tenth position switches.

744
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

H.23
PARAMETERS OF 7100 HDLPM THD

MANUAL HANDLE #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

FEED/MANUAL Data type: Bit

HANDLE THD External pulse input in TEACH IN JOG mode
INTERRUPTION 0: Invalid
1: Valid
HDLPM 0: When the handle of the manual pulse generator is
turned rapidly, the number of input pulses may not
match the amount of movement.
1: When the handle of the manual pulse generator is
turned rapidly, the number of input pulses matches the
amount of movement.

7110 Number of manual pulse generators used

Data type: Byte

Valid data range: 1, 2
This parameter sets the number of manual pulse generators.

NOTE
A value of 2 can be specified only for the 1–path Power
Mate–D.

7113 Magnification m of manual handle feed

Data type: Byte

Unit of data: One time
Valid data range: 1 to 127
This parameter sets a magnification when manual handle feed
movement selection signal MP1 is off, and external pulse input
movement selection signal MP2 is on.

7114 Magnification n of manual handle feed

Data type: Word

Unit of data: One time
Valid data range: 0 to 1000
This parameter sets the magnification when manual handle feed
movement selection signals MP1 and MP2 are on.
Movement selection signal
Movement (Manual
(Man al handle feed)
MP2 MP1
0 0 Least input increment 1
0 1 Least input increment 10
1 0 Least input increment m
1 1 Least input increment n

745
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

H.24
PARAMETERS OF 7181
First–time return distance used during execution of the butt–type reference
position setting cycle
BUTT–TYPE
REFERENCE Data type: 2–word axis
POSITION SETTING Unit of data:
FUNCTION Valid data range
Increment system
IS–B IS–C
Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001
Inch machine 0.0001 0.00001
Rotation axis 0.001 0.0001

Valid data range:–99999999 to +99999999

Reference position distance used during execution of the butt–type refer-

7182 ence position setting cycle

Data type: 2–word axis

Unit of data:
Valid data range
Increment system
IS–B IS–C
Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001
Inch machine 0.0001 0.00001
Rotation axis 0.001 0.0001

Valid data range:–99999999 to +99999999

NOTE
When the reference position setting cycle operation is
started in the direction specified inbit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter
No. 1006, the algebraic sign (direction of operation) of the
values specified in parameter Nos. 7181 and 7182 should
match the direction set in bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No.
1006. If the directions do not match, the reference position
setting cycleoperation cannot be activated even when a
start signal is entered.

First–time butt speed used during execution of the butt–type reference posi-
7183 tion setting cycle

Data type: Word axis

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
Increment system Unit of data
IS–B IS–C
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to 65535 30 to 65535
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 65535 30 to 48000
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 30 to 65535 30 to 65535

746
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

Second–time butt speed used during execution of the butt–type reference

7184 position setting cycle

Data type: Word axis

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
Increment system Unit of data
IS–B IS–C
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to 65535 30 to 65535
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 65535 30 to 48000
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 30 to 65535 30 to 65535

Axis move speed for reference position setting used during execution of the
7185 butt–type reference position setting cycle

Data type: Word axis

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
Increment system Unit of data
IS–B IS–C
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to 65535 30 to 65535
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 65535 30 to 48000
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 30 to 65535 30 to 65535

Torque limit used during execution of the butt–type reference position setting
7186 cycle

Data type: Byte axis

Unit of data: %
Valid data range: 0 to 100
A current limit override value is specified for individual axes during
execution of the butt–type reference position setting cycle.

NOTE
If the parameter is 0, an override of 100% is assumed to be
specified.

747
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

H.25
PARAMETERS OF 7200 OP7 OP6 OP5 OP4 OP3 OP2 OP1

SOFTWARE #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

OPERATOR’S PANEL Data type: Bit

OP1 Mode selection on software operator’s panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed
OP2 JOG feed axis select and JOG rapid traverse buttons on
software operator’s panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed
OP3 Manual pulse generator’s axis select and manual pulse
generator’s magnification switches on software operator’s
panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed
OP4 JOG speed override and rapid traverse override switches on
software operator’s panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed
OP5 Optional block skip, single block, machine lock, and dry run
switches on software operator’s panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed
OP6 Protect key on software operator’s panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed
OP7 Feed hold on software operator’s panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed

NOTE
To use the software operator’s panel function, a CRT/MDI,
PDP, or LCD is required.

7210 PLSKYX

Data type: Byte

Valid data range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
This parameter specifies the value to use for the positive direction key
on the software operator’s panel during jogging of the first axis.

7211 MNSKYX

Data type: Byte

Valid data range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
This parameter specifies the value to use for the negative direction
key on the software operator’s panel during jogging of the first axis.

748
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

7212 PLSKYY

Data type: Byte

Valid data range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
This parameter specifies the value to use for the posinega direction
key on the software operator’s panel during jogging of the second
axis.

7213 MNSKYY

Data type: Byte

Valid data range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
This parameter specifies the value to use for the negative direction
key on the software operator’s panel during jogging of the second
axis.

7214 Unused
L L
7217 Unused

Data type: Byte

Valid data range:

7220 Name of general-purpose switch on software operator’s panel

L L
7283 Name of general-purpose switch on software operator’s panel

Data type: Byte

749
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

OPERATOR’S PANEL O1234 N5678

SIGNAL 1 : OFF ON
SIGNAL 2 : OFF ON
SIGNAL 3 : OFF ON
SIGNAL 4 : OFF ON
SIGNAL 5 : OFF ON
SIGNAL 6 : OFF ON
SIGNAL 7 : OFF ON
SIGNAL 8 : OFF ON

These names are set using character codes that are displayed in parameter
Nos. 7220 to 7283.
Parameter No. 7220:
Sets the character code (083) corresponding to S of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No. 7221:
Sets the character code (073) corresponding to I of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No. 7222:
Sets the character code (071) corresponding to G of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No. 7223:
Sets the character code (078) corresponding to N of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No. 7224:
Sets the character code (065) corresponding to A of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No. 7225:
Sets the character code (076) corresponding to L of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No. 7226:
Sets the character code (032) corresponding to space of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No. 7227:
Sets the character code (049) corresponding to 1 of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter Nos. 7228 to 7235:
Set the character codes of SIGNAL 2 shown in the figure above.
Parameter Nos. 7236 to 7243:
Set the character codes of SIGNAL 3 shown in the figure above.
Parameter Nos. 7244 to 7251:
Set the character codes of SIGNAL 4 shown in the figure above.
Parameter Nos. 7252 to 7259:
Set the character codes of SIGNAL 5 shown in the figure above.
Parameter Nos. 7260 to 7267:
Set the character codes of SIGNAL 6 shown in the figure above.
Parameter Nos. 7268 to 7275:
Set the character codes of SIGNAL 7 shown in the figure above.
Parameter Nos. 7276 to 7283:
Set the character codes of SIGNAL 8 shown in the figure above.
The character codes are shown in Table 4.31, character code list, on the
next page.

750
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

Table H.25 Character Code List

NOTE
The “dakuten” and “han dakuten” in Katakana also
correspond to one character.

751
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

The kanji and hiragana below take up the equivalent of two alphanumeric
characters. When kanji are used together with alphanumeric characters,
kanji codes can be specified to be stored across two addresses.
Example #501 R point R: 082, point: 002 232, space: 032
N3G65 H93 P501 Q082 002 R232 032;

752
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

753
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

754
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

755
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

756
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

H.26
PARAMETERS OF 7701 SMP16 SMP2 SMP1

EXTERNAL PULSE #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

INPUT SMP16 SMP2 SMP1 Number of sampling times

0 0 0 4
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 8
1 0 0 16
1 0 1 4
1 1 0 4
1 1 1 4

This parameter specifies the number of times sampling is performed

for input pulse smoothing.

7710 Axis number for an axis to be moved according to external pulses

Data type: Byte

Range of valid data: 1, 2
When 0 is set in this parameter, no motion occurs along the axis in
response to external pulses.

7682 External pulse–based axis movement amount ratio setting 1 (M)

Data type: Byte

Range of valid data: M = 1 to 255

7681 External pulse–based axis movement amount ratio setting 2 (N)

Data type: Word

Range of valid data: N = 1 to 1000

Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant for an external pulse–

7712 based axis

Data type: Word

Range of valid data: 0 to 4000
Unit of data: msec

757
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

7713 FL rate at acceleration/deceleration for an external pulse–based axis

Data type: Word

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
Increment system
IS–B IS–C
deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000

NOTE
When the 2–path Power Mate–D is being used, the external
pulse input function can be used only with the first path.

758
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

H.27
PARAMETERS OF 8001 RDE OVE MLE

AXIS CONTROL BY #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

PMC Data type: Bit

MLE Specifies whether the machine lock signal (MLK) is to be
valid for a PMC-controlled axis in PMC-based axis control.
0: Valid
1: Invalid
OVE Specifies the signals associated with the dry run and override
functions in PMC-based axis control.
0: The same signals as for the CNC are used.
1 Cutting feed override signal
2 Override cancel signal, OVC
3 Rapid traverse override signals, ROV1 and ROV2
4 Dry run signal, DRN
5 Rapid traverse select signal, RT
1: The signals dedicated to PMC-based axis control are used.
1 Cutting feed override signal
2 Override cancel signal, OVCE
3 Rapid traverse override signals, ROV1E and ROV2E
4 Dry run signal, DRNE
5 Rapid traverse select signal, RTE
RDE Specifies whether the dry run function is to be enabled for a
rapid traverse command in PMC-based axis control.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

8002 F10 RPD

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

RPD Rapid traverse rate of PMC control axis during axis control
by the PMC
0: Feedrate set by parameter No. 1420
1: Feedrate specified by the feedrate data of an axis control
command.
F10 Sets the command unit of feedrate data when cutting feed
(feed per minute) command is specified during axis control by
the PMC.

F10 Input in mm Input in inches

0 1 mm/min 0.01 inch/min
1 10 mm/min 0.1 inch/min

759
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

8010 DI/DO group selection for each axis during PMC axis control

Data type: Byte axis

Valid data range: 1 or 2
This parameter sets which DI/DO group should be used for a control
axis command for each axis during axis control by the PMC.
Set value Description
1 DI/DO A group (G142 to G153)
2 DI/DO B group (G154 to G165)

760
B–62833EN/01 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

H.28
PARAMETERS OF 8703 FLA

STANDARD LADDER #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Data type: Bit

FLA Specifies whether to use a FANUC standard ladder program
or the PMC.
0: Use PMC.
1: Use FANUC standard ladder program.
Loading of FANUC standard LADDER
D Loading operation for FANUC standard LADDER.
(1) Please set CNC parameter No. 8703#0 (FLA)=1.
(2) Please turn off, and soon turn on with push <X>+<O> key,
because system is alarm 000. (Clear Ladder)
(3) FANUC standard LADDER is loaded.

NOTE
If the Ladder is not cleared, FANUC standard LADDER will
not be loaded. (If the Ladder exist, former Ladder is
remains.)
This parameter cannot be used with the 2–path Power
Mate–D.

761
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62833EN/01

H.29
PARAMETERS OF 8705 ADCV

ANALOG INPUT #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

ADCV 0: The analog input module is not used.

1: The analog input module is used.

8730 ADOFS

ADOFS Offset for a voltage input from the analog input module: 0
to
8191
Specify 0 V so that parameter No. 0833 (diagnostic data) is
set to 0.

NOTE
This parameter can be used only with the 1–path Power
Mate–D.

762
B–62833EN/01 Index
[Number] Battery for Memory Backup, 34

1st Reference Position Return, 393

20–pin Interface Connectors and Cables, 632
[C]
2nd, 3rd Reference Position Return Signals, 398
Cable Clamp and Shield Processing, 29
Cable Connection for the Manual Pulse Generator,
267
[A] Cable Lead–in Diagram, 36
Action Against Noise, 24 CNC Ready Signal (Output) MA<F001#7>, 360
Address List, 319 Configuration, 4
Address Map, 515 Connecting a Manual Pulse Coder to Multiple Power
Mates, 269
Adjusting the Separate LCD, 226
Connecting A Position Display, 250
Adjusting the Separate PDP, 222
Connecting a Touch Panel, 310
Alarm, 467
Connecting Signal Cables, 71
Alarm Classification Signal (Output) ALPS1 to
ALPS3, ALPS, ALOT, ALOH, ALSV <F250#0 To Connecting the Frame Ground (FG) of the Control
#6> <F251#0 To #2>, 369 Unit, 27
Alarm Signal (Output) AL <F001#0>, 366 Connecting with I/O Modules, 74
Alarms, 552 Connection, 310, 315, 548
Alpha Series Spindle Amplifier Interface (Serial Connection Allowing the Handy Operator’s Panel to
Spindle), 272 be Detached, 294
Alphanumeric Key Type (A02B–0211–C020#R), 570, Connection Among Spindle, Spindle Motor, and Posi-
573 tion Coder, 499
Analog Input Function, 544 Connection Diagram, 68
Analog Input Function Specifications, 547 Connection of Buil–in I/O Card, 146
Analog spindle interface, 275 Connection of Buil–in I/O Card A, B, 171

APC Alarm Type Signals (Output) APCMn, APOVn, Connection of Buil–in I/O Card D, 157
APFEn, APPEn, APPSn, APBZn, APBVn, APBLn Connection of Buil–in I/O Card–C, 135
<F252, F253>, 371
Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Electric Cable, 62
APC Battery Interface, 289
Connection of FANUC I/O Link Optical Fiber Cable,
Automatic Operation, 412 63
Automatic Operation Signal (Output) OP <F000#7>, Connection of I/O Card A/B, 110
418
Connection of I/O Card D/E, 85
Auxiliary Function Lock Signal (Input) AFL
<G005#6>, 437 Connection of I/O Units to Machine Interface, 59

Axis Control by Means of PMC, 525 Connection of Input Power Supply, 51

Connection of the FANUC I/O Link, 61
Axis Interlock Signal (Input) *ITn <G130#0, #1>, 388
Connection of the FANUC I/O Unit–model A, 66
Axis Select Signal for Handle Interrupt (Input)
HS1IA, HS1IB, HS2IA, and HS2IB<G041#0, #1, Connection to a Detachable LCD/MDI Unit, 227
#4, #5>, 427
Connection to CNC Peripherals, 204
Axis Status Signal (Output) INPn<F104#0, #1>, SUPn
<F208#1, #5>, IPLn <F208#2, #0>, 372 Connection to FANUC I/O Link–II, 203
Connection to the Handy Operator’s Panel, 292
Connection with the DPL/MDI, 245
[B] Connector Layout for I/O Card, 87, 112
Connector Layout of Unit, 38
Battery Alarm Signal (Output) BAL <F001#2>, 366
Constant Speed Signal (Output) CSS <F002#2>, 463
Battery case for separate type absolute pulse coder,
603 Control Unit, 32

i–1
 Index B–62833EN/01

Controlled Axes Detach, 561 Displaying and Setting Parameters, 647

Controlled Axis Detach Signals DTCHn<G124#0 , Distribution end Signal (Output) DEN <F001#3>, 436
#1>, 562
Dogless Reference Position Return Function, 399
Controlled Axis Detach Status Signals MDTCHn Dry Run Signal (Input) DRN <G046#7 > , 423
<F110#0, #1>, 562
Dual Position Feedback Function, 556
Cooling by Heat Exchanger, 11
Cooling Fin A/B/C, 13
Correspondence Between I/O Signals and Addresses
in a Module, 77 [E]
CRT Interface (with Simultaneous Block Start), 209 Emergency Stop, 293
CRT Interface (without Simultaneous Block Start), Emergency Stop Signal (Input) *ESP <X000#4,
210 X1000#4, G008#4>, 362
CRT Terminating Unit, 216 Environmental Requirements of CNC, 7
CRT/MDI Unit Interface (Simultaneous Block Start Example of Connecting a Detachable LCD/MDI Unit
Interface), 205 to the Two–path Power Mate–D, 244
Custom Macro, 495 External Dimensions of Each Connector, 615

Custom Macro Signal (Input) UI0 to UI15 <G054, External Dimensions of Each Unit, 587
G055>, (Output) UO0 to UO131 <F054 to F059>, External Pulse Input, 482
496
External Pulse Input Interface Selection Signal (Input)
Cycle Start Lamp Signal (Output) STL <F000#5>, EPCON <G066#6>, 483
417
External Reset Signal (Input) ERS <G008#7>, 364
Cycle Start Signal (Input) ST <G007#2>, 413

[F]
[D] Fanuc Floppy Cassette and Handy File Connection,
Definition of Warning, Caution, and Note, s–1 263
Description of Parameters, 655 FANUC I/O Link Connect Unit, 305
Design and Installation Conditions of the Tool Mag- Fanuc I/O Link Slave Function, 486
netic Cabinet, 9 FANUC Standard Unit LED On/Off Information Out-
Detachable CRT/MDI Unit, 215 put, 573
Detachable LCD/MDI Unit Connected to One Power Features, 512
Mate–D Unit, 228 Feed Axis Direction Select Signal (Input) +Jn, –jn,
Details of Cable J123 and the Terminating Unit, 312 <G100#0, #1, G102#0, #1>, 380

Details of DI Connection, 89, 114, 139, 150, 161, 175 Feed Hold Lamp Signal (Output) SPL <F000#4>, 417

Details of DO Connection, 101, 126, 143, 154, 167, Feed Hold Signal (Input) *SP <G008#5>, 415
181 Feed Rate Override Signal (Input) *FV0 to *FV7
<G012>, 423
Device Selection Switch, 213
Feedrate Switch Signal EXF1 <X000#0, X1000#0>,
Device Selection Switch Interface, 225 EXF2 <X000#1, X1001#1>, EXF3 <X000#2,
Diagnostic Data, 551 X1001#2>, EXF4 <X011#4>, EXF5 <X011#5>, 563
Differential Rigid Tap (Input) DEFMOD <G072#3>, Follow-up Signal (Input) *FLWU <G007#5>, 475
518
Digital Input/Output Module, 75
Dimensions of I/O Card A, B, 134 [G]
Dimensions of I/O Card D, E, 109 General, 557
Display by the Position Display Unit, 578 Grouding, 70
Display of Alarms from PMC (Input) PAL0 to PAL6, Ground, 26
PALM <G219>, 371

i–2
B–62833EN/01 Index

[H] [K]
Handy Operator’s Panel <F168 to F175, G204 to Keeping the Handy Operator’s Panel Connected at All
G205>, 566 Times, 303
Heat Exchanger for CRT/MDI Unit, 18 Key Input on Panel of FANUC Standard Unit, 570

Heat Loss of Each Unit, 12 Key Input on the Panel, 567

High–speed M/S/T Interface Signal (Input) MFIN,

SFIN, TFIN <G005#0, #2, #3>, 447
High–Speed Serial Bus Interface, 314 [L]
LED On/Off Information Output, 569

[I] [M]
I/O Device External Control Function, 476
M Decode Signals (Output) DM00, DM01, DM02,
I/O Device Interface, 254 DM30 <F009#7, #6, #5, #4>, 437
I/O Signal List (Order of Group), 343 M Function, 431

I/O Signal List (Order of Symbol), 351 Machine Interface, 138, 149, 160, 174
Machine Interface Connection Examples, 185
Incremental Feed Signal (Input) MP1, MP2
<G019#4,#5>, 391 Machine Lock Signal (Input) MLK <G044#1>, 421
In-position Signals INPn <F104#0, #1>, 368 Manual Absolute Signal (Input) *ABSM <G006#2>,
383
Input Signal Specifications, 79
Manual Feedrate Override (Input) *JV0 to
Input/Output Signal Specifications, 79 *JV15<G010,G011> , 381
Inputting Parameters, 651 Manual Handle Feed, 389
Installation, 6, 20 Manual Handle Feed Axis Select Signal (Input)
HS1A, HS1B, HS2A, HS2B <G018 #0, #1, #4, #5>,
Installation of the Control Unit, 32 390
Installing the Heat Exchanger, 13 Manual pulse generator, 601
Interface, 266 Manual pulse generator interface, 265
Manual Rapid Traverse Select Signal (Input)
Interface Between Multiple Power Mate (without Si- RT<G019#7>, 382
multaneous Block Start), 212
Mechanical Handle Feed, 474
Interface Between Multiple Power Mates (with Simul-
taneous Block Start), 211 Memory Protection Key (Input) Key1 to Key4
<G046#3-#6>, 411
Interface Cable, 642
Mirror Image Signal (Input) MIn <G106#0, #1>, 426
Interface with PMC, 503
Miscellaneous Function, 430
Interlock, 386 Mode Select, 373
Interlock Signal (Input) *It<G008#0>, Mode Select Signal (Input) MD1, MD2, MD4
*RILK<X000#6, X1000#6, X001#6, X1001#6>, <G043#0 to #2>, 374
387
Momentary Power Failure, 58
Interlock Signal for each Axis and Direction (Input)
+MITn, –mITn, <G132#0, #1, G134#0, #1>, 388 Mounting and Dismounting Modules, 67

Interrupt Signal for Custom Macros (Input) UINT Moving Direction Signals MVDn <F106#0, #1>, 367
<G053#3>, 497

[N]
[J] Necessary Items, 574
Noise Suppressor, 28
Jog Feed, 379
Number of Points for I/O Unit–MODEL A, 78

i–3
 Index B–62833EN/01

Parameters of Servo, 681

Parameters of Setting, 657
[O] Parameters of Skip Function, Picture Display, and ITP
Synchronous, 739
Operation by Tape Reader DNCI (Input) <G043#5>, Parameters of Software Operator’s Panel, 748
377
Parameters of Spindle Control, 708
Operation Mode Confirmation Signals (Output)
<F003, F004>, 378 Parameters of Standard Ladder, 761
Optional Block Skip Signal (Input) BDT1, Parameters of Stroke Limit, 669
BDT2-bDT9 <G044#0,G045>, 424 Parameters of Tool Compensation, 722
Outer Dimensions, 67 Path Display Confirmation Signal (Output) PATHO
Outline, 135, 146, 157, 171, 277, 292, 310, 314 <F254#7>, 582
Output Signal Specifications (Source Type), 81 Path Selection Signal (Input) PATHS <G215#0>, 581
Output Signals, 550 PMC Key Data Reference Function (Output), 448
Outputting Parameters, 653 Position coder, 600
Override Cancel Signal (Input) OVC <G006#4>, 423 Position coder interface, 276
Overview, 265, 540, 545, 577 Position Display Unit, 576

Overview of Constant Surface Speed Control, 463 Position Switch Signal PSW01 to PSW10
<F070#0–F071#1>, 553
Power Capacity, 8
Power Connections, 54
[P] Power Mate–D Data that Can be Read from the Touch
Parameter of Reader/Punch Interface, 659 Panel, 311
Parameters, 466, 549 Power Mate–D for 1–path Control, 320
Parameters of Acceleration/Deceleration Control, 674 Power Mate–D for 2–path Control, 328
Parameters of Analog Input, 762 Power Mate–D Setting, 304
Parameters of Axis Control by PMC, 759 Power Mate–F, 335
Parameters of Axis Control/ Increment System, 662 Power Supply Capacity, 52
Parameters of Butt–type Reference Position Setting Power Supply Interface, 215
Function, 746 Power Turn–off Sequence, 58
Parameters of Canned Cycles, 723 Power Turn–on Sequence, 56
Parameters of Coordinates, 667 Power–on Sequence, 311
Parameters of CRT/MDI, Display, and Edit, 695
Parameters of Custom Macros, 734
Parameters of DI/DO, 691 [R]
Parameters of Displaying Operation Time and Num- Rapid Traverse Override Signal (Input) ROV1, ROV2
ber of Parts, 740 <G014#0, #1>, 382
Parameters of External Pulse Input, 757 Ready Signals, 359
Parameters of Feedrate, 670 Reference Position Establishment Signal (Output)
ZRFn <F120#0, #1>, 398
Parameters of Manual Handle Feed/Manual Handle
Interruption, 745 Reference Position External Setting Signal Zpextn
(Input) <G206#6, G207#6, G208#6, G209#,
Parameters of Pattern Data Input, 738 G210#6, G211#6>, 402
Parameters of Pitch Error Compensation, 704 Reference Position Return, 392
Parameters of Polar Coordinate Interpolation, 733 Reset & Emergency Stop, 361
Parameters of Position Switch Functions, 743 Reset & Rewind Signal (Input) RRW <G008#6>, 364
Parameters of Programs, 702 Reset Signal (Output) RST <F001#1>, 366
Parameters of Rigid Tapping, 725 Restrictions, 574

i–4
B–62833EN/01 Index

Return Signal (Input) RTN11, RTN21, RTN31 Single Block Signal (Input) SBK <G046#1>, 422
<G212#0 to #2> RTN12, RTN22, RTN32 <G213#0
to #2>, 385 Skip Signals (Input) SKIP, SKP2, SKP3, SKIP4
<X000#7, #0, #1, #2> <X1000#7, #0, #1, #2>
Rewinding Signal (Output) RWD <F000#0>, 367 SKIPP <G212#7>, 472
Rigid Tapping, 498, 499 Software Limit External Setting (Input) +LMn
<G110>, –LMn <G112>, RLSOT <G007#7>, 471
Rigid Tapping Using a Chaser Tool Ctchk (G214 #5)
Ctopn (F209 #7), 523 Software Operator’s Panel, 492
RS–232–C Interface Specification, 254 Software Operator’s Panel General–purpose Switch
Signals (Output) OUT0 to OUT7 <F072>, 494
RS–232–C Serial Port, 262
Software Operator’s Panel Signals (Output) <F073 to
Run Time and Part Count Display Function (Output) F081>, 493
PRTSF <F062#7>, 583
Specification, 463
Specifications, 228, 558
Specifications of the output signals (Sink type), 84
[S]
Speed Arrival Signal (Input) SAR <G029#4>, 457
S Function Signal (Output), 451
Speed Control Servo Alarm Ignore Signal (Input)
Screen State Signals (Output) DPL0, DPL1, DPL2 Ignvry <G066#0>, 554
<F254 #0 to #2>, 429
Spindle Analog Voltage Control Signal Using Pmc
Separate CRT and Separate MDI Interfac, 218 (Input) SIND<G033#7>, SSIN<G033#6>,
SGN<G033#5>, R01I to R12I<G032,G033>, R01O
Separate LCD and Separate MDI Interface, 223 to R12O<F036, F037>, 468
Separate PDP and Separate MDI Interface, 220 Spindle Functions, 450
Separate Type Pulse Coder Interface, 285 Spindle interface, 271
Separating Signal Lines, 24 Spindle Orientation Signal (Input) SOR <G029#5>,
Serial Pulse Coder Interface (Type A), 282 459

Serial Spindle Control, 460 Spindle Override Signal (Input) SOV0 to SOV7
<G030>, 460
Servo Amplifier Interface, 280 Spindle Stop Signal (Input) *SSTP <G029#6>, 458
Servo Interface, 277 Standard Ladder Program, 191
Servo Interface Type A, 45, 47, 49 Status Signals, 365
Servo Interface Type B, 46, 48, 50 Structure of FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A, 66
Servo Off Signal (Input) SVFn <G126#0, #1>, 475 Supplement, 315, 574
Servo Position Deviation Monitor Signal (Output) Supported Touch Panels (Digital Corporation), 310
SVERn, <F208#3, F208#7>, 475
Switching of Display Information, 579
Servo Ready Signal (Output) SA <F000#6>, 360
Symbolic Key Type (A02B–0211–C020#S), 571, 573
Setting Items, 574
System Configuration, 546
Sharing a Servo Amplifier, 290
Sharing of a Manual Pulse Generator by the Two–path
Power Mate–D, 270
Signal, 466
[T]
T Function Signal, 470
Signal Details, 515
Tap Return Function (Input) RTNT <G214#7> , (Out-
Signal for Butt–type Reference Position Setting (Out- put) RTPT <F209#5>, 521
put) CLRCHn <F180#0, #1>, 404
Tapping Signal (Output) TAP <F001#5>, 372
Signal List, 342
Temperature Rise within the Cabinet, 11
Signal specifications for manual pulse generator, 268
Temporary Interrupt Detection Signal ACT
Signals, 137, 148, 159, 173, 514 <G213#7>, 524
Signals for Path Control, 580 The Heat Pipe Type Heat Exchanger, 20
Signals In Cutting Mode (Output) Cut <F002#6>, 428 Thermal Design of the Cabinet, 11
Simultaneous Block Start M821 to M827, 441 Torque Control Function, 540

i–5
 Index B–62833EN/01

Torque Control Function Based on DI Signal Input,

542
Torque Control Function Based on Input From the
PMC, 543 [W]
Torque Control Function Based on Parameter Input, Waiting Function (Output) WAT1 to WAT4 <F209#0
541 to #3>, (Input) WFN1 to WFN4 <G214#0 to #3>,
438
Torque Limit Function, 539 When External Power Supply is Used, 264
Total Connection, 44 When One Detachable LCD/MDI Unit is Shared by
Multiple Power Mate–D Units, 234
Total Connection Diagram for 1–path Power Mate–D,
45 When the One–path Power Mate–D is Being Used,
186
Total Connection Diagram for 2–path Power Mate–D,
47 When the Power Mate–D is Being Used, 191
Total Connection Diagram for Power Mate–F, 49 When the Power Mate–F is Being Used, 190, 199
When the simultaneous block start function is not
used, 234
When the Simultaneous Block Start Function is Used,
[V] 239
When the Two–path Mate–D Unit is Being Used, 188
V–READY Waiting Signal (Output)
WVRDY;<F209#4>, 565 Workpiece Number Search Signal (Input) PN0 to PN7
<G009>, 419
Video and Power Supply Interface, 219, 221, 224

i–6
 Revision Record

FANUC Power Mate–MODEL D/F CONNECTION MANUAL (B–62833EN)

01 Oct., ’96

evision Date Contents Revision Date Contents

· No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.

· All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.